Igcse Physics 0625 Past Papers 1999-2012
February 11, 2017 | Author: Abdullah Zubair Khan | Category: N/A
Short Description
IGCSE Physics Past Papers 1999-2012 including mark schemes and question papers, Hope it helps you like it has helped me...
Description
MULTIPLE CHOICE PAPER ONE
1
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
0625/1
PHYSICS PAPER 1 Multiple Choice Wednesday
19 MAY 1999
Morning
45 minutes
Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables Multiple Choice answer sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME
45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided unless this has already been done for you. There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet. Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This question paper consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. SB (SC) QF91698/4 © UCLES 1999
[Turn over
1
A measuring cylinder contains some liquid. cm3 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
What does the reading of the measuring cylinder scale give?
2
A
the density of the liquid
B
the height of the liquid
C
the mass of the liquid
D
the volume of the liquid
A tennis ball falls from the upstairs window of a house.
Ignoring air resistance, what happens to the acceleration of the ball? A
It decreases.
B
It increases.
C
It is constant.
D
It is zero.
0625/1 S99
3
The graph shows how the speed of a car changes over 200 s. 20 speed m/s 0
0
50
100
150 200 time/s
For how many seconds is the car moving at constant speed? A
4
50 s
B
100 s
C
150 s
D
200 s
Two apples are placed on a balance. The balance stays level.
x
x
apple 1
apple 2
What does this show about the mass and the weight of the apples? mass of apples
weight of apples
A
different
different
B
different
the same
C
the same
different
D
the same
the same
0625/1 S99
[Turn over
5
The diagram shows a racing car.
32
PETROIL
V
I
S
T
VA LV O I L
Where should the centre of mass be, and why?
centre of mass
6
where
why
A
as high as possible
to give the car more acceleration
B
as high as possible
to give the car more stability
C
as low as possible
to give the car more acceleration
D
as low as possible
to give the car more stability
An object is pushed and then allowed to slide along a table. The diagram shows the direction of the friction force acting on the object.
object
object sliding this way table
friction force What is the effect of the friction force on the sliding object? A
It has no effect.
B
It increases the object’s weight.
C
It slows the object down.
D
It speeds the object up.
0625/1 S99
7
A student swings on a rope tied to a branch of a tree. At which position is the student’s energy of motion (kinetic energy) the greatest?
A
D C
B
8
The diagram shows four types of power station. Which type of power station uses chemical energy to generate electricity? A geothermal
B coal-fired
C nuclear
hot rocks heat water, steam turns turbine and generator
coal burned to heat water, steam turns turbine and generator
nuclear fuel heats water, steam turns turbine and generator
0625/1 S99
D hydroelectric
water from mountain reservoir turns turbine and generator
[Turn over
9
Four people each have to lift bricks to the same height with a rope and pulley. Some lift more bricks, and some lift the bricks faster. Which person develops the most power? A
B
h
10 bricks in 2 seconds
C
h
D
h
10 bricks in 4 seconds
20 bricks in 2 seconds
h
20 bricks in 4 seconds
10 The diagram shows a drawing pin (thumb tack) and a wooden board. force drawing pin wooden board
The drawing pin is easily pushed into the wooden board. Why is this? A
The flat head raises the centre of mass.
B
The force produces a large moment about the point.
C
The large area of the flat head increases the force.
D
The small area of the point increases the pressure.
0625/1 S99
11 A liquid evaporates quickly. How does its temperature change, and which of its molecules leave the surface? temperature change
molecules leaving surface
A
rises
fastest-moving
B
rises
slowest-moving
C
falls
fastest-moving
D
falls
slowest-moving
12 A pupil looks through a microscope into a small, glass container in which tiny smoke particles have been mixed with air. The container is very brightly lit and the pupil sees bright specks moving randomly. What are these specks? A
air molecules being hit by air molecules
B
air molecules being hit by smoke particles
C
smoke particles being hit by air molecules
D
smoke particles being hit by smoke particles
13 A substance that melts at 60 °C is heated in a test-tube to a temperature of 95 °C. The substance is then allowed to cool. Which graph best shows how the temperature changes with time as the substance cools?
0
temperature / °C
temperature / °C
temperature / °C
100
C
100
0
time
0
D temperature / °C
B
A
100
0
time
0625/1 S99
0
100
0
time
0
0
time
[Turn over
14 The diagram shows an experiment to investigate the effect of a rise in temperature on an iron bar. iron bar
pointer roller with pointer attached
fixed support heat
What would be seen after heating?
A
B
C
D
15 A flask with a narrow tube contains some coloured liquid. The diagram shows the height of the liquid column at 0°C, 100 °C and X °C.
80 70 60 50 millimetres 40 30 20 10 0
0 °C
100 °C
The liquid expands uniformly with temperature. What is temperature X? A
40 °C
B
50 °C
C
60 °C 0625/1 S99
D
80 °C
X °C
16 Four wires of equal length, made of different materials, are placed on heat-sensitive paper. The four ends of the wire are put together, as shown, and are heated for three minutes.
heat-sensitive paper
heated here Heat-sensitive paper changes colour when it gets hot. The diagram below shows the marks on the heat-sensitive paper due to the conduction of heat energy along the wires. Which mark was made by the best conductor of heat? B C A D
17 A hot-air balloon rises when the air inside it is heated. Why does this happen? A
The air contracts and becomes less dense.
B
The air contracts and becomes more dense.
C
The air expands and becomes less dense.
D
The air expands and becomes more dense.
0625/1 S99
[Turn over
18 Different surfaces reflect different proportions of the Sun’s radiant energy. The chart shows the percentage of heat energy that is reflected by some surfaces. 100 % of heat energy reflected
80 60 40 20 0 whitewashed
red brick
soil
tar
What is the best way to treat a flat roof so as to increase the amount of heat absorbed by the roof? A
cover it with a layer of red brick dust
B
cover it with a layer of soil
C
paint it with tar
D
paint it with whitewash
19 A barrier lies at the mouth of a harbour. It is closer to one side of the mouth of the harbour than the other. Sea waves come towards the harbour and pass through the two gaps. Which diagram shows the pattern that the waves make when they pass through the gaps? waves moving this way A sea
B
barrier harbour
C
D
0625/1 S99
20 Which diagram shows the path of a ray of light through a glass prism and into the air beyond?
A
B
45°
light ray
light ray
45°
C light ray
45°
D light ray
45°
21 Which diagram shows how a converging lens in a camera forms an image on the film?
A object
image
object
image
object
image
object
image
B
C
D
22 What is heard when the frequency of a sound wave is increased at constant amplitude? A
higher pitch
B
lower pitch
C
louder sound
D
quieter sound
0625/1 S99
[Turn over
23 A bat is flying near a house. It makes a high-pitched sound. It hears the echo 0.5 s later. The speed of sound in air is 300 m/s. How far away is the house from the bat? A
600 m
B
300 m
C
150 m
D
75 m
24 A student holds two pins on to a magnet as shown.
N
The student removes his thumb. Which diagram shows the positions of the pins and the poles induced on them? A
S N
N
B
S
N
N
S
N
N
C
D
N
N
S
S
N
S N
S S
N
N
25 Different metals are separated by passing them under an electromagnet, which attracts and lifts out some of the metals. electromagnet
different metals
moving belt
Which line in the table shows what happens to the metals? attracted
not attracted
A
copper
aluminium
B
copper
steel
C
iron
aluminium
D
iron
steel
0625/1 S99
26 Which diagram shows the directions of the forces between two charged particles? A
+
+
B
+
–
C
+
–
D
–
–
27 A battery is labelled ‘9 VOLTS’.
BATTERY 9 VOLTS
Which information does the label give about the battery? A
the power it can supply
B
the current it can supply
C
its electromotive force (e.m.f.)
D
its resistance
28 The diagram shows how a student has connected some electrical components. The lamp does not light because the circuit has not been completed. crocodile clip
connecting wire
switch
lamp
battery P Q
S
R
crocodile clip Where must the crocodile clips be connected, so that the lamp lights only when the switch is closed? A
at P and R
B
at P and S
C
at Q and R
0625/1 S99
D
at Q and S [Turn over
29 The diagram shows a circuit in which all the lamps are lit.
X
The lamp marked X blows and breaks the circuit. How many lamps remain lit? A
0
B
1
C
2
D
3
30 In which diagram is the fuse correctly connected?
A
B
live to mains supply
live
earth
to mains supply
neutral
earth neutral
heater
heater
metal case
metal case
C
D
live to mains supply
live
earth
to mains supply
neutral
heater
earth neutral
heater
metal case
metal case
0625/1 S99
31 The diagram shows an electrical hazard.
soft plastic insulation bare copper wire
hard plastic lamp holder
glass bulb
Which part gives an electric shock if touched? A
soft plastic insulation
B
bare copper wire
C
hard plastic lamp holder
D
glass bulb
32 Which diagram shows the correct wiring of a transformer? A
B
C
D
33 Which object makes use of the force on a current-carrying conductor in a magnetic field? A
electric fan
B
electric kettle
C
lamp
D
transformer
0625/1 S99
[Turn over
34 Which diagram shows an electric bell correctly connected? A
B
C
D
35 A straight wire connected to a milliammeter is placed between the poles of a magnet. 1 3
2
straight wire
milliammeter
Which change causes a current in the milliameter? A
moving the wire in direction 1
B
moving the wire in direction 2
C
moving the magnet in direction 2
D
moving the magnet in direction 3
0625/1 S99
36 Particles given off by a hot cathode in a vacuum are attracted to a plate P. There is a high potential difference between the cathode and plate as shown. vacuum hot cathode
P
–
+
What are these particles? A
α-particles
B
electrons
C
neutrons
D
protons
37 Which of the following is a correct statement about β-particles? A
They are fast-moving electrons.
B
They are more ionising than α-particles.
C
They are stopped by a thin sheet of paper.
D
They can pass through a thick sheet of lead.
0625/1 S99
[Turn over
38 The graph shows how the activity of a radioactive source varies with time. count rate 400 count/minute 300 200 100 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 time minute
What is the half-life of the source? A
50 minutes
B
100 minutes
C
200 minutes
D
400 minutes
39 Hydrogen may be written as 11H. Which line is correct for a neutral hydrogen atom? number of electrons
number of protons
number of neutrons
A
0
1
1
B
1
0
1
C
1
1
0
D
1
1
1
0625/1 S99
40 The diagram represents the radioactive decay of a nucleus.
238 92
4 2
He
A Z
Th
U
What are the values of A and Z ?
A
Z
A
238
93
B
238
92
C
236
88
D
234
90
Go to answers
0625/1 S99
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
0625/1
PHYSICS PAPER 1 Multiple Choice Tuesday
9 NOVEMBER 1999
Morning
45 minutes
Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables Multiple Choice answer sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME
45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided unless this has already been done for you. There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet. Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This question paper consists of 16 printed pages. (NH) QK93704/4 © UCLES 1999
[Turn over
2 1
The digital stopwatches show the finishing times of two runners in a race. runner 1
min
runner 2
s
min
:
s
:
What is the time difference between the two runners? A
2
1.14 s
B
7.28 s
C
8.42 s
D
15.70 s
The graph shows how the speed of an object changes with time.
speed m/s
0 0
2
4 time s
For how long does the object move? A
3
2s
B
4s
C
6s
D
8s
Which statement is true about the weight of an object? A
Its weight is the same everywhere.
B
Its weight is measured in kilograms.
C
Its weight is the force of gravity on it.
D
Its weight is zero on the Moon.
0625/1 W99
6
8
3 4
The diagram shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. The mass of the liquid is 16 g. cm3 30 20 10
What is the density of the liquid? 320 g/cm3
A
5
B
36 g/cm3
C
1.25 g/cm3
D
0.8 g/cm3
A heavy box is lifted by a force F, using a lever as shown.
x F
What happens when the length x is made shorter? distance F moves
size of F
A
bigger
bigger
B
bigger
smaller
C
smaller
bigger
D
smaller
smaller
0625/1 W99
[Turn over
4 6
In which situation is there no resultant force on the car? 40 m/s A
decreasing speed on a level road
30 B
m/s
going at a constant speed uphill
30 C
30 m/s
m/s 40
increasing speed downhill
30 m/s D
7
m/s
40 m/s
increasing speed on a level road
A steel ball is allowed to roll along a frictionless track. What is the highest point the ball reaches before rolling backwards? Ignore the effects of friction. B steel ball C
D
8
What is the source of geothermal energy? A
coal
B
hot rocks
C
tides
D
waves
0625/1 W99
A
5 9
Which object converts sound energy into electrical energy? A
electric bell
B
loudspeaker
C
microphone
D
radio
10 A manometer is connected to a gas tap. Diagram X shows the liquid levels before opening the gas tap. The gas pressure is greater than atmospheric pressure. Which diagram shows what happens to the liquid levels after opening the gas tap? X
gas tap
A
B
C
D
from gas supply
liquid before opening gas tap
11 The diagram shows water in an outdoor swimming pool.
Sun
water
swimming pool The water level drops during a hot, sunny day. What does this show? A
that water boils at only one temperature
B
that water can evaporate below its boiling point
C
that water can expand as it becomes warmer
D
that water is a poor conductor of heat
0625/1 W99
[Turn over
6 12 A closed container full of gas is left to stand on a bench for a long time. Which statement about the molecules of the gas is correct? A
All the molecules are at the bottom of the container.
B
The fastest moving molecules are at the top of the container.
C
The molecules are moving at random throughout the container.
D
The pressure caused by the molecules on the container is greatest at the top of the container.
13 Metal railway lines can be laid in sections with small gaps in between, as shown. The sections are connected by metal plates. gap railway line
metal plate
What is the reason for leaving the gaps? A
to allow for contraction when the temperature falls
B
to allow for expansion when the temperature rises
C
to prevent an electric current in the railway line
D
to stop large vibrations
14 Four cooking pots are each made of iron. Which cooking pot has the greatest heat capacity?
A
B
C
D
mass = 2.0 kg
mass = 1.8 kg
mass = 1.6 kg
mass = 1.4 kg
0625/1 W99
7 15 Two balloons are inflated at the same room temperature until they have the same volume of air inside. They are then sealed. Balloon X is placed in a refrigerator for some time, while balloon Y stays at room temperature. The diagram shows the balloons after this time.
balloon X
balloon Y
Assuming no air has leaked out of the balloons, which statement is correct? A
The air in balloon X has contracted.
B
The air in balloon Y has expanded.
C
The rubber of balloon Y has expanded.
D
The rubber of balloon X has frozen and has compressed the air.
16 On a day when the temperature is low, the metal handlebars of a bicycle feel colder than the plastic handlegrips. What is the explanation for this? A
Metals are colder than plastics.
B
Metals conduct heat better than plastics.
C
Plastics are softer than metals.
D
Plastics conduct heat better than metals.
17 A man puts a saucer on top of a cup of tea to keep the tea hot. saucer
cup
Why does this help to keep the tea hot? A
Conduction through the cup is reduced.
B
Convection in the air above the surface of the tea is reduced.
C
Convection in the tea is reduced.
D
Radiation from the shiny surface of the cup is reduced. 0625/1 W99
[Turn over
8 18 The following diagram represents a wave.
1 cm 1 cm
What is the wavelength of the wave? A
8 cm
B
4 cm
C
2 cm
D
1 cm
19 The diagram shows a wavefront striking a plane reflecting surface PQ. P
Q
wavefront
Which of the following is changed by reflection? A
direction
B
frequency
C
speed
D
wavelength
20 A child is 1 m tall. She stands 2 m in front of a plane mirror. mirror 2m
1m
How far away from the child is her image? A
1m
B
2m
C
3m
D 0625/1 W99
4m
9 21 Which diagram shows a possible path for a ray of light passing through water in a beaker with a mirror at the bottom? A
B
C
D
water mirror
22 An electric bell is suspended in a bell-jar as shown. Switch S is closed and air is then pumped from the jar. The sound of the bell becomes quieter. S
electric bell
bell-jar
to vacuum pump
Why does the sound become quieter? A
Air is needed for an electric current in the bell.
B
Air is needed for the bell’s electromagnet to operate.
C
Air is needed for the bell to vibrate.
D
Air is needed to transmit sound waves.
0625/1 W99
[Turn over
10 23 A student shouts when standing by a cliff. A short time later the student hears an echo.
cliff
student
Which property of sound causes the echo? A
diffraction
B
dispersion
C
reflection
D
refraction
24 The diagram shows the circuit for an electromagnet. The core of the electromagnet can be made from different materials. material under test
S
iron nails attracted to material
When switch S is closed, which material attracts the largest number of iron nails? A
aluminium
B
copper
C
glass
D
iron
0625/1 W99
11 25 A plotting compass is placed at each end of a magnet. Which diagram shows the positions of the pointers of the plotting compasses?
A
B
C
D
26 Two very light, charged balls P and Q are hung, one above the other, from nylon threads. When a negatively charged plastic sheet is placed alongside them, P is repelled and Q is attracted. –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– –– ––
negatively charged plastic sheet
P
Q
What are the original charges on P and on Q? charge on P
charge on Q
A
negative
negative
B
negative
positive
C
positive
negative
D
positive
positive
0625/1 W99
[Turn over
12 27 The meter in the circuit measures the potential difference across the resistor.
meter Which unit is marked on the scale of the meter? A
amp
B
ohm
C
volt
D
watt
28 Two resistors are connected in a circuit as shown.
2X
3X
What is the total resistance of the resistors? A
less than 2 Ω
B
between 2 Ω and 3 Ω
C
between 3 Ω and 5 Ω
D
more than 5 Ω
0625/1 W99
13 29 The diagram shows a circuit with three lamps and a cell. + –
What is the circuit diagram for the above arrangement? A
B
C
D
30 Which device can be used to switch off the current in a circuit when the current becomes too large? A
capacitor
B
circuit-breaker
C
light-dependent resistor
D
transformer
31 A hair dryer should (i)
allow the fan to work with or without the heater,
(ii) not allow the heater to work without the fan. Which circuit should be used? A
B
fan M
heater C
fan M
heater D
fan
M
fan
M
heater
heater 0625/1 W99
[Turn over
14 32 A straight wire carries an electric current at right angles to the page. The black dot in each diagram shows where the wire passes through the page. Which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern around the wire? A
B
C
D
33 When electrical energy is transmitted over large distances, a high voltage is used. Why is this better than using a low voltage? A
There is a greater current in the cables.
B
There is less chance of an electric shock.
C
There is less heating in the cables.
D
Thicker cables can be used.
34 Which graph shows the output voltage V of an a.c. generator? B
A V
V 0
0 0
time
time
0
C
D
V
V 0
0 0
time
time
0
35 What is the symbol for a capacitor? A
B
C
0625/1 W99
D
15 36 A waveform is displayed on the screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.).
1 cm The time base now changes from 1 ms/cm to 2 ms/cm. Which diagram shows the new appearance of the waveform on the screen? A
B
C
D
37 The half-life of a radioactive substance is 10 days. Which of the following statements is correct? A
After 5 days, half of the original radioactive nuclei remain.
B
After 5 days, a quarter of the original radioactive nuclei remain.
C
After 10 days, half of the original radioactive nuclei remain.
D
After 20 days, none of the original radioactive nuclei remain.
0625/1 W99
[Turn over
16 38 What can most -particles pass through? A
2 mm of aluminium
B
2 mm of lead
C
2 cm of air
D
2 cm of concrete
39 The diagram represents an atom.
Which of the following describes the atom? nucleus
electron
charge on electron
A
in middle of atom
orbits round nucleus
+
B
in middle of atom
orbits round nucleus
–
C
orbits round electron
in middle of atom
–
D
orbits round electron
in middle of atom
0
40 Which statement about the numbers of particles in a neutral atom must be correct? A
number of protons = number of electrons
B
number of protons = number of neutrons
C
number of protons + number of electrons = number of neutrons
D
number of protons + number of neutrons = number of electrons
Go to answers 0625/1 W99
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS
0625/1
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice MAY/JUNE SESSION 2000
45 minutes
Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables Multiple Choice answer sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME
45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided unless this has already been done for you. There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet. Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This question paper consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. SB (SLC/DJ) QF05707/3 © UCLES 2000
[Turn over
2 1
A stopwatch is used to time a student running a 1500 m race.
What is the reading on the stopwatch?
2
A
658.31 seconds
B
6 minutes 58.31 seconds
C
6.58 minutes 31 seconds
D
6 hours 58 minutes 31 seconds
A student lets 100 drops of water fall into a measuring cylinder which already contains some water. cm3
cm3
50
50
40
40
30
30 new level of water
original level 20 of water 10
20 10
What is the volume of one drop? 0.05 cm3
A
0.25 cm3
C
5.0 cm3
D
25 cm3
Which speed-time graph represents the motion of a car moving at constant speed?
0 0
time
0 0
time
0 0
0625/1 S00
D
speed
C
speed
B
speed
A
speed
3
B
time
0 0
time
3 4
A student investigates the speed of a trolley and finds that it is 50 cm/s, and one second later that it is 150 cm/s. What is the acceleration of the trolley? A
5
6
50 cm/s2
B
100 cm/s2
150 cm/s2
D
200 cm/s2
Which property of an object is measured in newtons? A
density
B
mass
C
volume
D
weight
Which instrument can be used to give a direct measurement of the mass of a rock on the Moon? A bathroom scales
7
C
B beam balance
C force meter
D top-pan balance
The diagrams show an empty beaker on a balance and some liquid in a measuring cylinder. cm3 100 80 60
liquid
40 20
When all the liquid is poured into the beaker, the balance reading changes to 140 g. What is the density of the liquid? A
(140 ÷ 60) g/cm3
B
(60 ÷ 40) g/cm3 0625/1 S00
C
(40 ÷ 60) g/cm3
D
(60 ÷ 140) g/cm3 [Turn over
4 8
The diagrams show a brick resting on a smooth surface. Two equal forces, F, act on the brick. Which brick does not move?
F A
B
F
C
F
F
F
F
9
D
F
F
The diagram shows four ways of lifting a heavy box by using a lever. Which way requires the smallest effort to lift the box? effort
effort
B
A box
box
effort effort
C
D box
box
10 The diagrams show a diver climbing some steps and jumping off a diving board. Where does the diver have the most gravitational potential energy (energy of position)? A
B
C
0625/1 S00
D
5 11 The diagrams show four schemes which use a barrier to convert tidal energy into electrical energy. Which scheme has the greatest output of electrical energy?
turbine
A
low water level
barrier high water level
turbine
B
barrier high water level
low water level
C
low water level
D
high water level
high water level
low water level
12 The diagram shows a mercury barometer.
X
mercury
What is at X? A
air at atmospheric pressure
B
air at high pressure
C
a vacuum
D
water vapour 0625/1 S00
[Turn over
6 13 Which diagram shows the best shape for a dam wall? A
B dam wall
dam wall
water
C dam wall
D dam wall
water
water
water
14 A fixed mass of gas is kept in a sealed cylinder, so that its volume does not change.
GAS
How does a change in the temperature affect the pressure of the gas? temperature change
pressure change
A
decreases
increases
B
decreases
unchanged
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
increases
0625/1 S00
7 15 The diagram shows some molecules in a liquid. Molecules A and D are fast-moving, molecules B and C are slow-moving. Which of these molecules is the most likely to escape from the liquid by evaporation? A (fast)
B (slow)
liquid
D (fast)
C (slow)
16 A mercury thermometer without a scale is placed in pure melting ice.
mercury
pure melting ice
water What does the level of mercury in the thermometer show? A
the boiling point of water
B
the lower fixed point
C
the melting point of mercury
D
the upper fixed point
0625/1 S00
[Turn over
8 17 Some ice is heated at a constant rate in a beaker. The ice melts and later the water boils for a short while. Which graph shows how the temperature changes with time?
0
time
0
D
time
temperature/ °C
time
C temperature/ °C
0
B temperature/ °C
temperature/ °C
A
0
18 A person lifts a hot pan from a stove. Although the pan is hot, the handle is cool. What is the handle made of? A
aluminium
B
copper
C
iron
D
wood
19 Warm water enters a tank of cold water from the side.
cold water
warm water
What happens to the warm water and why? warm water
why?
A
rises
It is less dense than cold water.
B
rises
It is more dense than cold water.
C
sinks
It is less dense than cold water.
D
sinks
It is more dense than cold water.
0625/1 S00
time
9 20 Plane waves produced in a ripple tank arrive at a barrier that has a small gap.
waves moving in this direction
What causes the wave pattern that is produced beyond the barrier? A
diffraction
B
dispersion
C
reflection
D
refraction
21 A floating cork moves up and down as a water wave passes it. direction of water wave
movement of cork A candle flame moves backwards and forwards as a sound wave passes it. direction of sound wave
movement of flame
What does this show about water waves and sound waves? water waves
sound waves
A
longitudinal
longitudinal
B
longitudinal
transverse
C
transverse
longitudinal
D
transverse
transverse 0625/1 S00
[Turn over
10 22 Which diagram shows how a real image is formed by the lens? lens image
A
lens image
B
lens image
C
lens image
D
23 A ray of light is reflected from two mirrors as shown.
60°
80°
30° 30° 40° 50° X
What is the angle of reflection at point X? A
40°
B
50°
C
60°
0625/1 S00
D
80°
11 24 Two windows are double-glazed. Window X is made of two pieces of glass with a vacuum between them. Window Y is made of two pieces of plastic with air between them.
glass
plastic
vacuum
air
window X
window Y
Which window is better at stopping sound passing through and why? window
why?
A
X
Sound cannot travel through a vacuum.
B
X
Sound cannot travel through glass.
C
Y
Sound cannot travel through air.
D
Y
Sound cannot travel through plastic.
25 The diagram shows a student standing 165 m in front of a wall. He claps his hands once.
wall
165 m How long after the handclap does he hear the echo? [The speed of sound in air is 330 m/s.] A
0.25 s
B
0.50 s
C
1.0 s
0625/1 S00
D
2.0 s
[Turn over
12 26 A magnet is placed in a coil connected to an electrical supply. magnet
coil
electrical supply What is the best way to demagnetise the magnet? A
Use a d.c. supply and leave the magnet inside the coil.
B
Use a d.c. supply and slowly remove the magnet from the coil.
C
Use an a.c. supply and leave the magnet inside the coil.
D
Use an a.c. supply and slowly remove the magnet from the coil.
27 A magnet is brought near metal bars X and Y. S
N
S
N
no effect
repulsion
What are X and Y made of? X
Y
A
aluminium
magnetised steel
B
aluminium
unmagnetised iron
C
unmagnetised iron
magnetised steel
D
unmagnetised iron
unmagnetised iron
0625/1 S00
X
Y
13 28 Which diagram shows how a voltmeter and an ammeter are connected to find the value of the resistance of resistor R?
A
A
R
V
A
B
R
V
A R C V
A V D
R
0625/1 S00
[Turn over
14 29 Two uncharged metal-coated polystyrene spheres, P and Q, are suspended side by side.
P
Q
Both spheres are then given positive charges. Which diagram shows the new positions of the spheres? A
P
B
Q
P
C
Q
P
D
Q
P
Q
30 Component Y is placed in the circuit shown and is used to reduce the brightness of the lamp gradually.
Y What is component Y? A
a fuse
B
a relay
C
a switch
D
a variable resistor
0625/1 S00
15 31 In the circuit, which ammeter shows the greatest reading? A A B A C A D A
32 A lamp is connected across the mains supply. Which diagram shows where the fuse should be connected? A
B
live
fuse
live fuse
neutral
neutral C
D
live
live fuse
neutral
neutral fuse
33 An electric kettle takes 12 A of current from the mains supply. When the kettle’s cable needs to be replaced, a 5 A cable is used that was originally attached to a small lamp. The original plug and fuse from the kettle’s cable are used. Why does this cause a problem? A
The cable becomes hot and melts the insulation.
B
The fuse blows as soon as the kettle is switched on.
C
The kettle becomes too hot.
D
The water takes too long to reach its boiling point.
0625/1 S00
[Turn over
16 34 Which device makes use of the magnetic effect of an electric current? A
electric bell
B
electric fire
C
fuse
D
lamp
35 The diagram shows a transformer, with 100 V applied to the primary coil.
100 V
primary coil (40 turns)
secondary coil (80 turns)
What is the voltage across the secondary coil? A
50 V
B
100 V
C
200 V
D
800 V
36 The diagram shows part of a cathode-ray oscilloscope. particles from cathode
cathode
Which particles are emitted by the cathode? A
alpha (α-) particles
B
electrons
C
neutrons
D
protons
0625/1 S00
17 37 In the circuit shown, the brightness of the light reaching the light-dependent resistor increases. light light-dependant resistor
A ammeter
What happens to the current through the ammeter? A
It becomes zero.
B
It decreases.
C
It does not change.
D
It increases.
38 Which statement about an alpha (α-) particle is correct? A
It can pass through thick paper.
B
It has no charge.
C
It is a helium nucleus.
D
It is a type of electromagnetic radiation.
0625/1 S00
[Turn over
18 39 The graph shows the activity of a radioactive source plotted against time. 80 70 60 50 activity 40 counts/min 30 20 10 0 0
1
2
3
4
5
time/hours After what time is the activity one quarter of its original value? A
1 hour
B
2 hours
C
3 hours
D
4 hours
Co. 40 A nuclide of cobalt is shown by the symbol 60 27 How many protons and neutrons are there in the nucleus of this nuclide? protons
neutrons
A
27
33
B
27
60
C
60
27
D
60
87
Go to answers
0625/1 S00
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
0625/1
PHYSICS PAPER 1 Multiple Choice Tuesday
7 NOVEMBER 2000
Morning
45 minutes
Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables Multiple Choice answer sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME
45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided unless this has already been done for you. There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet. Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This question paper consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. SB (KN/TC) QK07573/3 © UCLES 2000
[Turn over
2 1
The diagram shows a measuring cylinder.
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
Which unit would be most suitable for its scale? A
2
mm2
B
mm3
C
cm2
D
cm3
The diagrams show the times on a stopclock at the start and at the finish of an experiment. stopclock at start
stopclock at finish
60
60
S
S
45
15
45
30
30
How long did the experiment take? A
10 s
B
25 s
15
C
35 s
0625/1 W00
D
45 s
3 3
A ball is thrown up into the air. The diagram shows the ball’s path. Y
X
Z
Ignoring air resistance, which statement about the acceleration of the ball is correct? It is least at point X.
B
It is zero at point Y.
C
It is greatest at point Z.
D
It is the same at points X, Y and Z.
Which graph shows the speed of a stone, dropped from the top of a building, until it hits the ground? (Assume there is no air resistance.)
0
0
time
0
0
time
0
0625/1 W00
D
speed
C
speed
B
speed
A
speed
4
A
0
time
0
0
time
[Turn over
4 5
The diagram shows a book resting on a slope. In which direction does the weight of the book act? A
B D C
6
An astronaut has a mass of 60 kg on the Moon. What is the mass of this astronaut on Earth? A
7
6 kg
B
60 kg
C
60 N
D
600 N
D
R and S
The table shows information about four objects. object
mass/g
volume/cm3
P
30
6
Q
40
5
R
50
10
S
50
4
Which two objects have the same density? A
P and Q
B
P and R
C
Q and S
0625/1 W00
5 8
A student tries to balance a 10 kg bag of rice on a pivoted beam, using a 5 kg bag of rice.
5 kg 10 kg pivot
What should be done to balance the bags?
9
A
add some rice to the 10 kg bag
B
empty some rice out of the 5 kg bag
C
move the pivot away from the 10 kg bag
D
move the pivot towards the 10 kg bag
A hot-air balloon moves in the direction shown at constant speed and at constant height. W, X, Y and Z are the forces acting on the balloon.
direction of movement
Y
X
Z
W
Which statement about the forces is correct? A
Z is equal to X and W is equal to Y.
B
Z is equal to X and W is less than Y.
C
Z is less than X and W is equal to Y.
D
Z is less than X and W is less than Y.
0625/1 W00
[Turn over
6 10 The diagram shows the main parts of a hydroelectric power station. water
dam wall
generator turbine
Which energy change occurs in the generator? A
chemical to electrical
B
electrical to chemical
C
electrical to kinetic
D
kinetic to electrical
11 Forces are used to move objects P, Q, R and S through the distances shown.
5N
P
10 N
Q
5N
R
10 N
S
Which statement correctly describes the work done by each force? A
Most work is done in moving R.
B
Most work is done in moving S.
C
The same amount of work is done in moving P and Q.
D
The same amount of work is done in moving P and R.
0625/1 W00
7 12 The diagram shows a mercury barometer.
25 cm
mercury
75 cm
5 cm
Which distance can be used to find atmospheric pressure? A
25 cm
B
75 cm
C
80 cm
D
100 cm
13 A child has a set of identical building blocks. Which arrangement produces the least pressure on the floor?
A C B D
14 Liquid evaporates from an open dish. Which molecules of liquid are most likely to escape? A
all molecules with a little energy
B
all molecules with a lot of energy
C
surface molecules with a little energy
D
surface molecules with a lot of energy
0625/1 W00
[Turn over
8 15 A lorry driver checks the pressure of the air in the tyres when the temperature is 5 °C. After a long journey, the tyres are hot and the pressure of the air in the tyres has increased. Why has the pressure increased? A
Some air has leaked from the tyres during the journey.
B
The air in the tyres is less dense.
C
The average speed of the air molecules is greater.
D
The tyres have expanded and have a larger volume.
16 Long pipes that carry steam often have bends in them, as shown.
Why are these bends needed? A
to allow for expansion
B
to allow for pressure changes
C
to make the pipes stronger
D
to reduce the flow of steam
17 A solid substance is heated. The graph shows the change in temperature of the substance with time. At which stage does melting take place?
stage A
stage B
stage C
temperature
time
0625/1 W00
stage D
9 18 At the end of a long race, a runner is wrapped in a thin, plastic blanket that has a shiny, metallic surface. Which type of heat loss is the shiny surface intended to reduce? A
conduction
B
convection
C
evaporation
D
radiation
19 A woman stands by a fire to warm her hands and legs.
How does most of the heat reach her hands and legs? hands
legs
A
convection
convection
B
radiation
convection
C
convection
radiation
D
radiation
radiation
0625/1 W00
[Turn over
10 20 The diagram shows waves in a ripple tank passing from deep water to shallow water.
shallow water
deep water
wavefront
What happens to the speed and frequency of the waves? speed
frequency
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
unchanged
C
increases
increases
D
unchanged
increases
21 The diagram represents a wave.
displacement P
Q
distance S
R What is the amplitude and wavelength of the wave? amplitude
wavelength
A
P
Q
B
P
R
C
S
Q
D
S
R
0625/1 W00
11 22 A paper-clip is placed in front of a plane mirror.
paper-clip
plane mirror
Which diagram shows the image formed behind the mirror? A
B
C
D
23 A ray of white light passes into each glass block as shown. Which block produces dispersion of the light? A
B
C
0625/1 W00
D
[Turn over
12 24 The diagram shows apparatus used to find what happens to the sound from an electric bell as air is removed from the container.
electric bell container
to vacuum pump
What happens to the sound of the electric bell heard from outside the container? A
It becomes louder.
B
It becomes quieter.
C
It becomes quieter, then louder.
D
It remains the same.
0625/1 W00
13 25 Two students stand 600 m apart. student with starting-pistol
student with stopwatch
600 m not to scale They find that it takes 2 seconds for the sound from the starting pistol to travel from one student to the other. From these results, what is the speed of sound in air? A
150 m/s
B
300 m/s
C
600 m/s
D
1200 m/s
26 A piece of soft iron is placed in a coil. The switch is then closed. soft iron switch open
What is the condition of the soft iron when the switch is open and when the switch is closed? switch open
switch closed
A
magnetised
magnetised
B
magnetised
unmagnetised
C
unmagnetised
magnetised
D
unmagnetised unmagnetised
0625/1 W00
[Turn over
14 27 When a magnet is brought near some metals, it induces magnetic poles in the metals. Which diagram shows the poles induced when a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised piece of iron and to an unmagnetised piece of aluminium? iron A N
S
N
S
N
S
N
S
magnet
aluminium iron
B N
magnet
S (no poles) aluminium iron
C N
N
S
N
S
N
S
S
magnet
aluminium iron
D N
magnet
S (no poles) aluminium
28 Which circuit shows how a voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference across the cell? A
B
C
D
V V V V
0625/1 W00
15 29 Which diagram shows the directions of the electrostatic forces acting on two positively charged spheres? A
+
B
+
+
C
+
+ D
+
+
+
30 What is the correct symbol for a fuse?
A
B
C
D
31 In which circuit is lamp L1 lit, but lamp L2 unlit? A
L1
B
L2
L1
C
L2
0625/1 W00
L1
D
L2
L1
L2
[Turn over
16 32 The diagram shows the structure of a fuse. metal end cap
ceramic case
wire X
What is the purpose of wire X? A
to decrease the resistance of the circuit
B
to increase the current in the circuit
C
to keep the end caps on
D
to melt when the current becomes too large
33 A wiring diagram for car headlamps and parking lamps is shown.
36 W 36 W 5W 5W
Why are the lamps connected in parallel? A
so that, if one lamp goes out, the others will remain lit
B
so that the current in each lamp is the same
C
so that the lamps operate at normal brightness, even when the battery runs down
D
so that the voltage across each lamp is one quarter of the battery voltage
0625/1 W00
17 34 The diagram shows a step-up transformer.
input (few turns)
output (many turns)
What is stepped up by this type of transformer? A
current
B
energy
C
power
D
voltage
35 Which diagram shows how a coil of wire and a magnet can be used to produce an electric current through a meter? magnet
A
B
S
S
N
N
movement
coil
D
C coil glued on to magnet
S
S
N
N
meter
0625/1 W00
[Turn over
18 36 The diagram shows part of an alarm circuit.
capacitor
What does the capacitor do? A
It detects changes in light intensity.
B
It detects changes in temperature.
C
It produces a magnetic field.
D
It stores electrical energy.
37 The charges on the x-plates and y-plates of a cathode-ray oscilloscope cause the spot on the screen to move to the position shown. y-plate screen x-plate
x-plate spot y-plate
Which diagram shows how the plates are charged? A _
+
+
B
C
+
+
_
_
_
_
+
spot
spot
0625/1 W00
_
+ spot
spot _
+
D _
+
19 38 A piece of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a detector. What are the possible radiations that can pass through the paper? A
alpha (α–) radiation only.
B
alpha (α–) and gamma (γ–) radiation only.
C
beta (β–) and gamma (γ–) radiation only.
D
alpha (α–), beta (β–) and gamma (γ–) radiation.
39 The graph shows how the activity of a radioactive substance changes with time. 800 700 600 500
activity counts/min
400 300 200 100 0 0
1
2
3
4
5
time/min What is the half-life of the substance? A
1 min
B
2 min
C
3 min
D
4 min
40 The diagram represents a helium atom. key
e
e = electron p = proton
p p n n
n = neutron = nucleus
e What is the nucleon number (mass number) of the atom? A
2
B
4
C
6
D
8 0625/1 W00
Go to answers
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS PAPER 1 Multiple Choice MAY/JUNE SESSION 2001
0625/1 45 minutes
Additional materials: Multiple Choice answer sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME
45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided unless this has already been done for you. There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet. Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This question paper consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. ND/CG QF10308/3 © UCLES 2001
[Turn over
2 1
A student measures the width of a book using a ruler. Which diagram shows the best way to do this? book
2
A
0
10
20
30 cm
B
0
10
20
30 cm
C
0
10
20
30 cm
D
0
10
20
30 cm
The diagrams show the times on a stopclock at the start and finish of an experiment. stopclock at start 60
stopclock at finish 60
s
s
45
15
45
30
30
How long did the experiment take? A
10 s
B
25 s
15
C
35 s
D
0625/1/M/J/01
45 s
3 3
An apple falls from a tree. The diagram shows the apple at P, as it starts to fall, and at Q, just before it hits the ground. The acceleration due to gravity is g. Air resistance can be ignored.
P
Q
What is the acceleration of the apple at position P and at position Q?
4
acceleration at P
acceleration at Q
A
0
0
B
0
g
C
g
0
D
g
g
In a race, a car travels 60 times round a 3.6 km track. It takes 2.4 hours. What is the average speed of the car? A
2.5 km / h
B
90 km / h
C
144 km / h
D
216 km / h
0625/1/M/J/01
[Turn over
4 5
A spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.
spring
metal What is the name given to the force that stretches the spring?
6
A
friction
B
mass
C
pressure
D
weight
A child of mass 40 kg sits on one end of a see-saw. The pivot is at the centre of the see-saw. There are four sacks of sand, each with a different mass, as shown. 40 kg
see – saw X
30kg 20kg 10kg 5kg pivot How many of the sacks must be placed at X to balance the child? A
7
1
B
2
C
3
D
4
An object has a mass of 75 g and a volume of 15 cm3. What is its density? A
0.2 g / cm3
B
5 g / cm3
C
60 g / cm3
0625/1/M/J/01
D
90 g / cm3
5 8
The diagrams show a brick resting on a smooth surface. Two equal forces F act on the brick. In which diagram does the brick not move? A
B
F
C
F
F
F
F
9
D
F
F
F
Four rings are screwed into a door, as shown. The door can be opened by putting a hook into one of the rings and pulling.
B A C D
pull
Which ring should be used if the pulling force is to be as small as possible?
0625/1/M/J/01
[Turn over
6 10 A stone is thrown into the air. The diagram shows the path of the stone through the air. At which position is the potential energy of the stone greatest? C B
A
D
11 Four weightlifters lift weights to different heights. Which weightlifter does the most work? A
1000 N lifted through 1.0 m
B
C
1000 N lifted through 1.2 m
0625/1/M/J/01
1200 N lifted through 1.0 m
D
1200 N lifted through 1.2 m
7 12 The diagram shows a simple barometer. Which distance should be measured to find the atmospheric pressure?
vacuum
A
B
mercury
C
D
trough
13 Two boys X and Y each have the same total weight and are standing on snow. X
Y
Which boy is more likely to sink into the snow and why? boy
pressure on snow
A
X
larger than Y
B
X
smaller than Y
C
Y
larger than X
D
Y
smaller than X
0625/1/M/J/01
[Turn over
8 14 A student places his thumb firmly on the outlet of a bicycle pump, to stop the air coming out. trapped air direction of motion handle What happens to the pressure and the volume of the trapped air as the pump handle is pushed in? pressure
volume
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
remains the same
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
remains the same
15 To keep a bottle of milk cold without a refrigerator on a hot day, the bottle can be covered with a damp cloth in a bowl of water. damp cloth bottle milk bowl water
How does this method keep the milk cold? A
Milk condenses on the cloth.
B
Milk evaporates from the cloth.
C
Water condenses on the cloth.
D
Water evaporates from the cloth.
0625/1/M/J/01
9 16 The diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer. 0°C
liquid
100°C
glass bulb
stem
When the thermometer becomes hotter, the liquid moves further along the stem. Why is this? A
The glass contracts.
B
The glass expands.
C
The liquid contracts.
D
The liquid expands.
17 Two copper rods, A and C, and two copper tubes, B and D, have the same external diameter. Which rod has the highest thermal capacity?
A B C D
0625/1/M/J/01
[Turn over
10 18 On a cold night, two children sit next to a camp fire to warm their hands. Their hands are the same distance from the fire. Child 1 holds his hands over the fire and child 2 holds her hands in front of the fire. child 1's hands
child 2's hands
How does the heat from the fire reach each child’s hands? child 1
child 2
A
convection only
radiation only
B
convection and radiation
radiation only
C
radiation only
convection and radiation
D
radiation only
convection only
19 An electric kettle contains a metal heating element.
water
heating element
What are the main processes by which heat energy is transferred from the element to the water, and throughout the water? heat transfer process element to water
throughout water
A
conduction
convection
B
convection
radiation
C
radiation
conduction
D
radiation
convection 0625/1/M/J/01
11 20 The diagrams show four sources of waves. Which source generates longitudinal waves? A
B
stick pushed up and down in water
C
radio transmitter
loudspeaker
D
lamp
21 The diagram shows a wave on the surface of some water. At which two points are the molecules moving in the same vertical direction at the same time?
P
Q T
R S
A
P and Q
B
P and T
C
Q and T
D
R and S
0625/1/M/J/01
[Turn over
12 22 The diagrams show a semi-circular glass block. Which diagram correctly shows the path of the ray of light and the critical angle c? A
B c
c
C
D c
c
23 A student copies a diagram of the electromagnetic spectrum but makes a mistake. radio waves
microwaves
infra-red waves
visible light
Xrays
ultra-violet waves
long wavelength
gamma rays
short wavelength
Which two names should be interchanged so that the order is correct? A
infra-red waves and radio waves
B
infra-red waves and ultra-violet waves
C
radio waves and visible light
D
ultra-violet waves and X-rays
24 An electric bell is ringing inside a glass dome. In which situation would the bell sound quietest? A
vacuum
B
C
D
electric bell
electric bell
glass dome
glass dome
air
oxygen
0625/1/M/J/01
carbon dioxide
13 25 In a test, a car horn is found to be too loud and the pitch of the note is too high. What information does this give about the amplitude and the frequency of the sound wave produced? amplitude
frequency
A
too large
too large
B
too large
too small
C
too small
too large
D
too small
too small
26 The diagrams show a magnetised piece of steel being moved slowly to the left. Which diagram shows the best method of demagnetising the steel? A
B
d.c.
a.c.
steel
steel C S
D magnet
N
N
steel
magnet
S
steel
0625/1/M/J/01
[Turn over
14 27 The diagram shows some nails attracted to a metal rod by magnetic induction.
S
permanent magnet
N metal rod
nails
From what could the metal rod be made? A
aluminium
B
copper
C
iron
D
magnesium
28 What is the unit of potential difference? A
joule
B
newton
C
volt
D
watt
0625/1/M/J/01
15 29 A plastic strip is rubbed on a piece of cloth and then held near water running slowly from a tap. The water moves towards the plastic strip. tap
plastic strip water Why does this happen? A
The plastic strip cools the water.
B
The plastic strip warms the water.
C
There is a magnetic force on the water.
D
There is an electrostatic force on the water.
30 The diagrams show part of an electric circuit containing an ammeter and a voltmeter. Which arrangement should be used to measure the p.d. across the resistor and the current through it? A
B A
A
V
V
C
D V
V A
A
0625/1/M/J/01
[Turn over
16 31 The circuits contain identical lamps and identical cells. In which circuit will the lamps be brightest? A
B
C
D
32 Why are lamps in the lighting circuit of a house connected in parallel and not in series? A
It allows them to be switched on and off independently.
B
It uses less electrical energy.
C
The filaments are less likely to burn out.
D
The p.d. across each lamp is reduced.
33 A builder plugs an electric drill into a socket inside a house.
house
electric cable
He uses the drill outdoors. It starts to rain heavily. Why is it dangerous to continue using the electric drill in the rain? A
The drill could give the builder an electric shock.
B
The drill could overheat.
C
The fuse could blow.
D
The rain could rust the drill.
0625/1/M/J/01
17 34 A wire is placed between the poles of a magnet and is briefly connected to a cell. It experiences a downwards force. downwards force
magnet
The cell is now reversed so that it is connected the other way round. What happens to the direction of the magnetic field of the magnet and to the direction of the force on the wire? direction of magnetic field
direction of force
A
reversed
reversed
B
reversed
unchanged
C
unchanged
reversed
D
unchanged
unchanged
35 The diagram represents a transformer.
input voltage
P
S
output voltage
Which arrangement would make the output voltage higher than the input voltage? number of turns on primary coil P
number of turns on secondary coil S
A
50
100
a.c.
B
50
100
d.c.
C
100
50
a.c.
D
100
50
d.c.
0625/1/M/J/01
type of input voltage
[Turn over
18 36 Which circuit will act as a variable potential divider? A
B
output input
input output
C
D
input
input
output
output
37 The circuit shown contains a light dependent resistor (LDR) and an ammeter, in series with a battery.
A
How does the circuit behave when more light shines on it? resistance of LDR
current through ammeter
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
increases
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
increases
0625/1/M/J/01
19 38 A thick sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a detector.
radioactive source
detector
sheet of paper
Which types of radiation can pass through the paper? A
alpha-particles, beta-particles and gamma radiation
B
alpha-particles and gamma radiation
C
alpha-particles and beta-particles
D
beta-particles and gamma radiation
39 The count rate of radiation produced by a radioactive sample is measured every minute. The results are recorded in the table. time / minutes
count rate / per second
0 1 2 3 4 5
80 56 40 28 20 14
What is the half-life of the radioactive material? A
minute
B
2 minutes
C
2 minutes
D
5 minutes
D
3 Li 7
40 A nuclide of lithium contains 3 protons and 4 neutrons. Which symbol represents this nuclide? A
4 Li 3
B
3 Li 4
C
7 Li 3
Go to answers 0625/1/M/J/01
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS PAPER 1 Multiple Choice OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2001
0625/1 45 minutes
Additional materials: Multiple Choice answer sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME
45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided unless this has already been done for you. There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet. Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This question paper consists of 21 printed pages and 3 blank pages. SPA (ND/CG) S09093/4 © UCLES 2001
[Turn over
2 1
The diagram shows a measuring cylinder.
cm3 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
What volume of liquid does the cylinder contain? A
2
5.5 cm3
B
5.7 cm3
6.5 cm3
C
D
6.7 cm3
The diagram shows a thick-walled tube. The thickness of the wall is 3 mm.
d
0 cm 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
What is the internal diameter d of the tube? A
2.8 cm
B
3.1 cm
C
3.4 cm
0625/1/O/N/01
D
7.4 cm
10
11
3 3
An object moves initially with constant speed and then with constant acceleration. Which graph shows this motion?
A
B
speed
speed
0
0 0
0
time
D
C
speed
speed
0
0
0
4
time
0
time
time
A motorist travels 200 km. After travelling along a fast road for 2 hours, the motorist uses a slow road for the remaining hour of the journey. start fast road 2 hours slow road 1/2 hour
finish What is the average speed of the car? A
80 km / h
B
100 km / h
C
400 km / h
0625/1/O/N/01
D
500 km / h
[Turn over
4 5
6
Which of the following has the same unit as weight? A
energy
B
force
C
mass
D
power
The mass of an astronaut is 70 kg on the Moon. What is the astronaut’s mass on Earth? A
7
8
7 kg
B
70 kg
C
80 kg
D
700 kg
Which of the following is a unit of density? A
cm3 / g
B
g / cm2
C
g / cm3
D
kg / m2
A student carries out an experiment to plot an extension/load graph for a spring. The diagrams show the apparatus at the start of the experiment and with a load added. start
with load added x
y
What is the extension caused by the load? A
x
B
y
C
y+x
D
y–x
0625/1/O/N/01
5 9
Diagram X shows the directions of the horizontal forces acting on a van when it is moving forward at constant speed. diagram X (constant speed) CIE force Q
force R
Diagram Y shows the directions of the horizontal forces acting on the same van when it is accelerating. diagram Y (accelerating) CIE force S
force T
Which of the following describes the sizes of the forces Q, R, S and T? diagram X (constant speed)
diagram Y (accelerating)
A
Q less than R
S less than T
B
Q less than R
S equal to T
C
Q equal to R
S less than T
D
Q equal to R
S equal to T
0625/1/O/N/01
[Turn over
6 10 A pole-vaulter runs up to a jump with his pole straight. He puts one end of the pole down on the ground and the pole bends. before
after
pole
Which form of energy is stored in the pole because it is bent? A
chemical
B
gravitational
C
motion
D
strain
11 A ball is allowed to roll down a slope, as shown in the diagram. There is no friction. At which point does the ball have the greatest energy of motion (kinetic energy)? start
A C B D
0625/1/O/N/01
7 12 A pin is squeezed between finger and thumb.
finger pinhead pin thumb
Which statement is correct? A
The force of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.
B
The force of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.
C
The pressure of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.
D
The pressure of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.
13 The diagram shows a manometer attached to an inflated balloon.
balloon mercury
What does the difference between the mercury levels show? A
The air pressure inside the balloon is greater than atmospheric pressure.
B
The air pressure outside the balloon is greater than the pressure inside the balloon.
C
The air pressure in the left and right sides of the tube is equal.
D
The air pressure in the left side of the tube is greater than the pressure on the right side.
0625/1/O/N/01
[Turn over
8 14 A gas is heated at constant volume. What happens to its pressure and the speed of its molecules? gas pressure
speed of molecules
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
increases
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
increases
15 The table lists the melting points and the boiling points of four different substances. Which substance is a gas at 25 °C? melting point / °C
boiling point / °C
A
-219
-183
B
-7
58
C
98
890
D
1083
2582
16 In an experiment, a piece of melting ice and a beaker of boiling water are in a laboratory which is at 20 °C.
boiling water melting ice
Bunsen burner heating water
What is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and of the boiling water? temperature of the melting ice
temperature of the boiling water
A
constant
constant
B
constant
increasing
C
increasing
constant
D
increasing
increasing
0625/1/O/N/01
9 17 The glass stopper in the neck of a glass bottle is too tight to come out. Which diagram shows the best way to loosen the stopper? A
in a stream of cold water for a short time
B
C
in a stream of hot water for a short time
inside a warm oven for a long time
D
inside a refrigerator for a long time
18 A camper warms her hands near a gas lamp.
Which waves carry most heat to her hands, and are these waves electromagnetic? waves
electromagnetic
A
infra-red
no
B
infra-red
yes
C
light
no
D
light
yes
0625/1/O/N/01
[Turn over
10 19 An experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat. Metal balls are stuck with wax to rods made of different metals, as shown in diagram X. The rods are heated at one end. Some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram Y. Which metal is the best conductor of heat? diagram X
diagram Y
heat
heat
D C B A after heating
before heating
20 Plane water waves are approaching a narrow gap in a barrier. Which diagram shows the diffraction pattern? A
B
C
D
0625/1/O/N/01
11 21 The diagram shows four waves drawn to the same scale. P
0 0
Q
0 0
distance
distance
S
R
0 0
0 0
distance
distance
Which statement is correct? A
The amplitude of wave P is the same as the amplitude of wave R.
B
The amplitude of wave S is double the amplitude of wave Q.
C
The wavelength of wave Q is double the wavelength of wave P.
D
The wavelength of wave S is the same as the wavelength of wave Q.
22 Which diagram shows how a ray of light passes through a glass prism in a periscope? A
B
C
0625/1/O/N/01
D
[Turn over
12 23 The diagram shows a section of the electromagnetic spectrum.
gamma-rays
X-rays
ultra-violet rays
visible light How do the frequency and the speed of gamma rays compare with those of visible light? frequency
speed in a vacuum
A
gamma greater
same
B
visible greater
same
C
gamma greater
gamma faster
D
visible greater
visible faster
24 Which change would make a sound louder? A
decreasing the amplitude of the wave
B
increasing the amplitude of the wave
C
decreasing the wavelength
D
increasing the wavelength
0625/1/O/N/01
13 25 A lighted candle is put in front of a loudspeaker which is making a loud, steady note. The flame vibrates because of the sound wave.
loudspeaker
candle
Which type of waves are sound waves and in which direction does the flame vibrate? type of wave A
longitudinal
B
transverse
C
longitudinal
D
transverse
direction of vibration
26 When a magnet is brought close to an unmagnetised piece of iron, the iron becomes magnetised. Which diagram correctly shows the magnetic poles induced in the iron? A
B
C
S
S
S
magnet
iron
N
S
S magnet
N
N
D
S
N
iron
iron
0625/1/O/N/01
N
N
N S
S N iron
[Turn over
14 27 Two rods X and Y look the same.
magnet
P N
rod X
S
Q
R
rod Y S The N pole of a magnet is brought close, in turn, to each end of both rods. The results of these four actions are shown in the table. end tested
result
P
attraction
Q
attraction
R
attraction
S
repulsion
Which of the rods is a magnet? A
neither of the rods
B
both of the rods
C
rod X only
D
rod Y only
0625/1/O/N/01
15 28 Which circuit could be used to find the resistance of resistor R?
A
B
V
R R A
V
C
A
D
A
R
R V
V
A
29 A polythene rod repels an inflated balloon hanging from a nylon thread. What charges must the rod and the balloon carry? A
The rod and the balloon carry opposite charges.
B
The rod and the balloon carry like charges.
C
The rod is charged but the balloon is not.
D
The balloon is charged but the rod is not.
30 An electrical component is to be placed in the circuit at Z, to allow the brightness of the lamp to be varied from bright to dim.
Z What should be connected at Z?
A
B
C
D
V
0625/1/O/N/01
[Turn over
16 31 A student uses four ammeters to measure the current in different parts of a circuit. P
Q
A
A
10 Ω
R A
20 Ω
S A
Which two ammeters will each read the largest current? A
P and Q
B
P and R
C
R and Q
D
R and S
32 Four lamps are each labelled 240 V, 60 W. In which circuit would all four lamps have the correct brightness?
A
B
240 V
240 V
D
C
240 V
240 V
0625/1/O/N/01
17 33 A student makes the circuit shown. 5 A fuse
The fuse has blown and stopped the current. What could have caused this? A
A 3 A fuse should have been used.
B
The lamp was loose.
C
The current was too large.
D
The voltage was too small.
34 A coil is connected to a battery and a soft-iron bar is hung near to it.
soft iron coil The current is then reversed by reversing the battery connections. How does the soft iron bar behave in the two cases? with the battery as shown
with the battery reversed
A
attracted to the coil
attracted to the coil
B
attracted to the coil
repelled from the coil
C
repelled from the coil
attracted to the coil
D
repelled from the coil
repelled from the coil
0625/1/O/N/01
[Turn over
18 35 A wire carries an electric current between the poles of a magnet. This causes a force that pushes the wire upwards. force on wire
S
N
current into page The poles of the magnet and the direction of the current are both reversed. Which arrow now shows the direction of the force on the wire? A
force on wire
N D
B S
C
current out of page
0625/1/O/N/01
19 36 Which graph shows how a thermistor could behave? A
B
resistance
0
resistance
0
0
brightness of light
0
C
D
resistance
0
brightness of light
resistance
0
0
temperature
0
temperature
37 The diagram shows a circuit which includes a switch and a capacitor. Y switch X
capacitor
What happens to the capacitor when the switch is at X and when it is at Y? switch at X
switch at Y
A
charging
charging
B
charging
discharging
C
discharging
charging
D
discharging
discharging
0625/1/O/N/01
[Turn over
20 38 The graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a period of time.
activity/ counts per second
120 90 60 30 0 0
1
2 3 4 time/minutes
5
What is the half-life of the source? A
1 minute
B
2 minutes
C
2 minutes
D
4 minutes
39 The diagram shows five atoms in a radioactive substance. The atoms give out alpha-particles. 1st particle atom 1 atom 2
atom 5
atom 3
atom 4
2nd particle Atom 1 is the first to give out a particle. Atom 3 is the second to give out a particle. Which atom will give out the next particle? A
atom 2
B
atom 4
C
atom 5
D
it is impossible to tell
0625/1/O/N/01
21 40 The diagram shows the particles in an atom. Charged particles are marked + or –.
What is the nucleon number (mass number) of the atom? A
4
B
5
C
9
D
13
Go to answers 0625/1/O/N/01
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
0625/1
PHYSICS PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2002 45 minutes Additional materials: Multiple Choice answer sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME
45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided unless this has already been done for you. There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet. Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This question paper consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. SP (AT/KN) S24280/2 © CIE 2002
[Turn over
2 1
The diagram shows a stopwatch, originally set at 00:00. When a car was first seen, the stop-start button was pressed. When the car passed the observer, the stopwatch showed 01:06. stop-start button min
s
01 : 06
How long did the car take to reach the observer?
2
A
1.06 seconds
B
6 seconds
C
66 seconds
D
106 seconds
A girl uses a rule to measure the length of a metal rod. Because the end of the rule is damaged, she places one end of the rod at the 1 cm mark as shown. metal rod damaged end
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
How long is the metal rod? A
43 mm
B
46 mm
C
53 mm
0625/1/O/N/02
D
56 mm
cm
3 3
A stone falls freely from the top of a cliff into the sea. Air resistance may be ignored. Which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls? A
B
acceleration
acceleration
0
0 0
0
time C
D
acceleration
acceleration
0
0 0
4
time
0
time
time
A child is standing on the platform of a station, watching the trains.
A train travelling at 30 m / s takes 3 s to pass the child. What is the length of the train? A
5
10 m
B
30 m
C
90 m
D
270 m
Which of the following statements is correct? A
Mass and weight are different names for the same thing.
B
The mass of an object is different if the object is taken to the Moon.
C
The weight of a car is one of the forces acting on the car.
D
The weight of a chocolate bar is measured in kilograms.
0625/1/O/N/02
[Turn over
4 6
In an experiment, six identical bags of flour are balanced by a 9 kg mass.
six bags of flour
9 kg mass
pivot Two bags of flour are removed. What mass will balance the remaining bags? A
7
3 kg
B
6 kg
C
7 kg
D
9 kg
The masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid are shown in the diagram. cm3
cm3
100
100
liquid 50
50
mass = 140 g
mass = 217 g
What is the density of the liquid? A
8
217 g / cm3 52
B
217 g / cm3 70
C
77 g / cm3 52
In which of these situations is no resultant force needed? A
a car changing direction
B
a car moving in a straight line at a steady speed
C
a car slowing down
D
a car speeding up
0625/1/O/N/02
D
77 g / cm3 70
5 9
The diagram shows sections of four objects, all of equal mass. The position of the centre of mass of each object has been marked with a cross. Which object is the most stable? A
B
C
D
10 A car accelerates along a road as it rises uphill.
Which energy changes are taking place?
energy of motion (kinetic energy)
energy of position (gravitational potential energy)
A
decreasing
decreasing
B
decreasing
increasing
C
increasing
decreasing
D
increasing
increasing
11 In a car engine, energy stored in the fuel is converted into thermal energy (heat energy) and energy of motion (kinetic energy). In which form is the energy stored in the fuel? A
chemical
B
geothermal
C
hydroelectric
D
nuclear
0625/1/O/N/02
[Turn over
6 12 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer. vacuum level X
level Y mercury If atmospheric pressure increases, what happens to level X and to level Y?
level X
level Y
A
goes down
goes down
B
goes down
goes up
C
goes up
goes down
D
goes up
goes up
13 Four flower vases have circular bases. They are filled with water so that they all have the same weight. Which vase exerts the greatest pressure on its base? A
B
C
14 Some gas in a sealed plastic bag is placed in a refrigerator to cool down. How do the gas molecules behave when this happens? A
They move more quickly and are closer together.
B
They move more quickly and are further apart.
C
They move more slowly and are closer together.
D
They move more slowly and are further apart.
0625/1/O/N/02
D
7 15 A measured mass of gas is placed in a cylinder at atmospheric pressure and is then slowly compressed. piston gas piston pushed in
If the temperature of the gas does not change, what happens to the pressure of the gas? A
It drops to zero.
B
It decreases, but not to zero.
C
It stays the same.
D
It increases.
16 A mercury-in-glass thermometer is to be used to measure temperatures from 0 °C to 100 °C. Why is mercury suitable? A
Mercury expands when heated.
B
Mercury has a boiling point below 100 °C.
C
Mercury has a melting point above 0 °C.
D
Mercury is a poor conductor.
17 A block of ice is heated at a constant rate. Eventually the melted ice boils. The graph shows how the temperature changes with time. 100 temperature / °C
0 0
5
10 time / minutes
How many minutes did it take to melt all the ice? A
4
B
7
C
11
0625/1/O/N/02
D
13
[Turn over
8 18 How does thermal energy (heat energy) travel through the vacuum between the Earth and the Sun? A
by conduction
B
by convection
C
by radiation
D
by radioactive decay
19 Two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. Hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid is put on top as shown. lid small spacer small air gap hot water bench
Which statement is correct? A
Heat loss by radiation is prevented by the small air gap.
B
No heat passes through the sides of either cup.
C
The bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup.
D
The lid is used to reduce heat loss by convection.
0625/1/O/N/02
9 20 Waves are sent along two long springs X and Y as shown. spring X direction of wave travel
side to side movement
backward and
spring Y
direction of wave travel
forward movement How should the wave motions in X and Y be described?
spring X
spring Y
A
longitudinal
longitudinal
B
longitudinal
transverse
C
transverse
longitudinal
D
transverse
transverse
21 Radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.
hill
The waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be A
diffracted.
B
radiated.
C
reflected.
D
refracted.
0625/1/O/N/02
[Turn over
10 22 One of the effects of passing a ray of white light through a prism is to split the light into colours.
prism
white light coloured light What is the name given to this effect? A
deviation
B
dispersion
C
reflection
D
refraction
23 A student looks at the letter P on a piece of paper, and at its reflection in a mirror. What does he see? A
B
C
D mirror
mirror
paper
paper
24 Which of the following can be heard by the human ear? A
A whistle emitting a wave of frequency 50 kHz.
B
A bat emitting a wave of frequency of 30 kHz.
C
An insect emitting a wave of 300 Hz.
D
A vibrating spring emitting a wave of frequency of 5 Hz.
0625/1/O/N/02
11 25 Two sound waves P and Q are displayed on an oscilloscope with the same time-base and Y-plate settings for each.
P
Q
Which statement correctly describes the pitch and the loudness of the two sounds? A
P has a higher pitch and is louder than Q.
B
P has a higher pitch and is quieter than Q.
C
P has a lower pitch and is louder than Q.
D
P has a lower pitch and is quieter than Q.
26 A piece of magnetised steel is placed inside a coil of wire that has a large alternating current passing through it. The magnet is slowly moved out of the coil to position P.
steel magnet moved out of coil
P
12 V a.c. How has the steel changed when it reaches P? A
It has become demagnetised.
B
There has been no change.
C
It has become a stronger magnet.
D
The poles have changed ends.
0625/1/O/N/02
[Turn over
12 27 A permanent magnet is placed close to a bar of soft iron PQ. permanent magnet
S
N
P
Q
soft-iron bar
What happens? A
P becomes a north pole.
B
P becomes a south pole.
C
PQ does not become magnetised.
D
The poles of the magnet are reversed.
28 In which circuit does the ammeter read the total current through both resistors? B
A
A
A
C
D
A A
0625/1/O/N/02
13 29 The table shows the voltage and current ratings for four light bulbs. Which bulb has the greatest resistance when used normally?
voltage / V
current / A
A
2
0.5
B
3
0.2
C
6
D
12
12 1.0
30 In the following circuits, the resistors have the same value and the cells are identical. Which circuit has the smallest resistance? A
B
C
D
31 The diagram shows a circuit, with four possible positions to place a switch.
A
lamp 1 C
D
B
lamp 2
At which labelled point should a switch be placed so that lamp 1 remains on all the time and lamp 2 can be switched on and off?
0625/1/O/N/02
[Turn over
14 32 The device X in this circuit is designed to cut off the electricity supply automatically if too much current flows.
X
What is device X? A
a fuse
B
a relay
C
a resistor
D
an ammeter
33 A classroom has four lights, each fitted with a lamp marked 240 V, 100 W. Which circuit is most suitable for the classroom? A
B
C
240 V
240 V
D
240 V
240 V
0625/1/O/N/02
15 34 Which graph shows the output of a simple a.c. generator? A
B
e.m.f.
e.m.f. 0
0 time
time
C
D
e.m.f.
e.m.f. 0
0 time
0625/1/O/N/02
time
[Turn over
16 35 When the electric current in wire XY is in the direction shown, there is an upward force on the wire. X current force magnet
magnet N
S
Y If the north and south poles of the magnet exchange positions, in which direction will the force on the wire act? A
downwards
B
upwards
C
to the left
D
to the right
36 Charged particles are emitted from the cathode of an oscilloscope. What is the name and charge of these particles? name of particles
charge of particles
A
electrons
negative
B
electrons
positive
C
protons
negative
D
protons
positive
0625/1/O/N/02
17 37 Diagram 1 shows a potential divider circuit containing two 100 Ω resistors.
100 Ω 100 Ω
V
Diagram 1 One of the resistors is changed to 90 Ω, as shown in diagram 2.
90 Ω 100 Ω
V
Diagram 2 How does the reading on the voltmeter change when this is done? A
It becomes zero.
B
It decreases a little.
C
It increases a little.
D
It stays the same.
38 A radioactive source emits radiation that can pass through a sheet of paper but not through thick aluminium. paper
thick aluminium
radiation no radiation passes through
all radiation passes through What does this show about the radiation? A
It is alpha-particles.
B
It is beta-particles.
C
It is gamma-rays.
D
It is a mixture of alpha-particles and gamma-rays.
0625/1/O/N/02
[Turn over
18 39 A sample of a radioactive isotope is decaying. Which atoms will decay first? A
impossible to know, because radioactive decay is random
B
impossible to know, unless the age of the material is known
C
atoms near the centre, because they are surrounded by more atoms
D
atoms near the surface, because the radiation can escape more easily
40 Which line in the table gives the numbers of protons and neutrons in the nuclide 73 Li? protons
neutrons
A
3
4
B
3
7
C
4
3
D
7
3
0625/1/O/N/02
19 BLANK PAGE
0625/1/O/N/02
20 BLANK PAGE
0625/1/O/N/02
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/01
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2003 45 minutes Additional Materials:
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C, and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. SP (SLC/KN) S45991/2 © CIE 2003
[Turn over
2 1
A glass tank contains some water.
V water T
Q U
S
R The length QR and the width RS of the tank are known. What other distance needs to be measured in order to be able to calculate the volume of the water? A
2
ST
B
SV
C
TU
D
TV
A stopwatch is used to time a race. The diagrams show the watch at the start and at the end of the race. start
55
end
60
5
55 10
50
40 35
30
45.7 s
B
46.0 s
15
40
25
C
46.5 s
D
0625/01/M/J/03
47.0 s
20
seconds 35
How long did the race take? A
10
45
20
seconds
5
50
15
45
60
30
25
3 3
The diagram shows a speed-time graph for a body moving with constant acceleration.
speed
0
time
0 What is represented by the shaded area under the graph?
4
A
acceleration
B
distance
C
speed
D
time
A tunnel has a length of 50 km. A car takes 20 min to travel between the two ends of the tunnel. What is the average speed of the car?
5
A
2.5 km / h
B
16.6 km / h
C
150 km / h
D
1000 km / h
Which statement is correct? A
Mass is a force, measured in kilograms.
B
Mass is a force, measured in newtons.
C
Weight is a force, measured in kilograms.
D
Weight is a force, measured in newtons.
0625/01/M/J/03
[Turn over
4 6
Three children, X, Y and Z, are using a see-saw to compare their weights. X
Y
Y
Z
X
Z
Which line in the table shows the correct order of the children’s weights? lightest
A
X
Y
Z
B
X
Z
Y
C
Y
X
Z
D
Y
Z
X
What apparatus is needed to determine the density of a regularly-shaped block? A
a balance and a ruler
B
a balance and a forcemeter (spring balance)
C
a measuring cylinder and a ruler
D
a measuring cylinder and a beaker
A spring is suspended from a stand. Loads are added and the extensions are measured.
spring
stand loads
rule
Which graph shows the result of plotting extension against load? C
0 0
load
D
0 0
extension
B extension
A extension
8
←→
extension
7
heaviest
0
load
0
0625/01/M/J/03
load
0 0
load
5 9
A student uses a stand and clamp to hold a flask of liquid. Which diagram shows the most stable arrangement? A
B
C
D
10 What is the source of the energy converted by a hydro-electric power station? A
hot rocks
B
falling water
C
oil
D
waves
11 A labourer on a building site lifts heavy concrete blocks onto a lorry. Lighter blocks are now lifted the same distance in the same time. What happens to the work done in lifting each block and the power exerted by the labourer? work done in lifting each block
power exerted by labourer
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
remains the same
C
increases
increases
D
remains the same
increases
0625/01/M/J/03
[Turn over
6 12 The diagram shows an instrument used to measure gas pressure.
liquid
What is the instrument called? A
ammeter
B
barometer
C
manometer
D
thermometer
13 The diagrams show two divers swimming in the sea and two divers swimming in fresh water. Sea water is more dense than fresh water. On which diver is there the greatest pressure? 0m
0m sea water
A 2m 4m
fresh water
C 2m
B
6m
4m 6m
14 When water evaporates, some molecules escape. Which molecules escape? A
the molecules at the bottom of the liquid with less energy than others
B
the molecules at the bottom of the liquid with more energy than others
C
the molecules at the surface with less energy than others
D
the molecules at the surface with more energy than others
0625/01/M/J/03
D
7 15 Two metal boxes containing air are standing in a room. Box X is on top of a heater. Box Y is on a bench. The boxes are left for a long time. Y
X
heater
bench
Which line in the table best describes the average speed of the molecules in the containers? box X
box Y
A
fast
zero
B
fast
slow
C
slow
fast
D
zero
fast
16 The top of the mercury thread in a mercury-in-glass thermometer reaches point X at 0 °C and point Z at 100 °C. Z Y
X W
Where might it be at a temperature below the ice-point? A
point W
B
point X
C
point Y
D
point Z
0625/01/M/J/03
[Turn over
8 17 The same quantity of heat energy is applied to four different blocks. The temperature rise produced is shown on each block. Which block has the highest thermal capacity? A
B
temperature rise is 3 °C
temperature rise is 6 °C
C
D
temperature rise is 18 °C
temperature rise is 9 °C
18 A person holds a glass beaker in one hand and fills it quickly with hot water. It takes several seconds before his hand starts to feel the heat. Why is there this delay? A
Glass is a poor conductor of heat.
B
Glass is a good conductor of heat.
C
Water is a poor conductor of heat.
D
Water is a good conductor of heat.
0625/01/M/J/03
9 19 The diagram shows a heater used to heat a tank of cold water.
water lagging tank heater
What is the main process by which heat moves through the water? A
conduction
B
convection
C
evaporation
D
radiation
20 What causes refraction when light travels from air into glass? A
The amplitude of the light waves changes.
B
The colour of the light changes.
C
The frequency of the light waves changes.
D
The speed of the light changes.
21 A woman tunes her radio to a station broadcasting on 200 m. What does the 200 m tell her about the radio wave? A
its amplitude
B
its frequency
C
its speed
D
its wavelength
0625/01/M/J/03
[Turn over
10 22 Which statement is correct about the speed of electromagnetic waves in a vacuum? A
Ultra-violet waves have the greatest speed.
B
Visible light waves have the greatest speed.
C
Infra-red waves have the greatest speed.
D
All electromagnetic waves have the same speed.
23 Which diagram correctly shows rays passing through a camera lens? camera
A
camera
B film
film
object
object lens
lens
image
camera
C
image
camera
D film
film
object
object lens
image
0625/01/M/J/03
lens
image
11 24 A sound wave passes through the air, in the direction shown. → direction of travel of sound wave
How does a particle of air move as the sound wave passes? A
moves to the right and stays there
B
moves left and right
C
moves up and stays there
D
moves up and down
•→ ←•→ ↑ • ↑ • ↓
25 A boy is stranded on an island 500 m from the shore.
500 m
cliffs
island
He shouts for help, but all he can hear in reply is the echo of his shout from some cliffs. Sound travels at 340 m / s through the air. What is the time interval between the boy shouting and hearing the echo? A
500 s 340
B
2 × 500 s 340
C
340 s 500
0625/01/M/J/03
D
2 × 340 s 500
[Turn over
12 26 A student wishes to use a magnetising coil to make a permanent magnet from a piece of metal. metal
Which metal should she use? A
aluminium
B
copper
C
iron
D
steel
27 A metal rod XY is placed near a magnet. End X is attracted when it is placed near to the north pole of the magnet, and also when it is placed near to the south pole. X
Y N
N attraction
X
Y
S
S
attraction How does end Y behave when it is placed, in turn, near to the two poles of the magnet? Y near north pole Y near south pole A
attraction
attraction
B
attraction
repulsion
C
repulsion
attraction
D
repulsion
repulsion
0625/01/M/J/03
13 28 When the potential difference (p.d.) across a piece of resistance wire is changed, the current through the wire also changes. The temperature of the wire is kept the same. Which graph shows how the p.d. and current are related? A
B
current
C
current
0
current
0 0
p.d.
D
current
0 p.d.
0
0 p.d.
0
p.d.
0
29 Two faulty ammeters and two perfect ammeters are connected in series in the circuit shown.
A1
A2
A3
A4
The readings on the ammeters are A1 2.9 A A2 3.1 A A3 3.1 A A4 3.3 A Which two ammeters are faulty? A
A1 and A2
B
A1 and A4
C
A2 and A3
D
A3 and A4
30 Which electrical component would not normally be found in a battery-operated torch (flashlight)? A
B
C
0625/01/M/J/03
D
[Turn over
14 31 A student connects two lamps in the circuit shown.
1
2 3
Which switches must he close to light both lamps? A
1 and 2
B
1, 2 and 3
C
1 and 3
D
2 and 3
32 A student makes four circuits. In which circuit are both lamps protected by the fuse? A
B
C
D
0625/01/M/J/03
15 33 Four lamps are labelled ‘60 W 240 V’. In which circuit are the lamps connected so that they all work at normal brightness? A
B
C
240 V
240 V
240 V
D 240 V
34 The diagram shows a solenoid connected to a sensitive voltmeter. S
magnet
N
solenoid V
Which of the following would give a zero reading on the voltmeter? A
holding the magnet stationary inside the solenoid
B
moving the magnet away from the solenoid
C
moving the magnet towards the solenoid
D
moving the solenoid towards the magnet
0625/01/M/J/03
[Turn over
16 35 The diagram shows a transformer with an alternating voltage of 100 V applied to the primary coil.
secondary coil
primary coil 100 V
(40 turns)
(80 turns)
What is the voltage produced across the secondary coil? A
50 V
B
100 V
C
200 V
D
8000 V
36 The diagram below shows the screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope tube. spot of light
The tube is placed between a pair of charged plates. Which diagram shows the new position of the spot? A
B
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
C
D
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
0625/01/M/J/03
17 37 An electrical component X is placed in water, as shown. A
thermometer
X
water
When the temperature of the water is increased, the reading on the ammeter increases. What is component X? A
a capacitor
B
a light-dependent resistor
C
a reed relay
D
a thermistor
38 Which type of radiation can be stopped by a sheet of paper? A
α-particles
B
β-particles
C
γ-rays
D
X-rays
39 The half-life of a radioactive substance is 5 hours. A sample is tested and found to contain 0.48 g of the substance. How much of the substance was present in the sample 20 hours before the sample was tested? A
0.03 g
B
0.12 g
C
1.92 g
D
7.68 g
0625/01/M/J/03
[Turn over
18 40 An atom of lithium contains three protons and three electrons. The nucleon number (mass number) of the atom is 7. How many neutrons are there in the atom? A
3
B
4
C
7
D
10
Go to answers
0625/01/M/J/03
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/01
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
October/November 2003 45 minutes Additional Materials:
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C, and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. MML 4504 11/02 S53619/2 © UCLES 2003
UNIVERSITY of CAMBRIDGE Local Examinations Syndicate
[Turn over
2 1
2
Which of the following is not necessary when using a measuring cylinder to measure the volume of a quantity of water? A
making sure that the measuring cylinder is vertical
B
making sure that your eye is level with the liquid surface
C
reading the bottom of the meniscus
D
using the largest measuring cylinder possible
A pendulum is set in motion and 20 complete swings are timed. The time measured is 30 s. What is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum? A
3
0.67 s
B
0.75 s
C
1.5 s
D
3.0 s
Five telegraph poles are positioned at equal distances along the side of a road. pole 1
pole 2
pole 3
pole 4
pole 5
A car accelerates until it is level with pole 4. The car then continues along the road at a steady speed. The times taken to travel between one pole and the next are measured. Which time is the greatest? The time between A
pole 1 and pole 2.
B
pole 2 and pole 3.
C
pole 3 and pole 4.
D
pole 4 and pole 5.
0625/01/O/N/03
3 4
A train travels along a track from Aytown to Beetown. The map shows the route.
Aytown
Beetown
The distance travelled by the train between the towns is 210 km. It moves at an average speed of 70 km / h. How long does the journey take?
5
A
70 less than ––– hours, because the journey is not in a straight line 210
B
70 exactly ––– hours 210
C
210 exactly ––– hours 70
D
210 more than ––– hours, because the journey is not in a straight line 70
A beam is pivoted at its centre. Two masses are suspended at equal distances from the pivot as shown in the diagram.
pivot
block X
2 kg mass
Which statement is correct? A
If X has a mass of exactly 2 kg, it will rise.
B
If X has a mass of less than 2 kg, it will fall.
C
If X has a mass of more than 2 kg, it will fall.
D
If X has a mass of more than 2 kg, it will rise.
0625/01/O/N/03
[Turn over
4 6
The mass of a full bottle of cooking oil is 1.30 kg. When exactly half of the oil has been used, the mass of the bottle plus the remaining oil is 0.90 kg. What is the mass of the bottle? A
7
0.40 kg
B
0.50 kg
C
0.65 kg
0.80 kg
A student tries to find the density of a metal block. First he measures the weight with a forcemeter (spring balance). Next he measures the sides of the block using a rule, in order to calculate the volume of the block. Finally he divides the weight by the volume to find the density. The student has made a mistake. Why does his method not give the density?
8
D
A
Density is volume divided by weight.
B
He should have measured the surface area, not the volume.
C
He should have used the mass in his calculation, not the weight.
D
Weight is not measured with a forcemeter (spring balance).
Two forces act on an object. In which situation is it impossible for the object to be in equilibrium? A
The two forces act in the same direction.
B
The two forces act through the same point.
C
The two forces are of the same type.
D
The two forces are the same size.
0625/01/O/N/03
5 9
The table below shows the length of a wire as the load on it is increased.
load / N
0
length / cm
50.0
10
20
30
52.1
54.1
56.3
Which graph correctly shows the extension of the wire plotted against load? A
B
60
3
extension / cm
extension / cm 40
2
20
1
0
0 0
10
20
30
0
10
20
load / N
30
load / N
C
D
6
56.3
extension / cm
extension / cm 4
54.1
2
52.1
0
50.0 0
10
20
30
0
load / N
10
20
30
load / N
10 A large electric motor is used to lift a container off a ship. Which of the following values are enough to allow the power of the motor to be calculated? A
the mass of the container and the distance moved
B
the force used and the distance moved
C
the current used and the work done
D
the work done and the time taken
0625/01/O/N/03
[Turn over
6 11
A tidal power station is made by building a barrage across the mouth of a river. At high tide the sea water is trapped behind the barrage. barrage
turbine trapped sea water
sea at low tide
At low tide the water is allowed to flow back into the sea through a turbine. What is the useful energy change in a tidal power station? A
electrical energy
B
electrical energy
C D
→ →
energy of position (potential) energy of motion (kinetic)
→ energy of position (potential) energy of position (potential) → electrical energy energy of motion (kinetic)
12 Which diagram shows the child exerting least pressure on the ground? A
B
0625/01/O/N/03
C
D
7 13 A manometer is being used to measure the pressure of the gas inside a tank. A, B, C and D show the manometer at different times. At which time is the gas pressure inside the tank greatest?
A
B
C
D
gas
14 Which line in the table correctly describes whether the molecules of a solid, liquid and gas are moving or stationary?
solid
liquid
gas
A
stationary
stationary
stationary
B
stationary
stationary
moving
C
stationary
moving
moving
D
moving
moving
moving
15 Driving a car raises the temperature of the tyres. This causes the pressure of the air in the tyres to increase. Why is this? A
Air molecules break up to form separate atoms.
B
Air molecules expand with the rise in temperature.
C
The force between the air molecules increases.
D
The speed of the air molecules increases.
0625/01/O/N/03
[Turn over
8 16 The diagram shows how the atoms in a substance rearrange themselves during a change of state.
Which change of state is shown? A
gas to liquid
B
liquid to gas
C
liquid to solid
D
solid to liquid
17 Equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers. They are heated from 20 °C to 30 °C by heaters of the same power. Liquid 2 takes twice as long to heat as liquid 1.
same mass of different liquids liquid 1
liquid 2 heaters of same power heating time = t
heating time = 2t
Which statement is correct? A
Both liquids receive the same amount of energy.
B
Liquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2.
C
The thermal capacity of liquid 1 is equal to the thermal capacity of liquid 2.
D
The thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2. 0625/01/O/N/03
9 18 There is a vacuum between the double walls of a vacuum flask. Which types of heat transfer are reduced by the vacuum? A
conduction and convection
B
conduction and radiation
C
convection and radiation
D
conduction, convection and radiation
19 The diagrams show four identical pieces of ice that are heated in test-tubes of water. In which test-tube will the ice take the longest time to melt? A
B water
ice ice wrapped in lead wire
water
C
D water
water
ice
ice wrapped in lead wire
0625/01/O/N/03
[Turn over
10 20 The diagram shows a cork with a weight attached so that the cork floats upright. cork X
water surface Y
weight
Transverse waves travel across the water from X to Y. Which way do the waves make the cork move? A
→ ← right and left
B
↑↓ up and down
C
→ only to the right
D
← only to the left
21 Waves travel more slowly on the surface of water when the water is shallow. A person drops a stone into a pool at X. The diagram shows the first wavefront on the surface of the pool. Which region of the pool is likely to be most shallow?
B
A
X
C D wavefront 0625/01/O/N/03
11 22 Which diagram correctly shows the paths taken by red and blue light when a beam of white light enters a glass prism? A
B red blue
white light
blue red
white light
C
D blue red
white light
red blue
white light
23 Which diagram shows the correct order of the waves in the electromagnetic spectrum? visible infra radio red
ultra violet
X-ray
A increasing wavelength visible ultra radio violet
infra red
X-ray
B increasing wavelength visible ultra X-ray violet
infra red
radio
C increasing wavelength visible infra X-ray red
ultra violet
radio
D increasing wavelength
0625/01/O/N/03
[Turn over
12 24 Which change will lower the pitch of a sound? A
decreasing its amplitude
B
decreasing its frequency
C
increasing its amplitude
D
increasing its frequency
25 Astronaut 1 uses a hammer to mend a satellite in space. Astronaut 2 is nearby. There is no atmosphere in space.
hammer astronaut 1
astronaut 2
Compared with the sound heard if they were working on Earth, what does astronaut 2 hear? A
no sound at all
B
a quieter sound
C
a sound of the same loudness
D
a louder sound
0625/01/O/N/03
13 26 A steel bar is magnetised by stroking it several times with the south pole of a magnet, as shown.
N S X
Y steel bar
Which poles are formed at X and Y?
X
Y
A
north
north
B
north
south
C
south
north
D
south
south
27 A steel ball on a horizontal wooden table rolls near the north pole of a bar magnet that is lying on the table. Which diagram shows the most likely path of the ball, as seen from above the table? A
B S
magnet
N
ball
N
ball C
magnet
S
magnet
D magnet
S
S
N
N
ball
ball
0625/01/O/N/03
stops here
[Turn over
14 28 A student wants to find the resistance of resistor R using a voltmeter and an ammeter. Which circuit should the student use? A
C
B
A
V
A
V
R
R
A
V
D
R
V
R
A
29 Two very light, charged balls P and Q are hung, one above the other, from nylon threads. When a negatively charged plastic sheet is placed alongside them, P is repelled and Q is attracted.
P
negatively charged plastic sheet
Q
What are the original charges on P and on Q?
charge on P
charge on Q
A
negative
negative
B
negative
positive
C
positive
negative
D
positive
positive
0625/01/O/N/03
15 30 Four students are asked to draw a circuit showing three lamps working in parallel, a cell, and a switch that controls all three lamps. Which student is correct? A
B
C
D
31 A 3.0 lamp and a 6.0 lamp are connected in series. What is the total resistance of the combination? A
0.5
B
2.0
C
9.0
D
18.0
32 Why is a circuit breaker or a fuse used in a mains electric circuit? A
It allows spare current to be returned to the mains.
B
It improves the insulation of the wiring.
C
It protects the mains wiring from current overload.
D
It saves energy by reducing the current. 0625/01/O/N/03
[Turn over
16 33 The diagrams show two ways in which three lamps may be connected.
X X
Y
Y
Z
Z
circuit 1
circuit 2
Which statement is correct? A
If lamp Y breaks in circuit 1, both the other lamps will go out.
B
If lamp Y breaks in circuit 2, both the other lamps will go out.
C
If lamp Y breaks in circuit 1, lamp Z will go out, but lamp X will remain on.
D
If lamp Y breaks in circuit 2, lamp Z will go out, but lamp X will remain on.
34 How is electricity transmitted over large distances and why is it transmitted in this way?
how
why
A
at high voltage
for safety
B
at high voltage
to reduce energy loss
C
at low voltage
for safety
D
at low voltage
to reduce energy loss
35 In a cathode-ray tube, particles are given off from a hot cathode by thermionic emission. Which particles are given off? A
atoms
B
electrons
C
ions
D
protons
0625/01/O/N/03
17 36 When the thermistor in the circuit below is heated, the lamp becomes brighter.
Why does this happen? A
The resistance of the lamp decreases.
B
The resistance of the lamp increases.
C
The resistance of the thermistor decreases.
D
The resistance of the thermistor increases.
37 Which line in the table describes the nature of an -particle and a -ray?
-particle
-ray
A
helium nucleus
electromagnetic radiation
B
helium nucleus
electron
C
proton
electromagnetic radiation
D
proton
electron
38 A radioactive nucleus R decays with the emission of a -particle as shown. x yR
→ qpS
+
Which equation is correct? A
x=p
B
y=q
C
p=x–1
D
q=y–1
0625/01/O/N/03
[Turn over
18 39 Which line in the table shows the structure of the nucleus of a helium atom 24 He? electrons
neutrons
protons
A
2
2
0
B
2
0
2
C
0
2
2
D
2
2
2
26 X. 40 A nucleus of substance X has the symbol 12
How many electrons orbit around the nucleus of a neutral atom of substance X? A
12
B
14
C
26
D
38
Go to answers
0625/01/O/N/03
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/01
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2004 45 minutes Additional Materials:
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C, and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. IB04 06_0625_01/3RP UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2 1
The diagram shows a measuring cylinder.
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
Which unit would be most suitable for its scale? A 2
B
mm2
C
mm3
D
cm2
cm3
A piece of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler. cotton
cm
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
When the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times. six turns of cotton
pen
What is the distance once round the pen? A
2.2 cm
UCLES 2004
B
2.6 cm
C
13.2 cm
0625/01/M/J/04
D
15.6 cm
16
3 3
The diagram shows the speed-time graph for an object moving at constant speed. 2 speed m/s 1
0 0
1
2
4
3 time / s
What is the distance travelled by the object in the first 3 s? A 4
1.5 m
B
2.0 m
C
3.0 m
D
6.0 m
A small steel ball is dropped from a low balcony. Ignoring air resistance, which statement describes its motion?
5
A
It falls with constant acceleration.
B
It falls with constant speed.
C
It falls with decreasing acceleration.
D
It falls with decreasing speed.
Which statement about the mass of a falling object is correct? A
It decreases as the object falls.
B
It is equal to the weight of the object.
C
It is measured in newtons.
D
It stays the same as the object falls.
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
4 6
The weights of four objects, 1 to 4, are compared using a balance.
2
2
1
4 2
3
Which object is the lightest? A 7
8
B
object 1
C
object 2
D
object 3
object 4
Which of the following is a unit of density? A
cm3 / g
B
g / cm2
C
g / cm3
D
kg / m2
A piece of card has its centre of mass at M. Which diagram shows how it hangs when suspended by a thread? A
B
C
D
M M M
9
M
An experiment is carried out to measure the extension of a rubber band for different loads. The results are shown below. load / N length / cm
0
1
15.2
16.2
0
1.0
extension / cm
2
3 18.6
2.1
3.4
Which figure is missing from the table? A
16.5
UCLES 2004
B
17.3
C
17.4
0625/01/M/J/04
D
18.3
5 10 The diagram shows a man diving into water.
Which form of energy is increasing as he falls? A
chemical
B
gravitational
C
kinetic
D
strain
11 A boy and a girl run up a hill in the same time.
boy weighs 600 N
girl weighs 500 N
The boy weighs more than the girl. Which statement is true about the power produced? A
The boy produces more power.
B
The girl produces more power.
C
They both produce the same power.
D
It is impossible to tell who produces more power.
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
6 12 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer. The barometer reading is h cm of mercury.
S
h
mercury What is the pressure at S? A
approximately zero
B
atmospheric pressure
C
atmospheric pressure + h cm of mercury
D
h cm of mercury
13 Two boys X and Y each have the same total weight and are standing on soft ground.
X
Y
Which boy is more likely to sink into the soft ground and why? boy more likely to sink
pressure on soft ground
A
X
larger than Y
B
X
smaller than Y
C
Y
larger than X
D
Y
smaller than X
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
7 14 A student places his thumb firmly on the outlet of a bicycle pump, to stop the air coming out.
trapped air direction of motion handle What happens to the pressure and to the volume of the trapped air as the pump handle is pushed in? pressure
volume
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
remains the same
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
remains the same
15 A balloon is inflated in a cold room. When the room becomes much warmer, the balloon becomes larger. How does the behaviour of the air molecules in the balloon explain this? A
The molecules become larger.
B
The molecules evaporate.
C
The molecules move more quickly.
D
The molecules repel each other.
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
8 16 A substance is heated at a steady rate. It changes from a solid to a liquid, and then to a gas. The graph shows how its temperature changes with time.
S temperature R Q P time Which parts of the graph show a change of state taking place? A
P and R
B
P and S
C
Q and R
D
Q and S
17 An engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. The rod is just too big to fit into the hole of the washer. steel washer
steel rod
How can the engineer fit the washer onto the rod? A
cool the washer and put it over the rod
B
cool the washer and rod to the same temperature and push them together
C
heat the rod and then place it in the hole
D
heat the washer and place it over the rod
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
9 18 An experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat. Balls are stuck with wax to rods made from different metals, as shown in diagram X. The rods are heated at one end. Some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram Y. Which labelled metal is the best conductor of heat? diagram X
diagram Y A
h
e
a
t
B
h
before heating
C
e
a
D
t
after heating
19 Thermometer X is held above an ice cube and thermometer Y is held the same distance below the ice cube. After several minutes, the reading on one thermometer changes. The ice cube does not melt. thermometer X
ice cube
thermometer Y
Which thermometer reading changes and why? thermometer
reason
A
X
cool air rises from the ice cube
B
X
warm air rises from the ice cube
C
Y
cool air falls from the ice cube
D
Y
warm air falls from the ice cube
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
10 20 Water waves change direction when they move from shallow water to deep water.
new wave direction original wave direction deep water shallow water
What is the name of this effect? A
diffraction
B
dispersion
C
reflection
D
refraction
21 A vertical stick is dipped up and down in water at P. In two seconds, three wave crests are produced on the surface of the water.
Y wave crests
P
X
Which statement is true? A
Distance X is the amplitude of the waves.
B
Distance Y is the wavelength of the waves.
C
Each circle represents a wavefront.
D
The frequency of the waves is 3 Hz.
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
11 22 A plane mirror is on a wall. Which is a correct description of the image formed by the mirror? A
the right way up and smaller than the object
B
the right way up and the same size as the object
C
upside down and smaller than the object
D
upside down and the same size as the object
23 The diagram shows a ray of light entering a block of glass. normal ray of light 2 air glass
1 3 4
Which numbered angles are the angles of incidence and of refraction? angle of incidence
angle of refraction
A
1
3
B
1
4
C
2
3
D
2
4
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
12 24 Three rays of light fall on a converging lens as shown.
lens
Which diagram shows the path of the rays after passing through the lens?
A
B
C
D
25 Which type of wave cannot travel through a vacuum? A
infra-red radiation
B
microwaves
C
sound waves
D
X-rays
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
13 26 An engineer standing at P hears the sound of an explosion at X. Z
P
Y X
DANGER BLASTING
V
W
After the explosion, she hears two bangs. One bang is heard a fraction of a second after the other. The second bang is an echo from A
XY.
B
PV.
C
ZY.
D
WX.
27 How can a permanent magnet be demagnetised? A
cool the magnet for a long time
B
hit the magnet repeatedly with a hammer
C
leave the magnet in a coil which carries direct current
D
pass a small current through the magnet
28 An electromagnet is used to separate magnetic metals from non-magnetic metals. Why is steel unsuitable as the core of the electromagnet? A
It is a good conductor of electricity.
B
It forms a permanent magnet.
C
It has a high density.
D
It has a high thermal capacity.
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
14 29 Which circuit shows how a voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference across the cell? A
B
C
V
D
V
V
V
30 A polythene rod repels an inflated balloon hanging from a nylon thread. What charges must the rod and the balloon carry? A
The rod and the balloon carry opposite charges.
B
The rod and the balloon carry like charges.
C
The rod is charged but the balloon is not.
D
The balloon is charged but the rod is not.
31 An electrical component is to be placed in the circuit at Z, to allow the brightness of the lamp to be varied from bright to dim.
Z
What should be connected at Z? A
B
C
V
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
D
15 32 The circuit shown contains four lamps and three switches.
switch 1 lamp 1 switch 2
lamp 2
lamp 3 switch 3 lamp 4
Which switches must be closed to light only lamps 1 and 3? A
switch 1 only
B
switch 1 and switch 2 only
C
switch 1 and switch 3 only
D
switch 2 and switch 3 only
33 The diagram shows a torch containing two 2 V cells, a switch and a lamp.
plastic case brass connecting strip
switch lamp
What is the circuit diagram for the torch? A
UCLES 2004
B
C
0625/01/M/J/04
D
[Turn over
16 34 Which statement is correct? A
A fuse is included in a circuit to prevent the current becoming too high.
B
A fuse should be connected to the neutral wire in a plug.
C
An electric circuit will only work if it includes a fuse.
D
An earth wire is needed to prevent the fuse blowing.
35 A straight wire carrying a current produces a magnetic field. Which diagram shows the correct shape of the field?
A
B
current
current
C
D current
UCLES 2004
current
0625/01/M/J/04
17 36 A student carries out an experiment to see the effect of a magnetic field on a wire carrying a current. The wire moves upwards as shown. wire moves upwards
N
S direction of current
What should the student do to make the wire move downwards? A
change the direction of the current
B
move the poles of the magnet closer together
C
send a smaller current through the wire
D
use a stronger magnet
37 A beam of cathode rays passes through an electric field between two parallel plates.
+ + + + + + cathode rays _ _ _ _ _ _
In which direction is the beam deflected? A
into the page
B
out of the page
C
towards the bottom of the page
D
towards the top of the page
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
18 38 Which line correctly describes α-particles? electric charge
penetrates 1 cm of aluminium?
A
negative
yes
B
negative
no
C
positive
yes
D
positive
no
39 A small amount of a radioactive isotope contains 72 billion unstable nuclei. The half-life of the isotope is 4 hours. How many unstable nuclei would remain after 12 hours? A
6 billion
B
9 billion
C
18 billion
D
24 billion
40 How many nucleons are in a nucleus of A
19
B
20
39 19 K
C
? 39
D
58
Go to answers
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/01
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
October/November 2004 45 minutes Additional Materials:
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C, and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. IB04 11_0625_01/2RP UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2 1
A floor is covered with square tiles. The diagram shows a ruler on the tiles.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 cm
How long is one tile? A 2
B
3 cm
C
6 cm
D
9 cm
12 cm
The diagrams show the times on a stopclock at the beginning and at the end of an experiment. stopclock at beginning 0
stopclock at end 0
s
s
45
15
45
15
30
30
How long did the experiment take? A 3
B
10 s
C
25 s
D
35 s
45 s
Which speed / time graph applies to an object at rest? A
B
speed
0
C
speed
0
© UCLES 2004
time
0
0
D
speed
time
0
0625/01/O/N/04
speed
0
time
0
0
time
3 4
A racing car is fitted with an on-board computer. Every time the car passes the starting line, the computer records the distance travelled in the next 2 seconds. Which set of data shows that the car is increasing in speed during the 2 seconds? A
B distance travelled / m
time / s 0
0
0
0
1
100
1
90
2
200
2
180
C time / s
5
distance travelled / m
time / s
D distance travelled / m
time / s
distance travelled / m
0
0
0
0
1
80
1
100
2
190
2
180
A spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.
spring
metal
What is the name given to the force that stretches the spring? A
friction
B
mass
C
pressure
D
weight
© UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
[Turn over
4 6
The diagram shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. The mass of the liquid is 16 g.
25 cm3 20 15 10 5
What is the density of the liquid? A 7
320 g / cm 3
B
36 g / cm 3
C
1.25 g / cm 3
D
0.8 g / cm 3
A student carries out an experiment to plot an extension / load graph for a spring. The diagrams show the apparatus at the start of the experiment and with a load added. start
with load added x
y
What is the extension caused by the load? A 8
x
B
y
C
y+x
D
y–x
Three horizontal forces act on a car that is moving along a straight, level road. air resistance friction
driving force
Which combination of forces would result in the car moving at constant speed? air resistance
friction
driving force
A
200 N
1000 N
800 N
B
800 N
1000 N
200 N
C
800 N
200 N
1000 N
D
1000 N
200 N
800 N
© UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
5 9
A child pushes a toy car along a level floor and then lets it go. As the car slows down, what is the main energy change? A
from chemical to heat
B
from chemical to kinetic
C
from kinetic to gravitational (potential)
D
from kinetic to heat
10 The diagram shows a cyclist riding along a hilly road. At which position does the cyclist have the least gravitational (potential) energy? B C D
A
11 A pin is squeezed between finger and thumb. finger pinhead
pin thumb
Which statement is correct? A
The force of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.
B
The force of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.
C
The pressure of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.
D
The pressure of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.
© UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
[Turn over
6 12 Liquid X has a density of 1010 kg / m3. Liquid Y has a density of 950 kg / m3. The liquids are poured into tubes as shown. Which tube has the greatest pressure on its base? B
A
liquid X
C
liquid Y
liquid X
D
liquid Y
13 Some water molecules escape from the surface of a lake. Which name is given to this process? A
boiling
B
convection
C
evaporation
D
radiation
14 The diagram represents gas molecules contained in a cylinder. The piston is moved slowly downwards and the temperature of the gas stays the same.
piston
cylinder
gas molecule
Why does the pressure of the gas increase? A
The molecules collide harder with the walls.
B
The molecules collide more often with the walls.
C
The molecules move more quickly.
D
The number of molecules increases.
© UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
7 15 To mark the lower fixed point of a Celsius scale on a thermometer, the thermometer should be placed in A
pure alcohol.
B
pure distilled water.
C
pure melting ice.
D
pure mercury.
16 A glass flask full of cool water is placed in a container of hot water. X
glass flask full of cool water
container of hot water
What will happen to the level of water at X as the cool water becomes warmer? A
It will fall.
B
It will rise.
C
It will rise then fall.
D
It will stay the same.
17 A beaker of water is heated at its base. Why does the water at the base rise? A
It contracts and becomes less dense.
B
It contracts and becomes more dense.
C
It expands and becomes less dense.
D
It expands and becomes more dense.
© UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
[Turn over
8 18 Which of these waves is longitudinal? A
light waves
B
sound waves
C
water waves
D
X-ray waves
19 Waves move from deep water to shallow water where they are slower. Which diagram shows what happens to the waves? A
B
C
deep water
deep water
D
deep water
shallow water
deep water
shallow water
shallow water
shallow water
20 Which type of radiation lies between visible light and microwaves in the electromagnetic spectrum? A
infra-red
B
radio waves
C
ultra-violet
D
X-rays
21 The critical angle for a glass / air boundary is C. Which diagram shows the correct path of the light ray? A
air glass
B
air glass C
© UCLES 2004
C
air glass
air glass C
C
0625/01/O/N/04
D
C
9 22 The diagram shows the image of a clockface in a plane mirror.
Which of these times is shown? A
02.25
B
02.35
C
09.25
D
09.35
23 What is the approximate range of audible frequencies for most humans? A
10 Hz to 10 000 Hz
B
20 Hz to 20 000 Hz
C
10 kHz to 10 000 kHz
D
20 kHz to 20 000 kHz
24 A 100 metre race is started by firing a gun. The gun makes a bang and a puff of smoke comes out of the gun as shown.
starter
finishing judge
100 m
When does the finishing judge see the smoke and hear the bang? sees the smoke
hears the bang
A
immediately
immediately
B
immediately
after about 0.3 s
C
after about 0.3 s
immediately
D
after about 0.3 s
after about 0.3 s
© UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
[Turn over
10 25 Six small compasses are placed around a bar magnet. Which diagram shows the directions in which the compass needles point? B
A
N
N
S
S
C
N
D
S
N
S
26 A student carries out four tests with a magnet. Which result shown is not correct? arrangement A
S
magnet
N
B
S
magnet
N
C
N
magnet
S
D
N
magnet
S
result iron bar
S
attracts
magnet
N
copper bar
N
magnet
attracts
no effect
S
repels
27 A circuit is set up with a gap between two terminals X and Y. The four strips of material shown in the diagram are connected in turn across the gap. Which strip completes the circuit so that the lamp lights?
X
A wood
Y
© UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
B glass
C steel
D rubber
11 28 A pupil measures the potential difference across a device and the current in it. Which calculation gives the resistance of the device? A
current + potential difference
B
current ÷ potential difference
C
potential difference ÷ current
D
potential difference x current
29 Which circuit could be used to find the resistance of resistor R?
A
B
V
R R A
A V
C
D
A
R
R
A
V
V
30 In the circuit shown, the reading on ammeter 1 is 2 A. 2Ω
2Ω ammeter 1 reading = 2 A
A
A
ammeter 2 reading = ?
What is the reading on ammeter 2? A
0A
© UCLES 2004
B
1A
C
2A
0625/01/O/N/04
D
4A
[Turn over
12 31 In which position in the circuit shown should a switch be placed so that both lamps can be switched on or off at the same time?
A
B
C
D
32 In the circuits shown, all the resistors are identical. Which circuit has the least resistance?
A
B
C
D
33 Why are electric circuits often fitted with fuses? A
Fuses break the circuit if the current is too high.
B
Fuses only allow the current through in the correct direction.
C
Fuses return any excess current to earth.
D
Fuses use up any spare current.
34 A mains circuit can safely supply a current of 40 A. A hair-drier takes 2 A. It is connected to the circuit by a lead which can carry up to 5 A. Which of these fuses would be best to use in the plug fitted to the hair-drier lead? A
1 A fuse
© UCLES 2004
B
3 A fuse
C
10 A fuse
0625/01/O/N/04
D
50 A fuse
13 35 The diagram represents a transformer.
input voltage
P
output voltage
S
Which arrangement could be used to make the output voltage higher than the input voltage? number of turns on primary coil P
number of turns on secondary coil S
type of input
A
100
50
a.c.
B
100
50
d.c.
C
50
100
a.c.
D
50
100
d.c.
36 A student sets up the apparatus shown in order to make a relay.
contact
core
spring
Which metal should be used to make the core? A
aluminium
B
copper
C
iron
D
steel
© UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
[Turn over
14 37 Which particles are emitted during thermionic emission? A
electrons
B
ions
C
neutrons
D
protons
38 The equation shows the decay of the nuclide X. 226 88
X → QP Y +
4 2α
What are the values of P and Q? P
Q
A
230
90
B
230
86
C
222
90
D
222
86
39 During a fire in a laboratory storeroom, some radioactive material was spilled. A firefighter detected radiation through the lead-lined walls of the storeroom. The radiation was emitted by the radioactive material.
lead-lined storeroom
firefighter detector
radioactive material
Which type of radiation was being detected? A
α-particles
B
β-particles
C
γ-rays
D
X-rays
40 How many neutrons are in a nucleus of 146C ? A
0
© UCLES 2004
B
6
C
8
0625/01/O/N/04
D
14
Go to answers
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/01
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2005 45 minutes Additional Materials:
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. IB05 06_0625_01/RP UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2 1
A decorator wishes to calculate the area of a bathroom tile so that he can estimate the amount of adhesive that he needs to buy. What must he use?
2
A
a measuring cylinder only
B
a ruler only
C
a measuring cylinder and a clock only
D
a measuring cylinder and a ruler only
The three balls shown are dropped from a bench.
aluminium
lead
wood
Which balls have the same acceleration?
3
A
aluminium and lead only
B
aluminium and wood only
C
lead and wood only
D
aluminium, lead and wood
A car accelerates from traffic lights. The graph shows how the car’s speed changes with time. speed m/s 20
0 0
10
time / s
How far does the car travel before it reaches a steady speed? A
10 m
© UCLES 2005
B
20 m
C
100 m
0625/01/M/J/05
D
200 m
3 4
5
Which statement is correct? A
The mass of a bottle of water at the North Pole is different from its mass at the Equator.
B
The mass of a bottle of water is measured in newtons.
C
The weight of a bottle of water and its mass are the same thing.
D
The weight of a bottle of water is one of the forces acting on it.
Two blocks X and Y are placed on a beam as shown. The beam balances on a pivot at its centre. Y X
pivot
What does this show about X and Y?
6
A
They have the same mass and the same density.
B
They have the same mass and the same weight.
C
They have the same volume and the same density.
D
They have the same volume and the same weight.
The masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid into it are shown in the diagram. cm3
cm3
200
200
100
100
liquid
mass = 80 g
mass = 180 g
What is the density of the liquid? A
100 g / cm3 120
© UCLES 2005
B
100 g / cm3 140
C
180 g / cm3 120
0625/01/M/J/05
D
180 g / cm3 140
[Turn over
4 7
A girl and a boy are pulling in opposite directions on a rope. The forces acting on the rope are shown in the diagram. girl
boy 200 N
150 N rope
Which single force has the same effect as the two forces shown?
8
A
50 N acting towards the girl
B
350 N acting towards the girl
C
50 N acting towards the boy
D
350 N acting towards the boy
Objects with different masses are hung on a 10 cm spring. The diagram shows how much the spring stretches.
10 cm 20 cm 30 cm
100 g
M
The extension of the spring is directly proportional to the mass hung on it. What is the mass of object M? A
110 g
© UCLES 2005
B
150 g
C
200 g
0625/01/M/J/05
D
300 g
5 9
What is designed to change electrical energy into kinetic energy? A
capacitor
B
generator
C
motor
D
transformer
10 A power station uses nuclear fission to obtain energy. In this process, nuclear energy is first changed into A
chemical energy.
B
electrical energy.
C
gravitational energy.
D
internal energy.
11 A ball is released from rest and rolls down a track from the position shown. What is the furthest position the ball could reach?
C
ball starts here
B D A
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
[Turn over
6 12 A water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply to a house. It gives a reading of h cm of water. gas supply h cm
Why is it better to use water rather than mercury in this manometer? A
h would be too large if mercury were used.
B
h would be too small if mercury were used.
C
The tube would need to be narrower if mercury were used.
D
The tube would need to be wider if mercury were used.
13 A farmer has two carts. The carts have the same weight, but one has four narrow wheels and the other has four wide wheels.
narrow wheel
wide wheel
In rainy weather, which cart sinks less into soft ground, and why? cart wheels
why
A
narrow
greater pressure on the ground
B
narrow
less pressure on the ground
C
wide
greater pressure on the ground
D
wide
less pressure on the ground
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
7 14 Viewed through a microscope, very small particles can be seen moving with Brownian motion. Which line in the table is correct? type of motion of particles
particles are suspended in
A
vibration
a liquid or a gas
B
vibration
a solid, a liquid or a gas
C
random
a liquid or a gas
D
random
a solid, a liquid or a gas
15 A measured mass of gas is placed in a cylinder at atmospheric pressure and is then slowly compressed. piston gas piston pushed in
The temperature of the gas does not change. What happens to the pressure of the gas? A
It drops to zero.
B
It decreases, but not to zero.
C
It stays the same.
D
It increases.
16 The graph shows the change in temperature of a material as it is heated. Which part on the graph shows when the material is boiling?
D
temperature C B A
time
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
[Turn over
8 17 An experiment is set up as shown.
pressure gauge
air flask water
heat What does the pressure gauge show as the air in the flask becomes hotter? A
a steady pressure
B
a decrease in pressure
C
an increase in pressure
D
an increase and then a decrease in pressure
18 An iron bar is held with one end in a fire. The other end soon becomes too hot to hold.
hand
fire iron bar
How has the heat travelled along the iron bar? A
by conduction
B
by convection
C
by expansion
D
by radiation
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
9 19 The diagram shows a block of ice placed in a warm room. At which point is the temperature the lowest? A B clamp
ice
table
C
D
20 The drawing shows a wave. Which labelled distance is the wavelength?
A B
D C
21 Radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.
hill
The waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be A
diffracted.
B
radiated.
C
reflected.
D
refracted.
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
[Turn over
10 22 Which diagram correctly shows a ray of light passing through a rectangular glass block?
A
B
C
D
23 The ray diagram shows how an image is formed by a converging lens.
24 cm
10 cm
8 cm
What is the focal length of this lens? A
8 cm
© UCLES 2005
B
10 cm
C
18 cm
0625/01/M/J/05
D
24 cm
11 24 A fire alarm is not loud enough. An engineer adjusts it so that it produces a note of the same pitch which is louder. What effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound? amplitude
frequency
A
larger
larger
B
larger
same
C
same
larger
D
same
same
25 To estimate the width of a valley, a climber starts a stopwatch as he shouts. He hears an echo from the opposite side of the valley after 1.0 s. sound
climber
valley The sound travels at 340 m / s. What is the width of the valley? A
85 m
B
170 m
C
340 m
D
680 m
26 Which material is used for the core of an electromagnet? A
aluminium
B
copper
C
iron
D
steel
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
[Turn over
12 27 A brass rod is positioned in an east-west direction and a plotting compass is placed at each end. brass rod N
plotting compass
Which diagram shows the positions of the needles of the plotting compasses? A
B
C
D
28 How many of the following materials conduct electricity? aluminium silver iron plastic A
1
© UCLES 2005
B
2
C
3
0625/01/M/J/05
D
4
13 29 In which circuit does the voltmeter read the potential difference across the lamp? A
B
V
V
C
D
V
V
30 In the circuit below, X and Y are identical 6 V lamps. 6V
X
switch
Y
What happens when the switch is closed? A
X lights more brightly than Y.
B
Y lights more brightly than X.
C
X and Y light with equal brightness.
D
Neither X nor Y light.
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
[Turn over
14 31 The diagram shows a circuit with three ammeters, X, Y and Z.
A X A A
Y Z
Which set of readings is possible? X
Y
Z
A
2A
3A
5A
B
3A
2A
5A
C
3A
3A
3A
D
5A
2A
3A
32 A lamp is to be connected in a circuit so that the p.d. across it can be varied from 0 to 6 V. Which circuit would be most suitable?
A
B
6V
6V
C
D
6V
© UCLES 2005
6V
0625/01/M/J/05
15 33 A student makes the circuit shown. 5 A fuse
The fuse has blown and stopped the current. What could have caused this? A
The current rating of the fuse was too high.
B
The current was too large.
C
The lamp was loose.
D
The voltage was too small.
34 Which graph shows the output voltage from a simple a.c. generator?
voltage A
0
time
voltage B
0
time
voltage C
0
time
voltage D
© UCLES 2005
0
time
0625/01/M/J/05
[Turn over
16 35 A transformer has 50 turns on its primary coil and 100 turns on its secondary coil. An a.c. voltage of 25.0 V is connected across the primary coil.
25.0 V primary coil 50 turns
secondary coil 100 turns
What is the voltage across the secondary coil? A
B
12.5 V
C
50.0 V
175 V
D
200 V
36 Two circuits are set up as shown. The iron rods are placed close together, and are free to move.
S iron rod
X
iron rod
What happens to the size of the gap at X when switch S is closed? A
It decreases.
B
It decreases then increases.
C
It increases.
D
It does not change.
37 The diagram shows a simple cathode-ray tube. Which part emits the electrons? –
+
D A
© UCLES 2005
B
C
0625/01/M/J/05
17 38 Which type of radiation has the greatest ionising effect? A
α-particles
B
β-particles
C
γ-rays
D
all have the same ionising effect
39 A powder contains 400 mg of a radioactive material that emits α-particles. The half-life of the material is 5 days. What mass of that material remains after 10 days? A
0 mg
B
40 mg
C
100 mg
D
200 mg
40 In the symbol below, A is the nucleon number and Z is the proton number. A Z
X
What is represented by the symbol? A
an electron
B
a neutron
C
a nuclide
D
an X-ray
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
18 BLANK PAGE
0625/01/M/J/05
19 BLANK PAGE
0625/01/M/J/05
20 BLANK PAGE
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been reproduced. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/01/M/J/05
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/01
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core)
October/November 2005 45 minutes
Additional Materials:
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. IB05 11_0625_01/RP UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2 1
A measuring cylinder is used to measure the volume of a liquid. cm3
50
50
40 30
40
20 10
What is the volume of the liquid? A 2
43 cm3
B
C
46 cm3
D
48 cm3
54 cm3
The graph represents part of the journey of a car. 30 speed m / s 20 10 0 0
10
20
30 time / s
40
What distance does the car travel during this part of the journey? A 3
150 m
B
300 m
C
600 m
D
1200 m
D
16 s
A man crosses a road 8.0 m wide at a speed of 2.0 m / s. movement of man man 8.0 m
How long does the man take to cross the road? A
4.0 s
© UCLES 2005
B
6.0 s
C
10 s
0625/01/O/N/05
3 4
5
What is the gravitational force that the Earth exerts on an object? A
the density of the object
B
the mass of the object
C
the volume of the object
D
the weight of the object
In an experiment, five identical bags of rice are balanced by a 10 kg mass.
five bags of rice
10 kg mass pivot
Two bags of rice are added to the other five. What mass will now balance the bags? A 6
B
3.5 kg
C
7.0 kg
D
10 kg
14 kg
The same mass of four different liquids is placed in some measuring cylinders. Which measuring cylinder contains the liquid with the greatest density?
© UCLES 2005
A
B
C
D
cm3
cm3
cm3
cm3
10
10
8
8
6
6
4
4
2
2
0625/01/O/N/05
25
25
20
20
15
15
10
10
5
5
[Turn over
4 7
The diagram shows a flat metal plate that may be hung from a nail so that it can rotate about any of four holes.
holes
holes
flat metal plate
What is the smallest number of holes from which the flat metal plate should be hung in order to find its centre of gravity? A 8
B
1
C
2
D
3
4
Two equal forces F act on each of four planks. Which plank turns? A
C
pivot
D
F
F
F
9
B
F
pivot
F
F
F
pivot
F
pivot
Which type of power station does not use steam from boiling water to generate electricity? A
geothermal
B
hydroelectric
C
nuclear
D
oil-fired
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
5 10 A man standing at the top of a cliff throws a stone. X
Y
Which forms of energy does the stone have at X and at Y? energy at X
energy at Y
A
gravitational only
kinetic only
B
kinetic only
gravitational only
C
gravitational only
gravitational and kinetic
D
gravitational and kinetic
gravitational and kinetic
11 Four blocks, each weighing 10 N, rest on a horizontal table. Which block applies the greatest pressure on the table?
A
B
C
D table
10 N
© UCLES 2005
10 N
10 N
0625/01/O/N/05
10 N
[Turn over
6 12 The diagram shows a mercury barometer. 25 cm mercury 75 cm
5 cm
Which distance is used to calculate the pressure of the atmosphere? A
25 cm
B
C
75 cm
D
80 cm
100 cm
13 A drop of liquid falls on a student’s skin and quickly evaporates. What is the effect on the skin and the reason? A
The skin cools because the most energetic molecules escape from the liquid.
B
The skin cools because the most energetic molecules remain in the liquid.
C
The skin warms because the most energetic molecules escape from the liquid.
D
The skin warms because the most energetic molecules remain in the liquid.
14 A suspension of pollen grains in water is observed under a microscope. The pollen grains are seen to be moving all the time. Which diagram illustrates this motion?
A
© UCLES 2005
B
C
0625/01/O/N/05
D
7 15 A knife is being sharpened on a rotating sharpening-stone. A spark flies off and lands on the operator’s hand. The spark is a very hot, very small piece of metal. The operator feels nothing. What does this show about the piece of metal? A
It has a high thermal capacity.
B
It has a low thermal capacity.
C
It is a good conductor of heat.
D
It is a poor conductor of heat.
16 Which substance is a liquid at a room temperature of 25 oC? substance
melting point / oC
boiling point / oC
A
–218
–183
B
–39
357
C
44
280
D
119
444
17 The diagram shows a cooling unit in a refrigerator.
cooling unit
Why is the cooling unit placed at the top? A
Cold air falls and warm air is displaced upwards.
B
Cold air is a bad conductor so heat is not conducted into the refrigerator.
C
Cold air is a good conductor so heat is conducted out of the refrigerator.
D
Cold air stops at the top and so prevents convection.
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
[Turn over
8 18 How does heat from the Sun reach the Earth? A
conduction only
B
convection only
C
radiation only
D
conduction, convection and radiation
19 The diagrams show four sources of waves. Which source generates longitudinal waves? A
stick pushed up and down in water
© UCLES 2005
B
C
radio transmitter
0625/01/O/N/05
loudspeaker
D
lamp
9 20 In a ripple tank, water waves move towards a barrier with a narrow gap. barrier
water waves
Which diagram best shows the waves beyond the barrier?
© UCLES 2005
A
B
C
D
0625/01/O/N/05
[Turn over
10 21 A ray of light passes from glass into air at an angle of incidence of 40o. The glass has a critical angle of 42 o. Which diagram shows what happens to the ray?
B
A
air
air
glass
glass 40o
40o
C
D
air
air
glass
glass 40o
40o
22 Rays of light enter and leave a box. ray 1
ray 1
ray 2
ray 2
What could be inside the box to make the rays behave as shown? A
a converging lens
B
a parallel-sided glass block
C
a plane mirror
D
a triangular prism
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
11 23 A thin converging lens is used to produce, on a screen, a focused image of a candle. screen image lens
candle
The screen and the lens are moved back and forth and various focused images are produced on the screen. Which statement is always true? A
The image is at the principal focus (focal point) of the lens.
B
The image is bigger than the object.
C
The image is closer to the lens than the object is.
D
The image is inverted.
24 Two astronauts without radios can only communicate in space if their helmets are touching. There is no air in space.
What does this show about sound? through a solid
through a vacuum
A
can travel
can travel
B
can travel
cannot travel
C
cannot travel
can travel
D
cannot travel
cannot travel
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
[Turn over
12 25 When the horn on a ship is sounded, the passengers hear an echo from a cliff after 4.0 s. If the speed of sound is 340 m / s, how far away is the cliff? A
170 m
B
C
340 m
D
680 m
1360 m
26 How many of the following methods could be used to demagnetise a piece of steel? heating it until it is red hot pulling it from a coil that is carrying an alternating current placing it in an east-west direction and hammering it putting it in a coil which is carrying a direct current A
1
B
C
2
D
3
4
27 Two rods X and Y look the same. magnet
P N
rod X
S
Q
R
rod Y S
The N pole of a magnet is brought close, in turn, to each end of both rods. The results of these four actions are shown in the table. end tested
result
P
attraction
Q
attraction
R
attraction
S
repulsion
Which of the rods is a permanent magnet? A
neither of the rods
B
both of the rods
C
rod X only
D
rod Y only
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
13 28 Which circuit should be used to find the resistance of a lamp?
B
A
A A
V V
D
C
V V A
A
29 The table shows the voltage and current ratings for four electric heaters. Which heater has the least resistance? voltage / V
current / A
A
110
5.0
B
110
10
C
230
5.0
D
230
10
30 Which component can store energy for use in time delay circuits? A
capacitor
B
potentiometer
C
resistor
D
thermistor
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
[Turn over
14 31 When the circuit shown is connected with switch S open, the 6 V lamp glows. 6V
R 6 V lamp
S
What happens to the brightness of the lamp when switch S is closed? A
It becomes brighter.
B
It remains the same.
C
It becomes dimmer.
D
It goes off.
32 Why are the electric lamps in a house lighting circuit normally connected in parallel? A
The current in every circuit must be the same.
B
The lamps are always switched on and off at the same time.
C
The voltage across each lamp must be the mains voltage.
D
When one of the lamps blows, all the others go out.
33 In the circuit shown, one of the fuses blows and all the lamps go out. Which fuse blows?
A
B
© UCLES 2005
C
0625/01/O/N/05
D
15 34 Which arrangement may be used to step up a voltage?
A
a.c. input
output
C
B
iron core
d.c. input
output
D
iron core
a.c. input
output
iron core
iron core
d.c. input
output
35 The diagrams show a straight wire carrying a current into the paper. Which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern due to this current? A
B
wire
© UCLES 2005
C
wire
wire
0625/01/O/N/05
D
wire
[Turn over
16 36 A magnet is suspended from a spring so that it can move freely inside a coil which is connected to a sensitive centre-zero ammeter.
spring N centre-zero ammeter S What does the ammeter show when the magnet vibrates slowly up and down? A
a reading constantly changing from left to right and right to left
B
a steady reading to the left
C
a steady reading to the right
D
a steady zero reading
37 Charged particles are emitted from the cathode of an oscilloscope. What is the name and the charge of these particles? name of particles
charge of particles
A
electrons
negative
B
electrons
positive
C
protons
negative
D
protons
positive
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
17 38 A radioactive source emits radiation that can pass through a sheet of paper but not through thick aluminium. paper (all the radiation passes through)
thick aluminium (none of the radiation passes through)
radiation
What does this show about the radiation? A
It is α-particles.
B
It is β-particles.
C
It is γ-rays.
D
It is a mixture of α-particles and γ-rays.
39 An unstable nucleus has 145 neutrons and 92 protons. It emits a β-particle. How many neutrons and protons does the nucleus have after emitting the β-particle? neutrons
protons
A
144
92
B
144
93
C
145
91
D
145
93
40 Which particles are found in the nucleus of an atom? A
neutrons and protons only
B
neutrons only
C
protons and electrons only
D
protons, electrons and neutrons
© UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
18 BLANK PAGE
0625/01/O/N/05
19 BLANK PAGE
0625/01/O/N/05
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/01/O/N/05
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/01
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2006 45 minutes Additional Materials:
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 16 printed pages. IB06 06_0625_01/3RP UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2 1
A measuring cylinder contains some water. When a stone is put in the water, the level rises. cm3 200
cm3 200
150
150
100
100
50
50
stone
What is the volume of the stone? A 2
50 cm3
B
70 cm3
75 cm3
C
D
125 cm3
The graph represents the movement of a body accelerating from rest. 10 speed m/s
8 6 4 2 0
1
2
3
4
5
time / s After 5 seconds how far has the body moved? A 3
2m
B
10 m
C
25 m
D
50 m
A child is standing on the platform of a station, watching the trains.
A train travelling at 30 m / s takes 3 s to pass the child. What is the length of the train? A
10 m
© UCLES 2006
B
30 m
C
90 m
0625/01/M/J/06
D
135 m
3 4
Below are four statements about the effects of forces on objects. Three of the statements are correct. Which statement is incorrect?
5
A
A force can change the length of an object.
B
A force can change the mass of an object.
C
A force can change the shape of an object.
D
A force can change the speed of an object.
A simple balance has two pans suspended from the ends of arms of equal length. When it is balanced, the pointer is at 0. arm
pivot
pointer 0
pan X
pan Y
Four masses (in total) are placed on the pans, with one or more on pan X and the rest on pan Y. Which combination of masses can be used to balance the pans?
6
A
1 g, 1 g, 5 g, 10 g
B
1 g, 2 g, 2 g, 5 g
C
2 g, 5 g, 5 g, 10 g
D
2 g, 5 g, 10 g, 10 g
A person measures the length, width, height and mass of a rectangular metal block. Which of these measurements are needed in order to calculate the density of the metal? A
mass only
B
height and mass only
C
length, width and height only
D
length, width, height and mass
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
[Turn over
4 7
Two forces act on an object. In which situation is it impossible for the object to be in equilibrium?
8
A
The two forces act in the same direction.
B
The two forces act through the same point.
C
The two forces are of the same type.
D
The two forces are the same size.
The diagram shows four models of buses placed on different ramps. centre of mass
centre of mass
centre of mass
centre of mass
How many of these models will fall over? A 9
1
B
2
C
3
D
4
Which form of energy do we receive directly from the Sun? A
chemical
B
light
C
nuclear
D
sound
10 A labourer on a building site lifts a heavy concrete block onto a lorry. He then lifts a light block the same distance in the same time. Which of the following is true? work done in lifting the blocks
power exerted by labourer
A
less for the light block
less for the light block
B
less for the light block
the same for both blocks
C
more for the light block
more for the light block
D
the same for both blocks
more for the light block
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
5 11 The diagram shows a thick sheet of glass. Which edge must it stand on to cause the greatest pressure?
A B
D C
12 A manometer is being used to measure the pressure of the gas inside a tank. A, B, C and D show the manometer at different times. At which time is the gas pressure inside the tank greatest?
A
B
C
D
gas
13 Brownian motion is seen by looking at smoke particles through a microscope. How do the smoke particles move in Brownian motion? A
all in the same direction
B
at random
C
in circles
D
vibrating about fixed points
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
[Turn over
6 14 Driving a car raises the temperature of the tyres. This causes the pressure of the air in the tyres to increase. Why is this? A
Air molecules break up to form separate atoms.
B
Air molecules expand with the rise in temperature.
C
The force between the air molecules increases.
D
The speed of the air molecules increases.
15 To mark a temperature scale on a thermometer, fixed points are needed. Which is a fixed point? A
the bottom end of the thermometer tube
B
the top end of the thermometer tube
C
the temperature of pure melting ice
D
the temperature of pure warm water
16 Four blocks, made of different materials, are each given the same quantity of internal (heat) energy. Which block has the greatest thermal capacity?
© UCLES 2006
A
B
C
D
temperature rise = 2 oC
temperature rise = 4 oC
temperature rise = 6 oC
temperature rise = 8 oC
0625/01/M/J/06
7 17 A long thin bar of copper is heated evenly along its length.
copper bar
heat What happens to the bar? A
It becomes lighter.
B
It becomes longer.
C
It becomes shorter.
D
It bends at the ends.
18 A beaker contains water at room temperature. water
X
Y
How could a convection current be set up in the water? A
cool the water at X
B
cool the water at Y
C
stir the water at X
D
stir the water at Y
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
[Turn over
8 19 Two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. Hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid is put on top as shown. lid small spacer small air gap hot water bench
Which statement is correct? A
Heat loss by radiation is prevented by the small air gap.
B
No heat passes through the sides of either cup.
C
The bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup.
D
The lid is used to reduce heat loss by convection.
20 Which is the best description of the speed of a water wave? A
the distance between one wave crest and the next
B
the distance between the crest of a wave and a trough
C
the distance that a particle of water moves up and down in one second
D
the distance that a wavefront moves along the surface in one second
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
9 21 Water waves travel more slowly in shallow water than in deep water. Which diagram shows what will happen to plane waves in deep water when they enter shallow water?
A deep
B shallow
deep
D
C deep
shallow
deep
shallow
shallow
22 A ray of light passes through a window. Which path does it take? air
glass
air
A B C D
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
[Turn over
10 23 The diagram shows the image of a clock in a plane mirror.
What time is shown? A
02:25
B
02:35
C
09:25
D
09:35
24 The diagram shows a man standing at X who shouts to a man standing at Y.
X N
W
E
S
Y The man’s voice will be heard sooner and more clearly if the wind is blowing towards the A
north.
B
south.
C
east.
D
west.
25 Sounds are made by vibrating objects. A certain object vibrates but a person nearby cannot hear any sound. Which statement might explain why nothing is heard? A
The amplitude of the sound waves is too large.
B
The frequency of the vibration is too high.
C
The sound waves are transverse.
D
The speed of the sound waves is too high.
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
11 26 A student investigates which end of a magnetic compass needle is attracted to a bar magnet. What does the investigation show? A
Both ends of the compass needle are attracted by the north pole of the magnet.
B
Both ends of the compass needle are attracted by the south pole of the magnet.
C
One end of the compass needle is attracted by the north pole and the other end by the south pole.
D
The compass needle is not attracted by either end of the magnet.
27 From which materials are the coil and the core of an electromagnet made? coil
core
A
copper
copper
B
copper
iron
C
iron
copper
D
iron
iron
28 What are the symbols used for the units of current and resistance? unit of current
unit of resistance
A
A
W
B
A
Ω
C
V
W
D
V
Ω
29 When a plastic comb is placed next to a small piece of aluminium foil hanging from a nylon thread, the foil is repelled by the comb. Why is this? A
The comb is charged and the foil is uncharged.
B
The comb is uncharged and the foil is charged.
C
The comb and the foil have charge of opposite signs.
D
The comb and the foil have charge of the same sign.
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
[Turn over
12 30 Which symbol represents an electrical component used to store energy?
A
B
C
D
31 Four lamps and four switches are connected to a power supply as shown in the circuit diagram. When all the switches are closed, all the lamps are lit. When one of the switches is then opened, only one lamp goes out. Which switch is opened?
A
B
C
D
32 Four resistors and an ammeter are connected to a battery as shown. The ammeter reads 2 A. Which of the four labelled points in the circuit is the only one where the current is less than 2 A?
A A C
B
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
D
13 33 Why is a fuse used in an electrical circuit in a house? A
to increase the circuit resistance
B
to keep the power used to a minimum value
C
to prevent a short-circuit from occurring
D
to stop the cables from carrying too much current
34 An electric power tool is being used outdoors in a shower of rain. What is the greatest hazard to the user? A
The cable gets hot and causes burns.
B
The circuit-breaker cuts off the current.
C
The current passes through water and causes a shock.
D
The tool rusts.
35 A current-carrying coil in a magnetic field experiences a turning effect.
variable power supply
N
S
How can the turning effect be increased? A
increase the number of turns on the coil
B
reduce the size of the current
C
reverse the direction of the magnetic field
D
use thinner wire for the coil
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
[Turn over
14 36 A transformer is to be used to produce a 6 V output from a 24 V input. coil X
coil Y
24 V
6V
What are suitable numbers of turns for coil X and for coil Y? number of turns on coil X
number of turns on coil Y
A
240
60
B
240
240
C
240
960
D
960
60
37 A cathode-ray tube has an anode and an earthed cathode. Which line in the table shows the charge and the temperature of the anode? anode charge
anode temperature
A
negative
cool
B
negative
hot
C
positive
cool
D
positive
hot
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
15 38 The diagram shows five atoms in a radioactive substance. The atoms each give out an α-particle. 1st particle atom 1 atom 2
atom 5
atom 4
atom 3 2nd particle
Atom 1 is the first to give out a particle. Atom 3 is the second to give out a particle. Which atom will give out the next particle? A
atom 2
B
atom 4
C
atom 5
D
impossible to tell
39 A Geiger counter detects radiation from radioactive sources. A radioactive source is inside a thick aluminium container as shown.
radioactive source
2m Geiger counter
thick aluminium container Which type of radiation from this source is being detected? A
α-particles
B
β-particles
C
γ-rays
D
radio waves
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
[Turn over
16 40 The nucleus of a neutral atom of lithium is represented by 73 Li. How many protons, electrons and neutrons does the atom contain? protons
electrons
neutrons
A
7
7
3
B
3
7
3
C
3
4
4
D
3
3
4
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/01
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
October/November 2006 45 minutes Additional Materials:
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. IB06 11_0625_01/RP UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2 1
A ruler is used to measure the length of a nail.
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0 cm
What is the length of the nail? A 2
1.3 cm
B
C
2.9 cm
5.2 cm
D
8.1 cm
A cyclist is riding along a road when an animal runs in front of him. The graph shows the cyclist’s motion. He sees the animal at P, starts to brake at Q and stops at R. speed P
0
Q
R 0
time
What is used to find the distance travelled after he applies the brakes? A
the area under line PQ
B
the area under line QR
C
the gradient of line PQ
D
the gradient of line QR
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
3 3
A car travels along the route PQRST in 30 minutes.
S
5 km 10 km
Q 5 km
T
10 km
P
R
What is the average speed of the car?
4
A
10 km / hour
B
20 km / hour
C
30 km / hour
D
60 km / hour
A newton is a unit of force. Which quantity is measured in newtons? A
acceleration
B
density
C
mass
D
weight
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
[Turn over
4 5
A student pours liquid into a measuring cylinder. 100 90 80
measuring cylinder
70 60 50 40
liquid
digital balance
30 20 10
The student records the volume of the liquid from the scale on the measuring cylinder. He then puts the measuring cylinder containing the liquid on a balance and records the mass. What else needs to be measured before the density of the liquid can be calculated? A
the depth of the liquid in the measuring cylinder
B
the mass of the empty measuring cylinder
C
the temperature of the liquid in the measuring cylinder
D
the volume of the empty measuring cylinder
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
5 6
The diagram shows four blocks, each made of glass of density 2.6 g / cm3. The top of each block has an area of 1 cm2. Which block has a mass of 13 g?
15 cm
10 cm
5 cm 2 cm A 7
B
D
C
A heavy beam is resting on two supports, so that there are three forces acting on it. R1
R2
W
The beam is in equilibrium. Which statement is correct? A
All the forces are equal in value.
B
The forces are in one direction and their turning effects are in the opposite direction.
C
The resultant force is zero and the resultant turning effect is zero.
D
The total upward force is twice the total downward force.
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
[Turn over
6 8
The diagram shows sections of four objects of equal mass. The position of the centre of mass of each object has been marked with a cross. Which object is the most stable? A
9
B
C
D
Which source of energy uses the production of steam to generate electricity? A
hydroelectric
B
nuclear
C
tides
D
waves
10 A cyclist travels down a hill from rest at point X without pedalling. The cyclist applies his brakes and the cycle stops at point Y. X hill Y
Which energy changes have taken place between X and Y? A
kinetic → internal (heat) → gravitational potential
B
kinetic → gravitational potential → internal (heat)
C
gravitational potential → internal (heat) → kinetic
D
gravitational potential → kinetic → internal (heat)
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
7 11 To prevent a cement mixer sinking into soft ground, the mixer is placed on a large flat board. cement mixer
board soft ground
Why does this prevent the mixer sinking? A
The large area decreases the pressure on the ground.
B
The large area increases the pressure on the ground.
C
The large area decreases the weight on the ground.
D
The large area increases the weight on the ground.
12 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.
V W
mercury
X Y Z The atmospheric pressure increases. Which distance increases? A
VW
© UCLES 2006
B
WY
C
XY
0625/01/O/N/06
D
XZ
[Turn over
8 13 A gas cylinder is left outside on a sunny day. The Sun heats the gas inside the cylinder. What happens to the gas molecules? A
They collide less often.
B
They expand.
C
They move closer together.
D
They move more rapidly.
14 Water spilled on the ground on a hot day evaporates. Which diagram represents the change in arrangement of the particles in the water as it evaporates?
A
B
C
D
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
9 15 A block of ice is heated until it has all melted. The water that is produced is then heated until it boils. Which line in the table states what happens to the temperature of the ice while it is melting, and to the temperature of the water while it is boiling? temperature of ice while it is melting
temperature of water while it is boiling
A
increases
increases
B
increases
stays the same
C
stays the same
increases
D
stays the same
stays the same
16 A thermometer with no scale is taped to a ruler as shown. When placed in steam, the mercury level rises to 22 cm. When placed in pure melting ice, the mercury level falls to 2 cm.
cm 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0
mercury
Which temperature is shown by the mercury level in the diagram? A
6 °C
© UCLES 2006
B
8 °C
C
30 °C
0625/01/O/N/06
D
40 °C
[Turn over
10 17 Which line in the table is correct about conduction and convection? conduction
convection
A
can happen in a solid
can happen in a solid
B
can happen in a solid
only happens in fluids
C
only happens in fluids
can happen in a solid
D
only happens in fluids
only happens in fluids
18 A heating element is positioned in a narrow sealed tube of liquid. What would be the best place to position the heating element in order to obtain the best circulation of the liquid through the tube? A
B
D
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
liquid
C
11 19 In a ripple tank experiment, plane water-waves meet a straight barrier with a wide gap in it.
wave motion
barrier
Which diagram shows the wave pattern beyond the barrier?
A
B
C
D
20 The diagram shows a wave. displacement 0
distance X
Y
How many wavelengths are there between X and Y? A
2 3
© UCLES 2006
B
1
C
1 21
0625/01/O/N/06
D
3 [Turn over
12 21 A parallel beam of light falls on a converging lens. Which diagram shows what happens to the beam of light? A
B
C
D
22 The image of a clock face as seen in a plane mirror is shown.
21
3
9
6 What is the time on the clock? A
B
1.25
1.35
C
10.25
D
10.35
23 A police car with its siren sounding is stationary in heavy traffic. A pedestrian notices that, although the loudness of the sound produced does not change, the pitch varies. Which line in the table describes the amplitude and the frequency of the sound? amplitude
frequency
A
constant
varying
B
constant
constant
C
varying
constant
D
varying
varying
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
13 24 A sports field is next to a large school building. At the far side of the sports field, a student sees a groundsman hammer a pole into the ground. school building
student hammer pole
about 400 m
The student hears two bangs each time the hammer hits the pole. Why does the student hear two bangs? first bang caused by
second bang caused by
A
sound of hammer hitting pole
sound of pole hitting hammer
B
sound reaching left ear
sound reaching right ear
C
sound reaching student directly
sound due to echo from school building
D
sound reflected back from school building
sound reaching student directly
25 A student uses three small plotting compasses to investigate the magnetic field around a bar magnet. Which diagram shows the directions in which the compass needles point? A
N
B
N
S
C
N
© UCLES 2006
S
D
S
N
0625/01/O/N/06
S
[Turn over
14 26 The ends of three metal rods are tested by holding end Q of rod 1 close to the others in turn. R
T
Q
S
U
rod 1
rod 2
rod 3
The results are as follows. End Q: attracts end R, attracts end S, attracts end T, repels end U. Which of the metal rods is a magnet? A
rod 1 only
B
rod 1 and rod 2 only
C
rod 1 and rod 3 only
D
rod 3 only
27 A student wishes to measure the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a battery and the potential difference (p.d.) across a resistor. She has the resistor, the battery and some connecting wires. What else does she need? A
a voltmeter only
B
an ammeter only
C
an ammeter and a voltmeter
D
a force meter (newton meter) and a voltmeter
28 Which particle does not experience a force due to an electric field? A
α-particle
B
electron
C
neutron
D
proton
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
15 29 A student uses a length of wire as a resistor. He discovers that the resistance of the wire is too small. To be certain of making a resistor of higher value, he should use a piece of wire that is A
longer and thicker.
B
longer and thinner.
C
shorter and thicker.
D
shorter and thinner.
30 Which graph shows how the resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature?
A
B
resistance / Ω
0
resistance / Ω
0
0
temperature / °C
0
C
D
resistance / Ω
0
temperature / °C
resistance / Ω
0
0
temperature / °C
0
temperature / °C
31 In the circuit below, one of the lamps breaks, causing all the other lamps to go out. Which lamp breaks?
A
C
D
B
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
[Turn over
16 32 Circuit-breakers are used with electrical appliances as safety devices. Which description is correct for a circuit-breaker? position
action when overloaded
A
connected in the live wire
melts
B
connected in the live wire
operates an electromagnet
C
connected to the casing of the appliance
melts
D
connected to the casing of the appliance
operates an electromagnet
33 An electric heater is connected to the mains using insulated copper wires. The wires become very warm. What can be done to prevent so much heat being produced in the connecting wires? A
Use thicker copper wires.
B
Use thinner copper wires.
C
Use thicker insulation.
D
Use thinner insulation.
34 The diagram shows an electrical device.
rotation
magnet S commutator carbon brush
N
battery What is this electrical device? A
a d.c. motor
B
an a.c. generator
C
a magnetising coil
D
a transformer
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
17 35 The graph shows the voltage input to a step-down transformer. 12 V voltage input 0
time
Which diagram shows the voltage output from the transformer? A
B
12 V voltage output 0
12 V voltage output 0 time
time
C
D
12 V voltage output 0
12 V voltage output 0 time
time
36 Particles are emitted by a heated cathode in a cathode-ray tube. heater
particles
cathode
anode
What are these particles? A
atoms
B
electrons
C
neutrons
D
protons
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
[Turn over
18 37 Which line in the table describes the nature of an α-particle and of a γ-ray? α-particle
γ-ray
A
helium nucleus
electromagnetic radiation
B
helium nucleus
electron
C
proton
electromagnetic radiation
D
proton
electron
38 The count rates of four radioactive sources were measured at the same time on three consecutive days. Which source has a half-life of two days? Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
A
100
50
25
B
200
140
100
C
300
300
300
D
400
200
100
39 Which statement is true of all neutral atoms? A
The number of electrons equals the number of nucleons.
B
The number of neutrons equals the number of protons.
C
The number of nucleons equals the number of neutrons.
D
The number of protons equals the number of electrons.
40 There are three nuclides of hydrogen. nuclide 1 1 1
H
nuclide 2 2 1
H
nuclide 3 3 1
H
Which of these nuclides have the same number of protons in their nuclei? A
1 and 2 only
B
2 and 3 only
C
all of them
D
none of them
© UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
19 BLANK PAGE
0625/01/O/N/06
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/01/O/N/06
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/01
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2007 45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*4300881997*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. IB07 06_0625_01/3RP © UCLES 2007
[Turn over
2 1
The diagram shows a thick-walled tube. The thickness of the wall is 3 mm.
d
0 cm 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
What is the internal diameter d of the tube? A 2
B
2.8 cm
C
3.1 cm
D
3.4 cm
7.4 cm
The graph shows the progress of an athlete in a 100 m race.
100 distance travelled / m 80
60
40
20
0 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
time / s What time was taken to travel 10 m from the start? A
2.4 s
© UCLES 2007
B
2.8 s
C
65 s
0625/01/M/J/07
D
70 s
13
14
3 3
Two stones of different weight fall at the same time from a table. Air resistance may be ignored. What will happen and why?
4
what will happen
why
A
both stones hit the floor at the same time
the acceleration of free fall is constant
B
both stones hit the floor at the same time
they fall at constant speed
C
the heavier stone hits the floor first
acceleration increases with weight
D
the heavier stone hits the floor first
speed increases with weight
The diagram shows a bird in flight. In which direction does the weight of the bird act? B
C
A
D
© UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
[Turn over
4 5
The mass of a full bottle of cooking oil is 1.30 kg. When exactly half of the oil has been used, the mass of the bottle plus the remaining oil is 0.90 kg.
What is the mass of the empty bottle? A 6
B
C
0.50 kg
0.65 kg
D
0.80 kg
g / cm3
D
kg / m2
Which of the following is a unit of density? A
7
0.40 kg
cm3 / g
B
C
g / cm2
Each of the solids shown in the diagram has the same mass. Which solid has the greatest density? A
B
C
D
2 cm 1 cm
2 cm 1 cm
2 cm
© UCLES 2007
2 cm
1 cm
1 cm
1 cm
0625/01/M/J/07
1 cm
2 cm
2 cm
5 8
A force acts on a moving rubber ball. How many of the following changes could happen to the ball because of the force? • a change in direction • a change in shape • a change in mass • a change in speed A
9
B
1
C
2
D
3
4
A light aircraft stands at rest on the ground. It stands on three wheels, one at the front and two further back. Which point could be its centre of mass?
A
C
B
D
10 Which form of energy is used to generate electrical energy in a tidal power station? A
chemical energy
B
gravitational energy
C
internal energy (thermal energy)
D
nuclear energy
11 Which line in the table gives an example of the stated form of energy? form of energy
example
A
gravitational
B
internal
the energy due to the flow of cathode rays in a cathode ray tube
C
kinetic
the energy due to the position of a swimmer standing on a high diving board
D
strain
the energy due to the compression of springs in a car seat
© UCLES 2007
the energy due to the movement of a train
0625/01/M/J/07
[Turn over
6 12 A pressure is measured using a manometer as shown in the diagram.
pressure to be measured
h water
The water in the manometer is replaced with a liquid which is more dense. How does the value of h change? A
It becomes zero.
B
It decreases, but not to zero.
C
It stays the same.
D
It increases.
13 A cylinder is filled with a gas and then sealed, so that the gas has a fixed volume. The gas molecules are given energy so that their average speed increases. What happens to the pressure and to the temperature of the gas in the cylinder? pressure
temperature
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
increases
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
increases
© UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
7 14 Diagram 1 shows apparatus being used to observe smoke particles. Diagram 2 shows how a smoke particle moves randomly. diagram 1
diagram 2
random movement
microscope
air molecules and smoke particles
light
Why do the smoke particles move randomly? A
They are hit by air molecules.
B
They are less dense than air.
C
They are moved by convection currents.
D
They gain energy from the light.
15 The graph shows how the temperature of hot liquid wax changes with time as the wax is allowed to cool. At which labelled point on the graph are both liquid wax and solid wax present?
temperature A
B
C
D 0 0
© UCLES 2007
time
0625/01/M/J/07
[Turn over
8 16 1 kg of water and 1 kg of aluminium are heated to the same temperature and then allowed to cool in a room. Why does the aluminium cool more quickly than the water? A
Aluminium contracts more than water.
B
Aluminium does not evaporate but water does.
C
Aluminium has a higher thermal capacity than water.
D
Aluminium has a lower thermal capacity than water.
17 Bread can be cooked by placing it below, but not touching, a heating element. heating element
bread
Which process transfers thermal energy from the heating element to the bread? A
conduction
B
convection
C
insulation
D
radiation
© UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
9 18 The diagram shows a refrigerator. The cooling unit is placed at the top. The cooling unit cools the air near it.
cooling unit
What happens to the density of this air as it cools and how does it move? density of the air
movement of the air
A
decreases
moves down
B
decreases
stays where it is
C
increases
moves down
D
increases
stays where it is
19 Water waves are reflected at a plane surface. Which property of the waves is changed by the reflection? A
direction
B
frequency
C
speed
D
wavelength
© UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
[Turn over
10 20 Plane water waves travel from a shallow region into a deeper region. They travel more quickly in the deeper water.
shallow water boundary wave direction deep water
Which diagram shows the wave pattern in the deeper water?
© UCLES 2007
A
B
C
D
0625/01/M/J/07
11 21 A man sees a stone at the bottom of a pool of water. Which path could be taken by light from the stone to the man?
man
A
B
C
D
air water
stone
22 A ray of light is reflected by two parallel plane mirrors X and Y. mirror X 30°
mirror Y
Which statement is correct? A
The angle of incidence at mirror X is 30°.
B
The angle of incidence at mirror Y is 60°.
C
The angle of reflection at mirror X is 120°.
D
The angle of reflection at mirror Y is 0°.
© UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
[Turn over
12 23 Music is produced by the loudspeaker of a radio. Which property of the sound wave increases when the music is made louder? A
amplitude
B
frequency
C
speed
D
wavelength
24 A starting pistol is fired 640 m away from a spectator. 640 m
spectator
The spectator hears the sound of the starting pistol two seconds after seeing the flash from the gun. What is the speed of sound in air? A
160 m / s
B
320 m / s
C
640 m / s
D
1280 m / s
25 Small particles of metal are scattered near a bar magnet to show the pattern of the magnetic field. Which metal is suitable? A
aluminium
B
brass
C
copper
D
iron
© UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
13 26 A strong electromagnet is used to attract pins. core
pins coil
What happens when the current in the coil is halved? A
No pins are attracted.
B
Fewer pins are attracted.
C
The same number of pins is attracted.
D
Many more pins are attracted.
27 Four plotting compasses are placed near a bar magnet. Which plotting compass is shown pointing in the correct direction? A
B
N C
S
D
28 Four wires are made from the same material. Which wire has the greatest resistance? length of wire / cm
diameter of wire / mm
A
50
0.1
B
50
0.2
C
100
0.1
D
100
0.2
© UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
[Turn over
14 29 A plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth and becomes positively charged. Why has the rod become positively charged? A
It has gained electrons.
B
It has gained neutrons.
C
It has lost electrons.
D
It has lost neutrons.
30 Which circuit is a variable potential divider (potentiometer)?
A
B
output output
C
D
output output
© UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
15 31 The circuit contains a relay.
relay
lamp 2
switch S
lamp 1 When switch S is closed, what is the state of the lamps? lamp 1
lamp 2
A
on
on
B
on
off
C
off
on
D
off
off
32 Which diagram shows a circuit that will allow the lamps to be switched on and off independently?
A
B
C
D
33 What is the symbol for a fuse? A
© UCLES 2007
B
C
0625/01/M/J/07
D
[Turn over
16 34 A cable in a house is carrying too much current. What is the greatest danger? A
appliances not working
B
electric shock
C
fire
D
low power
35 A coil is rotated steadily between the poles of a magnet. The coil is connected to an oscilloscope, which shows a graph of voltage output against time.
N
oscilloscope
S
contact
contact
Which graph shows the voltage output against time? A
B
C
D
36 The diagram shows a lamp connected to a transformer. 40 turns
200 turns
12 V a.c.
What is the potential difference across the lamp? A
2.4 V
© UCLES 2007
B
12 V
C
60 V
0625/01/M/J/07
D
240 V
17 37 A beam of cathode rays passes through an electric field between two parallel plates.
+ + + + + + cathode rays
– – – – – – In which direction is the beam deflected? A
into the page
B
out of the page
C
towards the bottom of the page
D
towards the top of the page
38 What are the most penetrating and the least penetrating types of radiation? most penetrating
least penetrating
A
α-particles
β-particles
B
β-particles
α-particles
C
γ-rays
α-particles
D
γ-rays
β-particles
39 The half-life of a radioactive substance is 5 hours. A sample is tested and found to contain 0.48 g of the substance. How much of the substance was present in the sample 20 hours before the sample was tested? A
0.03 g
© UCLES 2007
B
0.12 g
C
1.92 g
0625/01/M/J/07
D
7.68 g
[Turn over
18 40 The data below relates to the nucleus of a particular neutral atom of nitrogen. proton number
Z=7
nucleon number
A = 17
Which row represents the correct number of neutrons and electrons in this atom? number of neutrons
number of electrons
A
10
7
B
10
10
C
17
7
D
17
10
© UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
19 BLANK PAGE
0625/01/M/J/07
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/01/M/J/07
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/01
PHYSICS
October/November 2007
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
45 minutes Additional Materials:
*9483001639*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C, and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. IB07 11_0625_01/3RP © UCLES 2007
[Turn over
2 1
Some water is poured into four tubes of different cross-sectional areas. Which tube contains the largest volume of water?
A
B
C
D
area = 10 cm2
area = 20 cm2
area = 30 cm2
area = 40 cm2
6 cm 4 cm
2
3 cm
Four students try to explain what is meant by acceleration. Which student makes a correct statement?
3
A
It is related to the changing speed of an object.
B
It is the distance an object travels in one second.
C
It is the force acting on an object divided by the distance it travels in one second.
D
It is the force acting on an object when it is near to the Earth.
A tennis player hits a ball hard and 0.4 s later hears an echo from a wall.
The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s. How far away is the player from the wall? A
66 m
UCLES 2007
B
132 m
C
264 m
0625/01/O/N/07
D
825 m
2 cm
3 4
5
What are the correct units for force and for weight? force
weight
A
kg
kg
B
kg
N
C
N
kg
D
N
N
The table shows the weight of a 10 kg mass on each of five planets. planet
weight of a 10 kg mass / N
Mercury
40
Venus
90
Earth
100
Mars
40
Jupiter
250
On which planets would an astronaut have a smaller weight than on Earth?
6
A
Mercury, Mars and Jupiter
B
Mercury, Venus and Mars
C
Mercury, Venus and Jupiter
D
Venus, Mars and Jupiter
A student is trying to find the density of water and of a large, regularly-shaped solid. Which apparatus is needed to find the density of both? A
balance, clock, ruler
B
balance, measuring cylinder, ruler
C
balance, measuring cylinder, string
D
clock, ruler, string
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
[Turn over
4 7
A metal drum has a mass of 200 kg when empty and 1000 kg when filled with 1.0 m3 of methylated spirit. What is the density of methylated spirit?
8
A
0.0050 kg / m3
B
0.11 kg / m3
C
800 kg / m3
D
1000 kg / m3
An empty glass is placed on a join between two tables as shown. The glass remains stable. Which point is the centre of mass of the glass?
A
B C D
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
5 9
An aeroplane is in equilibrium. The diagram shows the forces acting on the aeroplane. lift force from wings
force from engine
air resistance
weight
Which statement about the forces is correct? force from engine
lift force from wings
A
equal to air resistance
equal to weight
B
equal to air resistance
greater than weight
C
greater than air resistance
equal to weight
D
greater than air resistance
greater than weight
10 A student adds loads to an elastic cord. He measures the length of the cord for each load. He then plots a graph from the results.
0
0
1
2
3
4
load / N
Which length is plotted on the vertical axis? A
measured length
B
original length
C
(measured length – original length)
D
(measured length + original length)
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
[Turn over
6 11 A person uses chemical energy to run up some stairs.
She stops at the top of the stairs. What has the chemical energy been converted to when she is at the top of the stairs? A
kinetic energy and gravitational energy
B
kinetic energy and strain energy
C
gravitational energy and heat energy
D
strain energy and heat energy
12 Electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission. In what order is the energy transferred in this process? A
nuclear fuel → generator → reactor and boiler → turbines
B
nuclear fuel → generator → turbines → reactor and boiler
C
nuclear fuel → reactor and boiler → generator → turbines
D
nuclear fuel → reactor and boiler → turbines → generator
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
7 13 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer, used to measure atmospheric pressure. P
L
mercury
Atmospheric pressure increases. What happens to the level L and to the pressure at P? level L
pressure at P
A
falls
increases
B
falls
stays the same
C
rises
increases
D
rises
stays the same
14 The gas in a container is heated but is kept at constant volume. Why does the gas pressure increase? A
The molecules expand.
B
The molecules increase in mass.
C
The molecules move further apart.
D
The molecules move more rapidly.
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
[Turn over
8 15 The table lists the melting points and the boiling points of four different substances A, B, C and D. Which substance is a gas at 25 °C? substance
melting point / °C
boiling point / °C
A
–219
–183
B
–7
58
C
98
890
D
1083
2582
16 The diagram shows four blocks of steel. The same quantity of heat is given to each block. Which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?
A
B
C
D
17 A wooden wheel can be strengthened by putting a tight circle of iron around it.
wooden wheel iron circle
Which action would make it easier to fit the circle over the wood? A
cooling the iron circle
B
heating the iron circle
C
heating the wooden wheel
D
heating the wooden wheel and cooling the iron circle
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
9 18 Which statement refers to convection? A
It does not involve energy transfer.
B
It is the transfer of heat energy without the movement of particles.
C
It only occurs in liquids or gases.
D
It only occurs in solids.
19 Spoons made of different materials were placed in four cups of coffee poured from the same jug. Which spoon will be hottest to touch at end X? experiment A wooden spoon
X
experiment B steel spoon
experiment C
X
white plastic spoon
X
experiment D black plastic spoon
X
20 Which line gives an example of a longitudinal wave and describes its vibrations? example of a longitudinal wave
vibrations
A
light wave
at right angles to the direction the wave travels
B
Iight wave
in the same direction as the wave travels
C
sound wave
at right angles to the direction the wave travels
D
sound wave
in the same direction as the wave travels
21 The diagram shows a section through a series of waves on water. Which dotted line shows the position of the still water surface after the waves have passed? A B C D
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
[Turn over
10 22 A student shines a narrow beam of white light into a prism as shown in the diagram. He sees a spectrum of colours emerging from the prism.
X Y Z
narrow beam of white light
spectrum of colours
Which three colours does he see at X, at Y and at Z? X
Y
Z
A
blue
yellow
red
B
red
blue
yellow
C
red
yellow
blue
D
yellow
red
blue
23 An object placed in front of a plane mirror at O produces an image at I. O
I
If the object moves towards the mirror in the direction shown by the arrow, in which direction does the image move? O
B
A
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
C
D
I
11 24 A girl stands at a distance from a large building. She claps her hands and a short time later hears an echo. Why is an echo produced when the sound waves hit the building? A
The sound waves are absorbed.
B
The sound waves are diffracted.
C
The sound waves are reflected.
D
The sound waves are refracted.
25 The graph represents a sound wave. The horizontal (x) axis represents time. y
x
The frequency of the sound is increased. The graphs below are shown to the same scale. Which graph represents the new sound wave?
y
A
y
B
x
x y
C
y
x UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
D
x [Turn over
12 26 Which materials are suitable for making a permanent magnet and the core of an electromagnet? permanent magnet
core of an electromagnet
A
iron
iron
B
iron
steel
C
steel
iron
D
steel
steel
27 Three charged balls, P, Q and R, are suspended by insulated threads. Ball P is negatively charged. insulated thread
P –
Q
Q
What are the charges on Q and on R? Q
R
A
positive
positive
B
positive
negative
C
negative
positive
D
negative
negative
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
R
13 28 The circuit shows a current I in a resistor of resistance R.
3.0 V
I
R Which line gives possible values of I and of R? I/A
R/Ω
A
1.5
1.5
B
1.5
2.0
C
6.0
2.0
D
4.0
12.0
29 The circuit shown in the diagram contains an unknown component X, hidden in a box. The voltage-current graph for X is as shown. variable voltage supply – +
voltage
A X 0 0
V
current
What is the component X? A
a capacitor
B
a closed switch
C
a metallic resistor
D
an open switch
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
[Turn over
14 30 Four lamps are connected in a circuit as shown in the diagram. Each lamp is designed to operate at 12 V. 12 V
The circuit is now switched on. Which statement is correct? A
Each lamp can be switched off independently.
B
If one lamp breaks all the others will stay alight.
C
The current is the same in all the lamps.
D
The lamps will all light at normal brightness.
31 The diagram shows a battery connected to three identical resistors. Four ammeters A, B, C and D are connected in the circuit. Which ammeter shows the smallest reading?
A A
A D A B
A C
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
15 32 In the circuit shown, the switch is closed for a long time, then opened. voltmeter 1 V
V
V
voltmeter 2
voltmeter 3
Immediately after the switch is opened, which voltmeters will read zero? A
voltmeter 1 only
B
voltmeter 2 only
C
voltmeter 3 only
D
voltmeter 1, voltmeter 2 and voltmeter 3
33 A householder asks an electrician to install a mains electrical socket in her bathroom so that she may use a hairdryer there. The electrician refuses to do this because it would be dangerous. Why would installing the socket be dangerous? A
The current drawn by the hairdryer would cause overheating in the cables.
B
The handling of electrical equipment in damp conditions could cause an electric shock.
C
The hot air produced by the hairdryer would cause the fuse to melt.
D
The temperature in the bathroom would damage the insulation.
34 A mains electrical circuit uses insulated copper cable and the cable overheats. To prevent the cable overheating, how should the cable be changed, and why? A
Use thicker copper cable which has less resistance.
B
Use thicker insulation which stops the heat escaping.
C
Use thinner copper cable which has more resistance.
D
Use thinner insulation which allows less heat to escape.
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
[Turn over
16 35 How is electricity transmitted over large distances and why is it transmitted in this way? how
why
A
at high voltage
for safety
B
at high voltage
to reduce energy loss
C
at low voltage
for safety
D
at low voltage
to reduce energy loss
36 Which parts of an a.c. generator slide past each other when the generator is working? A
brushes and coil
B
coil and magnets
C
magnets and slip rings
D
slip rings and brushes
37 The diagram shows a cathode-ray tube. electron beam
top screen Y2
X2
heater Y1 cathode anode
Y-plates
X1 X-plates
What must be done to deflect the electron beam upwards? A
make X1 more positive than X2
B
make X2 more positive than X1
C
make Y1 more positive than Y2
D
make Y2 more positive than Y1
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
bottom
17 38 A sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a detector.
radioactive source
detector sheet of paper
Which types of radiation can pass through the paper? A
α-particles and β-particles only
B
α-particles and γ-rays only
C
β-particles and γ-rays only
D
α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays
39 A sample of radioactive isotope is decaying. The nuclei of which atoms will decay first? A
impossible to know, because radioactive decay is random
B
impossible to know, unless the age of the material is known
C
atoms near the centre, because they are surrounded by more atoms
D
atoms near the surface, because the radiation can escape more easily
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
[Turn over
18 40 An atom of the element lithium has a nucleon number of 7 and a proton number of 3. Which diagram represents a neutral atom of lithium?
n +
A
B
–
–
+
+
+ + + n
n
–
key n = a neutron
–
+ = a proton
–
– = an electron C
(not to scale)
D –
–
– –
–
n +n+ n n +
n +n+ n n +
–
– –
–
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
–
19 BLANK PAGE
0625/01/O/N/07
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge. 0625/01/O/N/07
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/01
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2008 45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*1101906355*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. IB08 06_0625_01/3RP © UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2 1
Some liquid is heated in a flask. The diagrams show the height of the liquid in the tube when the liquid is cold and when it is hot.
cold
hot
5
scale
5
tube
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
cm
cm liquid flask
What is the difference in the heights? A 2
1.7 cm
B
C
2.8 cm
3.2 cm
D
4.5 cm
The speed-time graph shown is for a bus travelling between stops. Where on the graph is the acceleration of the bus the greatest? C speed B
A
D time
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
3 3
The circuit of a motor racing track is 3 km in length. In a race, a car goes 25 times round the circuit in 30 minutes. What is the average speed of the car?
4
A
75 km / hour
B
90 km / hour
C
150 km / hour
D
750 km / hour
The force of gravity acting on an astronaut in an orbiting spacecraft is less than when she is on the Earth’s surface. Compared with being on the Earth’s surface, how do her mass and weight change when she goes into orbit?
5
mass in orbit
weight in orbit
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
unchanged
C
unchanged
decreases
D
unchanged
unchanged
When two blocks X and Y are placed on a uniform beam, the beam balances on a pivot at its centre as shown. Y X
pivot
What does this show about X and Y? A
They have the same mass and the same density.
B
They have the same mass and the same weight.
C
They have the same volume and the same density.
D
They have the same volume and the same weight.
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
4 6
The diagram shows a rectangular metal block measuring 10 cm × 5.0 cm × 2.0 cm. 10 cm 5.0 cm 2.0 cm
Its mass is 250 g. What is the density of the metal? A 7
0.20 g / cm3
B
C
0.40 g / cm3
2.5 g / cm3
D
5.0 g / cm3
The diagram shows an experiment to find the density of a liquid.
cm3
cm3 50
50 measuring cylinder
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
balance
200 g
liquid
10
250 g
What is the density of the liquid? A 8
B
0.5 g / cm3
C
2.0 g / cm3
8.0 g / cm3
What are the conditions for equilibrium? resultant force acting
resultant turning effect acting
A
yes
yes
B
yes
no
C
no
yes
D
no
no
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
D
10.0 g / cm3
5 9
The diagram shows four objects standing on a flat surface. The centre of mass of each object is marked M. Which object will fall over? A
B
C
M
M
D M
M
10 A stone is thrown from the edge of a cliff. Its path is shown in the diagram.
2
1
3 ground In which position does the stone have its greatest kinetic energy and in which position does it have its least gravitational energy? greatest kinetic energy
least gravitational energy
A
1
2
B
2
3
C
3
1
D
3
3
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
6 11 A worker is lifting boxes of identical weight from the ground onto a moving belt. At first, it takes him 2 s to lift each box. Later in the day, it takes him 3 s. Which statement is correct? A
Later in the day, less work is done in lifting each box.
B
Later in the day, more work is done in lifting each box.
C
Later in the day, less power is developed in lifting each box.
D
Later in the day, more power is developed in lifting each box.
12 A manometer is used to indicate the pressure in a steel vessel, as shown in the diagram.
liquid manometer steel vessel
What value does the liquid manometer give for the pressure in the vessel? A
It is zero.
B
It is between zero and atmospheric pressure.
C
It is equal to atmospheric pressure.
D
It is greater than atmospheric pressure.
13 Four glass tanks contain water. In which tank is the pressure of the water on the base greatest? A
B
4m
C
3m 4m
3m 2m
© UCLES 2008
2m
D
6m
2m
1m 2m
0625/01/M/J/08
4m 6m
7 14 Which line in the table describes the properties of solids and of liquids at a fixed temperature? solids
liquids
A
definite volume and definite shape
no definite volume but definite shape
B
no definite volume but definite shape
definite volume and definite shape
C
definite volume and definite shape
definite volume but no definite shape
D
no definite volume but definite shape
no definite volume and no definite shape
15 Air is pumped slowly into a car tyre to increase the pressure. The temperature of the air does not change. Which line in the table is correct? number of molecules hitting 1 cm2 of the tyre each second
average speed at which molecules hit the tyre
A
increases
increases
B
increases
unchanged
C
unchanged
increases
D
unchanged
unchanged
16 The thermometer in the diagram has no scale.
bulb
Where must the bulb be placed so that 0 °C can be marked on the stem? A
in boiling water
B
in cold water
C
in a freezer
D
in melting ice
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
8 17 A sample of a solid is heated for 12 minutes and its temperature noted every minute. The results are shown in the table. time / min temperature / °C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
11.5
16.1
22.1
31.0
31.1
31.1
31.1
31.3
45.0
65.2
66.2
66.3
66.3
How should the sample be described at the end of the 12 minutes? A
all solid
B
in the process of melting
C
all liquid
D
in the process of boiling
18 A heater is placed in a room. Which diagram shows the movement of air as the room is heated?
© UCLES 2008
A
B
C
D
0625/01/M/J/08
9 19 The diagrams show four identical pieces of ice that are heated in test-tubes of water. In which test-tube will the ice take the longest time to melt?
A
B
ice water
water
ice wrapped in lead wire
C
D ice
water
water
ice wrapped in lead wire
20 The diagram represents water waves about to move into shallow water from deep water.
wavefront
deep water shallow water
Which property of the waves remains the same after the waves move into shallow water? A
frequency
B
speed
C
wavefront direction
D
wavelength
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
10 21 Two sets of water waves overlap as shown in the diagram.
P U
Q S
T
R
From which two points are the sets of waves coming? A
P and S
B
T and R
C
Q and T
D
U and Q
22 Which diagram shows total internal reflection of light? A
B
C glass prism
mirror
© UCLES 2008
D
0625/01/M/J/08
11 23 Light from the Sun passes through a prism and a spectrum is produced on a screen. screen
narrow slit P red
light from the Sun
violet
A thermometer placed at P shows a large temperature rise. Which type of radiation causes this? A
infra-red
B
microwave
C
ultra-violet
D
visible light
24 Two thin converging lenses X and Y are used as shown to give a focused image of an illuminated slit. The rays shown are parallel between X and Y. X
Y
slit
image
screen
source of light
30 cm
20 cm
15 cm
What are the correct values for the focal lengths of X and of Y? focal length of X / cm
focal length of Y / cm
A
50
35
B
30
20
C
30
15
D
20
20
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
12 25 Which equation can be used to calculate the speed of sound? A
speed = distance time
B
speed = distance × time
C
speed =
D
speed = time + distance
time distance
26 A battery-operated bell is surrounded by a box with double walls. air bell
box walls
gap
The bell is ringing but no sound at all is heard outside the box. What is in the gap? A
a solid
B
a liquid
C
a gas
D
a vacuum
27 Which line in the table shows whether iron and steel are ferrous or non-ferrous materials? iron
steel
A
ferrous
ferrous
B
ferrous
non-ferrous
C
non-ferrous
ferrous
D
non-ferrous
non-ferrous
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
13 28 A solenoid carrying a current is used to demagnetise a bar magnet. solenoid bar magnet
power supply
Which conditions achieve demagnetisation? current through solenoid
movement of bar magnet
A
a.c.
around the solenoid quickly
B
a.c.
through the solenoid slowly
C
d.c.
around the solenoid quickly
D
d.c.
through the solenoid slowly
29 A polythene rod repels an inflated balloon hanging from a nylon thread. What charges must the rod and the balloon carry? A
The rod and the balloon carry opposite charges.
B
The rod and the balloon carry like charges.
C
The rod is charged but the balloon is not.
D
The balloon is charged but the rod is not.
30 Which circuit symbol represents a component used to store energy? A
© UCLES 2008
B
C
0625/01/M/J/08
D
[Turn over
14 31 In the circuit shown, the switches S1 and S2 may be open (off) or closed (on).
V + 12 V –
S2
S1
switches shown open (off)
Which line in the table shows the voltmeter reading for the switch positions given? S1
S2
voltmeter reading / V
A
open
open
12
B
closed
closed
12
C
open
closed
0
D
closed
open
12
32 The device X in this circuit is designed to cut off the electricity supply automatically if too much current flows. X
What is device X? A
a fuse
B
a switch
C
a resistor
D
an ammeter
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
15 33 The diagrams show two ways in which three lamps may be connected.
X Y X
Y
Z
Z circuit 1
circuit 2
Which statement is correct? A
If lamp Y breaks in circuit 1, both the other lamps will go out.
B
If lamp Y breaks in circuit 2, both the other lamps will go out.
C
If lamp Y breaks in circuit 1, lamp Z will go out, but lamp X will remain on.
D
If lamp Y breaks in circuit 2, lamp Z will go out, but lamp X will remain on.
34 The wire XY shown in the diagram is connected to a sensitive voltmeter with a centre zero. XY is then moved quickly once through the magnetic field. X
S V
N movement
Y
What is observed on the voltmeter? A
The needle moves briefly in one direction and then returns to the centre.
B
The needle moves quickly in one direction and stays deflected.
C
The needle vibrates rapidly from side to side whilst XY is moving.
D
The needle stays still.
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
16 35 The diagram shows a transformer connected to a 240 V a.c. supply.
soft-iron core primary coil 60 turns
secondary coil 30 turns
240 V a.c.
What is the potential difference across the secondary coil of the transformer? A
30 V
B
C
120 V
240 V
D
480 V
36 In order to produce a beam of cathode rays, a heated filament is placed near to an anode in an evacuated glass vessel. evacuated glass vessel
anode
heated filament
What is the type of charge on the anode and why is this charge chosen? charge
reason
A
negative
to attract electrons
B
negative
to repel electrons
C
positive
to attract electrons
D
positive
to repel electrons
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
17 37 Diagram 1 shows a potential divider circuit containing two 100 Ω resistors. One of the resistors is changed to 90 Ω, as shown in diagram 2. diagram 1
diagram 2
100 Ω
90 Ω
100 Ω
100 Ω
V
V
How does the reading on the voltmeter change when this is done? A
It becomes zero.
B
It decreases a little.
C
It increases a little.
D
It stays the same.
38 What is a β-particle and from which part of a radioactive atom is it emitted? β-particle
emitted from
A
electron
nucleus
B
electron
outer orbits
C
helium nucleus
nucleus
D
helium nucleus
outer orbits
39 A sample of radioactive uranium has mass 1 g. Another sample of the same material has mass 2 g. Which property is the same for both samples? A
the amount of radiation emitted per second
B
the half-life
C
the number of uranium atoms
D
the volume
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
18 40 A particular nuclide has the symbol
37 17
Cl .
What is true for atoms of this nuclide? A
There are 17 nucleons in the nucleus.
B
There are 17 protons in the nucleus.
C
There are 37 electrons in the nucleus.
D
There are 37 neutrons in the nucleus.
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
19 BLANK PAGE
0625/01/M/J/08
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/01/M/J/08
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/01
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
October/November 2008 45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*7002360314*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 20 printed pages. IB08 11_0625_01/3RP © UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2 1
Two digital stopwatches X and Y, which record in minutes and seconds, are used to time a race. The readings of the two stopwatches, at the start and at the end of the race, are shown.
stopwatch X
stopwatch Y
start
end
00:00
00:40
start
end
01:30
02:20
Which statement about the time of the race is correct?
2
A
Both stopwatches record the same time interval.
B
Stopwatch X recorded 10 s longer than stopwatch Y.
C
Stopwatch Y recorded 10 s longer than stopwatch X.
D
Stopwatch Y recorded 50 s longer than stopwatch X.
A tennis player hits a ball over the net. P
Q R
In which position is the ball accelerating? A
P and Q only
B
P and R only
C
Q and R only
D
P, Q and R
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
3 3
A car travels at various speeds during a short journey. The table shows the distances travelled and the time taken during each of four stages P, Q, R and S. stage distance travelled / km time taken / minutes
P
Q
R
S
1.8
3.6
2.7
2.7
2
2
4
3
During which two stages is the car travelling at the same speed? A 4
5
B
P and Q
P and S
C
Q and R
D
R and S
What is the meaning of the weight of an object? A
the density of the material from which it is made
B
the force exerted on it by gravity
C
the mass of the matter it contains
D
the pressure it exerts on the floor
The weight of an object is to be found using the beam balance shown in the diagram.
object
?
The object is put in the left-hand pan and various standard weights are put in the right-hand pan, with the following results. weights in the right hand pan
effect
0.1 N, 0.1 N, 0.05 N, 0.02 N
balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side
0.2 N, 0.1 N, 0.01 N
balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side
What is the best estimate of the weight of the object? A
0.27 N
© UCLES 2008
B
0.29 N
C
0.31 N
0625/01/O/N/08
D
0.58 N
[Turn over
4 6
A student needs to find the density of a cubic block of wood. Which two pieces of apparatus should she use?
7
A
balance and metre rule
B
balance and thermometer
C
measuring cylinder and metre rule
D
measuring cylinder and thermometer
Two identical measuring cylinders containing different liquids are placed on a simple balance. They balance as shown.
liquid X volume = 200 cm3
liquid Y volume = 100 cm3
How does the density of X compare with the density of Y? 1 2
× density of Y
A
density of X =
B
density of X = density of Y
C
density of X = 2 × density of Y
D
density of X = 4 × density of Y
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
5 8
The diagrams show a uniform rod with its midpoint on a pivot. Two equal forces F are applied to the rod, as shown. Which diagram shows the rod in equilibrium?
A F
F
pivot
pivot
C
F
9
B F
F
pivot
D
F
F
pivot
F
A train is travelling along a horizontal track at constant speed. Two of the forces acting on the train are shown in the diagram. forwards force from engine 60 000 N
friction 20 000 N
A force of air resistance is also acting on the train to give it a resultant force of zero. What is this air resistance force? A
40 000 N backwards
B
80 000 N backwards
C
40 000 N forwards
D
80 000 N forwards
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
[Turn over
6 10 The diagram shows water stored behind a dam. dam
water turbine generator water
The water flows to a turbine and turns a generator. Which sequence for the conversion of energy is correct? A
gravitational energy → kinetic energy → electrical energy
B
kinetic energy → gravitational energy → electrical energy
C
gravitational energy → electrical energy → kinetic energy
D
kinetic energy → electrical energy → gravitational energy
11 A rubber ball is dropped from a height of 2 m on to a table. Whilst in contact with the table, some of its energy is converted into internal energy. What is the highest possible point the ball could reach after bouncing?
4m
A
height B
2m
ball released from this height
C D
0 table
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
7 12 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer used to measure atmospheric pressure.
P
mercury Q
Which statement is correct? A
The pressure at P is atmospheric pressure.
B
The pressure at P is nearly zero.
C
The pressure at Q is lower than the pressure at P.
D
The pressure at Q is nearly zero.
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
[Turn over
8 13 A brick with rectangular sides rests on a table.
brick table
The brick is now turned so that it rests on the table on its smallest face.
How has this change affected the force and the pressure exerted by the brick on the table? force
pressure
A
unchanged
unchanged
B
increased
unchanged
C
unchanged
increased
D
increased
increased
14 Viewed through a microscope, very small particles can be seen moving with Brownian motion. Which line in the table is correct? type of motion of particles
particles are suspended in
A
vibration
a liquid or a gas
B
vibration
a solid, a liquid or a gas
C
random
a liquid or a gas
D
random
a solid, a liquid or a gas
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
9 15 The pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. The volume of the gas in the cylinder is then slowly decreased. Which graph could show the change of pressure of the gas during this process?
A
B
pressure
pressure
0
0 0
0
time C
D
pressure
pressure
0
0 0
© UCLES 2008
time
time
0625/01/O/N/08
0
time
[Turn over
10 16 Equal masses of two different liquids are heated using the same heater. The graph shows how the temperature of each liquid changes with time.
temperature
liquid 1 liquid 2
0 0
time
What does the graph tell us about the liquids? A
Liquid 1 has a higher melting point than liquid 2.
B
Liquid 1 has a higher boiling point than liquid 2.
C
Liquid 1 starts to melt sooner than liquid 2.
D
Liquid 1 starts to boil sooner than liquid 2.
17 An engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. The rod is just too big to fit into the hole of the washer. steel washer
steel rod
How can the engineer fit the washer on to the rod? A
Cool the washer and put it over the rod.
B
Cool the washer and rod to the same temperature and push them together.
C
Heat the rod and then place it in the hole.
D
Heat the washer and then place it over the rod.
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
11 18 A cup with a lid contains a hot drink. lid
hot drink
When the lid is removed, the rate of heat loss from the drink increases. What causes this? A
convection only
B
evaporation only
C
both convection and evaporation
D
neither convection nor evaporation
19 A cupboard is placed in front of a heater. Air can move through a gap under the cupboard.
wall
cupboard
heater
air moves through gap floor
Which line in the table describes the temperature and the direction of the air that moves through the gap? air temperature
air direction
A
cool
away from the heater
B
cool
towards the heater
C
warm
away from the heater
D
warm
towards the heater
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
[Turn over
12 20 Waves in a tank pass from shallow to deep water. The wavefront diagram is shown.
wavefront
shallow water
deep water
Which quantity increases as the waves enter the deep water? A
amplitude
B
frequency
C
wave energy
D
wavelength
21 The diagrams represent water waves in a tank. Which diagram represents waves that change speed? B
A barrier
C
barrier
D barrier deeper water
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
shallower water
13 22 Which diagram shows the dispersion of white light?
A
B glass
glass
white light
white light
C
D glass
glass
white light
white light
23 In the diagram, the distance OP is the focal length of the lens. Through which point will the ray shown pass, after refraction by the lens? lens A
O
D
P focal length
B
focal length C
24 Which word correctly completes the sentence below? An echo is a sound wave which is ………… by a large obstacle. A
absorbed
B
dispersed
C
reflected
D
refracted
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
[Turn over
14 25 In an experiment to measure the speed of sound, a student uses a stopwatch to find how long a sound takes to travel from X to Y. She does this six times. sound travels from X to Y X
Y
The table shows her results. time / s first
0.5
second
0.7
third
0.6
fourth
0.4
fifth
0.9
sixth
0.5
What value for the time should be used to calculate the speed of sound? A
B
0.4 s
0.5 s
C
D
0.6 s
0.9 s
26 A student wishes to demagnetise a steel bar. He uses the apparatus shown. coil electrical supply steel bar Which type of electrical supply should the student use and what should he do with the steel bar? supply
what to do with the steel bar
A
a.c.
keep it inside the coil
B
a.c.
slowly remove it from the coil
C
d.c.
keep it inside the coil
D
d.c.
slowly remove it from the coil
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
15 27 Two metal bars are held together. At least one of the bars is a magnet. The bars repel each other. What does this show about the bars and why? what it shows
why
A
only one of the bars is a magnet
two magnets always attract each other
B
only one of the bars is a magnet
induced magnetism in the other bar makes it repel
C
they are both magnets
there must be like poles facing each other
D
they are both magnets
there must be opposite poles facing each other
28 When there is an electric current in a metal wire, what flows through the wire? A
atoms
B
electrons
C
neutrons
D
protons
29 The table shows the voltage and current ratings for four electric heaters. Which heater has the least resistance? voltage / V
current / A
A
110
5.0
B
110
10.0
C
230
5.0
D
230
10.0
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
[Turn over
16 30 In the circuit below, X and Y are identical 6 V lamps. 6V
X
switch
Y
What happens when the switch is closed (the current is switched on)? A
X lights more brightly than Y.
B
Y lights more brightly than X.
C
X and Y both light with full brightness.
D
X and Y both light with half brightness.
31 The diagram shows four different circuits. P
Q
3Ω
5Ω
R
S
3Ω
3Ω
5Ω
5Ω
What is the order of increasing resistance of these circuits? lowest resistance
highest resistance
A
P
Q
R
S
B
R
S
P
Q
C
S
P
Q
R
D
P
R
Q
S
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
17 32 A student makes four circuits. In which circuit are both lamps protected by the fuse?
A
B
C
D
33 A mains circuit can safely supply a current of 40 A. A hairdryer takes 2 A. It is connected to the circuit by a lead which can safely carry up to 5 A. Which fuse is best to use in the plug fitted to the hairdryer lead? A
1 A fuse
B
3 A fuse
C
10 A fuse
D
50 A fuse
34 Two different systems are used to transmit equal amounts of electrical power from one building to another. One system uses low voltage and the other uses high voltage. Both systems use identical wires. Which line in the table is correct about which system wastes least energy and why? least energy wasted
why
A
high voltage system
the current in the wires is bigger
B
high voltage system
the current in the wires is smaller
C
low voltage system
the current in the wires is bigger
D
low voltage system
the current in the wires is smaller
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
[Turn over
18 35 When the electric current in wire XY is in the direction shown, there is an upward force on the wire.
X current force magnet
magnet N
S
Y If the north and south poles of the magnet exchange positions, in which direction will the force on the wire act? A
downwards
B
upwards
C
to the left
D
to the right
36 A cathode-ray beam passes through an electric field between charged parallel plates.
+ cathode-ray beam
– In which direction is the beam deflected? A
towards the negative plate
B
towards the positive plate
C
into the page
D
out of the page
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
19 37 When the thermistor in the circuit below is heated, the lamp becomes brighter.
Why does this happen? A
The resistance of the lamp decreases.
B
The resistance of the lamp increases.
C
The resistance of the thermistor decreases.
D
The resistance of the thermistor increases.
38 The diagram shows an experiment to monitor the radiation from a radioactive gas. The counter readings are corrected for background radiation. counter
000.0
radioactive gas
The table shows how the counter reading varies with time. time / seconds
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
counter reading / counts per minute
140
105
82
61
44
36
27
20
15
10
What is the half-life of the gas? A
between 20 and 40 seconds
B
between 40 and 60 seconds
C
between 60 and 140 seconds
D
between 140 and 180 seconds
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
[Turn over
20 39 Which material is commonly used as a lining for a box for storing radioactive samples? A
aluminium
B
copper
C
lead
D
uranium
40 A uranium
238 92 U
nucleus emits an α-particle.
What are the new nucleon and proton numbers? nucleon number
proton number
A
238
88
B
236
90
C
234
92
D
234
90
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
First Variant Question Paper
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/11
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2009 45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*7150187285*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. IB09 06_0625_01/3RP © UCLES 2009
[Turn over
2 1
A metre rule is used to measure a length. Which reading is shown to the nearest millimetre? A
2
0.7 m
B
C
0.76 m
D
0.761 m
0.7614 m
The graph represents the movement of a body. 10 speed m/s
8 6 4 2 0 0
1
2
3
4
5
time / s
How far has the body moved after 5 s? A 3
2m
B
10 m
C
25 m
D
50 m
A car travels 100 km. The highest speed of the car is 90 km/h, and the lowest speed is 30 km/h. The journey takes two hours. What is the average speed for the journey? A
4
30 km / h
B
50 km / h
C
60 km / h
D
90 km / h
Which statement about the masses and weights of objects on the Earth is correct? A
A balance can only be used to compare weights, not masses.
B
Heavy objects always have more mass than light ones.
C
Large objects always have more mass than small ones.
D
Mass is a force but weight is not.
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
3 5
The table shows the weight in newtons of a10 kg mass on each of four planets. planet
weight of a 10 kg mass / N
Earth
100
Jupiter
250
Mercury
40
Venus
90
The diagram shows a force meter (spring balance) being used.
18 N
2.0 kg
On which planet is the force meter (spring balance) being used?
6
A
Earth
B
Jupiter
C
Mercury
D
Venus
Which items of apparatus are required to determine the density of a liquid? A
balance and measuring cylinder
B
balance and thermometer
C
metre rule and measuring cylinder
D
metre rule and thermometer
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
[Turn over
4 7
8
Which property of an object cannot be changed by a force? A
its mass
B
its motion
C
its shape
D
its size
A wooden plank rests in equilibrium on two boulders on opposite sides of a narrow stream. Three forces of size P, Q and R act on the plank. P
R plank
Q
How are the sizes of the forces related?
9
A
P+Q=R
B
P+R=Q
C
P=Q=R
D
P=Q+R
Electricity can be obtained from different energy resources. Which energy resource is used to obtain electricity without producing heat to boil water? A
coal
B
geothermal
C
hydroelectric
D
nuclear
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
5 10 Four people of equal weight on a beach use different routes to get to the top of a sea wall. pavement slipway
sea wall
beach
Which person produces the greatest average power? person
route
time taken
A
runs across the beach, then climbs the ladder
8s
B
walks across the beach, then climbs the ladder
16 s
C
runs up the slipway
5s
D
walks up the slipway
10 s
11 The diagrams show two mercury barometers standing side by side. The right-hand diagram shows a tube of bigger diameter, but the diagram is incomplete. There is a vacuum above the mercury in both tubes. Which labelled position on the right-hand tube could show the mercury level in that tube? vacuum
A B C
glass tubes D
dish mercury
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
dish
[Turn over
6 12 A student fills two containers with water (density 1.0 g / cm3) and two with oil (density 0.8 g / cm3), as shown in the diagrams. In which container is the pressure on the base the greatest? A
B
water
C
D
oil water
oil
13 In an experiment, some of a substance changes from a liquid to a gas. The temperature of the remaining liquid changes because of this. What is the name for this change of state and how does the temperature change? change of state
how temperature changes
A
condensation
decreases
B
condensation
increases
C
evaporation
decreases
D
evaporation
increases
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
7 14 A piston traps a certain mass of gas inside a cylinder. Initially the piston is halfway along the length of the cylinder. The piston is now moved towards the open end of the cylinder. The temperature of the gas remains constant.
initial position
final position
How are the density and the pressure of the gas affected by moving the piston? density
pressure
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
unchanged
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
unchanged
15 The graph shows the change in temperature of a substance as it is heated steadily. Which part of the graph shows when the substance is boiling?
D
temperature C B A
time
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
[Turn over
8 16 Four blocks, made of different materials, are each given the same quantity of internal energy (heat). Which block has the greatest thermal capacity? A
B
C
D
temperature rise = 2 oC
temperature rise = 4 oC
temperature rise = 6 oC
temperature rise = 8 oC
17 A rod is made up of copper and wood joined together. After the rod is heated at the join in the centre for about a minute, where would the lowest temperature be? B
C
A
D
wood
copper
18 The diagram shows a fire.
Why does the smoke rise above the fire? A
Smoke evaporates more quickly at higher temperatures.
B
Smoke molecules diffuse more quickly at higher temperatures.
C
The density of the air is lower at higher temperatures.
D
The pressure of the air is greater at higher temperatures.
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
9 19 The diagrams show water waves that move more slowly after passing into shallow water at the broken line. Which diagram shows what happens to the waves?
A
B
fast
slow
fast
slow
deep water
shallow water
deep water
shallow water
C
D
fast
slow
fast
slow
deep water
shallow water
deep water
shallow water
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
[Turn over
10 20 The diagrams show examples of wave motion.
1
2 ripple tank drum
waves on water
waves in air
3
4
waves on a rope
waves in a spring (as shown)
Which are longitudinal waves? A
1 only
B
1, 2 and 4
C
2 and 3 only
D
2 and 4 only
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
11 21 Which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?
A
B
white light
spectrum
white light spectrum
C
D spectrum
white light
white light
spectrum
22 The diagram shows the path of a ray of light passing through a principal focus F of a lens. Which broken line shows the direction of the ray after it leaves the lens?
lens
ray lig
ht
of
A F
F’ B
D
© UCLES 2009
C
0625/11/M/J/09
[Turn over
12 23 A small boat in a harbour is protected from waves on the sea by harbour walls. land
sea waves
small boat harbour
harbour walls
Some waves can curve round the harbour walls and reach the boat. What is the name for this effect? A
diffraction
B
dispersion
C
reflection
D
refraction
24 An engineer standing at P sees an explosion at X. Z
P
Y X
DANGER BLASTING
V
W
After the explosion, she hears two bangs. One bang is heard a fraction of a second after the other. The second bang is an echo. From which surface has the sound reflected to cause this echo? A
XY
© UCLES 2009
B
PV
C
ZY
0625/11/M/J/09
D
WX
13 25 The north pole of a bar magnet is placed next to end P of an iron bar PQ, as shown. As a result, magnetic poles are induced in the iron bar. S
N
P
magnet
Q iron bar
What are the magnetic poles induced at P and at Q? magnetic pole at P
magnetic pole at Q
A
north
north
B
north
south
C
south
north
D
south
south
26 An electromagnet is used to separate magnetic metals from non-magnetic metals. Why is steel unsuitable as the core of the electromagnet? A
It forms a permanent magnet.
B
It has a high density.
C
It has a high thermal capacity.
D
It is a good conductor of electricity.
27 Which particle does not experience a force due to an electric field? A
α-particle
B
electron
C
neutron
D
proton
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
[Turn over
14 28 Using the circuit shown, the current I is found for various voltages V. The temperature of the resistor does not change. variable direct voltage V A
I Which graph shows the results obtained? A
B
I
C
I
0
I
0 V
0
D I
0 0
V
0 V
0
29 In the circuit shown, ammeter X reads 0.5 A. 4.0 V
A Y
X A 5.0 Ω
3.0 Ω
What does ammeter Y read? A
0
© UCLES 2009
B
0.5 A
C
3.5 A
0625/11/M/J/09
D
4.0 A
0
V
15 30 In the circuits shown, all the resistors are identical. Which circuit has the least resistance? A
B
C
D
31 In the circuit below, one of the lamps breaks, causing all the other lamps to go out. Which lamp breaks?
A
C
D
B
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
[Turn over
16 32 Either a fuse or a circuit-breaker can be used to protect electrical cables from large currents that could cause overheating. cable
X live electrical supply
appliance
Y
neutral cable
If a fuse is used, in which position in the circuit should it be connected, and if a circuit-breaker is used, in which position should it be connected? position of fuse
position of circuit-breaker
A
X
X
B
X
Y
C
Y
X
D
Y
Y
33 The current in a lamp at full brightness is 0.25 A. The flexible cable to the lamp is designed for currents up to 5.0 A, so it can safely carry the 0.25 A taken by the lamp. Which fuse should be inserted in the plug at the other end of the flexible cable? A
0.2 A
© UCLES 2009
B
1.0 A
C
5.0 A
0625/11/M/J/09
D
10.0 A
17 34 A wire perpendicular to the page carries an electric current in a direction out of the page. There are four compasses near the wire. Which compass shows the direction of the magnetic field caused by the current?
B
A
C
wire with current out of page D
35 A transformer has 50 turns on its primary coil and 100 turns on its secondary coil. An alternating voltage of 25.0 V is connected across the primary coil. 25.0 V primary coil 50 turns
secondary coil 100 turns
What is the voltage across the secondary coil? A
12.5 V
B
50.0 V
C
175 V
D
200 V
36 In a cathode-ray tube, a hot tungsten cathode releases particles by thermionic emission. What are these particles? A
α-particles
B
electrons
C
protons
D
tungsten atoms
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
[Turn over
18 37 The diagram shows a cathode-ray tube. cathode
anode
top Y plate
P screen
bottom Y plate
A student wants the cathode rays to make a spot at P on the screen. Which parts of the cathode-ray tube should be positive? A
anode and top Y plate
B
anode and bottom Y plate
C
cathode and top Y plate
D
cathode and bottom Y plate
38 A radioactive nucleus contains 138 neutrons. The nucleus emits an α-particle. How many neutrons are in the nucleus after it has emitted the α-particle? A
134
© UCLES 2009
B
136
C
138
0625/11/M/J/09
D
139
19 39 The graph shows the decay curve for one particular radioactive nuclide.
2500 count rate counts / min 2000
1500
1000
500
0 0
1
2
3
4
5 time / days
What is the half-life of this nuclide?
40
A
1.0 day
B
16 7N
is the symbol for a particular nuclide of nitrogen.
1.5 days
C
2.0 days
D
2.5 days
D
23
How many nucleons does this nuclide contain? A
7
© UCLES 2009
B
9
C
16
0625/11/M/J/09
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/11/M/J/09
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/11
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
October/November 2009 45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*7565115686*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 16 printed pages. IB09 11_0625_01/4RP © UCLES 2009
[Turn over
2 1
A stopwatch is used to time an athlete running 100 m. The timekeeper forgets to reset the watch to zero before using it to time another athlete running 100 m.
60
55
55
5
50
seconds 35
10
45
15
40
20
15 seconds
40
25
30
5
50
10
45
60
35
stopwatch at end of first athlete’s run
30
20 25
stopwatch at end of second athlete’s run
How long does the second athlete take to run 100 m? A 2
11.2 s
B
C
11.4 s
D
12.4 s
23.8 s
A ball is thrown upwards. What effect does the force of gravity have on the ball?
3
A
It produces a constant acceleration downwards.
B
It produces a constant acceleration upwards.
C
It produces a decreasing acceleration upwards.
D
It produces an increasing acceleration downwards.
A car accelerates from traffic lights. The graph shows the car’s speed plotted against time. speed m/s 20
0 0
10
time / s
How far does the car travel before it reaches a constant speed? A
10 m
© UCLES 2009
B
20 m
C
100 m
0625/11/O/N/09
D
200 m
3 4
5
Which property of a body can be measured in newtons? A
density
B
mass
C
volume
D
weight
A cup contains hot liquid. Some of the liquid evaporates as it cools. What happens to the mass and to the weight of the liquid in the cup as it cools?
6
mass
weight
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
stays the same
C
stays the same
decreases
D
stays the same
stays the same
The diagrams show a rectangular box with inside measurements of 5 cm × 6 cm × 4 cm. liquid
4 cm 6 cm 5 cm mass = 40 g
total mass = 220 g
The box has a mass of 40 g when empty. When filled with a liquid, it has a total mass of 220 g. What is the density of the liquid? A
220 g / cm3 (5 × 6 × 4)
B
(220 − 40) g / cm3 (5 × 6 × 4)
C
(5 × 6 × 4) g / cm3 220
D
(5 × 6 × 4) g / cm3 (220 − 40)
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
[Turn over
4 7
Passengers are not allowed to stand on the upper deck of double-decker buses. upper deck
lower deck
Why is this?
8
A
They would cause the bus to become unstable.
B
They would cause the bus to slow down.
C
They would increase the kinetic energy of the bus.
D
They would lower the centre of mass of the bus.
The object in the diagram is acted upon by the two forces shown. 3N
2N object
What is the effect of these forces? A
The object moves to the left with constant speed.
B
The object moves to the left with constant acceleration.
C
The object moves to the right with constant speed.
D
The object moves to the right with constant acceleration.
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
5 9
The diagram shows a microphone being used in an interview.
microphone
Which energy change takes place in the microphone? input energy
output energy
A
chemical
electrical
B
electrical
chemical
C
electrical
sound
D
sound
electrical
10 The table shows the times taken for four children to run up a set of stairs. Which child’s power is greatest? mass of child / kg
time / s
A
40
10
B
40
20
C
60
10
D
60
20
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
[Turn over
6 11 A water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply to a house. It gives a reading of h cm of water. gas supply h cm
Why is it better to use water rather than mercury in this manometer? A
h would be too large if mercury were used.
B
h would be too small if mercury were used.
C
The tube would need to be narrower if mercury were used.
D
The tube would need to be wider if mercury were used.
12 The diagrams show two swimming pools. One contains fresh water and the other contains salt water. Salt water is more dense than fresh water. At which labelled point is the pressure the greatest?
water surface
water surface A
C
B
D
fresh water (less dense)
salt water (more dense)
13 Brownian motion is observed by looking at smoke particles through a microscope. How do the smoke particles move in Brownian motion? A
all in the same direction
B
at random
C
in circles
D
vibrating about fixed points
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
7 14 A small amount of air is introduced into the vacuum above the mercury in a mercury barometer tube. The mercury level goes down. Why does the mercury level go down? A
The air molecules cool the mercury and make it contract.
B
The air molecules decrease the pressure above the mercury.
C
The air molecules heat the mercury and make it expand.
D
The air molecules increase the pressure above the mercury.
15 To mark a temperature scale on a thermometer, standard temperatures known as fixed points are needed. Which of these is a fixed point? A
room temperature
B
the temperature inside a freezer
C
the temperature of pure melting ice
D
the temperature of pure warm water
16 The table gives the melting points and boiling points of glycerine and benzene. melting point
boiling point
glycerine
18 °C
290 °C
benzene
5.4 °C
80 °C
At which temperature will both glycerine and benzene be liquid? A
0 °C
© UCLES 2009
B
50 °C
C
100 °C
0625/11/O/N/09
D
150 °C
[Turn over
8 17 A beaker contains water at room temperature.
water
X
Y How could a convection current be set up in the water? A
cool the water at X
B
cool the water at Y
C
stir the water at X
D
stir the water at Y
18 A student warms her hands near a fire.
Which waves carry most heat to her hands and are these waves electromagnetic? waves
electromagnetic
A
infra-red
no
B
infra-red
yes
C
visible light
no
D
visible light
yes
19 The drawing shows a wave. Which labelled distance is the wavelength?
A B
D C
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
9 20 Sound waves travel from a point X to another point Y. X
Y
Which diagram represents the movement of the air molecules, caused by the sound waves, in the region between X and Y. A
B
C
D X
Y
21 A ray of light in glass is incident on a boundary with air. Which path does the ray of light take when the angle of incidence i is less than the critical angle? A B air glass
C D
i
ray of light
22 An object O is placed in front of a converging lens of focal length f. At which point will the top of the image be seen? A B O f
f
C D
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
[Turn over
10 23 Which range of frequencies typically can be heard by a 10 year-old child? A
20 Hz – 2000 Hz
B
20 Hz – 20 000 Hz
C
200 Hz – 2000 Hz
D
200 Hz – 20 000 Hz
24 Astronaut 1 uses a hammer to mend a satellite in space. Astronaut 2 is nearby. There is no air in space.
astronaut 1
hammer
astronaut 2
Compared with the sound heard if they were working on Earth, what does astronaut 2 hear? A
a louder sound
B
a quieter sound
C
a sound of the same loudness
D
no sound at all
25 A permanent magnet is brought near to a piece of copper. The copper is not attracted by the magnet. Why is there no attraction? A
Copper is ferrous but is only attracted by an electromagnet.
B
Copper is ferrous but is not attracted by any type of magnet.
C
Copper is not ferrous and is only attracted by an electromagnet.
D
Copper is not ferrous and is not attracted by any type of magnet.
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
11 26 Four plotting compasses are placed in the magnetic field of two identical bar magnets as shown in the diagram. Which compass is shown pointing in the wrong direction? B A
D S
N
N
S C
27 A pupil measures the potential difference across a device and the current in it. Which calculation gives the resistance of the device? A
current + potential difference
B
current ÷ potential difference
C
potential difference ÷ current
D
potential difference × current
28 A student uses a length of wire as a resistor. He discovers that the resistance of the wire is too small. To be certain of making a resistor of higher value, he should use a piece of wire that is A
longer and thicker.
B
longer and thinner.
C
shorter and thicker.
D
shorter and thinner.
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
[Turn over
12 29 The diagram shows a battery connected to two identical resistors. Three ammeters M1, M2 and M3 are connected in the circuit.
M1 A
A M3 A M2
Meter M1 reads 1.0 A. What are the readings on M2 and on M3? reading on M2 / A
reading on M3 / A
A
0.5
0.0
B
0.5
0.5
C
0.5
1.0
D
1.0
1.0
30 The diagram shows a torch containing two cells, a switch and a lamp.
plastic case brass connecting strip
switch lamp
What is the circuit diagram for the torch? A
© UCLES 2009
B
C
0625/11/O/N/09
D
13 31 An electrical component X is placed in water, as shown. A
thermometer
X water
When the temperature of the water is increased, the reading on the ammeter increases. What is component X? A
a capacitor
B
a light-dependent resistor
C
a relay
D
a thermistor
32 A certain electrical appliance is powered from a mains supply. The appliance normally uses a current of 3 A, but the current briefly rises to 4 A at the instant the appliance is switched on. The cable to the appliance is designed for currents up to 6 A. The fuses available to protect the cable are rated at 1 A, 3 A, 5 A and 13 A. Which fuse should be used? A
1A
B
3A
C
5A
D
13 A
33 On a building site, metal scaffolding is firmly embedded in the damp ground. A builder holds a mains-operated electric drill in one hand. With his other hand he holds on to the scaffolding. The power cable of the drill is damaged where it enters the metal casing of the drill. What danger does this present to the builder? A
A current could pass through the builder and electrocute him.
B
A current in the scaffolding could heat it up and burn him.
C
The large current could blow the fuse and damage the drill.
D
The large current could make the motor spin too quickly.
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
[Turn over
14 34 Which device is designed to allow a small direct current (d.c.) to control a large direct current (d.c.)? A
a generator
B
a motor
C
a relay
D
a transformer
35 A transformer is to be used to provide a 10 V output from a 100 V supply.
100 V
10 V
primary coil
secondary coil
What are suitable numbers of turns for the primary coil and for the secondary coil? number of turns on the primary coil
number of turns on the secondary coil
A
100
1000
B
200
110
C
400
490
D
800
80
36 The diagram shows a beam of cathode rays entering an electric field.
– beam
+ In which direction is the beam deflected by the field? A
downwards
B
upwards
C
into the page
D
out of the page
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
15 37 To create cathode rays in a vacuum, what might be a suitable potential difference to connect between the cathode and anode? A
6 V a.c.
B
6 V d.c.
C
600 V a.c.
D
600 V d.c.
38 Which statement explains the meaning of the half-life of a radioactive substance? A
half the time taken for half the substance to decay
B
half the time taken for the substance to decay completely
C
the time taken for half the substance to decay
D
the time taken for the substance to decay completely
39 The diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation, X, Y and Z. X Y Z 2 mm of plastic
10 mm of aluminium
lead
Which row in the table correctly identifies X, Y and Z? X
Y
Z
A
α-particles
β-particles
γ-rays
B
β-particles
α-particles
γ-rays
C
β-particles
γ-rays
α-particles
D
γ-rays
α-particles
β-particles
Question 40 is on the next page.
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
[Turn over
16 40 How many neutrons and how many protons are contained in a nucleus of neutrons
protons
A
92
146
B
146
92
C
146
238
D
238
92
238 92 U ?
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/11
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2010 45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*0334676086*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. IB10 06_0625_11/4RP © UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2 1
A scientist needs to determine the volume of a small, irregularly shaped rock sample. Only a rule and a measuring cylinder, partially filled with water, are available. cm3
cm
rule
rock sample measuring cylinder To determine the volume, which apparatus should the scientist use?
2
A
both the measuring cylinder and the rule
B
neither the measuring cylinder nor the rule
C
the measuring cylinder only
D
the rule only
A student uses a stopwatch to time a runner running around a circular track. The runner runs two laps (twice around the track). The diagrams show the reading on the stopwatch when the runner starts running, at the end of the first lap, and at the end of the second lap.
reading when runner starts
reading at end of first lap
reading at end of second lap
What is the time taken for the runner to run the second lap? A
0 min 50 s
© UCLES 2010
B
1 min 10 s
C
1 min 13 s
0625/11/M/J/10
D
2 min 03 s
3 3
Two distance / time graphs and two speed / time graphs are shown. Which graph represents an object that is at rest? A
B distance
distance
0
0
0
time
0
time
C
D
speed
0
4
speed
0
0 time
0
time
A snail moves along a ruler. It takes 20 s to move from Q to R. P
Q
0
2
R
cm
12
What is its average speed from Q to R? A
12 cm / s 20
B
12 − 2 cm / s 20
C
20 cm / s 12
D
20 cm / s 12 − 2
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
[Turn over
4 5
Two blocks of metal X and Y hang from spring balances as shown in the diagram.
N0
N0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
X Y
What does the diagram show about X and Y? A
They have the same mass and the same volume but different weights.
B
They have the same mass and the same weight but different volumes.
C
They have the same mass, the same volume and the same weight.
D
They have the same weight and the same volume but different masses.
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
5 6
The graph shows how weight varies with mass on planet P and on planet Q. 400
planet P
weight / N 300
planet Q
200
100
0 0
20
40
60 80 mass / kg
An object weighs 400 N on planet P. The object is taken to planet Q. Which row is correct?
7
mass of object on planet Q / kg
weight of object on planet Q / N
A
40
200
B
40
400
C
80
200
D
80
400
The diagram shows a rectangular block of density 2 g / cm3. 3 cm 2 cm
2 cm
What is the mass of the block? A
2g
© UCLES 2010
B
6g
C
14 g
0625/11/M/J/10
D
24 g
[Turn over
6 8
9
Which statement about a moving object is correct? A
When an object is accelerating, the resultant force acting on it must equal zero.
B
When an object is moving at a steady speed, the air resistance acting on it must equal zero.
C
When an object is moving at a steady speed, the resultant force acting on it must equal zero.
D
When an object is moving, there must be a resultant force acting on it.
An experiment is carried out to measure the extension of a rubber band for different loads. The results are shown below. load / N length / cm
0
1
15.2
16.2
0
1.0
extension / cm
2
3 18.6
2.1
3.4
Which figure is missing from the table? A
B
17.2
C
17.3
17.4
D
17.6
10 Energy is stored in a battery and in a box of matches. Which type of energy is stored in each of them? a battery
a box of matches
A
chemical
chemical
B
chemical
internal (thermal)
C
electrical
chemical
D
electrical
internal (thermal)
11 A man lifts 20 bricks, each of weight 6 N. What other information is needed to calculate the useful work done in lifting the bricks? A
the distance he lifts the bricks
B
the mass of the bricks
C
the time taken to lift the bricks
D
the volume of the bricks
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
7 12 To prevent a cement mixer sinking into soft ground, the mixer is placed on a large flat board. cement mixer
board soft ground
Why does this prevent the mixer sinking? A
The large area decreases the pressure on the ground.
B
The large area increases the pressure on the ground.
C
The large area decreases the weight on the ground.
D
The large area increases the weight on the ground.
13 The pressure of a gas is measured using a manometer as shown in the diagram. pressure to be measured
h
mercury
The mercury in the manometer is replaced with a liquid which is less dense. How does the value of h change? A
It becomes zero.
B
It decreases, but not to zero.
C
It stays the same.
D
It increases.
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
[Turn over
8 14 The diagram represents the molecules of a gas in a closed container of constant volume.
What happens to the molecules when the gas is heated? A
They expand.
B
They hit the walls less often.
C
They move further apart.
D
They move more quickly.
15 A liquid is left in an open dish. After several days there is less liquid in the dish. Which statement explains this? A
The least energetic molecules leave the surface and escape into the air.
B
The least energetic molecules leave the surface and return.
C
The most energetic molecules leave the surface and escape into the air.
D
The most energetic molecules leave the surface and return.
16 A thermometer has a scale which starts at –10 °C and ends at 110 °C. –10 0
100 110 °C
What is the value of the lower fixed point and of the upper fixed point of the scale? lower fixed point / °C
upper fixed point / °C
A
–10
100
B
–10
110
C
0
100
D
0
110
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
9 17 A student carries out an experiment to find the melting point of wax. The graph shows how the temperature of the wax changes as it cools. X temperature / °C Y
melting point of wax
Z
0 0
time
Which statement is correct? A
At X the temperature drops more slowly than at Z.
B
At Y all the wax is solid.
C
At Y thermal energy is being given out by the wax.
D
At Z the wax molecules are not moving.
18 Hot liquid in a vacuum flask cools extremely slowly. This is because some methods of heat transfer cannot take place in a vacuum. Which methods cannot take place in a vacuum? A
conduction and convection only
B
conduction and radiation only
C
convection and radiation only
D
conduction, convection and radiation
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
[Turn over
10 19 A teacher demonstrates convection currents using a box with two chimneys and a lighted candle. She holds a smoking taper at point P. In which direction does the convection current cause the smoke to move? B A
chimney
chimney
P
C
D
20 Which waves are longitudinal? A
B
C
D
sound waves from a trumpet
water waves on a pond
88:88
light waves from a lamp
microwaves in an oven
21 A navigation buoy floating on the sea oscillates up and down as a wave passes. navigation buoy
In exactly two minutes, six complete wavelengths pass the buoy. What is the frequency of the waves? A
0.050 Hz
© UCLES 2010
B
0.33 Hz
C
3.0 Hz
0625/11/M/J/10
D
20 Hz
11 22 The diagram shows a ray of light incident on the edge of a piece of glass. The angle i is bigger than the critical angle. Which arrow correctly shows the direction of the ray after it leaves the edge of the glass?
normal ray of light
D i
glass air
C A B
23 Which diagram correctly shows rays of light passing through a converging lens in a camera? A
B camera
object
camera
image
object
image
lens
lens
C
D camera
object
camera
image
object
image lens
lens
24 What is the approximate value of the highest frequency that can be heard by a young person? A
20 Hz
© UCLES 2010
B
200 Hz
C
2000 Hz
0625/11/M/J/10
D
20 000 Hz
[Turn over
12 25 A police car siren emits two different sounds P and Q. These are produced alternately. The diagram represents the sounds emitted. P
P
P
displacement Q
Q
time
Which sound is the louder and which has the lower pitch? louder
lower pitch
A
P
P
B
P
Q
C
Q
P
D
Q
Q
26 A magnet attracts two pieces of iron. iron N
S
What is the arrangement of the induced poles in the pieces of iron? A
N
S S
N
B
N
S N
S
C
S
N S
N
D
S
N N
S
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
13 27 A piece of iron and a piece of steel are picked up by an electromagnet as shown. electromagnet
N
S
steel
iron
The current to the electromagnet is switched off. What happens? A
Both the iron and the steel remain magnetised.
B
Neither the iron nor the steel remain magnetised.
C
Only the iron remains magnetised.
D
Only the steel remains magnetised.
28 The table shows the lengths and diameters of four copper wires. Which wire has the least resistance? length / m
diameter / mm
A
0.50
1.0
B
0.50
2.5
C
0.75
1.0
D
0.75
2.5
29 A circuit is set up to measure the resistance of a resistor R. The meter readings are 2.0 A and 3.0 V.
A V R
What is the resistance of the resistor R? A
0.67 Ω
© UCLES 2010
B
1.5 Ω
C
5.0 Ω
0625/11/M/J/10
D
6.0 Ω
[Turn over
14 30 The circuit shown is a potential divider.
X output
What is component X? A
a light-dependent resistor
B
a relay
C
a thermistor
D
a variable resistor
31 A lamp is connected in four circuits in turn, each using identical batteries. The resistors are all identical. In which circuit will the lamp be brightest?
© UCLES 2010
A
B
C
D
0625/11/M/J/10
15 32 Which diagram shows the correct positions for both the switch and the fuse?
switch
live wire A
lamp neutral wire fuse
live wire
switch
fuse
B
lamp neutral wire
live wire
fuse
C
lamp neutral wire switch
live wire D
lamp neutral wire fuse
switch
33 After some building work in a house, a bare (uninsulated) live wire is left protruding from a wall. What is the greatest hazard? A
a fire
B
a fuse will blow
C
an electric shock
D
no current will flow
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
[Turn over
16 34 A coil is connected to a battery and a soft iron bar is hung near to it.
soft iron
coil
The current is then reversed by reversing the battery connections. How does the soft iron bar behave in the two cases? with the battery as shown
with the battery reversed
A
attracted to the coil
attracted to the coil
B
attracted to the coil
repelled from the coil
C
repelled from the coil
attracted to the coil
D
repelled from the coil
repelled from the coil
35 A transformer has 15 000 turns on its primary coil and 750 turns on its secondary coil. Connected in this way, for what purpose could this transformer be used? A
to convert the 8000 V a.c. output of a power station to 160 000 V for long-distance power transmission
B
to convert the 160 000 V d.c. supply from a power line to 8000 V for local power transmission
C
to use a 12 V d.c. supply to operate a 240 V razor
D
to use a 240 V a.c. mains supply to operate a 12 V motor
36 What are cathode rays? A
a beam of electrons
B
a beam of neutrons
C
a beam of protons
D
electromagnetic waves
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
17 37 A cathode-ray tube has an anode and an earthed cathode. Which row shows the charge on the anode and the temperature of the cathode? anode charge
cathode temperature
A
negative
cool
B
negative
hot
C
positive
cool
D
positive
hot
38 Which row describes the properties of α-particles? ionizing effect
radiation stopped by aluminium?
A
large
no
B
large
yes
C
small
no
D
small
yes
39 A radioactive substance has a half-life of 2 weeks. At the beginning of an investigation the substance emits 3000 β-particles per minute. How many β-particles will it emit per minute after 6 weeks? A
0
B
375
C
500
D
1500
40 The nuclide notation for radium-226 is 226 88 Ra . How many electrons orbit the nucleus of a neutral atom of radium-226? A
0
© UCLES 2010
B
88
C
138
0625/11/M/J/10
D
226
18 BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
19 BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/11
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
October/November 2010 45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*0588341704*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. IB10 11_0625_11/3RP © UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2 1
The diagrams show an experiment to determine the volume of a stone. without stone
with stone
10 cm3 9
10 cm3 9
8
8
7 6 5
7 6 5
4
4
3 2 1
3 2 1
stone
What is the volume of the stone? A 2
3 cm3
B
4 cm3
C
7 cm3
D
11 cm3
Four athletes run twice around a track. The table shows their times at the end of each lap. Which athlete runs the second lap the fastest? athlete
time at end of first lap / s
time at end of second lap / s
A
22.99
47.04
B
23.04
47.00
C
23.16
47.18
D
23.39
47.24
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
3 3
The diagram shows the speed / time graph for an object moving at constant speed. 2 speed m/s 1
0 0
1
3 time / s
2
4
What is the distance travelled by the object in the first 3 s? A 4
B
1.5 m
2.0 m
C
D
3.0 m
6.0 m
A car travels along the route PQRST in 30 minutes. S
5 km 10 km
Q
T
5 km 10 km R
P
What is the average speed of the car? A 5
10 km / hour
B
20 km / hour
C
30 km / hour
D
60 km / hour
Which list contains the name of a force? A
acceleration, charge, temperature
B
density, resistance, speed
C
distance, frequency, mass
D
energy, power, weight
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
4 6
The reading on a spring balance with a holder and eight identical discs is 3.0 N. Six discs are removed and the reading becomes 1.2 N.
spring balance
N0 1
N0 1
2
2
3
3
4
4
holder for discs
two discs
eight discs
What is the weight of one disc? A 7
0.2 N
B
0.3 N
C
0.5 N
D
0.6 N
A student is trying to find the density of water and of a large, regularly shaped concrete block. Which apparatus is needed to find the density of both the water and the concrete block?
8
A
balance, clock, measuring cylinder
B
balance, clock, ruler
C
balance, measuring cylinder, ruler
D
clock, measuring cylinder, ruler
A force acts on a moving rubber ball. Which of these changes could not happen to the ball because of the force? A
a change in direction
B
a change in mass
C
a change in shape
D
a change in speed
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
5 9
The extension / load graph for a spring is shown. The unloaded length of the spring is 15.0 cm. 3 extension / cm
2
1
0 0
1
2
3
4
5 load / N
When an object of unknown weight is hung on the spring, the length of the spring is 16.4 cm. What is the weight of the object? A
0.55 N
B
0.67 N
C
3.5 N
D
4.1 N
10 Which of these is designed to change electrical energy into kinetic energy? A
a capacitor
B
a generator
C
a motor
D
a transformer
11 A car is driven on a long journey along a flat, horizontal road. The car stops several times on the journey and its engine becomes hot. Which type of energy does not change during the journey? A
the chemical energy in the fuel tank
B
the gravitational energy of the car
C
the internal (thermal) energy of the engine
D
the kinetic energy of the car
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
6 12 What is a simple mercury barometer designed to measure? A
the pressure beneath a liquid
B
the pressure of a gas supply
C
the pressure of car tyres
D
the pressure of the atmosphere
13 Liquid X has a density of 1010 kg / m3. Liquid Y has a density of 950 kg / m3. The liquids are poured into tubes as shown. Which tube has the greatest pressure on its base?
B
A
liquid X
C
liquid Y
liquid X
14 Some gas in a sealed plastic bag is cooled. How do the gas molecules behave when this happens? A
They move more quickly and become closer together.
B
They move more quickly and become further apart.
C
They move more slowly and become closer together.
D
They move more slowly and become further apart.
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
D
liquid Y
7 15 A block of ice cream is prevented from melting by wrapping it in newspaper soaked in water. The water evaporates from the newspaper. Which molecules escape from the water and what happens to the average speed of the water molecules that remain in the newspaper? escaping molecules
average speed of the remaining water molecules
A
the more energetic ones
decreases
B
the more energetic ones
increases
C
the less energetic ones
decreases
D
the less energetic ones
increases
16 Which change is condensation? A solid
B liquid
C
© UCLES 2010
gas D
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
8 17 A beaker containing ice and a thermometer is left in a warm room for 15 minutes. No water is visible in the beaker until 5 minutes has passed. After 15 minutes some ice is still visible.
ice
ice
water start of experiment
after 5 minutes
after 15 minutes
Which graph shows how the thermometer reading changes?
A
B
temperature / °C
temperature / °C
0
0
0
5
0
10 15 time / min
5
C
D
temperature / °C
temperature / °C
0
0
0
© UCLES 2010
5
10 15 time / min
10 15 time / min
0625/11/O/N/10
0
5
10 15 time / min
9 18 A piece of wood has some iron nails pushed through it. One side of the wood is covered with heat sensitive paper which turns from pink to blue when heated. The wood is heated as shown for a few minutes and blue dots appear on the heat sensitive paper where it touches the nails. wood
heat sensitive paper
iron nails
heat
blue dots
This experiment shows that, compared to wood, iron is a good A
absorber of heat.
B
conductor of heat.
C
convector of heat.
D
emitter of heat.
19 An electric heater is placed inside a metal box which has one side open. The diagram shows four possible positions for the box. The heater is switched on for several minutes. In which position does the box become the hottest? A
© UCLES 2010
B
C
D
heater
heater
box
box
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
10 20 Which group contains only transverse waves? A
infra-red waves, light waves, sound waves
B
infra-red waves, light waves, ultra-violet waves
C
infra-red waves, ultra-violet waves, sound waves
D
light waves, sound waves, ultra-violet waves
21 Water waves in a tank pass over a thin plastic block as shown. plastic block
tank
What happens to the waves as they reach the plastic block? A
They are diffracted because they slow down.
B
They are diffracted because they speed up.
C
They are refracted because they slow down.
D
They are refracted because they speed up.
22 A girl writes the word LEFT on a piece of card.
LEFT She looks at the image of this card, made by reflection by a plane mirror. What does she see? A
© UCLES 2010
B
C
0625/11/O/N/10
D
11 23 A scientist is trying to direct a ray of light through a glass block without any light leaving the top of the block. However, some light does leave the top. light leaving top top of block
glass block
X
ray of light
The scientist changes angle X and stops the ray of light leaving the top. Which row in the table describes the change to angle X and the name of the effect produced? change to angle X
name of effect produced
A
decrease
total internal reflection
B
decrease
total internal refraction
C
increase
total internal reflection
D
increase
total internal refraction
24 The diagrams represent two different sound waves. wave P
wave Q
displacement
displacement
time
time
How do the frequency and pitch of P compare with the frequency and pitch of Q? frequency of P
pitch of P
A
greater than Q
higher than Q
B
greater than Q
same as Q
C
same as Q
higher than Q
D
same as Q
same as Q
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
12 25 A ship sends a pulse of sound vertically downwards to the sea bed. An echo is heard 0.4 seconds later. If the speed of sound in the water is 1200 m / s, how deep is the water below the ship? A
240 m
B
480 m
C
1500 m
D
3000 m
26 Which statement about a magnet is not correct? A
It can attract another magnet.
B
It can attract an unmagnetised piece of iron.
C
It can repel another magnet.
D
It can repel an unmagnetised piece of iron.
27 A chain of steel nails and a chain of iron nails hang from a strong magnet. The chains are then carefully removed from the magnet. magnet steel
iron
What happens to the chains? A
Both chains fall apart.
B
Both chains stay together.
C
Only the chain of iron nails falls apart.
D
Only the chain of steel nails falls apart.
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
13 28 A potential difference (p.d.) across a resistor causes a current in it. resistor current
p.d.
The p.d. and the resistance of the resistor can both be changed. Which row shows two changes that will both increase the current in the resistor? change
change
A
decrease p.d.
decrease resistance
B
decrease p.d.
increase resistance
C
increase p.d.
decrease resistance
D
increase p.d.
increase resistance
29 The diagram shows a circuit containing two ammeters and three resistors.
ammeter X
A
A
R1
R2
ammeter Y
R3
Which of the ammeters will show the current in resistor R2? A
ammeter X only
B
ammeter Y only
C
both ammeter X and ammeter Y
D
neither ammeter X nor ammeter Y
30 Which component can store energy and can be used in time-delay circuits? A
a capacitor
B
a potentiometer
C
a resistor
D
a thermistor
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
14 31 A circuit contains two resistors connected in parallel with a battery.
R P
Q
2Ω
4Ω
Which of the following statements about the currents at P, Q and R is true? A
The current at P is the greatest.
B
The current at Q is the greatest.
C
The current at R is the greatest.
D
The current is the same at points P, Q and R.
32 The potential divider shown is connected across a constant 12 V supply.
20 Ω
V1
12 V
R
V2
When R has a value of 20 Ω, the voltmeter readings are equal. How do these readings change when the value of R is reduced to 10 Ω? reading on V1
reading on V2
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
increases
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
increases
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
15 33 A fuse is a safety device for use in an electrical appliance. How does a fuse affect a circuit when the current in it becomes higher than the correct value for the appliance? A
It completely stops the current.
B
It reduces the current to the correct value for the appliance.
C
It sends the current to the outer case of the appliance.
D
It sends the excess current to the earth wire.
34 Some electrical equipment is connected to a 230 V supply. It is kept inside a metal case which is not earthed. The case is fixed to a plastic support. A strand of wire has become loose and touches the metal case as shown. cable metal case on plastic support strand of wire
electrical equipment
Which statement about this situation is correct? A
An electric current is passing through the metal case.
B
A fuse in the live wire will blow.
C
Someone touching the case would receive an electric shock.
D
The metal case is at 0 V.
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
16 35 A coil is rotated steadily between the poles of a magnet. The coil is connected to an oscilloscope.
N
oscilloscope
S
contact
contact
Which graph shows the output voltage V against time t ? A
B
V
C
V
D
V t
t
V t
t
36 A village has to be supplied with electricity from a power station that is a long way from the village. Which type of current should be used, and at which voltage? type of current
voltage
A
alternating current
high voltage
B
alternating current
low voltage
C
direct current
high voltage
D
direct current
low voltage
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
17 37 An electric field is set up between two parallel plates. Cathode rays are directed into this field, parallel to the plates. + cathode rays –
In which direction are the cathode rays deflected by the electric field? A
downwards
B
upwards
C
into the page
D
out of the page
38 A radioactive element has a half-life of 70 s. The number of emissions per second, N, of a sample of the element is measured at a certain time. What was the number of emissions per second 70 s earlier? A
0
B
C
N/2
N
D
2N
39 S is a radioactive source emitting α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays. A detector is placed 5 cm away from S. A thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram. thin sheet of paper S
detector
5 cm
Which radiations can be detected? A
α-particles and β-particles only
B
α-particles and γ-rays only
C
β-particles and γ-rays only
D
α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
18 40 In the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles. central mass
orbiting particles
What is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles? central mass
orbiting particles
A
neutron
α-particles
B
neutron
electrons
C
nucleus
α-particles
D
nucleus
electrons
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
19 BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/11
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2011 45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*3129497903*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. IB11 06_0625_11/4RP © UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2 1
The diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. It is being used to measure the length of a small feather.
mm cm
10
20
30
1
2
3
What is the length of the feather? A 2
B
19 mm
C
29 mm
D
19 cm
29 cm
An object moves initially with constant speed and then with constant acceleration. Which graph shows this motion?
A
B
speed
speed
0 0
0 0
time
C
D
speed
0 0
© UCLES 2011
time
speed
0 time
0625/11/M/J/11
0
time
3 3
A tennis player hits a ball hard and 0.40 s later hears the echo from a wall.
The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s. How far away is the player from the wall? A 4
66 m
B
132 m
C
264 m
D
825 m
Which statement about mass and weight is correct? A
Mass and weight are both forces.
B
Neither mass nor weight is a force.
C
Only mass is a force.
D
Only weight is a force.
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
[Turn over
4 5
The diagram shows a balance being used to find the weight of a baby. The weight of the basket can be ignored. At equilibrium, the pivot is nearer to the weight W than to the baby. centre of mass of beam
pivot W
baby
basket
What is the weight of the baby?
6
A
less than W
B
more than W
C
W
D
impossible to tell
A cube of side 2.0 cm is placed on a balance.
2.0 cm
balance
7.2 g
What is the density of the cube? A
0.90 g / cm3
© UCLES 2011
B
1.2 g / cm3
C
1.8 g / cm3
0625/11/M/J/11
D
3.6 g / cm3
5 7
Objects with different masses are hung on a spring. The diagram shows how much the spring stretches.
10 cm 20 cm 30 cm
100 g
M
The extension of the spring is directly proportional to the mass hung on it. What is the mass of object M? A 8
B
110 g
150 g
C
300 g
Which row gives an example of the stated form of energy? form of energy
9
D
200 g
example
A
gravitational
B
internal
the energy due to the flow of cathode rays in a cathode-ray tube
C
kinetic
the energy due to the position of a swimmer standing on a high diving board
D
strain
the energy due to the compression of springs in a car seat
the energy due to the movement of a train along a level track
Which energy resource is used to generate electricity by first boiling water? A
hydroelectric
B
nuclear fission
C
tides
D
waves
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
[Turn over
6 10 Two farmers use an electrically powered elevator to lift bales of hay. All the bales of hay have the same mass.
bale of hay
As sunset approaches, they increase the speed of the motor so that more bales are lifted up in a given time. How does this affect the work done in lifting each bale and the useful output power of the motor? work done in lifting each bale
useful output power of the motor
A
increases
decreases
B
increases
increases
C
no change
decreases
D
no change
increases
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
7 11 A brick with flat, rectangular sides rests on a table.
brick table
The brick is now turned so that it rests on the table on its smallest face.
How has this affected the force and the pressure exerted by the brick on the table? force
pressure
A
increased
increased
B
increased
unchanged
C
unchanged
increased
D
unchanged
unchanged
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
[Turn over
8 12 The diagram shows two mercury barometers. Barometer 1 is measuring atmospheric pressure on day 1. Barometer 2 is measuring atmospheric pressure on day 2.
mercury
point Y
point X barometer 1, day 1
barometer 2, day 2
Which statement is true? A
The atmospheric pressure on day 1 is less than the atmospheric pressure on day 2.
B
The atmospheric pressure on day 1 is the same as the atmospheric pressure on day 2.
C
The pressure at point X is less than the pressure at point Y.
D
The pressure at point X is the same as the pressure at point Y.
13 A sealed gas cylinder is left outside on a hot, sunny day. What happens to the average speed of the molecules and to the pressure of the gas in the cylinder as the temperature rises? average speed of the gas molecules
gas pressure
A
falls
falls
B
falls
rises
C
rises
falls
D
rises
rises
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
9 14 When a liquid evaporates, some molecules escape from it and its temperature changes. From where do the molecules escape and what is the effect on the temperature of the liquid? molecules escape from
temperature of liquid
A
all parts of the liquid
decreases
B
all parts of the liquid
increases
C
only the liquid surface
decreases
D
only the liquid surface
increases
15 The diagram shows a thermometer calibrated in degrees Celsius. °C
110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 –10
What are the values of the lower fixed point and of the upper fixed point on the Celsius scale? lower fixed point / °C
upper fixed point / °C
A
–10
110
B
0
20
C
0
100
D
20
100
16 An ice cube at a temperature of 0 °C is put into a drink at a temperature of 10 °C. After a short time, some of the ice has melted and the drink has cooled to a temperature of 8 °C. What is the temperature of the remaining ice? A
0 °C
© UCLES 2011
B
2 °C
C
4 °C
0625/11/M/J/11
D
8 °C
[Turn over
10 17 An experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat. Balls are stuck with wax to rods made from different metals, as shown in diagram 1. The rods are heated at one end. Some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram 2. Which labelled metal is the best conductor of heat? diagram 1
diagram 2 A
B
C
heated end
heated end
before heating
after heating
D
18 Food is kept in a cool-box which uses two ice packs to keep it cool. Where should the ice packs be placed to keep all the food as cool as possible? A
both at the bottom of the box
B
both at the top of the box
C
one at the front and one at the back of the box
D
one on the left and one on the right of the box
19 Water waves can be used to show reflection, refraction and diffraction. For each of these, which row shows whether or not the speed of the water waves changes? reflection
refraction
diffraction
A
no
no
yes
B
no
yes
no
C
yes
no
no
D
yes
yes
yes
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
11 20 A vertical stick is dipped up and down in water at P. In two seconds, three wave crests are produced on the surface of the water.
Y
wave crests
P
X
Which statement is correct? A
Distance X is the amplitude of the waves.
B
Distance Y is the wavelength of the waves.
C
Each circle represents a wavefront.
D
The frequency of the waves is 3 Hz.
21 The diagram shows the dispersion of white light by a glass prism.
white light
red light glass prism
violet light
Why does dispersion occur when white light enters the glass? A
The frequency of red light decreases more than that of violet light.
B
The frequency of violet light decreases more than that of red light.
C
The speed of red light decreases more than that of violet light.
D
The speed of violet light decreases more than that of red light.
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
[Turn over
12 22 A thin converging lens is used to produce, on a screen, a focused image of a candle.
screen image lens
candle
Various focused images are produced on the screen by moving the lens and the screen backwards and forwards. Which statement is always correct? A
The image is at the principal focus (focal point) of the lens.
B
The image is bigger than the object.
C
The image is closer to the lens than the object is.
D
The image is inverted.
23 Sound travels by wave motion. Which property of waves causes echoes? A
diffraction
B
dispersion
C
reflection
D
refraction
24 A student listens to a machine that makes sounds of different frequencies. He can only hear one of the sounds. Which frequency of sound is the student able to hear? A
2 Hz
© UCLES 2011
B
10 Hz
C
2 kHz
0625/11/M/J/11
D
30 kHz
13 25 Which test could be used to find which end of a magnet is the north pole? A
putting it near a compass needle
B
putting it near a ferrous metal
C
putting it near a non-ferrous metal
D
putting it near a steel spoon
26 In two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. This causes the bar to become magnetised. experiment 1
N
magnet
S
experiment 2
S
magnet
N
X
iron bar
iron bar
Y
Which magnetic poles are induced at X and at Y? pole induced at X
pole induced at Y
A
N
N
B
N
S
C
S
N
D
S
S
27 An ammeter and an 18 Ω resistor are connected in series with a battery. The reading on the ammeter is 0.50 A. The resistance of the battery and the ammeter can be ignored.
A 18 Ω
What is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery? A
9.0 N
© UCLES 2011
B
9.0 V
C
36 N
0625/11/M/J/11
D
36 V
[Turn over
14 28 A polythene rod repels an inflated balloon hanging from a nylon thread. What charges must the rod and the balloon carry? A
The rod and the balloon carry opposite charges.
B
The rod and the balloon carry like charges.
C
The rod is charged but the balloon is not.
D
The balloon is charged but the rod is not.
29 Which circuit includes a capacitor and what does the capacitor do in this circuit? circuit
what the capacitor does
A
potential divider
stores current
B
potential divider
stores energy
C
time delay
stores current
D
time delay
stores energy
30 A student sets up the circuit shown. The switch is open (off).
X
Y
Z
Which lamps are on and which lamps are off? lamp X
lamp Y
lamp Z
A
off
off
off
B
on
off
off
C
on
off
on
D
on
on
on
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
15 31 The diagram shows a thermistor in a potential divider. A voltmeter is connected across the thermistor.
V
The graph shows how the resistance of the thermistor changes with temperature.
resistance
temperature
As the thermistor becomes warmer, what happens to its resistance and what happens to the reading on the voltmeter? resistance
voltmeter reading
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
increases
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
increases
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
[Turn over
16 32 In this circuit, a component at X automatically protects the wiring from overheating if there is a fault. X electrical supply
Which components are suitable to use at X? A
a circuit-breaker, a fuse or a switch
B
only a circuit-breaker or a fuse
C
only a circuit-breaker or a switch
D
only a fuse
33 Which graph shows how the output voltage varies with time for a simple a.c. generator?
A
B
voltage
voltage
0
0 time
time
C
D
voltage
voltage
0
0 time
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
time
17 34 A magnet is suspended from a spring so that it can move freely inside a coil. The coil is connected to a sensitive centre-zero ammeter.
spring moving magnet N centre-zero ammeter
stationary coil
S
What does the ammeter show when the magnet repeatedly moves slowly up and down? A
a reading constantly changing from left to right and right to left
B
a steady reading to the left
C
a steady reading to the right
D
a steady reading of zero
35 The diagram shows a simple step-down transformer used to decrease a voltage. Which part is the primary coil?
A
B
© UCLES 2011
C
0625/11/M/J/11
D
[Turn over
18 36 The diagram shows a cathode-ray tube. power supply
vacuum
Y
screen X
What are the correct labels for X and for Y? X
Y
A
negative anode
positive cathode
B
negative cathode
positive anode
C
positive anode
negative cathode
D
positive cathode
negative anode
37 A beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel metal plates connected to a high-voltage d.c. power supply. Which path does the beam follow?
+
+
+
+
+
+
C
D cathode
B
rays A
38 Which row shows the relative ionising effects and penetrating abilities of α-particles and β-particles? ionising effect
penetrating ability
A
α greater than β
α greater than β
B
α greater than β
α less than β
C
α less than β
α greater than β
D
α less than β
α less than β
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
19 39 A powder contains 400 mg of a radioactive material that emits α-particles. The half-life of the material is 5 days. What mass of that material remains after 10 days? A
B
0 mg
40 mg
C
100 mg
D
200 mg
40 An atom of the element lithium has a nucleon number of 7 and a proton number of 3. Which diagram represents a neutral atom of lithium?
n +
A
B
–
–
+
+
+ + + n
n
–
key n = a neutron
–
+ = a proton
–
– = an electron (not to scale)
D
C
– –
– –
–
n +n+ n n +
n +n+ n n + –
– – –
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
–
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/11
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
October/November 2011 45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*1240126518*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 20 printed pages. IB11 11_0625_11/3RP © UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2 1
A ruler is used to measure the length of an object. object
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
cm
What is the length of the object? A 2
3.0 cm
B
C
4.0 cm
D
5.0 cm
6.5 cm
The graph shows how the speed of a car changes with time.
speed
0
U
V
W
X
Y
time
Between which two times is the car stationary? A 3
U and V
B
V and W
C
W and X
D
X and Y
D
90 m
A child is standing on the platform of a station.
A train travelling at 30 m / s takes 3.0 s to pass the child. What is the length of the train? A
10 m
© UCLES 2011
B
27 m
C
30 m
0625/11/O/N/11
3 4
The weight of an object is to be found using the balance shown in the diagram.
object
The object is put in the left-hand pan and various standard weights are put in the right-hand pan. These are the results. weights in the right-hand pan
effect
0.1 N, 0.1 N, 0.05 N, 0.02 N
balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side
0.2 N, 0.1 N, 0.01 N
balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side
What is the best estimate of the weight of the object? A
0.27 N
© UCLES 2011
B
0.29 N
C
0.31 N
0625/11/O/N/11
D
0.58 N
[Turn over
4 5
The diagrams show four blocks with the same mass. Which block is made from the least dense material?
A
B
8 cm
3 cm
1 cm
3 cm 2 cm
2 cm
C
D
5 cm
2 cm
4 cm 3 cm
2 cm 2 cm
6
A student is told to measure the density of a liquid and also of a large cube of metal. Which pieces of equipment are sufficient to be able to take the measurements needed? A
balance, measuring cylinder and ruler
B
balance and thermometer
C
measuring cylinder and ruler
D
measuring cylinder, ruler and thermometer
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
5 7
A uniform rod rests on a pivot at its centre. The rod is not attached to the pivot. Forces are then applied to the rod in four different ways, as shown. The weight of the rod can be ignored. Which diagram shows the rod in equilibrium?
A
B
100 N
100 N
100 N
100 N C
D 100 N
100 N 8
100 N
Which combination of forces produces a resultant force acting towards the right? A
B 5N
10 N
D
C
5N
2N
9
100 N
100 N
4N
6N
3N
4N
10 N
5N
7N
3N
A student adds weights to an elastic cord. He measures the length of the cord for each weight. He then plots a graph from the results, as shown.
0 0
1
2
3
4
weight / N
Which length has he plotted on the vertical axis? A
measured length
B
original length
C
(measured length – original length)
D
(measured length + original length)
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
[Turn over
6 10 A force F moves a load from the bottom of a slope to the top.
r F
loa
p
d
q
The work done by the force depends on the size of the force, and on a distance. What is this distance? A
p
B
q
C
r
D
p+q
11 A water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.
gas supply
10 cm
initial level of water
10 cm
water
When it is attached to the gas supply, the water falls on the left side and rises on the right side. The difference in the levels of water on the two sides is now 20 cm. What is the pressure of the gas supply? A
the pressure due to 10 cm depth of water
B
the pressure due to 20 cm depth of water
C
the pressure due to 10 cm depth of water plus atmospheric pressure
D
the pressure due to 20 cm depth of water plus atmospheric pressure
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
7 12 A chair is placed on protective cups to prevent damage to the carpet underneath it. chair
carpet protective cups
How do the cups change the area of contact with the carpet and the pressure on it? area of contact
pressure
A
decreased
decreased
B
decreased
increased
C
increased
decreased
D
increased
increased
13 Evaporation occurs when molecules escape from a liquid surface into the air above it. During this process the temperature of the liquid falls. Why does the temperature of the liquid fall? A
The molecules in the vapour expand because the pressure is less.
B
The molecules left in the liquid have more space to move around.
C
The molecules move more slowly when they escape into the air.
D
The molecules with the highest energies escape into the air.
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
[Turn over
8 14 The pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. The volume of the gas in the cylinder is then slowly decreased. The temperature of the gas does not change. Which graph could show the change of pressure of the gas during this process?
A
B
pressure
pressure
0
0 0
0
time
C
time
D
pressure
pressure
0
0 0
0
time
time
15 To mark the lower fixed point of a Celsius scale on a thermometer, the thermometer should be placed in A
pure alcohol.
B
pure distilled water.
C
pure melting ice.
D
pure mercury.
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
9 16 The diagram shows an electric heater being used to heat a beaker of water and an identical beaker of oil for several minutes.
oil
water
electric heater
The temperature of the water and the temperature of the oil increase constantly. The rise in temperature of the oil is much greater than that of the water. Why is this? A
The oil has a higher boiling point than water.
B
The oil has a higher thermal capacity than water.
C
The oil has a lower boiling point than water.
D
The oil has a lower thermal capacity than water.
17 The diagram shows a cooling unit in a refrigerator.
cooling unit
Why is the cooling unit placed at the top? A
Cold air falls and warm air is displaced upwards.
B
Cold air is a bad conductor so heat is not conducted into the refrigerator.
C
Cold air is a good conductor so heat is conducted out of the refrigerator.
D
Cold air remains at the top and so prevents convection.
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
[Turn over
10 18 Two identical copper cans are filled with boiling water.
thermometer
hot water copper can wool uninsulated can
insulated can
One can is insulated with wool. The temperature of the water in each can is taken every minute for several minutes. Graphs of the results are plotted. Which graph shows the results obtained?
A
B
temperature
temperature
insulated
insulated uninsulated
uninsulated
time
time
C
D insulated
temperature
temperature uninsulated uninsulated insulated
time
time
19 Which of these waves is longitudinal? A
infra-red
B
radio
C
sound
D
water
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
11 20 Radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.
radio waves house
hill
The waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be A
diffracted.
B
radiated.
C
reflected.
D
refracted.
21 The diagram shows a ray of light travelling from X. Angle P is less than the critical angle. In which direction does the ray continue? X
P glass
A
air B D
C
22 The diagram shows the image of a clock in a plane mirror.
What time is shown? A
02:25
© UCLES 2011
B
02:35
C
09:25
0625/11/O/N/11
D
09:35
[Turn over
12 23 A student wishes to measure the speed of sound in air. She plans to measure the time between making a sound and hearing the echo from a cliff. cliff
student
She will use the equation: speed = distance . time Which type of sound should she make and which distance should she use in her calculation? type of sound
distance to use
A
continuous sound
distance to cliff 2
B
continuous sound
distance to cliff × 2
C
short, sharp sound
distance to cliff 2
D
short, sharp sound
distance to cliff × 2
24 The diagrams show the wave shapes of two different sounds. The scales are the same in each diagram.
time
sound 1
sound 2
How does sound 2 compare with sound 1? A
Sound 2 is louder than sound 1.
B
Sound 2 is quieter than sound 1.
C
Sound 2 has a higher pitch than sound 1.
D
Sound 2 has a lower pitch than sound 1.
© UCLES 2011
time
0625/11/O/N/11
13 25 A horseshoe magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar.
N
S
iron bar Which row in the table shows the magnetic poles induced in the iron bar and the direction of the forces between the bar and the magnet? magnetic poles induced in iron bar
force between iron bar and magnet
A
N
S
attraction
B
N
S
repulsion
C
S
N
attraction
D
S
N
repulsion
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
[Turn over
14 26 Four nails, A, B, C and D, are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet. nail N
S
bar magnet
paper clips
One of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can support is recorded. The bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining attached to the nail is recorded. Each nail is tested in turn. Which nail becomes the strongest permanent magnet?
nail
number of paper clips attached to the nail bar magnet present
bar magnet removed
A
2
0
B
2
1
C
4
3
D
5
2
27 Which symbols are used for the units of current and of resistance? unit of current
unit of resistance
A
A
W
B
A
Ω
C
C
W
D
C
Ω
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
15 28 The diagram shows a lamp in a circuit.
P
Which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp? A
adding another resistor in parallel with the one in the circuit
B
adding another resistor in series with the one in the circuit
C
decreasing the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery in the circuit
D
moving the lamp to point P in the circuit
29 The diagram shows an electric circuit containing three meters, X, Y and Z, all connected correctly.
X
Z
Y
What are meters X, Y and Z? X
Y
Z
A
ammeter
ammeter
ammeter
B
ammeter
voltmeter
ammeter
C
voltmeter
ammeter
voltmeter
D
voltmeter
voltmeter
voltmeter
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
[Turn over
16 30 The diagrams show four arrangements of resistors. Which arrangement has the smallest total resistance? A
B
4Ω
2Ω
2Ω
D
C
4Ω 4Ω
4Ω 4Ω
31 The diagram shows a potential divider circuit with two identical lamps L1 and L2.
X K
L1
Y
L2
The contact K is halfway between X and Y and the lamps are equally bright. What will happen to the brightness of the lamps when contact K is moved a short distance towards X? lamp L1
lamp L2
A
brighter
brighter
B
brighter
dimmer
C
dimmer
brighter
D
dimmer
dimmer
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
17 32 A fuse and a relay each use an effect of an electric current. Which effect of an electric current is used by a fuse and which effect is used by a relay? effect used by a fuse
effect used by a relay
A
heating effect
heating effect
B
heating effect
magnetic effect
C
magnetic effect
heating effect
D
magnetic effect
magnetic effect
33 Which diagram represents the direction of the magnetic field around a straight wire carrying a current out of the page?
A
B current out of page
C
D current out of page
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
[Turn over
18 34 The diagram shows an a.c. generator. rotation of coil coil
N
S
output voltage
With the coil in the position shown, the output voltage is +10 V. When does the output voltage become –10 V? A
when the coil has turned 90°
B
when the coil has turned 180°
C
when the coil has turned 270°
D
when the coil has turned 360°
35 The diagram shows a simple transformer.
core
input
output
From which material should the core be made? A
aluminium
B
copper
C
iron
D
steel
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
19 36 Cathode rays are emitted in a vacuum tube. They consist of particles that are found in atoms. What is the name of the particles and how are the cathode rays produced? name of particles
how the cathode rays are produced
A
electrons
electromagnetic induction
B
electrons
thermionic emission
C
protons
electromagnetic induction
D
protons
thermionic emission
37 Two parallel metal plates in a vacuum are connected to the terminals of a high-voltage power supply. A beam of cathode rays is passed into the space between the two plates, as shown. In which direction does the beam of cathode rays deflect? high-voltage power supply + – metal plate
B A C
cathode rays
metal plate
D
38 A scientist needs to use a source of γ-rays as safely as possible. Which action will not reduce the amount of radiation that reaches the scientist? A
keeping the distance between the source and the scientist as large as possible
B
keeping the temperature of the source as low as possible
C
keeping the time for which the scientist uses the source as small as possible
D
placing a lead screen between the scientist and the source
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
[Turn over
20 39 The graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a period of time.
2000 activity / counts per second 1500
1000
500
0 0
1
2
3 time / hour
What is the half-life of the source? A
1 2
hour
B
1 hour
40 A nuclide of substance X has the symbol
C
1 1 hours 2
26 12 X
D
3 hours
.
How many electrons are there in a neutral atom of substance X? A
12
B
14
C
26
D
38
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/11
PHYSICS Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2012 45 minutes
Additional Materials:
*9772978782*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. IB12 06_0625_11/3RP © UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2 1
A cylindrical can is rolled along the ruler shown in the diagram. starting position
final position
can rolled mark on can 0 cm
5
10
15
20
25
30 cm
The can rolls over twice. What is the circumference (distance all round) of the can? A 2
B
13 cm
C
14 cm
D
26 cm
28 cm
A car is moving downhill along a road at a constant speed. Which graph is the speed / time graph for the car? A
B
speed
speed
0 0
0 0
time
time
C
D
speed
speed
0 0
3
0 0
time
time
In a race, a car travels 60 times around a 3.6 km track. This takes 2.4 hours. What is the average speed of the car? A
1.5 km / h
© UCLES 2012
B
90 km / h
C
144 km / h
0625/11/M/J/12
D
216 km / h
3 4
5
Which quantity is measured in newtons? A
density
B
energy
C
pressure
D
weight
A geologist places a small rock on the left-hand pan of a balance. The two pans are level as shown when masses with a total weight of 23 N are placed on the right-hand pan. Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N.
masses
rock 0
What is the mass of the small rock? A 6
0.023 kg
B
2.3 kg
C
23 kg
D
230 kg
A stone has a volume of 0.50 cm3 and a mass of 2.0 g. What is the density of the stone? A
0.25 g / cm3
B
1.5 g / cm3
C
2.5 g / cm3
D
4.0 g / cm3
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
[Turn over
4 7
Passengers are not allowed to stand on the upper deck of double-decker buses. upper deck
lower deck
Why is this?
8
A
They would cause the bus to become less stable.
B
They would cause the bus to slow down.
C
They would increase the kinetic energy of the bus.
D
They would lower the centre of mass of the bus.
The diagram shows a handle with three forces, each 100 N, applied to it. The handle is free to move.
100 N
100 N 100 N
handle pivot What is the effect of the forces on the handle?
9
A
The handle will move downwards.
B
The handle will not move.
C
The handle will turn anticlockwise (to the left).
D
The handle will turn clockwise (to the right).
In which pair of energy sources are both sources renewable? A
oil and coal
B
oil and tidal
C
tidal and geothermal
D
tidal and nuclear fission
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
5 10 An object on a thread is swinging between X and Z, as shown in the diagram. It is momentarily at rest at X and at Z.
thread
X
Z Y
An incomplete word equation about the energy of the object is shown below. gravitational potential energy = kinetic energy + ……… energy + energy losses at X at Y at Y Which form of energy is needed to complete the word equation? A
chemical
B
gravitational potential
C
internal
D
strain
11 Which statement is explained by reference to pressure? A
Objects with greater mass have greater weight.
B
One kilogram of water occupies more volume than one kilogram of lead.
C
Spikes on running-shoes sink into the ground.
D
Water cooled to a low enough temperature turns to ice.
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
[Turn over
6 12 The diagram shows a mercury manometer used to measure the pressure of gas in a container. Atmospheric pressure is 76 cm of mercury.
gas mercury 20 cm 12 cm
What is the pressure of the gas? A
56 cm of mercury
B
68 cm of mercury
C
84 cm of mercury
D
96 cm of mercury
13 Brownian motion is observed when looking at smoke particles in air using a microscope. What causes the smoke particles to move at random? A
Smoke particles are hit by air molecules.
B
Smoke particles are moved by convection currents in the air.
C
Smoke particles have different weights and fall at different speeds.
D
Smoke particles hit the walls of the container.
14 The molecules of a substance become more closely packed and move more quickly. What is happening to the substance? A
A gas is being heated and compressed.
B
A gas is being heated and is expanding.
C
A liquid is boiling.
D
A liquid is evaporating at room temperature.
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
7 15 Which pair contains only physical quantities that vary with temperature and so could be used in making a thermometer? A
activity of a radioactive source, volume of a gas
B
mass of a liquid, volume of a liquid
C
activity of a radioactive source, mass of a solid
D
volume of a gas, volume of a liquid
16 A heater supplies 80 J of energy to a block of metal. The temperature of the block rises by 20 °C. What happens to the block of metal when its temperature falls by 10 °C? A
Its internal energy decreases by 40 J.
B
Its internal energy decreases by 160 J.
C
Its internal energy increases by 40 J.
D
Its internal energy increases by 160 J.
17 An engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. The rod is just too big to fit into the hole of the washer. steel washer
steel rod
How can the engineer fit the washer on to the rod? A
Cool the washer and put it over the rod.
B
Cool the washer and rod to the same temperature and push them together.
C
Heat the rod and then place it in the hole.
D
Heat the washer and then place it over the rod.
18 Why does convection take place in a liquid when it is heated? A
Liquids expand when they are heated.
B
Liquids start to bubble when they get close to boiling point.
C
Molecules in the liquid expand when they are heated.
D
Molecules near to the surface of the liquid escape into the air.
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
[Turn over
8 19 Two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. Hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid is put on top, as shown. lid small spacer small air gap hot water bench
Which statement is correct? A
Heat loss by radiation is prevented by the small air gap.
B
No heat passes through the sides of either cup.
C
The bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup.
D
The lid is used to reduce heat loss by convection.
20 What is the unit of wavelength? A
hertz
B
metre
C
metre per second
D
second
21 Which row correctly describes light waves and radio waves? light waves
radio waves
A
longitudinal
longitudinal
B
longitudinal
transverse
C
transverse
longitudinal
D
transverse
transverse
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
9 22 The diagram shows water waves passing through a gap in a harbour wall. The waves curve round the wall and reach a small boat in the harbour. harbour wall waves harbour
gap boat
What is the name of this curving effect, and how can the gap be changed so that the waves are less likely to reach the boat? name of effect
change to the gap
A
diffraction
make the gap slightly bigger
B
diffraction
make the gap slightly smaller
C
refraction
make the gap slightly bigger
D
refraction
make the gap slightly smaller
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
[Turn over
10 23 The image formed by a plane mirror is upright.
position of image
object
eye
What are the other characteristics of the image? laterally inverted (left to right)
magnified (larger than the object)
virtual
A
no
yes
yes
B
yes
no
no
C
yes
no
yes
D
yes
yes
no
24 A student draws three rays of light from point P through a converging lens. Each point labelled F is a principal focus of the lens.
ray X
P
F
F
ray Z
Which of the rays are drawn correctly? A
ray Y only
B
ray Z only
C
ray X and ray Y
D
ray X and ray Z
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
ray Y
11 25 A girl stands at a distance from a large building. She claps her hands and a short time later hears an echo. Why is an echo produced when the sound waves hit the building? A
The sound waves are absorbed.
B
The sound waves are diffracted.
C
The sound waves are reflected.
D
The sound waves are refracted.
26 The diagrams represent the waves produced by four sources of sound. The scales are the same for all the diagrams. Which sound has the highest frequency?
A
time
B
time
C
time
D
time
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
[Turn over
12 27 Which statement describes a property of a magnet? A
It attracts ferrous materials.
B
It could have only one pole (north or south).
C
It points in a random direction when suspended.
D
It repels non-ferrous materials.
28 Which procedure may be used to demagnetise a steel bar? A
cooling it in a freezer
B
earthing it with a copper wire
C
placing it in a solenoid carrying a large direct current (d.c.)
D
striking it repeatedly with a hammer
29 In which unit is potential difference measured? A
ampere
B
ohm
C
volt
D
watt
30 The circuit shown in the diagram contains an unknown component X, hidden in a box. The voltage-current graph for X is as shown. variable voltage supply – +
voltage
A X 0 0
V
What is the component X? A
a capacitor
B
a closed switch
C
an open switch
D
a resistor of constant resistance
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
current
13 31 Which circuit contains a fuse? A
B
A
V
C
D
A
32 A thermistor is used in a circuit to control a piece of equipment automatically. What might this circuit be used for? A
lighting an electric lamp as it becomes darker
B
ringing an alarm bell if a locked door is opened
C
switching on a water heater at a pre-determined time
D
turning on an air conditioner when the temperature rises
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
[Turn over
14 33 A student connects a variable potential divider (potentiometer) circuit.
R V T 12 V
S
What happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal T is moved from R to S? A
It decreases from 12 V to 0 V.
B
It increases from 0 V to 12 V.
C
It remains at 0 V.
D
It remains at 12 V.
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
15 34 A circuit-breaker is designed to protect a circuit which usually carries a current of 2 A. The time taken to break the circuit depends on the current, as shown in the graph.
160 time taken to break the circuit / s
140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
current / A What happens when the current in the circuit is 2 A and what happens when the current 18 A? when the current is 2 A
when the current is 18 A
A
the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds
the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds
B
the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds
the circuit does not break
C
the circuit does not break
the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds
D
the circuit does not break
the circuit does not break
35 The diagram shows a coil connected to a battery and a switch. Two unmagnetised iron bars hang freely near opposite ends of the coil.
coil
X
Y
iron bar
iron bar
What happens to the iron bars when the switch is closed? A
Both X and Y move away from the coil.
B
Both X and Y move towards the coil.
C
X moves towards the coil, Y moves away from the coil.
D
Y moves towards the coil, X moves away from the coil.
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
[Turn over
16 36 A wire passes between the poles of a horseshoe magnet. There is a current in the wire in the direction shown, and this causes a force to act on the wire. magnet
current
N S
wire force
Three other arrangements, P, Q and R, of the wire and magnet are set up as shown. P
Q
S
R
N
S
N
S
magnet turned around
N
current direction reversed
current direction reversed and magnet turned around
Which arrangement or arrangements will cause a force in the same direction as the original arrangement? A
B
P, Q and R
P and Q only
C
P only
D
37 The diagram shows a device to produce cathode rays. evacuated glass container
cathode
Which part of the device is heated and why? part heated
reason
A
anode
to emit electrons
B
anode
to emit protons
C
cathode
to emit electrons
D
cathode
to emit protons
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
anode
R only
17 38 A radioactive nucleus emits a β-particle.
β-particle
nucleus
What happens to the proton number (atomic number) of the nucleus? A
It stays the same.
B
It increases by 1.
C
It decreases by 2.
D
It decreases by 4.
39 The diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation, X, Y and Z. X Y Z 2 mm of plastic
10 mm of aluminium
50 mm of lead
Which row in the table correctly identifies X, Y and Z? X
Y
Z
A
α-particles
β-particles
γ-rays
B
β-particles
α-particles
γ-rays
C
β-particles
γ-rays
α-particles
D
γ-rays
α-particles
β-particles
40 Which diagram could represent the structure of a neutral atom? A
B
C
D
–
–
–
–
key neutron
++
++
++ +
+ proton – electron
+ –
© UCLES 2012
–
–
0625/11/M/J/12
18 BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
19 BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/11
PHYSICS
October/November 2012
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
45 minutes Additional Materials:
*8913251826*
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet Soft clean eraser Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write in soft pencil. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been done for you. There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet. Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. IB12 11_0625_11/3RP © UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2 1
A pendulum is set in motion and timed. The time measured for 20 complete swings is 30 s. What is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum? A
2
B
0.67 s
C
0.75 s
D
1.5 s
3.0 s
Two stones of different weight fall at the same time from a table. Air resistance may be ignored. What will happen and why?
3
what will happen
why
A
both stones hit the floor at the same time
acceleration of free fall is constant
B
both stones hit the floor at the same time
they fall at constant speed
C
the heavier stone hits the floor first
acceleration increases with weight
D
the heavier stone hits the floor first
speed increases with weight
The speed-time graph shown is for a bus travelling between stops. Where on the graph is the acceleration of the bus greatest? C speed B
A
D time
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
3 4
A large bag of feathers and a steel block balance each other on some scales.
bag of feathers
steel block
What does this show about the masses and the weights of the bag of feathers and the steel block?
5
A
It shows that the masses are equal and the weights are equal.
B
It shows that the masses are equal, but the weights might be different.
C
It shows that the masses might be different and the weights might be different.
D
It shows that the weights are equal, but the masses might be different.
A parachutist inside an aeroplane has a mass of 70 kg.
What is his mass after he has jumped from the aeroplane? A
0 kg
B
between 0 kg and 70 kg
C
70 kg
D
greater than 70 kg
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
[Turn over
4 6
A liquid has a density of 0.80 g / cm3. Which could be the volume and mass of this liquid? volume / cm3
7
mass / g
A
2.0
16
B
8.0
10
C
10
8.0
D
16
2.0
The diagram shows sections of four objects of equal mass. The position of the centre of mass of each object has been marked with a cross. Which object is the most stable? A
8
B
C
D
A see-saw is made by resting a long plank of wood with its centre of mass on a barrel. A boy sits on one side of the barrel and a girl sits on the other side so that the see-saw is balanced. x
y
boy
girl
boy’s weight
girl’s weight
Which statement must be true? A
boy’s weight = girl’s weight
B
distance x = distance y
C
total downward force = total moment about the barrel
D
resultant force and resultant moment are both zero
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
5 9
A power station uses nuclear fission to obtain energy. In this process, nuclear energy is first changed into A
chemical energy.
B
electrical energy.
C
gravitational energy.
D
thermal (heat) energy.
10 A person lifts boxes of equal weight on to a platform.
boxes platform Which quantity will not affect the work done by the person? A
the height of the platform above the ground
B
the number of boxes lifted
C
the time taken to lift the boxes
D
the weight of the boxes
11 A skier walks from the bottom of a ski slope to the top and gains 10 000 J of gravitational potential energy. She skis down the slope. At the bottom of the slope, her kinetic energy is 2000 J.
How much energy was converted into thermal energy and sound energy as the skier moved down the slope? A
2000 J
© UCLES 2012
B
8000 J
C
10 000 J
0625/11/O/N/12
D
12 000 J
[Turn over
6 12 The diagram shows a mercury barometer. 25 cm mercury 75 cm
5 cm
Which distance is used to calculate the pressure of the atmosphere? A
25 cm
B
75 cm
C
80 cm
D
100 cm
13 A heavy table has six legs. The area of cross-section of each leg is X. The legs of the table make marks in a carpet. These marks become deeper with increased pressure. What would reduce the depth of the marks for a table of a fixed weight? A
using three legs, each of an area smaller than X
B
using four legs, each of an area the same as X
C
using six legs, each of an area smaller than X
D
using eight legs, each of an area the same as X
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
7 14 Very small pollen grains are suspended in water. A bright light shines from the side. Looking through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random, jerky manner. eye
microscope
light pollen grains in water What are the moving specks of light? A
pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains
B
pollen grains being hit by water molecules
C
water molecules being hit by other water molecules
D
water molecules being hit by pollen grains
15 A swimmer feels cold after leaving warm water on a warm, windy day. Why does she feel cold even though the air is warm? A
The less energetic water molecules on her skin escape quickly.
B
The more energetic water molecules on her skin do not escape quickly.
C
The water on her skin does not evaporate quickly enough to keep her warm.
D
The water on her skin evaporates quickly and cools her skin.
16 Which physical property is used to measure temperature in a liquid-in-glass thermometer? A
the length of the thermometer
B
the thickness of the glass bulb
C
the volume of the glass bulb
D
the volume of the liquid
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
[Turn over
8 17 The graph shows the temperature of a substance as it is heated steadily. In which part of the graph is the substance boiling?
D temperature C B A time 18 A night storage heater contains a large block of material that is heated electrically during the night. During the day the block cools down, releasing thermal energy into the room.
Which thermal capacity and which night-time temperature increase will cause the most energy to be stored by the block? thermal capacity of block
night-time temperature increase
A
large
large
B
large
small
C
small
large
D
small
small
19 After a sheep has its wool cut off, it is harder for it to stay warm when the air temperature falls. How does the wool help the sheep to stay warm? A
Air can circulate between the wool fibres and heat up the skin by convection.
B
Air trapped by the wool fibres reduces heat losses from the skin by convection.
C
The wool fibres are curly so it takes longer for heat to be conducted away from the skin.
D
The wool fibres conduct heat to the skin from the air outside.
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
9 20 A boy sits near a campfire. He pokes the fire with an iron bar. His hand becomes hot.
iron bar
In which ways does thermal energy (heat) from the fire reach his hand? A
conduction and convection only
B
conduction and radiation only
C
convection and radiation only
D
conduction, convection and radiation
21 The diagram shows plane waves reflected by a plane surface. Which line represents a wavefront? C A D
B
22 A swimmer is sitting on a rock at the sea shore looking at passing waves. He notices that five complete wavelengths pass him in 20 s. What is the frequency of this wave? A
0.25 Hz
© UCLES 2012
B
4.0 Hz
C
15 Hz
0625/11/O/N/12
D
100 Hz
[Turn over
10 23 A thin converging lens forms an image. object image F
F
What is the nature of this image and can it be formed on a screen? nature of image
can be formed on a screen?
A
not real
no
B
not real
yes
C
real
no
D
real
yes
24 A piece of paper has ‘PAL’ written on it. A student holds the paper in front of a plane mirror.
back of mirror
PAL
What does the student see? B
PAL
LAP
© UCLES 2012
C
PAL
A
0625/11/O/N/12
D
PAL
11 25 A girl notices that when she shouts into a cave she hears an echo. Which wave property causes the echo? A
diffraction
B
dispersion
C
reflection
D
refraction
26 In a test, a car horn is found to be too loud and the pitch of the note is too high. What information does this give about the amplitude and the frequency of the sound wave produced? amplitude
frequency
A
too large
too large
B
too large
too small
C
too small
too large
D
too small
too small
27 Two bars of soft iron are placed near a bar magnet. bar magnet
soft iron
S
N
soft iron P
Q
Which row states and explains the behaviour of poles P and Q of the soft iron bars? P and Q
reason
A
attract
P and Q are like poles
B
attract
P and Q are unlike poles
C
repel
P and Q are like poles
D
repel
P and Q are unlike poles
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
[Turn over
12 28 Some electrical devices require a magnet which may be switched on and off many times in a second. Which type of magnet may be used? A
an electromagnet only
B
a permanent magnet only
C
either a permanent magnet or an electromagnet
D
neither a permanent magnet nor an electromagnet
29 Which of these is an electric current? A
a beam of atoms
B
a beam of electrons
C
a beam of molecules
D
a beam of neutrons
30 The diagram shows a circuit used to find the resistance of lamp L. Blocks P, Q and R represent the different components used. 12 V
P
R L
Q
Which is a correct possible choice of components to use for P, Q and R? P
Q
R
A
ammeter
variable resistor
voltmeter
B
variable resistor
voltmeter
ammeter
C
voltmeter
ammeter
variable resistor
D
voltmeter
variable resistor
ammeter
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
13 31 A student connects the circuit shown.
1 2
3
4 Which switches must be closed for the bell to ring without lighting the lamp? A
1 and 2 only
B
1 and 3 only
C
1, 3 and 4 only
D
2, 3 and 4 only
32 Which row shows a use of a capacitor and a use of a relay? use of a capacitor
use of a relay
A
switching circuit
voltage transformation
B
time-delay circuit
switching circuit
C
voltage transformation
switching circuit
D
voltage transformation
time-delay circuit
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
[Turn over
14 33 The diagram shows two voltmeters, P and Q, connected to a potential divider.
X
V
voltmeter P
V
voltmeter Q
The sliding connection at point X is moved towards the top of the diagram. What happens to the reading on P and to the reading on Q? reading on P
reading on Q
A
decreases
decreases
B
decreases
increases
C
increases
decreases
D
increases
increases
34 An electric oven is connected to the mains supply using insulated copper wires. The wires become very warm. What can be done to prevent so much heat being produced in the connecting wires? A
Use thicker copper wires.
B
Use thinner copper wires.
C
Use thicker insulation.
D
Use thinner insulation.
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
15 35 Which graph shows how the voltage of a simple a.c. generator varies with time? A
B
voltage
voltage 0 0
0 0
time
C
D
voltage
voltage 0 0
© UCLES 2012
time
0 0
time
0625/11/O/N/12
time
[Turn over
16 36 The diagram shows a wire in the magnetic field between two poles of a magnet. magnet
N
S
wire
The current in the wire repeatedly changes between a constant value in one direction and a constant value in the opposite direction. This is shown on the graph. current
0 0
time
What is the effect on the wire? A
The force on the wire alternates between one direction and the opposite direction.
B
The force on the wire is constant in size and direction.
C
There is no force acting on the wire at any time.
D
There is only a force on the wire when the current reverses.
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
17 37 A beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel, charged metal plates in a vacuum.
cathode rays
– – – – – – – – – –
+ + + + + + + + + +
In which direction is the beam deflected? A
into the page
B
out of the page
C
to the left of the page
D
to the right of the page
38 How does the ionising effect of α-particles compare with that of β-particles and γ-rays? compared with β-particles
compared with γ-rays
A
α-particles are less strongly ionising
α-particles are less strongly ionising
B
α-particles are less strongly ionising
α-particles are more strongly ionising
C
α-particles are more strongly ionising
α-particles are less strongly ionising
D
α-particles are more strongly ionising
α-particles are more strongly ionising
39 The table shows the count rates obtained from four radioactive sources. The measurements were taken at noon on four consecutive days. Which source has the longest half-life? count rate /.counts per second day 1
day 2
A
100
48
27
11
B
200
142
99
69
C
300
297
292
290
D
400
202
99
48
© UCLES 2012
day 3
day 4
0625/11/O/N/12
[Turn over
18 40 Which statement about a carbon nucleus represented by 146 C is correct? A
It contains 6 neutrons.
B
It contains 6 electrons.
C
It contains 8 protons.
D
It contains 14 nucleons.
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
19 BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
CORE PAPER TWO
2
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
0625/2
PHYSICS PAPER 2 Monday
24 MAY 1999
Afternoon
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper. Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
This question paper consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. MML LOC 864 4/98 QF91699 © UCLES 1999
[Turn over
2 1
An insect lands on a 30 cm ruler and walks along the edge, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
topicvolume
0
cm
5
10
15
20
25
30
Fig. 1.1 A child measures the time the insect takes to walk from the 5 cm mark to the 25 cm mark. It takes 50 s to do this. What is the average speed, in cm/s, of the insect?
speed = ...................................... [3]
0625/2/S99
For Examiner's Use
3 2
(a) A uniform beam AB of weight W is balanced at its midpoint on a pivot. Two weights W1 and W2 are then hung at equal distances from the midpoint of the beam.
For Examiner's Use
topiccentreofmass topiccentre topicmass
A
B pivot W1
W2 Fig. 2.1 When this is done, the end B moves down. (i) Which is the heavier weight?
.................................................................................................................................. (ii) Which way would W1 have to be moved so that the beam is again balanced? .................................................................................................................................. [2] (b) W2 is removed from the beam. This means that the only forces acting downwards on the beam are the weight W of the beam and W1. W is much greater than W1. A
B
W
W1
Fig. 2.2 On Fig. 2.2, mark a possible position for the pivot to be placed so that the beam is again balanced. [2]
0625/2/S99
[Turn over
4 3
(a) How does the separation of the molecules of substance X in the solid state compare with the separation when substance X is in the gaseous state? Tick one box.
topicmolecularmodels topicmolecular topicmodels
molecules further apart in the solid state molecules further apart in the gaseous state molecules same distance apart in both cases
[1]
(b) State how the molecules of substance X move in the solid state and in the gaseous state. solid state ......................................................................................................................... gaseous state ............................................................................................................ [2]
4
Here are some statements about energy. Complete the statements using words from the following list.
topicwork topicworkandpower topicpower
chemical, electrical, geothermal, heat, hydroelectric, light, movement (kinetic), position (potential), strain, tidal, wave (a) A coal fire converts .............................................. energy into .............................................. energy and .............................................. energy.
[3]
(b) When a ball falls from rest, its .............................................. energy increases and its .............................................. energy decreases.
[2]
(c) The source of energy, in which hot rocks under the Earth’s surface heat water to produce steam, is referred to as .............................................. energy.
0625/2/S99
[1]
For Examiner's Use
5 5 topiccircuits
(a) On Fig. 5.1, sketch the graph you would expect to get if you plotted values of the potential difference V across a metallic conductor at constant temperature and the current I through it. [2]
For Examiner's Use
V/V
0
0
I/A Fig. 5.1
(b) How would you use the graph to find the resistance of the conductor? .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/S99
[Turn over
6 6 topicrefraction
A narrow beam of white light passes through a glass prism and is split into a band of colours, which is seen on a screen AB. This is illustrated in Fig. 6.1. glass prism A narrow beam of white light
B Fig. 6.1 (a) What name do we give to the process by which the white light is split up into colours? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) What name do we give to the band of colours seen on the screen? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) What colour is seen at the edge of the band of colours closer to A? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) A thin sheet of clear red plastic is put in the path of the light before the light reaches the prism. What is now seen on the screen? .................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/S99
For Examiner's Use
7 7
A student wraps a length of fine wire around a wood block and hangs the block between the poles of a magnet, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
For Examiner's Use
topicforce topicforceonaconductorinamagneticfield topicconductor topicmagnetic topicfield
fine wire
wood block
Fig. 7.1 (a) What is seen to happen when the student passes a current through the fine wire? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) Why does this happen? .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) Name a device which makes use of this effect. .................................................................................................................................... [1]
8
State one safety reason why
topicradioactivity
(a) radioactive sources should not be touched with bare hands, .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) radioactive sources emitting -rays should be stored in lead boxes with thick sides, .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) the radiation symbol should be displayed on the cupboard or drawer in which radioactive materials are kept. .................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/S99
[Turn over
8 9
In a factory which makes paper, the sheets are packed in piles of 500. One pile (of 500 sheets) has a mass of 2.4 kg, and is 0.05 m thick. The sheets measure 0.3 m x 0.2 m. The pile is illustrated in Fig. 9.1.
topicconverging topicthinconverginglens topicthin
500 sheets of paper 0.3 m
0.2 m 0.05 m
Fig. 9.1 (a) Calculate (i) the volume of the pile of 500 sheets,
volume = ............................................ (ii) the density of the paper.
density = ............................................ [6] (b) An object of mass 1 kg has a weight of 10 N. Calculate the weight of one pile of paper.
weight = ....................................... [1]
0625/2/S99
For Examiner's Use
9
For Examiner's Use
(c) The pressure exerted by the pile of paper when it is on a table is given by force pressure = –––– . area Calculate this pressure.
pressure = .................................... [4] (d) Another pile of the same paper contains only 250 sheets. (i) How does the mass of this pile compare with that of the first pile? .................................................................................................................................. (ii) How does the density of the paper in this pile compare with that of paper in the first pile? .................................................................................................................................. (iii) How does the weight of this pile compare with that of the first pile? .................................................................................................................................. (iv) How does the pressure exerted by this pile compare with that of the first pile? .................................................................................................................................. [4]
0625/2/S99
[Turn over
10 10 You are given a steel spring hanging from a support, a load and a 30 cm rule. topictransformer
spring
load
30 cm rule
Fig. 10.1 (a) In the space below, describe carefully the steps you would take in order to measure the extension of the spring when the load is hanging on it. You may draw a diagram if this helps you to answer the question. ................................................................................................. ................................................................................................. ................................................................................................. ................................................................................................. ................................................................................................. ................................................................................................. [5] (b) You also have a range of other loads which you can hang on to the spring. Equal increases in load cause equal increases in length. Using the maximum load from this range, the spring returns to its original length when this load is removed. On Fig. 10.2, sketch the extension / load graph you would expect to obtain with the spring as the load is increased. Label this line “GRAPH 1”. [2]
extension
0
0
load Fig. 10.2 0625/2/S99
For Examiner's Use
11 (c) The first spring is replaced with a second spring and the experiment is repeated. The second spring does not stretch as much as the first spring when the same load is hung on it.
For Examiner's Use
On Fig.10.2, sketch the graph you would expect to obtain. Label this line “GRAPH 2”.
[1]
(d) A wooden trolley is placed on a horizontal bench. F
Fig. 10.3 The first spring is attached to the trolley, as shown in Fig.10.3. (i) A force F keeps the spring slightly extended and the trolley moves. Describe the motion of the trolley. .................................................................................................................................. (ii) The first spring is replaced by the second spring, and the same force F stretches the spring. How does the motion of the trolley compare with your answer to (d)(i)? Explain your answer. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [3]
0625/2/S99
[Turn over
12 11 (a)
(i) Draw a clear diagram of a simple mercury barometer.
[4]
topicmercurybarometer topicbarometer topicmanometer topicmercury
Now fully label your diagram.
[2]
(ii) State the physical quantity that can be determined by using a mercury barometer. ............................................................................................................................ [1] (iii) On your diagram in (i), mark clearly, using the letter h, the length you would measure to determine the physical quantity named in (ii). [2]
0625/2/S99
For Examiner's Use
13 (b) Fig. 11.1 shows a manometer being used to measure the pressure of the gas in a container. 30 cm rule
glass tube
30
container
For Examiner's Use
25 20 15
gas 10 5
mercury
Fig. 11.1 (i) What is the difference in height of the two mercury levels? ............................. cm [1] (ii) What does the difference in height of the mercury levels indicate? ............................................................................................................................ [1] (iii) State whether the gas pressure is greater than or less than the atmospheric pressure and how you know this. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2] (iv) What would happen to the two mercury levels if the gas pressure increased slightly? .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1] (v) The mercury manometer is replaced by another manometer that contains a liquid of lower density. How, if at all, does this affect the difference between the liquid levels? ............................................................................................................................ [1]
0625/2/S99
[Turn over
14
For Examiner's Use
12 (a) Fig. 12.1 illustrates a cathode-ray tube. topicmolecularmodel topicmolecular topicmodel topictube topicoscilloscope
cathode
anode
B
C
screen
A filament
H G
F
E
D
Fig. 12.1 (i) Between which two points would you connect a low potential difference in order to heat the cathode? Between ................................... and .................................. (ii) Between which two points would you connect a high potential difference in order to produce cathode rays? Between ................................... and .................................. (iii) Between which two points would you connect a potential difference in order to deflect the cathode rays upwards? Between ................................... and .................................. [3]
0625/2/S99
15 (b) When the time base of a cathode-ray oscilloscope is turned on, there is a horizontal trace across the screen, as shown in Fig. 12.2.
Fig. 12.2 (i) An alternating potential difference of constant frequency and constant amplitude is connected to the Y-input of the oscilloscope. On Fig. 12.2, sketch the trace which might be obtained. (ii) The time base is switched off but the alternating potential difference is left connected. Describe what would be seen on the screen. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [4] (c) A microphone is connected to another cathode-ray oscilloscope, with the time base switched to a suitable setting. First, a lady with a high-pitched voice sings into the microphone. Then a man with a low-pitched voice sings into the microphone. Describe how the traces seen on the screen would differ. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/2/S99
For Examiner's Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
0625/2
PHYSICS PAPER 2 Friday
12 NOVEMBER 1999
Morning
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper. Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables 300 mm ruler
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
This question paper consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. MML LOC 864 4/98 QK93705 © UCLES 1999
[Turn over
2 1
For Examiner's Use
A small tank contains water of depth 2 cm, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
topicspeed
2 cm
8 cm
5 cm
Fig. 1.1 (a) Show that the volume of water in the tank is 80 cm3.
[3]
0625/2/W99
3 (b) The water is poured into the measuring cylinder shown in Fig. 1.2. On Fig. 1.2, mark the level of the water surface in the measuring cylinder when this has been done. [1]
For Examiner's Use
cm3 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
Fig. 1.2
0625/2/W99
[Turn over
4 2
When the cardboard shape in Fig. 2.1 is freely hung from A, line AX is vertical.
topicturningeffect topiceffect topicturning
A
Y
B
C
X Fig. 2.1 When it is freely hung from B, line BY is vertical. (a) On Fig. 2.1, mark the position of the centre of mass of the shape, using a clear dot (●). [1] (b) On Fig. 2.1, draw a line through C which would be vertical if the shape were to be freely hung from C. [1]
0625/2/W99
For Examiner's Use
5 3
For Examiner's Use
Magnet A is put on a smooth (frictionless) horizontal table, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
topicmagnet
N
S magnet A Fig. 3.1
(a) A second magnet is moved towards magnet A, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
N
S
N
magnet A
S magnet B
Fig. 3.2 What happens to magnet A? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) Magnet C is now moved towards magnet A, as shown in Fig. 3.3.
N
S
S
magnet A
N magnet C
Fig. 3.3 What happens to magnet A? .................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/W99
[Turn over
6 (c) An iron bar is moved towards magnet A, as shown in in Fig. 3.4.
N
S magnet A
iron bar Fig. 3.4
What happens to magnet A? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) A plastic rod is moved towards magnet A, as shown in Fig. 3.5.
N
S magnet A
plastic rod Fig. 3.5
What happens to magnet A? .................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/W99
For Examiner's Use
7 4
A person walks from A to E, a journey which goes over the top of the hill BCD, as shown in in Fig. 4.1.
For Examiner's Use
topicenergytransformations topicenergy topictransformations
C
A
B
D
E
Fig. 4.1 (a)
(i) During which part of the walk does the person do most work? Tick one box. AB BC CD DE (ii) Explain your answer to (a)(i). .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b)
(i) The person now runs over the hill from A to E. How does the average power developed by the person compare with that when the person walked? Tick one box. greater than when walking same as when walking less than when walking (ii) Explain your answer to (b)(i). .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [3]
0625/2/W99
[Turn over
8 5 topicresistance
Fig. 5.1 shows a battery, a switch and a bell connected so that the bell rings when the switch is pushed. battery
switch bell
Fig. 5.1 (a) Draw the circuit diagram for this arrangement. Use standard circuit symbols.
[3] (b) A second bell is now connected in parallel with the first bell. (i) Copy your circuit diagram from (a) and add the second bell.
(ii) Why will the battery run out more quickly when the switch has been pushed? .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
0625/2/W99
For Examiner's Use
9 6 topicdispersion
A ray of yellow light enters a rectangular glass block at A and leaves it at B, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
For Examiner's Use
B A glass block ray of yellow light Fig. 6.1 (a) At A on Fig. 6.1, (i) draw the normal, (ii) mark carefully and label clearly the angle of incidence i and the angle of refraction r. [3] (b) At B on Fig. 6.1, draw carefully the ray of light which emerges from the glass block. [2]
7
Fig. 7.1 shows an electric kettle.
topicconvection
element
Fig. 7.1 Explain why the heating element is placed near the bottom of the kettle. ................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/2/W99
[Turn over
10 8
Describe the structure of an atom in terms of its nucleus and electrons. Do not mention protons or neutrons.
topicstructure topicatomic topicatomicstructure
......................................................................... ......................................................................... ......................................................................... ......................................................................... ......................................................................... ................................................................... [3]
9 topicdensity topicpressure topicvolume topicrefraction topiclens
(a) Light from an illuminated slit passes through two lenses A and B and forms a focused image on a screen, as shown in Fig. 9.1. screen lens A
slit
lens B
source of light
Fig. 9.1 On Fig. 9.1, indicate clearly (i) the focal length of lens A, using the symbol fA, (ii) the focal length of lens B, using the symbol fB.
0625/2/W99
[4]
For Examiner's Use
11 (b) In Fig. 9.2, O is an object placed with its base on the axis of a lens, and PF is the focal length of the lens.
For Examiner's Use
O
P
F
Fig. 9.2
(i) Use your rule to draw two rays from the top of the object, through the lens, which meet at the top of the image. [5] (ii) Draw in the image, and label it I.
[1]
(iii) Put ticks in the boxes alongside the statements which correctly describe your image. real upright inverted larger than object smaller than object same size as object [3]
0625/2/W99
[Turn over
12
For Examiner's Use
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows the structure of a simple transformer. topictension
Fig. 10.1 On Fig. 10.1, label the important components of the transformer.
[5]
(b) Explain why the coils of a transformer are made of copper, rather than some other metal. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) A transformer has 500 turns in its primary coil, and 1500 turns in its secondary coil. Energy losses from the transformer are so small that they may be neglected. V N (i) Use the equation ––s = ––s to calculate the potential difference across the s e c o n d a r y Vp Np coil when an alternating potential difference of 10 V is supplied to the primary coil.
(ii) State the value of the potential difference across the secondary coil when a steady (d.c.) potential difference of 10 V is supplied to the primary coil. .................................................................................................................................. [4] (d) Another transformer has the same number of turns on its primary coil as it has on its secondary coil. An alternating potential difference is supplied across the primary coil. State the size of the output potential difference compared with the input potential difference. .................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/W99
13 11 (a) In the table below, write two different physical properties which may be used to measure temperature. An example has been given to help you.
For Examiner's Use
topicthermometer
The change in volume
OF
a liquid
OF OF [4] (b) When creating a temperature scale, fixed points are needed. Explain what is meant by a fixed point. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) In the table below, state the upper and lower fixed points used when calibrating a liquid-in-glass thermometer with a centigrade temperature scale. THE UPPER FIXED POINT IS THE TEMPERATURE OF
ITS VALUE IS
THE LOWER FIXED POINT IS THE TEMPERATURE OF
ITS VALUE IS
[5]
0625/2/W99
[Turn over
14 (d) Fig. 11.1 shows how the temperature changes with time for a substance as it is heated steadily from a solid to a liquid and then to a gas.
temperature / °C
0
time / min Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, (i) label the melting point and the boiling point of the substance, (ii) indicate the time when the substance is completely liquid. [3]
0625/2/W99
For Examiner's Use
15 12 A football is inflated by pumping air into it. topiccathoderaytube topiccathode topicray
(a) Describe the behaviour of an air molecule in the middle of the football. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] (b) Using a diagram, describe the behaviour of the molecule near the inside surface of the football.
.......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) Use your answer to explain how air molecules create the pressure on the inside of the football. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [4] (d) When the football is left in the Sun’s rays, it gets hot. Describe what happens to the air molecules, and how this affects the pressure of the football. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/2/W99
For Examiner's Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS
0625/2
PAPER 2 MAY/JUNE SESSION 2000
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper. Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
This question paper consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. SB (SM/JG) QF05708/3 © UCLES 2000
[Turn over
2 1
For Examiner’s Use
Read the sentences below and then answer the questions which follow.
topicvolume topicweight topicmass topicdensity
“When potatoes are bought in a market, the weight of a bag full of potatoes is affected by the density of the potatoes. A lady fills her bag when she buys 5 kg of large potatoes. A man buys 5 kg of small potatoes. He puts them in a bag of the same size as the lady’s, but his bag is not filled.” (a) Which word in these sentences describes a quantity which is a force? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) What does the 5 kg measure? Tick one box. the density of the potatoes
the mass of the potatoes
the volume of the potatoes
the weight of the potatoes
[1] topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy
(c) Suggest one reason why the man’s 5 kg of potatoes occupies less volume than the lady’s potatoes. ......................................................................................................................................[1] 2
A dish of hot food is put on a wooden table.
topicturningeffect topiceffect topicturning topicenergy
Fig. 2.1 (a) State three processes by which the dish and its contents could lose heat to the surroundings. 1.
...................................................................................................................................
2.
...................................................................................................................................
3.
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(b) (i)
Describe one way of reducing the heat loss to the surroundings. ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Which form of heat loss would this reduce? ...............................................................................................................................[2] 0625/2 S00
3 3
For Examiner’s Use
You are given an iron bar, a reel of insulated wire, a battery and some wire cutters.
topicmagnet
iron bar
reel of insulated wire
battery
wire cutters
Fig. 3.1 (a) In the space below, describe how you would make an electromagnet. You may use a labelled diagram if it helps you to answer the question.
.......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] (b) How would you check that your electromagnet actually works? .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 S00
[Turn over
4 4
At night, the light beam from a torch is shone into a swimming pool along the line TSA. Instead of striking the bottom of the pool at A, the beam travels to B, as shown on Fig. 4.1.
topicenergytransformations topicenergy topictransformations topicapparentdepth
T
torch
S water
39° A
55° B
Fig. 4.1 (a) At S, the direction of the beam changes. State the name we use to describe this change. ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) (i) (ii)
On Fig. 4.1, draw the normal to the surface at S. Clearly mark and label the angle of incidence.
[2]
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows the same pool and the same points A, B, S and T. The critical angle for the water is 50°. T
S water
39° A
55° B
Fig. 4.2 (i)
A beam of light is directed up from B to S. On Fig. 4.2, carefully draw the path of the ray from B to S and then out into the air.
(ii)
1.
A beam of light is directed up from A to S. Describe what happens to the beam at S. ........................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................
2.
Explain why this happens. ........................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................[4] 0625/2 S00
For Examiner’s Use
5 5
A man is watching a thunderstorm which is directly over a village. Some distance behind the village is a mountain.
For Examiner’s Use
topicsound topicspeedofsoundandlight topiclight topicspeed
cloud
mountain
lightning
village
man
Fig. 5.1 (a) Thunder is created at the same time as the lightning flash but, after the man sees a lightning flash, he has to wait a short time before he hears the thunder. Why is there this delay? .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (b) When he listens carefully, the man realises that, for each lightning flash, he can hear a loud sound of thunder followed by a quieter one. (i)
After studying Fig. 5.1, explain why he hears two sounds for each lightning flash. ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest why the second sound is quieter. ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 S00
[Turn over
6 (c) The man measures the time between seeing a flash of lightning over the village, and hearing the first sound of thunder. The time is 4 s. The speed of sound in air is 330 m/s. How far away is the village?
ANSWER: ................................. m 6
[3]
Some smoke is mixed with the air in a glass box. The box is lit brightly from the side and its contents studied from above through a microscope.
topicbrownian topicbrownianmotion topicmotion
glass box containing air and smoke mixed together bright light Fig. 6.1 (a) Bright specks are seen moving in continuous and jerky random movement. (i)
What are the bright specks? Tick one box. air molecules
smoke molecules
smoke particles
0625/2 S00
For Examiner’s Use
7 (ii)
For Examiner’s Use
What is the explanation for the jerky random movement? Tick one box. The air molecules bombard each other.
The smoke particles bombard each other.
The air molecules bombard the smoke particles.
The air molecules bombard the glass.
The smoke particles bombard the glass.
[2]
(b) The contents of the glass box exert a pressure on the glass walls. Tick any of the following sentences which might help explain this pressure. The air molecules bombard each other.
The smoke particles bombard each other.
The air molecules bombard the smoke particles.
The air molecules bombard the glass.
The smoke particles bombard the glass.
0625/2 S00
[2]
[Turn over
8 7
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 7.1 shows one way of using water to generate electricity.
topicforce topicconductor topicforceonaconductorinamagneticfield
(a) Fill in the missing words in the boxes.
[4]
reservoir
dam
(iii) The water rotates the pipe
(i) This water has
……………………………… so that the generator produces
……………………… energy because of its height.
……………………………… energy.
(ii) This moving water has increased ………………………… energy.
generator house
Fig. 7.1 (b) In other places, water is used in different ways to generate electricity. State two of these ways. 1.
...................................................................................................................................
2.
...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 S00
9 8
This question deals with the decay of a radioactive source. The radioactive source has a count rate of 640 counts/minute at the start of an experiment. This value has been plotted on Fig. 8.1.
For Examiner’s Use
topicradioactivity
x 600
count rate counts / minute
500
400
300
200
100
0 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
time / minutes Fig. 8.1 The source has a half-life of 20 minutes. (a) (i)
What would you expect the count rate to be after 20 minutes? ............................................... counts/minute
(ii) (b) (i)
Plot this value on the graph.
[2]
What would you expect the count rate to be after a further 20 minutes (i.e. 40 minutes after the start of the experiment)? ............................................... counts/minute
(ii)
Plot this value on the graph.
[2]
(c) Plot two further points which might be expected if the decay curve were perfect.
[1]
(d) Draw a smooth curve through all five points on your graph.
[1]
0625/2 S00
[Turn over
10 (e) If this perfect decay continued, how long would it take from the beginning of the experiment for the count rate to decrease to zero? Tick one answer. 90 minutes
100 minutes
120 minutes
a very long time
an infinite time
(f)
[1]
In a real experiment, the values found for the count rates might not all lie exactly on a smooth curve. One reason for this might be experimental error. State one other reason. ......................................................................................................................................[1]
9 topicpressure
(a) Heavy furniture sometimes marks the floor on which it stands. Four tables of the same weight each have four legs. Fig. 9.1 shows part of a leg from each table. A
B
C
D
Fig. 9.1 (i)
Which leg is least likely to mark the floor underneath it? ...............
(ii)
Explain your answer. ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2 S00
For Examiner’s Use
11
For Examiner’s Use
(b) A hot flat metal sheet is placed on a horizontal surface.
D C
A B
Fig. 9.2
As the hot metal sheet cools, what happens to the quantities in the list below? Tick one answer for each. increases
decreases
stays the same
length AB width BC thickness CD area touching the horizontal surface mass of sheet weight of sheet density of metal pressure on horizontal surface
[6]
0625/2 S00
[Turn over
12 10 A laboratory technician wants to make a resistor of value 64 Ω, using some resistance wire. He takes 1.0 m of this wire. The wire is shown in Fig. 10.1 as AC. He connects up the circuit shown.
topictension
A
V uniform resistance wire A
B
0.5 m
0.5 m
C
crocodile clip Fig. 10.1 (a) He connects the crocodile clip at B, which is 0.5 m from A. Here are the readings he gets. voltmeter reading
12 V
ammeter reading
1.5 A
Calculate the resistance of wire AB.
ANSWER: resistance of AB = ................... Ω
[3]
(b) The laboratory technician now connects the crocodile clip to C, to measure the resistance of 1 m of the wire. The wire has constant thickness. (i)
In the spaces below, write the readings he obtains. Ignore the effects of the resistance of the ammeter, voltmeter and battery. voltmeter reading
............... V
ammeter reading
............... A
0625/2 S00
For Examiner’s Use
13 (ii)
For Examiner’s Use
What is the resistance of wire AC?
ANSWER: resistance of AC = ................ Ω
[3]
(c) Use your answer to (b) to answer the following questions. (i)
What is the resistance per metre of this wire?
ANSWER: resistance per metre = ........... Ω/m (ii)
What length of wire does the laboratory technician need for the 64 Ω resistor?
ANSWER: length needed = .................. m
0625/2 S00
[3]
[Turn over
14 11 Here is a list of different types of waves. topicmercury topicbarometer topicmercurybarometer
gamma (γ) infra-red radio sound ultra-violet visible X-rays (a) Which one of these is the only one which is not part of the electromagnetic spectrum? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) Which one of these makes us feel warm when the Sun shines? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) Which one of these do doctors use to detect broken bones? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (d) (i)
Fig. 11.1 On the moon, two astronauts cannot hear each other, even when they shout, unless they have their radios switched on. 1.
Why cannot they hear each other even when they shout? ........................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................
2.
Why can they hear each other using their radios? ........................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................
(ii)
Which type of wave is used to carry messages from the astronauts to mission control on Earth? ...............................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2 S00
For Examiner’s Use
15 12 The hammers A and B shown in Fig. 12.1 consist of steel hammer-heads of different weights fitted to identical wooden handles.
topictube topiccathoderaytube topicray topiccathode
A hammer -head
B handle
nail
Fig. 12.1 (a) (i)
Which hammer-head causes the greater moment about the end of the handle when the hammer is held horizontally, as shown in Fig. 12.1? ANSWER: hammer ............
(ii)
Explain your answer. ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[3]
(b) (i)
Which hammer-head requires the greater work to lift it a distance of 30 cm from the position shown? ANSWER: hammer ............
(ii)
Explain your answer. ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[3]
(c) If you wanted to estimate the power developed when lifting hammer A through 30 cm, what two other quantities would you need to measure? 1.
...................................................................................................................................
2.
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(d) One of the hammers hits the nail and comes to rest without bouncing. (i)
What form of energy did the hammer lose when it came into contact with the nail? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State two forms of energy into which this “lost” energy is changed. 1.
...........................................................................................................................
2.
.......................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2 S00
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
0625/2
PHYSICS PAPER 2 Friday
10 NOVEMBER 2000
Morning
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper. Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
This question paper consists of 16 printed pages. SB (KN/DJ) QK07574/3 © UCLES 2000
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
2 1
Moving cars always experience friction. A driver goes on a short journey in a car.
topicweight topicmass topicdensity topicvolume
Fig. 1.1 shows the car at four places during the journey. The arrows represent the size and direction of the horizontal forces on the car. driving force
friction force
The car is ............................... . driving force
driving force
friction force
The car is ............................... .
friction force
The car is ............................... .
The car is ............................... . Fig. 1.1
On the line underneath each picture, state whether the car is at rest, speeding up, going at steady speed, slowing down.
[4]
0625/2 W00
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
(a) Fig. 2.1 shows three types of water tap (faucet).
topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy
type A
type B
type C
PUSH KNOB DOWN
Fig. 2.1 In the box underneath each tap, write YES if a person would need to cause a moment on the handle in order to make the water flow, or NO if the person would not need to cause a moment. [3] (b) A old person has taps of type A in the kitchen. The person has difficulty operating the tap. What could be done to make it easier to operate the tap? ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 W00
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
4 3
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows the speed/time graph for a motorcycle.
topicmolecularmodels topicmodels topicmolecular
35 30 25 speed m/s
20 15 10 5 0 0
5
10
15
20 25 time/s
30
35
40
Fig. 3.1 (i)
What is the maximum speed of the motorcycle? ..................... m/s
(ii)
Whilst accelerating, the motorcycle changes gear three times. State one of the speeds at which the gear is changed. ............ m/s
(iii)
For how long is the motorcycle slowing down? ...................... s [3]
0625/2 W00
5 (b) On another occasion, the motorcycle is made to increase its speed at a constant rate for 10 s. The speed/time graph for this is shown in Fig. 3.2.
For Examiner’s Use
20 15 speed 10 m/s 5 0 0
5 time/s
10
Fig. 3.2 How far does the motorcycle travel in these 10 s?
distance travelled = ................ m [3]
0625/2 W00
[Turn over
6 4
(a) Some students are asked to write down what they know about evaporation of a liquid. Here are their statements, some of which are correct and some incorrect.
topicevaporation
Put a tick alongside those statements which are correct. A
“Evaporation occurs at any temperature.”
B
“Evaporation only occurs at the boiling point.”
C
“Evaporation occurs where the liquid touches the bottom of the container.”
D
“Evaporation occurs at the surface of the liquid.”
E
“It is the higher energy molecules which escape.”
F
“The molecules gain energy as they escape.”
G
“The liquid temperature always rises when evaporation occurs.”
H
“Rapid evaporation produces cooling.” [4]
(b) Sometimes after shaving, men splash a liquid, called an aftershave, over their faces. This makes their faces feel fresher as the aftershave evaporates. (i)
Which of the statements in part (a) explains why the aftershave, even though it is at room temperature, cools the skin. statement ................
(ii)
Suggest why the aftershave cools the skin better than water at room temperature. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/2 W00
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
7 5
(a) Complete the following sentence.
topicsound topicspeedofsoundandlight topicspeed topicthermal topicthermalcapacity topiclight
“The temperature of a body rises when the .............................................. energy of its molecules is increased.” [1] (b) Fig. 5.1 gives details about an empty beaker and the same beaker with different substances in it. empty beaker
beaker + water
beaker + sand
mass
250 g
500 g
500 g
energy needed to raise temperature by 1°C
125 J
1175 J
325 J
Fig. 5.1 (i)
Which of the arrangements has the highest thermal capacity? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
1.
What is the mass of the water? ..................... g
2.
What is the mass of the sand?
3.
How much energy is needed to raise the temperature of the water by 1°C?
4.
..................... J
How much energy is needed to raise the temperature of the sand by 1°C?
5.
..................... g
..................... J
Use your answers above to suggest why, on a sunny day, the temperature of the sand on a beach rises faster than the temperature of the sea.
................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[6]
0625/2 W00
[Turn over
8 6
Fig. 6.1 shows a view from above of a vertical mirror. A small lamp is placed at the point marked L.
topicbrownianmotion topicbrownian topicmotion
L
mirror P
Fig. 6.1 (a) One ray, LP, from the lamp has been drawn. (i)
At P, draw and label the normal to the mirror.
(ii)
At P, draw and label the reflected ray.
(iii)
Mark, using an X for each, two angles which are equal. [3]
(b) Carefully mark, using a clear dot, the position of the image of the lamp.
[1]
(c) If you were looking into the mirror from point L, you might see something like Fig. 6.2 “looking back at you”. (Apologies if you are better-looking than this!)
Fig. 6.2 (i)
Mark clearly with the letter R, the image of your right ear.
(ii)
Your nose is 30 cm from the mirror. How far from your nose is its image? ........................................................................ [2] 0625/2 W00
For Examiner’s Use
9 7
(a) A ray of red light passes through a glass prism, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
For Examiner’s Use
topicforceonaconductorinamagneticfield topicforce topicconductor
red light
red light Fig. 7.1
What name do we use for the change of direction of the ray as it enters the glass? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) Fig. 7.2 shows the same prism, with white light passing through it. The path of red light is shown.
red light
white light Fig. 7.2 (i)
On Fig. 7.2, draw a possible path for blue light.
(ii)
Something else is happening to the white light, in addition to what is shown in Fig. 7.1. What name do we use for this? ................................................................................ [5]
(c) Light from the Sun is now passed through the prism. The path of red light is shown in Fig. 7.3.
red light
Sun's light Fig. 7.3
We can detect infra-red rays using a thermocouple. On Fig. 7.3, mark with the letter T a position where the thermocouple could detect the infra-red rays after they have passed through the prism. [1] [Turn over 0625/2 W00
For Examiner’s Use
10 8
Here are the approximate densities of some metals.
topicradioactivity
platinum gold lead brass iron aluminium
21 000 kg/m3 19 000 kg/m3 11 000 kg/m3 9 000 kg/m3 8 000 kg/m3 3 000 kg/m3
(21 g/cm3) (19 g/cm3) (11 g/cm3) ( 9 g/cm3) ( 8 g/cm3) ( 3 g/cm3)
A person sees a coin offered for sale in an antiques market.
Fig. 8.1 The market trader says that the coin is made of gold. After buying the coin, the person finds that its volume is 1.4 cm3 and its mass is 12.6 g. (a) Write down the equation which enables you to calculate density.
[1] (b) Calculate the density of the metal from which the coin is made.
density = ....................... g/cm3 [2] (c) Is the coin made of gold?
YES/NO
[1]
(d) If not, use the list above to suggest what it might be made from. The coin might be made from ................................ .[1] (e) If a country wanted to keep its coinage the same but of as low a mass as possible, which of the metals in the list should it choose? ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 W00
For Examiner’s Use
11 9
The circuit in Fig. 9.1 is connected up.
topicvolume topiclens topicpressure topicdensity
20 Ω 6V
40 Ω
I
Fig. 9.1 (a) Calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors in Fig. 9.1.
combined resistance = ..................... Ω [2] (b) (i)
State the relationship between resistance, p.d. and current by completing the following equation.
resistance = ––––––––––––––––––––
(ii)
Calculate the current, I, in Fig. 9.1. State the unit in your answer.
current = .............................. [5]
0625/2 W00
[Turn over
12 (c) Use your answer to (b)(ii) to calculate the p.d. across the 40 Ω resistor. State the unit in your answer.
p.d. = ................................ [3] (d) The circuit is now used as a potential divider, as shown in Fig. 9.2.
20 Ω 6V
40 Ω
V out
Fig. 9.2 Use your answer to (c) to state the value of Vout , the output voltage of the potential divider. Vout = ............................. V [1]
0625/2 W00
For Examiner’s Use
13 10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a view from above of a person standing at the edge of a pond, dipping the end of a stick up and down in the water. Some of the wavefronts that spread out are shown.
For Examiner’s Use
topicripples topicwaves
small piece of wood, floating on water
water
Y
cm 90
edge of pond
X
Fig. 10.1 (i)
How many wavelengths are there between X and Y? ..........................................[1]
(ii)
The distance from X to Y is 90 cm. Calculate the wavelength of the waves.
wavelength = .......................... cm [2] (iii)
The speed of the waves is affected by the depth of the water. 1.
Describe the shape of the wavefronts, as seen from above. ...........................................................................................................................
2.
What does the shape of the wavefronts tell you about the depth of the pond? Give a reason for your answer. ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/2 W00
[Turn over
14 (iv)
Fig. 10.2 shows a sideways view of the water surface just before the first wave reaches the floating piece of wood. small piece of wood
stick
direction of wave travel Fig. 10.2 Describe how the piece of wood moves after the waves reach it. You may draw on Fig. 10.2 if it helps you to answer the question. ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[2] (b) An underwater loudspeaker, placed in the pond in part (a), sends out sound waves through the water, as shown in Fig. 10.3.
K
underwater loudspeaker L
Fig. 10.3 (i)
What is the difference between the nature of these sound waves and the water waves in (a)? Write the appropriate words in the gaps in the following sentences. “Water waves are ..................................... waves.” “Sound waves are ..................................... waves.”
(ii)
[2]
Fig. 10.4 shows a sideways view along the line KL.
K
underwater loudspeaker L
M Fig. 10.4
The dot labelled M represents a water molecule on the line KL. Describe how the molecule moves when the loudspeaker is working. You may draw on Fig. 10.4 if it helps you to answer the question. ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[2] 0625/2 W00
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
15 11 (a) (i)
Copper is an electrical conductor. What is meant by a conductor ?
topicmercury topicmercurybarometer topicbarometer
................................................................................................................................... (ii)
Ebonite, glass and polythene are electrical insulators. What is meant by an insulator ? ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Polythene is easily given a negative charge by rubbing it with a dry woollen cloth. (i)
nylon thread
Fig. 11.1 shows a charged polythene rod being held close to a suspended charged polythene rod.
moves away
Complete the phrase, “like charges .....................”. negatively charged polythene Fig. 11.1
(ii)
nylon thread
Fig.11.2 shows rod X being held near the suspended charged polythene rod.
Tick any of the following which might correctly describe rod X.
moves towards
negatively charged polythene rod X
positively charged glass negatively charged ebonite Fig. 11.2 uncharged copper negatively charged polythene [3]
0625/2 W00
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
16 210
12 (a) One nuclide is written as 84 Po.
topicradioactivity
(i)
Which figure is the proton number (atomic number)? ...............................................
(ii)
Which figure is the nucleon number (mass number)? ..............................................
(iii)
Which figure gives the number of protons in the nucleus? .......................................
(iv)
How can you find the number of neutrons in the nucleus? ................................................................................................................................... [4] 4
(b) An α-particle can be written as 2 α. 210
Polonium 84 Po decays into lead (Pb) by emitting an α-particle. Complete the nuclear equation below, by writing the correct numbers in the boxes. 210 84 Po
4
Pb + 2 α
→
0625/2 W00
[2]
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS
0625/2
PAPER 2
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2001
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper. No additional materials required.
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
This question paper consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages. SB (SC/CG) QF10309/4 © UCLES 2001
[Turn over
2 1 topicspeed topicdensity topicweight
A machine operator is making metal cylinders. The factory inspector wants to check whether the machine operator is working fast enough. (a) He tells the operator to start working when the clock on the wall of the factory shows the time in Fig. 1.1. What time is this? Tick one box. 11 12 1 2
10 9
3.01
3
1.03
4
8 7
6
5
3.05 5.03
Fig. 1.1
[1]
(b) The operator is told to stop when the clock shows the time in Fig. 1.2. What time is this? Tick one box. 11 12 1 2
10 9
3.07
3
7.03
4
8 7
6
5
3.35 4.35
Fig. 1.2
[1]
(c) How long did the test take?
length of test = ................... minutes [1] (d) During this time, the operator makes 5 cylinders. What is the average time to make one cylinder?
time to make one cylinder = ................... minutes [2]
0625/2/M/J/01
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
For Examiner’s Use
(a) What is meant by the term moment of a force?
topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy
.......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (b) The sawn-off branch of a tree is laid across a log. A
Fig. 2.1 The branch balances when point A is in contact with the log. (i)
How does the moment of the part of the branch to the left of A compare with the moment of the part to the right of A? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
3
On Fig. 2.1, mark clearly, using the letter X, the centre of mass of the whole branch. [2]
A rubber balloon is filled with air.
topicmodels topicmolecular topicmolecularmodels
(a) Describe how the pressure in the balloon is caused by the air molecules. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] (b) The temperature of the air in the balloon increases. (i)
What happens to the air molecules? ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
What happens to the pressure in the balloon, and why? what happens ........................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... why ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3] 0625/2/M/J/01
[Turn over
4 4
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 4.1 shows the view from above of a triangular object on one side of a vertical mirror.
topictransformations topicenergytransformations topicenergy
object
mirror Fig. 4.1 On Fig. 4.1, carefully draw the image formed by the mirror.
0625/2/M/J/01
[3]
5 5
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 5.1 represents a wave.
topicresistance
displacement
0
B
H
C
I
A
D
E
G
distance from source
F
Fig. 5.1 (a) Making use of the letters on Fig. 5.1, state which distances you would measure to find (i)
the wavelength of the wave: measure between ……… and ……… .
(ii)
the amplitude of the wave: measure between ……… and ……… . [2]
(b) What is meant by the frequency of the wave? .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) One complete wave takes 0.2 s to generate. Calculate the frequency of the wave.
frequency of wave = ...................Hz [2]
0625/2/M/J/01
[Turn over
6 6
A charged ebonite rod has negative charges all over its surface. It is held above three small pieces of aluminium foil, one positively charged, one negatively charged and one uncharged. This is shown in Fig. 6.1.
topicmotion topicbrownian topicbrownianmotion
ebonite rod
insulating sheet
+ positive
negative no charge Fig. 6.1
(a) Put a circle around any of the pieces of aluminium which are attracted by the ebonite rod. [2] (b) Ebonite is an insulator. What is meant by the term insulator? .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) Write down the name of another insulating material. ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/01
For Examiner’s Use
7 7
Three resistors are connected in series between X and Y. When a cell is connected across XY, the current at X is 0.1 A, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
For Examiner’s Use
topicconvection
X
12 Ω
5Ω
3Ω
Y
0.1A V1 Fig. 7.1 (a) What is the value of the current at Y? ................... A
[1]
(b) Calculate V1, the p.d. across the 12 Ω resistor.
p.d. across the 12 Ω resistor = ...................V [2] (c) What instrument would you use to measure the p.d. V1? ............................................[1] (d) How does the e.m.f. of the cell compare with your answer to part (b)? Tick one box.
e.m.f. of cell is larger than V1 e.m.f. of cell is smaller than V1 e.m.f. of cell is the same as V1
[1]
(e) Calculate the combined resistance of the three resistors.
combined resistance = ................... Ω [2]
0625/2/M/J/01
[Turn over
8 8
For Examiner’s Use
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows a simple transformer.
topicradioactivity
core
Vs
Vp
coil N p turns
coil N s turns Fig. 8.1
Complete the following sentences about the transformer. ‘The transformer only works using ………………………………………… current. It steps the potential difference up or down according to the equation Vp _____ . __ = Vs The core of the transformer is made of …………………………. .’
[3]
(b) In each of the following examples, state the potential difference Vs. (i) 12 v~
100 turns
Vs
50 turns Vs = ................... V
(ii) 6 v~
Vs
80 turns
80 turns Vs = ................... V
(iii)
Vs
6v
80 turns
80 turns Vs = ................... V [4] 0625/2/M/J/01
9 9
For Examiner’s Use
The table below gives some data about an accelerating car.
topicpressure
time/s
0
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
speed m/s
0
5
10
15
19
24
25
25
(a) On Fig. 9.1, plot the speed/time graph for the motion. 30 speed m/s 20
10
0 0
2
4
6
8
10
time/s Fig. 9.1
[4]
(b) How far did the car travel during the first 3 s?
distance travelled = ...................m [3] (c) What was the top speed of the car? .....................................................................m/s [1] (d) How far would the car travel in 3 s if travelling at its top speed?
distance travelled = ...................m [3] 0625/2/M/J/01
[Turn over
10 10 Two workers, A and B, are lifting boxes of food in a store-room. The boxes all weigh the same and are lifted from the floor on to the same shelf.
topicwaves topicripples topicenergy
A is able to lift 10 boxes in 2 minutes. B takes longer than 2 minutes to lift 10 boxes. (a) How does the total work done by A compare with the total work done by B? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) How does the power of A compare with the power of B? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) (i)
Which form of energy in their bodies do the workers transform in order to do the work lifting the boxes? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
From what did they obtain this supply of energy? ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) The boxes have more energy when they are on the shelf than when they were on the floor. Which form of energy has increased?...........................................................................[1] (e) One of the boxes falls off the shelf and crashes to the ground. Describe the energy changes as the box falls and hits the ground. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2/M/J/01
For Examiner’s Use
11 11 (a) A builder is building a brick wall. He has 500 bricks delivered, all neatly stacked together.
For Examiner’s Use
topicmercurybarometer topicmercury topicbarometer
Each brick measures 0.2 m x 0.1 m x 0.06 m and is a solid block, as shown in Fig. 11.1.
Fig. 11.1 (i)
Calculate the volume of one brick.
volume of one brick = ………................... (ii)
The brick has a density of 2400 kg/m3. Show that the mass of one brick is 2.88 kg.
(iii)
What is the mass of the stack of bricks?
mass of stack = .................. kg [6] (b) Some other bricks have the same size and are made of the same material, but they have a hollow in one face, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
Fig. 11.2 (i)
How does the mass of one of these bricks compare with the mass of one of the bricks in (a)(ii)? ................................................................................................................................... 0625/2/M/J/01 [Turn over
12 (ii)
The hollow of one brick is filled level with wet cement, as shown in Fig. 11.3. wet cement
Fig. 11.3 The brick now has a mass of 2.91 kg. Compare this with the mass given in (a)(ii). What does it tell you about the density of the wet cement? ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[3] 12 Fig. 12.1 shows a simplified diagram of the front of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.). topicray topictube topiccathoderaytube topiccathode
IGCSE OSCILLOSCOPE CO.
brightness
focus
time-base
y-gain
ms/cm x-shift
volts/cm y-shift
y input
on off
Fig. 12.1 (a) When the oscilloscope is switched on, a bright line is seen across the centre of the screen. (i)
What causes the bright line? ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... 0625/2/M/J/01
For Examiner’s Use
13 (ii)
When the brightness control is turned up, the line gets brighter. What happens inside the oscilloscope to cause this increase in brightness? ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[4]
(b) You have an alternating p.d. whose waveform you wish to display on the screen. (i)
Where would you connect this alternating p.d. to the oscilloscope? ........................
(ii)
Fig. 12.2 shows what the trace on the screen might look like.
h
Fig. 12.2 1.
Which oscilloscope control would you adjust to vary the amplitude, h, of the trace on the screen? ..................
2.
Which control would you adjust to vary the number of waves visible on the screen? ..................
3.
What would you see on the screen if you switched the time-base setting to zero? ................................................................................................................................... [4]
0625/2/M/J/01
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS PAPER 2 OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2001
0625/2 1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper. No additional materials are required.
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
This question paper consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. SB (NH/CG) S10760/3 © UCLES 2001
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
2 1
A piece of string wraps around a cylinder 8 times.
topicmass topicweight topicdensity
string
cylinder
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2 shows the string laid along a 30 cm rule. string
0
5
10
15
20
25 cm
30
Fig. 1.2 (a) How long is the string?
length of string = ......................... cm [1] (b) Calculate the circumference (distance once round) the cylinder.
circumference of cylinder = ......................... cm [2]
0625/2 O/N01
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
A trainee designer makes a jug for holding drinks. The jug is shown in Fig. 2.1.
topiceffect topicturningeffect topicturning
Fig. 2.1 Unfortunately, it is very easy to knock the jug over, so the trainee designer has to change the shape of the jug. State two things he could do to improve the stability of the jug. 1. ............................................................................................................................................. 2. .........................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 O/N01
[Turn over
4 3
(a) How can a metal bar be made to expand in all directions?
topicmodels topicmolecularmodels topicmolecular
......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) What happens to the spacing between the atoms in an iron bar when it expands? .........................................................................................................................................[1] (c) State one example where expansion of a solid can be useful. .........................................................................................................................................[1] (d) State one example where expansion of a solid causes problems which need to be overcome. .........................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 O/N01
For Examiner’s Use
5 4 topicevaporation
(a) A ray of light passes through a rectangular glass block, as shown in Fig. 4.1. It emerges at point X.
For Examiner’s Use
ray
X
Fig. 4.1 On Fig. 4.1, draw the ray which emerges from the block at X.
[2]
(b) The glass of which the block is made has a critical angle of 42°. Another ray passes into the block as shown in Fig. 4.2. ray
50° Y Fig. 4.2 (i)
On Fig. 4.2, show what happens to the ray at Y.
(ii)
Why does this happen? ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[3]
(c) A third ray enters the block perpendicularly, as shown in Fig. 4.3. ray
Fig. 4.3 On Fig. 4.3, draw the ray as it passes through the block and out into the air again.
0625/2 O/N01
[2] [Turn over
6 5 topicresistance
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows a student’s attempt at drawing a diagram to illustrate the formation of a spectrum by using a glass prism. screen Sun’s rays red orange yellow green blue indigo violet
spectrum
Fig. 5.1 The student labelled the colours in the correct positions but made two mistakes in showing the passage of the rays through the prism. What are these mistakes? 1. ....................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................[2] (b) The prism in Fig. 5.1 can transmit infra-red radiation. (i)
What instrument could the student use to detect the presence of the infra-red radiation? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Use the letters I.R. to show where the infra-red radiation would strike the screen. ...............................................................................................................................[2] (c) Infra-red radiation is one example of an invisible part of the electromagnetic spectrum. Give the names of two other invisible parts of the electromagnetic spectrum. 1. ....................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 O/N01
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
7 6
(a) Three metal rods look the same.
topicbrownianmotion topicbrownian
One is made of aluminium. One is made of unmagnetised iron. One is a permanent magnet. Describe how a small bar magnet could show which rod is (i)
made of aluminium, ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii) made of unmagnetised iron, ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... (iii)
a permanent magnet. ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[4]
(b) In an experiment, a steel ball-bearing is held up by an electromagnet, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
electromagnet steel ball-bearing Fig. 6.1
The electromagnet then releases the ball-bearing, which falls to the floor. (i)
From what metal is the core of the electromagnet made? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
How is the electromagnet made to work? ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
What is done to make the electromagnet release the ball-bearing? ...............................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2 O/N01
[Turn over
8 7
This question is about the dangers of electricity.
topicforceonaconductorinamagneticfield topicforce topicconductor
(a) A builder tries to save money by not fitting fuses or circuit-breakers to the electric circuits in a house. Why might this be dangerous? .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (b) Another builder only has switches like the one shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1 The builder decides it might be dangerous to fit one of these switches in a washroom, where there would be water and steam. Why might it be dangerous? .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) A cleaning operator is trained to check the cable of a vacuum cleaner for damage before it is used. Why might it be dangerous to use equipment with a damaged cable? .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 O/N01
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
9 8
(a) Describe what happens to an atom when it undergoes radioactive decay.
topicradioactivity
.......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] (b) A scientist measures the count rate from a radioactive substance over a period of 20 minutes. The table shows the results of his measurements.
(i)
time/minutes
0
5
10
15
20
count rate counts/s
800
400
205
105
50
From the table, estimate the half-life of the substance. half-life = ......................... minutes
(ii)
How many half-lives elapsed during the 20 minute experiment? number of half-lives = ......................... minutes
(iii)
If the scientist had taken readings for 25 minutes, what might the count rate have been at the end of his experiment? count rate after 25 minutes = ......................... counts/s [3]
(c) In the following table, write in the correct numbers of electrons, protons and neutrons contained in an α-particle and in a β-particle. electrons
protons
neutrons
α-particle β-particle [4]
0625/2 O/N01
[Turn over
10 9 topicpressure
A student draws the circuit shown in Fig. 9.1. The circuit is intended to be used to measure the resistance of R, a length of nichrome resistance wire. Z
X
R Y
Fig. 9.1 (a) The student cannot remember which meters he should use at X and at Y. (i)
Which meter should he show at X? ..........................................................................
(ii)
Which letter should he put in the circle at X? ............................................................
(iii)
Which meter should he show at Y? ..........................................................................
(iv)
Which letter should he put in the circle at Y? ............................................................ [4]
(b) (i)
What is the component labelled Z? ...........................................................................
(ii)
What is the purpose of Z in the circuit? ..................................................................... [3]
(c) The student connects the circuit and obtains the graph shown in Fig. 9.2. 4.0 p.d. / V
3.0 2.0 1.0 0 0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
Fig. 9.2
0625/2 O/N01
0.5
0.6 0.7 0.8 current / A
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
11 (i)
How can the student use the graph to find the resistance of R? ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Calculate the value of R.
resistance R = ......................... [4] (d) The student removes the length of nichrome wire R and replaces it with the same length of thinner nichrome wire. (i)
Will the resistance of this wire be greater than, smaller than or the same as the wire in the rest of the question? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
On Fig. 9.2, sketch a line which the student might obtain when he repeats the experiment with the thinner wire. [3]
0625/2 O/N01
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
12 10
The densities of three solids are
topictension
2 700 kg/m3, 2 200 kg/m3, 600 kg/m3,
aluminium concrete wood
Blocks having identical dimensions are made of these three substances. The blocks are stood on a horizontal surface, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
con
alu
min
wo
cre
ium
aluminium
od
te
concrete
wood
Fig. 10.1 (a) (i)
Which block has the greatest mass? ......................................................................... How do you know this?.............................................................................................. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Which block has the greatest weight? .......................................................................
(iii)
Which block exerts the greatest pressure on the horizontal surface? ....................... [4]
(b) The wood block can be placed on the horizontal surface in any one of three ways, A, B or C (see Fig. 10.2). B
C
wo
od
wood
wo
od
A
Fig. 10.2 In which position does the wood block exert the greatest pressure?................................ How do you know this? ..................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] 0625/2 O/N01
13 (c) A person spends some time relaxing on a sandy beach. He sits on a chair with four legs, as shown in Fig. 10.3.
For Examiner’s Use
sand
Fig. 10.3 Unfortunately, the chair quickly sinks into the sand. (i)
Why does this happen? ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest how the person might stop this happening. ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2 O/N01
[Turn over
14 11
A laboratory thermometer is put into some heated pure water, as shown in Fig. 11.1. After some time the water boils.
topicthermometer
thermometer
pure water
heat Fig. 11.1 (a) What quantity does the thermometer measure? ...........................................................[1] (b) Suggest what liquid might be contained by the thermometer. ......................................[1] (c) The atmospheric pressure is normal. What value should the thermometer show when the water is boiling? .........................[2] (d) The heating is continued and the water carries on boiling. What happens to the reading on the thermometer? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (e) How could you check that the zero mark on the thermometer had been correctly positioned? You may use a diagram if it helps you to answer clearly. ............................................................... ............................................................... ............................................................... ............................................................... ............................................................... ...............................................................
0625/2 O/N01
[3]
For Examiner’s Use
15 12
Fig. 12.1 shows the plan of the dining room in a house in a cold country. Details of the rest of the rooms are not shown. The air outside the house is much colder than that inside the house.
topictube topiccathoderaytube topiccathode topicray
interior walls
COLD
WARM door
plan (view from above)
WARM external walls
dining room
window (single glass) Fig. 12.1 Heat is lost from the dining room by conduction at the rates shown below. through external walls through internal walls through door through window
3 000 000 J/hour 100 000 J/hour 50 000 J/hour 1 000 000 J/hour
(a) Suggest why (i)
much more heat is lost through the external walls than through the internal walls, ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
such a lot of heat is lost through the window. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) If the figures above relate to the only sources of heat loss, how many J/hour would the heater in the dining room need to supply in order to keep the temperature in the room constant?
rate of heat supply needed = ......................... J/hour [2] (c) Suggest one other way heat might be lost from the room. ......................................................................................................................................[1] 0625/2 O/N01
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
0625/2
PHYSICS PAPER 2
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2002 1 hour Candidates answer on the question paper. No additional materials required.
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
This question paper consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. SP (NF/JB) S22944/3 © CIE 2002
[Turn over
2 1
Here are two statements made by people who haven’t learned their Physics very well. Each statement is incorrect. In the space alongside each statement, say what is wrong with the statement. statement
what is wrong with this statement
“The weight of this bag of peas is 1 kg.”
“The mass of this object is another name for its weight.”
[2]
0625/2/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
(a) Which of the following statements describe the property of a substance that would be suitable for measuring temperature? Tick the box alongside any acceptable statement. (i)
a property that increases regularly with temperature
(ii)
a property that decreases regularly with temperature
(iii)
a property that remains constant as the temperature changes
For Examiner’s Use
[2] (b) Fig. 2.1 shows how the length of the thread in a liquid-in-glass thermometer varies with temperature.
20 length / cm 15
10
5
0 0
25
50
75 100 temperature / °C
Fig. 2.1 (i)
What temperature is indicated by a thread length of 14.5 cm? temperature = ........................ °C
(ii)
What happens to the thread of the thermometer if the temperature drops below the ice point? ................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
4 3
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows a machine for making loud sounds. It is called a siren. This consists of a rotating disc with 25 holes. As each hole passes the jet, a puff of air passes through the hole.
disc with 25 holes
jet of air Fig. 3.1 (i)
How many puffs of air will there be during one revolution of the disc? number of puffs = ....................
(ii)
The disc rotates 40 times per second. Show that the frequency of the note produced by the siren is 1000 Hz. [3]
0625/2/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
5 (b) The siren described in (a) is located some distance from a large building, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
For Examiner’s Use
large building siren
Fig. 3.2 The siren is briefly sounded once. A short time later, the sound is heard again. (i)
Why is this second sound heard? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
What is the frequency of this second sound? Tick one box. less than 1000 Hz 1000 Hz more than 1000 Hz
(iii)
What is the amplitude of this second sound? Tick one box. less than the original sound the same as the original sound more than the original sound [3]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
6 4
(a) In the following table, tick the appropriate boxes to indicate where protons, neutrons and electrons are found in an atom.
particle
found in the nucleus
found in an orbit
proton neutron electron
[3]
(b) A neutral atom of phosphorus (P) contains 15 protons, 16 neutrons and 15 electrons. (i)
Write down the proton number (atomic number) of phosphorus. ...............
(ii)
Write down the nucleon number (mass number) of phosphorus. ..............
(iii)
The nuclide notation for oxygen is 168O. Write down the nuclide notation for phosphorus. [3]
0625/2/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
7 5
(a) Describe one method of magnetising a steel rod. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (b) How would you check that the steel rod had been magnetised? what would show that the steel rod had been magnetised
what I would do
[2] (c) A glass tube is supported vertically on a bench. A strong bar magnet A is placed in the bottom of the tube, as shown in Fig. 5.1. hand S N
magnet B
glass tube
N bench
magnet A S Fig. 5.1
A second magnet B is now dropped into the tube. Describe what happens to magnet B, and explain why. what happens to magnet B
explanation
[3] 0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
8 6
Fig. 6.1 shows a vacuum tube in which it is hoped to generate cathode rays. vacuum
filament
anode
y-plates Fig. 6.1
(a) (i)
On Fig. 6.1, draw the symbol for a battery connected so that thermionic emission occurs.
(ii)
What particles are emitted in thermionic emission? ................................................. [2]
(b)
–
+ Fig. 6.2
(i)
On Fig. 6.2, show the + and – terminals suitably connected so that cathode rays may pass along the tube.
(ii)
On Fig. 6.2, draw a line showing the path of the cathode rays.
(iii)
How are the cathode rays detected in the tube? ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
0625/2/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
9 (c) Fig. 6.3 shows the same vacuum tube, with the terminals labelled. T
P Q
R
S Fig. 6.3
Between which two points should a battery be connected if the cathode rays are to be deflected upwards? between point ........ and point ........ [1]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
10 7
Fig. 7.1 illustrates one country’s system for transmitting electricity around the country, from the power station to people’s houses. voltage here =
power station
step-up transformer
grid system
voltage here =
voltage here =
step-down step-down house transformer transformer
Fig. 7.1 (a) At different points in this system, the voltage is 220 V, 11 000 V or 132 000 V. At the three places marked on Fig. 7.1, write in the appropriate value of the voltage. [3] (b) State one advantage of using high voltages for the transmission of electricity. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
11 8
In a research laboratory using radioactive materials, safety precautions have to be observed. Some of the safety precautions adopted by the laboratory are listed below.
For Examiner’s Use
On the lines after each precaution, state reasons why it is a wise precaution. (a) Radioactive materials should only be picked up using long-handled tools. REASON 1 ....................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... REASON 2 ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (b) Food must not be taken where radioactive materials are being used. REASON .......................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) The researchers must wash their hands after the source has been put away safely. REASON .......................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1] (d) Radioactive materials must be stored in a locked drawer or cabinet. REASON .......................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
12 9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit that includes three ammeters. The resistance of the ammeters and the battery can be ignored.
A1
A3 20 X
A2
20 X
Fig. 9.1 (i)
What is the total resistance of the circuit? resistance = ............ Ω
(ii)
Ammeter A1 reads 0.2 A. What do the other two ammeters read? A2 reads ............ A A3 reads ............ A [3]
0625/2/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
13 (b) Fig. 9.2 shows the same components as in (a), but connected differently.
A1
A2
20 X
A3
20 X Fig. 9.2 (i)
What is the total resistance of the circuit? Tick one box. 40 Ω 30 Ω 20 Ω 10 Ω
(ii)
Ammeter A1 reads 0.8 A. What do the other two ammeters read? Tick the appropriate boxes. more than 0.8 A
0.8 A
less than 0.8 A
A2 reads A3 reads [3]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
14 10 (a) A manufacturer of car tyres estimates that the area of a car tyre in contact with the road is about the same as the area of a person’s shoe in contact with the ground. (i)
A car weighs 10 000 N and a person weighs 500 N. Calculate the ratio pressure of car on ground ________________________ . pressure of person on ground Remember that the car has 4 tyres and a person has 2 feet.
(ii)
Suggest why it might be a good idea to reduce the pressure of the air in car tyres if the car is to be driven over soft sand or over snow. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) A U-tube manometer is used to measure lung pressure by blowing at A, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
A
X
Y
liquid
Fig. 10.1 (i)
Before the person blows at A, the liquid levels X and Y are the same. State the reason for this. ...................................................................................................................................
0625/2/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
15 (ii)
Which way do the liquid levels move when the person blows at A? level X moves .......................... level Y moves ..........................
(iii)
What would you measure in order to find the person’s lung pressure? ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
16 11 In an experiment, different weights are hung on the end of a spring, and the length of the spring is measured. The results are as follows.
weight/N length/mm extension/mm
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
40
48
60
64
72
80
88
96
0
8
20
(a) What is the length of the unstretched spring? length of unstretched spring = ............ mm [1] (b) Some of the extensions have been calculated for you. Complete the table by writing in the remaining extensions. (c) (i)
[2]
On the graph grid of Fig 11.1, plot the values from your table.
extension / mm
60
50
40
30
20
10
0 0
1
2
3
4
Fig. 11.1
0625/2/M/J/02
5
6 weight / N
7
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
17 (ii)
Draw the best straight line through your points.
(iii)
The experimenter has read one of the lengths incorrectly. 1. Which one is it? ................................................................................................... 2. What do you think the length reading should have been? ........... mm [5]
(d) The spring is now attached to a block resting on a rough surface, as shown in Fig. 11.2. block rough surface
spring
pulling force
friction force Fig. 11.2 As the pulling force is increased, the block just starts to move to the right when the spring is 68 mm long. (i)
What is the extension of the spring when it is 68 mm long? extension = .......... mm
(ii)
Use your graph to find the force that causes this extension. force = .......... N
(iii)
What is the value of the friction force as the block starts to move? friction force = .......... N [4]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
18 12 (a) A beam of light is travelling parallel to the axis of a thin lens, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
A
X
P C
F
Y
Fig. 12.1 After passing through the lens, the rays all pass through the point F. (i)
Which word best describes what happens to the rays? Tick one box. The rays
converge diffract disperse reflect
(ii)
On Fig. 12.1, complete the paths of the two rays.
(iii)
Complete the following sentence, referring to Fig. 12.1.
“The focal length of the lens is the distance between point ....... and point ...... .” [3]
0625/2/M/J/02
19 (b) In this part of the question, you are required to draw an accurate ray diagram on Fig. 12.2 for the lens in part (a).
object
X
P
F
Y
Fig. 12.2 (i)
From the top of the object, draw a ray that, after leaving the lens, passes through F.
(ii)
From the top of the object, draw a ray that passes through P.
(iii)
Mark in the image, and write “image” alongside it.
(iv)
From your diagram, state two things that are the same (or approximately the same) about the image and the object. 1. ............................................................................................................................... 2. ...............................................................................................................................
(v)
From your diagram, state one thing that is definitely different about the image and the object. ................................................................................................................................... [9]
0625/2/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
0625/2
PHYSICS PAPER 2
OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2002 1 hour Candidates answer on the question paper. No additional materials are required.
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
This question paper consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. SP (CW/SLC) S23398/3 © CIE 2002
[Turn over
2 1
A baggage handler at an airport lifts a suitcase from the ground and places it on a moving belt. The moving belt then transfers the suitcase to the owner. moving belt
A
suitcase on ground
B
suitcase held level with belt
C
suitcase moving on belt
Fig. 1.1 (a) (i)
How does the total energy of the suitcase in B compare with its energy in A? Tick one box. The total energy is greater in B than in A. The total energy is the same in B and in A. The total energy is less in B than in A.
(ii)
Explain your answer. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/2/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) (i)
How does the total energy of the suitcase in C compare with its energy in B? Tick one box.
For Examiner’s Use
The total energy is greater in C than in B. The total energy is the same in C and B. The total energy is less in C than in B. (ii)
Explain your answer. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [2]
2
Here are five words relating to the transfer of thermal energy. conductor, convection, evaporation, insulator, radiation Complete each of the following sentences by writing in the appropriate word from the list. (a) Cooking pots often have a wooden handle, because wood is a good thermal ...................................... .
[1]
(b) Thermal energy reaches Earth from the Sun by means of .......................................
[1]
(c) Copper is a good ...................................... of thermal energy.
[1]
(d) The heating element is put at the bottom of an electric kettle, so that ...................................... can rapidly transfer thermal energy throughout the water.
0625/2/O/N/02
[1]
[Turn over
4 3
Fig. 3.1 shows a vertical wire through a horizontal piece of card. There is a current down the wire.
large current
card
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2 shows the wire and card, viewed from above. card
Fig. 3.2 The large circle is one of the magnetic field lines caused by the current. On Fig. 3.2, (a) show the direction of the magnetic field,
[1]
(b) carefully draw three more magnetic field lines.
[2]
0625/2/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
5 4
In an experiment to find the density of some oil, a student takes the following readings.
For Examiner’s Use
cm3 500
mass of empty measuring jug = 610 g
400 300 200 100
Fig. 4.1 cm3
oil
500
mass of jug containing 500 cm3 of oil = 1020 g
400 300 200 100
Fig. 4.2 (a) (i)
Calculate the mass of oil in the jug.
mass of oil =........................ g (ii)
Calculate the density of the oil.
density of oil =...................................... (iii)
How could the volume of the oil be more accurately measured than with the measuring jug? ................................................................................................................................... [7]
(b) Water is more dense than oil. On Fig. 4.3, mark approximately where the surface of the same mass of water would be if it replaced the oil. [1] level of oil
cm3 500 400 300 200 100
Fig. 4.3
0625/2/O/N/02
[Turn over
6 5
For Examiner’s Use
(a) What happens to the nucleus of an atom that undergoes radioactive decay? .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) Strontium-90 has a half-life of 28 years. How much time must pass before its activity falls to of its original value?
time = ........................ years [2]
6
(a) State what is meant by the melting point of a solid. The melting point is .......................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (b) Which two of the following quantities are the same? Tick two boxes. boiling point of iron freezing (solidifying) point of iron melting point of iron
[1]
0625/2/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
7 (c) Some liquid in a beaker is kept boiling by heating the beaker, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
boiling liquid
heat
Fig. 6.1 (i)
On the axes of Fig. 6.2, sketch a graph to show what happens to the temperature of the liquid whilst it is boiling.
temperature
0
time
time at which liquid starts to boil Fig. 6.2 (ii)
On your graph, mark the boiling point of the liquid. [2]
0625/2/O/N/02
[Turn over
8 7
A student holds a polythene rod in one hand and a dry cotton cloth in the other. dry cotton cloth
polythene rod
Fig. 7.1 (a) How can the student cause the rod to become charged with static electricity? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) How can the student detect that the rod has become charged? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) Around the charged rod will be an electric field. What is meant by an electric field ? .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
9 (d) The charged polythene rod is brought close to another charged polythene rod that has been suspended from a nylon thread, as shown in Fig. 7.2. nylon thread
For Examiner’s Use
charged polythene rod (–)
charged polythene rod (–)
Fig. 7.2 (i)
What is seen to happen to the suspended rod? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain why this happens. ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) If the student used a copper rod in (a), instead of the polythene rod, why would he not be able to charge the rod? .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/O/N/02
[Turn over
10 8
Fig. 8.1 shows an electric circuit containing a battery, a 4.7 Ω resistor, an ammeter and a variable resistor with a sliding contact. The variable resistor is set at zero. The ammeter and battery have such a small resistance that it can be ignored.
X
sliding contact
variable resistor
A Y 4.7 Ω Fig. 8.1
(a) In what unit do we measure the e.m.f. of the battery? .................................................[1] (b) Write down the equation that links resistance, potential difference (p.d.) and current.
[2] (c) The ammeter shows that the current through the 4.7 Ω resistor is 0.5 A. Calculate the p.d. across the resistor.
p.d. across resistor = ........................ [2] (d) The sliding contact of the variable resistor is moved from X to Y. (i)
What happens to the resistance of the variable resistor? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
What happens to the reading on the ammeter? ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) The variable resistor is now adjusted to make the total resistance of the circuit 10.0 Ω. What is the resistance of the variable resistor now?
resistance of variable resistor = ........................ Ω [2]
0625/2/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
11 9
A student wrote the following report about an experiment to measure the speed of sound in air.
For Examiner’s Use
My friend and I went into a field a long way from any buildings and measured the distance across the field. My friend stood at one side of the field and I stood at the other. My friend banged two pieces of wood together, and as I saw him do this, I started a stopwatch. I stopped the stopwatch when I heard the sound. We obtained the following readings. distance across field = 238 m time for sound to cross field = 0.7 s (a) Why was it necessary to be a long way from any buildings? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) Why was it necessary to use such a large distance? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) Suggest what the students could have used to measure the distance across the field. ......................................................................................................................................[1] (d) Why was there a delay between the student seeing the pieces of wood come together and hearing the bang? .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (e) Use the readings to calculate the speed of sound.
speed of sound = ...................................... [4] (f)
Suggest why it might have been a good idea for the students to repeat the experiment after they had exchanged positions. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/O/N/02
[Turn over
12 10 (a) The apparatus shown in Fig. 10.1 can be used to indicate when there is a force on the copper rod.
hanging copper rod
N S
mercury Fig. 10.1 (i)
Suggest what is seen to happen to the hanging copper rod when the switch is closed. ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain your answer. ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
The cell is reversed and the switch closed. How does what is seen now differ from what you described in (a)(i)? ................................................................................................................................... [4]
0625/2/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
13 (b) Fig. 10.2 represents a d.c. motor.
coil
N
S
Fig. 10.2 (i)
In the boxes, label the various parts of the motor. One part has been labelled as an example.
(ii)
Which part of the motor ensures that the coil keeps rotating when the battery is connected? ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
The battery is reversed. What difference does this make to the motor? ................................................................................................................................... [5]
0625/2/O/N/02
[Turn over
14 11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a reed relay in a simple circuit.
lamp
flexible iron reeds
S
Fig. 11.1 Explain why the iron reeds touch each other when switch S is closed. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
15 (b) Fig. 11.2 shows a simple temperature-operated alarm. warning lamp
thermistor Fig. 11.2 When the thermistor is cold, its resistance is too high to allow sufficient current to operate the reed relay. The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases. Describe what happens to make the warning lamp light as the air temperature changes. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
[Turn over
16 12 (a) A narrow beam of red light strikes one face of a triangular prism at A, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
screen
A
red light
Fig. 12.1 (i)
On Fig. 12.1, show the path of the beam until it reaches the screen.
(ii)
What name do we use to describe what happens to the beam at A? ................................................................................................................................... [4]
0625/2/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
17 (b) The red light is replaced by a narrow beam of mixed red and violet light, as shown in Fig. 12.2.
screen
red + violet light
Fig. 12.2 Complete Fig. 12.2 to show what happens to the red and the violet light.
[2]
(c) The beam of red and violet light is replaced by a narrow beam of white light from the Sun. State what is now seen on the screen. ......................................................................................................................................[1] (d) The rays from the Sun also include infra-red rays. Infra-red radiation can pass through glass. (i)
On Fig. 12.2, mark with the letter X the place where infra-red radiation from the Sun might strike the screen after passing through the prism.
(ii)
Why can infra-red not be seen on the screen? ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
What could be used to detect the infra-red radiation? ................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/2/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/02
PHYSICS Paper 2
May/June 2003 1 hour Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
For Examiner’s Use If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page. Stick your personal label here, if provided.
This document consists of 16 printed pages. SP (AT/KN) S46409/2 © CIE 2003
[Turn over
2 1
A person winds some thread tightly 4 times round the length of a metre rule and cuts the ends off level with the left-hand end of the rule, as shown in Fig. 1.1. ends cut off here thread
1 m rule
Fig. 1.1 (a) To the nearest metre, what is the length of the thread? .................. m [1] (b) Is the actual length of thread slightly greater or slightly less than your answer to (a)? Tick one box and give your reason. slightly greater
slightly less
reason ....................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/03
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
(a) Two horizontal strings are attached to a soft rubber ball, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
10 N
F
Fig. 2.1 A force of 10 N pulls on one string. (i)
The ball does not move. What is the value of the force F on the other string? F = .............................. N
(ii)
What change to the rubber ball do the two forces cause? ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A garden pot containing soil weighs a total of 360 N. The pot rests on three equallyspaced blocks, so that surplus water can drain out of the holes in the base of the pot. The soil is uniformly distributed in the pot. The pot is shown in Fig. 2.2.
Fig. 2.2 (i)
What is the force exerted by each block on the pot?
(ii)
State the direction of these forces.
...............N
................................................................................................................................... (iii)
The gardener finds that the blocks sink into the ground, but he must have the pot up on blocks to allow the drainage. What can he do to reduce the sinking of the pot? ................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/2/M/J/03
[Turn over
4 3
For Examiner’s Use
(a) An unopened bottle of olive oil has a mass of 0.97 kg. The empty bottle has a mass of 0.51 kg. Calculate the mass of the olive oil. OLI V OIL
OLI V OIL
0.97 kg
0.51 kg
Fig. 3.1
mass of olive oil = .................................. kg
[2]
(b) The olive oil is poured into three 250 cm3 measuring cylinders. The first two cylinders are filled to the 250 cm3 mark. The third is shown in Fig. 3.2. cm3 250 200
50
150 100 50
Fig. 3.2 (i)
What is the volume of the olive oil in the third measuring cylinder? volume = .................................. cm3
(ii)
Calculate the volume of the olive oil in the unopened bottle.
volume = .................................. cm3 (iii)
Calculate the density of the olive oil. Express your answer to 2 significant figures.
density = .................................. [7]
0625/2/M/J/03
5 4
The air trapped in a cylinder by a piston is kept under pressure by a load, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
fixed pivot
For Examiner’s Use
load
piston
cylinder air
Fig. 4.1 (a) Describe how the pressure in the cylinder is caused by the air molecules. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] (b) The load is increased. (i)
State what happens to the piston. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State what happens to the pressure in the cylinder, and give a reason. what happens ........................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... reason ....................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/2/M/J/03
[Turn over
6 5
An immersion heater is put into some crushed ice at 0 °C. The immersion heater is switched on.
insulating beaker
immersion heater crushed ice
Fig. 5.1 (a) On Fig. 5.2, sketch the graph of temperature against time, up to the time when all the ice has melted. [3]
100 temperature / °C
0 time
0 time when all ice has melted Fig. 5.2
(b) The heater is left switched on after all the ice has melted, and the temperature rises. After some time, the temperature stops rising, even though the heater is still on. (i)
Suggest why the temperature stops rising, even though the heater is still on. ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State what happens to the energy received by the water whilst this is happening. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/2/M/J/03
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
7 6
In this question, drawing should be done carefully. Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light striking mirror 1 at point X. ray of light
mirror 1
mirror 2
X Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, (i)
draw the normal at X,
(ii)
draw the ray reflected from mirror 1,
(iii)
mark the angle of incidence using the letter i and the angle of reflection using the letter r. [3]
(b) Mirror 2 is parallel to mirror 1. The reflected ray from mirror 1 strikes mirror 2. Compare the direction of the ray reflected from mirror 2 with the incident ray at X. You may do a further construction if you wish. Complete the sentence below. The reflected ray from mirror 2 is ..................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/03
[Turn over
8 7
For Examiner’s Use
The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s. (a) Complete Fig. 7.1 to show how far a sound wave has travelled 2, 3, 4 and 5 seconds after the sound was made. [1] time elapsed/s
0
1
distance travelled/m
0
340
2
3
4
5
Fig. 7.1 (b) On Fig. 7.2, draw the graph of distance travelled against time for the sound wave.
distance travelled /m
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0
1
2
3
4
5 time/s
Fig. 7.2
0625/2/M/J/03
[3]
For Examiner’s Use
9 (c) A ship is sinking in the dark as shown in Fig. 7.3.
distress flare
lifeboat sinking ship
Fig. 7.3 The sailors on the ship fire a distress flare into the air. It explodes with a bang and a bright flash of light. (i)
A lifeboat crew hear the bang and see the flash, but not at the same time. State which reaches the lifeboat first, the bang or the flash, and give a reason. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
The time interval in (c)(i) is 4.2 s. Use your graph in (b) to find how far away the lifeboat is from the flare. Show clearly on your graph how you got your answer.
distance of lifeboat = .................................. m [6]
0625/2/M/J/03
[Turn over
10 8
(a) In an electronic circuit, what is a capacitor designed to store? ................................
[1]
(b) The circuit in Fig. 8.1 contains a large-value resistor and a capacitor.
S1 large-value resistor + 6 V d.c. V
–
capacitor S2
Fig. 8.1 (i)
Switch S1 is open. Switch S2 is closed and then opened again. What reading now shows on the voltmeter?
(ii)
................................ V
S2 is left open and S1 is closed and left closed. Describe what happens to the reading on the voltmeter. ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
The circuit in Fig. 8.1 is an example of a simple time-delay circuit. State one use of a time-delay circuit. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
0625/2/M/J/03
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
11 9
A length of flexible, slack wire is fixed at A and B so that part of it is held vertically in the field of a horseshoe magnet, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
A
S N
B
Fig. 9.1 Figs. 9.2 and 9.3 each show the same section through the apparatus. The wire between A and B is not shown.
A
A
magnet pole
magnet pole
B
B
Fig. 9.2 (a) (i) (ii)
Fig. 9.3
On Fig. 9.2, draw what the wire might look like when a large current passes through it. [2] Explain why the wire looks like this. ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[3]
(b) On Fig. 9.3, draw what the wire might look like if the current in (a) is reversed.
0625/2/M/J/03
[1]
[Turn over
12 10 Fig. 10.1 shows a simplified diagram of the front of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.). IGCSE OSCILLOSCOPE CO.
brightness
focus
time-base
y-gain
ms/cm x-shift
volts/cm y-shift on off
y input
Fig. 10.1 (a) When the oscilloscope is switched on, a bright spot is seen at the centre of the screen. (i)
Describe what causes this bright spot. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[3]
(ii)
The spot is rather blurred. Which control should be adjusted to make it sharper? ...............................................................................................................................[1]
(iii)
Which control would be switched on to turn the spot into a horizontal line? ...............................................................................................................................[1]
(iv)
Describe what happens inside the oscilloscope to turn the spot into a horizontal line. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2/M/J/03
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
13 (b) You have an alternating p.d. whose waveform you wish to display on the screen. (i)
Where would you connect this alternating p.d. to the oscilloscope? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Fig. 10.2 shows what the trace on the screen might look like.
Fig. 10.2 1. What change would you see on the screen if you adjusted the x-shift control? ................................................................................................................................... 2. What change would you see on the screen if you adjusted the y-shift control? ................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/2/M/J/03
[Turn over
14 11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a circuit containing a lamp and a variable resistor.
Fig. 11.1 The circuit does not work. The lamp does not light and altering the setting on the variable resistor makes no difference. In the space below, re-draw the diagram, showing a circuit in which the variable resistor may be used to change the brightness of the lamp. [2]
0625/2/M/J/03
For Examiner’s Use
15 (b) Fig. 11.2 shows two resistors and an ammeter connected in series to a 6 V d.c. supply. The resistance of the ammeter is so small that it can be ignored. 8Ω
Q +
P 6V
–
For Examiner’s Use
A
R S
4Ω
Fig. 11.2 (i)
Calculate the combined resistance of the 8 Ω and 4 Ω resistors in series.
combined resistance = .................................. Ω (ii)
[2]
1. Calculate the current supplied by the 6 V d.c. supply.
current = .................................. 2. State the value of the current in section PQ of the circuit .................................. recorded by the ammeter .................................. in section SR of the circuit .................................. [5] (iii)
On Fig. 11.2, show a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the 4 Ω resistor. [1]
0625/2/M/J/03
[Turn over
16
For Examiner’s Use
12 A rock climber climbs up a rock face, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
safety rope
climber
Fig. 12.1 (a) To climb the rock face, the climber must do work. Which force must the climber work against as he climbs? Tick one box. air resistance friction on the rock his weight tension in the safety rope
[1]
(b) What other quantity, as well as the force ticked in (a), must be known in order to find the work done by the climber? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) One climber weighs 1000 N and another weighs 800 N. They both take the same time to climb the cliff. (i)
Which one has done the most work? ........................................................................
(ii)
Which one has the greater power rating? ................................................................. [2]
(d) When the first climber reaches the top, he has more gravitational potential energy than he had at the bottom. (i)
What form of energy, stored in his body, was used to give him this extra gravitational potential energy? ..................................................................................
(ii)
Where did he get this energy from? ..........................................................................
(iii)
Other than increasing gravitational potential energy on the way up, how else was energy in his body used? State one way. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3] 0625/2/M/J/03
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/02
PHYSICS Paper 2 Theory
October/November 2003 1 hour Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page.
For Examiner’s Use
Stick your personal label here, if provided.
This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. MML 4505 11/02 S53489/2 © UCLES 2003
UNIVERSITY of CAMBRIDGE Local Examinations Syndicate
[Turn over
2 1
(a) The block of wood in Fig. 1.1 will balance on a horizontal table. Q
R
P
S
B A Fig. 1.1 If the block is tilted slightly clockwise about AB, it returns to its original position when released. (i) On Fig. 1.1, mark with the letter G where the centre of mass of the block might be. (ii) Small masses are added to the top PQRS of the block until it is just about to topple (fall over). Fig. 1.2 shows a side view of the block.
P
S
A Fig. 1.2 On Fig. 1.2, draw a line along which the centre of mass of the arrangement must now lie. [2]
0625/02/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) Fig. 1.3 shows two ways of using a laboratory retort stand.
A
B Fig. 1.3
Which diagram shows the safer arrangement? ..................... Give a reason for your choice. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) Some office filing cabinets have a mechanism that allows only one drawer to be opened at a time, as shown in Fig. 1.4.
Fig. 1.4 Suggest why they have this mechanism. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
4 2
A wheel is rotating at approximately 2 revolutions per second. Describe how you would use a stopwatch to measure as accurately as possible the time for one revolution of the wheel. Make sure you include all the relevant information. ................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................................................................................... [5]
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a rock-fall down a mountain-side.
loose rocks
mountain
Fig. 3.1 The rocks higher up the mountain were disturbed by something and they roll down the mountain until they stop at the bottom. In the boxes below, write the name of the type of energy being described. Before they fall, the rocks have this energy because of their position.
As the rocks are falling, their energy is changing to these other types of energy. At the bottom, the only energy retained by the rocks is this type of energy. [5]
0625/02/O/N/03
5 4
(a) A farmer has two vehicles with the same weight and the same number of wheels. Fig. 4.1 shows what the wheels on these two vehicles look like.
vehicle 1
For Examiner’s Use
vehicle 2 Fig. 4.1
Which vehicle should the farmer use when driving across his fields when the ground is very soft? Give your reasons. vehicle ................................................................ reasons ............................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [4] (b)
(i) If you stepped on the point of a sharp nail with your bare foot, it would be extremely painful. Explain, in terms of pressure, why this is so. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. (ii) A person can lie on a bed of nail-points if there is a large number of nails. Explain why this is not extremely painful. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [5]
0625/02/O/N/03
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
6 5
Fig. 5.1 shows two parallel rays of light, AB and CD, in a symmetrical glass block. glass block A
B P
C
D
Fig. 5.1 (a) On Fig. 5.1, (i) draw the ray AB before it entered the block at A, (ii) draw the normal at B, (iii) draw a ray which could emerge into the air at B, (iv) draw the normal at D, (v) draw a ray which could emerge into the air at D. [5] (b) State two things about the directions of the two rays emerging from the block. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ................................................................................................................................ [2] (c) What might happen to a third ray in the block, parallel to the others, which reached the point P? .................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
7 6
(a) Here are three quantities that are associated with waves in the electromagnetic spectrum.
For Examiner’s Use
speed, wavelength, frequency (i) Which of these is the same in a vacuum for both X-rays and radio waves? .................................................................................................................................. (ii) Which of these determines the colour of a ray of light? .................................................................................................................................. (iii) Which of these is the distance between two successive wavecrests? .................................................................................................................................. [3] (b) Which region of the electromagnetic spectrum has the shortest wavelength? .................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
[Turn over
8 7
(a) The resistance of a piece of wire of constant diameter depends on its length. On the axes of Fig. 7.1, sketch a graph to show how the resistance of the wire varies with length. [2] resistance
0 0
length Fig. 7.1
(b) A reel contains 50 m of insulated wire. The ends of the wire are connected to the circuit shown in Fig. 7.2, so that the resistance of the wire can be found.
+
50 m meter 1
–
meter 2
Fig. 7.2 (i) What sort of meter is meter 1? ........................................................................... [1] (ii) Complete the sentence: “Meter 1 is measuring the ................................................. across the coil of wire.” [1] (iii) What sort of meter is meter 2? ........................................................................... [1] (iv) Complete the sentence: “Meter 2 is measuring the ................................................. in the coil of wire.” [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
9 (v) The dials of the meters are shown in Figs. 7.3(a) and 7.3(b).
2
3 4
5
6
7
1
8
0.1
9
0.4
0
0.5
10
0
0.3
0.2
V
A
Fig. 7.3(a)
Fig. 7.3(b)
From the readings, calculate the resistance of the coil of wire.
resistance of coil = ................................ [5] (vi) What is the resistance per metre of the wire?
resistance per metre = .......................... [2]
0625/02/O/N/03
[Turn over
10 8
Fig. 8.1 shows the view, from above, of a sheet of cardboard on top of a bar magnet. The dotted line is the outline of the bar magnet.
Fig. 8.1 (a) Describe how the pattern of the magnetic field round the bar magnet can be shown experimentally. If you wish, you may draw on Fig. 8.1 as well as write on the lines below. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [4] (b) State how you would identify the north pole of the magnet. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
11 9
(a) When a nucleus decays by emitting an -particle, what happens to (i) the number of neutrons in the nucleus, .................................................................................................................................. (ii) the number of protons in the nucleus, .................................................................................................................................. (iii) the charge on the nucleus? .................................................................................................................................. [5] (b) On 1st January 1900, a sample of a particular radioactive nuclide had an activity of 3200 count / min. The nuclide has a half-life of 22 years. Calculate the activity of the nuclide remaining in the sample on 1st January 1966.
activity = ......................... count / min [4]
0625/02/O/N/03
[Turn over
12 10 In a spring-stretching experiment, the following values were found for the extension of the spring. load / N
0
1
2
3
4
5
extension / mm
0
16
45
48
64
80
6
7
104 150
(a) Plot these values on the axes of Fig. 10.1.
[3]
200
extension / mm 150
100
50
0 0
2
4
6
8
10 load / N
Fig. 10.1 (b) A mistake was made with measuring one of the extensions. On the table above, put a circle around the incorrect extension. [1] (c) After a load of about 5 N, the graph begins to curve upwards. Suggest what is happening to the spring when the load is greater than 5 N. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) Describe how you would measure the extensions if you were doing this experiment. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] 0625/02/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
13 11
Fig. 11.1 shows a mercury-in-glass thermometer, calibrated in °C. –10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
ºC
Fig. 11.1 (a)
(i) What temperature would the thermometer read if put in steam, just above boiling water at standard pressure? ........................... °C (ii) What temperature would the thermometer read if put in pure melting ice? ........................... °C (iii) On Fig. 11.1, mark where the end of the mercury thread might be when the thermometer is in a freezer, where the temperature is well below the freezing point of water. [3]
(b) The mercury-in-glass thermometer uses the expansion of a liquid to measure temperature. State another physical property that can be used to measure temperature. .................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
[Turn over
14 12 In a country where the mains electricity supply is 240 V, the transformer in Fig. 12.1 is used to enable a 6 V lamp to be lit.
A 240 V mains
8000 turns
6V lamp B
Fig. 12.1 (a) Calculate the number of turns needed on the secondary coil if the lamp is to be lit at normal brightness.
number of turns = ........................ [3] (b) Without further calculation, state the number of secondary turns needed to light, at normal brightness, A (i) two identical 6 V lamps in parallel i.e. number of turns = .................... B A (ii) two identical 6 V lamps in series i.e. number of turns = .................... B [2]
0625/02/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/02
PHYSICS Paper 2
May/June 2004 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
For Examiner’s Use If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page. Stick your personal label here, if provided.
This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. SPA (NH/BI) S61205/2 © UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2 1
The clock on a public building has a bell that strikes each hour so that people who cannot see the clock can know what hour of the day it is. At precisely 6 o’clock, the clock starts to strike. It strikes 6 times. At the first strike of the bell, a man’s wrist-watch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.
11
12
1 2
10 9
3 8
4 7
6
5
Fig. 1.1 When the bell strikes for the sixth time, the wrist-watch is as shown in Fig. 1.2.
11
12
1 2
10 9
3 8
4 7
6
5
Fig. 1.2 (a) Calculate the time interval between the 1st strike and the 6th strike.
time interval = ……………… s [1] (b) Calculate the time interval between one strike and the next.
time interval = ………………s [2] (c) At precisely 11 o’clock, the clock starts to strike. Calculate the time interval between the 1st strike and the 11th strike.
time interval = ………………s [2] © UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a hinged rail in a fence. The rail has to be lifted vertically in order to let people through. hinge
For Examiner’s Use
rail
Fig. 2.1 (a) On Fig. 2.1, draw an arrow to show the position and direction of the smallest force that would be needed to begin to raise the rail. [3] (b) What is the correct Physics term for the turning effect of a force? Tick one box. force work moment movement
[1]
(c) Suggest one way the designer of the fence could have reduced the force needed to lift the rail. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
[Turn over
4 3
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 3.1 shows the speed-time graph of part of a short journey made by a cyclist. 25 speed m/s
20
P
Q
15 10 5 R
0 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
time/s Fig. 3.1 (a) Which part of Fig. 3.1 shows when the cyclist is travelling at constant speed? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) State what is happening during the rest of the journey shown in Fig. 3.1. ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) (i)
Calculate the distance travelled during the first 50 s.
distance travelled = …………………... m (ii)
Calculate the distance travelled between 50 s and 100 s.
distance travelled = …………………... m
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
5 (iii)
For Examiner’s Use
Calculate the total distance travelled.
total distance travelled = …………………... m (iv)
Calculate the average speed during the 100 s.
average speed = …………………... m/s [8]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
[Turn over
6 4
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows a person pulling a loaded barrow along a path from A to B at a steady speed.
A
B Fig. 4.1
State the two quantities you need to know in order to be able to calculate the work done by the person. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ..................................................................................................................................[2] (b) Another person pulls an identical barrow and load from A to B, but this person pulls much harder than the person in (a). Describe what happens to the second person’s barrow. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) (i)
State which person has the greater power between A and B. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Give two reasons for your answer to (c)(i). reason 1 .................................................................................................................... reason 2 ................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
7 5
Fig. 5.1 shows a shallow dish containing a liquid that evaporates easily. The bulb of a thermometer is held in the liquid. A jet of air is blown over the surface of the liquid, so that the liquid evaporates rapidly.
For Examiner’s Use
thermometer
jet of air
liquid shallow dish
Fig. 5.1 (a) State what happens to the reading shown on the thermometer. ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) Explain your answer to (a) in terms of the behaviour of the molecules of the liquid. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) State one example in everyday life where the effect demonstrated by this experiment occurs. ......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
[Turn over
8 6
(a) When a certain amount of heat is supplied to 1 kg of insulated aluminium, the temperature of the aluminium rises by 1 °C.
1 kg aluminium inside a layer of insulation
heat supplied to aluminium Fig. 6.1 In what form does the aluminium store the energy that has been supplied? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) The same amount of heat is supplied to 1 kg of insulated copper, as shown in Fig. 6.2. 1 kg copper inside a layer of insulation
heat supplied to copper Fig. 6.2 The temperature rise of the 1 kg copper block is greater than the temperature rise of the 1 kg aluminium block in (a). Explain, in terms of thermal capacity, why this is so. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
9 7
For Examiner’s Use
Boy A throws a large stone into a large still pond, as illustrated in Fig. 7.1.
B A
Fig. 7.1 Fig. 7.1 (a) Girl B hears the ‘plop’ sound of the stone entering the water a very short time after she sees the splash, but it is many seconds before the water wave reaches the edge of the pond where she is sitting. Use this information to decide which wave travels fastest and which travels slowest. Write ‘fastest’ in one box and ‘slowest’ in another box. Leave one box empty. sound wave light wave water wave
[2]
(b) In the boxes below, state whether each type of wave is a transverse or a longitudinal wave. sound wave light wave water wave
[3]
(c) In the boxes below, put a tick alongside any of the types of wave that do not need a substance in which to travel. sound wave light wave water wave © UCLES 2004
[1] 0625/02 M/J/04
[Turn over
10 8
A, B, C and D are an aluminium bar, an unmagnetised iron bar and two bar magnets. Tests are performed to find out which bar is which. Each row of Fig. 8.1 shows what happens when two of the bars are placed end to end. A
B
repel
A
C
attract
B
D
no effect
Fig. 8.1 Which bar is which? Complete the lines below. Bar A is ........................................................................ Bar B is ........................................................................ Bar C is ........................................................................ Bar D is ........................................................................
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
[4]
For Examiner’s Use
11 9
Some pond water becomes contaminated by the release of radioactive waste. The radioactivity of a sample of the contaminated water is tested every week for 5 weeks. The results are shown in the table below.
time/weeks activity count/s
0
1
2
3
4
5
800
440
240
130
70
40
(a) Plot these values on Fig. 9.1.
For Examiner’s Use
[3]
activity 800 count/s 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 0 0
1
2
3
4
5
6 time/weeks
Fig. 9.1 (b) Draw the best curve through your points.
[1]
(c) Use your graph to find the half-life of the radioactive material in the sample. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained your answer.
half-life of radioactive material = ………………… weeks [2] (d) If the sample of contaminated water used in the test had been smaller, state how this would have affected, if at all, (i)
the activity readings, .................................................................................................
(ii)
the value of the half-life. ............................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
[Turn over
12 10 (a) One coil of a transformer is connected to a toy train set. The other coil is connected to a 240 V a.c. mains supply, as shown in Fig. 10.1. 240 V
primary coil 4800 turns
secondary coil 200 turns
to train set Fig. 10.1 (i)
How can you tell from Fig. 10.1 that the transformer is a step-down transformer? ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Calculate the voltage at which the toy train operates.
toy train operates at ………………… V [3] (iii)
1.
The voltage of the mains supply is reduced. What happens to the voltage supplied to the train set? Tick one box. increases decreases stays the same
2.
An attempt is made to use the train set in a country where the mains supply is 110 V. Suggest one difference that might be noticed in the way the toy train operates. ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
13
For Examiner’s Use
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows an electromagnetic relay being used to operate an electric motor. pivoted iron armature
power supply for motor
M motor switch contacts relay core Fig. 10.2 Below are sentences that describe stages of the process by which the circuit works. A
The armature pivots and the contacts close.
B
The core of the relay is magnetised.
C
The switch is closed and the current flows through the coil.
D
A current flows through the motor, making it work.
E
The core attracts the top part of the armature.
Put the sentences so that the stages are in the correct order. Put the appropriate letters in the boxes below. One box has been filled in as an example. Stage 1 is sentence
C
Stage 2 is sentence Stage 3 is sentence Stage 4 is sentence Stage 5 is sentence
© UCLES 2004
[3]
0625/02 M/J/04
[Turn over
14 11 (a) The list below contains the names of five different components that might be found in an electric circuit. capacitor
light-dependent resistor
resistor
thermistor
variable resistor
Which of these has (i)
a resistance that falls rapidly when the temperature rises, ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
a resistance that changes when a sliding contact is moved, ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
a high resistance in the dark but a low resistance in daylight? ................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A lamp shines with full brightness when connected to a 12 V battery, as shown in Fig. 11.1.
0.50 A
12 V
lamp Fig. 11.1 (i)
1.
Write down the equation that links resistance with p.d. and current.
2.
The current in the lamp is 0.50 A. Calculate the resistance of the lamp.
resistance of lamp = ………………… [4]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
15 (ii)
For Examiner’s Use
A resistor is now connected in series with the lamp, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
12 V
lamp Fig. 11.2 1.
State what happens to the current in the lamp when the resistor is added. ...........................................................................................................................
2.
Explain your answer. ........................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................
3.
Suggest what change might be seen in the lamp. ........................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
[Turn over
16 12 (a) A man looks at his reflection in a vertical mirror. This is shown from the side in Fig. 12.1. mirror
A
Fig. 12.1 (i)
On Fig. 12.1, accurately mark with a clear dot labelled B where the image of the tip A of the man’s beard will be.
(ii)
On Fig. 12.1, accurately draw a ray from the tip of the man’s beard that reflects from the mirror and goes into his eye. You may use faint construction lines if you wish. Use arrows to show the direction of the ray.
(iii)
The man can see the image, but it cannot be formed on a screen. What name is given to this type of image? ...................................................................................................................................
(iv)
Write down the equation that links the angles of incidence and reflection that the ray makes with the mirror.
[7]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
17 (b) A girl looks into a bathroom mirror to brush her hair. Fig. 12.2 shows what she sees in the mirror.
reflection seen in mirror
Fig. 12.2 (i)
In which hand is she holding the brush? Tick one box. left hand right hand
(ii)
She has a spot on her skin just below her left eye. Mark clearly on Fig. 12.2 where this will appear on the reflection. [2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/02
PHYSICS Paper 2 Theory
October/November 2004 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
For Examiner’s Use If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page. Stick your personal label here, if provided.
This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. SPA (NH/BI) S66584/2 © UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows the top part of a measuring cylinder containing some liquid. cm3 100
90
80
liquid
Fig. 1.1 (a) What is the volume of liquid in the measuring cylinder? volume = .............................cm3 [1] (b) Fig. 1.1 indicates four ways the observer’s eye could look when taking the reading from the measuring cylinder. Put a circle around the eye position that gives the correct reading. [1] (c) In order to fill the measuring cylinder up to the 100 cm3 mark, 80 drops of the liquid are added to the liquid already in the measuring cylinder. Calculate the average volume of one drop.
average volume of a drop = ............................cm3 [4]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
(a) In Fig. 2.1, the sealed drum containing gas has a mercury manometer connected to it in order to indicate the gas pressure.
For Examiner’s Use
air pressure 760 mm of mercury
gas pressure 781 mm of mercury
B A
mercury
Fig. 2.1 For convenience, gas pressure is often expressed in mm of mercury. The gas pressure is 781 mm of mercury and air pressure is 760 mm of mercury. (i)
State the difference in height between levels A and B on the manometer.
difference in height = ………….………..mm (ii)
The temperature of the gas rises. State what happens to 1. the gas pressure, .................................................................................................. 2. the level A, ............................................................................................................ 3. the level B. ........................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The air in part (a) is also pressing on a large window pane in the wall of the room where the drum is situated. (i)
State how the air pressure on the window pane compares with the air pressure on the mercury surface at B in Fig. 2.1. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State how the force exerted by the air on the window pane compares with the force exerted by the air on the mercury surface at B. ................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
[Turn over
4 3
A packaging company purchases corrugated cardboard boxes in which to pack its goods. The boxes are not made up when they are delivered, but are flat, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
0.20 m
0.60 m 0.50 m Fig. 3.1 (a) A bundle of these boxes measures 0.60 m x 0.50 m x 0.20 m and has a mass of 7.2 kg. (i)
Calculate the volume of the bundle of boxes.
volume = .....................................[3] (ii)
Calculate the density of the corrugated cardboard.
density = .....................................[4] (b) Corrugated cardboard is made up of 3 sheets of thick paper stuck together. Fig. 3.2 shows an enlarged view of the edge of a sheet of corrugated cardboard. thick paper
air
Fig. 3.2 (i)
Here is an incomplete sentence about the paper. The density of the paper is ................................... that of the corrugated cardboard. Which of the words below correctly complete the sentence? Tick one box. greater than
(ii)
the same as
less than
Explain your answer to (b) (i). ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
5 4
For Examiner’s Use
Logs of wood are burning in a camp-fire on the ground. A person is sitting nearby.
Fig. 4.1 (a) (i)
State two types of energy that the burning logs possess. 1. ............................................................................................................................... 2. ...............................................................................................................................
(ii)
State the main method of heat transfer by which energy from the fire reaches the person sitting nearby. ................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A spark jumps out of the fire. (i)
State the name of the type of energy that the spark possesses due to its movement. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
The spark lands on the person’s hand. State which method of heat transfer causes the person to feel the spark. ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
The pain caused by the spark makes the person stand up. 1. State the type of energy that has increased, now that he is standing. ................................................................................................................................... 2. State the type of energy stored in his body that enabled him to stand. ................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
[Turn over
6 5
In order to observe Brownian motion, some smoke is mixed with air trapped in a small glass box. The box is strongly illuminated from the side, and the smoke is viewed from above through a microscope. This is illustrated in Fig. 5.1.
Fig. 5.1 (a) Describe what is seen when the microscope is focussed on the smoke particles. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] (b) State what causes the effect described in (a). .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[4] (c) The temperature of the glass box and its contents is increased. Suggest what change is seen through the microscope. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
7 6
(a) Here is a list of solid materials. Put a tick in the box alongside those materials which are good conductors of heat.
For Examiner’s Use
aluminium copper cork gold polystyrene wood [3] (b) State the word we use to describe materials that are poor conductors of heat. ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) From the list of materials given in (a), state which would be suitable to use for (i)
the base of a cooking pot,..........................................................................................
(ii)
the covering on the handle of a kettle. ....................................................................... [2]
(d) Water is a poor conductor of heat. A beaker of water is heated as shown in Fig. 6.1.
water
heat Fig. 6.1 All the water heats up quite quickly. State the process by which heat spreads most rapidly through the water. ......................................................................................................................................[1] (e) State why the heating element is always placed near the bottom of an electric kettle. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
[Turn over
8 7
A girl is walking along a path 1600 m from the rock-face of a quarry (a place where stone is obtained). girl
explosion rock face quarry
1600 m Fig. 7.1 (a) The quarry workers set off an explosion at X to break up some rock. The girl measures the time interval between seeing the flash and hearing the bang. The time is 5.0 s. (i)
Calculate the speed of the sound.
speed of sound = ………….………..m/s [3] (ii)
State what assumption you have made in your working in (i). ...............................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Suppose the explosion had taken place at Y instead of X. State two ways in which the girl’s observations would have been different. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
9 8
For Examiner’s Use
Two light conducting balls A and B are hanging side by side, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
Fig. 8.1 A and B are given a series of different charges, as indicated in the table below. In the third column of the table, write what is seen to happen in each case. Use the words repulsion or attraction or nothing, as appropriate. charge on A
charge on B
positive
positive
negative
negative
positive
negative
zero
positive
negative
zero
what is seen to happen
[5]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
[Turn over
10 9
(a) Two 10 Ω resistors are connected in series in a circuit, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
3.0 A
10 Ω
10 Ω Fig. 9.1
The current at point X is 3.0 A. (i)
State the current at 1. point Y, ....................A 2. point Z. ....................A
(ii)
Calculate the combined resistance of the two 10 Ω resistors.
combined resistance = ………….………..Ω [3]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
11
For Examiner’s Use
(b) The 10 Ω resistors are now arranged in parallel, as shown in Fig. 9.2.
3.0 A
1.5 A
10 Ω
10 Ω Fig. 9.2 (i)
The current at X is adjusted to 3.0 A. The current through one resistor is 1.5 A. 1. What is the current at Y? Tick one box. 0A 1.5 A 3.0 A 4.5 A 2. State the value of the current at Z. ....................A
(ii)
What is the combined resistance of the two 10 Ω resistors? Tick one box. 0Ω 5Ω 10 Ω 20 Ω [3]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
[Turn over
12 10 Atoms contain protons, neutrons and electrons. State which of these three (a) has a negative charge, ..................................................................................................[1] (b) is uncharged,.................................................................................................................[1] (c) has a much smaller mass than the others, ...................................................................[1] (d) is outside the nucleus,...................................................................................................[1] (e) are nucleons,.................................................................................................................[2] (f)
are lost from the nucleus during α-particle emission. ...................................................[2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
13
For Examiner’s Use
11 The ray diagram in Fig. 11.1 shows a lens forming an image II′ of an object OO′.
O′ D O
A
E
I
BC
I′ Fig. 11.1 (a) State (i)
which of the marked points is a principal focus of the lens, .......................................
(ii)
which distance is the focal length of the lens............................................................. [2]
(b) Which of the following words describe the image? Tick all that are correct. real virtual inverted upright enlarged diminished [3] (c) On Fig. 11.1, draw one other ray that goes from O′, the top of the object, to the image. [1]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
[Turn over
14 12 (a) A small pin is fixed to the edge of a bench. A triangular piece of card with a small hole in each corner is hung on the pin from corner A and allowed to settle, as shown in Fig. 12.1. A plumb-line is then hung from the pin and the vertical line AP is marked on the card. A
C
P plumb-line B
Fig. Fig. 12.1 This procedure is then repeated with the card hanging from C and the vertical line CQ is marked. After this, the card is as shown in Fig. 12.2. A
Q
C
P
Fig. 12
B Fig. 12.2 On Fig. 12.2, (i)
draw the vertical line that would be obtained if the card were hung from B,
(ii)
clearly mark the centre of mass of the card using a dot labelled G.
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
[2]
For Examiner’s Use
15 (b) Fig. 12.3a shows a glass ornament standing on a shelf. Fig. 12.3b shows an identical ornament filled with coloured glass beads.
State which ornament is more stable, and why. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) Fig. 12.4 shows two wooden blocks standing on a hinged board with a rough surface.
B A
rough surface
Fig. 12.4 The board is slowly tilted. The blocks do not slip. State which block falls over first, and explain why. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/02
PHYSICS Paper 2
May/June 2005 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
For Examiner’s Use If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page. Stick your personal label here, if provided.
This document consists of 16 printed pages. SPA (MML 8112 3/04) S80361/3 © UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2 1
For Examiner's Use
(a) A measuring cylinder contains 100 cm3 of water. 20 cm3 of the water is poured into a beaker. On Fig. 1.1, mark the level of the water left in the cylinder.
[2]
cm3 100
50
Fig. 1.1 (b) A rule, calibrated in cm, is placed alongside the measuring cylinder, as shown in Fig. 1.2. cm3 15
100
10 50 5
Fig. 1.2 (i) What is the length of the measuring cylinder, from zero up to the 100 cm3 mark? .................................................................................................................................. (ii) The volume of a cylinder is found using the equation volume = cross-sectional area × length. Calculate the cross-sectional area of the measuring cylinder.
cross-sectional area = ................................. [5] © UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
3 2
A boat sails along a river, stopping at various places along the way. Fig. 2.1 shows how the speed of the boat changes during the day, starting at 0900 hrs and reaching its final destination at 2100 hrs.
For Examiner's Use
speed
0 0900
1100
1300
1500
1700 1900 2100 time of day (24 -hour clock)
Fig. 2.1 (a) Calculate how long the whole journey takes.
time taken = ....................... hours [2] (b) State the time of day at which the boat reaches its greatest speed. time of day = ................................. [1] (c) State the longest time for which the boat was stationary at one place. longest time = ....................... hours [1] (d) If the speed axis had values marked on it, state (i) how the graph could be used to find the distance travelled between 0900 hrs and 1130 hrs, .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. (ii) how the average speed for the whole journey could be found. ..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2005
.................................................................................................................................. [3] [Turn over 0625/02/M/J/05
4 3
(a) A light vertical triangular piece of rigid plastic PQR is pivoted at corner P. A horizontal 5 N force acts at Q, as shown in Fig. 3.1. Q 5N P pivot R Fig. 3.1 Describe what, if anything, will happen to the piece of plastic. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) On another occasion, two horizontal 5 N forces act on the piece of plastic, as shown in Fig. 3.2. Q 5N P pivot R
5N
Fig. 3.2 (i)
Describe what, if anything, will happen to the piece of plastic. ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
© UCLES 2005
On Fig. 3.2, mark the force that the pivot exerts on the piece of plastic. Show the direction of the force by means of an arrow and write the magnitude of the force next to the arrow. [4]
0625/02/M/J/05
For Examiner's Use
5 4
For Examiner's Use
Fig. 4.1 represents a hydroelectric system for generating electricity.
reservoir power station
water flows down
water flows out
Fig. 4.1 Answer the following questions, using words from this list. chemical kinetic
electrical light
gravitational nuclear
sound
internal (heat) strain
(a) What sort of energy, possessed by the water in the reservoir, is the main source of energy for this system? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) When the water flows down the pipe, it is moving. What sort of energy does it possess because of this movement? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) The water makes the turbines in the power station rotate. What sort of energy do the turbines possess because of their rotation? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) What sort of energy does the power station generate? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (e) None of the energy transfer processes is perfect. In what form is most of the wasted energy released? .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
[Turn over
6 5
(a) On a hot day, a child drinks all the water in a plastic bottle. She then screws the cap back tightly on the bottle, so that the bottle contains only air. cap screwed on tightly
air
Fig. 5.1 She throws the bottle into a waste basket, where the Sun shines on it. After a while in the Sun’s rays, the air in the bottle is much hotter than before. (i) State what has happened to the pressure of the air in the bottle. .................................................................................................................................. (ii) In terms of the behaviour of the air molecules, explain your answer to (a)(i). .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [5]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
For Examiner's Use
7 (b) Also in the waste basket is a broken glass bottle containing a small quantity of water, as shown in Fig. 5.2.
For Examiner's Use
water Fig. 5.2 As the Sun shines on it, the volume of water slowly decreases. (i) State the name of the process causing this decrease. .................................................................................................................................. (ii) In terms of the effect of the Sun’s rays on the water molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i). .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
[Turn over
8 6
The table below shows the potential difference (p.d.) needed at different times during a day to cause a current of 0.03 A in a particular thermistor. time of day (24-hour clock)
0900
1200
p.d. / V
15.0
9.9
resistance /
500
1500
1800 7.5
210
250
(a) Calculate the two values missing from the table. You may use the space below for your working. Write your answers in the table.
[3] (b) On Fig. 6.1, plot the four resistance values. 600 resistance / 400
200
0 0600
0900
1200
1500
1800
2100
time of day Fig. 6.1 (c)
[2]
(i) Draw a smooth curve through your points. (ii) Why do we draw a smooth curve rather than a series of straight lines joining the points? .................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
For Examiner's Use
9 (d) The thermistor is a circuit component with a resistance that decreases as the temperature increases.
For Examiner's Use
(i) From your graph, estimate the time of day when the temperature was greatest. time of day = ............................. (ii) State the reason for your answer to (d)(i). .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
[Turn over
10 7
For Examiner's Use
Fig. 7.1 shows the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.
radio
visible
Fig. 7.1 Two of the regions have been labelled. (a) In the boxes provided, write the names of the other regions.
[4]
(b) Only one of the following types of wave is not an electromagnetic wave. Tick one box to show which type of wave is not electromagnetic. microwave radar sound
© UCLES 2005
[1]
0625/02/M/J/05
11 8
An inventor is trying to make a device to enable him to see objects behind him. He cuts a square box in half diagonally and sticks two plane mirrors on the inside of the box.
For Examiner's Use
A side view of the arrangement is shown in Fig. 8.1. mirror
box cut in half mirror Fig. 8.1 Fig. 8.2 shows the arrangement, drawn larger.
ray 1 from object ray 2 from object 45°
90°
Fig. 8.2 Fig. 8.2 shows parallel rays from two different points on a distant object behind the man. (a) Carefully continue the two rays until they reach the place where the inventor’s head will be. [3] (b) Look at what has happened to the two rays. What can be said about the image the inventor sees? .................................................................................................................................... [1] © UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
[Turn over
12 9
The speed of sound in air is 332 m/s. A man stands 249 m from a large flat wall, as shown in Fig. 9.1, and claps his hands once.
woman
man
249 m
249 m Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate the interval between the time when the man claps his hands and the time when he hears the echo from the wall.
time interval = ........................... s [3] (b) A woman is standing 249 m further away from the wall than the man. She hears the clap twice, once directly and once after reflection from the wall. How long after the man claps does she hear these two sounds? Tick two boxes. 0.75 s 1.50 s 2.25 s 3.00 s
© UCLES 2005
[2]
0625/02/M/J/05
For Examiner's Use
13 10 (a)
(i) What name do we give to the type of material that allows electrical charges to pass through it?
For Examiner's Use
.................................................................................................................................. (ii) Give an example of such a material. .................................................................................................................................. (iii) What must be done to this type of material in order to make electrical charges pass through it? .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [3] (b)
(i) What name do we give to the type of material that does not allow electrical charges to pass through it? .................................................................................................................................. (ii) Give an example of such a material. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Which of the two types of material in (a)(i) and (b)(i) may be held in the hand and charged by friction (e.g. by rubbing with a soft cloth)? .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
[Turn over
14
For Examiner's Use
11 The circuit in Fig. 11.1 is connected up.
A
2Ω resistance wire Fig. 11.1 (a) How does the current in the resistance wire compare with the current in the 2 resistor? Tick one box. smaller
same
greater
[1]
(b) A voltmeter connected across the resistance wire shows the same reading as a voltmeter connected across the 2 resistor. State the value of the resistance of the resistance wire. ........................................ [1] (c) Calculate the combined resistance of the wire and the resistor.
combined resistance = ........................................ [2] (d) The wire and resistor are disconnected and then reconnected in parallel, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
A
resistance wire
2Ω Fig. 11.2 © UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
15 (i) What is the combined resistance of the wire and resistor in Fig.11.2? Tick one box.
For Examiner's Use
zero 1 2 3 (ii) The ammeter in Fig. 11.1 reads 0.3 A. What is the reading on the ammeter in Fig. 11.2? Tick one box. zero less than 0.3 A 0.3 A more than 0.3 A [2] (e) Walls in buildings sometimes develop cracks. The width of a crack can be monitored by measuring the resistance of a thin wire stretched across the crack and firmly fixed on either side of the crack, as illustrated in Fig. 11.3.
thin wire
fixing pin fixing pin crack
Fig. 11.3 The wall moves and the crack widens slightly. State what happens to (i) the length of the wire, ............................................................................................... (ii) the resistance of the wire. ........................................................................................ [2] © UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
[Turn over
16 12 (a) Complete the following table about the particles in an atom. The first row has been filled in as an example. particle proton
mass
charge
location
1 unit
+1 unit
in the nucleus
For Examiner's Use
neutron electron [6] (b)
(i) Which of the particles in the table make up an -particle? .................................................................................................................................. (ii) On the same scale as indicated by the table, state 1.
the mass of an -particle, .................................................................................
2.
the charge of an -particle. ............................................................................... [3]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/02
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
October/November 2005 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
For Examiner’s Use If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page. Stick your personal label here, if provided.
This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. MML 8113 3/04 S80925/2 © UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2 1
The length of a spring is measured when various loads from 1.0 N to 6.0 N are hanging from it. Fig. 1.1 gives a graph of the results.
25
20 length / cm
15
10
5
0 0
1
2
3
4
5 load / N
6
Fig. 1.1 Use the graph to find (a) the length of the spring with no load attached, length = ......................... cm [1] (b) the length of the spring with 4.5 N attached, length = ......................... cm [1] (c) the extension caused by a 4.5 N load.
extension = ................... cm [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
For Examiner's Use
3 2
For Examiner's Use
Palm trees are growing every 25 m alongside the highway in a holiday resort. 1
2
3
4
IGCSE
Fig. 2.1 The IGCSE school bus drives along the highway. (a) It takes 2 s for the bus to travel between palm tree 1 and palm tree 2. Calculate the average speed of the bus between tree 1 and tree 2.
average speed = .......................... [4] (b) It takes more than 2 s for the bus to travel from tree 2 to tree 3. State what this information indicates about the speed of the bus. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) The speed of the bus continues to do what you have said in (b). State how the time taken to go from tree 3 to tree 4 compares with the time in (b). The time taken to travel from tree 3 to tree 4 is ............................................. the time to travel from tree 2 to tree 3. [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
[Turn over
4 3
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows two examples of footwear being worn by people of equal weight at a Winter Olympics competition.
skate ski
Fig. 3.1 Which footwear creates the greatest pressure below it, and why? Which? ............................................................................................................................. Why? .......................................................................................................................... [2] (b) Drivers of high-sided vehicles, like the one in Fig. 3.2, are sometimes warned not to drive when it is very windy.
Fig. 3.2 Suggest why they receive this warning. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
For Examiner's Use
5 4
For Examiner's Use
A man is delivering a cupboard to a house.
house
step
wheels Fig. 4.1
(a) The man rolls the cupboard at a steady speed from the lorry to the house. The friction force in the wheels is 40 N. State the force with which the man has to push. force = .................... N [1] (b) The cupboard weighs 720 N. State the smallest force needed to lift the cupboard. force = .................... N [1] (c) The step is 0.20 m high. Calculate the work required to lift the cupboard onto the step.
work required = ..................................... [4] (d) The man has to ask his assistant to help him lift the cupboard onto the step. Together, they lift it onto the step in 1.2 s. The men work equally hard. Calculate the power developed by each man.
power developed = ................................ [4]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
[Turn over
6 5
The apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1 is set up in a laboratory during a morning science lesson.
flask
air
clamp
tube
water
Fig. 5.1 Later in the day, the room temperature is higher than in the morning. (a) What change is observed in the apparatus? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) Explain why this change happens. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Suggest one disadvantage of using this apparatus to measure temperature. .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
For Examiner's Use
7 6
Fig. 6.1 shows a reed relay being used to switch on an electric motor when a variable resistor is adjusted.
M
For Examiner's Use
+
power – supply
reed relay
S variable resistor Fig. 6.1
(a) The variable resistor is set at its greatest resistance and then switch S is closed. The reeds in the reed relay do not close when this is done. (i) State two things that happen in the coil of the reed relay. 1. .............................................................................................................................. 2. ........................................................................................................................ [2] (ii) State what happens to the two reeds in the reed relay. ............................................................................................................................ [1] (b) The resistance of the variable resistor is slowly decreased. The reeds in the reed relay close. Fig. 6.2(a) shows how the current in the coil changes with time.
current in coil
Fig. 6.2(a)
0 0
time
current in motor
Fig. 6.2(b)
0 0
time
On Fig. 6.2(b), draw a line that might show how the current in the motor changes with time as the variable resistor is adjusted. [4] © UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
[Turn over
8 7
For Examiner's Use
(a) The filament of a lamp is placed at the principal focus of a lens, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1 On Fig. 7.1, continue the three rays through the lens and out into the air on the right of the lens. [1] (b) The lens in Fig. 7.2 has a focal length of 2.0 cm.
object
1 cm
1 cm Fig. 7.2 On Fig. 7.2, (i) mark and label the positions of the principal focus on the left of the lens and the principal focus on the right of the lens, [1] (ii) carefully draw a ray from the top of the object, parallel to the axis, through the lens and continue it until it reaches the edge of the squared area, [1] (iii) carefully draw a ray from the top of the object, which travels parallel to the axis after it has passed through the lens, [1] (iv) draw and label the image. © UCLES 2005
[2]
0625/02/O/N/05
9 8
(a) Two magnets are laid on a bench. End A of an unidentified rod is held in turn above one end of each magnet, with the results shown in Fig. 8.1.
A S
N
bench
For Examiner's Use
A N
S
south pole lifted off bench
north pole lifted off bench
Fig. 8.1 (i) Suggest what the unidentified rod is made from. ............................................................................................................................ [1] (ii) State what, if anything, happens when the end A is held over one end of 1.
an unmagnetised iron bar, ................................................................................
2.
an uncharged plastic rod. ........................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows four identical plotting compasses placed around a bar magnet where the magnetic field of the surroundings can be ignored. The pointer has only been drawn on one plotting compass.
S
N
Fig. 8.2 On Fig. 8.2, draw the pointers on the other three plotting compasses to indicate the directions of the magnetic field of the bar magnet in those three places. [3]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
[Turn over
10 9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows five circuit symbols and their names. The names are in the wrong order. Draw a straight line from each symbol to its name. One line has been drawn as an example.
cell
V
lamp
ammeter
voltmeter
switch
A
Fig. 9.1 [3] (b) Fig. 9.2 shows a circuit. ammeter 1
switch lamp 2
lamp 1
cell
1.5
V
ammeter 2
Fig. 9.2
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
For Examiner's Use
11 (i) In the space below, draw the circuit using circuit symbols.
[1]
For Examiner's Use
(ii) On your diagram in (b)(i), add a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the cell. [1] (iii) When the switch is pressed so that the contacts join, which of the lamps light up? ............................................................................................................................ [1] (iv) When there is a current in the circuit, ammeter 1 reads 0.5 A. What current does ammeter 2 read? current = .................... A [1] (v) One lamp “blows”, so that its filament breaks. What happens in the circuit? .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
[Turn over
12 10 Some fat purchased from a shop is supplied as the block shown in Fig. 10.1.
10 cm
4 cm
6.5 cm
Fig. 10.1 Use the information in Fig. 10.1 to calculate (a) the volume of the block,
volume = ...................... cm3 [2] (b) the density of the fat. Give your answer to 2 significant figures.
density = ............................. [5]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
For Examiner's Use
13
For Examiner's Use
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a tube for producing cathode rays. The tube contains various parts. B
C D
A Fig. 11.1 A spot is formed on the screen by the cathode rays. (a) What do cathode rays consist of? .............................................................................. [1] (b) Which part, A, B, C or D, must be heated to create the cathode rays? ..................... [1] (c)
(i) Which part, A, B, C or D, is coated with fluorescent material? ........................... [1] (ii) What is the purpose of the fluorescent material? ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(d) A potential difference is applied between the two halves of part C. What effect does this have on the cathode rays? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (e) Explain why there needs to be a vacuum inside the tube. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
[Turn over
14
For Examiner's Use
12 (a) State what is meant by (i) the half-life of a radioactive substance, .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [3] (ii) background radiation. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1] (b) In a certain laboratory, the background radiation level is 25 counts/minute. Fig. 12.1 is a graph of the count-rate measured by a detector placed a short distance from a radioactive source in the laboratory. 80
70 count-rate counts / min 60
50
40
30
20
10
0 0
20
40
60
80
100 time / min
Fig. 12.1 © UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
120
140
15 (i) At zero time, the measured count-rate of the source and background together is 80 counts/minute. Calculate the count-rate due to the source alone.
count-rate due to source = .................. counts/min [2] (ii) After one half-life has elapsed, what is the count-rate 1.
due to the source alone,
count-rate due to source = ................. counts/min 2.
measured by the detector?
count-rate measured by detector = ........................ counts/min [2] (iii) Use the graph to find the half-life of the source. half-life of source = ......................... min [1] (iv) Why does the graph not drop below the 25 counts/minute line? .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1] (v) On Fig. 12.1, sketch the curve that might be obtained for a source with a shorter half-life. [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
For Examiner's Use
16 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/O/N/05
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/02
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
May/June 2006 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use
This document consists of 16 printed pages. MML 10757 3/05 S99216/2 © UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2 1
(a) For a special parade, the guest of honour is to sit on a chair whilst the parade passes by. Unfortunately the ground beneath the chair is soft, so the parade organisers put the chair on a large flat board, as shown in Fig. 1.1. chair board
soft ground
Fig. 1.1 Explain why the board prevents the chair from sinking into the ground. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) At the parade, some air-filled balloons are used as decorations, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2 (i) State what happens to the balloons when the Sun makes them hotter. ............................................................................................................................ [1] (ii) In terms of molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i). .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
For Examiner's Use
3 (c) A pump is used to pump up the balloons in (b). A valve in the pump becomes blocked, as shown in Fig. 1.3.
blocked valve
air
For Examiner's Use
piston
direction of motion of piston Fig. 1.3 (i) The piston of the pump is pushed in. State what happens to the pressure of the air trapped in the pump. ............................................................................................................................ [1] (ii) In terms of molecules, explain your answer to (c)(i). .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[Turn over
4 2
For Examiner's Use
Fig. 2.1 is a full-size diagram of a rectangular block.
D
A
C B Fig. 2.1 (a) Use your rule to measure the lengths of the three sides AB, BC and CD. Write your values below, in cm, to 2 significant figures. length of AB = ......................... cm length of BC = ......................... cm length of CD = ........................ cm [2] (b) Write down the equation you would use to calculate the volume of the block. Do not attempt a calculation.
[1] (c) If you used your values from (a), what would be the unit for the volume of the block? unit of volume = ........................... [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
5 3
For Examiner's Use
Fig. 3.1(a) shows a measuring cylinder, containing some water, on a balance. Fig. 3.1(b) shows the same arrangement with a stone added to the water. measuring cylinder
reading Q
reading P water stone
balance
reading S
reading R (a)
(b) Fig. 3.1
(a) Which two readings should be subtracted to give the volume of the stone? reading ...................... and reading ...................... [1] (b) Which two readings should be subtracted to give the mass of the stone? reading ...................... and reading ...................... [1] (c) In a certain experiment, mass of stone = 57.5 g, volume of stone = 25 cm3. (i) Write down the equation linking density, mass and volume.
[1] (ii) Calculate the density of the stone.
density of stone = ........................ [3] © UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[Turn over
6 4
For Examiner's Use
A piece of fruit is falling from a tree.
Fig. 4.1 (a) The list below contains the names of some different forms of energy. Put a tick in the box alongside four that are possessed by the falling fruit. chemical electrical gravitational (PE) internal (thermal) kinetic (KE) light sound strain
[4]
(b) Which form of energy increases as the fruit falls? ....................................................................
[1]
(c) Which form of energy decreases as the fruit falls? ....................................................................
[1]
(d) Which form of energy is stored in the body of a person as a result of eating the fruit? .................................................................... © UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[1]
7 5
(a) State two changes that usually happen to the molecules of a solid when the solid is heated.
For Examiner's Use
1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ................................................................................................................................ [2] (b) Most substances expand when they are heated. (i) State one example where such expansion is useful. ............................................................................................................................ [1] (ii) State one example where such expansion is a nuisance, and has to be allowed for. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a section through a series of waves on water.
Fig. 6.1 (a) On Fig. 6.1, carefully mark and label (i) the wavelength of the waves,
[2]
(ii) the level of the flat, still water surface after the waves have passed.
[2]
(b) Describe how, using a stopwatch, the frequency of the waves could be found. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[Turn over
8 7
For Examiner's Use
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of blue light shining onto a glass prism. screen air no
air
rm
al
of ray ht lig blue
Fig. 7.1 With the aid of a straight edge, draw a possible path of the ray through the prism and into the air until it reaches the screen. [3] (b) When a ray of white light passes through the prism, it spreads into a spectrum of colours that can be seen on the screen. (i) What is the name of this spreading effect? Tick one box. convergence diffraction dispersion reflection
[1]
(ii) Which colour is deviated least by the prism? ..................................................... [1] (iii) Which colour is deviated most by the prism? ..................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
9 8
For Examiner's Use
(a) State what is meant by the north pole of a magnet. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) The north poles of two magnets are brought close together. What sort of force, if any, is there between the poles? Tick one box. attractive repulsive no force
[1]
(c) Fig. 8.1 shows the north pole of a magnet close to an iron bar.
magnet
N iron bar
Fig. 8.1 (i) The iron bar is attracted to the north pole because of induced magnetism in the iron bar. On Fig. 8.1, mark clearly the induced north pole and the induced south pole of the iron bar. [1] (ii) State what happens to the induced magnetism in the iron bar when the magnet is taken away. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[Turn over
10 9
(a) The table below gives the half-lives of three radioactive substances.
substance
half-life
iodine-128
25 minutes
radon-222
3.8 days
strontium-90
28 years
Samples of each of the three substances have the same activity today. Which sample will have the greatest activity in 1 year’s time? Explain your answer. substance with greatest activity after 1 year .................................................................... explanation ...................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) In 1986, an explosion at the Chernobyl nuclear power station released radioactive substances into the air. One of the radioactive substances released was iodine-131. Some of the iodine-131 found its way into cow’s milk. The activity of a sample of this contaminated milk was measured each week for 4 weeks. The results are shown below. time / days activity ––––––– counts / s
© UCLES 2006
0
7
14
21
28
1000
547
294
162
88
0625/02/M/J/06
For Examiner's Use
11
For Examiner's Use
(i) On Fig. 9.1, plot the values given in the table. 1000
800 activity _______ counts / s 600
400
200
0 0
5
10
15
20
25 time / days
30
Fig. 9.1 (ii) Draw the best-fit curve through your points. (iii) Use your graph to find the half-life of iodine-131, showing clearly on your graph how you obtained your value. half-life of iodine-131 = ....................... days [6]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[Turn over
12
For Examiner's Use
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a type of tube in which cathode rays can be produced. fluorescent screen
anode
filament
A B
C
D Fig. 10.1 (i) A p.d. is connected between two terminals in order to cause thermionic emission. Between which two of the four labelled terminals is the p.d. connected? between point .................. and point .................... [1] (ii) Where does the thermionic emission occur? ............................................................................................................................ [1] (iii) What particles are emitted during thermionic emission? Tick one box.
-particles electrons neutrons protons
[1]
(iv) On Fig. 10.1, draw the path of the cathode rays that are created when all the electrical connections are correctly made. [1] (v) State what is seen when the cathode rays strike the fluorescent screen. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
13 (b) Fig. 10.2 shows the same tube as in Fig. 10.1, with two metal plates alongside the tube. A high p.d. is connected between the plates.
For Examiner's Use
+V
–V Fig. 10.2 On Fig. 10.2, draw the path of the cathode rays.
[3]
(c) The tube in Fig. 10.1 and Fig. 10.2 has a vacuum inside it. State why this vacuum is necessary. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[Turn over
14
For Examiner's Use
11 Fig. 11.1 illustrates part of the journey of a car.
1000 m
500 m start of town
end of town
oil drops on road
1500 m pylon
tree
Fig. 11.1 The car engine is leaking oil. Regularly, every 2.5 s, a drop of oil hits the road. (a) The car is driven at a steady speed of 10 m/s through the town. (i) Calculate the distance on the road between one oil drop and the next oil drop.
distance between oil drops = ................... m [2] (ii) The town is 500 m across. Show that it takes the car 50 s to travel through the town.
[3] (b) At a distance of 1000 m outside the town, the car passes a tree. At a further distance of 1500 m, the car passes a pylon. Between the tree and the pylon the oil drops are all 75 m apart. Calculate the speed of the car between the tree and the pylon.
speed of car = ................ m/s [2]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
15
For Examiner's Use
(c) What has happened to the car between the end of the town and the tree? Tick one box. The car has accelerated. The car has decelerated. The car has travelled at constant speed.
[1]
(d) Each of the three parts of the journey takes 50 s. Calculate the average speed of the car for the whole journey between the beginning of the town and the pylon.
average speed = ................ m/s [5]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[Turn over
16 12 In the boxes of the left column below are some electrical hazards. In the boxes of the right column are means of protecting against those hazards. From each hazard, draw a line to the appropriate protection. One line has been drawn as an example. electrical hazard
means of protection
loose live wire touches metal case of appliance
fuse or circuit-breaker in the circuit
worn insulation on cable to an appliance
use of switches with a nylon pull-cord
steam in a washroom condenses inside a switch
earth wire connected to the metal case of the appliance
wires get hot because current is too high
visual check of cables before connecting appliance [3]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
For Examiner's Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/02
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
October/November 2006 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use
This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. MML 10757 3/05 S99316/2 © UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2 1
A worker on the production line in a factory is making brackets. An inspector times the worker whilst he makes 5 brackets. To start, the stopwatch is set to zero. After 5 brackets have been made, the stopwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.
55
60
5
50
10 50
45
40
60
30
10 20
40
15
20 35
30
25
Fig. 1.1 (a) State the reading on the stopwatch. reading = .......................... s [1] (b) Calculate the time taken to make 1 bracket.
time taken = .......................... s [2] (c) The worker has a target of making 300 brackets per hour. Does the worker meet his target? Tick one box and show the working which led you to your answer.
Does the worker meet his target?
Yes No
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
[4]
For Examiner's Use
3 2
For Examiner's Use
Some IGCSE students were asked to write statements about mass and weight. Their statements are printed below. Put a tick in the box alongside each of the two correct statements. Mass and weight are the same thing. Mass is measured in kilograms. Weight is a type of force. Weight is the acceleration caused by gravity.
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
[2]
[Turn over
4 3
For Examiner's Use
Fig. 3.1 shows the speed/time graph for a journey travelled by a tractor.
speed m/s
Q
6
R
4 2
P O
0
S 0
50
170 time / s
100
200
Fig. 3.1 (a) Use the graph to describe the motion of the tractor during each of the marked sections. OP .................................................................................................................................... PQ .................................................................................................................................... QR ................................................................................................................................... RS .............................................................................................................................. [4] (b) Which two points on the graph show when the tractor is stationary? point ................. and point ................. [1] (c) State the greatest speed reached by the tractor. greatest speed = ................ m/s [1] (d) For how long was the tractor travelling at constant speed? at constant speed for ................... s [1] (e) State how the graph may be used to find the total distance travelled during the 200 s journey. Do not attempt a calculation. .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
5 4
For Examiner's Use
(a) Name the process by which thermal energy is transferred (i) from the Sun to the Earth, ........................................................................................ (ii) through the metal of a cooking pot. .......................................................................... [2] (b) A child is sitting on an oscillating swing, as shown in Fig. 4.1. At the top of the oscillation, the child and swing are momentarily at rest.
Fig. 4.1 (i) Use the names of appropriate types of energy to complete the following word equation. Write on the lines in the boxes.
gravitational potential energy at the top of the oscillation
=
......................... energy at the bottom of the oscillation
+
......................... energy at the bottom of the oscillation
+
energy losses
(ii) The child continues to sit still on the swing. The amplitude of the oscillations slowly decreases. Explain why this happens. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [3] © UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
[Turn over
6 5
For Examiner's Use
(a) State the two factors on which the turning effect of a force depends. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ................................................................................................................................ [2] (b) Forces F1 and F2 are applied vertically downwards at the ends of a beam resting on a pivot P. The beam has weight W. The beam is shown in Fig. 5.1.
F
F1
P
W
F2
Fig. 5.1 (i) Complete the statements about the two requirements for the beam to be in equilibrium. 1. There must be no resultant .................................................. 2. There must be no resultant .................................................. (ii) The beam in Fig. 5.1 is in equilibrium. F is the force exerted on the beam by the pivot P. Complete the following equation about the forces on the beam.
F = .................................................... (iii) Which one of the four forces on the beam does not exert a moment about P? ................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
7 6
A woman stands so that she is 1.0 m from a mirror mounted on a wall, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
For Examiner's Use
mirror
1.0 m Fig. 6.1 (a) On Fig. 6.1, carefully draw (i) a clear dot to show the position of the image of her eye, (ii) the normal to the mirror at the bottom edge of the mirror, (iii) a ray from her toes to the bottom edge of the mirror and then reflected from the mirror. [5] (b) Explain why the woman cannot see the reflection of her toes. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c)
(i) How far is the woman from her image? ............................ m (ii) How far must the woman walk, and in what direction, before the distance between her and her image is 6.0 m?
distance walked = ............................ m direction = ............................................ [4] © UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
[Turn over
8 7
A man is using an axe to chop down a tree, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1 (a) A short time after the axe hits the tree, the man hears a clear echo. He estimates that the echo is heard 3 seconds after the axe hits the tree. (i) Suggest what type of obstacle might have caused such a clear echo. .................................................................................................................................. (ii) The speed of sound in air is 320 m/s. Calculate the distance of the obstacle from the tree.
obstacle distance = ............................ m [4]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
For Examiner's Use
9 (b) A branch from the tree falls into some shallow water in a pond nearby. The branch sets up a wave. The wave moves to the left a distance of 3.0 m before hitting the side of a moored boat and reflecting back again.
For Examiner's Use
water wave B
side of boat
3.0 m A Fig. 7.2
The wave takes 5.0 s to travel from AB to the boat and back to AB. Calculate the speed of the water-wave.
speed of wave = ......................... m/s [2]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
[Turn over
10 8
For Examiner's Use
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows two groups of materials.
GROUP 1
GROUP 2
copper
plastics iron
silk
gold
glass aluminium
ebonite Fig. 8.1
(i) Which group contains metals? ................................................... (ii) Which group contains insulators? ................................................... (iii) Write down the name of one of the eight materials above that may be charged by rubbing it with a suitable dry cloth. ................................................... [3] (b) Two charged metal balls are placed close to a positively-charged metal plate. One is attracted to the plate and one is repelled.
attracted to plate
charged plate repelled by plate
Fig. 8.2 Write a + sign on the ball that is positively charged and a – sign on the one that is negatively charged. [1] (c) State what is meant by an electric field. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] © UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
11 9
The points plotted on the grid shown in Fig. 9.1 were obtained from a spring-stretching experiment.
For Examiner's Use
100 length / mm 80
60
40
20
0 0
1
2
3
4
5
load / N Fig. 9.1 (a) Using a straight edge, draw a straight line through the first 5 points. Extend your line to the edge of the grid. [1] (b) Suggest a reason why the sixth point does not lie on the line you have drawn. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Calculate the extension caused by the 3 N load.
extension = ...................... mm [2] (d) A small object is hung on the unloaded spring, and the length of the spring becomes 62 mm. Use the graph to find the weight of the object. weight of object = ......................... N [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
[Turn over
12 10 A person has a 6 V bell. He hopes to operate the bell from a 240 V a.c. mains supply, with the help of the transformer shown in Fig. 10.1.
240 V a.c. input
primary coil 5000 turns
output
secondary coil 250 turns Fig. 10.1
(a) State how you can tell from Fig. 10.1 that the transformer is a step-down transformer. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) State how the output voltage compares with the input voltage in a step-down transformer. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Calculate the output voltage of the transformer when connected to the 240 V mains supply.
output voltage = .................... V [3] (d) Why would it not be wise for the person to connect the 6 V bell to this output? .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
For Examiner's Use
13
For Examiner's Use
11 The table below contains some information about uranium-238.
proton number Z = 92 nucleon number A = 238 decays by emitting -particle
(a) State how many electrons there are in a neutral atom of uranium-238. ........................................
[1]
(b) State where in the atom the electrons are to be found. ........................................
[1]
(c) State how many neutrons there are in an atom of uranium-238. ........................................
[1]
(d) State where in the atom the neutrons are to be found. ........................................
[1]
(e) State what happens to the number of protons in an atom of uranium-238 when an -particle is emitted. .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
[Turn over
14
For Examiner's Use
12 Fig. 12.1 shows an electric circuit.
ammeter battery
lamp
15 resistor Fig. 12.1 (a) The lamp lights, but the ammeter needle moves the wrong way. What change should be made so that the ammeter works correctly? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) What does an ammeter measure? .............................................................................
[1]
(c) In the space below, draw a circuit diagram of the circuit in Fig. 12.1, using correct circuit symbols.
[2]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
15 (d)
(i) Name the instrument that would be needed to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across the 15 resistor. ............................................................. (ii) Using the correct symbol, add this instrument to your circuit diagram in (c), in a position to measure the p.d. across the 15 resistor. [2]
(e) The potential difference across the 15 resistor is 6 V. Calculate the current in the resistor.
current = .................... A [3] (f)
Without any further calculation, state the value of the current in the lamp. lamp current = .................... A [1]
(g) Another 15 resistor is connected in parallel with the 15 resistor that is already in the circuit. (i) What is the combined resistance of the two 15 resistors in parallel? Tick one box. 30 15 7.5 zero (ii) State what effect, if any, adding this extra resistor has on the current in the lamp. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
For Examiner's Use
16 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/O/N/06
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*8187295232*
0625/02
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
May/June 2007 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. For Examiner’s Use Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Total
This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. SPA (MML 13116 3/06) T25803/4 © UCLES 2007
[Turn over
2 1
The mechanical stop-clock shown in Fig. 1.1 has
and
For Examiner’s Use
a seconds hand, which rotates once every minute a minutes hand, which rotates once every hour.
start 55
reset 60
stop 5 10
50
minutes hand
15
45
seconds hand 20
40 35
30
25
Fig. 1.1 (a) A student uses the clock to time the intervals between trains travelling along the railway past his school. He sets the clock to zero (both hands vertical). As train 1 passes, he starts the clock and leaves it running. After 35 s, train 2 passes. On the blank face of Fig. 1.2, show the positions of the two hands of the clock as train 2 passes. Make sure it is clear which hand is which. [2]
55
60 5 10
50
15
45
20
40 35
30
25
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
3 (b) Train 3 passes the school 4 minutes and 55 s after the clock was started. On the blank face of Fig. 1.3, show the positions of the hands of the clock as train 3 passes. [2]
55
60 5 10
50
15
45
20
40 35
25
30 Fig. 1.3
(c) Calculate the time interval between train 2 and train 3.
time interval = ............... min ............... s [1] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
4 2
In a training session, a racing cyclist’s journey is in three stages. Stage 1
He accelerates uniformly from rest to 12 m/s in 20 s.
Stage 2
He cycles at 12 m/s for a distance of 4800 m.
Stage 3
He decelerates uniformly to rest.
For Examiner’s Use
The whole journey takes 500 s. (a) Calculate the time taken for stage 2.
time = ............... s [2] (b) On the grid of Fig. 2.1, draw a speed/time graph of the cyclist’s ride. 14 12 speed / m/s
10 8 6 4 2 0 0
100
200
300
400
500 time / s
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[3]
5 (c) Show that the total distance travelled by the cyclist is 5400 m.
For Examiner’s Use
[4] (d) Calculate the average speed of the cyclist.
average speed = ............... m/s [2] [Total: 11]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
6 3
A piece of stiff cardboard is stuck to a plank of wood by means of two sticky-tape “hinges”. This is shown in Fig. 3.1. stiff cardboard sticky-tape “hinge” A
B
plank of wood
C
Fig. 3.1 (a) The cardboard is lifted as shown, using a force applied either at A or B or C. (i)
On Fig. 3.1, draw the force in the position where its value will be as small as possible. [2]
(ii)
Explain why the position you have chosen in (a)(i) results in the smallest force. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Initially, the cardboard is flat on the plank of wood. A box of matches is placed on it. The cardboard is then slowly raised at the left hand edge, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
stiff cardboard sticky-tape “hinge” plank of wood
Fig. 3.2 State the condition for the box of matches to fall over. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
7 (c) The box of matches is opened, as shown in Fig. 3.3. The procedure in (b) is repeated.
stiff cardboard sticky-tape “hinge” plank of wood
Fig. 3.3 (i)
Complete the sentence below, using either the words “greater than” or “the same as” or “less than”. In Fig. 3.3, the angle through which the cardboard can be lifted before the box of matches falls is …………………………………………… the angle before the box of matches falls in Fig. 3.2.
(ii)
[1]
Give a reason for your answer to (c)(i). .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
8 4
In Fig. 4.1, a small bird, a large bird and a squirrel are on the ground under a tree.
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 4.1 A loud noise scares the two birds. They both fly up to the top of the tree. (a) (i) (ii)
Which bird does the most work raising itself to the top of the tree? ................... [1] Explain your answer to (a)(i). ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A squirrel has the same weight as the large bird. It climbs the tree, to the same height as the birds. How does the increase in the squirrel’s gravitational potential energy compare with that of each of the two birds? Answer the question by completing the sentences below. Compared with that of the small bird, the increase of the squirrel’s potential energy is ................................................................. . Compared with that of the large bird, the increase of the squirrel’s potential energy is ................................................................. .
[2]
(c) Which creature has the least gravitational potential energy when they are at the top of the tree? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) The small bird flies back down to the ground. What happens to the gravitational potential energy it had at the top of the tree? .................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 7] © UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
9 5
(a) Here is a list of descriptions of molecules in matter. description
For Examiner’s Use
solid
gas
free to move around from place to place can only vibrate about a fixed position closely packed relatively far apart almost no force between molecules strong forces are involved between molecules
In the columns alongside the descriptions, put ticks next to those which apply to the molecules in (i)
a solid,
(ii)
a gas.
[4]
(b) The water in a puddle of rainwater is evaporating. Describe what happens to the molecules when the water evaporates. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
10 6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows how the pressure of the gas sealed in a container varies during a period of time.
pressure
time Fig. 6.1 Which of the following statements could explain this variation of pressure? Tick two statements. The temperature of the gas is increasing. The temperature of the gas is decreasing. The volume of the container is increasing. The volume of the container is decreasing.
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[2]
For Examiner’s Use
11 (b) Fig. 6.2 shows some gas trapped in a cylinder with a movable piston. cylinder
For Examiner’s Use
piston
gas
Fig. 6.2 The temperature of the gas is raised. (i)
State what must happen to the piston, if anything, in order to keep the pressure of the gas constant. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State your reasons for your answer to (b)(i). .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
12 7
An electric soldering iron is used to melt solder, for joining wires in an electric circuit. A soldering iron is shown in Fig. 7.1.
copper tip
metal cylinder with heater coil inside
plastic handle
lead to electricity supply Fig. 7.1 Solder is a metal which melts easily. The heater coil inside the metal cylinder heats the copper tip. (a) (i)
Suggest why the tip is made of copper. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Suggest why the handle is made of plastic. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The heater coil is switched on. When the tip is put in contact with the solder, some of the heat is used to melt the solder. (i)
State the process by which the heat is transferred from the copper tip to the solder. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
By which process or processes is the rest of the heat transferred to the surroundings? Tick the boxes alongside any of the following (you may tick as many as you think are correct). conduction convection evaporation radiation
© UCLES 2007
[2]
0625/02/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
13 (c) A short time after switching on the soldering iron, it reaches a steady temperature, even though the heater coil is constantly generating heat. The soldering iron is rated at 40 W. What is the rate at which heat is being lost from the soldering iron? Tick one box. greater than 40 W equal to 40 W less than 40 W
[1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
14 8
A square wooden block is made to rotate 3000 times per minute. A springy metal strip presses against the block, as shown in Fig. 8.1. A person nearby observes what is happening.
3000 rotations / minute
springy metal strip
Fig. 8.1 (a) Calculate how many times per second the block rotates.
number of rotations per second = ....................... [1] (b) Calculate the frequency of the sound caused by this arrangement.
frequency = ................ Hz [2] (c) State whether or not this sound could be heard by the person nearby, and give a reason for your answer. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
15 9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows two resistors connected to a 6 V battery.
For Examiner’s Use
2Ω 6V
X 10 Ω Y Fig. 9.1
(i)
What name do we use to describe this way of connecting resistors? ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors.
combined resistance = .................. [1] (iii)
Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = ...................... [4] (iv)
Use your answer to (a)(iii) to calculate the potential difference across the 10 resistor.
potential difference = .................. V [2] (v)
State the potential difference between terminals X and Y. .................. V [1]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
16 (b) The circuit in Fig. 9.2 is similar to the circuit in Fig. 9.1, but it uses a resistor AB with a sliding contact.
A sliding contact 6V
X
B
Y
Fig. 9.2 (i)
(ii)
State the potential difference between X and Y when the sliding contact is at 1.
end A of the resistor,
.............. V
2.
end B of the resistor.
.............. V
[2]
The sliding contact of the resistor AB is moved so that the potential difference between X and Y is 5 V. On Fig. 9.2, mark with the letter C the position of the sliding contact.
[1] [Total: 12]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
17 10 Your teacher gives you a length of wire, a sensitive millivoltmeter and a powerful magnet. You are asked to demonstrate the induction of an e.m.f. in the wire. (a) Describe what you would do. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) How would you know that an e.m.f. has been induced? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Name a device which makes use of electromagnetic induction. .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
18 11 Fig. 11.1 shows a bar magnet on a board in a region where the magnetic field of the surroundings is so weak it can be ignored. The letters N and S show the positions of the north and south poles of the magnet. Also on the diagram are marked four dots.
N
S
Fig. 11.1 (a) On Fig. 11.1, carefully draw four magnetic field lines, one passing through each of the four dots. The lines you draw should begin and end either on the magnet or at the edge of the board. [5] (b) On one of your lines, put an arrow to show the direction of the magnetic field.
[1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
19 12 Three particles you have learned about are
For Examiner’s Use
protons, neutrons and electrons. (a) How many of each of these particles (i)
are found in an -particle, number of protons
= ...................
number of neutrons = ................... number of electrons = ................... (ii)
[1]
are found in a -particle? number of protons
= ...................
number of neutrons = ................... number of electrons = ...................
[1]
(b) Sodium-24 can be represented as 24 11Na. How many of each of these particles are there in a neutral atom of 24 11Na? number of protons
= .....................
number of neutrons = ..................... number of electrons = .....................
[3]
(c) A nucleus of sodium-24 decays to become magnesium-24, by the emission of one particle. The equation below describes this change. The symbol yx represents the emitted particle. 24Na 11
24 Mg 12
+ yx
(i)
State the value of x.
....................
[1]
(ii)
State the value of y.
....................
[1]
(iii)
What type of particle is ? ....................
[1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/M/J/07
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*8902325113*
0625/02
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
October/November 2007 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Total
This document consists of 16 printed pages. SP (MML 13331 4/06) T25940/5 © UCLES 2007
[Turn over
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. The metal can next to it has a crosssectional area which is four times that of the measuring cylinder. cm3 100 measuring cylinder
90 80 70 60 metal can
50 40 liquid
30 20 10
Fig. 1.1 (a) State the volume of the liquid. volume = ........................................ cm3 [1] (b) The liquid is poured into the metal can. On Fig. 1.1, draw the surface of the liquid in the can.
[2]
(c) Complete the following sentence. The pressure of the water at the bottom of the can is ……………………………… than the pressure that the water had at the bottom of the measuring cylinder. [1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
A theatre measures 100 m × 80 m × 25 m. The air inside it has a density of 1.3 kg / m3 when it is cool.
For Examiner’s Use
(a) Calculate the volume of the air in the theatre.
volume of air = .......................................... m3 [1] (b) Calculate the mass of the air. State the equation you are using.
mass of air = ................................................ [4] (c) Some time after the doors are opened, the heating in the theatre is switched on. State and explain what happens to the mass of the air in the theatre as it warms up. statement ......................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... explanation ...................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) Suggest why the temperature of the air in the balcony of the theatre (nearer the ceiling) is likely to be greater than that lower down in the theatre. .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
4 3
Fig. 3.1 shows a simple mercury barometer, drawn 1/10 full size.
glass tube
mercury
reservoir
Fig. 3.1 (a) On Fig. 3.1, use your rule to make an appropriate measurement, and then use it to calculate the atmospheric pressure.
atmospheric pressure = ..................................... cm Hg [2] (b) State what occupies the space in the tube above the mercury. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
5 (c) On another occasion, the atmospheric pressure is much less than that shown in Fig. 3.1.
For Examiner’s Use
On Fig. 3.1, mark where the mercury surfaces in the tube and in the reservoir might be. [2] (d) The tube above the mercury gets broken and allows air to move in to and out of the tube. Explain why the barometer no longer functions. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
6 4
A diesel engine is used to drag a boat up a slipway (see Fig. 4.1). diesel engine
slipway s h
Fig. 4.1 The boat finishes in the position shown by the broken outline. (a) On Fig. 4.1, carefully mark (i)
the weight W of the boat, using an arrow labelled W,
[1]
(ii)
the friction force F on the boat, using an arrow labelled F.
[1]
(b) State, in terms of W, F, h and s, how you could calculate (i)
the work done lifting the weight of the boat, .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
the work done against the friction force, .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
the total work done pulling the boat up the slipway. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) What other measurement would you need to make if you wanted to calculate the useful power output of the diesel engine? .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
For Examiner’s Use
7 5
Fig. 5.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
capillary tube –10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 120 130 140 150
liquid Fig. 5.1 (a) The thermometer is used for measuring temperatures in school laboratory experiments. State the units in which the temperatures are measured. .......................................... [1] (b) On Fig. 5.1, mark where the liquid thread will reach when the thermometer is placed in (i)
pure melting ice (label this point ICE),
[1]
(ii)
steam above boiling water (label this point STEAM).
[1]
(c) A liquid-in-glass thermometer makes use of the expansion of a liquid to measure temperature. Other thermometers make use of other properties that vary with temperature. In the table below, write in two properties, other than expansion of a liquid, that can be used to measure temperature.
example
expansion
OF
1.
OF
2.
OF
a liquid
[2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
[Turn over
8 6
A motorcyclist drives along a straight road. Fig. 6.1 gives information about the first 10 s of his ride. start 0m/s
after 10 s 18 m / s
after 5 s 9m/s
Fig. 6.1 (a) From the information on Fig. 6.1, (i)
describe the motion of the motorcyclist by ticking one of the following boxes, constant speed uniform acceleration uniform deceleration [1]
(ii)
estimate the average speed of the motorcyclist during the 10 s,
average speed = ........................................ m / s [1] (iii)
calculate the distance travelled during the 10 s.
distance travelled = ............................................ m [2] (b) State why the distance travelled in the first 5 s is less than half of the distance travelled in the first 10 s of the journey. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
9 7
A girl drops a small stone from a bridge into a pond.
X
Fig. 7.1 (a) The stone hits the water surface at point X. Fig. 7.2, which is drawn full-size, shows the wavefront a fraction of a second after the stone hits the water. (i)
The wave travels at 5 cm / s. Calculate how far the wave travels in 0.3 s.
distance travelled = .......................................... cm [1] (ii)
On Fig. 7.2, draw the position of the wavefront 0.3 s after that already shown.
[2]
X
Fig. 7.2 (b) A ringing bell also sends out waves in all directions. State two ways in which these waves are different from the waves in part (a), other than the fact that one is created in air and the other in water. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ................................................................................................................................ [2] [Total: 5] © UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
10 8
An object OX is placed in front of a converging lens. The lens forms an image IY. Fig. 8.1 shows two rays from the object to the image. X
I O
Y
Fig. 8.1 (a) On Fig. 8.1, (i)
clearly mark and label the principal focus and the focal length of the lens,
[3]
(ii)
draw a third ray from X to Y.
[1]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
For Examiner’s Use
11 (b) The following list contains descriptions that can be applied to images. Tick any which apply to the image shown in Fig. 8.1. real virtual enlarged diminished inverted upright image distance less than object distance image distance more than object distance [4] (c) State two things that happen to the image in Fig. 8.1 when the object is moved further away from the lens. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ................................................................................................................................ [2] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
[Turn over
12 9
A thermistor connected to a variable voltage supply is immersed in a beaker of water. The beaker of water is heated slowly, using a Bunsen burner, as shown in Fig. 9.1. variable voltage supply
A V
thermometer water
Bunsen burner Fig. 9.1 At different temperatures, the voltage is adjusted until the current is 25 mA and the value of the voltage is noted. The results are shown below. temperature / °C voltage / V
15
30
45
60
75
90
18.8
8.8
4.7
2.6
1.5
1.2
(a) On the axes of Fig. 9.2, shown on page 13, plot a graph of voltage against temperature. [4]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
13 25 voltage / V 20
15
10
5
0 0
20
40
60
80
100
temperature / oC Fig. 9.2 (b) From the graph, find the voltage needed to give a current of 25 mA (i)
at 40 °C,
voltage needed = ............................................. V [1]
(ii)
at 80 °C.
voltage needed = ............................................. V [1]
(c) Use your results in (b) to calculate the resistance of the thermistor (i)
at 40 °C,
resistance at 40 °C = ..................................................... (ii)
at 80 °C.
resistance at 80 °C = ..................................................... [5] (d) Use your results in (c) to complete the following sentence about thermistors of the sort used in this experiment. The thermistor in this experiment is a device whose resistance ………………………… as the temperature increases. [1] [Total: 12] © UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
14 10 A coil of insulated wire is connected in series with a battery, a resistor and a switch.
Fig. 10.1 (a) The switch is closed and the current in the coil creates a magnetic field. (i)
On Fig. 10.1, draw the shape of the magnetic field, both inside and outside the coil. [4]
(ii)
A glass bar, an iron bar and a perspex bar are placed in turn inside the coil. Which one makes the field stronger? ................................................................. [1]
(b) Two thin iron rods are placed inside the coil as shown in Fig. 10.2. The switch is then closed.
Fig. 10.2 The iron rods move apart. Suggest why this happens. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] [Total: 8] © UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
15 11 The activity of a sample of radioactive material is determined every 10 minutes for an hour. The results are shown in the table. time / minutes activity
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
461
332
229
162
106
81
51
For Examiner’s Use
count / s
(a) From the figures in the table, estimate the half-life of the radioactive material. half-life = .................................. minutes [1] (b) A second experiment is carried out with another sample of the same material. At the start of the experiment, this sample has twice the number of atoms as the first sample. Suggest what values might be obtained for (i)
the activity at the start of the second experiment, ................................... count / s [1]
(ii)
the half-life of the material in the second experiment. ................................... minutes [1]
(c) Name one type of particle that the material might be emitting in order to cause this activity. .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
[Turn over
16 12 A beam of cathode rays is travelling in a direction perpendicularly out of the page. The beam is surrounded by four metal plates P1, P2, P3 and P4 as shown in Fig. 12.1. On Fig. 12.1, the beam is shown as the dot at the centre. P2 P1
P3 P4
Q Fig. 12.1
(a) Cathode rays are produced by thermionic emission. What is the name of the particles which make up cathode rays? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) A potential difference is applied between P1 and P3, with P1 positive with respect to P3. State what happens to the beam of cathode rays. .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) The potential difference in (b) is removed. Suggest how the beam of cathode rays can now be deflected down the page towards Q. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) Cathode rays are invisible. State one way to detect them. .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
For Examiner’s Use
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*3498617057*
0625/02
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
May/June 2008 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
For Examiner’s Use
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Total
This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. SP (SLM/CGW) T41975/6 © UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2 1
(a) Fig. 1.1 shows a uniform rod.
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 1.1 (i)
Use your rule to find the length of the rod. length = ...........................................cm
(ii)
[1]
On Fig. 1.1, show the position of the centre of mass of the rod using the letter C. [1]
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows another rod, of the same length as the previous one, but this rod is thicker at one end.
Fig. 1.2 Use your judgement to mark with the letter M approximately where the centre of mass of this rod will be. [2] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
3 2
A motorcyclist is travelling along a country road, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
For Examiner’s Use
A
B 1375 m
Fig. 2.1 The statements below describe the motion of the motorcycle from point A to point B. 1. 2. 3.
The motorcycle accelerates uniformly from rest at point A, increasing its speed to 25 m/s in 10 s. It then travels at a constant speed of 25 m/s for 40 s. It then decelerates uniformly to rest at point B, 70 s after leaving point A. 35 30 speed m/s 25 20 15 10 5 0
0
time/s Fig. 2.2
(a) For the motorcycle moving from point A to point B, draw on Fig. 2.2, (i)
a suitable time scale,
[1]
(ii)
the graph of the motion of the motorcycle.
[5]
(b) The distance from A to B is 1375 m. Calculate the average speed of the motorcycle between A and B. Give your answer to the nearest m/s.
© UCLES 2008
average speed = ..........................................m/s [4] [Total: 10] 0625/02/M/J/08 [Turn over
4 3
A beam is pivoted at its centre. Three forces, F1, F2 and F3, act on the beam as shown in Fig. 3.1. b
c a
F1
F2
F3 Fig. 3.1
(a) Which of the forces exert(s) a clockwise moment,
...................
an anticlockwise moment? ...................
[3]
(b) When the beam is released, the right-hand side of the beam starts to go down. Which of the three distances, a, b or c, should be decreased in order to balance the beam? Explain your answer. Which distance? .............................................................................................................. Explanation .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [3] (c) Fig. 3.2 represents a simple beam-balance with the pivot accurately at its centre.
? Fig. 3.2 The person using the beam-balance puts the object to be weighed in the left-hand pan. He has a selection of standard masses to put in the right-hand pan, but he finds he cannot exactly balance the beam. His best attempts are masses used
effect
10 g, 10 g, 5 g, 2 g, 2 g
beam tips down slightly on the left-hand side
20 g, 10 g
beam tips down slightly on the right-hand side
Estimate the mass of the object. mass = ............................................. g [1] [Total: 7] © UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
For Examiner’s Use
5 4
(a) An electrician climbs up to the platform of a special tower, in order to reach a high-level spotlight, as shown in Fig. 4.1. Which form of energy, possessed by the electrician’s body, (i)
is greater at the top of the tower than it was at the bottom, ..................................................... [1]
(ii)
is less at the top of the tower than it was at the bottom? ..................................................... [1]
(b) One of the electrician’s assistants also climbs up to the platform. The assistant weighs less than the electrician. Which of the two people does the most work climbing up to the platform, and why? Which person? ........................................ Why? ....................................................... ................................................................. ................................................................. ............................................................. [1]
Fig. 4.1 (c) The electrician wishes to know what power he develops as he climbs the tower. Which quantities does he need to know in order to do this? .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
6 5
In the atomic model, the atom has a central mass. Much smaller particles orbit this central mass, as shown in Fig. 5.1. central mass
orbiting particles Fig. 5.1 (a) State the name given to the central mass. ...................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) State the name given to the orbiting particles. ...................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) State the names of the particles from which the central mass is made. ........................................................... and .................................................................... [2] (d) The central mass of the helium atom is identical to one of the particles emitted in radioactive decay. Which particle is this? ................................................................................................... [1] (e) State the name of the particles that form cathode rays. ...................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
For Examiner’s Use
7 6
Fig. 6.1 and Fig. 6.2 show two of the rays from the top of an object, passing through a lens.
object
F2
F1
Fig. 6.1
object
F2
F1
Fig. 6.2 (a) On Fig. 6.1, draw the third ray whose path from the top of the object through the lens is known. [1] (b) On Fig. 6.2, (i)
copy the ray shown on Fig. 6.1 and complete the diagram to locate the image formed by the lens, [1]
(ii)
mark and label the image.
[2]
(c) On Fig. 6.2, indicate clearly where you would position a screen on which to see the focused image. [1] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
8 7
(a) The table below describes the conditions of the molecules of a substance in each of the three states of matter, solid, liquid and gas. In the right-hand column, write the state of the substance that is described in the lefthand column. condition of the molecules
state in which the substance exists
The molecules are a great distance apart, moving very rapidly, with negligible interaction. The substance occupies all the space available. The molecules are only able to vibrate rapidly about fixed positions. The substance does not need a container to maintain its shape. The molecules move about amongst each other, with attractive forces between them. The substance does not necessarily fill its container. [2] (b) (i)
What is the state of matter just before a substance boils? .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
Describe what happens to the molecules during boiling. .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii)
State two differences between boiling and evaporating. 1. .............................................................................................................................. 2. .......................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i)
What is the state of matter just before a substance melts? .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
Aluminium melts at 660 °C. At what temperature does it freeze? .............................................................................................................................. [1] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
For Examiner’s Use
9 8
(a) The thermometer in Fig. 8.1 is calibrated at two fixed points, and the space between these is divided into equal divisions. -10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
Fig. 8.1 A thermometer is being calibrated with the Celsius scale. (i)
1.
Write down another name for the lower fixed point.
.............................................................................................................................. [1] 2.
How is this temperature achieved?
.................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii)
3.
What is the temperature of this fixed point?................................................... [1]
1.
Write down another name for the upper fixed point.
.............................................................................................................................. [1] 2.
How is this temperature achieved?
.................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. [2] 3.
What is the temperature of this fixed point?................................................... [2]
(b) A block of copper and a block of aluminium have identical masses. They both start at room temperature and are given equal quantities of heat. When the heating is stopped, the aluminium has a lower temperature than the copper. Fill in the missing words in the sentence below, to explain this temperature difference. The aluminium block has a smaller temperature rise than the copper block because the aluminium block has a larger ................................................ than the copper block.
[1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
10 9
Fuses are often included in circuits.
For Examiner’s Use
(a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a fuse.
[1] (b) When the statements in the boxes below are put in the correct order, they describe how a fuse protects a circuit. A fuse wire heats up
B circuit is broken, so current stops
C fuse wire melts D current becomes too high
On the line below, list the letters of the four boxes in the correct order. ...................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) By mistake, a fuse with too high a rated value is put in the fuse-holder in a circuit. State two possible outcomes of this mistake. 1. ..................................................................................................................................... 2. ................................................................................................................................. [2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
11 10 Fig. 10.1 shows a series circuit.
X
For Examiner’s Use
R1
R2
Y
Fig. 10.1 Resistance R1 = 25 Ω and resistance R2 = 35 Ω. The cell has zero resistance. (a) Calculate the combined resistance of R1 and R2.
resistance = ........................................... Ω
[2]
(b) On Fig. 10.1, use the correct circuit symbol to draw a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference between X and Y. [1] (c) The variable resistor is set to zero resistance. The voltmeter reads 1.5 V. (i)
Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = .................................................. [4] (ii)
State the value of the potential difference across the cell. potential difference = ............................................ V
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
[1]
[Turn over
12 (d) The resistance of the variable resistor is increased. (i)
For Examiner’s Use
What happens to the current in the circuit? Tick one box. increases stays the same decreases
(ii)
[1]
What happens to the voltmeter reading? Tick one box. increases stays the same decreases
(iii)
[1]
State the resistance of the variable resistor when the voltmeter reads 0.75 V. resistance = ............................................Ω
[1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
13 11 (a) An experimenter uses a length of wire ABC in an attempt to demonstrate electromagnetic induction. The wire is connected to a sensitive millivoltmeter G.
B
N S
A
G
C
Fig. 11.1 Using the arrangement in Fig. 11.1, the experimenter finds that she does not obtain the expected deflection on G when she moves the wire ABC down through the magnetic field. (i)
Explain why there is no deflection shown on G. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii)
What change should be made in order to observe a deflection on G? .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Name one device that makes use of electromagnetic induction. ...................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
14 12 (a) The table below shows how the activity of a sample of a radioactive substance changes with time. time/minutes
activity counts/s
0
128
30
58
60
25
90
11
120
5
Use the data in the table to estimate the half-life of the radioactive substance. half-life = .........................................min [2] (b) The half-lives of various substances are given below. radon-220 iodine-128 radon-222 strontium-90 (i)
55 seconds 25 minutes 3.8 days 28 years
If the radioactive substance in (a) is one of these four, which one is it? .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
A sample of each of these substances is obtained. Which sample will have the greatest proportion of decayed nuclei by the end of one year, and why? Which? ..................................................................................................................... Why? ........................................................................................................................ .............................................................................................................................. [2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
For Examiner’s Use
15 BLANK PAGE
0625/02/M/J/08
16 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/M/J/08
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*5545678956*
0625/02
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
October/November 2008 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Total
This document consists of 16 printed pages. SP (NF/CGW) T41976/4 © UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2 1
A boy is fishing in a river. Nearby, a ferry-boat is taking passengers backwards and forwards across the river.
11
12
1
10
11 2
7
6
2 3
9
4
8
1
10 3
9
12
4
8
5
7
Fig. 1.1
6
5
Fig. 1.2
When he starts fishing one morning, the boy’s wristwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.1. When he finishes his morning’s fishing, the wristwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.2. (a) For how many minutes was the boy fishing?
number of minutes = ................................................ [3] (b) It takes the ferry-boat 20 minutes to load up passengers, take them across the river, load up with passengers at the other side, and return, to start all over again. Calculate how many journeys, across the river and back, the ferry made whilst the boy was fishing.
number of journeys = ................................................ [2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
The tank in Fig. 2.1 measures 2.0 m × 1.5 m × 1.0 m. It is full of water.
For Examiner’s Use
water
Fig. 2.1 (a) Calculate the volume of the tank.
volume = ................................................ [3] (b) Water has a density of 1000 kg/m3. Calculate the mass of water in the tank.
mass = ................................................ [3] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[Turn over
4 3
A spring is hung from a beam, and a load is suspended from it. Fig. 3.1 shows the spring before and after suspending the load. before
For Examiner’s Use
after W X
Y
Z load Fig. 3.1 (a) Using the letters on Fig. 3.1, state which distance you would need to measure in order to find the extension of the spring. distance = ................................................ [1] (b) An experimenter measures the extension of the spring with different loads, and obtains the graph shown in Fig. 3.2.
3 extension / cm 2
1
0 0
1
2
3
4 load / N 5
Fig. 3.2 (i)
When the experimenter hangs an unknown load on the spring, the extension of the spring is 1.7 cm. Use Fig. 3.2 to find the weight of the unknown load. weight = ............................................ N [1]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
5 (ii)
State the value of the tension in the spring when this load is hanging from it. tension = ................................................ [2]
(iii)
The load is pulled down further. State what happens to the tension in the spring. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv)
After being pulled down, the load is released. State what happens to the load immediately after it is released. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
6 4
Fig. 4.1 represents the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, with an enlargement of the visible light part of the spectrum. microwaves
infra -red
visible
X-rays
γ -rays
visible M
N
Fig. 4.1 (a) Two of the regions have not been named in Fig. 4.1. In the two boxes below the spectrum, write the names of these regions.
[2]
(b) Write “long wavelength” next to the long wavelength end of the electromagnetic spectrum. [1] (c) State one use for the radiation of each of the following regions. microwaves ...................................................................................................................... infra-red ........................................................................................................................... γ-rays ............................................................................................................................... [3] (d) State the colour you would expect to find (i)
at end M of the visible spectrum, ..............................................................................
(ii)
at end N of the visible spectrum. .............................................................................. [2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
For Examiner’s Use
7 5
(a) Make the following sentences about sound echoes correct by crossing out the incorrect alternatives. An example has been given to help you. large (example) An echo is caused when a sound wave hits a small obstacle. thin
(i)
(ii)
reflected An echo is a sound wave which is refracted by an obstacle. dispersed
[1]
An echo from a stationary obstacle has a greater frequency than the same frequency as a smaller frequency than the sound hitting the obstacle.
[1]
(b) Two students, A and B, are trying to use echoes to enable them to measure the speed of sound. Student A has two blocks of wood that make a loud sound when banged together. Student B has a stopwatch. They stand 240 m from the school wall, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
school wall
B
A
240 m Fig. 5.1
Student A bangs the blocks together and, at the same time, B starts the stopwatch. B stops the stopwatch when he hears the echo. The watch then reads 1.6 s. (i)
How far did the sound travel during the 1.6 s?
(ii)
Calculate the speed of sound.
................................ m [1]
speed of sound = ......................................... m/s [3]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
8 (iii)
The students expected that the value for the speed of sound would be closer to 330 m/s. Suggest two reasons that might explain why the students’ value was different from what was expected. 1. ............................................................................................................................... 2. ......................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 8]
6
Fig. 6.1 shows two mercury barometers standing side by side. The right-hand diagram is incomplete. The space labelled X is a vacuum. X glass tube
mercury
dish
Fig. 6.1 (a) On the left-hand barometer, carefully mark the distance that would have to be measured in order to find the value of the atmospheric pressure. [2] (b) A small quantity of air is introduced into X. (i)
State what happens to the mercury level in the tube. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
In terms of the behaviour of the air molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i). .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) The space above the mercury in the right-hand barometer is a vacuum. On Fig. 6.1, mark the level of the mercury surface in the tube. © UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[1]
For Examiner’s Use
9 (d) The left-hand tube now has air above the mercury; the right-hand tube has a vacuum. Complete the table below, using words chosen from the following list, to indicate the effect of changing the external conditions. rises
falls
stays the same
effect on the level of the mercury in the left-hand tube
change
effect on the level of the mercury in the right-hand tube
atmospheric pressure rises temperature rises [4] [Total: 10] 7
This question requires the use of a ruler or other straight edge. Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light striking a plane mirror.
ray of light mirror A Fig. 7.1 (a) On Fig. 7.1, (i)
draw the normal to the mirror at A,
[1]
(ii)
draw the path of the reflected ray,
[1]
(iii)
mark and label the angle of incidence, i,
[1]
(iv)
mark and label the angle of reflection, r.
[1]
(b) State the equation that links i and r. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) On Fig. 7.1 (i)
draw another mirror which is perpendicular to the one in the diagram and 2 cm to the right of A, [1]
(ii)
draw the path of the ray of light after reflection from this second mirror.
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[1] [Total: 7] [Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
10 8
(a) An iron rod is placed next to a bar magnet, as shown in Fig. 8.1. N
For Examiner’s Use
S iron rod Fig. 8.1
(i)
On Fig. 8.1, mark clearly the north pole and the south pole that are induced in the iron rod. [1]
(ii)
What happens to the magnet and the rod? Tick one box. nothing they attract they repel
[1]
(b) A second bar magnet is now placed next to the iron rod, as shown in Fig. 8.2. N
S
N
S
iron rod Fig. 8.2 (i)
On Fig. 8.2, mark clearly the magnetic poles induced in the iron rod.
(ii)
What happens to the iron rod and the second magnet? Tick one box.
[1]
nothing they attract they repel
[1]
(c) The iron rod is removed, leaving the two magnets, as shown in Fig. 8.3. N
S
N
S
Fig. 8.3 What happens to the two magnets? Tick one box. nothing they attract they repel
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[1]
11 (d) The second magnet is removed and replaced by a charged plastic rod, as shown in Fig. 8.4. N
+
S
– charged plastic rod
Fig. 8.4 What happens to the magnet and the plastic rod? Tick one box. nothing they attract they repel
[1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
12 9
A toymaker wires a circuit in a toy house, so that a 6 V lamp can be switched on using either switch 1 at the bottom of the stairs or switch 2 at the top of the stairs. The circuit is shown in Fig. 9.1. X
Y
6V lamp
switch 2 a b
6 V supply
switch 1 A B
Fig. 9.1 (a) When switch 1 is in position A, what is the position of switch 2 so that the lamp is lit? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) When switch 2 is in position b, what is the position of switch 1 so that the lamp is lit? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) The lamp has a resistance of 4.0 Ω. Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = ................................................ [4]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
For Examiner’s Use
13 (d) The toymaker decides he wants to have two 6 V lamps in the circuit with the 6 V supply. Which of the following means of connecting the lamps between X and Y, shown in Fig. 9.2, is the best? Give two reasons for your answer. X
Y
X
Y
connection 2
connection 1 Fig. 9.2
Which is best? ................................................................................................................. Reason 1 ......................................................................................................................... Reason 2 ................................................................................................................... [3] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
14 10 The circuit in Fig. 10.1 shows an electromagnetic relay being used to switch an electric motor on and off. The relay coil has a much greater resistance than the potential divider. pivoted iron armature 6V
power supply for motor
M motor
switch
relay core
contacts
Fig. 10.1 (a) The relay operates when there is a potential difference of 3 V across the coil. On Fig. 10.1, mark the position of the slider of the potential divider when the relay just operates. [1] (b) Describe how the relay closes the contacts in the motor circuit. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
For Examiner’s Use
15 11 Fig. 11.1 shows a transformer being used to operate a 6 V lamp from a 240 V mains supply. A 6V lamp
240V mains B iron
8000 turns Fig. 11.1
(a) What name is given to the piece of iron that links the two coils? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) For the transformer to operate, must the mains supply be a.c., d.c., or doesn’t it matter? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Using the information on Fig. 11.1, calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
number of turns = ................................................ [3] (d) State why it would not be wise to connect a 1.5 V lamp between A and B. .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
16 12 The nucleus of one of the different nuclides of polonium can be represented by the symbol
For Examiner’s Use
218 84
Po
(a) State the proton number of this nuclide.
........................ [1]
(b) State the nucleon number of this nuclide.
........................ [1]
(c) The nucleus decays according to the following equation. 218 84
Po
214 82
Pb + emitted particle
(i)
State the proton number of the emitted particle.
.......................... [1]
(ii)
State the nucleon number of the emitted particle.
.......................... [1]
(iii)
Name the emitted particle. Tick one box. α-particle β-particle neutron proton
[1] [Total: 5]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*4743961177*
0625/02
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
May/June 2009 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. For Examiner’s Use DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. 1 Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 2 appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). 3 At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Total
This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. SPA SHW 00151 2/08 T76303/3 © UCLES 2009
[Turn over
2 1
A schoolteacher is concerned about the large number of vehicles passing along the busy road next to the school. He decides to make a measurement to find the number of vehicles per minute. Using the school clock he notes the following readings.
11
12
1
10 appearance of clock at beginning of investigation
2
9
3 8
4 7
11
6
12
5
1
10 appearance of clock at end of investigation
2
9
3 8
4 7
6
5
vehicles counted travelling left to right = 472 vehicles counted travelling right to left = 228 (a) Calculate the time for which the schoolteacher was counting vehicles.
counting time = ......................................... min [1] (b) Calculate the total number of vehicles passing the school per minute.
vehicles per minute = ................................................ [3] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
In the left-hand column below are four physical quantities that might be measured in the Physics laboratory. In the right-hand column are eight statements which might be definitions of the quantities in the left-hand column.
For Examiner’s Use
Use a line to join each quantity with its definition. An example has been given to help you. There is only one definition for each quantity. work
force of gravity on a body how big the body is
mass
power of a given force weight ÷ mass
weight
amount of matter in a body force × distance moved
density
mass ÷ volume the acceleration due to gravity [3] [Total: 3]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
4 3
The car in Fig. 3.1 is on a level road.
For Examiner’s Use
500 N frictional forces
2000 N force propelling car forwards
Fig. 3.1 (a) Calculate the magnitude of the resultant force on the car.
resultant force = ............................................. N [1] (b) Tick the box below that describes the motion of the car. travels forward at constant speed travels forward with increasing speed travels forward with decreasing speed travels backward at constant speed travels backward with increasing speed travels backward with decreasing speed remains at rest [1]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
5 (c) The frictional forces increase to 2000 N when the car is moving. What happens to the car?
For Examiner’s Use
.................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) Suggest two things that might have caused the frictional forces in (c) to increase. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ................................................................................................................................ [2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
6 4
Fig. 4.1 shows a manometer, containing mercury, being used to monitor the pressure of a gas supply. mm 300
250
from a gas supply
200
150
100
50
mercury 0
Fig. 4.1 (a) Using the scale on Fig. 4.1, find the vertical difference between the two mercury levels. difference = ......................................... mm [1] (b) What is the value of the excess pressure of the gas supply, measured in millimetres of mercury? excess pressure = ....................... mm of mercury [1] (c) The atmospheric pressure is 750 mm of mercury. Calculate the actual pressure of the gas supply.
actual pressure = ....................... mm of mercury [1] (d) The gas pressure now decreases by 20 mm of mercury. On Fig. 4.1, mark the new positions of the two mercury levels.
[2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
For Examiner’s Use
7 5
Fig. 5.1 shows a typical laboratory thermometer.
°C –10
0
10
20
30
40
50
For Examiner’s Use 60
70
80
90
100
110
Fig. 5.1 (a) Explain why the thermometer has (i)
thin walls on its bulb, .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
thick walls on its stem, .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
a narrow capillary tube along which the liquid expands. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Suggest a liquid which the thermometer might contain. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Such a thermometer is calibrated at the ice point and the steam point. The scale is put on between these two marks. State the values of (i)
the ice point, ......................................
(ii)
the steam point. ................................. [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
8 6
Fig. 6.1 shows the waveform of the note from a bell. A grid is given to help you take measurements.
time
Fig. 6.1 (a) (i)
State what, if anything, is happening to the loudness of the note. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State how you deduced your answer to (a)(i). ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) (i)
State what, if anything, is happening to the frequency of the note. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State how you deduced your answer to (b)(i). ............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
For Examiner’s Use
9 (c) (i)
How many oscillations does it take for the amplitude of the wave to decrease to half its initial value?
For Examiner’s Use
............................................................................................................................ [1] (ii)
The wave has a frequency of 300 Hz. 1.
What is meant by a frequency of 300 Hz ? ........................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................... [1]
2.
How long does 1 cycle of the wave take? ..................................................................................................................... [1]
3.
How long does it take for the amplitude to decrease to half its initial value? ..................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) A student says that the sound waves, which travelled through the air from the bell, were longitudinal waves, and that the air molecules moved repeatedly closer together and then further apart. (i)
Is the student correct in saying that the sound waves are longitudinal? .................
(ii)
Is the student correct about the movement of the air molecules?
(iii)
The student gives light as another example of longitudinal waves. Is this correct?
.................
................. [2] [Total: 11]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
10 7
Two apartment blocks are one each side of a road, as shown in Fig. 7.1. A beam of light from a police helicopter is hitting the top window H of the left-hand apartment block.
beam of light
apartment block
H
Z
G
Y
F
X
E
W
D
V
C
U
B
T
A
S
apartment block
Fig. 7.1 (a) (i)
© UCLES 2009
On Fig. 7.1, 1.
draw the normal at the point where the beam hits window H,
[1]
2.
label the angle of incidence of the beam of light on window H.
[1]
0625/02/M/J/09
For Examiner’s Use
11 (ii)
State the equation that links the angle of incidence with the angle of reflection. ................................................. [1]
(iii)
For Examiner’s Use
Which window does the beam hit next, after reflection from H? ................................................. [1]
(iv)
Which other windows, if any, receive light from the helicopter? ................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows another example of reflection. The drawing is incomplete.
mirror
card
Fig. 7.2 The horizontal card with the letter P on it is being reflected in the vertical mirror. On Fig. 7.2, draw the reflection of the letter P.
[2] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
12 8
(a) Four rods are shown in Fig. 8.1.
plastic rod
For Examiner’s Use
iron rod
wooden rod
brass rod
Fig. 8.1 State which of these could be held in the hand at one end and be (i)
magnetised by stroking it with a magnet, ................................................. [1]
(ii)
charged by stroking it with a dry cloth. ................................................. [1]
(b) Magnets A and B in Fig. 8.2 are repelling each other.
N magnet A
magnet B Fig. 8.2
The north pole has been labelled on magnet A. On Fig. 8.2, label the other three poles.
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[1]
13 (c) Charged rods C and D in Fig. 8.3 are attracting each other.
For Examiner’s Use
+ rod C
rod D Fig. 8.3
On Fig. 8.3, show the charge on rod D.
[1]
(d) Fig. 8.4 shows a plotting compass with its needle pointing north. N
Fig. 8.4 A brass rod is positioned in an east-west direction. A plotting compass is put at each end of the brass rod, as shown in Fig. 8.5. brass rod
N
plotting compass
Fig. 8.5 On Fig. 8.5, mark the position of the pointer on each of the two plotting compasses. [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
14 9
Fig. 9.1 shows a simple circuit.
For Examiner’s Use
6V
reading 50 mA
A R
Fig. 9.1 (a) What is the value of (i)
the e.m.f. of the battery, ................................................. [1]
(ii)
the current in the circuit? ................................................. [1]
(b) Calculate the resistance R of the resistor.
R = ................................................ [3] (c) State how the circuit could be changed to (i)
halve the current in the circuit, ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
reduce the current to zero. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
15 (d) A student wishes to include a switch in the circuit, but mistakenly connects it as shown in Fig. 9.2.
For Examiner’s Use
6V
student’s incorrect connection
A R
Fig. 9.2 (i)
Comment on the size of the current in the circuit if the student closes the switch. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
What effect would this current have on the circuit? .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2] [Total: 11]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
16 10 The apparatus in Fig. 10.1 is called a force-on-conductor balance. When there is an electric current I as shown in XY, there is a force on XY that pulls it down. This force is measured by putting weights in the pan until XY is brought back to its original position. pan current out current in
Y
N
X
I
S
Fig. 10.1 (a) State what would happen if the current direction were from Y to X. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) An experimenter uses the balance to determine the force F on XY for different currents I. His results are given below.
(i)
© UCLES 2009
I/A
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
F/N
0
0.012
0.023
0.035
0.047
On the grid of Fig. 10.2, 1.
mark suitable scales to plot a graph of F / N against I / A for these values,
[2]
2.
plot the points on your grid,
[2]
3.
draw the best straight line through your points.
[1]
0625/02/M/J/09
For Examiner’s Use
17 For Examiner’s Use
F/N
0
I/A
0 Fig. 10.2 (ii)
From your graph, find the force on XY when the current is 1.6 A. force = ............................................. N [1]
(c) Name one common device that uses the effect demonstrated by the force-on-conductor balance. .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
18 11 Fig. 11.1 represents a cathode-ray tube containing a number of different parts. There are empty boxes connected to four of the parts. These boxes are for some of the answers to this question. Not all of the boxes will be used.
heater filament
cathode rays
anode
grid
Fig. 11.1 (a) On Fig. 11.1, write the word CATHODE in the appropriate box.
[1]
(b) One part shown in Fig. 11.1 is used to deflect the cathode rays up and down. Write UP AND DOWN in the appropriate box.
[1]
(c) One part glows when the cathode rays strike it. Write GLOWS in the appropriate box.
[1]
(d) On Fig. 11.1, draw a battery connected so that the cathode is heated. (e) Name the particles that make up cathode rays. (f)
[1]
................................................ [1]
What fills the rest of the space in the cathode-ray tube? Tick one box. air alpha particles hydrogen steam vacuum [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
For Examiner’s Use
19 12 The following table includes some of the properties of alpha, beta and gamma radiations.
For Examiner’s Use
Complete the table by filling in the missing properties. alpha nature
2 protons + 2 neutrons
approximate mass charge ability to penetrate solids
beta
gamma [2]
1 unit positive
[2] [2]
very penetrating
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/M/J/09
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*3735851861*
0625/02
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
October/November 2009 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. DCA (SHW 00151 2/08) 12741/5 © UCLES 2009
[Turn over
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows a measuring cylinder containing some water. A student allows 200 drops of water to fall into the water in the measuring cylinder. Fig. 1.2 shows the measuring cylinder after the addition of the drops. cm3
cm3
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
original level of water
20
final level of water
10
10
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2
(a) State (i)
the original volume of water in the cylinder, ................................................ cm3
(ii)
the final volume of water in the cylinder. ................................................ cm3 [1]
(b) Calculate the volume of water added.
volume added = ......................................... cm3 [1] (c) Calculate the average volume of one of the drops of water.
average volume = ......................................... cm3 [2] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
As a pole vaulter runs towards the jump, his pole is straight. When he is jumping, the pole is bent, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1.
For Examiner’s Use
pole
Fig. 2.1 (a) Which form of energy of the athlete increases as he accelerates towards the jump? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) Which form of energy is stored in the pole because it is bent? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Which form of energy of the athlete increases because he is rising towards the bar? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) Which two quantities need to be known in order to calculate how much work is done lifting the athlete up from the ground to the bar? ............................................................. and .............................................................. [1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Turn over
4 3
Fig. 3.1 shows the distance/time graph for a girl’s bicycle ride and the axes for the corresponding speed/time graph. distance from starting point
0A
B
C
D
time
B
C
D
time
speed
0
A
Fig. 3.1 (a) Look at the distance/time graph that has been drawn for you. (i)
Answer the following questions for the time interval AB. 1.
What is happening to the distance from the starting point? ........................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................... [2]
2.
What can you say about the speed of the bicycle? ..................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
For Examiner’s Use
5 (ii)
On the speed/time axes in the lower part of Fig. 3.1, draw a thick line that could show the speed during AB. [1]
For Examiner’s Use
(b) On the speed/time axes of Fig. 3.1 (i)
draw a thick line that could show the speed during BC,
[1]
(ii)
draw a thick line that could show the speed during CD.
[2]
(c) How far from her starting point is the girl when she has finished her ride?
distance from starting point = ................................................ [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Turn over
6 4
(a) The object illustrated in Fig. 4.1 is not in equilibrium. It has a weight of 12 N.
12 N
15 N
6N
weight = 12 N Fig. 4.1 (i)
State what happens to the object. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
On Fig. 4.1, draw an arrow to show the extra force necessary to bring the object to a state of equilibrium. Label the arrow with the size of the force. [2]
(iii)
On Fig. 4.1, show where the centre of mass of the object is situated, using the letter G. [1]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
For Examiner’s Use
7 (b) Fig. 4.2 shows a car transporter, first unloaded and then loaded with two cars on the upper deck.
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 4.2 (i)
What happens to the centre of mass of the transporter and its load when the cars are loaded? Tick one box. rises stays at the same height falls [1]
(ii)
How do the two loaded cars affect the stability of the transporter? Tick one box. more stable no effect less stable [1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Turn over
8 5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows the cooling curve for a pure substance. The substance is liquid at A.
For Examiner’s Use
temperature A
C B D time Fig. 5.1 (i)
(ii)
Describe what is happening to the substance between 1.
A and B, . ..........................................................................................................
2.
B and C, ...........................................................................................................
3.
C and D. ........................................................................................................... [3]
During which of the sections of the graph is energy being lost from the substance to the surroundings? Put a tick in any of the boxes to indicate where this is happening. between A and B between B and C between C and D [2]
(iii)
What is the state of the substance at D? ................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
9 (b) When the temperature reaches that at D, the substance is then heated steadily until it again reaches the temperature it had at A.
For Examiner’s Use
On the axes of Fig. 5.2, sketch a graph of temperature against time for the heating of the substance. [2] temperature
time Fig. 5.2 [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Turn over
10 6
A bicycle pump has its outlet sealed with a tight rubber bung, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
For Examiner’s Use
handle bung
B
A piston
air Fig. 6.1
(a) The temperature of the air in the pump is kept constant. The handle of the pump is pushed in so that the piston moves from A to B. Tick the correct box in each row of the table below to show how each quantity varies as the piston is moved. greater with piston at A
greater with piston at B
same with piston at A or B
the average speed of the air molecules the frequency with which the air molecules hit the walls and the piston the pressure of the air in the pump [3] (b) When the handle is pushed in even further, the rubber bung pops out of the hole. Which two forces are equal just before the bung pops out? Tick two boxes. friction force between bung and hole resultant due to forces of air on each side of piston resultant due to forces of air on each side of bung gravitational force on bung force of air on walls [2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
11 7
Fig. 7.1 shows an experiment in which an image is being formed on a card by a lens and a plane mirror. lens
For Examiner’s Use
image
r torch p
q
plane mirror
hole cut in card Fig. 7.1
The card and the mirror are shown angled, so that you can see what is happening. In a real experiment they are each roughly perpendicular to the line joining the torch bulb and the centre of the lens. (a) State which of the three marked distances, p, q and r, is the focal length of the lens. ................................................. [1] (b) On Fig. 7.1 clearly mark a principal focus of the lens, using the letter F.
[1]
(c) Tick the boxes alongside two features that describe the image formed on the card. erect inverted real virtual
[2]
(d) What can be said about the size of the image, compared with the size of the object? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (e) In the experiment, the plane mirror is perpendicular to the beam of light. State what, if anything, happens to the image on the card if (i)
the plane mirror is moved slightly to the left, ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
the lens is moved slightly to the left. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Total: 7] [Turn over
12 8
Fig. 8.1 shows a student standing midway between a bell tower and a steep mountainside.
steep mountainside student bell tower and bell
990 m
990 m Fig. 8.1
The bell rings once, but the student hears two rings separated by a short time interval. (a) Explain why the student hears two rings. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) State which of the sounds is loudest, and why. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
For Examiner’s Use
13 (c) Sound in that region travels at 330 m / s. (i)
Calculate the time interval between the bell ringing and the student hearing it for the first time.
For Examiner’s Use
time interval = ............................................. s [2] (ii)
Calculate the time interval between the bell ringing and the student hearing it for the second time.
time interval = ............................................. s [1] (iii)
Calculate the time interval between the two sounds.
time interval = ............................................. s [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Turn over
14 9
(a) The two circuits shown in Fig. 9.1 each contain two resistors and a battery.
For Examiner’s Use
Complete the statement under each circuit.
R1
R3
R2
R4
Resistors R1 and R2 are
Resistors R3 and R4 are
connected in …………………………
connected in …………………………
[1]
Fig. 9.1 (b) A student connects the circuit shown in Fig. 9.2. The resistance of the 12 V battery is so low that it can be ignored.
280 Ω 12 V A
200 Ω
B
Fig. 9.2 (i)
Calculate the total resistance in the circuit.
resistance = ............................................ Ω [2]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
15 (ii)
Calculate the current delivered by the battery.
For Examiner’s Use
current = ................................................ [4] (iii)
Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the 200 Ω resistor.
p.d. = ............................................. V [2] (iv)
Describe how the student could check whether the p.d. across the 200 Ω resistor is the same as you have calculated. Include the name of the instrument he would use for this. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2] [Total: 11]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Turn over
16 10 Fig. 10.1 is a diagram of a transformer.
For Examiner’s Use
30 turns
300 turns
12 V a.c.
V
a.c. voltmeter
Fig. 10.1 (a) (i) (ii)
On Fig. 10.1, clearly label the core of the transformer.
[1]
Name a suitable material from which the core could be made. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
State the purpose of the core. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Calculate the reading on the voltmeter.
voltmeter reading = ............................................. V [3] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
17 11 A woodworker buys an old electric drill that has been used before. The drill is illustrated in Fig. 11.1.
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 11.1 The drill mechanism itself is guaranteed to be electrically safe. Suggest three checks the woodworker could make in order to ensure that the rest of his purchase is electrically safe. 1. ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................. 2. ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................. 3. ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................................................................................... [3] [Total: 3]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Turn over
18 12 A radioactive material, X, has a half-life of 2 minutes. At the beginning of an experiment, a sample of the material produces a count-rate of 800 counts / s. Fig. 12.1 shows the count-rate readings at the start of the experiment and after one half-life has elapsed. 900
800
700
600
500 count-rate counts / s 400
300
200
100
0 0
2
4
6
8
time t / minutes Fig. 12.1
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
10
12
14
For Examiner’s Use
19 (a) Complete the plot of the decay curve, for times up to t = 12 minutes. Draw the best curve through your points. [3] (b) From your graph find (i)
the count-rate from the sample after 9 minutes, count-rate = ................................. counts / s [1]
(ii)
the time it takes for the count-rate to fall from 700 counts / s to 350 counts / s. time = ................................... minutes [1]
(c) A second sample of this radioactive material X gives an initial count-rate of 400 counts / s. What will be the half-life of this sample? half-life = ................................... minutes [1] (d) A river contains fine particles of mud. The mud builds up on the bottom of the river and prevents the movement of large ships. To solve this problem, the authorities remove the mud and dump it at sea. To check where the mud goes after it is dumped, a radioactive material is mixed with it and tracked with radioactivity detectors. (i)
Explain why the radioactive material X is not suitable to trace the movement of the dumped mud. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State two other properties that a radioactive material must have to make it suitable for tracking the mud. 1. ............................................................................................................................... 2. ......................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
For Examiner’s Use
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/O/N/09
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*2425863101*
0625/21
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
May/June 2010 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages. DCA (SHW 00380 1/09) 20403/6 © UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2 1
Imagine that you live beside a busy road. One of your neighbours thinks that many of the vehicles are travelling faster than the speed limit for the road. You decide to check this by measuring the speeds of some of the vehicles. (a) Which two quantities will you need to measure in order to find the speed of a vehicle, and which instruments would you use to measure them? quantity measured
instrument used
[4] (b) State the equation you would use to calculate the speed of the vehicle. If you use symbols, state what your symbols mean.
[1] (c) One lorry travels from your town to another town. The lorry reaches a top speed of 90 km / h, but its average speed between the towns is only 66 km / h. (i)
Why is the average speed less than the top speed? .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
The journey between the towns takes 20 minutes. Calculate the distance between the towns.
distance = .......................................... km [3] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
A helical spring is hung from the edge of a bench top, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
For Examiner’s Use
bench top 0
29.8 cm
0
spring
pin
62.8 cm
metre rule
load = 5.5 N 100
100
Fig. 2.1 Before the load is hung on the spring, the pin points to the 29.8 cm mark on the metre rule. When a load of 5.5 N is hung on the spring, the pin points to 62.8 cm. (a) Calculate the extension of the spring.
extension = .......................................... cm [2] (b) The law relating extension to load is given by the equation load = constant × extension. (i)
Calculate the numerical value of the constant.
constant = ................................................ [2] (ii)
Suggest a suitable unit for the constant. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Turn over
4 3
(a) Fig. 3.1 represents the energy into and out of a machine.
For Examiner’s Use
useful output energy U
input energy I
wasted energy W Fig. 3.1 Write down the equation linking I, U and W. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) An electric motor and a pulley in a warehouse are being used to lift a packing case of goods from the ground up to a higher level. This is shown in Fig. 3.2.
electric motor
pulley cable
chains packing case pallet
ground Fig. 3.2 The packing case of goods, the chains and the pallet together weigh 850 N. (i)
State the value of the tension force in the cable when the load is being lifted at a steady speed. tension force = ............................................. N [1]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
5 (ii)
When the load is just leaving the floor, why is the force larger than your answer to (b)(i)?
For Examiner’s Use
.................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1] (iii)
The warehouse manager wishes to calculate the useful work done when the load is lifted from the ground to the higher level. Which quantity, other than the weight, does he need to measure? ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv)
Which further quantity does the manager need to know, in order to calculate the power required to lift the load? ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) How does the electrical energy supplied to the electric motor compare with the increase in energy of the load? Answer by completing the sentence below. The electrical energy supplied to the motor is ……………………………… the increase in energy of the load.
[1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Turn over
6 4
(a) A musical note is being produced by a loudspeaker connected to a signal generator. A person is listening to the note, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
signal generator amplitude frequency
Fig. 4.1 By adjusting the controls on the signal generator, the amplitude and the frequency of the note from the loudspeaker can each be changed. The person moves to a position further away from the loudspeaker. (i)
State what, if anything, happens to 1.
the pitch of the sound heard, ...........................................................................................................................
2.
the loudness of the sound heard. ..................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
What adjustment, if any, should be made to the two controls so that the sound heard in the new position is the same as in the original position? frequency control ...................................................................................................... amplitude control ................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
7 (b) Fig. 4.2 shows a girl standing some distance from a rock face. She has a bell in her hand.
For Examiner’s Use
rock face
Fig. 4.2 The girl rings the bell once. After a short time the sound of the bell reaches her again. (i)
Why did the sound return to her? ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Why was there a short time delay before the girl heard the second sound? ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Turn over
8 5
Fig. 5.1 shows a child’s toy. It is made out of wood, in the shape of a bird. The toy includes a metal weight stuck to the tail. When placed on a metal rod, the toy balances in equilibrium.
metal rod
metal weight
Fig. 5.1 (a) On Fig. 5.1, mark with the letter X a possible position for the centre of mass of the toy. [1] (b) The metal weight falls off the tail. (i)
On Fig. 5.1, mark with the letter Y a possible new position for the centre of mass. [1]
(ii)
What happens to the toy immediately after the metal weight falls off? .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
9 6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows a beaker in which coffee is served at an airport kiosk.
For Examiner’s Use
section through beaker
layer of corrugated cardboard stuck to a layer of smooth cardboard, with air trapped between them
Fig. 6.1
Fig. 6.2
The beaker itself is made of two layers of cardboard, as shown in section in Fig. 6.2. It has a thin plastic lid. (i)
State two sources of heat loss that are reduced by the lid. 1. ............................................................................................................................... 2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
State two reasons why the layer of corrugated cardboard stops the fingers of the person holding the beaker from becoming uncomfortably hot. 1. ............................................................................................................................... 2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i)
State the meaning of the term thermal capacity. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
Another airport kiosk serves coffee in pottery mugs. The mugs all have the same internal dimensions but some have a high thermal capacity and some have a low thermal capacity. When hot drinks are poured into the mugs, the temperature of the drink always drops because of the thermal energy absorbed by the mug. State which mug, high thermal capacity or low thermal capacity, causes the least fall in temperature of the hot drink, and explain why. mug .......................................................................................................................... explanation ......................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Total: 8] [Turn over
10 7
The electric lamp in Fig. 7.1 has “240 V, 100 W” marked on it. Its filament is a coiled coil of fine tungsten wire, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
Fig. 7.1 (a) (i)
Fig. 7.2
To give out white light, the filament has to reach a very high temperature. Suggest why having the filament as a coiled coil helps to achieve this high temperature. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
If your hand is close to the lamp when it is switched on for a few seconds, you can feel warmth from the lamp but the glass will remain cool. By what method has the thermal energy reached your hand? Tick one box. conduction convection evaporation radiation [1]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
11 (b) (i)
The markings on the lamp give electrical information about the lamp when it is operating normally.
For Examiner’s Use
State the value of 1.
the normal operating potential difference across the lamp, ...........................................................................................................................
2.
the power of the lamp. ..................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
When the lamp is working normally, its resistance is 576 . Calculate the current in the lamp.
current = ................................................ [4] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Turn over
12 8
Fig. 8.1 shows how an image is formed by a converging lens. 24 cm
For Examiner’s Use
10 cm
8cm
I O
F2
F1
Fig. 8.1 (a) State the value of the focal length of the lens. focal length = .......................................... cm [1] (b) The object O is moved a small distance to the left. State two things that happen to the image I. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ................................................................................................................................ [2] (c) Points F1 and F2 are marked on Fig. 8.1. (i)
State the name we give to these two points. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
On Fig. 8.1, draw the ray from the top of the object which passes through F2. Continue your ray until it meets the image.
[4] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
13 9
(a) A warning on the packaging of a light switch purchased from an electrical store reads
SAFETY WARNING
For Examiner’s Use
This push-button switch is not suitable for use in a washroom. Lights in washrooms should be operated by pull-cord switches. (i)
Explain why it might be dangerous to use a push-button switch in a washroom. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
Why is it safe to use a pull-cord switch in a washroom? .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) An electric heater, sold in the electrical store, has a current of 8 A when it is working normally. The cable fitted to the heater has a maximum safe current of 12 A. Which of the following fuses would be most suitable to use in the plug fitted to the cable of the heater? Tick one box. 5A 10 A 13 A 20 A [1] (c) The cable for connecting an electric cooker is much thicker than the cable on a table lamp. (i)
Why do cookers need a much thicker cable? .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
What would happen if a thin cable were used for wiring a cooker to the supply? .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Total: 6] [Turn over
14 10 A transformer has 500 turns in both its primary and its secondary coils. It is connected to a 240 V mains supply. There are 4 possible connections to the secondary, labelled W, X, Y and Z on Fig. 10.1. P
W X Y Z
240 V
primary coil 500 turns
secondary coil 500 turns Fig. 10.1
Between W and X there are 300 turns. Between X and Y there are 175 turns. Between Y and Z there are 25 turns. (a) A person wishes to run a 12 V electric bell, using the transformer. Between which two of the labelled terminals should the bell be connected? Show your working.
bell connected between terminal ............. and terminal ............ [4] (b) State the voltage between terminals W and Z. .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
15 (c) State the name given to the part labelled P and the material from which it is made. name ................................................................................................................................
For Examiner’s Use
material ...................................................................................................................... [2] (d) Why are the coils normally made from copper wire? .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Turn over
16 11 Fig. 11.1 shows apparatus being used to project a visible spectrum onto a screen, using a lamp with a white-hot filament. glass prism glass lens
screen P
A visible spe
ctrum
B Q
filament lamp (white light source) Fig. 11.1 (a) State two things that happen to the white light as it passes through surface PQ of the prism. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ................................................................................................................................ [2] (b) What colour light will be seen at (i)
edge A of the spectrum, ...........................................................................................
(ii)
edge B of the spectrum? .......................................................................................... [2]
(c) A thermometer with a blackened bulb is moved very slowly across the screen. (i)
On Fig. 11.1, mark using a cross (×) the position where the thermometer will show its largest reading. [2]
(ii)
What type of radiation would cause this high reading? ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
17 12 (a) A scientist, who is also an antiques collector, buys an old watch at an antiques market. The figures on the dial of the watch are painted with a type of luminous paint that is radioactive.
For Examiner’s Use
In his laboratory, he puts the watch close to a radiation detector and then places sheets of different materials in the gap between them, as shown in Fig. 12.1. radiation detector
watch
counter
sheet Fig. 12.1 The results of his investigation are given in the following table. material
effect
sheet of paper
no observable change in count rate
1 mm thick sheet of aluminium
a noticeable decrease in the count rate
1 mm thick sheet of lead
considerable decrease in the count rate but still above background
(i)
From this information, deduce the type or types of radiation escaping from the watch. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
The back of the watch is made of steel 1 mm thick. State one reason why there would be a health hazard when wearing this watch. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Turn over
18 (b) Radioactive materials are stored in a cupboard. (i)
Which of the symbols shown in Fig. 12.2 is used on the door of the cupboard to warn of the radiation hazard? Tick one box.
Fig. 12.2 [1] (ii)
State one other safety precaution that should be taken when storing the radioactive substances in the cupboard. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
19 BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*2512877189*
0625/21
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
October/November 2010 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 16 printed pages and 4 blank pages. DC (NF/SW) 24995/3 © UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2 1
(a) (i)
Figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show the dimensions of a rectangular block being measured using a ruler. They are not shown full size. Use the scales shown to find the length and the width of the block, giving your answers in cm.
length of block ................. cm [1]
140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 millimetres 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 millimetres
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Fig. 1.1
width of block ...................... cm [1]
Fig. 1.2 (ii)
When the block was made, it was cut from a piece of metal 2.0 cm thick. Calculate the volume of the block.
volume = ................................................. cm3 [2] © UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
3 (b) Another block has a volume of 20 cm3. Fig. 1.3 shows the reading when the block is placed on a balance. block
40 50 60 70 grams
Fig. 1.3 Find the density of this block.
density = ......................................................... [4] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Turn over
4 2
A boy cycles a distance of 960 m from home to school in 8.0 minutes. (a)
Calculate his average speed for the journey.
average speed = ......................................................... [4] (b) The journey is all along a horizontal road. At the end of the journey the boy is tired because of the work he has done. Against which force has this work been done? ............................................................................................................................................. [1] [Total: 5]
3
(a) Name three different energy resources used to obtain energy directly from water (not steam). 1. ............................................................................................................................................... 2. ............................................................................................................................................... 3. ......................................................................................................................................... [3] (b) Choose one of the energy resources you have named in (a) and write a brief description of how the energy is converted to electrical energy. Which energy resource are you describing? ............................................................................ description ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................. [3] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
5 4
Fig. 4.1 shows four parallel rays of light reaching a thin converging lens. Point F is a principal focus of the lens.
P
F
Fig. 4.1 (a) What name do we give to the distance PF? ....................................................................... [1] (b) On Fig. 4.1, carefully draw the paths of the rays through the lens and into the air as far as the broken line. [2] (c) A flat white screen is placed at F, parallel to the broken line. Describe what is seen on the screen. ................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................. [1] (d) The screen is moved so that it is along the broken line. Describe what is now seen on the screen. ................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................. [1] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Turn over
6 5
Here is a list of different types of radiation. alpha (α),
beta (β),
gamma (γ),
infra-red,
radio,
ultra-violet,
visible,
(a) Underline all those radiations in the list which are not electromagnetic radiations.
X-rays [2]
(b) Which radiation is the most penetrating? ............................................................................ [1] (c) Which radiation has the longest wavelength? ..................................................................... [1] (d) Which radiation consists of particles that are the same as 4He nuclei? ............................. [1] [Total: 5]
6
Fig. 6.1 shows two experiments to investigate energy transfer in water.
water
water
ice
gentle heating ice trapped by small piece of wire gauze
gentle heating Experiment 1 Cold water is gently heated at the bottom. The ice at the top melts before the water boils.
Experiment 2 Cold water is gently heated at the top. The ice trapped at the bottom remains solid, even when the water at the top begins to boil. Fig. 6.1
(a) Name the process by which thermal (heat) energy travels through the glass. ............................................................................................................................................. [1] (b) (i)
Name the principal process in Experiment 1 which takes the energy from the water at the bottom to the ice at the top. ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
7 (ii)
Describe how the process in (b)(i) occurs. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest two reasons why the ice in Experiment 2 does not melt, even when the water at the top begins to boil. 1. ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... 2. ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................. [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Turn over
8 BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
9 7
(a) In Fig. 7.1, a ray of light is shown passing into water from air. The angle of the refracted ray to the normal is 40°. On Fig. 7.1, mark clearly the angle of incidence i.
[1]
ray of light air
40°
water
Fig. 7.1 (b) In Fig. 7.2, a ray of light is shown in water and reaching the surface with the air at an angle of 40° to the normal. air
40°
water
Fig. 7.2 (i)
On Fig. 7.2, draw accurately the path of the ray in the air.
[2]
(ii)
The angle in the water in Fig. 7.2 is increased from 40° to 70°, and the ray no longer emerges into the air. State what happens to the ray at the surface and explain why this happens. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Turn over
10 8
Fig. 8.1 shows a workman hammering a metal post into the ground. Some distance away is a vertical cliff.
cliff workman boy
girl
Fig. 8.1 (a) A boy is standing at the foot of the cliff. The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s. It takes 1.5 s for the sound of the hammer hitting the post to reach the boy. (i)
What does the boy hear after he sees each strike of the hammer on the post? ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Calculate the distance between the post and the boy.
distance = ..................................................... m [3] (b) A girl is also watching the workman. She is standing the same distance behind the post as the boy is in front of it. She hears two separate sounds after each strike of the hammer on the post. (i)
Why does she hear two sounds? ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
11 (ii)
How long after the hammer strike does the girl hear each of these sounds? girl hears first sound after ............... s girl hears second sound after ............... s [2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Turn over
12 9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows the magnetic field pattern around a single bar magnet.
A
B
Fig. 9.1 (i)
On Fig. 9.1, mark the north and south poles of the magnet, using the letters N and S. [2]
(ii)
A small piece of unmagnetised iron is placed at A. What, if anything, happens to it? ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
A small piece of positively charged plastic is placed at B. What, if anything, happens to it? ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows an electromagnet. coil core
Fig. 9.2 (i)
What must be done to magnetise the core? ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Suggest the material from which the core should be made. ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
State one advantage of an electromagnet, compared with a magnet such as that in (a). ..................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
13 10 A cruise ship is anchored in a harbour. The crew holds a party for the guests on board, and the ship’s electrical department decorates the decks with strings of coloured lamps.
Fig. 10.1 Each string of lamps contains thirty 100 V lamps. The strings of lamps are run from a 100 V generator. The resistance of each lamp is 250 Ω. Ignore the resistance of the generator. (a) State whether the lamps on a particular string are connected in series or in parallel. ............................................................................................................................................. [1] (b) Calculate the current in each lamp when it is at normal brightness.
current = ..................................................... A [3] (c) What current does the generator supply to each string of lamps? current = ..................................................... A [1] (d) The generator supplies current to several strings of lamps. State whether the strings are connected to the generator in series or in parallel. ............................................................................................................................................. [1] (e) One of the lamps “blows” and forms an open circuit. What effect, if any, does this have on (i)
the other lamps in the same string, ...................................................................................
(ii)
the lamps in the other strings? .................................................................................... [2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Turn over
14 BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
15 11 The reed switch (reed relay) shown in Fig. 11.1 is a normally-closed one.
Fig. 11.1 When a magnet is held close to the reed switch, the contacts open, as shown in Fig. 11.2. Fig. 11.2 also includes the circuit symbol for a bell.
N
S Fig. 11.2
(a) Complete Fig. 11.2 so that it shows a circuit that will cause the bell to ring when the magnet is taken away. [2] (b) Fig. 11.3 shows a door in a wall. (i)
On Fig 11.3, show where you would fix the reed switch and the magnet of Fig 11.2, so that the bell rings when the door opens. Use the letter S for the switch and the letter M for the magnet. [2]
(ii)
Suggest one application of this arrangement. ............................................ ............................................ ............................................ ...................................... [1]
Fig. 11.3
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Total: 5] [Turn over
16 12 The table below lists the three types of emission which can occur during radioactive decay. (a) Complete the table to indicate whether each of the emissions has mass and whether it has charge. Three answers have been given to help you. mass alpha (α)
charge
YES
beta (β)
YES
gamma (γ)
NO [3]
(b) From which part of the atom do all of these emissions come? ............................................................................................................................................. [1] (c) The values in the table below were obtained during the decay of a radioactive substance.
elapsed time / minutes
(i)
count rate counts / min
0
909
20
689
40
522
60
400
80
300
100
230
120
170
140
125
160
99
On Fig. 12.1, three points have been plotted for you. Plot the remaining points, using dots in circles as shown, and draw the best-fit curve for these points. [3]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
17
1000
900 count rate counts / min 800
time to decrease from 800 counts / min to 200 counts / min
700
= .................................. minutes 600 half-life of substance = .................................. minutes 500
400
300
200
100
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
elapsed time / minutes Fig. 12.1
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Turn over
18 (ii)
From the graph, find the time taken for the count rate to decrease from 800 counts / min to 200 counts / min. Write your answer and any working in the space on the graph. [3]
(iii)
Use your value from (c)(ii) to determine the half-life of the radioactive substance. Write your answer in the space on the graph.
[1]
(d) A different sample of the same radioactive substance as in (c) has an initial count rate of 4000 counts / min. Write down the time taken for the count rate to decrease to 1000 counts / min. ............................................................................................................................................. [1] [Total: 12]
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
19 BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 6 9 9 3 4 3 1 9 7 2 *
0625/21
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
May/June 2011 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. DC (NH/DJ) 28876/6 © UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows a measuring cylinder containing water. Fig. 1.2 shows the same measuring cylinder after stone A has been lowered into it on a fine string.
60.4 cm3
44.2 cm3 water
Fig. 1.1
A
Fig. 1.2
(a) Calculate the volume of stone A.
volume = .......................... cm3 [2] (b) The mass of stone A is measured as 40.5 g. Calculate the density of the rock from which stone A was formed.
density = ................................. [4]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
3 (c) Stone B, from the same rock as stone A, has a larger volume. Stone A is removed from the water and replaced by stone B. The measurements are then repeated. Which of the values in the experiment will be different when using stone B? Tick boxes alongside any of the quantities that will have changed. 60.4 cm3 40.5 g density [2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
4 2
A fixed amount of dry gas is exerting a pressure on its container. (a) In terms of molecules, explain what causes the pressure. ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[3] (b) One of the sketch graphs in Fig. 2.1 shows how the pressure of the gas varies with volume at constant temperature, and the other shows how the pressure varies with temperature at constant volume. The pressure axis has been labelled in each case. pressure / Pa
pressure / Pa
0
0
Fig. 2.1 (i)
On the appropriate graphs, label one horizontal axis “ volume / m3 ” and the other horizontal axis “ temperature / °C ”.
(ii)
On one of the graphs, mark, with the letter X, the pressure of the gas at the ice point. [2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
5 3
Electricity can be generated from either renewable or non-renewable energy sources. (a) Describe the difference between a renewable energy source and a non-renewable energy source. ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (b) (i)
Name one renewable energy source. ...........................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest one reason why your choice in (b)(i) is not, so far, widely used for generating electricity. ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) (i)
Name one non-renewable energy source. ...........................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest one reason why non-renewable sources have been widely used for generating electricity up until the present time. ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
6 4
The main parts of a cold store are shown in Fig. 4.1. cooling tubes
cold store
refrigeration unit
Fig. 4.1 (a) Explain why the cooling tubes are positioned at the top of the store. ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (b) Suggest why the refrigeration unit is outside the cold store. ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[2] (c) The walls are made of thick thermally-insulating material. Why is it important to have the walls made like this? ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
7 (d) Even when the refrigeration unit is running continuously, there comes a time when the temperature in the store stops falling, and remains constant. Explain why this happens. ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[2] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
8 5
(a) The four words below can each be used to describe waves. Put a tick in each of the boxes alongside any words that can be applied to sound waves. longitudinal transverse electromagnetic mechanical [2] (b) How does an echo occur? ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (c) Fig. 5.1 shows a boat steaming along a river. The river is in a wide gorge and there are high cliffs on each side.
cliff A
cliff B
Fig. 5.1 The boat sounds its hooter once. Two clear echoes are heard by a person on the boat. The first echo is 1.5 s after the hooter sounds. The second echo is 2.5 s after the hooter sounds. (i)
Which cliff caused the first echo? ...................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Sound travels at 330 m / s in air. Calculate the distance between the two cliffs.
distance = ....................................................... m [3] © UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
9 (iii)
Further along the river, the cliffs are the same distance apart but the river is midway between the cliffs. The boat sounds its hooter again. Without further calculation, describe what is now heard and approximately when it is heard. what is heard ..................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... when .................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................................................................................[2] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
10 6
A laser is a device that gives a narrow parallel beam of monochromatic (single-colour) light. Fig. 6.1 shows the light from a laser shining on a triangular glass prism.
screen prism
light from laser
Fig. 6.1 (a) On Fig. 6.1, complete the path of the light until it reaches the screen.
[2]
(b) What will be seen on the screen? ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (c) The beam of light from the laser is replaced by a beam of white light from a lamp. State what is now seen on the screen. ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
11 7
(a) Two light, identical spheres, A and B, are suspended alongside each other on thin nylon threads, as shown in Fig. 7.1. nylon threads
A
B
Fig. 7.1 A is given a positive charge and B is given a negative charge. On Fig. 7.1, draw how the threads and spheres might look after the spheres have been charged. [1] (b) A cleaner is attempting to remove dust from some plastic-covered furniture, using a dry cloth. Unfortunately, this seems to make the dust cling more firmly to the plastic covering. (i)
Suggest why this happens. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii)
Suggest why this would be less likely to happen if the cleaner used a cloth which was very slightly damp. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
12 8
Fig. 8.1 shows two resistors forming part of a circuit. 3Ω A
B
C
D
7Ω
4.2 V Fig. 8.1 (a) (i)
Complete the following sentence about the two resistors connected between A and D. The two resistors are connected in ..................................................... .
(ii)
[1]
The potential difference between A and D is 4.2 V. State the value of the potential difference between B and C. potential difference = ........................................................V [1]
(iii)
Calculate the current in the 3 Ω resistor.
current = ............................................................[4] (iv)
State how the current in AB compares with 1. the current in each of the two resistors, ........................................................................................................................................... 2. the current in CD. .......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
13 (b) In the boxes below, draw two circuit diagrams, each containing a battery and three identical resistors. Arrange each circuit so that all the resistors in the circuit carry the same current. Draw one circuit in each box.
[2] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
14 9
(a) A car headlamp circuit consists of a 12 V battery, a switch, two 12 V headlamps and a 12 V indicator lamp (inside the car). Fig. 9.1 shows the symbols of these components. left headlamp right headlamp
indicator lamp (inside car)
12 V battery
switch Fig. 9.1
Complete Fig. 9.1 to show the wiring necessary so that all three lamps light up at full brightness when the switch is closed. [2] (b) (i)
Explain briefly, in terms of molecules, why solids expand when heated. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
15 (ii)
Brass expands when heated. Invar is a metal that expands very little when heated. The flasher lamp shown in Fig. 9.2 is used as a warning lamp in a car. lamp filament
contact
brass strip
invar strip
Fig. 9.2 The flasher lamp is designed to flash on and off repeatedly. It contains a bimetallic strip made of a brass strip and an invar strip joined together along their lengths. 1. State what happens to the bimetallic strip when it is heated. .......................................................................................................................................[2] 2. Explain why the lamp flashes on and off repeatedly when it is connected to an appropriate battery. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[4] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
16 10 A rotating-coil generator consists of a rectangular coil of wire that rotates at constant speed between the poles of a permanent magnet. Figs. 10.1, 10.2 and 10.3 show views from one end of the coil, when the coil is in different positions.
N
S
Fig. 10.1
N
S
Fig. 10.2
N
S
Fig. 10.3
(a) Which diagram shows the coil in the position where (i)
the induced e.m.f. in the coil is at its maximum, .................................................
(ii)
the induced e.m.f. in the coil is zero? ..................................................................
[2]
(b) On Fig. 10.4, sketch the graph of e.m.f. against time, for two complete rotations of the coil. + e.m.f.
0 time
– Fig. 10.4 [4] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
17 11 Fig. 11.1 shows a cathode-ray tube connected to external voltage supplies and switches. The terminals labelled H.T. are connected to a high voltage source.
S1
–
+ H.T.
horizontal metal plates screen
V1 D
C S2 cathode anode
S3 V2
Fig. 11.1 (a) When the cathode becomes hot it releases electrons. What name is used to describe the release of electrons by heating? ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (b) (i)
Which switch should be closed to make the cathode become hot? switch = ...............................................................
(ii)
Which switch should then be closed to obtain a beam of electrons along CD? switch = ...............................................................
(iii)
Which switch should then be closed to deflect the beam of electrons downwards? switch = ...........................................................[2]
(c) What must be done in order to deflect the beam of electrons upwards, instead of downwards? ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
18 12 (a) Complete the following definition of radioactive half-life. The half-life of a radioactive substance is the time taken for ..................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[2] (b) Fig. 12.1 shows how the count rate from a sample of radioactive material changes with time.
30 count rate counts / s 25
20
15
10
5
0 0
20
40
60
80 time / s
Fig. 12.1
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
100
19 (i)
Use Fig. 12.1 to find the half-life of the radioactive material.
half-life = ....................................................... s [1] (ii)
Use the graph to find how long it takes for the count rate to decrease from 30 counts / s to 10 counts / s.
time taken = ....................................................... s [1] (iii)
Use your answers to (i) and (ii) to find how long it takes for the count rate to decrease from 30 counts / s to 5 counts / s.
time taken = ....................................................... s [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 1 2 6 4 5 3 7 1 3 4 *
0625/21
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
October/November 2011 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. DC (CW/CGW) 34004/4 © UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of a moving object. speed m/s 5
0 0
C
B
A 10
20
time / s
D 35
Fig. 1.1 (a) Which part, or parts, of Fig. 1.1 indicate when the object is (i)
travelling at uniform speed, ...........................................................................................[1]
(ii)
accelerating? .................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate the distance travelled in the last 15 s.
distance = ...................................................... m [3] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
3 2
Two girls attempt to measure the speed of the water in a river, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
bridge 1
50 m bridge 2 Fig. 2.1 (a) The distance between the two bridges is measured as 50 m. Suggest an appropriate instrument that they might use to measure this distance. ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (b) The girl on bridge 1 drops a piece of wood into the water. The girl on bridge 2 measures how long it takes for the piece of wood to reach bridge 2. It takes 400 s to travel between the two bridges. (i)
Name an appropriate instrument that could be used to measure this time. .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Describe the procedure for measuring this time. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[3]
(iii)
Calculate the speed of the water.
speed = ...........................................................[4] [Total: 9] © UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
[Turn over
4 3
(a) In a laboratory experiment to find the centre of mass of a triangular piece of card, the card is suspended first from point A and then from point B, as shown in Figs. 3.1 and 3.2. A
B
B
A
E
D
D
E
C
C Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2
When suspended from A, point D is found to be vertically below A. When suspended from B, point E is vertically below B. (i)
What piece of apparatus might be used to determine the vertical lines through A and B? .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
On Fig. 3.3 below, draw construction lines to find the position of the centre of mass of the triangular card. Label this point clearly with the letter G.
A E
B
D
C [3]
Fig. 3.3
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
5 (b) Fig. 3.4 illustrates a toy that always returns to the upright position, whatever position it is put in to start with.
Fig. 3.4 On one of the three positions of the toy shown in Fig. 4.3, clearly mark X at a possible position for the centre of mass of the toy. [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
[Turn over
6 4
In Fig. 4.1, the smoke cell consists of an illuminated glass box into which some smoke has been injected.
microscope
smoke cell
light
Fig. 4.1 (a) Describe briefly what is seen when the contents of the smoke cell are viewed through the focused microscope. ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[3] (b) State the name we normally give to what is seen. ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (c) What deductions about the properties and behaviour of air molecules can be made from these observations? ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[3] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
7 5
A card is held against a rotating toothed wheel, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
card
Fig. 5.1 The wheel has 150 teeth and rotates 3 times per second. (a) Calculate the frequency of the sound produced.
frequency = .................................................... Hz [2] (b) State the approximate range of frequencies that can be heard by a healthy human ear. lowest frequency = ........................... Hz highest frequency = ........................... Hz [1] (c) The speed of rotation of the wheel is increased. What happens, if anything, to the pitch of the sound that is heard? ...............................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
[Turn over
8 6
The list below contains the names of the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, but they are in the wrong order and an extra, non-electromagnetic type of wave motion has been included. infra-red radiation X-rays gamma rays visible light radio waves ultrasound waves ultra-violet radiation (a) Which one of these is not electromagnetic? ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (b) (i)
In the boxes below, list the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum in order of wavelength. The first and last boxes have been filled in for you. radio waves
gamma rays [2] (ii)
Which of these has the longest wavelength? .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii)
Which of these produces a significant heating effect? .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv)
Which of these may be used to obtain a picture of a broken bone inside the body? .......................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
9 7
The pivoted steel arrow from a small compass has become demagnetised. The coil shown in Fig. 7.1 is to be used to magnetise it again.
coil steel arrow
Fig. 7.1 (a) Describe carefully (i)
how the coil is used to magnetise the steel arrow, ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii)
how the polarity of the magnetised needle may be checked. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, draw the magnetic field pattern of the magnetised needle.
[2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
[Turn over
10 8
A student learning about electric circuits connects up the circuit shown in Fig. 8.1. battery
ammeter 01 23
AMP S
4
5
coil of wire variable resistor (rheostat) Fig. 8.1 (a) The student has already made one mistake with his connections. What is his mistake? ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (b) In the space below, draw the circuit diagram of the arrangement shown in Fig. 8.1, using standard symbols. [2]
(c) The student now connects a voltmeter to the circuit, so that readings can be taken to find the resistance of the coil of wire. On your circuit diagram, draw the voltmeter, connected to measure the potential difference across the coil. [1]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
11 (d) Having obtained a correctly-working circuit, the readings on the two meters for one setting of the variable resistor are as shown in Figs. 8.2 and 8.3.
1
2
3
4
0
5 5
10
0
AMPS
15 VOLTS
Fig. 8.2 (i)
Fig. 8.3
Record these two readings. ammeter reading = ...................................................... A voltmeter reading = ....................................................... V [1]
(ii)
The slider on the variable resistor (see Fig. 8.1) is moved a small distance to the left, reducing its resistance. State what happens to the readings on the two meters. ammeter reading ............................................................................................................... voltmeter reading ...........................................................................................................[2]
(iii)
The slider is adjusted so that the total resistance in the circuit is double that which gave the readings in Figs. 8.2 and 8.3. Calculate the new values of the readings on the meters.
ammeter reading = ...................................................... A voltmeter reading = ....................................................... V [2] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
[Turn over
12 9
(a) The circuit symbol shown in Fig. 9.1 represents a device often used in electrical equipment.
Fig. 9.1 State the name of this device. ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (b) Fig. 9.2 shows, in simplified form, the essential parts of a grid system for distributing electrical energy from a power station to domestic consumers. The device in part (a) is used both at X and at Y. 132 000 V
power station
22 000 V X
transmission cables and pylons
240 V Y
domestic consumer
Fig. 9.2 (i)
Using information from Fig. 9.2, deduce the ratio secondary turns necessary at X and primary turns at Y.
turns ratio at X = ............................................................... turns ratio at Y = ...........................................................[3] (ii)
State two reasons why power transmission is cheaper if the voltage across the cables is very high. 1. ........................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................... 2. ........................................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................[2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
13 10 (a) Complete the following statement about an electric field. An electric field is a region in which ........................................................ experiences a .......................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows two identical light uncharged balls suspended on thin nylon threads.
nylon thread
ball A
B Fig. 10.1
Ball A is given a positive charge and ball B is given a negative charge. In the space below, draw a diagram showing the positions that the balls and threads will take, now that the balls are charged.
[2] (c) On ball B in your diagram, use labelled arrows to show the directions of (i)
the electrostatic force on the ball (label it E),
(ii)
the weight of the ball (label it W),
(iii)
the tension force of the thread on the ball (label it T).
[2]
(d) Ball B is in equilibrium. State the value of the resultant of forces E, W and T. resultant = ...........................................................[1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
[Turn over
14 11 Fig. 11.1 shows a tube that can be used to produce cathode rays. Metal plates above and below the tube have zero potential difference between them.
Fig. 11.1 (a) On Fig. 11.1, clearly label (i)
the filament cathode (label it C),
(ii)
the anode (label it A).
[2]
(b) On Fig. 11.1, draw (i)
a battery (label it B), connected to cause thermionic emission of electrons,
(ii)
a 1000 V power supply (label it P), connected to cause a beam of cathode rays along the tube,
(iii)
the path of the beam of cathode rays along the tube. [3]
(c) What is seen when the beam of cathode rays hits the screen? ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (d) A high potential difference is now connected between the two metal plates, so that the lower plate is positive and the upper plate is negative. What change is seen on the screen? ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
15 12 The count-rate from a sample of radioactive material is investigated by a team of scientists in a laboratory. (a) With the radioactive sample in place, the count-rate from the sample is determined every 7 days, with the results shown below. The background count-rate has already been subtracted. time / days
0
7
14
21
28
count-rate counts / s
1000
550
300
160
90
On Fig. 12.1, plot a graph of count-rate from the sample against time.
[3]
1000
800
600 count-rate counts / s 400
200
0 0
5
10
15
20
25 time / days
30
Fig. 12.1 (b) (i)
(ii)
From your graph, find the time at which the count-rate is 1.
800 counts / s,
.................................................. days
2.
200 counts / s.
.................................................. days [2]
From the figures in (b)(i), find the value of the half-life of the substance.
half-life = ................................................. days [3] [Total: 8] © UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
16 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 4 8 0 8 1 1 0 5 3 7 *
0625/21
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
May/June 2012 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
For Examiner’s Use
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Total
This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. DC (NF/JG) 43201/2 © UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2 1
A car is travelling along a level road at a steady speed. Fig. 1.1 shows the speedometer in the car. A speedometer registers how fast the car is going.
60
80
40
100
20
120 km / hour
0
140
Fig. 1.1 (a) How far, in km, does the car travel in ½ hour at the speed shown in Fig. 1.1?
distance = .......................................... km [3]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) (i)
On the axes shown in Fig. 1.2, draw a line representing the motion of the car for the ½ hour mentioned in (a). Do not go beyond ½ hour. [3]
For Examiner’s Use
100 speed km / hour 80
60
40
20
0 0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
time / hours Fig. 1.2 (ii)
At the end of the ½ hour, the car reaches a region where the road begins to rise up into some mountains. The car climbs the mountains for a further ½ hour. During the climb, its speed steadily decreases to 30 km / hour. The driver then stops the car so that he can admire the view. On Fig. 1.2, draw a line representing the climb and the stopping of the car.
[4]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
4 2
A student carries out an experiment to find the density of water, using a method that is slightly different from normal. In his method, he starts with a measuring cylinder containing some water, and then adds more water to that already in the measuring cylinder. His experiment is illustrated in Fig. 2.1. measuring cylinder
reading 2
reading 1 water
balance
reading 4
reading 3 Fig. 2.1 The readings he obtains are as follows: reading 1
53 cm3
reading 2
84 cm3
reading 3
205 g
reading 4
238 g
Calculate (a) the volume of the added water,
volume = ......................................... cm3 [2] (b) the mass of the added water,
mass = ............................................. g [2]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
5 (c) the density of water, stating clearly the equation you are using.
For Examiner’s Use
density = ................................................. [4] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
6 3
A train is passing through a station at constant speed, as shown in Fig. 3.1. The track is horizontal.
Fig. 3.1 The engine produces a forward thrust of 70 000 N. There is a 25 000 N force opposing the motion, due to friction in the wheels. (a) Mark these forces on Fig. 3.1, using an arrow labelled 70 000 N and an arrow labelled 25 000 N. [2] (b) The train is travelling at constant speed, so there must be another horizontal force acting on it. (i)
State the direction of this force. ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Calculate the size of this force.
size of force = ................................................... N (iii)
Suggest what might be causing this force. .................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Once the train has passed the station, the driver increases the engine’s forward thrust. All other forces stay the same. (i)
What happens to the train? ......................................................................................
(ii)
Why does this happen? ............................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [2] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
7 4
(a) Explain, in terms of molecules, how a gas causes a pressure on the walls of its container. ..........................................................................................................................................
For Examiner’s Use
.......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [4] (b) Complete the following two sentences. (i)
At constant temperature, the pressure of a gas increases as its volume .............................................. .
(ii)
At constant volume, the pressure of a gas increases as its temperature .............................................. . [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
8 5
(a) The principle of conservation of energy states that energy can neither be created nor destroyed. What, then, does happen to the energy supplied to a device such as a motor or a television? .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) The television in Fig. 5.1 is switched on to watch a programme. During this time, 720 kJ of electrical energy is supplied.
electrical energy input = 720 kJ
light energy output = 4 kJ
sound energy output = 20 kJ
Fig. 5.1 (i)
From the information on Fig. 5.1, find the total energy provided for the viewer to see and hear the television during this programme.
energy = ............................................ kJ [1] (ii)
Suggest what happens to the rest of the energy supplied. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
9 (iii)
Calculate how much energy is involved in (b)(ii).
For Examiner’s Use
energy = ............................................ kJ [1] (iv)
Comment on the efficiency of the television. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
10 6
The ray diagram in Fig. 6.1 shows one ray from the top of an object placed to the left of a converging lens.
object
F2
F1
Fig. 6.1 (a) On Fig. 6.1, use your ruler to draw another ray from the top of the object until it crosses the ray printed on the diagram. [2] (b) On Fig. 6.1, draw the image of the object.
[1]
(c) Which of the following descriptions fit the image formed by the lens? Tick 3 boxes. much larger than the object much smaller than the object same size as the object upright inverted real
© UCLES 2012
[3]
0625/21/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
11 (d) The object is moved to a position further from the lens.
For Examiner’s Use
What differences are seen in the image, compared with the previous image? .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
12 7
(a) Remote controllers for television sets send a beam of electromagnetic radiation to the television. Which region of the electromagnetic spectrum is used? Tick one box. microwaves infra-red visible ultra-violet X-rays
[1]
(b) Modern warfare often uses heat-seeking missiles. Which region of the electromagnetic spectrum is used? Tick one box. microwaves infra-red visible ultra-violet X-rays
[1]
(c) Injured legs may be checked for possible fractures using electromagnetic radiation. Which region of the electromagnetic spectrum is used? Tick one box. microwaves infra-red visible ultra-violet X-rays
© UCLES 2012
[1]
0625/21/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
13 (d) Mobile phones communicate using electromagnetic radiation.
For Examiner’s Use
Which region of the electromagnetic spectrum is used? Tick one box. microwaves infra-red visible ultra-violet X-rays
[1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
14 8
(a) Complete the following sentences. (i)
An electric current exists in a wire when .................................................. are made to flow in the wire. [1]
(ii)
The current in a wire may be measured using an instrument called .................................................... .
(iii)
[1]
The potential difference across a wire may be measured by connecting ................................................... across the wire.
[1]
(b) A length of resistance wire is connected in a simple series circuit. The current in it is 0.8 A. The potential difference across it is 9.6 V. Calculate the resistance of the wire.
resistance = ................................................. [4] (c) The resistance wire in (b) is replaced by a greater length of wire from the same reel. Without further calculation, state the effect this has on (i)
the resistance in the circuit, ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
the current in the new wire when there is a potential difference of 9.6 V across it, as before. .................................................................................................................................. [2] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
15 9
The coil in the d.c. motor in Fig. 9.1 is rotating as shown.
For Examiner’s Use
rotation magnet
–
+
y
batter
Fig. 9.1 (a) On Fig. 9.1, clearly label the coil.
[1]
(b) State two things that could be done to the apparatus shown in Fig. 9.1 in order to make the coil rotate more rapidly. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) Suggest how the coil could be made to rotate in the opposite direction. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
16 10 Fig. 10.1 shows four different types of switch.
For Examiner’s Use
wall-mounted switch
ceiling-mounted pull-cord switch
flush wall-mounted switch
nylon cord
plug plug switch metal sections Fig. 10.1
(a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a switch.
[1] (b) (i)
Which one of the switches is definitely dangerous to use with mains voltages? ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State the reason for your answer to (b)(i). .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
17 (c) A laundry, where clothes are washed, is likely to have lots of steam and condensation. (i)
Which switch is the most suitable for turning the lights on or off from within the laundry?
For Examiner’s Use
.................................................................................................................................. (ii)
State the reason for your answer to (c)(i). .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) The laundry is lit by three mains-voltage lamps. Fig. 10.2 shows the mains supply and the three lamps.
mains supply
Fig. 10.2 Complete Fig. 10.2 by adding the switch and the wiring that will allow all three lamps to light at full brightness when the switch is on. [2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
18 11 Fig. 11.1 shows an electron beam about to enter, at point A, the electric field between two charged metal plates. B
–
electron beam
A
+
C Fig. 11.1 (a) On Fig. 11.1, carefully draw the path of the electron beam between A and the line BC. [3] (b) The voltage across the plates is reversed. State what difference this makes to the path of the electron beam. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
19 12 The table below gives details about some radioactive substances.
For Examiner’s Use
substance
symbol
type of radiation emitted
half-life
barium-139
139 Ba 56
beta (β)
85 minutes
silver-110
110 Ag 47
beta (β)
24 seconds
technetium-99m
99 Tc 43
gamma (γ)
6.0 hours
thorium-232
232 Th 90
alpha (α)
1.4 × 1010 years
(a) Which of these substances has the greatest number of particles in the nucleus of its atoms? ..................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) Which of these substances has the least number of electrons in the orbits of a neutral atom? ..................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Which of these substances are emitting particles? .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) Samples of each of these substances are decaying. Each sample starts with the same number of atoms. Which sample decays the most in one hour? ..................................................................................................................................... [1] (e) In the investigation of a blood circulation problem, a patient is given an injection containing one of these substances. The radiation needs to be detectable from outside the body. Which of the substances might be suitable for this use? ..................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 0 2 9 5 0 5 8 2 3 2 *
0625/21
PHYSICS Paper 2 Core
October/November 2012 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Total
This document consists of 16 printed pages. DC (CW/SW) 49779/4 © UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2
1
For Examiner’s Use
(a) State the name that is given to the turning effect of a force. ...................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) A gate has rusty hinges that are very stiff. A man opens the gate by pulling on it, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1 After he has passed through the opening, he closes the gate behind him. When closing the gate, the man pulls it at a point halfway along its length. State two differences between his force when closing the gate and his force when he opened the gate. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) Suggest one way of reducing the force needed to open the gate. ...................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
3 2
(a) State the equation linking the density of a substance with its mass and volume. ..........................................................................................................................................
For Examiner’s Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) When oil leaks out of a damaged oil-tanker, it forms a very thin layer of oil, known as an oil slick, on the water. One such oil slick covers an approximately rectangular area measuring 2.5 × 104 m by 6.0 × 103 m. The oil slick is 3.0 × 10–6 m (0.0000030 m) thick. (i)
Calculate the volume of the oil slick.
volume = ........................................... m3 [3] (ii)
The density of the oil is 900 kg / m3. Calculate the mass of oil in the slick.
mass = ............................................ kg [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
[Turn over
4 3
Fig. 3.1 shows four runners at the start of an 80 m race on a school sports day. starting pistol
timekeeper
80 m Fig. 3.1 (not to scale) (a) Sound travels at 320 m / s. Calculate the time taken for the sound from the starting pistol to reach the timekeeper.
time = .............................................. s [3] (b) The timekeeper takes 0.20 s to react after hearing the sound and then starts the stopwatch. He makes no other experimental inaccuracies. (i)
By how much will his time for the race be in error?
time error = .............................................. s [2] (ii)
Suggest how he can reduce this error, whilst still using the same stopwatch. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
For Examiner’s Use
5 (c) When he stops the stopwatch as the winner crosses the finishing line, the appearance of the stopwatch is as shown in Fig. 3.2.
55 50
0
For Examiner’s Use
5
min 5
45
10 15
seconds
40 35
20
30 25
Fig. 3.2 How long did the winner actually take to run the race?
time = .............................................. s [2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
[Turn over
6 4
An archer pulls the string of his bow, and moves the arrow to the position shown in Fig. 4.1. He then releases the string so that the arrow is fired towards a target. bow
string
arrow
Fig. 4.1 (a) The archer does work on the bow. When is this work done? Tick one box. as the string is pulled back to the position shown in Fig. 4.1 whilst holding the string in the position shown in Fig. 4.1 after releasing the string to fire the arrow
[1]
(b) What type of energy is stored in the bow because it is bent? ...................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) What type of energy does the arrow have because it is moving? ...................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) On another occasion, the archer fires the arrow so that it rises up to a maximum height before falling back down to the ground. Use words from the following list to complete the sentences below. gravitational potential,
kinetic,
thermal,
maximum,
minimum,
zero
As the arrow rises, its ..................................................... energy increases. At the top of the flight, this energy is at a ..................................................... . As the arrow falls, this energy is converted into ..................................................... energy. When it hits the ground, the energy of the arrow is converted into ..................................................... energy. [4] [Total: 7] © UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
For Examiner’s Use
7 5
(a) A metal ruler with a rectangular cross-section is heated in an oven. (i)
For Examiner’s Use
State two things that happen to the atoms of the metal. 1. ............................................................................................................................... 2. ............................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
State what happens to 1. the length of the ruler, .......................................................................................... 2. the width of the ruler, ............................................................................................ 3. the thickness of the ruler. ...................................................................................... [2]
(b) The nut in Fig. 5.1 has become jammed on the bolt, so that it will not rotate. nut bolt very hot flame
Fig. 5.1 Explain why heating the nut with a very hot flame is likely to free the jammed nut. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
[Turn over
8 6
(a)
In Fig. 6.1, a ray of red light is shown passing through a triangular glass prism and on to another prism that is identical but upside down.
i
t
igh
l red
Fig. 6.1 (i)
The angle of incidence of the red light at the first surface is shown on Fig. 6.1 as i. On Fig. 6.1, use the letter r to mark clearly the angle of refraction at the first surface. [1]
(ii)
On Fig. 6.1, complete the path of the ray through the right-hand prism and out into the air again. Label the emergent ray “line R”. [3]
(iii)
The beam of red light is moved so that it shines into the right-hand prism along line R. Using the letter P, mark clearly the point where this ray will emerge from the lefthand prism. [1]
(b) On another occasion, a beam containing a mixture of red and blue light is shone into a prism, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
i
red lig
ht
t igh + ht ig el blu
l red
Fig. 6.2 (i)
© UCLES 2012
On Fig. 6.2, draw the path of the blue light through the prism and out into the air again. [3]
0625/21/O/N/12
For Examiner’s Use
9 (ii)
Refraction is occurring at the first surface.
For Examiner’s Use
Which of the following is also occurring? Tick one box. diffraction dispersion focusing total internal reflection
[1] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
[Turn over
10 7
Fig. 7.1 shows a compass needle that has come to rest in the Earth’s magnetic field.
For Examiner’s Use
compass needle N
S
Fig. 7.1 (a) On Fig. 7.1, draw an arrow pointing towards the north pole of the Earth.
[1]
(b) The S pole of a bar magnet is brought towards the S pole of the compass needle, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
N
S
S
Fig. 7.2 Describe what is seen happening to the compass needle as this is done. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
11 (c) The magnet in (b) is removed and a horizontal wire is positioned above the compass needle, as shown in Fig. 7.3.
For Examiner’s Use
wire
N
S
Fig. 7.3 When there is a current in the wire, the compass needle rotates through a small angle. Suggest why this rotation occurs. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
[Turn over
12 8
Fig. 8.1 shows a cell.
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 8.1 (a) What does the 1.5 V indicate about the cell? ...................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) Three cells identical to the cell in Fig. 8.1 make up a 4.5 V battery. The battery is connected in series with a 180 Ω resistor. Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = .................................................. [4] (c) A second 180 Ω resistor is connected in parallel with the 180 Ω resistor from (b). (i)
In the space below, draw the circuit diagram of the two resistors in parallel, connected to the battery. Use standard symbols.
[3] (ii)
State the value of 1. the potential difference across the second 180 Ω resistor, ................................... 2. the current in the second 180 Ω resistor. .............................................................. [2] [Total: 11]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
13 9
Fig. 9.1 shows a time-delay circuit that includes a capacitor C and a resistor of very high resistance.
C
For Examiner’s Use
V
Fig. 9.1 (a) On Fig. 9.1, use the letter S to label the switch.
[1]
(b) When the switch is open, the voltmeter in the circuit registers zero. After the switch has been closed, what happens, if anything, to (i)
the charge in the circuit, .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
the reading on the voltmeter? .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The switch is now opened again. State what happens, if anything, to the reading on the voltmeter. .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
[Turn over
14 10 A 240 V a.c. mains supply is connected to the primary coil of the transformer shown in Fig. 10.1. A lamp that gives full brightness with a 6 V supply is connected to the secondary coil.
6V lamp
240 V mains
8000 turns
soft iron Fig. 10.1
(a) Name a suitable material from which the coils may be made. ...................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) State the name given to the part of the transformer that is made of soft iron (see Fig. 10.1). ...................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Calculate the number of turns of wire in the secondary coil that will enable the lamp to light at full brightness.
number of turns = .................................................. [3] (d) State what would happen to the lamp if the number of turns in the secondary coil was (i)
much less than that calculated in (c), .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
much more than that calculated in (c). .............................................................................................................................. [1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
For Examiner’s Use
15 11 The apparatus for investigating the absorption of the emissions from a radioactive source is shown in Fig. 11.1.
radioactive source
absorbing material
For Examiner’s Use
detector
Fig. 11.1 The source and detector are about 2 cm apart. The detector is connected to a scaler, which measures the count rate. Different absorbing materials are placed between the source and the detector. The table below shows the count rate obtained with each of five absorbers. absorbing material
count rate counts / s
air sheet of paper 0.5 mm of aluminium 10 mm of aluminium 10 mm of lead
523 523 391 214 122
(a) How can you tell that the source is not emitting any α-particles? .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) What is the evidence that β-particles are being emitted? .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) What is the evidence that γ-rays are being emitted? .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 6] © UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
[Turn over
16 4
4
12 (a) The symbol for an α-particle is either 2 α or 2 He. (i)
For Examiner’s Use
What does the 4 indicate about an α-particle? .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
What does the 2 indicate about an α-particle? .............................................................................................................................. [1] 0
0
(b) The symbol for a β-particle is either –1β or –1e. (i)
What does the 0 indicate about a β-particle? .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
What does the –1 indicate about a β-particle? .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The list below gives, in nuclide notation, the symbols of five radioactive nuclides. 240 94Pu
(i)
244 96Cm
244 96Cm
248 98Cf
250 97Bk
250 98Cf
decays by emitting an α-particle.
Into which of the other nuclides in the list does it decay? .................................... [1] (ii)
250 97Bk
decays by emitting a β-particle.
Into which of the other nuclides in the list does it decay? .................................... [1] [Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
EXTENSION PAPER THREE
3
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
0625/3
PHYSICS PAPER 3 Tuesday
25 MAY 1999
Morning
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper. Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables Protractor Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE 1 2 3 4 5 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages. SB (SLC) QF91700/5 © UCLES 1999
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows a plan view of a rotating sprayer used for the watering of crops.
topicmass topicweight topicdensity topicvolume topicprojectiles
N W
E O
S
holes through which water sprays out horizontally
P
direction of rotation Fig. 1.1
(a) The device rotates about O at a constant rate of 0.2 revolutions per second. OP is 10 m long. Calculate the speed of the point P. (The circumference of a circle is 2π x radius.)
speed = ........................................... (b) (i)
[4]
Use your answer to (a) to write down the velocity of the point P when P is at the point shown in Fig. 1.1. ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain why the speed of point P is constant but its velocity changes as the sprayer rotates. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
0625/3 S99
3 (c) Explain how you know that there is a net force at the end of the arm P, acting towards O.
For Examiner’s Use
.......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3]
Question 1 is continued on page 4
0625/3 S99
[Turn over
4 (d) Water is forced out of the sprayer horizontally. Fig. 1.2 shows how the horizontal speed of the water changes between leaving the sprayer and hitting the ground.
12 10 horizontal speed m/s
8 6 4 2 0
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5 0.6 time/s
0.7
Fig. 1.2 (i)
Explain 1. why the horizontal speed decreases slightly over the 0.6 s of the motion, ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... 2. why the line is approximately vertical at 0.6 s. ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
The acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2. Calculate 1. the height above the ground at which the water leaves the sprayer,
height = ........................................... 2. the horizontal distance travelled by the water.
distance = ........................................... [7] 0625/3 S99
For Examiner’s Use
5 (e) Fig. 1.3 shows the path of the water at one instant. The pressure of the water on an object placed at point Q is much greater than the pressure of the water on the same object when placed at point R. Q
For Examiner’s Use
sprayer
ground R Fig. 1.3 The pressure exerted by the water on the object at point Q is 5 x 105 N/m2 and the pressure on the object at R is 1 x 105 N/m2. Explain this decrease in pressure. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/3 S99
[Turn over
6 2
A student attempted to find the specific heat capacity of water using the following data obtained from the heating system of a small swimming pool:
topicturningeffect topicturning topiceffect
mass of water in the pool, heating system and circulation pipes, 54 000 kg; power of the heating system, 30 kW; rise in temperature, 2 °C in 5 hours (18 000 s). (a) Assuming no energy loss, use these data to calculate a value for the specific heat capacity of water. Show your working.
specific heat capacity ..............................................
0625/3 S99
[6]
For Examiner’s Use
7 (b) The student found that the value for the specific heat capacity of water, worked out by this method, was higher than the accepted value.
For Examiner’s Use
The average temperature of the water in the pool during the test period was 24 °C, whilst the average temperature of the air was 19 °C. (i)
Describe, in molecular terms, ways in which the water loses heat from its surface. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain why the loss of heat from the water led to the student’s higher value. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [7]
0625/3 S99
[Turn over
8 3
(a) A converging lens of focal length 4.0 cm is used to produce a virtual image which is 3 times the height of the object. Fig. 3.1 shows the lens position and the focal length PF. The length PF is to scale. The object and the image are both on the left-hand side of the lens but their positions are not shown.
topicmolecularmodels topicmolecular topicrefraction topicmodels topicflow
line which passes through the top of the image
lens position
line which passes through the top of the object line which passes through the bottom of the image and the object
P
F
Fig. 3.1 Draw rays on Fig. 3.1 and determine (i)
the scale used, ..........................................................................................................
(ii)
the distance of the image from the lens, ...................................................................
(iii)
the distance of the object from the lens. ................................................................... [6]
0625/3 S99
For Examiner’s Use
9 (b) Fig. 3.2 shows a wide parallel beam of monochromatic light incident on a block of glass at an angle of 37°.
For Examiner’s Use
37° 90°
air glass
Fig. 3.2 (i)
What is meant by the word monochromatic ? ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State the approximate speed of light in air. ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
The angle of refraction in the glass is 22°. Calculate the refractive index of this glass.
refractive index = ..................................... (iv)
On Fig. 3.2, use your protractor to draw in the path of the beam of light in the glass. [7]
0625/3 S99
[Turn over
10 4
Fig. 4.1 shows part of a cathode-ray tube. An electron beam PQ is entering the region between two horizontal, charged metal plates.
topicenergytransformations topicenergy topictransformations topicthermometers topicapparentdepth topiccharge topicelectrons topicelectronsinamagneticfield topicmagnetic topicfield
S
tube wall
+V positively charged plate
vacuum R P
Q
0V
negatively charged plate
Fig. 4.1 (a) (i)
On Fig. 4.1, draw the electron beam from Q to show its path between the charged plates.
(ii)
Explain any change of direction of the electron beam when it is between the charged plates. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
On Fig. 4.1, show the direction of the conventional current in the electron beam by drawing an arrow and labelling it D. [5]
(b) The voltage across the plates is increased so that one of the plates collects 1014 electrons in 10 s. Each electron carries a charge of 1.6 x 10–19 C. (i)
Calculate the total charge collected by the plate in 10 s.
charge = .......................................... (ii)
State an equation linking charge and current. Hence calculate the current in wire RS. ...................................................................................................................................
current = .......................................... [4] 0625/3 S99
For Examiner’s Use
11 (c) Air containing charged dust particles flows between two metal plates. A high potential difference is connected across the plates as illustrated in Fig. 4.2.
A
For Examiner’s Use
+
direction of air flow containing charged dust particles
large p.d.
Fig. 4.2 The charged particles are attracted to the upper plate and move through a potential difference of 10 000 V. The ammeter records a current of 2.1 x 10 –6 A. Calculate (i)
the energy supplied by the voltage source in 10 minutes (600 s),
energy = ........................................... (ii)
the power supplied.
power = ........................................... [6]
0625/3 S99
[Turn over
12 (d) Fig. 4.3 shows a beam of electrons entering the magnetic field of a coil. This magnetic field is directed into the paper. coil
beam of electrons
vacuum
+ 12 V – Fig. 4.3 (i)
On Fig. 4.3, sketch the path of the electron beam until it hits the end of the tube. Explain your choice of path. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
The resistance of the coil producing the magnetic field is 100 Ω. Calculate the current in the coil.
current = .......................................... (iii)
State the effect on the electron deflection of increasing and reversing the potential difference connected across the coil. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [7]
0625/3 S99
For Examiner’s Use
13 5
(a) A laboratory needs to find a radioactive isotope which will produce very intense ionisation of air.
topicspeed topicspeedofsoundandlight topicsound
The apparatus is shown in Fig. 5.1. thick copper wire
+
insulator
high potential difference 5000 V
copper gauze radioactive isotope Fig. 5.1 (i)
Explain why sparks jump between the gauze and the wire when a radioactive isotope with high ionising properties is brought near the gauze. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
An α-emitting source, a β-emitting source and a γ-emitting source, each of the same activity, are tested. One source gives no sparks at all, the second gives only a few sparks per second and the third many sparks per second. State the relative quantities of ionisation produced by each type of emitter. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [6]
(b) Some of the results of a comparison between α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays are shown in the table below. α mass
β
γ
4 units
constitution charge
2 protons + 2 neutrons +2 units
Complete the table by filling in the blank boxes.
0625/3 S99
[4]
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
0625/3
PHYSICS PAPER 3 16 NOVEMBER 1999
Thursday
Morning
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper. Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE 1 2 3 4 5 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 12 printed pages. SB (CW/DJ) QK93706/2 © UCLES 1999
[Turn over
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows the outline of a machine for driving steel pillars (called piles) into the ground.
topicmass topickineticenergy topickinetic topicvolume topicweight topicprojectiles topicdensity
suspension steel mass tube
steel pile ground
Fig. 1.1 The steel mass is raised by an electric motor and then falls under gravity. The falling steel has a mass of 200 kg and falls a distance of 6.0 m. (a) The acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2. Calculate (i)
the potential energy gained by the mass each time it is raised,
potential energy gained = ..................................... (ii)
the maximum speed at which the mass hits the pile.
speed = ..................................... [7]
0625/3 W99
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) When the mass hits the pile, it has kinetic energy. This energy is transformed into other forms of energy as the speed of the falling mass rapidly reduces to zero. As this happens, the pile is forced a small distance into the ground. (i)
For Examiner’s Use
State the energy conversions which take place, starting from the kinetic energy of the falling mass. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain how a large force is produced when the pile is driven a short distance into the ground. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [8]
(c) In raising the steel mass 6.0 m, the electric motor uses more energy than that calculated in (a) (i). Write down and explain two causes of this higher energy requirement. 1. ..................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2. ..................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/3 W99
[Turn over
4 (d) The equipment design is changed so that when the mass falls once, the pile is driven further into the ground than before the design was changed. Suggest three changes that could be made to do this. 1. ..................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2. ..................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 3. ..................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3]
2
;;; ;;; ;;;
Fig. 2.1 shows a piece of apparatus which could be used to find the specific heat capacity of a metal at high temperatures.
topicenergy topiceffect topicturningeffect topicturning topicthermocouple
lagging
metal block
electric heater inserted centrally in the block
thermocouple inserted in the block
Fig. 2.1
Results from an experiment using the apparatus are recorded as follows: mass of the metal block, 1.0 kg; power of the heater, 200 W; time for which the heater is switched on, 2.5 minutes (150 s); rise in temperature during this time, from 160 °C to 210 °C. (a) Describe the experimental steps which were taken to obtain these results. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] 0625/3 W99
For Examiner’s Use
5 (b) Use the results to calculate an average value for the specific heat capacity of the metal over this temperature range.
specific heat capacity = .....................................
For Examiner’s Use
[4]
(c) The temperature of the metal was measured by using a thermocouple. (i)
Draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple being used as a thermometer.
(ii)
Describe the action of a thermocouple when measuring a temperature change. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Suggest two reasons why use of a thermocouple might have an advantage over a mercury-in-glass thermometer. 1. .............................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. 2. .............................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [6]
0625/3 W99
[Turn over
6 3
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 3.1 shows a ray of light, PQRS, passing along a simple optical fibre.
topicmolecularmodels topicrefraction topicreflection topicmolecular topicmodels topicrefraction topiclens topicinternal topicangle topictotal topictotalinternalreflection
air
Q
R
85°
P
85° T
S
N M glass air Fig. 3.1
(a) Calculate the angle between the ray PQ and the ray RS.
angle = .....................................
[2]
(b) Explain why the ray PQ does not leave the fibre at Q. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) Another ray TQ also strikes the surface at Q. The refractive index of the glass is 1.50. (i)
Calculate the critical angle for this glass.
critical angle = ..................................... (ii)
Explain why the ray TQ leaves the fibre. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [4]
0625/3 W99
7 (d) The light waves travelling towards Q are monochromatic and have a frequency of 4 x 1014 Hz and a wavelength of 5 x 10–7 m. (i)
For Examiner’s Use
What is meant by monochromatic? .................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Calculate the speed of these waves in the glass.
speed = ..................................... (iii)
Waves travelling along TQ pass into the air. The refractive index of the glass is 1.50. Write down an expression from which the speed of the light waves in air could be found. ..............................................................................................................................[5]
0625/3 W99
[Turn over
8 4
Fig. 4.1 is a block diagram of an electrical generating and distribution system.
topictransformations topicenergy topicenergytransformations topicapparentdepth topicelectronsinamagneticfield topicelectrons topicelectric topiccharge
long supply cables (several km) turbine
generator
transformer No. 1
transformer No. 2
consumer circuits
Fig. 4.1 (a) The generator produces an e.m.f. by a process called electromagnetic induction. (i)
Name two factors and state how they are changed in order to increase the output e.m.f. of the generator. 1. ............................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. 2. ............................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain what is meant by the statement ‘the induced e.m.f. acts in such a direction as to produce effects to oppose the change causing it’. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [6]
0625/3 W99
For Examiner’s Use
9 (b) (i)
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 4.2 shows the basic parts of transformer No. 1 which is 100% efficient.
input from generator 400 V, 80 A
output to supply cables 30 000 V
Fig. 4.2 Using the information on Fig 4.2, calculate the current in the supply cables.
current = ..................................... (ii)
Describe the function of transformer No. 2. .................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Explain why the use of the two transformers results in a big reduction in power loss in the supply cables. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [6]
0625/3 W99
[Turn over
10 (c) Fig. 4.3 shows one of the consumer circuits with three electrical appliances R, S and T, connected into the circuit. 7.7 A
X
Y 2.3 A
4.6 A 110 V
24 Ω
48 Ω
R
S
T
Fig. 4.3 Using the current, voltage and resistance values shown on Fig. 4.3, calculate (i)
the current at point X and at point Y, current at X = ..................................... current at Y = .....................................
(ii)
the resistance of appliance T,
resistance = ..................................... (iii)
the combined resistance of appliances R and S,
resistance = ..................................... (iv)
the power developed in appliance R,
power = ..................................... (v)
the energy converted by the appliance S in 2 minutes (120 s).
energy converted = ..................................... [10]
0625/3 W99
For Examiner’s Use
11 5
For Examiner’s Use
Lengths of steel may be joined by welding them together, as iillustrated in Fig 5.1.
topicresistance
steel weld
steel Fig. 5.1 A liquid radioactive source is to be used to test that the welds joining lengths of steel pipe are of equal thickness. The diameter of the pipes is 120 mm and the pipe wall thickness is 5 mm. The liquid runs through the pipes whilst a suitable detector moves around the outside of the joints. (a) With the aid of a labelled diagram, explain how this method detects places where the welds are thinner than 5 mm.
.......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3 W99
[Turn over
12 (b) In order to find out the most suitable type of isotope for this purpose, tests were carried out on the ability of the radiations from an α-emitter, a β-emitter and a γ-emitter to penetrate steel. (i)
Write down what you would expect to be the results of these tests. α-emitter .................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. β-emitter .................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. γ-emitter .................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State and explain which type of emitter would be most useful for testing these welds. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Describe three precautions which should be taken to ensure the safety of the operator who is making these tests. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 3. ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3 W99
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS PAPER 3 MAY/JUNE SESSION 2000
0625/3 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper. Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables Protractor Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. (NH) QF05709/2 © UCLES 2000
[Turn over
2 1 topicmass topicweight topicdensity
A firework leaves the ground with an initial velocity of 45 m/s, travelling vertically upwards. It reaches a maximum height of 100 m. At this point the firework fails to explode and falls back down the same vertical path to the ground. At any point on its path, the firework has both a velocity and a speed. (a) Using the terms vector and scalar, explain the difference between velocity and speed. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] (b) Fig. 1.1 is a graph which shows the height of the firework above the ground during the first 5 s of its journey. 120 100 height above ground / m 80 60 40 20 0
0
1
2
3
4
time / s 5
Fig. 1.1 (i)
Use the information on the graph to 1.
find the time taken for the firework to reach its maximum height above the ground,
................................................................................................................................... 2.
describe how the motion of the firework changes over the first 5 s of its journey.
................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... 0625/3 S00
For Examiner’s Use
3 (ii)
The acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2 and air resistance on the firework is negligible.
For Examiner’s Use
State 1.
the deceleration of the firework as it is rising, deceleration = ........................................................
2.
the total time taken for the firework to rise 100 m and then to fall back to the ground. time taken = ...........................................................
(iii)
State the velocity with which the falling firework hits the ground.
velocity =................................................................ [8]
0625/3 S00
[Turn over
4 2
In an experiment to find the specific latent heat of fusion of ice, an electric heater, of power 200 W, is used.
topicturningeffect topicturning topiceffect topicenergy topicthermocouple
The following readings are taken. mass of ice at 0 °C, before heating started, 0.54 kg mass of ice at 0 °C, after 300 s of heating, 0.36 kg (a) Calculate a value of the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.
specific latent heat of fusion of ice = .......................
[4]
(b) Explain, in molecular terms, how heat is transferred from the surface of a block of ice to its centre. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 S00
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
5 3
Fig. 3.1 shows a simple beam balance made from a pivot and a metre rule.
topicmolecularmodels topicmodels topicmolecular topictotalinternalreflection topiclens topicangle topicrefraction
2
cm markings
98
50
metre rule cotton
bag of sand
0.25 kg mass pivot
0.50 kg mass
bench top
Fig. 3.1 (a) Find (i)
the mass of the bag of sand,
mass =................................................. (ii)
the weight of the bag of sand. (The acceleration of freefall is 10 m/s2.)
weight =...............................................
[3]
(b) Explain, in terms of moments of forces, why the beam balances. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] (c) The cotton holding the 0.50 kg mass snaps and the mass falls to the bench. It strikes the bench at a speed of 1.2 m/s. Calculate its kinetic energy just before it hits the bench.
kinetic energy of the mass = ...................................
[3]
(d) On impact with the bench, the mass bounces up a small distance. Some transformation of energy occurs during the impact. State the forms of the energy just before and just after the impact. before: .............................................................................................................................. after: .............................................................................................................................[2] 0625/3 S00
[Turn over
6 4
Fig. 4.1 shows a sealed box containing only dry air. At a particular instant, one of the air molecules in the box is situated at P and it is moving towards face ABCD along the direction shown by the arrow.
topictransformations topicenergy topicenergytransformations
C
G F
B
P H
D A
E Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe and explain a possible path of the molecule within the box. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (b) Explain how this molecule (i)
helps to cause a pressure on the side ABCD, ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
helps to cause an equal pressure on all the sides. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 S00
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
7 (c) The box is squashed but no air leaks out. By calculation, complete the table below.
volume of box /m3
pressure /Pa
temperature /°C
before squashing
0.09
1.0 x 105
20
after squashing
0.04
20 [2]
5 topicresistance
Fig. 5.1 shows how a right-angled prism may be used to change the direction of a ray of light. A
D
E
90°
F
B
C
Fig. 5.1 (a) Explain why the ray of light does not change direction at D and at F. ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) State one property of the light which does change at D and at F. At each point say whether it increases or decreases. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) At E the light splits, with one ray along the surface of the prism and one ray along EF. Draw the normal at E. Label the critical angle with the letter X and state its value. critical angle = .......................................
[2]
(d) The refractive index of this glass may be calculated using the formula refractive index of glass = 1/sin c, where c is the critical angle. Use your value of the critical angle of this glass to calculate its refractive index. refractive index = ................................... 0625/3 S00
[2]
[Turn over
8 6
For Examiner’s Use
(a) A sound wave in air is made up of compressions and rarefactions.
topicbrownianmotion topicbrownian topicmotion
(i)
State what is meant by a compression. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State what is meant by a rarefaction. ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The distance between two consecutive rarefactions in a sound wave is 2.5 m. The speed of sound in air is 330 m/s. Calculate the frequency of this sound wave.
frequency = .............................................................
[2]
(c) A person makes a loud sound and hears the echo of this sound 1.2 s later. Calculate how far the person is from the object causing the echo. Assume that the speed of sound is 330 m / s.
distance =................................................................
0625/3 S00
[2]
9 7
A student is given a battery, a switch, two insulated thick copper leads and a coil of resistance wire. On Fig. 7.1 only the coil is drawn in.
For Examiner’s Use
topicforceonaconductorinamagneticfield topicforce topicconductor topicmagnetic
coil of resistance wire
cardboard tube
Fig. 7.1 (a) The student set up the apparatus to make a current flow through the coil. Using standard symbols for components, complete a circuit diagram on Fig. 7.1. Also on Fig. 7.1, draw the magnetic field lines in and around the coil, with arrows to indicate the direction of the lines. [4] (b) A charge of 16 C flows through the coil in 40 s. Calculate the current in the coil.
current =..................................................................
0625/3 S00
[2]
[Turn over
10
For Examiner’s Use
(c) The potential difference across the coil is 1.2 V. (i)
Calculate the energy released as heat in the coil in 40 s.
energy = .................................................................. (ii)
[4]
Calculate the resistance of the coil.
resistance =.............................................................
[4]
(d) The battery supplies 24 J of energy to drive 16 C of charge around the circuit. Define the e.m.f. of this battery. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 S00
For Examiner’s Use
11 8
Fig. 8.1 shows a transformer.
topicradioactivity
240 V a.c.
12 V a.c.
primary coil
secondary coil
Fig. 8.1 (a) Explain why there is an e.m.f. across the secondary coil even though there is no electrical connection between the primary and secondary coils. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] (b) When the transformer is in use, the current in the secondary circuit is 3.2 A. The transformer may be considered 100% efficient. Calculate the current in the primary coil.
current = .....................................................
0625/3 S00
[3]
[Turn over
12 9 topicvolume topiclens topicdensity topicpressure
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows a beam of electrons about to enter the region between two charged metal plates.
+
–
Fig. 9.1 On Fig. 9.1 continue the path of the electron beam between the plates (i)
for plates with a very small charge (label this path P),
(ii)
for plates with the opposite charges to those shown on Fig. 9.1 (label this path R). [3]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows another arrangement, similar to the first, but in this case the electron beam continues in a straight line because a magnet (which is not shown) has been placed near the plates.
+
–
Fig. 9.2 Explain where you would place the N-pole of the magnet in order to achieve this effect. You may draw on the diagram if you feel that it will make your answer clearer. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3 S00
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
13 10 topictension
(a) A radioactive source contains an isotope of thorium. Thorium (22980 Th) decays by -particle emission to radium (Ra). Write an equation to show this decay.
[2] (b) The radium produced is also radioactive. Fig. 10.1 shows a laboratory experiment to test for the presence of the radioactive emissions from the thorium source, using a radiation detector. In the laboratory there is a background count of 20 counts/minute.
5 mm thick aluminium P radioactive source
Q
3 cm
Fig. 10.1 The readings are given in the table. position
reading in counts/minute
P
2372
Q
361
State and explain (i)
which radiation could be causing the count at Q, ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
which radiations could be causing the count at P. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
0625/3 S00
[Turn over
14 (c) All three types of radioactive emission cause some ionisation of gases. (i)
Explain what is meant by the term ionisation of gases. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest a reason why -radiation produces very little ionisation. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/3 S00
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
0625/3
PHYSICS PAPER 3 Tuesday
14 NOVEMBER 2000
Morning
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper. Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables Protractor Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. (NH) QK07575/2 © UCLES 2000
[Turn over
2 1
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 1.1 shows a 0.5 kg mass hanging freely on a length of steel wire.
topicspeed
length of steel wire
0.5 kg mass
Fig. 1.1 (a) On Fig. 1.1 use labelled arrows to indicate the direction and line of action of each of the two forces acting on the 0.5 kg mass. The acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2. Calculate the values of the two forces which you have indicated.
first force = .............................. second force = ..............................
[4]
(b) Suggest what causes the two forces to act on the mass. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 W00
3 (c) The 0.5 kg mass is increased by steps of 0.5 kg up to 10 kg. The corresponding extensions of the steel wire are measured. When the mass on the wire is 10 kg, the wire snaps. Fig. 1.2 shows part of the graph of extension against load for the wire.
For Examiner’s Use
15 extension /mm
Z
10
5 Y X 0
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0 mass/kg
Fig. 1.2 (i)
On Fig. 1.2, sketch a possible graph line between Y and Z.
(ii)
Determine the mass needed to produce an extension of 3 mm. mass =..........................................................
(iii)
Determine the extension of the wire just before it snaps. extension = ................................................... [4]
0625/3 W00
[Turn over
4 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a student’s design for a thermometer. The student stated that the material labelled M could be a copper rod, alcohol or nitrogen gas.
topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy
free pivot
M
fixed pivot cylinder
piston
scale
Fig. 2.1 (a) Explain what is meant by the term sensitivity of the thermometer. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) (i)
State which of the three suggested materials would give a thermometer of greatest sensitivity. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain your answer. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i)
State which of the three materials would allow the thermometer to measure the largest range of temperature. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain your answer. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) The student found that the temperature scale of this thermometer was non-linear. Explain what this means. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 W00
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
5 3
Fig. 3.1 shows a person raising a concrete block from a river bed by using two pulleys.
topicmolecularmodels topicmolecular topicmodels topiclens
pulley pulley
6m block
Fig. 3.1 (a) As shown in Fig. 3.1, the top of the block is 6.0 m below the water surface. The density of water is 1000 kg/m3 and the acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2. Calculate the water pressure acting on the top of the block.
pressure = ............................................
[3]
(b) The block is raised through the water. At one point, the water pressure acting on the top of the block is 4.5 x 104 Pa. The area of the top of the block is 0.015 m2. Calculate the downward force exerted by the water on the top of the block.
force =...................................................
[2]
(c) When the block is clear of the water, it is raised a further 4.0 m. The weight of the block is 550 N. Calculate the work done on the block as it is raised the 4.0 m through the air.
work =...................................................
[2]
(d) Some of the energy the person uses to raise the block is converted into heat energy. Indicate on the Fig. 3.1, using an arrow and the letter H, two places where heat is released. For each place, explain why heat is released there. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[4] 0625/3 W00
[Turn over
6 4
Fig. 4.1 shows water wavefronts which are approaching a small gap in a wall which divides two stretches of water of the same depth. The diagram is drawn to scale.
topicevaporation
wavefronts
gap in wall
Fig. 4.1 (a) The waves moving towards the wall have a wavelength of 1.6 m and a frequency of 0.80 Hz. Calculate the speed of these water waves.
speed of waves =..................................
[2]
(b) State the wavelength and frequency of the waves after they have passed through the gap in the wall. wavelength = ................................................ frequency =........................................... (c) On Fig. 4.1, complete the pattern of wavefronts to the right of the wall.
0625/3 W00
[2] [3]
For Examiner’s Use
7 5
(a) A student determines the specific heat capacity of water. It is found that 15.5 kJ of energy supplied raise the temperature of 0.45 kg of water by 8.2 °C.
For Examiner’s Use
topicspeedofsoundandlight topicspeed topiclight topicsound
Calculate the specific heat capacity of water.
specific heat capacity of water = .............................
[4]
(b) A cylinder, which is closed by a gas-tight moveable piston, contains 0.0060 m3 of gas. The gas has its pressure raised from 2.0 x 105 Pa to 3.5 x 105 Pa, without any change in temperature. (i)
Describe how this could be achieved. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Calculate the volume when the pressure is 3.5 x 105 Pa.
volume = ....................................................... [4]
0625/3 W00
[Turn over
8 6
Fig. 6.1 shows an object placed 2.0 cm from a thin lens, which is to be used as a magnifying glass.
topicbrownianmotion topicbrownian topicmotion topiclens
The focal length of the lens is 3.0 cm. The diagram is drawn to full scale.
lens
object
Fig. 6.1 (a) On Fig. 6.1, draw any two rays from the tip of the object which enable you to locate the tip of the image. Draw in the image and label it I. [3] (b) On Fig. 6.1, draw in an eye position which would enable image I to be seen.
[1]
(c) By taking measurements from Fig. 6.1, work out how many times bigger the image is than the object. The image is .................... times bigger than the object.
0625/3 W00
[2]
For Examiner’s Use
9 7 topicconvection
Fig. 7.1 shows how a student set up a circuit using three identical lamps. Assume that the resistance of each lamp does not change with the brightness of the lamp.
For Examiner’s Use
Each lamp is labelled 12 V, 2.0 A. 12 V A P
R
Q
Fig. 7.1 (a) Calculate the resistance of one of the lamps.
resistance = ..........................................
[2]
(b) Calculate the combined resistance of the three lamps as connected in Fig. 7.1.
combined resistance = .........................
[2]
(c) Calculate the current which would be shown on the ammeter in Fig. 7.1.
current = ...............................................
[2]
(d) Explain why lamp R is less bright than normal and why lamps P and Q are both equally very dim. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3 W00
[Turn over
10 (e) In the space below draw a circuit diagram which shows P, Q and R connected so that they will all work at normal brightness.
[1]
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a simple electrical generator. By turning the handle, the single coil may be spun between the poles of the magnet.
topicatomic topicatomicstructure topicstructure topicelectromagneticinduction topicelectromagnetic topicinduction
rotation
S N
bulb
Fig. 8.1
0625/3 W00
For Examiner’s Use
11 (a) The handle is turned so that the coil makes two complete revolutions per second. The maximum output is 7 V. On Fig. 8.2, sketch this output over a period of 1 s.
For Examiner’s Use
8 e.m.f. /V 6 4 2 0 0
0.25
0.50
2
0.75
1.00 time / s
4 6 8
[3] Fig. 8.2 (b) Explain (i)
how an e.m.f. is induced, ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
why the e.m.f. varies in magnitude and direction. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
0625/3 W00
[Turn over
12 9
Fig. 9.1 shows an uncharged metal plate held in a wooden clamp and stand.
topicvolume topicdensity
topicpressure
metal plate
wooden clamp and stand
Fig. 9.1 (a) A polythene rod is charged negatively by rubbing it with a duster. Suggest, in terms of the movement of electrons, (i)
how the polythene becomes negatively charged, ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
how the metal plate can be positively charged without the polythene touching the plate. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) A strong α-particle emitting source is brought close to, but not touching, the positively charged metal plate. Explain why the plate rapidly loses its charge. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] 0625/3 W00
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
13 10 topictension
(a) A nuclide, symbol AZ X, decays by β-particle emission to a nuclide, symbol Y. A β-particle has the symbol –o1 e. Write an equation for this decay.
[2] (b) Fig. 10.1 shows how a β-particle source may be used to measure the thickness of paper as it is being produced. rollers β- particle source paper wound on roll detector Fig. 10.1 (i)
Explain why the reading of the detector changes with the thickness of the paper. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Write down two reasons why β-particles are more useful than γ -rays for this purpose. reason 1. ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... reason 2. ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[4]
0625/3 W00
[Turn over
14 (c) Fig. 10.2 shows a beam of β -particles entering a magnetic field, the direction of which is into the paper.
beam of β -particles
magnetic field into paper
Fig. 10.2 On Fig. 10.2 continue the path of the beam of β -particles as they pass through the magnetic field. [2]
0625/3 W00
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS
0625/3
PAPER 3 MAY/JUNE SESSION 2001
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper. No additional materials required.
TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. SB (CW/KN) QF10310/2 © UCLES 2001
[Turn over
2 1 topicspeed
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed of a small, very dense object which is falling vertically from an aeroplane, up to the point at which it hits the ground. The air resistance on the object is negligibly small for the first 5 s of its fall. The object is fitted with a parachute which springs open after a certain time of fall.
150
100 vertical speed ––––––––––– m/s 50
0 0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
time/s Fig. 1.1 (a) State the type of motion (i)
between 0 and 5 s, ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
between 42 s and 47 s. ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Estimate the time at which the parachute opens. ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/3/M/J/01
For Examiner’s Use
3 (c) On Figs 1.2 and 1.3, indicate by labelled arrows the vertical forces acting on the falling object (i)
For Examiner’s Use
after 3 s of fall,
falling object
Fig. 1.2 (ii) after 45 s of fall.
parachute
falling object
Fig. 1.3
[3]
(d) State whether or not there is a resultant vertical force acting on the falling object (i)
after 3 s of fall, .....................................
(ii)
after 45 s of fall. ..................................... [1]
(e) Calculate the distance fallen in the first 5 s of fall.
distance fallen = .....................................[2] 0625/3/M/J/01
[Turn over
4 2
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 2.1 shows a moving car on a level road.
topicturningeffect topicturning
uniform speed of 20 m/s in the direction shown mass 800 kg
Fig. 2.1 (a) Calculate the momentum of the car.
momentum of car = ..................................... [2] (b) The brakes of the car are applied for 4 s, which reduces the speed of the car to 5 m/s. (i)
Calculate the average force of the brakes.
average force = ..................................... (ii)
Calculate the average deceleration of the car.
average deceleration = ..................................... [6]
0625/3/M/J/01
5 3 topicmagnet
Describe an experiment to find the average density of a small rock sample of approximately 100 g mass.
For Examiner’s Use
(a) In the space below draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus.
[2] (b) List all the measurements which must be taken.
[2] (c) Explain how to work out the average density from the measurements taken. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/M/J/01
[Turn over
6 4
Fig. 4.1 shows a very magnified view of tiny dust particles suspended in still air, as seen under a microscope.
topicenergytransformations topicenergy topictransformations
P
air-tight container
Fig. 4.1 (a) In the space below, draw a diagram to show how the particle labelled P would move when it is observed for a short time.
[1] (b) With reference to dust particles and air molecules, explain the movement which you have drawn. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) Describe and explain how the movement would change if the temperature of the air in the container increased. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/M/J/01
For Examiner’s Use
7 5
Fig. 5.1 shows apparatus which may be used to find the specific heat capacity of a liquid.
For Examiner’s Use
topicsound topicspeedofsoundandlight topiclight topicspeed
electric immersion heater
thermometer
glass beaker
liquid
Fig. 5.1 The readings taken are: power of the heater, time heater is switched on, initial temperature of the liquid, final temperature of the liquid, mass of the liquid heated,
50 W 600 s 20 °C 65 °C 200 g
(a) Use the data to calculate the specific heat capacity of the liquid.
specific heat capacity = ..................................... [5] (b) (i)
Explain why the value obtained from this data will be higher than the actual value. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Describe one addition to the apparatus which would make the calculated experimental value nearer to the actual value. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/3/M/J/01
[Turn over
8 6
Fig. 6.1 shows some apparatus in use in an experiment to find the critical angle for blue light.
topicbrownianmotion topicbrownian topicmotion topicinternal topictotal topictotalinternalreflection topiclens topicreflection
60° incident ray of blue light
Q glass prism
P
R
emergent ray
Fig. 6.1 The ray hits the prism at point P, then crosses the prism to point Q. Part of the ray emerges along the surface QR as shown. (a) (i)
By using measurements taken from the diagram, find the critical angle of the glass for blue light.
critical angle = ..................................... (ii)
Use your value to explain how total internal reflection of blue light could be made to occur at point Q. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Using measured angles on the diagram, calculate the refractive index of the glass for blue light.
refractive index = ..................................... [4]
0625/3/M/J/01
For Examiner’s Use
9 7 topicconvection
Fig. 7.1 shows an unlabelled diagram which a teacher draws to represent a sound wave in air.
For Examiner’s Use
R
}
P
Q Fig. 7.1
(a) What label should be put on the line with the arrow? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) (i)
What does the uneven spacing of the lines show? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
What is being shown at P? ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
What is being shown at Q? ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Describe the motion of an air particle at R. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (d) From Fig. 7.1, measure the wavelength of the sound wave. wavelength = ..................................... [1]
0625/3/M/J/01
[Turn over
10 8
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows a coil of thin wire and a lamp connected to a 4 V supply.
topicradioactivity
4V
Fig. 8.1 The lamp is marked 1.5 V, 0.6 W. The lamp lights at normal brightness. Calculate (i)
the current in the lamp,
current = ..................................... (ii)
the resistance of the lamp,
resistance = ..................................... (iii)
the charge flowing through the lamp in 20 s.
charge = ............................... [5]
0625/3/M/J/01
For Examiner’s Use
11 (b) The resistance of the coil of wire shown in Fig. 8.1 is 6.2 Ω and its length is 1.0 m. Using only 1.0 m lengths from the same reel of wire, and without cutting any of them, state how you would produce a resistance of (i)
For Examiner’s Use
3.1 Ω, ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
12.4 Ω. ...................................................................................................................................
Complete the circuits in Fig. 8.2 and in Fig. 8.3 to show how the lengths of wire are connected in each case. [3] 4V
4V
resistance 3.1Ω
resistance 12.4Ω
Fig. 8.2
Fig. 8.3
(c) In a similar circuit to that shown in Fig. 8.1, the resistance of the coil is 5.0 Ω and the current through it is 0.6 A. Calculate the heat energy produced in the coil in 20 s.
energy = ..................................... [3]
0625/3/M/J/01
[Turn over
12 9
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 9.1 shows a transformer.
topicpressure
240 V a.c.
12 V a.c.
Fig. 9.1 (a) Explain (i)
why a secondary output is obtained even though there is no electrical connection between the primary and secondary coils, ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
why there would be no output voltage if the primary coil were connected to a 240 V d.c. supply. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) The transformer is assumed to be 100% efficient. (i)
There are 100 turns on the secondary coil. How many turns are there on the primary coil?
turns on the primary = ..................................... (ii)
The output current is 4.0 A. Calculate the input current. input current = ..................................... [4]
0625/3/M/J/01
For Examiner’s Use
13 10 (a) Complete the following table for α-particles. The first answer has been given. topictension
property/nature symbol
complete this column 4 2
He
(hint: it is a helium nucleus)
mass number charge
(hint: write down the number of (hint: proton charges)
ionisation of gases
(hint: choose from: strong, weak (hint: or almost none)
deflection in a magnetic field
(hint: choose from: towards N, (hint: towards S or at right angles (hint: to the magnetic field lines)
deflection in an electric field
(hint: choose from: towards +ve, (hint: towards -ve or no deflection) [5]
0625/3/M/J/01
[Turn over
14 (b) Fig.10.1 shows the paths of α-particles scattered by the nuclei of metal atoms in thin foils.
key: α-particle nuclei of metal atoms
Fig. 10.1 Explain what can be deduced from the paths shown in Fig. 10.1 about (i)
the mass of the nucleus of a metal atom compared to the mass of an α-particle, ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................
(ii)
the charge on the nucleus of a metal atom, ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................
(iii)
the volume occupied by a metal atom compared to its nucleus. ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ [5]
0625/3/M/J/01
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS
0625/3
PAPER 3 OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2001
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper. No additional materials are required.
TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 16 printed pages. SB (CW/KN) S10764/2 © UCLES 2001
[Turn over
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows the motion of a train over a section of track which includes a sharp bend.
topicmass topicweight topicdensity topicvolume topicprojectiles
30 25 20 speed ––––– m/s
15 10 5 0 0
10
20
30
time/s Fig. 1.1 (a) The section of the track with the sharp bend has a maximum speed restriction. The train decelerates approaching the bend so that at the start of the bend it has just reached the maximum speed allowed. The train is driven around the bend at the maximum speed allowed and accelerates immediately on leaving the bend. (i)
What is the maximum speed allowed round the bend in the track? maximum speed = .....................................
(ii)
How long does the train take to travel the bend of the track? time taken = .....................................
(iii)
Calculate the length of the bend.
length of bend = ..................................... [3] (b) The train has to slow down to go round the bend. Calculate the deceleration.
deceleration = .....................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/01
For Examiner’s Use
3 (c) As the train is driven round the bend, there is an extra force acting, called the centripetal force. (i)
For Examiner’s Use
On Fig. 1.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of this force. train curved track
direction of motion
Fig. 1.2
(ii)
State the effect that this force has on the motion. ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
State how this force is provided. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/3/O/N/01
[Turn over
4 2
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 2.1 shows a car with a dummy driver before and after a collision test.
topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy
just before impact
just after impact V = 0 m/s
V = 45 m/s
Fig. 2.1 The mass of the dummy driver is 90 kg. The impact time to reduce the dummy’s speed from 45 m/s to zero is 1.2 s. (a) Calculate (i)
the momentum of the dummy just before impact,
momentum = ..................................... (ii)
the average force on the dummy during impact.
force = ..................................... [4] (b) State the main energy transformation during the collision. ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) Calculate how much of the dummy’s energy is transformed during the collision.
energy = ..................................... [3]
0625/3/O/N/01
5 3 topicmagnet
A body is in equilibrium and is acted upon by two vertical downward forces in such a way that there is no net moment about a pivot. A student is asked to show this experimentally. The student is provided with a suitable pivot, a metre rule with a hole drilled in the centre, two sets of masses and strong cotton.
For Examiner’s Use
(a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus set up ready for use.
[2] (b) Describe how two sets of readings are taken, explaining how equilibrium is achieved in each case. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) Write down, in table form, two possible sets of values and use them to show that there is no net moment. [3]
0625/3/O/N/01
[Turn over
6 4
Fig. 4.1 shows the path that one molecule, M, in a gas might take.
topictransformations topicenergy topicenergytransformations
start of movement M
position after a short time interval
Fig. 4.1 (a) Explain why, in Fig. 4.1, the path of M has sudden, sharp changes of direction. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (b) At the end of the short time interval, M is a short distance from its starting point. Use this observation to explain why a gas spreads slowly through air. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/01
For Examiner’s Use
7 5
(a) A student concludes that the results of his experiments show that it requires more energy to convert 1 g of water into steam at 100 °C than it does to raise the temperature of 1 g of water from 0 °C to 100 °C. Use the student’s data to confirm that this conclusion is correct and calculate the difference between the two amounts of energy.
For Examiner’s Use
topicspeed topicspeedofsoundandlight topicthermal topicsound topicthermometer topicthermalcapacity topiclight
experiment 1 mass of water used 250 g heat energy supplied 10 500 J rise in temperature 10 °C
experiment 2 mass of water evaporated at 100 °C 15 g heat energy supplied 33 900 J
energy difference = .....................................[5] (b) Explain, in molecular terms, why considerable heat energy is needed to convert 1 g of water into 1 g of steam at 100 °C, without any change in temperature taking place. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) The mercury-in-glass thermometer used in experiment 1 above is said to have – moderate sensitivity, – a good range, – a linear scale. By reference to this thermometer, explain what is meant by (i)
sensitivity, ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
range, ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
linear scale. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3] 0625/3/O/N/01 [Turn over
8 6
For Examiner’s Use
(a) Figs 6.1 and 6.2 show what happens to waves at two different types of boundary.
topicdispersion
Fig. 6.1
Fig. 6.2
Complete the table below.
Fig. 6.1
Fig. 6.2
name of the effect shown wavelength change, if any frequency change, if any [4]
0625/3/O/N/01
For Examiner’s Use
9 (b) Fig. 6.3 is drawn to full scale. The distance CF is the focal length of the lens.
object F
C
F
Fig. 6.3 (i)
By drawing rays from the tip of the object, locate the position of the image. Hence work out how many times bigger the image is than the object. number of times bigger = .....................................
(ii)
1. 2.
Draw an eye on Fig. 6.3 to show a suitable place to view the image. Suggest a use for this lens arrangement.
................................................................................................................................... [6]
0625/3/O/N/01
[Turn over
10 7
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows a current-carrying solenoid and the position of a plotting compass.
topicconductor topicforce topicforceonaconductorinamagneticfield
cardboard
B
A
direction of current in the solenoid indicated by arrows
compass originally placed at A Fig. 7.1 The plotting compass is used to follow magnetic field lines. On Fig. 7.1 draw in one magnetic field line which links A and B, both through the inside of the solenoid and round the outside of the solenoid. Mark the direction of each part of the field line with an arrow. [3]
0625/3/O/N/01
For Examiner’s Use
11 (b) Fig. 7.2 shows the result of a similar experiment with a current-carrying, straight wire.
For Examiner’s Use
direction of current vertically upwards through the cardboard C A
B
horizontal cardboard
Fig. 7.2 (i)
On Fig. 7.2, draw another magnetic field line starting at C. Mark its direction with an arrow.
(ii)
Explain why the line from C could never pass through B. ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
What would be the effect on the strength and on the direction of the magnetic field of 1.
reversing the current without changing its value, strength.......................................
2.
direction...........................................
increasing the value of the current without changing its direction? strength.......................................
direction........................................... [5]
0625/3/O/N/01
[Turn over
12 8
Fig. 8.1 shows how two security lamps are connected to a mains supply.
topicradioactivity
240 V a.c. Z
X
A
Y
B
Fig. 8.1 Lamp A is labelled 240 V, 600 W and lamp B is labelled 240 V, 300 W. (a) Calculate the currents at points X, Y and Z in Fig. 8.1. current at X = ..................................... current at Y = ..................................... current at Z = ..................................... [2] (b) The resistance of lamp A is 96 Ω and the resistance of lamp B 192 Ω. Using these values, or by an alternative method, calculate the total circuit resistance. (Ignore the resistance of the circuit wiring.)
resistance = ..................................... [3] (c) Fig. 8.2 shows the same lamps connected differently. 240 V a.c. P
A
B
96 Ω
192 Ω Fig. 8.2
(i)
Calculate the current at P.
current at P = ..................................... (ii)
Calculate the potential difference across A and across B. potential difference across A = ..................................... potential difference across B = ..................................... [3] 0625/3/O/N/01
For Examiner’s Use
13 (d) (i)
With reference to values already worked out, explain why the lamps should be connected as in Fig. 8.1 and not as in Fig. 8.2.
For Examiner’s Use
................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... (ii)
The two lamps are to be switched on and off independently. State and explain which circuit is better for this purpose when suitably placed switches are included. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
0625/3/O/N/01
[Turn over
14 9
Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit and a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.).
topicdensity topicpressure topicvolume
d.c. supply
Y
Fig. 9.1 (a) Complete the connections to show how you would use the c.r.o. to measure the potential difference across the lamp. [1] (b) Fig. 9.2 shows the screen of the c.r.o. when measuring this potential difference. trace when p.d. connected
trace before p.d. connected
Fig. 9.2 When calibrated, each vertical division corresponds to a potential difference of 0.4 V. What is the potential difference across the lamp?
potential difference = ..................................... [2] (c) Suggest one advantage of using this method of measuring potential difference rather than using a standard voltmeter. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/3/O/N/01
For Examiner’s Use
15 10 (a) Radioactive sodium has a nuclide represented by the symbol 24 11 Na. Complete the equation below to show how this nuclide decays with the emission of a β-particle.
For Examiner’s Use
topictension
24 11
Na →
Mg +
e
[2]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a narrow beam of β-particles entering an electric field created by two charged plates. +
narrow beam of β-particles
P
– Fig 10.1 (i)
Complete the path of the β-particles, starting from the point P.
(ii)
Explain any change of direction which you have shown. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/3/O/N/01
[Turn over
16 (c) (i)
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of an arrangement, using a radioactive source which emits β-particles, for finding the variation in thickness of a sheet of paper.
(ii)
State the readings which need to be taken and how they would be used to decide whether or not the thickness of the paper varies. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[4]
0625/3/O/N/01
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
0625/3
PHYSICS PAPER 3
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2002 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the question paper. No additional materials required.
TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 12 printed pages. SP (AT/JB) S22941/2 © CIE 2002
[Turn over
2 1
A group of students attempts to find out how much power each student can generate. The students work in pairs in order to find the time taken for each student to run up a flight of stairs. The stairs used are shown in Fig. 1.1. finishing point
starting point
Fig. 1.1 (a) Make a list of all the readings that would be needed. Where possible, indicate how the accuracy of the readings could be improved. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [4] (b) Using words, not symbols, write down all equations that would be needed to work out the power of a student. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) (i)
When the student has reached the finishing point and is standing at the top of the stairs, what form of energy has increased to its maximum? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest why the total power of the student is greater than the power calculated by this method. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/3/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
A small rubber ball falls vertically, hits the ground and rebounds vertically upwards. Fig. 2.1 is the speed-time graph for the ball.
10
B
speed 8 m/s 6
D
4 2
A E
C
0 0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0 time / s
Fig. 2.1 (a) Using information from the graph, describe the following parts of the motion of the ball. (i)
part AB ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
part DE ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Explain what is happening to the ball along the part of the graph from B through C to D. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) Whilst the ball is in contact with the ground, what is the (i)
overall change in speed, change in speed = ........................................
(ii)
overall change in velocity? change in velocity = ...................................... [2] 0625/3/M/J/02
[Turn over
4 (d) Use your answer to (c) to explain the difference between speed and velocity. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (e) Use the graph to calculate the distance travelled by the ball between D and E.
distance travelled = ..................................[2] (f)
Use the graph to calculate the deceleration of the ball between D and E.
deceleration = ..................................[2]
0625/3/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
5 3
Fig. 3.1 is an attempt to show the molecules in water and the water vapour molecules over the water surface.
For Examiner’s Use
water vapour molecules
water molecules Fig. 3.1 (a) Explain, in terms of the energies of the molecules, why only a few water molecules have escaped from the water surface. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) State two ways of increasing the number of water molecules escaping from the surface. 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 2 .................................................................................................................................. [2] (c) Energy is required to evaporate water. Explain, in molecular terms, why this energy is needed. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/3/M/J/02
[Turn over
6 4
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows a cylinder containing air at a pressure of 1.0 × 105 Pa. The length of the air column in the cylinder is 80 mm. 80 mm
air
piston cylinder Fig. 4.1 The piston is pushed in until the pressure in the cylinder rises to 3.8 × 105 Pa. Calculate the new length of the air column in the cylinder, assuming that the temperature of the air has not changed.
new length = .................................. [3] (b) Fig. 4.2 shows the same cylinder containing air.
air Fig. 4.2 The volume of the air in the cylinder changes as the temperature of the air changes. (i)
The apparatus is to be used as a thermometer. Describe how two fixed points, 0 °C and 100 °C, and a temperature scale could be marked on the apparatus. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Describe how this apparatus could be used to indicate the temperature of a large beaker of water. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [5] 0625/3/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
7 5
Fig. 5.1 shows an arrangement where a plane mirror is used in a shop to watch a display counter. The arrangement is drawn to a scale of 1 cm : 1 m.
For Examiner’s Use
plane mirror
P
wall display counter
Fig. 5.1 (a) (i)
State the law of reflection. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
On Fig. 5.1, draw rays to show how much of the display cannot be seen from P. Indicate this by shading in the part that cannot be seen. [3]
(b) By construction on Fig. 5.1 and by using the scale, calculate how far the mirror must be moved so that all of the display counter can be seen from P.
distance moved = .................................... [2] (c) State the characteristics of an image seen in a plane mirror. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/3/M/J/02
[Turn over
8 6
For Examiner’s Use
Observations of a distant thunderstorm are made. (a) During a lightning flash, the average wavelength of the light emitted is 5 × 10–7 m. This light travels at 3 × 108 m/s. Calculate the average frequency of this light.
frequency = ...................................... [2] (b) The interval between the lightning flash being seen and the thunder being heard is 3.6 s. The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s. (i)
Calculate the distance between the thunderstorm and the observer.
distance = ............................................ (ii)
Explain why the speed of light is not taken into account in this calculation. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) A single ray of white light from the lightning is incident on a prism as shown in Fig. 6.1. prism
screen ray of light
Fig. 6.1 Complete the path of the ray to show how a spectrum is formed on the screen. Label the colours. [2]
0625/3/M/J/02
9 7
(a) Two non-conducting spheres, made of different materials, are initially uncharged. They are rubbed together. This causes one of the spheres to become positively charged and one negatively charged.
For Examiner’s Use
Describe, in terms of electron movement, why the spheres become charged. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) Once charged, the two spheres are separated, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
+ + + + + + +
– – – – – – – Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, draw the electric field between the two spheres. Indicate by arrows the direction of the electric field lines. [2] (c) A conducting wire attached to a negatively charged metal object is connected to earth. This allows 2.0 × 1010 electrons, each carrying a charge of 1.6 × 10–19 C, to flow to earth in 1.0 × 10–3 s. Calculate (i)
the total charge that flows,
charge ..................................... (ii)
the average current in the wire.
current ..................................... [3]
0625/3/M/J/02
[Turn over
10 8
Fig. 8.1 shows a transformer and a rectifier used in a battery charging circuit for a 12 V battery. T1 240 V a.c. T2
primary
secondary Fig. 8.1
(a) The transformer produces an output of 15 V across the secondary coil. Calculate a suitable turns ratio for the transformer.
turns ratio = ................................ [2] (b) Fig. 8.2 shows the 15 V output across the secondary coil. potential difference
time
Fig. 8.2 On the same axes, sketch the graph of the potential difference across the terminals T1 and T2 before the battery is connected. [2] (c) Explain how the circuit converts an a.c. supply into a d.c. output. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) On Fig. 8.1, draw in a battery connected so that it may be charged.
0625/3/M/J/02
[1]
For Examiner’s Use
11 (e) When fully charged, the 12V battery can supply a current of 2.0 A for 30 hours (1.08 × 105 s).
For Examiner’s Use
Calculate (i)
the battery power when supplying a current of 2.0 A,
power = ...................................... (ii)
the total energy that the battery will supply during the 30 hours.
energy = ...................................... [4]
9
Fig. 9.1 shows three resistors connected across a low voltage d.c. supply, and a c.r.o. A
B
C
d.c. supply
F
D
E
Y input Fig. 9.1 (a) Explain how you would use a 1 V d.c. supply to calibrate the c.r.o. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) On Fig. 9.1, draw in the connections between the c.r.o. and the circuit so that the potential difference between points C and D may be measured. [2] (c) The potential differences between A and F, B and C, C and D, and D and E are measured. State the relationship between them. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/M/J/02
[Turn over
12 10 Some liquid from an atomic power station is known to be radioactive. A sample of this liquid is tested in a laboratory. (a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the test apparatus used to verify that α-particles are emitted from the liquid. [2]
(b) Explain how the apparatus may be used to estimate the quantity of α-radiation being emitted from the sample. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) State any two safety precautions that the technician might take whilst making the test. precaution 1 ..................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... precaution 2 ..................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/3/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
0625/3
PHYSICS PAPER 3
OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2002 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the question paper. No additional materials are required.
TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. SP (NF/KS) S23400/3 © CIE 2002
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows a smooth metal block about to slide down BD, along DE and up EF. BD and DE are friction-free surfaces, but EF is rough. The block stops at F.
B metal block C F
A
D
E Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.2, sketch the speed-time graph for the journey from B to F. Label D, E and F on your graph.
[3]
speed
B time Fig. 1.2 (b) The mass of the block is 0.2 kg. The vertical height of B above A is 0.6 m. The acceleration due to gravity is 10 m/s2. (i)
Calculate the work done in lifting the block from A to B.
work done = ............................ (ii)
At C, the block is moving at a speed of 2.5 m/s. Calculate its kinetic energy at C.
kinetic energy = ............................... [5]
0625/3/O/N/02
3 (c) As it passes D, the speed of the block remains almost constant but the velocity changes. Using the terms vector and scalar, explain this statement.
For Examiner’s Use
.......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (d) F is the point where the kinetic energy of the block is zero. In terms of energy changes, explain why F is lower than B. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3/O/N/02
[Turn over
4 2
A student is given the following apparatus in order to find the density of a piece of rock. 100 g mass metre rule suitable pivot on which the rule will balance measuring cylinder that is big enough for the piece of rock to fit inside cotton water The rock has a mass of approximately 90 g. (a) (i)
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of apparatus from this list set up so that the student is able to find the mass of the piece of rock.
(ii)
State the readings the student should take and how these would be used to find the mass of the rock. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) Describe how the volume of the rock could be found. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) The mass of the rock is 88 g and its volume is 24 cm3. Calculate the density of the rock.
density of rock = .............................. [2]
0625/3/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
5 3
A thermocouple is used to measure the temperature of the inner wall of a pottery kiln. (a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple that could be used for this purpose. [2]
(b) Describe (i)
how you would read the temperature of the wall from the thermocouple, ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
how the thermocouple works. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) State two conditions in which a thermocouple is very suitable for temperature measurement. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/02
[Turn over
6 4
(a) In an experiment to find the specific latent heat of water, the following readings were taken. m1 mass of water at 100 °C, before boiling starts m2 mass of water at 100 °C, after boiling finishes V voltage across the heater I current through the heater t time that the heater was supplying energy
120 g 80 g 12 V 2.0 A 3750 s
(i)
Using the symbols above, write down the equation that must be used to find the value of the specific latent heat L of water.
(ii)
Use the equation to calculate the specific latent heat of water from the readings above.
specific latent heat = ...................................... [4] (b) Explain, in terms of the energy of molecules, why the specific latent heat of water has a high value. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
7 5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows the air pressure variation along a sound wave. air pressure above normal
normal
A
B distance along wave
below normal
Fig. 5.1 (i)
On AB in Fig. 5.1, mark one point of compression with a dot and the letter C and the next point of rarefaction with a dot and the letter R.
(ii)
In terms of the wavelength, what is the distance along the wave between a compression and the next rarefaction? ................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A sound wave travels through air at a speed of 340 m/s. Calculate the frequency of a sound wave of wavelength 1.3 m.
frequency = ......................... [2]
0625/3/O/N/02
[Turn over
8 6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows the results of an experiment to find the critical angle for light in a semicircular glass block. air
Q
glass
O
P
Fig. 6.1 The ray of light PO hits the glass at O at an angle of incidence of 0°. Q is the centre of the straight side of the block. (i)
Measure the critical angle of the glass from Fig. 6.1. critical angle = .........................
(ii)
Explain what is meant by the critical angle of the light in the glass. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/3/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
9 (b) Fig. 6.2 shows another ray passing through the same block. W
Q
Y Z Fig. 6.2 The speed of the light between W and Q is 3.0 × 108 m/s. The speed of the light between Q and Y is 2.0 × 108 m/s. (i)
State the speed of the light between Y and Z. speed = ......................................
(ii)
Write down an expression, in terms of the speeds of the light, that may be used to find the refractive index of the glass. Determine the value of the refractive index.
refractive index = ........................ (iii)
Explain why there is no change of direction of ray QY as it passes out of the glass. ...................................................................................................................................
(iv)
What happens to the wavelength of the light as it passes out of the glass? ................................................................................................................................... [5]
0625/3/O/N/02
[Turn over
10 7
Fig. 7.1 shows an arrangement that could be used for making an electromagnet or a permanent magnet. 12 V d.c. supply A
turns of thick copper wire
cardboard tube Fig. 7.1 Two bars of the same size are also available, one made of iron and the other of steel. (a) (i)
State which bar should be used to make a permanent magnet. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Describe how the apparatus would be used to make a permanent magnet. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Suggest one reason why the circuit contains an ammeter and a variable resistor. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/3/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
11 (b) During the making of a permanent magnet, the ammeter reads a steady current of 4.0 A throughout the 5.0 s that the current is switched on. The voltage of the supply is 12 V.
For Examiner’s Use
Calculate (i)
the total circuit resistance,
resistance = ............................ (ii)
the power of the supply,
power = ................................. (iii)
the energy supplied during the 5.0 s.
energy = ................................. [6] (c) The potential difference across the variable resistor is 7.0 V and that across the ammeter is zero. (i)
Calculate the potential difference across the magnetising coil.
potential difference = ................................. (ii)
State the general principle used in making this calculation. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/3/O/N/02
[Turn over
12 8
Fig. 8.1 shows a long straight wire between the poles of a permanent magnet. It is connected through a switch to a battery so that, when the switch is closed, there is a steady current in the wire.
N
S
wire in a direction at right angles to the page Fig. 8.1 (a) State the direction of the magnetic field between the poles of the magnet. ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) The wire is free to move. The current is switched on so that its direction is into the page. (i)
State the direction of movement of the wire. ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain how you reached your answer to (b)(i). ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
(c) This experiment is the basis of an electric motor. Describe two changes to the arrangement shown in Fig. 8.1 that would enable continuous rotation to take place. change 1 .......................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... change 2 .......................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
13 9
Fig. 9.1 shows a beam of electrons, two charged plates and a screen. These components are inside an electron tube, the outline of which is not shown.
For Examiner’s Use
charged plate P
beam of electrons X
screen
Y
charged plate Fig. 9.1 The beam of electrons hits the screen at the point P. (a) On Fig. 9.1, (i)
complete the path of the electron beam,
(ii)
mark the charges on both plates,
(iii)
mark with an arrow and the letter C the direction of the conventional current in the electron beam. [4]
(b) In this electron tube, the electrons are produced at X and are accelerated towards Y. In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the components needed to produce and accelerate the electrons. [4]
0625/3/O/N/02
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
14 10 Fig. 10.1 is part of the decay curve for a sample of a β-emitting isotope.
100 % activity 75 50 25 0 0
5
10
15
20 time / days
Fig. 10.1 (a) Use Fig. 10.1 to find the half-life of the isotope.
half-life = .......................... [1] (b) Complete Fig. 10.1 as far as time = 20 days, by working out the values of a number of points and plotting them. Show your working. [2]
(c) The decay product of the β-emitting isotope is not radioactive. Explain why the sample of the radioactive isotope will be safer after 20 days than after 1 day. Support your answer by reference to the graph. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1] (d) The isotope used for this decay curve may be represented by the symbol AZX. Write down an equation, by filling in the gaps below, to show the β-decay of this isotope to a decay product that has the symbol Y. AX Z
→
+
0625/3/O/N/02
Y
[2]
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/03
PHYSICS Paper 3
May/June 2003 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page. Stick your personal label here, if provided.
8 9 10 11 Total
This document consists of 12 printed pages. SP (AT/KN) S46413/2 © CIE 2003
[Turn over
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows apparatus that may be used to compare the strengths of two springs of the same size, but made from different materials.
spring
scale masses
Fig. 1.1 (a) (i)
Explain how the masses produce a force to stretch the spring. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain why this force, like all forces, is a vector quantity. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) Fig. 1.2 shows the graphs obtained when the two springs are stretched.
20 force/N
spring 1
15
spring 2
10 5 0
0
10
20
30
extension/mm Fig. 1.2
0625/3/M/J/03
40
For Examiner’s Use
3 (i)
State which spring is more difficult to extend. Quote values from the graphs to support your answer.
For Examiner’s Use
................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... (ii)
On the graph of spring 2, mark a point P at the limit of proportionality. Explain your choice of point P. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Use the graphs to find the difference in the extensions of the two springs when a force of 15 N is applied to each one.
difference in extensions = .................................. [6]
2
The speed of a cyclist reduces uniformly from 2.5 m/s to 1.0 m/s in 12 s. (a) Calculate the deceleration of the cyclist.
deceleration = ..................................[3]
(b) Calculate the distance travelled by the cyclist in this time.
distance = ..................................[2]
0625/3/M/J/03
[Turn over
4 3
Fig. 3.1 shows the arm of a crane when it is lifting a heavy box.
1220 N 950 N 40° 30° P box
Fig. 3.1 (a) By the use of a scale diagram (not calculation) of the forces acting at P, find the weight of the box. [5]
0625/3/M/J/03
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
5 (b) Another box of weight 1500 N is raised vertically by 3.0 m. (i)
Calculate the work done on the box.
work done = .................................. (ii)
The crane takes 2.5 s to raise this box 3.0 m. Calculate the power output of the crane.
power = .................................. [4]
4
Fig. 4.1 shows a sealed glass syringe that contains air and many very tiny suspended dust particles. syringe seal
piston dust particles Fig. 4.1 (a) Explain why the dust particles are suspended in the air and do not settle to the bottom. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] (b) The air in the syringe is at a pressure of 2.0 × 105 Pa. The piston is slowly moved into the syringe, keeping the temperature constant, until the volume of the air is reduced from 80 cm3 to 25 cm3. Calculate the final pressure of the air.
pressure = ..................................[3] 0625/3/M/J/03
[Turn over
6 5
Fig. 5.1 shows a thermocouple set up to measure the temperature at a point on a solar panel. Sun's rays surface of solar panel
Z X
cold junction Y
hot junction
Fig. 5.1 (a) X is a copper wire. (i)
Suggest a material for Y. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Name the component Z. ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Explain how a thermocouple is used to measure temperature. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] (c) Experiment shows that the temperature of the surface depends upon the type of surface used. Describe the nature of the surface that will cause the temperature to rise most. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/3/M/J/03
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
7 6
Fig. 6.1 shows wavefronts of light crossing the edge of a glass block from air into glass.
air direction in which wavefronts are moving glass
edge of glass Fig. 6.1 (a) On Fig. 6.1 (i)
draw in an incident ray, a normal and a refracted ray that meet at the same point on the edge of the glass block,
(ii)
label the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction,
(iii)
measure the two angles and record their values. angle of incidence = .................................. angle of refraction = .................................. [4]
(b) Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
refractive index = ..................................[3]
0625/3/M/J/03
[Turn over
8 7
For Examiner’s Use
In a thunderstorm, both light and sound waves are generated at the same time. (a) How fast does the light travel towards an observer? speed = ..................................
[1]
(b) Explain why the sound waves always reach the observer after the light waves. ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) The speed of sound waves in air may be determined by experiment using a source that generates light waves and sound waves at the same time. (i)
Draw a labelled diagram of the arrangement of suitable apparatus for the experiment.
(ii)
State the readings you would take. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Explain how you would calculate the speed of sound in air from your readings. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
0625/3/M/J/03
9 8
Fig. 8.1 shows a battery with a resistor connected across its terminals. The e.m.f. of the battery is 6.0 V.
For Examiner’s Use
6.0 V
Fig. 8.1 The battery causes 90 C of charge to flow through the circuit in 45 s. (a) Calculate (i)
the current in the circuit,
current = .................................. (ii)
the resistance of the circuit,
resistance = ..................................
(iii)
the electrical energy transformed in the circuit in 45 s.
energy = .................................. [6] (b) Explain what is meant by the term e.m.f. of the battery. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/M/J/03
[Turn over
10 9
A transformer has an output of 24 V when supplying a current of 2.0 A. The current in the primary coil is 0.40 A and the transformer is 100% efficient. (a) Calculate (i)
the power output of the transformer,
power = .................................. (ii) the voltage applied across the primary coil.
voltage = .................................. [4] (b) Explain (i)
what is meant by the statement that the transformer is 100% efficient, ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
how the transformer changes an input voltage into a different output voltage. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
0625/3/M/J/03
For Examiner’s Use
11 10 Fig. 10.1 and Fig. 10.2 show two views of a vertical wire carrying a current up through a horizontal card. Points P and Q are marked on the card.
P
Q
For Examiner’s Use
vertical wire
view from above the card Fig. 10.1
Fig. 10.2
(a) On Fig. 10.2, (i)
draw a complete magnetic field line (line of force) through P and indicate its direction with an arrow,
(ii)
draw an arrow through Q to indicate the direction in which a compass placed at Q would point. [3]
(b) State the effect on the direction in which compass Q points of (i)
increasing the current in the wire, ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
reversing the direction of the current in the wire. ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Fig. 10.3 shows the view from above of another vertical wire carrying a current up through a horizontal card. A cm grid is marked on the card. Point W is 1 cm vertically above the top surface of the card.
T R
vertical wire carrying current
S W
Fig. 10.3 State the magnetic field strength at S, T and W in terms of the magnetic field strength at R. Use one of the alternatives, weaker, same strength or stronger for each answer. at S ........................................................................ at T ........................................................................ at W........................................................................ 0625/3/M/J/03
[3] [Turn over
12
For Examiner’s Use
11 (a) A radioactive isotope emits only α-particles. (i)
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus you would use to prove that no β-particles or γ-radiation are emitted from the isotope.
(ii)
Describe the test you would carry out. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Explain how your results would show that only α-particles are emitted. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [6]
(b) Fig. 11.1 shows a stream of α-particles about to enter the space between the poles of a very strong magnet.
N α-particles
S
Fig. 11.1 Describe the path of the α-particles in the space between the magnetic poles. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] 0625/3/M/J/03
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/03
PHYSICS Paper 3
October/November 2003 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page.
9 10
Stick your personal label here, if provided.
11 Total
This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. MML 4504 11/02 S53411/2 © UCLES 2003
UNIVERSITY of CAMBRIDGE Local Examinations Syndicate
[Turn over
2 1
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a bus during tests. At time t = 0, the driver starts to brake. speed m/s
20 15
P test 2 graph
10 Q 5
test 1 graph R
0 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
time t / s Fig. 1.1 (a) For test 1, (i) determine how long the bus takes to stop, .................................................................................................................................. (ii) state which part of the graph shows the greatest deceleration, .................................................................................................................................. (iii) use the graph to determine how far the bus travels in the first 2 seconds.
distance = .......................................... [4] (b) For test 2, a device was fitted to the bus. The device changed the deceleration. (i) State two ways in which the deceleration during test 2 is different from that during test 1. 1 ............................................................................................................................... 2 ............................................................................................................................... (ii) Calculate the value of the deceleration in test 2.
deceleration = .................................... [4] 0625/03/O/N/03
3 (c) Fig. 1.2 shows a sketch graph of the magnitude of the acceleration for the bus when it is travelling around a circular track at constant speed.
For Examiner’s Use
magnitude of acceleration
0 0
time Fig. 1.2
(i) Use the graph to show that there is a force of constant magnitude acting on the bus. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. (ii) State the direction of this force. .................................................................................................................................. [3]
0625/03/O/N/03
[Turn over
4 2
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 2.1 shows a diver 50 m below the surface of the water. water surface
50 m
Fig. 2.1 (a) The density of water is 1000 kg/m 3 and the acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s 2 . Calculate the pressure that the water exerts on the diver.
pressure = .................................... [3] (b) The window in the diver’s helmet is 150 mm wide and 70 mm from top to bottom. Calculate the force that the water exerts on this window.
force = .......................................... [3]
0625/03/O/N/03
5 3
Fig. 3.1 shows a simple see-saw. One child A sits near to end X and another child B sits near to end Y. The feet of the children do not touch the ground when the see-saw is balanced. X
For Examiner’s Use
Y
pivot
Fig. 3.1 (a) Child A has a mass of 18.0 kg and child B has a mass of 20.0 kg. Without calculation, indicate where the children could sit so that the see-saw balances horizontally. You may draw on Fig. 3.1 if you wish. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) State the relationship between the moment caused by child A and that caused by child B. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Child A is 2.50 m from the pivot. Calculate the distance of child B from the pivot.
distance = .................................... [2]
0625/03/O/N/03
[Turn over
6 4
Fig. 4.1 shows water being heated by an electrical heater. The water in the can is not boiling, but some is evaporating.
can heater
water
Fig. 4.1 (a) Describe, in terms of the movement and energies of the water molecules, how evaporation takes place. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) State two differences between evaporation and boiling. 1 ....................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2 ....................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) After the water has reached its boiling point, the mass of water in the can is reduced by 3.2 g in 120 s. The heater supplies energy to the water at a rate of 60 W. Use this information to calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water.
specific latent heat = ............................. [3] 0625/03/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
7 5
For Examiner’s Use
(a) Equal volumes of nitrogen, water and copper at 20 °C are heated to 50 °C. (i) Which one of the three will have a much greater expansion than the other two? .................................................................................................................................. (ii) Explain your answer in terms of the way the molecules are arranged in the three substances. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [3] (b) Fig. 5.1 shows a thermometer with a range of –10 °C to 50 °C.
–10 °C
50 °C Fig. 5.1
Explain what is meant by (i) the sensitivity of a thermometer, .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. (ii) the linearity of a thermometer. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
0625/03/O/N/03
[Turn over
8 6
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 6.1 shows the diffraction of waves by a narrow gap. P is a wavefront that has passed through the gap.
P
Fig. 6.1 (a) On Fig. 6.1, draw three more wavefronts to the right of the gap.
[3]
(b) The waves travel towards the gap at a speed of 3 x 108 m/s and have a frequency of 5 x 1014 Hz. Calculate the wavelength of these waves.
wavelength = ................................ [3]
0625/03/O/N/03
9 7
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 7.1 is drawn to full scale. The focal length of the lens is 5.0 cm.
O
axis
Fig. 7.1 (a) On Fig. 7.1, mark each principal focus of the lens with a dot and the letter F.
[2]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays from the tip of the object O that appear to pass through the tip of the image. [2] (c) On Fig. 7.1, draw the image and label it with the letter I.
[1]
(d) Explain why the base of the image lies on the axis. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (e) State a practical use of a convex lens when used as shown in Fig. 7.1. .................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/03/O/N/03
[Turn over
10 8
Fig. 8.1 shows the outline of an a.c. generator. The peak output voltage of the generator is 6.0 V and the output has a frequency of 10 Hz.
N
output
coil iron core bearing
rings connected one to each end of coil
S
handle to turn coil
Fig. 8.1 (a) Fig. 8.2 shows the axes of a voltage-time graph for the generator output.
voltage / V
0
0
0.1
0.2
0.3 time / s
Fig. 8.2 On Fig. 8.2, (i) mark suitable voltage values on the voltage axis, (ii) draw a graph of the generator output. [3] 0625/03/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
11
For Examiner’s Use
(b) The generator shown in Fig. 8.1 works by electromagnetic induction. Explain how this effect produces the output voltage. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] (c) State the energy changes that occur in the generator when it is producing output. .................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/03/O/N/03
[Turn over
12 9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows the screen of a c.r.o. (cathode-ray oscilloscope). The c.r.o. is being used to display the output from a microphone. The vertical scale on the screen is in volts.
voltage / V
2 1 0
—1 —2
Fig. 9.1 (i) Describe the output from the microphone. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. (ii) Use the graph to determine the peak voltage of the output. .................................................................................................................................. (iii) Describe how you could check that the voltage calibration on the screen is correct. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [4]
0625/03/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
13 (b) Fig. 9.2 shows the screen of the c.r.o. when it is being used to measure a small time interval between two voltage pulses.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
For Examiner’s Use
10
cm scale
Fig. 9.2 (i) What is the distance on the screen between the two voltage pulses? .................................................................................................................................. (ii) The time-base control of the c.r.o. is set at 5.0 ms / cm. Calculate the time interval between the voltage pulses.
time = ........................................ (iii) Suggest one example where a c.r.o. can be used to measure a small time interval. .................................................................................................................................. [4]
0625/03/O/N/03
[Turn over
14 10 Fig. 10.1 shows a battery with an e.m.f of 12 V supplying power to two lamps. The total power supplied is 150 W when both lamps are on.
L1
L2
Fig. 10.1 (a) Calculate the current supplied by the battery when both lamps are on.
current = ...................................... [2] (b) The current in lamp L2 is 5.0 A. Calculate (i) the current in lamp L1,
current = ............................................ (ii) the power of lamp L1,
power = .............................................. (iii) the resistance of lamp L1.
resistance = ....................................... [6] 0625/03/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
15 11 (a) A sodium nucleus decays by the emission of a -particle to form magnesium. (i) Complete the decay equation below. 24 Na 11
→
Mg +
(ii) Fig. 11.1 shows -particles from sodium nuclei moving into the space between the poles of a magnet.
N
-particles
S
Fig. 11.1 Describe the path of the -particles between the magnetic poles. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [5] (b) Very small quantities of a radioactive isotope are used to check the circulation of blood by injecting the isotope into the bloodstream. (i) Describe how the results are obtained. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. (ii) Explain why a -emitting isotope is used for this purpose rather than one that emits either -particles or -particles. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [4]
0625/03/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/03
PHYSICS Paper 3
May/June 2004 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
For Examiner’s Use
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page. Stick your personal label here, if provided.
8 9 10 11 Total
This document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages. SPA (NH/BI) S61207/2 © UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2 1
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 1.1 shows a cycle track. A
B
E
C
v = 6 m/s
D Fig. 1.1 A cyclist starts at A and follows the path ABCDEB. The speed-time graph is shown in Fig. 1.2. B
C
D
E
B
6 speed m/s 5 4 3 2 1 0A 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
time / s Fig. 1.2 (a) Use information from Fig. 1.1 and Fig. 1.2 to describe the motion of the cyclist (i)
along AB, ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
along BCDEB. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
3
For Examiner’s Use
(b) The velocity v of the cyclist at C is shown in Fig. 1.1. State one similarity and one difference between the velocity at C and the velocity at E. similarity ........................................................................................................................... difference ......................................................................................................................[2] (c) Calculate (i)
the distance along the cycle track from A to B,
distance = ………………… (ii)
the circumference of the circular part of the track.
circumference = ………………… [4]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
[Turn over
4 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a rock that is falling from the top of a cliff into the river below.
cliff
falling rock
river
Fig. 2.1 (a) The mass of the rock is 75 kg. The acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2. Calculate the weight of the rock.
weight = …………………[1] (b) The rock falls from rest through a distance of 15 m before it hits the water. Calculate its kinetic energy just before hitting the water. Show your working.
kinetic energy = …………………[3] (c) The rock hits the water. Suggest what happens to the kinetic energy of the rock during the impact. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
5 3
For Examiner’s Use
A large spring is repeatedly stretched by an athlete to increase the strength of his arms. Fig. 3.1 is a table showing the force required to stretch the spring. extension of spring / m force exerted to produce extension / N
0.096
0.192
0.288
0.384
250
500
750
1000
Fig. 3.1 (a) (i)
State Hooke’s law. ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Use the results in Fig. 3.1 to show that the spring obeys Hooke’s law.
[1] (b) Another athlete using a different spring exerts an average force of 400 N to enable her to extend the spring by 0.210 m. (i)
Calculate the work done by this athlete in extending the spring once.
work done = ………………… (ii)
She is able to extend the spring by this amount and to release it 24 times in 60 s. Calculate the power used by this athlete while doing this exercise.
power = ………………… [4]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
[Turn over
6 4
(a) Two identical open boxes originally contain the same volume of water. One is kept at 15 °C and the other at 85 °C for the same length of time. Fig. 4.1 shows the final water levels.
15 °C
85 °C
Fig. 4.1 With reference to the energies of the water molecules, explain why the levels are different. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) In an experiment to find the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water, it took 34 500 J of energy to evaporate 15 g of water that was originally at 100 °C. A second experiment showed that 600 J of energy was lost to the atmosphere from the apparatus during the time it took to evaporate 15 g of water. Calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water that would be obtained from this experiment.
specific latent heat = …………………[3]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
7 5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows two identical metal plates. The front surface of one is dull black and the front surface of the other is shiny silver. The plates are fitted with heaters that keep the surfaces of the plates at the same temperature. dull black
For Examiner’s Use
shiny silver
Fig. 5.1 (i)
State the additional apparatus needed to test which surface is the best emitter of heat radiation. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State one precaution that is needed to ensure a fair comparison. ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
State the result that you expect. ...................................................................................................................................
(iv)
Write down another name for heat radiation. ................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of an everyday situation in which a convection current occurs. Mark the path of the current with a line and show its direction with arrows.
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
[3]
[Turn over
8 6
Fig. 6.1 shows a ray PQ of blue light incident on the side of a rectangular glass block.
A
B
glass
C Q
D
air
Fig. 6.1
P
Fig. 6.1 (a) (i) (ii)
By drawing on Fig. 6.1, continue the ray PQ through and beyond the block. Mark the angle of incidence at CD with the letter i and the angle of refraction at CD with the letter r. [3]
(b) The speed of light in air is 3.0 x 108 m/s and the speed of light in glass is 2.0 x 108 m/s. (i)
Write down a formula that gives the refractive index of glass in terms of the speeds of light in air and glass. refractive index =
(ii)
Use this formula to calculate the refractive index of glass. refractive index = ………………… [2]
(c) The frequency of the blue light in ray PQ is 6.0 x 1014 Hz. Calculate the wavelength of this light in air.
wavelength = ……………..……[2] © UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
9 7
Fig. 7.1 shows the cone of a loudspeaker that is producing sound waves in air. At any given moment, a series of compressions and rarefactions exist along the line XY.
For Examiner’s Use
cone
X
Y
wires air
Fig. 7.1 (a) On Fig. 7.1, use the letter C to mark three compressions and the letter R to mark three rarefactions along XY. [1] (b) Explain what is meant by (i)
a compression, ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
a rarefaction. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A sound wave is a longitudinal wave. With reference to the sound wave travelling along XY in Fig. 7.1, explain what is meant by a longitudinal wave. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (d) There is a large vertical wall 50 m in front of the loudspeaker. The wall reflects the sound waves. The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s. Calculate the time taken for the sound waves to travel from X to the wall and to return to X.
time = …………………[2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
[Turn over
10 8
Fig. 8.1 shows a 240 V a.c. mains circuit to which a number of appliances are connected and switched on.
240 V a.c.
refrigerator
fan 1.2 kW
200 W
60 W
60 W
Fig. 8.1 (a) Calculate the power supplied to the circuit.
power = …………..[1] (b) The appliances are connected in parallel. (i)
Explain what connected in parallel means. ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State two advantages of connecting the appliances in parallel rather than in series. advantage 1 ............................................................................................................... advantage 2 ............................................................................................................... [3] (c) Calculate (i)
the current in the refrigerator,
current = ………….. (ii) the energy used by the fan in 3 hours,
energy = ………….. (iii) the resistance of the filament of one lamp.
resistance = ………….. [7] © UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
11 9
Electromagnetic induction can be demonstrated using a solenoid, a magnet, a sensitive ammeter and connecting wire.
For Examiner’s Use
(a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus set up to demonstrate electromagnetic induction. [2]
(b) State one way of using the apparatus to produce an induced current. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) Explain why your method produces an induced current. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (d) Without changing the apparatus, state what must be done to produce (i)
an induced current in the opposite direction to the original current, ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
a larger induced current. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
[Turn over
12 10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows the faces of two ammeters. One has an analogue display and the other a digital display.
3
2 1
A
4 5
0
A
Fig. 10.1 State what is meant by the terms analogue and digital. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (b) (i)
Name the components from which logic gates are made. ...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
(iii)
© UCLES 2004
In the space below, draw the symbol for an AND gate. Label the inputs and the output.
[1]
Describe the action of an AND gate with two inputs.
[2]
0625/03 M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
13
For Examiner’s Use
11 (a) α-particles can be scattered by thin gold foils. Fig. 11.1 shows part of the paths of three α-particles. Complete the paths of the three α-particles.
[3]
α-particle 1 α-particle 2
α-particle 3
gold nuclei
Fig. 11.1 (b) What does the scattering of α-particles show about atomic structure? .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) State the nucleon number (mass number) of an α-particle. nucleon number = …………………[1]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education PHYSICS Paper 3
0625/03 October/November 2004 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
Candidate Name
Centre Number
Candidate Number
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
For Examiner’s Use
1
Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
2
DO NOT WRITE IN THE BARCODE.
6
DO NOT WRITE IN THE GREY AREAS BETWEEN THE PAGES.
7
If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given on this page. Stick your personal label here, if provided.
3 4 5
8 9 10 11 Total
This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. SPA (NH/BI) S80765/4 © UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows the path of one drop of water in the jet from a powerful hose.
vertical path of a single water drop
hose set in ground
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2 is a graph of speed against time for the water drop shown in Fig. 1.1. speed 40 m/s 30 20 10 0 0
2
4 6 8 time after leaving the hose / s Fig. 1.2
(a) Describe the movement of the water drop in the first 4 s after leaving the hose. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) Use Fig. 1.2 to find (i)
For Examiner’s Use
the speed of the water leaving the hose, speed = …………………...
(ii)
the time when the speed of the water is least. time = ………….……….. [2]
(c) Use values from Fig. 1.2 to calculate the acceleration of the drop as it falls back towards the ground. Show your working.
acceleration = ……………………...[3] (d) Calculate the greatest distance above the ground reached by the drop.
distance = ……………………...[3]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
[Turn over
4 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a reservoir that stores water.
For Examiner’s Use
20 m valve
water dam exit pipe
Fig. 2.1 (a) The valve in the exit pipe is closed. The density of water is 1000 kg/m3 and the acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2. Calculate the pressure of the water acting on the closed valve in the exit pipe.
pressure = ……………………...[2] (b) The cross-sectional area of the pipe is 0.5 m2. Calculate the force exerted by the water on the closed valve.
force = ……………………...[2] (c) The valve is then opened and water, originally at the surface of the reservoir, finally flows out of the exit pipe. State the energy transformation of this water between the surface of the reservoir and the open end of the pipe. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
5 3
A scientist needs to find the density of a sample of rock whilst down a mine. He has only a spring balance, a measuring cylinder, some water and some thread. (a) In the space below, draw two labelled diagrams, one to show the spring balance being used and the other to show the measuring cylinder being used with a suitable rock sample. [2]
(b) The spring balance is calibrated in newtons. State how the mass of the rock sample may be found from the reading of the spring balance. ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) State the readings that would be taken from the measuring cylinder. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1] (d) State how the volume of the rock would be found from the readings. ......................................................................................................................................[1] (e) State in words the formula that would be used to find the density of the sample.
density = [1]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
6 4
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows a simple type of thermocouple that has been calibrated to measure temperature. copper wire
hot junction
V iron wire
sensitive voltmeter cold junction
Fig. 4.1 (i)
Describe how the thermocouple could be used to measure the temperature of a beaker of hot water. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State two situations where a thermocouple would be a good choice of thermometer to measure temperature. 1. .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................... 2. .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
7 (b) A mercury-in-glass thermometer is placed in an insulated beaker of water at 60 °C. The water is heated at a constant rate. The temperature of the water is measured and recorded on the graph shown in Fig. 4.2.
100 temperature/°C
80 60 40 20 0
0
5
10
15
20 time/min
Fig. 4.2 State the effect of the heat supplied (i)
during the period 0 to 5 minutes, ................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................
(ii)
during the period 10 to 15 minutes. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
8 5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows a sealed box.
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 5.1 (i)
The box contains a large number of air molecules. On Fig. 5.1, draw a possible path of one of the air molecules, as it moves inside the box.
(ii)
Explain 1
how air molecules in the box create a pressure on the inside walls, ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................
2
why this pressure rises as the temperature of the air in the box increases. ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) Air in a cylinder is compressed slowly, so that the temperature does not rise. The pressure changes from 2.0 x 105 Pa to 5.0 x 105 Pa. The original volume was 0.35 m3. Calculate the new volume.
volume = …………………...[3]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
9 6
Fig. 6.1 shows an optical fibre. XY is a ray of light passing along the fibre.
For Examiner’s Use
Y
fibre Z
X
Fig. 6.1 (a) On Fig. 6.1, continue the ray XY until it passes Z.
[1]
(b) Explain why the ray does not leave the fibre at Y. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) The light in the optical fibre has a wavelength of 3.2 x 10–7 m and is travelling at a speed of 1.9 x 108 m/s. (i)
Calculate the frequency of the light.
frequency = …………………... (ii)
The speed of light in air is 3.0 x 108 m/s. Calculate the refractive index of the material from which the fibre is made.
refractive index = …………………... [4]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
[Turn over
10 7
Fig. 7.1 shows a 12 V battery connected to a number of resistors.
For Examiner’s Use
12 V 4Ω 4Ω
A 8Ω
5Ω
5Ω
Fig. 7.1 (a) Calculate the current in the 8 Ω resistor.
current = ………………..[2] (b) Calculate, for the resistors connected in the circuit, the combined resistance of (i)
the two 5 Ω resistors,
resistance = ……………….. (ii)
the two 4 Ω resistors.
resistance = ……………….. [2] (c) The total current in the two 4 Ω resistors is 6 A. Calculate the total power dissipated in the two resistors.
power = ………………..[2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
11 (d) What will be the reading on a voltmeter connected across (i)
For Examiner’s Use
the two 4 Ω resistors,
reading = ……………….. (ii)
one 5 Ω resistor?
reading = ……………….. [2] (e) The 8 Ω resistor is made from a length of resistance wire of uniform cross-sectional area. State the effect on the resistance of the wire of using (i)
the same length of the same material with a greater cross-sectional area, ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
a smaller length of the same material with the same cross-sectional area. ................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
[Turn over
12 8
Fig. 8.1 shows plane waves passing through a gap in a barrier that is approximately equal to the wavelength of the waves. barrier
Fig. 8.1 (a) What is the name given to the wave property shown in Fig. 8.1? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) In the space below, carefully draw the pattern that would be obtained if the gap were increased to six times the wavelength of the waves. [4]
(c) The effect in Fig. 8.1 is often shown using water waves on the surface of a tank of water. These are transverse waves. Explain what is meant by a transverse wave. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] © UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
13 9
(a) An engine on a model railway needs a 6 V a.c. supply. A mains supply of 240 V a.c. is available. (i)
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a transformer suitable for producing the required supply voltage.
(ii)
Suggest suitable numbers of turns for the coils. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) The power needed for this model engine is 12 W. Calculate the current taken from the mains when just this engine is in use, assuming that the transformer is 100% efficient.
current = ………………..[2] (c) Explain why transformers will only work when connected to an a.c. supply. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
14 10 (a) (i)
What is the function of a transistor when placed in an electrical circuit? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Describe the action of a transistor. ................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) (i)
(ii)
In the space below, draw the symbol for an OR gate. Label the inputs and the output. [1]
Describe the action of an OR gate that has two inputs. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
15 11 (a) The decay of a nucleus of radium 226 Ra leads to the emission of an α-particle and 88 leaves behind a nucleus of radon (Rn). In the space below, write an equation to show this decay. [2]
(b) In an experiment to find the range of α-particles in air, the apparatus in Fig. 11.1 was used. α−particle source
detector
ruler Fig. 11.1 The results of this experiment are shown below. count rate / (counts/minute) distance from source to detector/cm
(i)
681 562 441 382 317 1
2
3
4
5
20
19
21
19
6
7
8
9
State what causes the count rate 9 cm from the source. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Estimate the count rate that is due to the source at a distance of 2 cm. ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Suggest a value for the maximum distance that α-particles can travel from the source. ...................................................................................................................................
(iv)
Justify your answer to (iii). ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education PHYSICS Paper 3
0625/03 May/June 2005 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
Candidate Name
Centre Number
Candidate Number
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2
Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
3 4 5 6
DO NOT WRITE IN THE BARCODE.
7
DO NOT WRITE IN THE GREY AREAS BETWEEN THE PAGES.
8 9 10 11 Total This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. SPA (SJF3442/CG) S92054/2.1 © UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2 1
A solid plastic sphere falls towards the Earth. Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph of the fall up to the point where the sphere hits the Earth’s surface. 140 R speed m/s
S
T
120 100 80 60 Q 40 20 P
0 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70 80 time / s
90
100 110
Fig. 1.1 (a) Describe in detail the motion of the sphere shown by the graph. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) On Fig. 1.2, draw arrows to show the directions of the forces acting on the sphere when it is at the position shown by point S on the graph. Label your arrows with the names of the forces. [2]
Fig. 1.2 (c) Explain why the sphere is moving with constant speed at S. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) Use the graph to calculate the approximate distance that the sphere falls (i)
between R and T,
(ii)
between P and Q.
distance = ………………. [2]
distance = ………………. [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
4 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a simple pendulum that swings backwards and forwards between P and Q.
support string
P
R
Q pendulum bob Fig. 2.1
(a) The time taken for the pendulum to swing from P to Q is approximately 0.5 s. Describe how you would determine this time as accurately as possible. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) (i)
State the two vertical forces acting on the pendulum bob when it is at position R. 1. ............................................................................................................................... 2. .......................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The pendulum bob moves along the arc of a circle. State the direction of the resultant of the two forces in (i). .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The mass of the bob is 0.2 kg. During the swing it moves so that P is 0.05 m higher than R. Calculate the increase in potential energy of the pendulum bob between R and P.
potential energy = ………………. [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
For Examiner’s Use
5 3
A mass of 3.0 kg accelerates at 2.0 m/s2 in a straight line. (a) State why the velocity and the acceleration are both described as vector quantities. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) Calculate the force required to accelerate the mass.
force = ………………. [2] (c) The mass hits a wall. The average force exerted on the wall during the impact is 120 N. The area of the mass in contact with the wall at impact is 0.050 m2. Calculate the average pressure that the mass exerts on the wall during the impact.
pressure = ………………. [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
6 4
Fig. 4.1 shows apparatus that a student uses to make an estimate of the specific heat capacity of iron.
electrical heater
thermometer
iron block
Fig. 4.1 (a) The power of the heater is known. State the four readings the student must take to find the specific heat capacity of iron. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... 3. ...................................................................................................................................... 4. ................................................................................................................................. [3] (b) Write down an equation, in words or in symbols, that could be used to work out the specific heat capacity of iron from the readings in (a).
[2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
For Examiner’s Use
7 (c) (i)
Explain why the value obtained with this apparatus is higher than the actual value. ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
State one addition to the apparatus that would help to improve the accuracy of the value obtained. ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
8 5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows the paths of a few air molecules and a single dust particle. The actual air molecules are too small to show on the diagram.
paths of air molecules dust particle
Fig. 5.1 Explain why the dust particle undergoes small random movements. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [4] (b) Fig. 5.2 shows the paths of a few molecules leaving the surface of a liquid. The liquid is below its boiling point.
air and vapour liquid Fig. 5.2 (i)
State which liquid molecules are most likely to leave the surface. ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain your answer to (i). ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
For Examiner’s Use
9 6
Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light OPQ passing through a semi-circular glass block.
For Examiner’s Use
O
P
30°
Q
Fig. 6.1 (a) Explain why there is no change in the direction of the ray at P. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) State the changes, if any, that occur to the speed, wavelength and frequency of the light as it enters the glass block. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) At Q some of the light in ray OPQ is reflected and some is refracted. On Fig. 6.1, draw in the approximate positions of the reflected ray and the refracted ray. Label these rays. [2] (d) The refractive index for light passing from glass to air is 0.67. Calculate the angle of refraction of the ray that is refracted at Q into air.
angle = ………………. [3]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
[Turn over
10 7
Fig. 7.1 shows the parts of the electromagnetic spectrum.
ultraviolet
γ - rays and X - rays
v i s i b l e
infrared
For Examiner’s Use
radio waves
Fig. 7.1 (a) Name one type of radiation that has (i)
a higher frequency than ultra-violet, .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
a longer wavelength than visible light. .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Some γ-rays emitted from a radioactive source have a speed in air of 3.0 x 108 m/s and a wavelength of 1.0 x 10–12 m. Calculate the frequency of the γ-rays.
frequency = ………………. [2] (c) State the approximate speed of infra-red waves in air. ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
11 8
A student has a power supply, a resistor, a voltmeter, an ammeter and a variable resistor. (a) The student obtains five sets of readings from which he determines an average value for the resistance of the resistor. In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a circuit that he could use.
[3] (b) Describe how the circuit should be used to obtain the five sets of readings. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) Fig. 8.1 shows another circuit. 6.0 V
A
resistor 3.0 Ω
resistor of unknown value
Fig. 8.1 When the circuit is switched on, the ammeter reads 0.50 A. (i)
Calculate the value of the unknown resistor.
resistance = ………………. [2] (ii)
Calculate the charge passing through the 3.0 Ω resistor in 120 s.
charge = ………………. [1] (iii)
Calculate the power dissipated in the 3.0 Ω resistor. power = ………………. [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
12 9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows an a.c. supply connected to a resistor and a diode.
a.c. supply
resistor
For Examiner’s Use
output
Fig. 9.1 (i)
State the effect of fitting the diode in the circuit. ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 9.2, sketch graphs to show the variation of the a.c. supply voltage and the output voltage with time. a.c. supply voltage 0 time output voltage 0
time
Fig. 9.2 [2] (b) (i)
In the space below, draw the symbol for a NOT gate.
[1] (ii)
State the action of a NOT gate. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
13 10 (a) Fig. 10.1 is the decay curve for a radioactive isotope that emits only β-particles.
For Examiner’s Use
400 count rate counts / min
300 200 100 0 0
10
30 time / min
20
40
Fig. 10.1 Use the graph to find the value of the half-life of the isotope. Indicate, on the graph, how you arrived at your value.
half-life …………………………. [2] (b) A student determines the percentage of β-particles absorbed by a thick aluminium sheet. He uses a source that is emitting only β-particles and that has a long half-life. (i)
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus required, set up to make the determination.
[2] (ii)
List the readings that the student needs to take. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
[Turn over
14 11 Fig. 11.1 shows a flexible wire hanging between two magnetic poles. The flexible wire is connected to a 12 V d.c. supply that is switched off. wire fixed here
N
S
+ 12 V d.c. –
flexible wire hanging between magnetic poles wire fixed here Fig. 11.1 (a) Explain why the wire moves when the supply is switched on. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) State the direction of the deflection of the wire. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) When the wire first moves, energy is changed from one form to another. State these two forms of energy. from ........................................................... to ............................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
For Examiner’s Use
15 (d) Fig. 11.2 shows the flexible wire made into a rigid rectangular coil and mounted on an axle. magnetic pole axle
N
N coil
magnetic pole
S
S
axle
Fig. 11.2 (i)
Add to the diagram an arrangement that will allow current to be fed into the coil whilst allowing the coil to turn continuously. Label the parts you have added. [1]
(ii)
Briefly explain how your arrangement works. ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
For Examiner’s Use
16 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/03/M/J/05
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS Paper 3 Extended
0625/03 October/November 2005 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs, music or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2
Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
3 4 5 6
DO NOT WRITE IN THE BARCODE.
7
DO NOT WRITE IN THE GREY AREAS BETWEEN THE PAGES.
8 9 10 11 Total
This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. SP (SJF3441/CG) T03202/4 © UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2 1
(a) State what is meant by the terms (i)
weight, ...................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
density. ...................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A student is given a spring balance that has a scale in newtons. The student is told that the acceleration of free-fall is 10 m/s2. (i)
Describe how the student could find the mass of an irregular solid object. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii)
Describe how the student could go on to find the density of the object. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 1.1 shows three forces acting on an object of mass 0.5 kg. All three forces act through the centre of mass of the object. centre of mass 9.0 N
3.0 N 4.0 N Fig. 1.1
Calculate (i)
the magnitude and direction of the resultant force on the object,
magnitude = ……………… (ii)
direction .............................................................. [2]
the magnitude of the acceleration of the object.
acceleration =…………………… [2] © UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
Fig. 2.1 shows apparatus for investigating moments of forces.
spring balance
0
10
20
30
For Examiner’s Use
horizontally balanced metre rule
40
60
50
70
80
90
100
horizontal pivot
6.0 N weight Fig. 2.1
The uniform metre rule shown in Fig. 2.1 is in equilibrium. (a) Write down two conditions for the metre rule to be in equilibrium. condition 1 ........................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... condition 2 ........................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) Show that the value of the reading on the spring balance is 8.0 N.
[2]
(c) The weight of the uniform metre rule is 1.5 N. Calculate the force exerted by the pivot on the metre rule.
magnitude of force = ………………………………… direction of force ………………………………… [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
[Turn over
4 3
Fig. 3.1 shows a pond that is kept at a constant depth by a pressure-operated valve in the base.
water
pressure-operated valve
outlet
spring Fig. 3.1 (a) The pond is kept at a depth of 2.0 m. The density of water is 1000 kg/m3. Calculate the water pressure on the valve.
pressure =…………………….. [2] (b) The force required to open the valve is 50 N. The valve will open when the water depth reaches 2.0 m. Calculate the area of the valve.
area = ……………………….. [2] (c) The water supply is turned off and the valve is held open so that water drains out through the valve. State the energy changes of the water that occur as the depth of the water drops from 2.0 m to zero. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
For Examiner’s Use
5 4
Fig. 4.1 shows apparatus that could be used to measure the specific latent heat of ice.
60 W heater power supply
melting ice at 0 °C
beaker
Fig. 4.1 (a) Describe how you would use the apparatus. You may assume that ice at 0 °C and a stopwatch are available. State all the readings that would be needed at each stage. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [4] (b) In an experiment, 120 g of ice at 0 °C is to be melted. The specific latent heat of ice is 340 J/g. Assume that all the energy from the heater will be used to melt the ice. Calculate the expected time for which the 60 W heater is switched on.
expected time = …………………… [2] (c) When the experiment is carried out, the ice melts in slightly less time than the expected time. (i)
State one reason why this happens. ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
Suggest one modification to the experiment that would reduce the difference between the experimental time and the expected time. ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [1] [Turn over 0625/03/O/N/05
© UCLES 2005
For Examiner’s Use
6 5
Fig. 5.1 shows a way of indicating the positions and direction of movement of some molecules in a gas at one instant.
piston cylinder Fig. 5.1 (a) (i)
Describe the movement of the molecules. .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
Explain how the molecules exert a pressure on the container walls. ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) When the gas in the cylinder is heated, it pushes the piston further out of the cylinder. State what happens to (i)
the average spacing of the molecules, .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
the average speed of the molecules. .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The gas shown in Fig. 5.1 is changed into a liquid and then into a solid by cooling. Compare the gaseous and solid states in terms of (i)
the movement of the molecules, ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
the average separation of the molecules. ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
For Examiner’s Use
7 6
Fig. 6.1 shows the path of a sound wave from a source X.
For Examiner’s Use
X path of sound wave
wall
Y
Fig. 6.1 (a) State why a person standing at point Y hears an echo. ..................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) The frequency of the sound wave leaving X is 400 Hz. State the frequency of the sound wave reaching Y.
frequency = ……………….. [1] (c) The speed of the sound wave leaving X is 330 m/s. Calculate the wavelength of these sound waves.
wavelength = ………………………. [2] (d) Sound waves are longitudinal waves. State what is meant by the term longitudinal. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
[Turn over
8 7
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows two rays of light from a point O on an object. These rays are incident on a plane mirror.
O Fig. 7.1 (i)
On Fig. 7.1, continue the paths of the two rays after they reach the mirror. Hence locate the image of the object O. Label the image I. [2]
(ii)
Describe the nature of the image I. ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 7.2 is drawn to scale. It shows an object PQ and a convex lens.
position of convex lens
P
F principal focus
F Q
principal focus
Fig. 7.2
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
principal axis
For Examiner’s Use
9 (i)
On Fig. 7.2, draw two rays from the top of the object P that pass through the lens. Use these rays to locate the top of the image. Label this point T. [3]
(ii)
On Fig. 7.2, draw an eye symbol to show the position from which the image T should be viewed. [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
10 8
Fig. 8.1 shows a high-voltage supply connected across two metal plates. +
–
high-voltage supply A
metal plates Fig. 8.1 When the supply is switched on, an electric field is present between the plates. (a) Explain what is meant by an electric field . ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) On Fig. 8.1, draw the electric field lines between the plates and indicate their direction by arrows. [2] (c) The metal plates are now joined by a high-resistance wire. A charge of 0.060 C passes along the wire in 30 s. Calculate the reading on the ammeter.
ammeter reading = ……………………… [2] (d) The potential difference of the supply is re-set to 1500 V and the ammeter reading changes to 0.0080 A. Calculate the energy supplied in 10 s. Show your working.
energy = ………………. [3]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
For Examiner’s Use
11 9
(a) In the space provided, draw the symbol for a NOR gate. Label the inputs and the output.
[2] (b) State whether the output of a NOR gate will be high (ON) or low (OFF) when (i)
one input is high and one input is low, ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
both inputs are high. ................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Fig. 9.1 shows a digital circuit made from three NOT gates and one NAND gate.
HIGH
LOW
Fig. 9.1 (i)
Write HIGH or LOW in each of the boxes on Fig. 9.1.
(ii)
State the effect on the output of changing both of the inputs.
[2]
................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
12 10 Fig. 10.1 shows the basic parts of a transformer.
For Examiner’s Use
X
primary coil
secondary coil X
input
output
Y Y Fig. 10.1 (a) Use ideas of electromagnetic induction to explain how the input voltage is transformed into an output voltage. Use the three questions below to help you with your answer. What happens in the primary coil? .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... What happens in the core? .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... What happens in the secondary coil? .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [5] (b) State what is needed to make the output voltage higher than the input voltage. ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
13 (c) The core of this transformer splits along XX and YY. Explain why the transformer would not work if the two halves of the core were separated by about 30 cm. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) A 100% efficient transformer is used to step up the voltage of a supply from 100 V to 200 V. A resistor is connected to the output. The current in the primary coil is 0.4 A. Calculate the current in the secondary coil. current = …………………… [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
14 11 A radioactive source emits only β-particles. (a) A scientist wishes to investigate the deflection of β-particles by an electric field. Draw a labelled diagram to suggest a suitable experimental arrangement.
[3] (b) State how the apparatus would be used to show the deflection of the β-particles by the electric field. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) State how the results would show the deflection of the β-particles. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) Explain the direction of the deflection obtained. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
For Examiner’s Use
15 BLANK PAGE
0625/03/O/N/05
16 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/03/O/N/05
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education PHYSICS Paper 3 Extended
0625/03 May/June 2006 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2
Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
3
DO NOT WRITE IN THE BARCODE.
5
DO NOT WRITE IN THE GREY AREAS BETWEEN THE PAGES.
6
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
7
4
8 9 10 11 Total
This document consists of 12 printed pages. SP (SLM/KS) T04130/2 © UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2 1
A bus travels from one bus stop to the next. The journey has three distinct parts. Stated in order they are uniform acceleration from rest for 8.0 s, uniform speed for 12 s, non-uniform deceleration for 5.0 s. Fig. 1.1 shows only the deceleration of the bus. 15 speed m/s 10
5
0 0
5
10
15
20
25
time/s Fig. 1.1 (a) On Fig. 1.1, complete the graph to show the first two parts of the journey.
[3]
(b) Calculate the acceleration of the bus 4.0 s after leaving the first bus stop.
acceleration = ........................[2] (c) Use the graph to estimate the distance the bus travels between 20 s and 25 s.
estimated distance = ........................[2] (d) On leaving the second bus stop, the uniform acceleration of the bus is 1.2 m / s2. The mass of the bus and passengers is 4000 kg. Calculate the accelerating force that acts on the bus.
force = ........................[2] (e) The acceleration of the bus from the second bus stop is less than that from the first bus stop. Suggest two reasons for this. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] © UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
A student sets up the apparatus shown in Fig. 2.1 in order to find the resultant of the two tensions T1 and T2 acting at P. When the tensions T1, T2 and T3 are balanced, the angles between T1 and the vertical and T2 and the vertical are as marked on Fig. 2.1. pulley
pulley
T1 = 6.0 N 69°
44°
T2 = 8.0 N
vertical board
P T3
Fig. 2.1 In the space below, draw a scale diagram of the forces T1 and T2. Use the diagram to find the resultant of the two forces.
State (a) the scale used,
scale = ........................................
(b) the value of the resultant,
value = ........................................
(c) the direction of the resultant.
© UCLES 2006
direction = ........................................ [6]
0625/03/M/J/06
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
4 3
An electric pump is used to raise water from a well, as shown in Fig. 3.1. pump ground
well
Fig. 3.1 (a) The pump does work in raising the water. State an equation that could be used to calculate the work done in raising the water. ......................................................................................................................................[2] (b) The water is raised through a vertical distance of 8.0 m. The weight of water raised in 5.0 s is 100 N. (i)
Calculate the work done in raising the water in this time.
work done = .......................[1] (ii)
Calculate the power the pump uses to raise the water.
power = ........................[1] (iii)
The energy transferred by the pump to the water is greater than your answer to (i). Suggest what the additional energy is used for. ..............................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
For Examiner’s Use
5 4
(a) State two differences between evaporation of water and boiling of water. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ..................................................................................................................................[2] (b) The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2260 kJ / kg. Explain why this energy is needed to boil water and why the temperature of the water does not change during the boiling. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] (c) A laboratory determination of the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water uses a 120 W heater to keep water boiling at its boiling point. Water is turned into steam at the rate of 0.050 g / s. Calculate the value of the specific latent heat of vaporisation obtained from this experiment. Show your working.
specific latent heat of vaporisation = ........................[3]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
6 5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows a tank used for evaporating salt solution to produce crystals. evaporating tank steam in salt solution steam out
Fig. 5.1 Suggest two ways of increasing the rate of evaporation of the water from the solution. Changes may be made to the apparatus, but the rate of steam supply must stay constant. You may assume the temperature of the salt solution remains constant. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (b) A manufacturer of liquid-in-glass thermometers changes the design in order to meet new requirements. Describe the changes that could be made to (i)
give the thermometer a greater range, ..............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
make the thermometer more sensitive. ..............................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A toilet flush is operated by the compression of air. The air inside the flush has a pressure of 1.0 × 105 Pa and a volume of 150 cm3. When the flush is operated the volume is reduced to 50 cm3. The temperature of the air remains constant during this process. Calculate the new pressure of the air inside the flush.
pressure = .......................[2]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
For Examiner’s Use
7 6
Fig. 6.1 shows white light incident at P on a glass prism. Only the refracted red ray PQ is shown in the prism.
P red ray Q
t
white ligh
screen
Fig. 6.1 (a) On Fig. 6.1, draw rays to complete the path of the red ray and the whole path of the violet ray up to the point where they hit the screen. Label the violet ray. [3] (b) The angle of incidence of the white light is increased to 40°. The refractive index of the glass for the red light is 1.52. Calculate the angle of refraction at P for the red light.
angle of refraction = ........................[3] (c) State the approximate speed of (i)
the white light incident at P,
speed = ........................ [1]
(ii)
the red light after it leaves the prism at Q.
speed = ........................ [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
8 7
Fig. 7.1 shows how the air pressure at one instant varies with distance along the path of a continuous sound wave.
air pressure
normal P air pressure
X
Y distance in direction of travel of the wave
Fig. 7.1 (a) What type of waves are sound waves? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) On Fig. 7.1, mark on the axis PY (i)
one point C where there is a compression in the wave,
[1]
(ii)
one point R where there is a rarefaction in the wave.
[1]
(c) Describe the motion of a group of air particles situated on the path of the wave shown in Fig. 7.1. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (d) The sound wave shown has speed of 340 m / s and a frequency of 200 Hz. Calculate the distance represented by PX on Fig. 7.1.
distance = ........................[2]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
For Examiner’s Use
9 8
Fig. 8.1 shows an electrical circuit.
For Examiner’s Use
12.0 V d.c.
A one metre resistance wire
C
R
B
4.0 Ω sliding contact Fig. 8.1
The resistance of the lamp is 4.0 Ω when it is at its normal brightness. (a) The lamp is rated at 6.0 V, 9.0 W. Calculate the current in the lamp when it is at its normal brightness. current = ........................[2] (b) The sliding contact C is moved to A. The lamp lights at its normal brightness. Calculate (i)
the total circuit resistance, resistance = ........................[1]
(ii)
the potential difference across the 4.0 Ω resistor R. potential difference = ........................[1]
(c) The sliding contact C is moved from A to B. (i)
Describe any change that occurs in the brightness of the lamp. ..............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Explain your answer to (i). .................................................................................................................................. ..............................................................................................................................[2]
(d) The 1 m wire between A and B, as shown in Fig. 8.1, has a resistance of 2.0 Ω. Calculate the resistance between A and B when (i)
the 1 m length is replaced by a 2 m length of the same wire, resistance = ........................[1]
(ii)
the 1 m length is replaced by a 1 m length of a wire of the same material but of only half the cross-sectional area. resistance = ........................[1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
[Turn over
10 9
A transformer is needed to step down a 240 V a.c. supply to a 12 V a.c. output. (a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a suitable transformer.
[3]
(b) Explain (i)
why the transformer only works on a.c., .................................................................................................................................. ..............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
how the input voltage is changed to an output voltage. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ..............................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The output current is 1.5 A. Calculate (i)
the power output, power = ........................[1]
(ii)
the energy output in 30 s. energy = ........................[1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
For Examiner’s Use
11 10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a positively charged plastic rod, a metal plate resting on an insulator, and a lead connected to earth.
positively charged plastic rod
metal plate insulator
lead connected to earth Fig. 10.1
Describe how the metal plate may be charged by induction. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] (b) An electrostatic generator sets up a current of 20 mA in a circuit. Calculate (i)
the charge flowing through the circuit in 15 s,
charge = ............................ (ii)
the potential difference across a 10 kΩ resistor in the circuit.
potential difference = ............................ [3]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
12 11 Fig. 11.1 shows a beam of radiation that contains α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays. The beam enters a very strong magnetic field shown in symbol form by N and S poles.
For Examiner’s Use
N beam of radiation S
Fig. 11.1 Complete the table below.
radiation
direction of deflection, if any
charge carried by radiation, if any
α-particles β-particles γ-rays [6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education PHYSICS Paper 3 Extended
0625/03 October/November 2006 1 hour 15 minutes Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2
Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
3
DO NOT WRITE IN THE BARCODE.
5
DO NOT WRITE IN THE GREY AREAS BETWEEN THE PAGES.
6
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
7
4
8 9 10 11 Total
This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. SP (SLM/KS) T04132/2 © UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2 1
(a) A stone falls from the top of a building and hits the ground at a speed of 32 m/s. The air resistance-force on the stone is very small and may be neglected. (i)
Calculate the time of fall.
time = ............................ (ii)
On Fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for the falling stone. 40
30 speed m/s 20
10
0 0
1
2
3
4 time/s
Fig. 1.1 (iii)
The weight of the stone is 24 N. Calculate the mass of the stone.
mass = ............................ [5]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) A student used a suitable measuring cylinder and a spring balance to find the density of a sample of the stone. (i)
Describe how the measuring cylinder is used, and state the readings that are taken. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Describe how the spring balance is used, and state the reading that is taken. .................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Write down an equation from which the density of the stone is calculated. ..................................................................................................................................
(iv)
The student then wishes to find the density of cork. Suggest how the apparatus and the method would need to be changed. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [6]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
4 2
In an experiment, forces are applied to a spring as shown in Fig. 2.1a. The results of this experiment are shown in Fig. 2.1b. 16
R Q
12 ruler
force/N spring
8.0
P
4.0 weights
0 0
Fig. 2.1a
2.0
4.0 6.0 extension/mm
Fig. 2.1b
(a) What is the name given to the point marked Q on Fig. 2.1b? ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) For the part OP of the graph, the spring obeys Hooke’s Law. State what this means. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) The spring is stretched until the force and extension are shown by the point R on the graph. Compare how the spring stretches, as shown by the part of the graph OQ, with that shown by QR. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1] (d) The part OP of the graph shows the spring stretching according to the expression F = kx. Use values from the graph to calculate the value of k.
k =..................................[2] © UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
For Examiner’s Use
5 3
Fig. 3.1 shows water falling over a dam. dam
For Examiner’s Use
falling water
7.0 m
Fig. 3.1 (a) The vertical height that the water falls is 7.0 m. Calculate the potential energy lost by 1.0 kg of water during the fall.
potential energy = ........................[2] (b) Assuming all this potential energy loss is changed to kinetic energy of the water, calculate the speed of the water, in the vertical direction, at the end of the fall.
speed = ........................[3] (c) The vertical speed of the water is less than that calculated in (b). Suggest one reason for this. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
[Turn over
6 4
Some water is heated electrically in a glass beaker in an experiment to find the specific heat capacity of water. The temperature of the water is taken at regular intervals. The temperature-time graph for this heating is shown in Fig. 4.1. 60
temperature / °C 50 40 30 20 10 0 0
60
120
180
240
300 time / s
Fig. 4.1 (a) (i)
Use the graph to find 1. the temperature rise in the first 120 s, ............................ 2. the temperature rise in the second 120 s interval. ............................
(ii)
Explain why these values are different. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The experiment is repeated in an insulated beaker. This time, the temperature of the water increases from 20 °C to 60 °C in 210 s. The beaker contains 75 g of water. The power of the heater is 60 W. Calculate the specific heat capacity of water.
specific heat capacity = ........................[4]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
For Examiner’s Use
7 (c) In order to measure the temperature during the heating, a thermocouple is used. Draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple connected to measure temperature.
For Examiner’s Use
[2]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
[Turn over
8 5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows a copper rod AB being heated at one end. copper rod B
A
Bunsen burner
Fig. 5.1 (i)
Name the process by which heat moves from A to B. ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
By reference to the behaviour of the particles of copper along AB, state how this process happens. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Give an account of an experiment that is designed to show which of four surfaces will absorb most heat radiation. The four surfaces are all the same metal, but one is a polished black surface, one is a polished silver surface, one is a dull black surface and the fourth one is painted white. Give your answer under the headings below. labelled diagram of the apparatus
readings to be taken
one precaution to try to achieve a fair comparison between the various surfaces .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3] © UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
For Examiner’s Use
9 6
Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light, from the top of an object PQ, passing through two glass prisms.
P
A
B
Q C D
F
E
Fig. 6.1 (a) Complete the path through the two prisms of the ray shown leaving Q.
[1]
(b) A person looking into the lower prism, at the position indicated by the eye symbol, sees an image of PQ. State the properties of this image. ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) Explain why there is no change in direction of the ray from P at points A, C, D and F. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1] (d) The speed of light as it travels from P to A is 3 × 108 m/s and the refractive index of the prism glass is 1.5. Calculate the speed of light in the prism.
speed = ........................[2] (e) Explain why the ray AB reflects through 90° at B and does not pass out of the prism at B. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
10 7
Fig. 7.1 is a drawing of a student’s attempt to show the diffraction pattern of water waves that have passed through a narrow gap in a barrier. barrier with narrow gap
direction of water waves
Fig. 7.1 (a) State two things that are wrong with the wave pattern shown to the right of the barrier. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ..................................................................................................................................[2] (b) In the space below, sketch the wave pattern when the gap in the barrier is made five times wider.
[2] (c) The waves approaching the barrier have a wavelength of 1.2 cm and a frequency of 8.0 Hz. Calculate the speed of the water waves.
speed =..................................[2]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
For Examiner’s Use
11 8
Fig. 8.1 shows a low-voltage lighting circuit.
For Examiner’s Use
12 V d.c. supply
X
Y
Z
Fig. 8.1 (a) On Fig. 8.1, indicate with a dot and the letter S, a point in the circuit where a switch could be placed that would turn off lamps Y and Z at the same time but would leave lamp X still lit. [1] (b) (i)
In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a component that would vary the brightness of lamp X.
(ii)
On Fig. 8.1, mark with a dot and the letter R where this component should be placed. [2]
(c) Calculate the current in lamp Y. current = ........................[2] (d) The current in lamp Z is 3.0 A. Calculate the resistance of this lamp.
resistance = ........................[2] (e) The lamp Y is removed. (i)
Why do lamps X and Z still work normally? .................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
The current in lamp X is 1.0 A. Calculate the current supplied by the battery with lamp Y removed.
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
current = ............................ [2] [Turn over
12 9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows how a beam of electrons would be deflected by an electric field produced between two metal plates. The connections of the source of high potential difference are not shown. +
high – potential difference metal plate
beam of electrons metal plate
Fig. 9.1 (i)
On Fig. 9.1, draw in the missing connections.
(ii)
Explain why the beam of electrons is deflected in the direction shown. In your answer, consider all the charges involved and their effect on each other. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [5]
(b) The deflection of a beam of electrons by an electric field is used in cathode-ray oscilloscopes. (i)
What makes the electron beam move backwards and forwards across the screen? .................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
What makes the electron beam move up and down the screen? .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
For Examiner’s Use
13 (c) An a.c. waveform is displayed so that two full waves appear on the screen of a cathoderay oscilloscope. Fig. 9.2 shows the face of the oscilloscope. On Fig. 9.2, draw in the waveform.
Fig. 9.2 [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
14 10 Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit that is used to switch on a lamp automatically when it starts to go dark.
D
A
+ V – C B
Fig. 10.1 (a) Write down the names of the components labelled A, B, C and D. A ...........................................
B ...........................................
C ...........................................
D ...........................................
[2]
(b) Which of the four components A, B, C or D acts as a switch? ........................[1] (c) Explain why the lamp comes on as it goes dark. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
For Examiner’s Use
15 11 (a) α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays are known as ionising radiations. (i)
For Examiner’s Use
Describe what happens when gases are ionised by ionising radiations. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest why α-particles are considered better ionisers of gas than β-particles. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) (i)
Suggest two practical applications of radioactive isotopes. 1. .............................................................................................................................. 2. ..............................................................................................................................
(ii)
For one of the applications that you have suggested, describe how it works, or draw a labelled diagram to illustrate it in use. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
16 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/03/O/N/06
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*9716875438*
0625/03
PHYSICS Paper 3 Extended
May/June 2007 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
For Examiner’s Use
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Total
This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. SPA (MML 13116 3/06) T25815/6 © UCLES 2007
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows a model car moving clockwise around a horizontal circular track. direction of movement P model car
circular track
Fig. 1.1 (a) A force acts on the car to keep it moving in a circle. (i)
Draw an arrow on Fig. 1.1 to show the direction of this force.
[1]
(ii)
The speed of the car increases. State what happens to the magnitude of this force. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) (i)
(ii)
The car travels too quickly and leaves the track at P. On Fig. 1.1, draw an arrow to show the direction of travel after it has left the track. [1] In terms of the forces acting on the car, suggest why it left the track at P. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
3 (c) The car, starting from rest, completes one lap of the track in 10 s. Its motion is shown graphically in Fig. 1.2.
For Examiner’s Use
30 25 speed / cm / s
20 15 10 5 0 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9 time / s
10
Fig. 1.2 (i)
Describe the motion between 3.0 s and 10.0 s after the car has started. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Use Fig. 1.2 to calculate the circumference of the track.
circumference = ................................................ [2] (iii)
Calculate the increase in speed per second during the time 0 to 3.0 s.
increase in speed per second = ................................................ [2] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
[Turn over
4 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a steam safety valve. When the pressure gets too high, the steam lifts the weight W and allows steam to escape. 0.2 m
pivot W
force of steam Fig. 2.1 (a) Explain, in terms of moments of forces, how the valve works. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) The moment of weight W about the pivot is 12 N m. The perpendicular distance of the line of action of the force of the steam on the valve from the pivot is 0.2 m. The area of the piston is 0.0003 m2. Calculate (i)
the minimum steam force needed for the steam to escape,
force = ................................................ [2] (ii)
the minimum steam pressure for the steam to escape.
pressure = ................................................ [2] [Total: 6] © UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
5 3
A student wishes to work out how much power she uses to lift her body when climbing a flight of stairs.
For Examiner’s Use
Her body mass is 60 kg and the vertical height of the stairs is 3.0 m. She takes 12 s to walk up the stairs. (a) Calculate (i)
the work done in raising her body mass as she climbs the stairs,
work = ................................................ [2] (ii)
the output power she develops when raising her body mass.
power = ................................................ [2] (b) At the top of the stairs she has gravitational potential energy. Describe the energy transformations taking place as she walks back down the stairs and stops at the bottom. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
[Turn over
6 4
Fig. 4.1 shows a student’s attempt to estimate the specific latent heat of fusion of ice by adding ice at 0 °C to water at 20 °C. The water is stirred continuously as ice is slowly added until the temperature of the water is 0 °C and all the added ice has melted. glass rod stirrer
thermometer
ice glass beaker
water
top-pan balance
Fig. 4.1 (a) Three mass readings are taken. A description of the first reading is given. Write down descriptions of the other two. reading 1 the mass of the beaker + stirrer + thermometer reading 2 ......................................................................................................................... reading 3 ................................................................................................................... [2] (b) Write down word equations which the student could use to find (i)
the heat lost by the water as it cools from 20 °C to 0 °C, ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
the heat gained by the melting ice. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
7 (c) The student calculates that the water loses 12 800 J and that the mass of ice melted is 30 g.
For Examiner’s Use
Calculate a value for the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.
specific latent heat of fusion = ................................................ [2] (d) Suggest two reasons why this value is only an approximate value. Reason 1 ......................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... Reason 2 ......................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
[Turn over
8 5
Fig. 5.1 shows some apparatus designed to compare the ability of two surfaces to absorb infra-red radiation.
surface painted dull black
surface painted shiny white
Bunsen burner Fig. 5.1 The containers, which are identical, are painted on the outside. One is dull black, the other is shiny white. Both are filled with water, initially at the same temperature. (a) (i)
Describe how you would use the apparatus to compare the abilities of the two surfaces to absorb infra-red radiation. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
State the result that you would expect. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The thermometers used have high sensitivity and linear scales. (i)
State what is meant by high sensitivity. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Explain why a high sensitivity is important for this experiment. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
State what is meant by a linear scale. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
9 6
Fig. 6.1 shows a rectangular glass block ABCD. F 60
o
B
A E
C
D
Fig. 6.1 (a) The ray FE is partly reflected and partly refracted at E. (i)
On Fig. 6.1, draw in the approximate path of the refracted ray, within and beyond the block. Label the ray refracted ray. [1]
(ii)
On Fig. 6.1, draw in the path of the reflected ray. Label the ray reflected ray.
[1]
(b) A second ray, almost parallel to AE, strikes the block at E and is partly refracted at an angle of refraction of 43°. (i)
State an approximate value for the angle of incidence at E. ................................................. [1]
(ii)
State an approximate value for the critical angle for the light in the glass block. ................................................. [1]
(iii)
Calculate an approximate value for the refractive index of the glass of the block.
refractive index = ................................................ [2] (c) The speed of the light along ray FE is 3.0 x 108 m/s. Calculate the speed of the refracted light in the glass block.
speed = ................................................ [2] [Total: 8] © UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
[Turn over
10 7
Two students are asked to determine the speed of sound in air on the school playing fields. (a) List the apparatus they need. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) List the readings that the students need to take. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) State how the speed of sound is calculated from the readings. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) State one precaution that could be taken to improve the accuracy of the value obtained. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (e) The table gives some speeds. speed/ m/s
speed of sound in air
speed of sound in water
10 100 1000 10 000
Place a tick in the table to show the speed which is closest to (i)
the speed of sound in air,
(ii)
the speed of sound in water. [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
11 8
Fig. 8.1 shows part of a low-voltage lighting circuit containing five identical lamps. 12 V d.c. supply B
A C D E Fig. 8.1
(a) Complete the circuit, by the addition of components as necessary, so that (i)
the total current from the supply can be measured,
(ii)
the brightness of lamp E only can be varied,
(iii)
lamps C and D may be switched on and off together whilst lamps A, B and E remain on. [4]
(b) All five lamps are marked 12 V, 36 W. Assume that the resistance of each lamp is the same fixed value regardless of how it is connected in the circuit. Calculate (i)
the current in one lamp when operating at normal brightness,
current = ................................................ [1] (ii)
the resistance of one lamp when operating at normal brightness,
resistance = ................................................ [1] (iii)
the combined resistance of two lamps connected in parallel with the 12 V supply,
resistance = ................................................ [1] (iv)
the energy used by one lamp in 30 s when operating at normal brightness.
energy = ................................................ [1] © UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
[Turn over
12 (c) The whole circuit is switched on. Explain why the brightness of lamps A and B is much less than that of one lamp operating at normal brightness. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 10]
9
Fig. 9.1 is a sketch of some apparatus, found in a Science museum, which was once used to show how electrical energy can be converted into kinetic energy. When the switch is closed the wheel starts to turn.
switch
+ metal supports
d.c. supply –
N
magnet
S
metal spoked wheel
N small dish of mercury
S magnet wood base Fig. 9.1 (a) Explain why the wheel turns when the switch is closed.
.......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) On Fig. 9.1, draw an arrow to show the direction of rotation of the wheel.
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
[1]
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
13 (c) The d.c. motor is another way to convert electrical energy into kinetic energy. In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a d.c. motor.
[3] (d) Describe how the split-ring commutator on an electric motor works. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
14 10 Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit based on a transistor and a thermistor.
power supply
R2 R1
Fig. 10.1 (a) Describe the action of the thermistor in this circuit. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] (b) State and explain how the circuit may be modified so that the lamp switches on at a different temperature. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) State one practical use of this circuit. .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
15 11 Fig. 11.1 shows the paths of three α-particles moving towards a thin gold foil. gold foil A
B
C
Fig. 11.1 Particle A is moving directly towards a gold nucleus. Particle B is moving along a line which passes close to a gold nucleus. Particle C is moving along a line which does not pass close to a gold nucleus. (a) On Fig. 11.1, complete the paths of the α-particles A, B and C.
[3]
(b) State how the results of such an experiment, using large numbers of α-particles, provides evidence for the existence of nuclei in gold atoms. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] [Total: 12]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
16 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/03/M/J/07
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*8019038925*
0625/03
PHYSICS Paper 3 Extended
October/November 2007 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
For Examiner’s Use
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Total
This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. SPA (MML 13331 4/06) T25941/7 © UCLES 2007
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
2 1
A large plastic ball is dropped from the top of a tall building. Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for the falling ball until it hits the ground.
20 15 speed m / s 10 5 0 0
1
2
3
4
5
6 time / s
Fig. 1.1 (a) From the graph estimate, (i)
the time during which the ball is travelling with terminal velocity, time = ................................................ [1]
(ii)
the time during which the ball is accelerating, time = ................................................ [1]
(iii)
the distance fallen while the ball is travelling with terminal velocity, distance = ................................................ [2]
(iv)
the height of the building.
height = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) Explain, in terms of the forces acting on the ball, why (i)
the acceleration of the ball decreases, .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii)
the ball reaches terminal velocity. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2] [Total: 11]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
4 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a track for a model car.
P S Q 0.5 m 0.4 m
0.4 m
T
R
Fig. 2.1 The car has no power supply, but can run down a sloping track due to its weight. (a) The car is released at Q. It comes to rest just before it reaches S and rolls back. (i)
Describe the motion of the car after it starts rolling back and until it eventually comes to rest. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
Explain in terms of energy transformations why the car, starting at Q, cannot pass S. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A second car, of mass 0.12 kg, is released from P. It continues until it runs off the track at T. Calculate the maximum speed that the car could have at T assuming friction in the car is negligible.
speed = ................................................ [3] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
5 3
(a) A spring of original length 3.0 cm is extended to a total length of 5.0 cm by a force of 8.0 N.
For Examiner’s Use
Assuming the limit of proportionality of the spring has not been reached, calculate the force needed to extend it to a total length of 6.0 cm.
force = ................................................ [3] (b) Fig. 3.1 shows the arrangement for an experiment on moments.
spring pivot F metre rule
Fig. 3.1 The spring exerts a force F on the metre rule. (i)
On Fig. 3.1, mark another quantity which must be measured to find the moment of the force F. [1]
(ii)
State how the moment of the force F is calculated. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
6 4
Fig. 4.1 shows a sealed steel cylinder filled with high pressure steam.
steam
Fig. 4.1 Fig. 4.2 shows the same cylinder much later when all the steam has condensed.
water
Fig. 4.2 (a) (i)
Describe the movement of the molecules in the high pressure steam. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
Explain how the molecules in the steam exert a high pressure on the inside walls of the cylinder. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Describe, in terms of particles, the process by which heat is transferred through the cylinder wall. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) When all the steam has condensed, 75 g of water is in the cylinder. Under these high pressure conditions, the specific latent heat of vaporisation of steam is 3200 J / g. Calculate the heat lost by the steam as it condenses. heat = ................................................ [2] [Total: 8] © UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
7 5
Fig. 5.1 shows some apparatus which is to be used to compare the emission of infra-red radiation from four differently painted surfaces.
For Examiner’s Use
this side painted dull white
this side painted shiny white
water inlet
metal box
this side painted shiny black
this side painted dull black Fig. 5.1
Near the centre of each side is an infra-red detector. The four detectors are identical. A supply of very hot water is available. (a) Describe how you would use this apparatus to compare the infra-red radiation from the four surfaces. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] (b) Suggest which surface will be the best emitter and which will be the worst emitter. best emitter ........................................... worst emitter .........................................
[1]
(c) The infra-red detectors are made from thermocouples soldered to blackened metal plates. These are connected to galvanometers. In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple.
[2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
8 6
Virtual images may be formed by both plane mirrors and by convex lenses. Fig. 6.1 shows a plane mirror and a convex lens. O
P
F
F
Fig. 6.1 (a) On Fig. 6.1, draw rays to locate the approximate positions of the images of the tops of the two arrow objects O and P. Label the images. [5] (b) Both images are virtual. (i)
What is meant by a virtual image? ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State one other similarity between the two images. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
State one difference between the two images. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
For Examiner’s Use
9 7
(a) In the space below, draw a diagram to represent a sound wave. On your diagram, mark and label (i)
two consecutive compressions and two consecutive rarefactions,
(ii)
the wavelength of the wave. [3]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
INFRA– RED
X-RAYS
Fig. 7.1 (i)
On Fig. 7.1, label the positions of γ-rays, visible light waves and radio waves.
(ii)
State which of the three types of wave in (i) has the lowest frequency.
[1]
............................................................................................................................ [1] (iii)
State the approximate value of the speed in air of radio waves. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
10 8
Fig. 8.1 shows two electrical circuits. V
4.0 Ω 4.0 Ω A P
ammeter 1
P
ammeter A 2
6.0 Ω
A
6.0 Ω
Q Q circuit 1
circuit 2
The batteries in circuit 1 and circuit 2 are identical. Fig. 8.1 (a) Put ticks in the table below to describe the connections of the two resistors P and Q. series
parallel
circuit 1 circuit 2 [1] (b) The resistors P and Q are used as small electrical heaters. State two advantages of connecting them as shown in circuit 2. advantage 1 ..................................................................................................................... advantage 2 ............................................................................................................... [2] (c) In circuit 1, the ammeter reads 1.2 A when the switch is closed. Calculate the reading of the voltmeter in this circuit. voltmeter reading = ................................................ [2] (d) The two switches in circuit 2 are closed. Calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors in this circuit. combined resistance = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
11 (e) When the switches are closed in circuit 2, ammeter 1 reads 5 A and ammeter 2 reads 2 A.
For Examiner’s Use
Calculate (i)
the current in resistor P, current = ................................................ [1]
(ii)
the power supplied to resistor Q, power = ................................................ [1]
(iii)
the energy transformed in resistor Q in 300 s. energy = ................................................ [1] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
[Turn over
12 9
Electromagnetic induction may be demonstrated using a magnet, a solenoid and other necessary apparatus. (a) Explain what is meant by electromagnetic induction. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus set up so that electromagnetic induction may be demonstrated. [2]
(c) Describe how you would use the apparatus to demonstrate electromagnetic induction. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) State two ways of increasing the magnitude of the induced e.m.f. in this experiment. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 8] © UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
13 10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows an AND gate with two inputs A and B and one output.
A
output
B
Fig. 10.1 State the output when (i)
A is high and B is low, ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
both A and B are low. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) An electrical thermometer in a greenhouse gives a low output if the temperature is too low. A humidity sensor in the same greenhouse gives a high output if the humidity in the greenhouse is too high. An alarm sounds when both the temperature is too low and the humidity is too high. (i)
Complete the diagram below to show how a NOT gate and an AND gate may be used to provide the required output to the alarm. [2]
electrical thermometer alarm humidity sensor (ii)
On your diagram, use either ‘high’ or ‘low’ to indicate the level of the inputs and outputs of both gates when the alarm sounds. [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
[Turn over
14 11 Fig. 11.1 shows an experiment to test the absorption of β-particles by thin sheets of aluminium. Ten sheets are available, each 0.5 mm thick. β-particle source
sheets of
detector
counter
aluminium
Fig. 11.1 (a) Describe how the experiment is carried out, stating the readings that should be taken. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [4] (b) State the results that you would expect to obtain. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
For Examiner’s Use
15 BLANK PAGE
0625/03/O/N/07
16 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/03/O/N/07
First Variant Question Paper
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*5079794953*
0625/31
PHYSICS Paper 3 Extended
May/June 2008 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. SPA (SHW 00013 3/07) T49721/6 © UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graphs for two falling balls.
For Examiner’s Use
30 rubber ball speed m/s 20
plastic ball
10
0 0
1
2
3
4
5
time / s Fig. 1.1 Both balls fall from the same height above the ground. (a) Use the graphs to find (i)
the average acceleration of the falling rubber ball during the first 3.0 s,
acceleration = ................................................ [2] (ii)
the distance fallen by the rubber ball during the first 3.0 s,
distance = ................................................ [2] (iii)
the terminal velocity of the plastic ball. terminal velocity = ................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
3 (b) Both balls have the same mass but the volume of the plastic ball is much greater than that of the rubber ball. Explain, in terms of the forces acting on each ball, why the plastic ball reaches a terminal velocity but the rubber ball does not.
For Examiner’s Use
.......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] (c) The rubber ball has a mass of 50 g. Calculate the gravitational force acting on the rubber ball.
force = ................................................ [2] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
[Turn over
4 2
(a) Name the process by which energy is released in the core of the Sun. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) Describe how energy from the Sun becomes stored energy in water behind a dam. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] (c) Data for two small power stations is given in Table 2.1. input to power station
output of power station
gas-fired
100 MW
25 MW
hydroelectric
90 MW
30 MW
Table 2.1 (i)
State what is meant by the efficiency of a power station. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Use the data in Table 2.1 to explain that the hydroelectric station is more efficient than the gas-fired power station. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
For Examiner’s Use
5 3
A cyclist rides up and then back down the hill shown in Fig. 3.1.
For Examiner’s Use
top of hill
14 m
starting and finishing point
Fig. 3.1 The cyclist and her bicycle have a combined mass of 90 kg. She pedals up to the top and then stops. She turns around and rides back to the bottom without pedalling or using her brakes. (a) Calculate the potential energy gained by the cyclist and her bicycle when she has reached the top of the hill.
potential energy = ................................................ [2] (b) Calculate the maximum speed she could have when she arrives back at the starting point.
speed = ................................................ [3] (c) Explain why her actual speed will be less than that calculated in (b). .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
[Turn over
6 4
Fig. 4.1 is a design for remotely operating an electrical switch using air pressure. electrical switch operated by air pressure
connecting pipe
For Examiner’s Use
flexible rubber box cover
metal box
Fig. 4.1 The metal box and the pipe contain air at normal atmospheric pressure and the switch is off. When the pressure in the metal box and pipe is raised to 1.5 times atmospheric pressure by pressing down on the flexible rubber box cover, the switch comes on. (a) Explain in terms of pressure and volume how the switch is made to come on. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) Normal atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. At this pressure, the volume of the box and pipe is 60 cm3. Calculate the reduction in volume that must occur for the switch to be on.
reduction in volume = ................................................ [3] (c) Explain, in terms of air particles, why the switch may operate, without the rubber cover being squashed, when there is a large rise in temperature. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
7 5
(a) Explain, in terms of molecules, how thermal expansion takes place in a solid and in a gas.
For Examiner’s Use
solid ................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... gas ................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [4] (b) Complete Table 5.1 to show the relative expansion of equal volumes of liquids, gases and solids. Choose words from much less, slightly less, slightly more and much more. state of matter
[2]
expansion compared to solids, for the same temperature rise
liquids gases Table 5.1 (c) Alcohol is often used in thermometers. State one property of alcohol that makes it suitable for use in thermometers. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
[Turn over
8 6
Fig. 6.1 shows an object, the tip of which is labelled O, placed near a lens L.
For Examiner’s Use
The two principal foci of the lens are F1 and F2.
L
F2
O
F1
Fig. 6.1 (a) On Fig. 6.1, draw the paths of two rays from the tip of the object so that they pass through the lens and continue beyond. Complete the diagram to locate the image of the tip of the object. Draw in the whole image and label it I. [3] (b) Describe image I. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
9 7
Fig. 7.1 and Fig. 7.2 show wavefronts of light approaching a plane mirror and a rectangular glass block, respectively.
For Examiner’s Use
direction of travel of wavefronts
mirror Fig. 7.1
direction of travel of wavefronts
glass block
Fig. 7.2 (a) On Fig. 7.1 and on Fig. 7.2 draw wavefronts to show what happens after the waves strike the surface. [4] (b) In Fig. 7.2, the waves approaching the block have a speed of 3.0 × 108 m/s and an angle of incidence of 70°. The refractive index of the glass of the block is 1.5. (i)
Calculate the speed of light waves in the block.
speed = ................................................ [2] (ii)
Calculate the angle of refraction in the block.
angle = ................................................ [2] [Total: 8] © UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
[Turn over
10 8
Fig. 8.1 is the plan of a small apartment that has four lamps as shown.
2 × 60 W living room
For Examiner’s Use
100 W kitchen 60 W bathroom
Fig. 8.1 Power for the lamps is supplied at 200 V a.c. and the lamps are all in parallel. (a) In the space below, draw a lighting circuit diagram so that there is one switch for each room and one master switch that will turn off all the lamps. Label the lamps as 60 W or 100 W.
[3] (b) The 100 W lamp is switched on. Calculate (i)
the current in the lamp,
current = ................................................ [2] (ii)
the charge passing through the lamp in one minute.
charge = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
11 (c) The three 60 W lamps are replaced by three energy-saving ones, that give the same light output but are rated at only 15 W each.
For Examiner’s Use
Calculate (i)
the total reduction in power,
reduction in power = ................................................ [1] (ii)
the energy saved when the lamps are lit for one hour.
energy saved = ................................................. [2] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
[Turn over
12 9
Fig. 9.1 shows apparatus used to investigate electromagnetic effects around straight wires.
thin flexible wire
T3
T1
thick rigid vertical wire
large circular hole in card small circular hole in card T4
T2
Fig. 9.1 Fig. 9.2 is a view looking down on the apparatus shown in Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.2 (a) A battery is connected to T1 and T2 so that there is a current vertically down the thick wire. On Fig. 9.2, draw three magnetic field lines and indicate, with arrows, the direction of all three. [2] (b) Using a variable resistor, the p.d. between terminals T1 and T2 is gradually reduced. State the effect, if any, that this will have on (i)
the strength of the magnetic field, ...................................................................... [1]
(ii)
the direction of the magnetic field. ...................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
For Examiner’s Use
13 (c) The battery is now connected to terminals T3 and T4, as well as to terminals T1 and T2, so that there is a current down both wires. This causes the flexible wire to move. (i)
For Examiner’s Use
Explain why the flexible wire moves. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
State the direction of the movement of the flexible wire. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
The battery is replaced by one that delivers a smaller current. State the effect that this will have on the force acting on the flexible wire. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
[Turn over
14 10 (a) In the space below, draw the symbol for a NOR gate.
For Examiner’s Use
[1] (b) Describe the action of a NOR gate in terms of its inputs and output. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) A chemical process requires heating at low pressure to work correctly. When the heater is working, the output of a temperature sensor is high. When the pressure is low enough, a pressure sensor has a low output. Both outputs are fed into a NOR gate. A high output from the gate switches on an indicator lamp. (i)
Explain why the indicator lamp is off when the process is working correctly. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State whether the lamp is on or off in the following situations. 1.
The pressure is low enough, but the heater stops working. .............................
2.
The heater is working, but the pressure rises too high. .............................. [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
15 11 (a) Chlorine has two isotopes, one of nucleon number 35 and one of nucleon number 37. The proton number of chlorine is 17. Table 11.1 refers to neutral atoms of chlorine. Complete Table 11.1. nucleon number 35
nucleon number 37
number of protons number of neutrons number of electrons [3] Table 11.1 (b) Some isotopes are radioactive. State the three types of radiation that may be emitted from radioactive isotopes. 1. ....................................................... 2. ....................................................... 3. ....................................................... (c) (i)
[1]
State one practical use of a radioactive isotope. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Outline how it is used. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
For Examiner’s Use
16 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/31/M/J/08
First Variant Question Paper
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*0631463082*
0625/31
PHYSICS Paper 3 Extended
October/November 2008 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 16 printed pages. SPA (SHW 00014 3/07) T50468/5 © UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows apparatus used to find a relationship between the force applied to a trolley and the acceleration caused by the force. tickertape
trolley
string
hanging mass
ticker-tape timer
roll of tape
runway
Fig. 1.1 For each mass, hung as shown, the acceleration of the trolley is determined from the tape. Some of the results are given in the table below.
weight of the hanging mass / N
acceleration of the trolley m/s2
0.20
0.25
0.40
0.50
0.70 0.80
(a) (i)
1.0
Explain why the trolley accelerates. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
Suggest why the runway has a slight slope as shown. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Calculate the mass of the trolley, assuming that the accelerating force is equal to the weight of the hanging mass.
mass = ................................................ [2] © UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
For Examiner’s Use
3 (c) Calculate the value missing from the table. Show your working.
For Examiner’s Use
value = ................................................ [2] (d) In one experiment, the hanging mass has a weight of 0.4 N and the trolley starts from rest. Use data from the table to calculate (i)
the speed of the trolley after 1.2 s,
speed = ................................................ [2] (ii)
the distance travelled by the trolley in 1.2 s.
distance = ................................................ [2] [Total: 11]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
[Turn over
4 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a circular metal disc of mass 200 g, freely pivoted at its centre.
pivot
Fig. 2.1 Masses of 100 g, 200 g, 300 g, 400 g, 500 g and 600 g are available, but only one of each value. These may be hung with string from any of the holes. There are three small holes on each side of the centre, one at 4.0 cm from the pivot, one at 8.0 cm from the pivot and one at 12.0 cm from the pivot. The apparatus is to be used to show that there is no net moment of force acting on a body when it is in equilibrium. (a) On Fig. 2.1, draw in two different value masses hanging from appropriate holes. The values of the masses should be chosen so that there is no net moment. Alongside the masses chosen, write down their values. [2] (b) Explain how you would test that your chosen masses give no net moment to the disc. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Calculate the moments about the pivot due to the two masses chosen.
moment due to first mass = ..................................................... moment due to second mass = ...................................................... [2] © UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
For Examiner’s Use
5 (d) Calculate the force on the pivot when the two masses chosen are hanging from the disc.
For Examiner’s Use
force = ................................................ [2] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
[Turn over
6 3
(a) A submarine descends to a depth of 70 m below the surface of water.
For Examiner’s Use
The density of the water is 1050 kg/m3. Atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. Calculate (i)
the increase in pressure as it descends from the surface to a depth of 70 m,
increase in pressure = ................................................ [2] (ii)
the total pressure on the submarine at a depth of 70 m.
total pressure = ................................................ [1] (b) On another dive, the submarine experiences a total pressure of 6.5 × 105 Pa. A hatch cover on the submarine has an area of 2.5 m2. Calculate the force on the outside of the cover.
force = ................................................ [2] (c) The submarine undergoes tests in fresh water of density 1000 kg/m3. Explain why the pressure on the submarine is less at the same depth. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
7 4
The whole of a sealed, empty, dusty room is kept at a constant temperature of 15 °C. Light shines into the room through a small outside window.
For Examiner’s Use
An observer points a TV camera with a magnifying lens into the room through a second small window, set in an inside wall at right angles to the outside wall. Dust particles in the room show up on the TV monitor screen as tiny specks of light. (a) In the space below draw a diagram to show the motion of one of the specks of light over a short period of time.
[1] (b) After a period of one hour the specks are still observed, showing that the dust particles have not fallen to the floor. Explain why the dust particles have not fallen to the floor. You may draw a labelled diagram to help your explanation.
.......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) On another day, the temperature of the room is only 5 °C. All other conditions are the same and the specks of light are again observed. Suggest any differences that you would expect in the movement of the specks when the temperature is 5 °C, compared to before. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 4] © UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
[Turn over
8 5
Fig. 5.1 shows apparatus that could be used to determine the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.
finely crushed ice
40 W electric heater
glass funnel
stand with clamps to hold funnel and heater
Fig. 5.1 (a) In order to obtain as accurate a result as possible, state why it is necessary to (i)
wait until water is dripping into the beaker at a constant rate before taking readings, .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
use finely crushed ice rather than large pieces. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The power of the heater and the time for which water is collected are known. Write down all the other readings that are needed to obtain a value for the specific latent heat of fusion of ice. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
For Examiner’s Use
9 (c) Using a 40 W heater, 16.3 g of ice is melted in 2.0 minutes. The heater is then switched off. In a further 2.0 minutes, 2.1 g of ice is melted.
For Examiner’s Use
Calculate the value of the specific latent heat of fusion of ice from these results.
specific latent heat of fusion of ice = ................................................ [4] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
[Turn over
10 6
Fig. 6.1 shows two rays of monochromatic light, one entering the prism along the normal DE and the second one along PQ. B
D E F
30°
P Q
42°
A
R
C Fig. 6.1
(a) State what is meant by monochromatic light. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) The refractive index of the glass of the prism is 1.49. The ray EF is refracted at F. Use information from Fig. 6.1 to calculate the angle of refraction at F.
angle of refraction = ................................................ [3] (c) On Fig. 6.1, draw in the refracted ray, starting from F.
[1]
(d) State how the refraction, starting at F, would be different if the monochromatic ray were replaced by a ray of white light. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (e) The critical angle for the glass of the prism is just over 42°. State the approximate angle of refraction for the ray striking BC at R. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (f)
Another monochromatic ray, not shown in Fig. 6.1, passes through the prism and strikes BC at an angle of incidence of 50°. State what happens to this ray at the point where it strikes BC. .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
For Examiner’s Use
11 7
Fig. 7.1 shows a scale drawing of plane waves approaching a gap in a barrier.
For Examiner’s Use
direction of travel of plane waves
barrier
Fig. 7.1 (a) On Fig. 7.1, draw in the pattern of the waves after they have passed the gap.
[3]
(b) The waves approaching the barrier have a wavelength of 2.5 cm and a speed of 20 cm/s. Calculate the frequency of the waves.
frequency = ................................................ [2] (c) State the frequency of the diffracted waves. .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
[Turn over
12 8
Fig. 8.1 shows a car battery being charged from a 200 V a.c. mains supply.
car battery
200 V ~
Fig. 8.1 (a) State the function of the diode. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) The average charging current is 2.0 A and the battery takes 12 hours to charge fully. Calculate the charge that the battery stores when fully charged.
charge stored ................................................ [2] (c) The battery has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 12 V and, when connected to a circuit, supplies energy to the circuit components. State what is meant by an electromotive force of 12 V. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
For Examiner’s Use
13 (d) (i)
(ii)
In the space below, draw a circuit diagram to show how two 6.0 V lamps should be connected to a 12 V battery so that both lamps glow with normal brightness. [1]
For Examiner’s Use
The power of each lamp is 8.0 W. Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = ................................................. [2] (iii)
Calculate the energy used by the two lamps when both are lit for one hour.
energy = ................................................ [2] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
[Turn over
14 9
Fig. 9.1 is a block diagram of an electrical energy supply system, using the output of a coalfired power station.
power station
output at 1100 V
step-up transformer
transmission output at 32 000 V
step-down transformer
output
consumer
at 240 V
Fig. 9.1 (a) Suggest one possible way of storing surplus energy when the demand from the consumers falls below the output of the power station. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) State why electrical energy is transmitted at high voltage. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) A transmission cable of resistance R carries a current I. Write down a formula that gives the power loss in the cable in terms of R and I. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) The step-up transformer has 1200 turns on the primary coil. Using the values in Fig. 9.1, calculate the number of turns on its secondary coil. Assume that the transformer has no energy losses.
number of turns = ................................................. [2] (e) The input to the step-up transformer is 800 kW. Using the values in Fig. 9.1, calculate the current in the transmission cables, assuming that the transformer is 100% efficient.
current = ................................................ [3] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
For Examiner’s Use
15 10 Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit for a warning lamp that comes on when the external light intensity falls below a pre-set level.
For Examiner’s Use
+ low voltage supply –
Fig. 10.1 (a) On Fig. 10.1, label (i)
with the letter X the component that detects the change in external light intensity,
(ii)
with the letter Y the lamp,
(iii)
with the letter Z the component that switches the lamp on and off. [3]
(b) Describe how the circuit works as the external light intensity decreases and the lamp comes on. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
[Turn over
16 11 Fig. 11.1 shows the basic design of the tube of a cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO).
heater filament
B
For Examiner’s Use
C
cathode rays
A
anode
D
Fig. 11.1 (a) On Fig. 11.1, write the names of parts A, B, C and D in the boxes provided.
[2]
(b) State the function of: part A, .............................................................................................................................. .......................................................................................................................................... part B. .............................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) A varying p.d. from a 12 V supply is connected to a CRO, so that the waveform of the supply is shown on the screen. To which of the components in Fig. 11.1 (i)
is the 12 V supply connected, ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
is the time-base connected? ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*6024898353*
0625/31
PHYSICS Paper 3 Extended
October/November 2009 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 16 printed pages. DC (SHW 00151 2/08) 14866/7 © UCLES 2009
[Turn over
2 1
Fig 1.1 shows part of a measuring instrument.
0 mm
For Examiner’s Use
25 20
Fig. 1.1 (a) State the name of this instrument. ................................................. [1] (b) Record the reading shown in Fig. 1.1. ................................................. [1] (c) Describe how you would find the thickness of a sheet of paper used in a magazine. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
3 2
The list below gives the approximate densities of various metals. gold
19 g / cm3
lead
11 g / cm3
copper
9 g / cm3
iron
8 g / cm3
For Examiner’s Use
At an antiques market, a collector buys what is advertised as a small ancient gold statue. When the collector tests it in the laboratory, he finds its mass is 600 g and its volume is 65 cm3. (a) In the space below, describe how the volume of the statue could be measured. You may draw diagrams if you wish.
[3] (b) Use the figures given above to decide whether the statue was really made of gold. Show your working.
Was the statue made of gold? (Tick one box.) yes no [3] [Total: 6] © UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
[Turn over
4 3
A student investigated the stretching of a spring by hanging various weights from it and measuring the corresponding extensions. The results are shown below. weight / N
0
1
2
3
4
5
extension / mm
0
21
40
51
82
103
(a) On Fig. 3.1, plot the points from these results. Do not draw a line through the points yet. [2] 120
100 extension / mm 80
60
40
20
0 0
1
2
3
4 weight / N
Fig. 3.1
© UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
5
6
For Examiner’s Use
5 (b) The student appears to have made an error in recording one of the results.
For Examiner’s Use
Which result is this? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Ignoring the incorrect result, draw the best straight line through the remaining points. [1] (d) State and explain whether this spring is obeying Hooke’s Law. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (e) Describe how the graph might be shaped if the student continued to add several more weights to the spring. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (f)
The student estimates that if he hangs a 45 N load on the spring, the extension will be 920 mm. Explain why this estimate may be unrealistic. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
[Turn over
6 4
(a) A force acting on an object causes the object to accelerate.
For Examiner’s Use
In which direction is the acceleration? ................................................. [1] (b) Any object moving in a circle has a force acting on it towards the centre of the circle. What does this force do to the object? .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) A woman of mass 60 kg is standing in a lift at a shopping centre. (i)
The lift is at rest. 1.
State the value of the weight of the woman. ................................................. [1]
2.
State the value of the force exerted on the woman by the floor of the lift.
............................................................................................................................ [1] (ii)
Calculate the force required to accelerate a mass of 60 kg at 2.5 m / s2.
force = ................................................ [2] (iii)
The lift accelerates upwards at 2.5 m / s2. Calculate the force exerted on the woman by the floor when the lift is accelerating.
force = ................................................ [1] (iv)
The lift reaches a steady upward speed. State the value of the force exerted on the woman by the floor at this steady speed. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
7 5
A farmer uses an electric pump to raise water from a river in order to fill the irrigation channels that keep the soil in his fields moist. water pours into channel
For Examiner’s Use
electric pump
field water rises up tube
3m
irrigation channel
river
Fig. 5.1 Every minute, the pump raises 12 kg of water through a vertical height of 3 m. (a) Calculate the increase in the gravitational potential energy of 12 kg of water when it is raised 3 m.
increase in gravitational potential energy = ................................................ [3] (b) Calculate the useful power output of the pump as it raises the water.
power = ................................................ [3] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
[Turn over
8 6
A vertical cylinder has a smooth well-fitting piston in it. Weights can be added to or removed from a tray on the top of the piston. (a) Weights are added to the tray, as shown in Fig. 6.1. weights
piston
air cylinder
Fig. 6.1 (i)
State what happens to the pressure of the air in the cylinder as a result of adding these weights. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
The initial pressure of the trapped air is 1.05 × 105 Pa. When the weights are added, the volume of the air decreases from 860 cm3 to 645 cm3. The temperature of the air does not change. Calculate the final pressure of the trapped air.
pressure = ................................................ [3] (iii)
The area of the piston is 5.0 × 10–3 m2. Calculate the weight that is added to the piston.
weight added = ................................................ [4] © UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
For Examiner’s Use
9 (b) The weights are kept as shown in Fig. 6.1. The temperature of the air in the cylinder is increased. (i)
For Examiner’s Use
State what happens to the volume of the air in the cylinder as a result of this temperature rise. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State how, if at all, the pressure of the air changes as the temperature changes. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
State what must be done to prevent the volume change in (b)(i). ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv)
The volume change in (b)(i) is prevented. State what happens to the pressure of the air in the cylinder. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 12]
© UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
[Turn over
10 7
Three wires and a meter are used to construct a thermocouple for measuring the surface temperature of a pipe carrying hot liquid, as shown in Fig. 7.1. meter wire 2
wire 1
cold junction wire 3
hot junction
hot liquid in pipe Fig. 7.1 (a) Copper wire and constantan wire are used in the construction of the thermocouple. State which metal might be used for wire 1 ...................................................... wire 2 ...................................................... wire 3 ...................................................... [1] (b) State what type of meter is used. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) State one particular advantage of thermocouples for measuring temperature. .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 3]
© UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
For Examiner’s Use
11 8
Fig. 8.1 shows a thin converging lens. The two principal foci are shown.
F2
For Examiner’s Use
F1
principal axis
Fig. 8.1 A vertical object, 2 cm tall, is to be positioned to the left of the lens, with one end on the principal axis. On Fig. 8.1, (a) draw the object in a position which will produce a virtual image, labelling the object with the letter O, [1] (b) draw two rays showing how the virtual image is formed,
[2]
(c) draw in the image, labelling it with the letter I.
[1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
[Turn over
12 9
(a) State what is meant by specific heat capacity. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) Water has a very high specific heat capacity. Suggest why this might be a disadvantage when using water for cooking. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Fig. 9.1 illustrates an experiment to measure the specific heat capacity of some metal. stirrer thermometer lid thread boiling water
cup insulation
metal
water
heater Fig. 9.1 The piece of metal is heated in boiling water until it has reached the temperature of the water. It is then transferred rapidly to some water in a well-insulated cup. A very sensitive thermometer is used to measure the initial and final temperatures of the water in the cup. specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J / (kg K) The readings from the experiment are as follows. mass of metal = 0.050 kg mass of water in cup = 0.200 kg initial temperature of water in cup = 21.1 °C final temperature of water in cup = 22.9 °C (i)
Calculate the temperature rise of the water in the cup and the temperature fall of the piece of metal. temperature rise of water = ...................................................... temperature fall of metal = ...................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
For Examiner’s Use
13 (ii)
Calculate the thermal energy gained by the water in the cup. State the equation that you use.
For Examiner’s Use
thermal energy gained = ................................................ [3] (iii)
Assume that only the water gained thermal energy from the piece of metal. Making use of your answers to (c)(i) and (c)(ii), calculate the value of the specific heat capacity of the metal. Give your answer to 3 significant figures.
specific heat capacity = ................................................ [2] (iv)
Suggest one reason why the experiment might not have given a correct value for the specific heat capacity of the metal. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
[Turn over
14 10 Alternating current electricity is delivered at 22 000 V to a pair of transmission lines. The transmission lines carry the electricity to the customer at the receiving end, where the potential difference is V. This is shown in Fig. 10.1. Each transmission line has a resistance of 3 Ω. 3Ω
22 000 V 3Ω
V
Fig. 10.1 (a) The a.c. generator actually generates at a much lower voltage than 22 000 V. (i)
Suggest how the voltage is increased to 22 000 V. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State one advantage of delivering electrical energy at high voltage. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The power delivered by the generator is 55 kW. Calculate the current in the transmission lines.
current = ................................................ [2] (c) Calculate the rate of loss of energy from one of the 3 Ω transmission lines.
rate of energy loss = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
For Examiner’s Use
15 (d) Calculate the voltage drop across one of the transmission lines.
For Examiner’s Use
voltage drop = ................................................ [2] (e) Calculate the potential difference V at the receiving end of the transmission lines.
V = ................................................ [2] [Total: 10]
Question 11 is on the next page.
© UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
[Turn over
16 11 Fig. 11.1 is a schematic diagram of an electronic circuit controlling a lamp.
For Examiner’s Use
temperature sensor
relay
lamp
B A light sensor Fig. 11.1 (a) State the names of the logic gates A and B. A ........................................................
B ........................................................
[2]
(b) The output of the temperature sensor is high (logic 1) when it detects raised temperature. The output of the light sensor is high (logic 1) when it detects raised light levels. State the outputs of A and B when the surroundings are (i)
dark and cold,
output of A = .................................... output of B = ....................................
(ii)
dark and warm,
output of A = .................................... output of B = ....................................
(iii)
bright and warm.
[1]
output of A = .................................... output of B = ....................................
(c) (i)
[1]
[1]
Suggest why B is connected to a relay, rather than directly to the lamp. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
The relay switches on when its input is high. In which of the three combinations in (b) will the lamp light up? ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
Suggest a practical use for this circuit. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 8]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*7776753992*
0625/31
PHYSICS Paper 3 Extended
May/June 2010 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page. DC (SHW 00380 1/09) 20284/4 © UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed/time graph for a car travelling along a straight road. The graph shows how the speed of the car changes as the car passes through a small town. 35
D 30 speed m/s A
25
enters town here
20
leaves town here
15 B
C
10
5
0 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
time / s Fig. 1.1 (a) Describe what happens to the speed of the car (i)
between A and B, .....................................................................................................
(ii)
between B and C, .....................................................................................................
(iii)
between C and D. ..................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) Calculate the distance between the start of the town and the end of the town.
For Examiner’s Use
distance = ................................................ [3] (c) Calculate the acceleration of the car between C and D.
acceleration = ................................................ [3] (d) State how the graph shows that the deceleration of the car has the same numerical value as its acceleration. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
4 2
A car of mass 900 kg is travelling at a steady speed of 30 m / s against a resistive force of 2000 N, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1. 30 m / s 2000 N resistive force
Fig. 2.1 (a) Calculate the kinetic energy of the car.
kinetic energy = ................................................ [2] (b) Calculate the energy used in 1.0 s against the resistive force.
energy = ................................................ [2] (c) What is the minimum power that the car engine has to deliver to the wheels?
minimum power = ................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
5 (d) What form of energy is in the fuel, used by the engine to drive the car? .................................................................................................................................... [1]
For Examiner’s Use
(e) State why the energy in the fuel is converted at a greater rate than you have calculated in (c). .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
6 3
Two students make the statements about acceleration that are given below. Student A:
For a given mass the acceleration of an object is proportional to the resultant force applied to the object.
Student B:
For a given force the acceleration of an object is proportional to the mass of the object.
(a) One statement is correct and one is incorrect. Re-write the incorrect statement, making changes so that it is now correct. For a given ..................... the acceleration of an object is ............................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) State the equation which links acceleration a, resultant force F and mass m.
[1] (c) Describe what happens to the motion of a moving object when (i)
there is no resultant force acting on it, ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
a resultant force is applied to it in the opposite direction to the motion, ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
a resultant force is applied to it in a perpendicular direction to the motion. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
7 4
(a) Four identical metal plates, at the same temperature, are laid side by side on the ground. The rays from the Sun fall on the plates.
For Examiner’s Use
One plate has a matt black surface. One plate has a shiny black surface. One plate has a matt silver surface. One plate has a shiny silver surface. State which plate has the fastest-rising temperature when the sunlight first falls on the plates. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) The apparatus shown in Fig. 4.1 is known as Leslie’s Differential Air Thermometer. glass bulb painted matt black
radiant heater
shiny glass bulb
air T
liquid
Fig. 4.1 The heater is switched off. Tap T is opened so that the air on the two sides of T has the same pressure. Tap T is then closed. (i)
The heater is switched on. On Fig. 4.1, mark clearly where the two liquid levels might be a short time later. [1]
(ii)
Explain your answer to (b)(i). .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
8 5
A certain substance is in the solid state at a temperature of –36 °C. It is heated at a constant rate for 32 minutes. The record of its temperature is given in Fig. 5.1.
time / min
0
temperature / °C
1
–36 –16
2
6
10
14
18
22
24
26
28
30
32
–9
–9
–9
–9
32
75
101 121 121 121 121
Fig. 5.1 (a) State what is meant by the term latent heat. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) State a time at which the energy is being supplied as latent heat of fusion. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Explain the energy changes undergone by the molecules of a substance during the period when latent heat of vaporisation is being supplied. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) (i)
The rate of heating is 2.0 kW. Calculate how much energy is supplied to the substance during the period 18 – 22 minutes.
energy supplied = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
9 (ii)
The specific heat capacity of the substance is 1760 J / (kg °C). Use the information in the table for the period 18 – 22 minutes to calculate the mass of the substance being heated.
For Examiner’s Use
mass heated = ................................................ [3] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
10 6
Some plane waves travel on the surface of water in a tank. They pass from a region of deep water into a region of shallow water. Fig. 6.1 shows what the waves look like from above. boundary
waves move this way deep water
shallow water Fig. 6.1
(a) State what happens at the boundary, if anything, to (i)
the frequency of the waves, ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
the speed of the waves, ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
the wavelength of the waves. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The waves have a speed of 0.12 m / s in the deep water. Wave crests are 0.08 m apart in the deep water. Calculate the frequency of the source producing the waves. State the equation that you use.
frequency = ................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
11 (c) Fig. 6.2 shows identical waves moving towards the boundary at an angle.
For Examiner’s Use
boundary A B
waves move this way
deep water
shallow water
Fig. 6.2 On Fig. 6.2, draw carefully the remainder of waves A and B, plus the two previous waves which reached the shallow water. You will need to use your ruler to do this. [3] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
12 7
During a thunderstorm, thunder and lightning are produced at the same time.
For Examiner’s Use
(a) A person is some distance away from the storm. Explain why the person sees the lightning before hearing the thunder. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) A scientist in a laboratory made the following measurements during a thunderstorm. time from start of storm / minutes
0.0
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
time between seeing lightning and hearing thunder / s
3.6
2.4
1.6
2.4
3.5
4.4
Fig. 7.1 (i)
How many minutes after the storm started did it reach its closest point to the laboratory? ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
How can you tell that the storm was never immediately over the laboratory? ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
When the storm started, it was immediately above a village 1200 m from the laboratory. Using this information and information from Fig. 7.1, calculate the speed of sound.
speed of sound = ................................................ [2] (iv)
State the assumption you made when you calculated your answer to (b)(iii). ............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
13 (c) Some waves are longitudinal; some waves are transverse.
For Examiner’s Use
Some waves are electromagnetic; some waves are mechanical. Put ticks (✓) in the table below to indicate which of these descriptions apply to the light waves of the lightning and the sound waves of the thunder. light waves
sound waves
longitudinal transverse electromagnetic mechanical [3] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
14 8
(a) The transformer in Fig. 8.1 is used to convert 240 V a.c. to 6 V a.c. iron core A C
D B primary coil (480 turns)
secondary coil
Fig. 8.1 (i)
Using the information above, calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
number of turns = ................................................ [2] (ii)
Describe how the transformer works. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [3]
(iii)
State one way in which energy is lost from the transformer, and from which part it is lost. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
15 (b) Fig. 8.2 shows a device labelled “IGCSE Transformer”.
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 8.2 Study the label on the case of the IGCSE Transformer. (i)
What is the output of the device? ....................................................................... [1]
(ii)
From the information on the case, deduce what other electrical component must be included within the case of the IGCSE Transformer, apart from a transformer. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) A transformer supplying electrical energy to a factory changes the 11 000 V a.c. supply to 440 V a.c. for use in the factory. The current in the secondary coil is 200 A. Calculate the current in the primary coil, assuming no losses from the transformer.
current = ................................................ [2] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
16 9
(a) Fig. 9.1 illustrates the left hand rule, which helps when describing the force on a currentcarrying conductor in a magnetic field. thumb
motion / force
first finger
second finger
Fig. 9.1 One direction has been labelled for you. In each of the other two boxes, write the name of the quantity that direction represents. [1] (b) Fig. 9.2 shows a simple d.c. motor connected to a battery and a switch.
N S X
switch battery Fig. 9.2
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
17 (i)
On Fig. 9.2, write in each of the boxes the name of the part of the motor to which the arrow is pointing. [2]
(ii)
State which way the coil of the motor will rotate when the switch is closed, when viewed from the position X.
For Examiner’s Use
............................................................................................................................ [1] (iii)
State two things which could be done to increase the speed of rotation of the coil. 1. ............................................................................................................................... 2. ......................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
18 10 A certain element is known to exist as two different isotopes.
For Examiner’s Use
(a) State one thing that is the same for atoms of both isotopes. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) State one thing that is different between atoms of these two isotopes. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) An atom of one of these isotopes is unstable and decays into a different element by emitting a -particle. (i)
State one thing about the atom that remains the same during this decay. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State one thing about the atom that changes as a result of this decay. ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
19 11 (a) A coil of wire is connected into a circuit containing a variable resistor and a battery.
For Examiner’s Use
The variable resistor is adjusted until the potential difference across the coil is 1.8 V. In this condition, the current in the circuit is 0.45 A. Calculate (i)
the resistance of the coil,
resistance = ................................................ [1] (ii)
the thermal energy released from this coil in 9 minutes.
energy released = ................................................ [3] (b) The coil in part (a) is replaced by one made of wire which has half the diameter of that in (a). When the potential difference across the coil is again adjusted to 1.8 V, the current is only 0.30 A. Calculate how the length of wire in the second coil compares with the length of wire in the first coil.
length of wire in second coil is ………………………… the length of wire in first coil
[4]
[Total: 8] © UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*3428909673*
0625/31
PHYSICS Paper 3 Extended
October/November 2010 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages. DC (NF/SW) 24990/4 © UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2 1
An object of weight W is suspended by two ropes from a beam, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
30° 50.0 N
86.6 N
60°
W Fig. 1.1 The tensions in the ropes are 50.0 N and 86.6 N, as shown. (a) In the space below, draw a scale diagram to find the resultant of the two tensions. Use a scale of 1.0 cm = 10 N. Clearly label the resultant.
© UCLES 2010
[3]
0625/31/O/N/10
3 (b) From your diagram, find the value of the resultant. resultant = ......................................................... [1] (c) State the direction in which the resultant is acting. ............................................................................................................................................. [1] (d) State the value of W.
W = ......................................................... [1] [Total: 6]
2
A car travels around a circular track at constant speed. (a) Why is it incorrect to describe the circular motion as having constant velocity? ............................................................................................................................................. [1] (b) A force is required to maintain the circular motion. (i)
Explain why a force is required. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
In which direction does this force act? ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
Suggest what provides this force. ..................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Turn over
4 3
Fig. 3.1 shows a hydraulic lift in a car repair workshop.
car support
hydraulic fluid
4 pistons, each of area 0.02 m2 piston A, area 0.01 m2 Fig. 3.1 The hydraulic fluid transmits the pressure, caused by piston A, equally to each of the four pistons holding up the car supports. The pressure throughout the fluid is the same. A force of 1000 N on piston A is just enough to raise the car. (a) Using values from Fig. 3.1, find (i)
the pressure caused by piston A on the fluid,
pressure = ......................................................... [2] (ii)
the total upward force caused by the fluid.
force = ......................................................... [3] © UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
5 (b) The weight of each of the two car supports is 1000 N. Calculate the mass of the car.
mass = ......................................................... [2] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Turn over
6 4
A student in a laboratory uses the apparatus shown in Fig. 4.1 to determine the specific heat capacity of aluminium. to low voltage supply and measuring instruments thermometer
electrical heater
aluminium block
Fig. 4.1 The readings obtained in the experiment are given below. mass of aluminium block
= 0.930 kg
initial temperature of block = 13.1 °C final temperature of block
= 41.3 °C
electrical energy supplied = 23 800 J (a) Define specific heat capacity. ................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................. [2] (b) Use the readings above to calculate the specific heat capacity of aluminium. State the equation you use.
specific heat capacity = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
7 (c) Because the student knows it is good scientific practice to repeat readings, after a short time he carries out the experiment again, supplying the same quantity of electrical energy. This time the temperature readings are: initial temperature of block = 41.0 °C final temperature of block (i)
= 62.1 °C
Use these figures to calculate a second value for the specific heat capacity of aluminium.
specific heat capacity = ......................................................... [1] (ii)
The student did not make any mistakes when taking the readings. Suggest why the second value for the specific heat capacity of the aluminium is greater than the first. ........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Suggest two ways of improving the experiment in order to give as accurate a result as possible. 1. ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... 2. ............................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. [2] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Turn over
8 5
Fig. 5.1 shows a model cable-car system. It is driven by an electric motor coupled to a gear system. gears
6.0
m electric motor
2.0 m
smooth pulley
model cable-car
Fig. 5.1 The model cable-car has a mass of 5.0 kg and is lifted from the bottom pulley to the top pulley in 40 s. It stops automatically at the top. (a) Calculate (i)
the average speed of the cable-car,
average speed = .......................................................... [2] (ii)
the gravitational potential energy gained by the cable-car,
gravitational potential energy gained = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
9 (iii)
the useful output power of the driving mechanism.
power = ......................................................... [2] (b) How would the electrical power input to the motor compare with your answer to (a)(iii)? ............................................................................................................................................. [1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Turn over
10 6
Fig. 6.1 shows part of the path of a ray of light PQ travelling in an optical fibre. Q glass
P
R
Fig. 6.1 PQ undergoes total internal reflection at Q. (a) Explain what is meant by total internal reflection, and state the conditions under which it occurs. ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................. [3] (b) Carefully complete the path of the ray of light, until it reaches the end R of the optical fibre. [2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
11 7
(a) The following list contains the names of types of energy transfer by means of waves. γ-rays, (i)
infra-red,
radio/TV/microwaves,
sound,
visible light,
X-rays
Which one of these is not a type of electromagnetic wave? ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State the nature of the wave you have named in (a)(i). ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
The remaining names in the list are all regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, but one region is missing. Name the missing region. ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A television station emits waves with a frequency of 2.5 × 108 Hz. Electromagnetic waves travel at a speed of 3.0 × 108 m / s. Calculate the wavelength of the waves emitted by this television station. State the equation you use.
wavelength = ......................................................... [3] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Turn over
12 8
The circuit in Fig. 8.1 contains a 2.0 V cell, whose resistance you should ignore. There are also three resistors, a 3-position switch, an ammeter and another component, P. 5.0
A S
B
20.0
C
A P
2.0 V
Fig. 8.1 (a) State the name of component P.
.......................................................... [1]
(b) Deduce the resistance of the circuit when switch S is (i)
in position A,
resistance = ......................................................... [1] (ii)
in position B.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
13 (c) Describe and explain what is seen on the ammeter when S is moved to position C. ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................. [2] (d) With S in position A, calculate how long it takes for the circuit to transfer 320 J of electrical energy to other forms.
time taken = ......................................................... [3] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Turn over
14 BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
15 9
In Fig. 9.1, A and B are two conductors on insulating stands. Both A and B were initially uncharged. X
A
Y
B
Fig. 9.1 (a) Conductor A is given the positive charge shown on Fig. 9.1. (i)
On Fig. 9.1, mark the signs of the charges induced at end X and at end Y of conductor B. [1]
(ii)
Explain how these charges are induced. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii)
Explain why the charges at X and at Y are equal in magnitude. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) B is now connected to earth by a length of wire. Explain what happens, if anything, to (i)
the charge at X, ........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
the charge at Y. ........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Total: 8] [Turn over
16 10 Emissions from a radioactive source pass through a hole in a lead screen and into a magnetic field, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
radioactive source
magnetic field into paper
A
B
lead screen C 3 cm Fig. 10.1 Radiation detectors are placed at A, B and C. They give the following readings: A
B
C
32 counts / min
543 counts / min
396 counts / min
The radioactive source is then completely removed, and the readings become: A
B
C
33 counts / min
30 counts / min
31 counts / min
(a) Explain why there are still counts being recorded at A, B and C, even when the radioactive source has been removed, and give the reason for them being slightly different. ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
17 (b) From the data given, deduce the type of emission being detected, if any, at A, at B and at C when the radiation source is present. State the reasons for your answers. detector at A ............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................. [2] detector at B ............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................. [3] detector at C ............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................. [3] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Turn over
18 11 When no circuit is connected to the input of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (CRO), there is a horizontal trace across the middle of the screen. Fig. 11.1 shows three circuits, each connected to a CRO. On the grid alongside each circuit, draw the trace that might be seen on the screen of the CRO.
+ battery –
CRO
a.c. supply
CRO
a.c. supply
CRO
[6] Fig. 11.1 [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
19 BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
20 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 9 9 7 8 9 4 1 3 2 5 *
0625/31
PHYSICS Paper 3 Extended
May/June 2011 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 20 printed pages. DC (LEO/DJ) 28843/5 © UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2 1
In a laboratory, an experiment is carried out to measure the acceleration of a trolley on a horizontal table, when pulled by a horizontal force. trolley force
Fig. 1.1 The measurements are repeated for a series of different forces, with the results shown in the table below. force / N
4.0
6.0
10.0
14.0
acceleration m / s2
0.50
0.85
1.55
2.25
(a) On Fig. 1.2, plot these points and draw the best straight line for your points.
16 force / N 12
8
4
0 0
0.5
1.0
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
1.5 2.0 acceleration m / s2
2.5
[2]
3 (b) The graph shows that below a certain force there is no acceleration. (i)
Find the value of this force. ............................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
A force smaller than that in (b)(i) is applied to the stationary trolley. Suggest what happens to the trolley, if anything. .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Show that the gradient of your graph is about 5.7.
gradient = ...........................................................[1] (d) (i)
State the equation that links resultant force F, mass m and acceleration a.
[1] (ii)
Use your gradient from (c) to find the mass of the trolley.
mass = ...........................................................[2] (e) On Fig. 1.3, sketch a speed / time graph for a trolley with constant acceleration.
speed
0 0
time Fig. 1.3 [1] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
4 2
Some builders decide to measure their personal power ratings using apparatus they already have on site. Fig. 2.1 shows the arrangement they use.
pulley
rope load
pulley
Fig. 2.1 (a) In the table below, list the three quantities they must measure in order to calculate one man’s power, and the instrument they would use for each measurement. quantity to be measured
instrument used for measurement
1.
2.
3. [3] (b) One workman is measured as having a power of 528 W. His weight is 800 N. He can develop the same power climbing a ladder, whose rungs are 30 cm apart. How many rungs can he climb in 5 s?
number of rungs = ...........................................................[3] © UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
5 (c) The human body is only about 15% efficient when climbing ladders. Calculate the actual energy used from the body of the workman in (b) when he climbs 20 rungs.
energy used = ...........................................................[2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
6 3
During a period of hot weather, the atmospheric pressure on the pond in Fig. 3.1 remains constant. Water evaporates from the pond, so that the depth h decreases. force due to air pressure
h
Fig. 3.1 (a) Study the diagram and state, giving your reason, what happens during this hot period to (i)
the force of the air on the surface of the pond, ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
the pressure at the bottom of the pond. ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) On a certain day, the pond is 12 m deep. (i)
Water has a density of 1000 kg / m3. Calculate the pressure at the bottom of the pond due to the water.
pressure due to the water = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
7 (ii)
Atmospheric pressure on that day is 1.0 × 105 Pa. Calculate the total pressure at the bottom of the pond.
total pressure = ...........................................................[1] (iii)
A bubble of gas is released from the mud at the bottom of the pond. Its initial volume is 0.5 cm3. Ignoring any temperature differences in the water, calculate the volume of the bubble as it reaches the surface.
volume = ...........................................................[2] (iv)
In fact, the temperature of the water is greater at the top than at the bottom of the pond. Comment on the bubble volume you have calculated in (b)(iii). ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
8 4
The circuit of Fig. 4.1 is set up to run a small immersion heater from a 6.0 V battery. 6.0 V
X
A
heater
Fig. 4.1 (a) State the name and purpose of component X. name ......................................................................................................................................... purpose .................................................................................................................................[1] (b) The heater is designed to work from a 3.6 V supply. It has a power rating of 4.5 W at this voltage. (i)
Calculate the current in the heater when it has the correct potential difference across it.
current = ...........................................................[2] (ii)
Calculate the resistance of component X if there is to be the correct potential difference across the heater. The battery and the ammeter both have zero resistance.
resistance = ...........................................................[3] (c) Some time after the heater is switched on, the ammeter reading is seen to have decreased. Suggest why this happens. ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
9 (d) As an alternative to running the heater from a battery, it is decided to construct a circuit to enable it to be operated from the a.c. mains supply. Name the electrical component needed to (i)
reduce the potential difference from that of the mains supply down to a potential difference suitable for the heater, .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
change the current from a.c. to a current which has only one direction. .......................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
10 5
The manufacturer’s label on an electric heater is as shown in Fig. 5.1.
C.I.E. Electrical Company Suitable for use on 110 V, 60 Hz supply 1 kW/ 2 kW This appliance must be earthed when in use Fig. 5.1 (a) State what electrical quantity is represented by (i)
110 V,
(ii)
60 Hz, ............................................................................................................
(iii)
1 kW.
(b) (i)
............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................
[1]
Which part of the electric heater must be earthed? .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Explain what the hazard might be if the heater is not earthed. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The heater has two 110 V heating elements, with two switches, so that either one or both elements may be switched on. In the space below, draw a circuit diagram showing how the heating elements and switches are connected to the mains supply. for each heating element. Use the symbol
[2] [Total: 6] © UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
11 6
(a) Six different nuclides have nucleon and proton numbers as follows: nuclide
nucleon number
proton number
A
214
84
B
214
85
C
211
84
D
211
86
E
210
82
F
210
83
State which two nuclides are isotopes of the same element.
.................. and ................. [1]
(b) Thorium-232 has a half-life of 1.4 × 1010 years. At a particular instant, the activity of a sample of thorium-232 is 120 Bq. (i)
Calculate the time taken for the activity of this sample to fall to 15 Bq.
time taken ...........................................................[1] (ii)
Explain why, when the activity has become 15 Bq, much of the sample will no longer be thorium-232. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii)
The sample of thorium-232 is used in an experiment in a laboratory. Explain why its activity may be regarded as constant. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
12 7
(a) The speed of light in air is known to be 3.0 × 108 m / s. Outline how you would use a refraction experiment to deduce the speed of light in glass. You may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify your answer.
................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[4] (b) A tsunami is a giant water wave. It may be caused by an earthquake below the ocean. Waves from a certain tsunami have a wavelength of 1.9 × 105 m and a speed of 240 m / s. (i)
Calculate the frequency of the tsunami waves.
frequency = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
13 (ii)
The shock wave from the earthquake travels at 2.5 × 103 m / s. The centre of the earthquake is 6.0 × 105 m from the coast of a country. Calculate how much warning of the arrival of the tsunami at the coast is given by the earth tremor felt at the coast.
warning time = ...........................................................[4] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
14 8
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows a section of an optical fibre. It consists of a fibre of denser transparent material, coated with a layer of a less dense transparent material. less dense material ray denser material
Fig. 8.1 One ray within the fibre has been started for you on Fig. 8.1. (i)
State and explain what happens to the ray already drawn, after it reaches the boundary between the materials. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii)
On Fig. 8.1, carefully continue the ray until it reaches the end of the section of optical fibre. [1]
(b) Fibre-optic cables are sometimes used to carry out internal examinations on the human stomach. (i)
Suggest one reason why the cable is made of thousands of very thin optical fibres. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Describe briefly how the inside of the stomach is illuminated. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
15 (iii)
Describe briefly how the light from the stomach is transferred to the detecting equipment outside the body. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
16 9
A simple motor is made in a school laboratory. A coil of wire is mounted on an axle between the poles of a horseshoe magnet, as illustrated in Fig. 9.1. coil B
C
N
S A
D
springy contacts (brushes)
+ – battery
Fig. 9.1 (a) At the instant illustrated in Fig. 9.1, the coil ABCD is horizontal and the battery is connected as shown. (i)
For this position, state the direction of the force on AB and the direction of the motion of AB. force on AB ........................................................................................................................ direction of motion of AB ...............................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Explain why BC does not contribute to the turning force on the coil. ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
17 (b) At the instant when the coil is vertical, the springy contacts do not, in fact, make contact with the ends of the coil. Describe and explain what happens to the coil. ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[2] (c) The motor in Fig. 9.1 does not rotate very quickly. The designer of a commercial motor is required to produce a faster-rotating motor. Suggest one change that could be made to increase the speed of the motor. ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
18 10 (a) A cathode-ray oscilloscope makes use of the process known as thermionic emission. Describe what happens during this process. ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (b) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a cathode-ray oscilloscope. Include in your diagram the tube, the cathode, the accelerating anode, the focusing anode and both X- and Y-plates. Do not attempt to show any external circuits.
[3] (c) A cathode ray is a beam of electrons. Suggest one way of controlling the number of electrons in the beam. ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
19 (d) One cathode-ray tube has 5000 V between the accelerating anode and the cathode. The beam of electrons carries a total charge of 0.0095 C in 5.0 s. Calculate (i)
the current caused by the beam,
current = ...........................................................[2] (ii)
the energy transferred by the beam in 20 s.
energy = ...........................................................[2] [Total: 9]
Question 11 is on the next page.
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
20 11 A mass of 0.36 kg of a certain substance is in the solid state in a well-insulated container. The substance is heated at the rate of 1.2 × 104 J / minute. 2.0 minutes after starting the heating, the substance is all at the same temperature, and it starts to melt. 11.0 minutes after starting the heating, the substance finishes melting and the temperature starts to rise again. (a) Calculate the specific latent heat of the substance.
specific latent heat = ...........................................................[3] (b) (i)
After 11 minutes of heating, when the temperature starts rising again, in which state is the substance? .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Describe what happens to the molecules as thermal energy is supplied to them in this state. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[2] [Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 4 2 0 3 7 8 0 5 5 2 *
0625/31
PHYSICS Paper 3 Extended
October/November 2011 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page. DC (NH/DJ) 33051/8 © UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2 1
(a) Define acceleration. Explain any symbols in your definition. ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (b) Fig. 1.1 shows a graph of speed against time for a train. After 100 s the train stops at a station. 30 speed 25 m/s 20 15 10 5 0 0
20
40
60
80
100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 time / s Fig. 1.1
(i)
For the time interval between 40 s and 100 s, calculate the distance travelled by the train.
distance = ...........................................................[2] (ii)
The train stops for 80 s, then accelerates to 30 m / s with an acceleration of 0.60 m / s2. It then travels at constant speed. Complete the graph for the interval 100 s to 280 s, showing your calculations in the space below.
[5] [Total: 8] © UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
3 2
(a) Energy from the Sun evaporates water from the sea. Some of this water eventually drives a hydroelectric power station. Give an account of the processes and energy changes involved. ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[4] (b) In a hydroelectric power station, 200 000 kg of water per second fall through a vertical distance of 120 m. The water passes through turbines to generate electricity, and leaves the turbines with a speed of 14 m / s. (i)
Calculate the gravitational potential energy lost by the water in 1 second. Use g = 10 m / s2.
potential energy lost = ............................................................[2] (ii)
Calculate the kinetic energy of the water leaving the turbines in 1 second.
kinetic energy = ............................................................[2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
[Turn over
4 3
(a) State the two conditions required for the equilibrium of a body acted upon by a number of forces. 1. ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... 2. ............................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[2] (b) Fig. 3.1 shows a diagram of an arm with the hand holding a weight of 120 N.
F 2 cm P
15 cm
20 N 33 cm
120 N
Fig. 3.1 The 20 N force is the weight of the forearm, acting at its centre of mass. F is the force in the muscle of the upper arm. P is the point in the elbow about which the arm pivots. The distances of the forces from point P are shown. (i)
By taking moments about point P, calculate the force F.
force F = ...........................................................[3] (ii)
A force acts on the forearm at point P. Calculate this force and state its direction.
force = ............................................................... direction = ...........................................................[2] [Total: 7] © UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
5 4
(a) Complete Fig. 4.1 to show a simple mercury barometer. Insert the correct labels in the boxes. Label with the letter h the measurement required to calculate the pressure of the atmosphere.
[3] Fig. 4.1 (b) The value of h taken using this barometer is 0.73 m. The density of mercury is 13 600 kg / m3. Calculate the value of the atmospheric pressure suggested by this measurement. Use g = 10 m / s2.
atmospheric pressure = ...........................................................[2] (c) Standard atmospheric pressure is 0.76 m of mercury. Suggest a reason why the value of h in (b) is lower than this. ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
[Turn over
6 5
(a) Equal volumes of a gas held at constant pressure, a liquid and a solid undergo the same temperature rise. (i)
(ii)
State which of the three, solid, liquid or gas, 1.
expands the most, ..............................
2.
expands the least. ..............................
Explain why the pressure of the gas must be kept constant for this comparison. ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows an alcohol thermometer. –10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70 °C
Fig. 5.1 (i)
State two properties of alcohol which make it suitable for use in a thermometer. 1. ........................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................... 2. ........................................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii)
State two changes to the design of this thermometer which would make it more sensitive. 1. ........................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................... 2. ........................................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain why it is an advantage for the glass surrounding the alcohol in the bulb of the thermometer to be very thin. ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
7 6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows the position of layers of air, at one moment, as a sound wave of constant frequency passes through the air. Compressions are labelled C. Rarefactions are labelled R.
C
R
C
R
C
R
C
R
C
R
C
Fig. 6.1 (i)
State how Fig. 6.1 would change if 1.
the sound had a higher frequency, ................................................................................................................................[1]
2.
the sound were louder. .................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii)
On Fig. 6.1, draw a line marked with arrows at each end to show the wavelength of the sound. [1]
(b) In an experiment to measure the speed of sound in steel, a steel pipe of length 200 m is struck at one end with a hammer. A microphone at the other end of the pipe is connected to an accurate timer. The timer records a delay of 0.544 s between the arrival of the sound transmitted by the steel pipe and the sound transmitted by the air in the pipe. The speed of sound in air is 343 m / s. Calculate the speed of sound in steel.
speed of sound in steel = ...........................................................[3] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
[Turn over
8 7
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of monochromatic red light, in air, incident on a glass block at an angle of incidence of 50°.
50°
Fig. 7.1 (i)
State what is meant by monochromatic light. .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
For this red ray the refractive index of the glass is 1.52. Calculate the angle of refraction for the ray.
angle of refraction = ...........................................................[2] (iii)
© UCLES 2011
Without measuring angles, use a ruler to draw the approximate path of the ray in the glass block and emerging from the block. [2]
0625/31/O/N/11
9 (b) The red ray in Fig. 7.1 is replaced by a ray of monochromatic violet light. For this violet ray the refractive index of the glass is 1.54. The speed of light in air is 3.00 × 108 m / s. (i)
Calculate the speed of the violet light in the glass block.
speed = ...........................................................[2] (ii)
Use a ruler to draw the approximate path of this violet ray in the glass block and emerging from the block. Make sure this path is separated from the path drawn for the red light in (a)(iii). Mark both parts of this path with the letter V. [2] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
[Turn over
10 8
(a) In Fig. 8.1, a magnet is moving towards one end of a solenoid connected to a sensitive centrezero meter. During this movement a current is induced in the solenoid.
S
N
Fig. 8.1 Suggest three possible changes to the system in Fig. 8.1 that would increase the induced current. 1. ............................................................................................................................................... 2. ............................................................................................................................................... 3. ...........................................................................................................................................[3] (b) Fig. 8.2 shows a transformer. P is the primary coil. S is the secondary coil. The coils are wound on an iron core.
P
S
Fig. 8.2 P has 200 turns and S has 800 turns. The e.m.f. induced across S is 24 V. The current in S is 0.50 A. The transformer operates with 100% efficiency.
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
11 Calculate (i)
the voltage of the supply to P,
voltage = ...........................................................[2] (ii)
the current in P.
current = ...........................................................[2] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
[Turn over
12 9
The graphs in Fig. 9.1 show the relation between the current I and the potential difference V for a resistor and a lamp. 6 5 I/A lamp
4 3 2
resistor
1 0 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
V/V Fig. 9.1 (a) (i)
Describe how, if at all, the resistance varies as the current increases in 1. the resistor, ................................................................................................................... 2. the lamp. ...................................................................................................................[2]
(ii)
State the value of the potential difference when the resistor and the lamp have the same resistance. potential difference = ...........................................................[1]
(b) The two components are connected in parallel to a supply of e.m.f. 4.0 V. Calculate the total resistance of the circuit.
total resistance = ...........................................................[4] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
13 10 (a) In Fig. 10.1, A is a 1000 resistor, C is a transistor, and D is a lamp. S is a 9 V supply.
D A + S – C B
Fig. 10.1 (i)
Name the component labelled B. .......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
At 20 °C the resistance of B is 800 . At 100 °C the resistance of B is 25 . In terms of the p.d. across B, explain what happens in the circuit as the temperature varies from 20 °C to 100 °C. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Suggest a practical use for this circuit. ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
[Turn over
14 11 Fig. 11.1 shows the main components of a cathode-ray oscilloscope. fluorescent screen
electron beam
heater cathode
anode Y-plates X-plates vacuum system Fig. 11.1
(a) State the purpose of (i)
the heater, ........................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................
(ii)
the cathode, ........................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................
(iii)
the anode system. ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
15 (b) Without deflection, the electron beam produces a spot at the centre of the fluorescent screen. A deflection of the spot towards the top of the screen is required. (i)
Describe how the Y-plates can be used to bring about this deflection. ........................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Fig. 11.2 shows the Y-plates.
Fig. 11.2 On Fig. 11.2, sketch the pattern of the electric field produced between the plates. [4] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
16 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 9 3 4 4 1 2 2 4 5 9 *
0625/31
PHYSICS Paper 3 Extended
May/June 2012 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
For Examiner’s Use 1 2
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Total
This document consists of 12 printed pages. DC (NF/JG) 43223/5 © UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2 1
The period of the vertical oscillations of a mass hanging from a spring is known to be constant. (a) A student times single oscillations with a stopwatch. In 10 separate measurements, the stopwatch readings were: 1.8 s, 1.9 s, 1.7 s, 1.9 s, 1.8 s, 1.8 s, 1.9 s, 1.7 s, 1.8 s, 1.8 s. What is the best value obtainable from these readings for the time of one oscillation? Explain how you arrive at your answer.
best value = ..................................................................................................................... explanation ...................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) Describe how, using the same stopwatch, the student can find the period of oscillation more accurately. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [4] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
A girl rides her bicycle along a straight level road. Fig. 2.1 shows a graph of her distance moved against time.
For Examiner’s Use
D
400 C 300 distance / m 200
100 B
0
A 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
time / s Fig. 2.1 (a) Describe her motion (i)
from A to B, ..............................................................................................................
(ii)
from B to C, ..............................................................................................................
(iii)
from C to D. .............................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Calculate (i)
her average speed from A to D,
average speed = ................................................. [2] (ii)
her maximum speed.
maximum speed = ................................................. [3] [Total: 8] © UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
[Turn over
4 3
(a) State an example of the conversion of chemical energy to another form of energy. example ........................................................................................................................... energy conversion ....................................................................................................... [1] (b) The electrical output of a solar panel powers a pump. The pump operates a water fountain. The output of the solar panel is 17 V and the current supplied to the pump is 0.27 A. (i)
Calculate the electrical power generated by the solar panel.
power = ................................................. [2] (ii)
The pump converts electrical energy to kinetic energy of water with an efficiency of 35%. Calculate the kinetic energy of the water delivered by the pump in 1 second.
kinetic energy = ................................................. [2] (iii)
The pump propels 0.00014 m3 of water per second. This water rises vertically as a jet. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3. Calculate 1.
the mass of water propelled by the pump in 1 second,
mass = ................................................. [2] 2.
the maximum height of the jet of water.
maximum height = ................................................. [2] [Total: 9] © UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
5 4
Fig. 4.1 represents part of the hydraulic braking system of a car.
For Examiner’s Use
piston Y
piston X
F1
F2
Fig. 4.1 The force F1 of the driver’s foot on the brake pedal moves piston X. The space between pistons X and Y is filled with oil which cannot be compressed. The force F2 exerted by the oil moves piston Y. This force is applied to the brake mechanism in the wheels of the car. The area of cross-section of piston X is 4.8 cm2. (a) The force F1 is 90 N. Calculate the pressure exerted on the oil by piston X.
pressure = ................................................. [2] (b) The pressure on piston Y is the same as the pressure applied by piston X. Explain why the force F2 is greater than the force F1. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Piston Y moves a smaller distance than piston X. Explain why. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) Suggest why the braking system does not work properly if the oil contains bubbles of air. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
[Turn over
6 5
(a) Suggest (i)
an example of a change of state resulting from the removal of thermal energy from a quantity of material, .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
the effect of this change of state on the temperature of the material. ............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Define the thermal capacity of a body. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) A polystyrene cup holds 250 g of water at 20 °C. In order to cool the water to make a cold drink, small pieces of ice at 0 °C are added until the water reaches 0 °C and no unmelted ice is present. [specific heat capacity of water = 4.2 J / (g °C), specific latent heat of fusion of ice = 330 J / g] Assume no thermal energy is lost or gained by the cup. (i)
Calculate the thermal energy lost by the water in cooling to 0 °C.
thermal energy lost = ................................................. [2] (ii)
State the thermal energy gained by the ice in melting.
thermal energy gained = ................................................. [1] (iii)
Calculate the mass of ice added.
mass of ice = ................................................. [2] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
7 6
Fig. 6.1 shows a glass flask full of water at 10 °C and sealed with a bung. A long glass tube passes through the bung into the water. The water level in the tube is at X.
bung
For Examiner’s Use
X
glass flask water
Fig. 6.1 When the flask is placed in hot water, the water level initially falls a little below X, and then rises some way above X. (a) Suggest why (i)
the water level initially falls, .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii)
the water level then rises, .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii)
the rise is greater than the fall. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Suggest a change to the apparatus that would make the fall and rise of the water level greater. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 6] © UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
[Turn over
8 7
(a) A wave passes along the surface of the water in a ripple tank. Describe the motion of a molecule on the surface as the wave passes. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) Fig. 7.1 shows a view from above of water waves approaching a narrow gap in a barrier. The water on both sides of the barrier has the same depth. barrier with narrow gap
direction of water waves
P
Fig. 7.1 (i)
On Fig. 7.1, sketch the pattern of waves in the region to the right of the barrier. [2]
(ii)
State the process by which waves arrive at point P to the right of the barrier. .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The waves approaching the barrier in Fig. 7.1 have a wavelength of 1.4 cm and travel at a speed of 12 cm / s. Calculate the frequency of the waves.
frequency = ................................................. [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
9 8
(a) In Fig. 8.1, S is a metal sphere standing on an insulating base. R is a negatively charged rod placed close to S.
For Examiner’s Use
– – R – –
S
– insulating base
–
Fig. 8.1 (i)
Name the particles in S that move when R is brought close to S. ............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
On Fig. 8.1, add + signs and – signs to suggest the result of this movement.
[1]
(iii)
Describe the actions which now need to take place so that S becomes positively charged with the charge distributed evenly over its surface. A positively charged object is not available. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) During a thunderstorm, the potential difference between thunderclouds and the ground builds up to 1.5 × 106 V. In each stroke of lightning, 30 C of charge passes between the thunderclouds and the ground. Lightning strokes to the ground occur, on average, at 2 minute intervals. Calculate (i)
the average current between the thunderclouds and the ground,
average current = ................................................. [2] (ii)
the energy transferred in each stroke of lightning.
energy = ................................................. [2] © UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
[Total: 9] [Turn over
10 9
This question refers to quantities and data shown on the circuit diagram of Fig. 9.1.
For Examiner’s Use
6.0 V
I4 I1
3.0 1 I2 X
R
A Y
I3 2.0 1 Fig. 9.1 (a) State the relationship between (i)
the currents I1, I2 and I3 , ..................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
the currents I1 and I4 . ......................................................................................... [1]
(b) The ammeter reads 0.80 A. Assume it has zero resistance. Calculate (i)
the potential difference between X and Y,
p.d. = ................................................. [1] (ii)
the current I3,
current = ................................................. [2] (iii)
the resistance of R.
resistance = ................................................. [4] [Total: 9] © UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
11 10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a wire PQ placed between the poles of a magnet. There is a current in wire PQ.
For Examiner’s Use
N
P
Q S
Fig. 10.1 (i)
On Fig. 10.1, sketch lines with arrows to show the direction of the magnetic field between the poles of the magnet. [1]
(ii)
The force on PQ is into the paper. Draw an arrow on PQ to show the direction of the current.
[1]
(b) The wire PQ in Fig. 10.1 is replaced by a narrow beam of β-particles travelling from left to right. (i)
Suggest a suitable detector for the β-particles. ............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
State the direction of the force on the β-particles. ............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii)
Describe the path of the β-particles in the space between the poles of the magnet. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iv)
State what happens to the air molecules along the path of the β-particles. ............................................................................................................................. [1] [Total: 6]
Question 11 is on the next page.
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
[Turn over
12 11 Fig. 11.1 shows part of a circuit designed to switch on a security lamp when it gets dark.
relay coil
S
For Examiner’s Use
L
A + –
X B
Fig. 11.1 When there is a current in the relay coil, switch S closes and the lamp L comes on. (a) Write down the name of the component X.
.................................................. [1]
(b) The circuit has gaps at A and at B. State the components that need to be connected into these gaps for the circuit to perform its required function. gap A ............................................................................................................................... gap B ............................................................................................................................... [3] (c) The circuit in Fig. 11.1 is modified. The function of lamp L is now to give a warning when the temperature becomes too high. State any necessary changes of components in the circuit. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 4 1 5 8 3 5 2 4 2 9 *
0625/31
PHYSICS Paper 3 Extended
October/November 2012 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs. For Examiner’s Use Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. 1 Answer all questions. You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 2 appropriate units. Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). 3 At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Total
This document consists of 16 printed pages. DC (AC/SW) 49515/3 © UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows the graph of speed v against time t for a train as it travels from one station to the next.
For Examiner’s Use
20
v m/s
10
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
t /s Fig. 1.1 (a) Use Fig. 1.1 to calculate (i)
the distance between the two stations,
distance = ................................................. [4] (ii)
the acceleration of the train in the first 10 s.
acceleration = ................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
3 (b) The mass of the train is 1.1 × 105 kg.
For Examiner’s Use
Calculate the resultant force acting on the train in the first 10 s.
resultant force = ................................................. [2] (c) The force generated by the engine of the train is called the driving force. Write down, in words, an equation relating the driving force to any other forces acting on the train during the period t = 10 s to t = 130 s. .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
[Turn over
4 2
(a) State the factors which completely describe a vector quantity. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) An aeroplane is flying towards the east in still air at 92 m / s. A wind starts to blow at 24 m / s towards the north. Draw a vector diagram to find the resultant velocity of the aeroplane. Use a scale of 1.0 cm = 10 m / s.
resultant speed = ...................................................... angle between resultant and easterly direction = ...................................................... [5] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
For Examiner’s Use
5 3
(a) A stationary body is acted upon by a number of forces. State the two conditions which must apply for the body to remain at rest.
For Examiner’s Use
1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) Fig. 3.1 shows a device used for compressing crushed material. 380 mm
120 mm H
lever arm plunger 20 N cylinder
cross-sectional area A
F
crushed material
Fig. 3.1 The lever arm rotates about the hinge H at its right-hand end. A force of 20 N acts downwards on the left-hand end of the lever arm. The force F of the crushed material on the plunger acts upwards. Ignore the weight of the lever arm. (i)
Use the clockwise and anticlockwise moments about H to calculate the upward force F which the crushed material exerts on the plunger. The distances are shown on Fig. 3.1.
force F = ................................................. [3] (ii)
The cross-sectional area A of the plunger in contact with the crushed material is 0.0036 m2. Calculate the pressure exerted on the crushed material by the plunger.
pressure = ................................................. [2] © UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
[Total: 7] [Turn over
6 4
(a) State what is meant by the centre of mass of a body. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) Fig. 4.1 shows an athlete successfully performing a high jump.
Fig. 4.1 The height of the bar above the ground is 2.0 m. The maximum increase in gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the athlete during the jump is calculated using the expression g.p.e. = mgh. Explain why the value of h used in the calculation is much less than 2.0 m. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
For Examiner’s Use
7 (c) Fig. 4.2 shows, in order, five stages of an athlete successfully performing a pole-vault.
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 4.2 Describe the energy changes which take place during the performance of the polevault, from the original stationary position of the pole-vaulter before the run-up, to the final stationary position after the vault. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [6] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
[Turn over
8 5
(a) Explain (i)
For Examiner’s Use
how gas molecules exert a force on a solid surface, .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
the increase in pressure of a gas when its volume is decreased at constant temperature. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [3]
(b) A cylinder of volume 5.0 × 103 cm3 contains air at a pressure of 8.0 × 105 Pa. A leak develops so that air gradually escapes from the cylinder until the air in the cylinder is at atmospheric pressure. The pressure of the atmosphere is 1.0 × 105 Pa. Calculate the volume of the escaped air, now at atmospheric pressure. Assume that the temperature stays constant.
volume = ............................................cm3 [4] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
9 6
(a) Define specific latent heat of fusion. ..........................................................................................................................................
For Examiner’s Use
.......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) (i)
A tray of area 0.25 m2, filled with ice to a depth of 12 mm, is removed from a refrigerator. Calculate the mass of ice on the tray. The density of ice is 920 kg / m3.
mass = ................................................. [2] (ii)
Thermal energy from the Sun is falling on the ice at a rate of 250 W / m2. The ice absorbs 60 % of this energy. Calculate the energy absorbed in 1.0 s by the 0.25 m2 area of ice on the tray.
energy = ................................................. [2] (iii)
The ice is at its melting temperature. Calculate the time taken for all the ice to melt. The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
time = ................................................. [3] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
[Turn over
10 7
(a) Explain why a liquid cools when evaporation takes place from its surface. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) Fig. 7.1 shows five vessels each made of the same metal and containing water. Vessels A, B, C and D are identical in size and shape. Vessel E is shallower and wider. The temperature of the air surrounding each vessel is 20 °C.
A
B
C
D
E
Fig. 7.1 The table shows details about each vessel and their contents. vessel
outer surface
volume of water / cm3
initial temperature of water / °C
A
dull
200
80
B
shiny
200
80
C
dull
200
95
D
dull
100
80
E
dull
200
80
The following questions are about the time taken for the temperature of the water in the vessels to fall by 10 °C from the initial temperature. (i)
Explain why the water in B takes longer to cool than the water in A. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Explain why the water in C cools more quickly than the water in A. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
Explain why the water in D cools more quickly than the water in A. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
For Examiner’s Use
11 (iv)
Suggest two reasons why the water in E cools more quickly than the water in A. 1. ...............................................................................................................................
For Examiner’s Use
.................................................................................................................................. 2. ............................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. [2] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
[Turn over
12 8
(a) A ray of light in air travels across a flat boundary into glass. The angle of incidence is 51°. The angle of refraction is 29°. (i)
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram to illustrate this information.
(ii)
Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
[3]
refractive index = ................................................. [2] (b) A ray of light in glass travels towards a flat boundary with air. The angle of incidence is 51°. This ray does not emerge into the air. State and explain what happens to this ray. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
For Examiner’s Use
13 9
Fig. 9.1 shows a thin, straight rod XY placed in the magnetic field between the poles of a magnet. The wires from the ends of XY are connected to a centre-zero voltmeter.
For Examiner’s Use
X N
S
Y
V Fig. 9.1 (a) When XY is moved slowly upwards the needle of the voltmeter shows a small deflection. (i)
State how XY must be moved to produce a larger deflection in the opposite direction. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
XY is now rotated about its central point by raising X and lowering Y. Explain why no deflection is observed. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) The effect of moving XY can be seen if the wires are connected to the terminals of a cathode-ray oscilloscope instead of the voltmeter. (i)
State the parts inside the oscilloscope tube to which these terminals are connected. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
The spot on the oscilloscope screen moves up and down repeatedly. State how XY is being moved. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
State the setting of the time-base of the oscilloscope during the process described in (ii). ............................................................................................................................ [1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
[Turn over
14 10 (a) State the electrical quantity that has the same value for each of two resistors connected to a battery (i)
when they are in series, ............................................................................................
(ii)
when they are in parallel. .......................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit with a 1.2 kΩ resistor and a thermistor in series. There is no current in the voltmeter.
1.2 k1 9.0 V
V
Fig. 10.1 Calculate the voltmeter reading when the resistance of the thermistor is 3.6 kΩ.
voltmeter reading = ................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
For Examiner’s Use
15 (c) Fig. 10.2 shows a fire-alarm circuit. The circuit is designed to close switch S and ring bell B if there is a fire.
relay coil
S
For Examiner’s Use
B
9.0 V
Fig. 10.2 Explain the operation of the circuit. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3] [Total: 7]
Question 11 is on the next page.
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
[Turn over
16 11 (a) A radioactive source emits α-, β- and γ-radiation.
For Examiner’s Use
Which of these radiations (i)
has the shortest range in air,
..............................
(ii)
has a negative charge,
..............................
(iii)
is not deflected in a magnetic field?
.............................. [2]
(b) In a famous experiment, carried out in a vacuum, a very thin sheet of gold was placed in the path of alpha particles. It was found that a large number of the alpha particles passed through the sheet with little or no deflection from their original path. A very small number of the alpha particles were reflected back towards the source. (i)
Explain, in terms of the force acting, why the direction of motion of an alpha particle changes when it comes close to the nucleus of a gold atom. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
State two conclusions, about the nuclei of atoms, that were made from the results of this experiment. 1. ............................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. 2. ............................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. [2] [Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
ALTERNATIVE TO PRACTICAL PAPER SIX
6
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
0625/6
PHYSICS PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical Friday
28 MAY 1999
Morning
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper. Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables Protractor Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may use a calculator.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE 1 2 3 4 5 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages. MML LOC 898 4/98 QF91703 © UCLES 1999
[Turn over
2 1 topicspeed
Rays of light were reflected from the outside surface of a beaker that contained some water coloured with blue ink.
P4
layout of apparatus as seen from above beaker
P3 P2
I
P1 A
B
L lamp
Fig. 1.1 The path of an incident ray LI, from lamp L, was marked by two pins P1 and P2. The reflected ray was located and marked using pins P3 and P4. The diagram of Fig. 1.1 represents the beaker, the lamp and the pin marks. (a) Complete the diagram by drawing lines to represent the incident and reflected rays. Label each ray. [3] (b) Measure the angle between the incident and the reflected ray, call this angle d and record its value in the table. Also measure and record the angle e between the incident ray and the line AL. [2] angle ° d e
0625/6/S99
For Examiner's Use
3
For Examiner's Use
(c) Use your values of d and e to calculate a value for the ratio d –. e
d – = ............................................................................................ e (d)
[1]
(i) On Fig. 1.1, mark, with the letter E, the position where you would place your eye so as to see the lamp by the reflected ray. (ii) Why is it an advantage to fill the beaker with coloured water when viewing the lamp by a ray reflected from the outside surface of the beaker? You may draw a diagram if you wish.
.................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
0625/6/S99
[Turn over
4 2
The lever balance shown in Fig. 2.1 was constructed from a straw AB fitted with a pointer at one end and a piece of card. The balance was supported on a pivot and the straw set horizontal by adjusting the position of a small counterweight. The height of the pointer was measured by using a metre rule placed beside the apparatus.
topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy
pointer pivot
straw A
B metre rule
card X counterweight
Y bench Fig. 2.1
(a) Describe how you would check that the metre rule was perpendicular to the bench. You may draw on Fig. 2.1. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) When the counterweight was placed at the corner X of the card, the straw was found to be horizontal. In the space below, draw a sketch of the straw to represent its position when the counterweight was attached at the point labelled Y, not X.
[2]
0625/6/S99
For Examiner's Use
5 (c) With the straw horizontal, as shown in Fig. 2.1, a small paper clip was attached to the end A of the straw. The balance came to rest as shown in Fig. 2.2. Write down the reading shown for the height of the pointer B.
B
24
straw
26
pointer
25
pivot
27
metre rule
For Examiner's Use
card A
paper clip Fig. 2.2 pointer reading = ........................................................................................................ [1] (d) In one experiment, additional clips were attached to the end of the straw. The clips were added one at a time. After each clip had been added, the height h of the pointer was determined. Draw up a table in which you could record the values of h together with the corresponding total number of clips used. Your table should be suitable for use in your laboratory book.
[2]
0625/6/S99
[Turn over
6 (e) The distance d moved by the pointer, for each number n of paper clips hung from the balance, was calculated from the values of h. The graph of Fig. 2.3 represents the results of one experiment. x
d / cm x
10 x 9
x
8
x
7
x x
6 x
5 x
4 x
3 x
2 x
1 0 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
number of paper clips n Fig. 2.3 The paper clips were removed from the straw and a small mass of plasticine was hung on the end A of the straw. The following information was obtained when this small mass of plasticine was in air and when it was totally submerged in water. with the plasticine in air, the distance moved by the pointer da = 9.1 cm with the plasticine in water, the distance moved by the pointer dw = 4.6 cm (i) From Fig. 2.3 determine the corresponding value for the number n of clips in use. for da = 9.1 cm,
na = ........................
for dw = 4.6 cm,
nw = ........................
(ii) The values for na and nw are not the same. As well as its weight, another force F is acting on the plasticine when it is submerged in water. 1. In which direction does F act? .............................................................................. 2. Using the information you gave in (i) what can you say about the magnitude of F? ........................................................................................................................................ [2] 0625/6/S99
For Examiner's Use
7 3
An equal volume of water was placed in each of three similar test-tubes. The tubes were used in three experiments as described below.
For Examiner's Use
topicmodels topicmolecular topicmolecularmodels topiclens
Experiment 1 A small sheet of glass was placed on top of the tube and the apparatus turned upside down, as shown in Fig. 3.1. A strip of graph paper was held close to the tube and used as a scale. graph grid as a scale water h1 sheet of glass
Fig. 3.1 The height h1 of the water level above the glass was observed over a period of 5 hours. The observations are recorded in the table on page 8. Experiment 2 The apparatus was similar to that for experiment 1. In addition, a piece of paper tissue was placed between the sheet of glass and the tube, as shown in Fig. 3.2. Once again, the height h2 of the water level was observed over a period of 5 hours. graph grid as a scale
graph grid as a scale
water fan water
h2 tissue
tissue
h3
sheet of glass
sheet of glass
Fig. 3.2
Fig. 3.3
0625/6/S99
[Turn over
8
For Examiner's Use
Experiment 3 The apparatus was similar to that used for experiment 2. In addition, an electric fan was used to produce a draught over the surface of the tissue, as shown in Fig. 3.3. The area and shape of the tissue paper was the same as for experiment 2. Once again, the height h3 of the water level was observed over a period of 5 hours. The three experiments were conducted over the same 5 hour period. The temperature of the water was the same at the start of the experiments. The observations are shown in the table.
height of water levels room temperature / °C
glass
tissue
tissue + fan
time t / hour
h1 / cm
h2 / cm
h3 / cm
0
26.8
14.0
14.0
14.0
1
26.8
14.0
13.3
12.5
2
27.0
14.0
12.8
9.3
3
26.9
14.0
12.1
6.5
4
27.0
14.0
11.4
3.4
5
27.0
14.0
10.9
0.1
Fig. 3.4 (a)
(i) Calculate an average value for room temperature during the 5 hour period. average value for = ...................................................... (ii) What was the largest difference between the average room temperature and the actual temperature of the room? largest temperature difference = .................................... Explain why it is reasonable to assume that the temperature of the room remained constant during the three experiments. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [3]
0625/6/S99
9 (b)
For Examiner's Use
(i) The area of cross-section of each tube was 2.0 cm2. During the 5 hour period, what volume of water flowed out of each tube? Experiment 1 volume = ........................... Experiment 2 volume = ........................... Experiment 3 volume = ........................... (ii) Calculate the average rate of flow of water, in cm3 per hour, from the tube during experiment 3.
rate of flow = .............................. [2] (c) Write a conclusion to the experiments. Your conclusion should explain why the three rates of flow are so different. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/6/S99
[Turn over
10 4
The circuit shown in Fig. 4.1 was used to determine R, the resistance of a resistor, using the equation
topicevaporation
R=V –.
I
power supply +
–
switch X Y
R
Z Fig. 4.1 The value for R is to be determined for different values of current I. (a) Name the components labelled X and Y. X ...................................................................................................................................... Y ................................................................................................................................ [2] (b) What is the purpose of the component X? .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Explain how you would use the apparatus to determine values of R. Your answer should include what you would do before you close the switch. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [4] (d) The value of R is about 9.5 and the current through it must not exceed 0.10 A. What would be a good choice for the maximum reading of the component labelled Z?
maximum reading = ...................................................... 0625/6/S99
[1]
For Examiner's Use
11 BLANK PAGE
Question 5 starts on page 12
0625/6/S99
[Turn over
12 5 topicresistance
A drinking straw was sealed at one end with candle wax. The straw was made to float upright in water by putting a small amount of ballast into the straw. The height of the top of the straw above the bench was determined. This height was called h, as shown in Fig. 5.1. rule
set-square
drinking straw
container full of water h
ball ballast wax
Fig. 5.1 A steel ball was put inside the straw and the new value for h was obtained. Additional balls were put in the straw one at a time. For each new ball the corresponding value of h was determined. Fig. 5.2 shows the values obtained.
number n of balls h / cm
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
29.1 28.2 27.1 26.3 25.0 24.2 23.1 22.0 21.1
Fig. 5.2 (a)
(i) Plot the graph of h / cm (y-axis) against n (x-axis). Start your y-axis at h = 16 cm and make sure that your x-axis is scaled over the values n = 0 to n = 10. (ii) Using your graph, estimate the value of h you would obtain if 10 balls were added. Show your working. Mark the graph to show how you obtained this value for h.
h = ................................................................. [4] 0625/6/S99
For Examiner's Use
13
0625/6/S99
For Examiner's Use
[Turn over
14 (b) Explain why the set-square is used when taking the reading for h. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) Before taking the readings for h, one student pushed the straw down a little. The straw then moved up and down before coming to rest. Suggest a reason why this was done. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) The straw floats in the water so that its top is as high as possible. For this reason, the container was always full of water. Suggest what would happen if the container was not quite full so that the water surface was as shown in Fig. 5.3.
Fig. 5.3 .................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/6/S99
For Examiner's Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
0625/6
PHYSICS PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical Monday
22 NOVEMBER 1999
Morning
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper. Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may use a calculator.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
1 2 3 4 5 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. SB (SLC/DJ) QK93709/2 © UCLES 1999
[Turn over
2 1 topicspeed
A transparent U-tube is held vertically in a clamp. Some water and kerosene are poured into the tube and the final levels of the liquids are as shown in Fig. 1.1. This diagram is drawn full size.
P
kerosene
Q
water
bench top
Fig. 1.1 (a) Using your own ruler, make measurements which will enable you to determine h, the difference between the vertical heights of the water levels above the bench top at P and at Q. Show all of your measurements and your calculation of h in the space below.
[4]
0625/6 W99
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) When the experiment is carried out in a laboratory, the vertical height of the water level at P is measured using a half-metre rule.
For Examiner’s Use
Explain how you would use the rule when the apparatus is on a bench in the laboratory. Your answer should include how you would position the rule and what you would do to obtain an accurate value for the height of the water level. You may draw a diagram or draw on Fig. 1.1 if you wish.
.......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/6 W99
[Turn over
4 2
(a) The circuit symbol for a diode is shown in Fig. 2.1. The diode conducts when the polarity is as shown.
topicturningeffect topicturning
+
–
Fig. 2.1 Draw a circuit diagram showing the following components, all connected in series: a d.c. power supply, labelled to show its polarity, a fixed resistor, a diode, a switch. On your circuit diagram, the switch should be shown open and the diode should be able to conduct when the switch is closed.
[3] (b) (i)
Redraw your circuit diagram, adding an ammeter to measure the current in the diode. Label the polarity of the ammeter terminals.
(ii)
Is there any other position in the circuit where you could put the ammeter to measure the current through the diode? Tick one box. yes no Give one reason to support your answer. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3] 0625/6 W99
For Examiner’s Use
5 (c) (i)
Assuming that the fixed resistor has a resistance of 100 Ω and that the potential difference of the power supply is 3.0 V, calculate the maximum current Imax in the circuit.
For Examiner’s Use
Imax = ...................................... (ii)
In order to calculate the value for Imax in (i) above, what assumption did you make about the resistance of the circuit? ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/6 W99
[Turn over
6
3
; ; ;;
A small steel ball is dropped through a hole in a card and falls through a clear plastic tube before it hits a glass surface as shown in Fig. 3.1. There is a rubber band on the outside of the tube. This band can be moved along the tube.
topicmolecularmodels topicmolecular topicmodels topiclens
hole
plastic tube
clamp
card
ball
rubber band 14.7 cm
h
glass surface
Fig. 3.1 When the ball bounces, it rises up inside the tube to a height shown as h in Fig. 3.1. The top of the bounce is marked by the position of the rubber band. (a) Four different balls are used. These are dropped from the same height onto four pieces of glass, which are 2 mm thick. The areas of the top surface of the glass are 56 cm2, 112 cm2, 224 cm2 and 450 cm2. The results of this experiment are shown in Fig. 3.2. mass of ball / g
values of h / cm for each of the four pieces of glass 56 cm2
112 cm2
224 cm2
450 cm2
1.08
0
0
0
0
0.40
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
0.24
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
0.12
5.4
5.4
5.4
5.4
Fig. 3.2
0625/6 W99
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
7 (i)
maximum mass 1. Calculate the ratio ––––––––––––– for the balls. minimum mass
ratio of masses = ...................................... maximum area 2. Calculate the ratio –––––––––––– for the glass surfaces. minimum area
ratio of areas = ...................................... (ii)
Use the table to justify the assertion that the value for h does not depend upon the value for the surface area of the glass. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Describe how the height h depends upon the mass of the ball for this experiment. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [6]
(b) The height of the hole above the surface of the glass block is 14.7 cm. Each ball is released from this height. The following relation gives the change in potential energy of each ball when it falls. energy = mass x g x height All of this energy becomes kinetic energy just before the moment of impact with the glass. Suggest what happens to this kinetic energy after the impact for the heaviest and for the lightest balls. Your answer should include information from the table. heaviest ball ..................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... lightest ball ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] 0625/6 W99
[Turn over
8 4
A small mass of ammonium chloride is dissolved in some water, causing the temperature of the water to fall. The apparatus, which is used to determine the fall in temperature, is shown in Fig. 4.1.
topicenergy topicenergytransformations topicapparentdepth topictransformations topicelectric
lid
;;; ;;;
hand lens
stirrer
thermometer
lagging
Fig. 4.1
(a) Give a reason for using each of the following items of apparatus. (i)
the lagging
................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... (ii)
the stirrer ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
the hand lens ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/6 W99
For Examiner’s Use
9 (b) Part of the thermometer that is used to determine the fall in temperature is shown in Fig. 4.2. The diagram shows the thermometer before and after adding the ammonium chloride. °C
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
°C
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 4.2 (i)
Record each of the temperatures and determine the fall in temperature. temperature before adding the ammonium chloride = ..................................... temperature after adding the ammonium chloride = ..................................... fall in temperature = .....................................
(ii)
°C
In Fig. 4.2 the liquid thread is shown along the edge of the scale marks. This is the recommended way to position the liquid thread before reading a temperature. In Fig. 4.3 the thread is positioned away from the edge of the scale.
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
Fig. 4.3 Suggest a reason for the recommended way to use a thermometer. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [4] (c) How would you avoid making a parallax error when reading the thermometer shown in Fig. 4.2? You may draw a labelled diagram if you wish.
......................................................................................................................................[1] 0625/6 W99
[Turn over
10 5
An image of the filament of a lamp is produced on a screen using the apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1. The image distance, shown as x, is measured and recorded.
topicsound topicspeedofsoundandlight topicspeed topiclight
x
screen
lens
lamp
Fig. 5.1 y w
screen
block
lens
lamp
Fig. 5.2 A glass block is now placed between the lens and the screen as shown in Fig. 5.2. The block has width w. The image is out of focus. The screen is moved until the image is once again sharp. The lens to screen distance, shown as y in Fig. 5.2, is now greater than x. The new value for y is measured and recorded. The experiment is repeated for different values of the lamp to lens distance. The values obtained for x and y are given in Fig. 5.3. y / mm
175
184
212
250
290
x / mm
152
163
189
229
269
(y – x )/mm Fig. 5.3
0625/6 W99
For Examiner’s Use
11 (a) Plot the graph of y / mm (y-axis) against x / mm (x-axis). Start your x-axis at x / mm = 140 and your y-axis at y / mm = 170. Draw the best straight line to fit the plotted points.
[5] (b) (i)
(ii)
Determine the values of (y – x) and enter them in the table of Fig. 5.3, shown on page 10. On Fig. 5.2, show what is meant by the distance (y – x). State what happens to the value for (y – x) as the value for x increases. ...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
A second glass block of width greater than w is used in a repeat experiment. Suggest how this might affect the values of (y – x). ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/6 W99
For Examiner’s Use
12 BLANK PAGE
0625/6 W99
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS
0625/6
PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical MAY/JUNE SESSION 2000
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper. Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables Protractor Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may use a calculator.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
1 2 3 4 5 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. SB (SM/KS) QF05712/3 © UCLES 2000
[Turn over
2 1 topicspeed
Fig. 1.1 represents the apparatus an IGCSE class is using for an optics experiment, in which a glass beaker filled with water acts like a lens. The glass beaker filled with water is placed with C, the centre of its base, on a line labelled LL . An optics pin is placed at the point labelled O, so that the pin is touching the side of the beaker. I
Two points A and A are on the surface of the beaker at equal distances from the line LL . The pin at point O acts as an optical object. The ray emerging from A is located by using two pins placed at two points labelled P1 and P2. I
I
(a) Draw a neat, thin and accurate line to show the path of the ray from O to A in the water. Complete the path, in air, of the emerging ray along AP1P2. [3] (b) Produce the line P2P1A backwards so as to cut the line LL . Label, with the letter I, the point where the two lines cross. Point I is the position of the image of the pin O when it is touching the side of the beaker. [2] I
(c) Draw the line OA to represent a ray in water from O passing through A . Using the information you gained in (b), draw a line to show the path of the ray in air after it passes through the point A . Mark your diagram in such a way as to show how you found the direction of the ray in air. [1] I
I
I
(d) Take measurements to calculate the following ratio.
IR : OC = …… : 1 Record your measurements and show your working.
IR : OC = …… : 1
[2] 0625/6 S00
For Examiner’s Use
3
For Examiner’s Use
glass beaker filled with water
P1
P2
A L
pin
O
R
L'
C A'
Fig. 1.1
0625/6 S00
[Turn over
4 2
When investigating the magnetic field due to a bar magnet, a student places the magnet on a sheet of paper as shown in Fig. 2.1, on page 5. The edge of the paper is placed so that it is parallel to the direction of the Earth’s magnetic field. The bar magnet is then placed as shown so that it is at right angles to the direction of the Earth’s magnetic field. (In Fig. 2.1, the lines OX and OY are perpendicular to each other.) A small plotting compass is used to investigate the magnetic field.
topicturningeffect topicturning topiceffect
(a) It is found that there are positions where the small magnet in the plotting compass points so that it is parallel to the line OX. Some of these positions are located and are labelled A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H, as shown on Fig. 2.1. The positions shown in Fig. 2.1 also lie on straight lines that come from the centre of the bar magnet. Describe how you would locate the position labelled A. Your answer should explain (i)
what you would do to help you judge when the small magnet in the plotting compass is parallel to OX,
(ii)
how you would ensure that the small magnet of the plotting compass is not sticking,
(iii)
what you would do so as to mark the point A on the radial line,
(iv)
how you would avoid making a parallax error when locating the point A.
................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[5] 0625/6 S00
For Examiner’s Use
5
For Examiner’s Use
Y 80° North (magnetic)
60° C
plotting compass
B D A E
40°
F
20° G
H
N
O
X
S bar magnet Fig. 2.1
(b) The plotting compass is at point C as shown in Fig. 2.1. (i)
Mark the plotting compass in such a way as to show which end of the small magnet of the plotting compass is a North pole.
(ii)
The compass is at point C. It is then moved along the radial line so that it is closer to the bar magnet. Describe and explain what happens to the small magnet of the plotting compass.
................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[3] 0625/6 S00
[Turn over
6 3 topicmagnet
Fig. 3.1 shows the top of a variable resistor that has a scale of resistance, which gives the resistance in use. terminals
y x
5 4
6 7
3
control knob 2
8
9
1 10
0 OHM
Fig. 3.1 (a) What range of values of resistance are available with this resistor? range of values of resistance available = ..................................
[1]
(b) On Fig. 3.1, draw a line representing the position of the pointer when the value of the resistance in use is 6.3 Ω. [1] (c) Between the numbers 3 and 4, there are two letters x and y. (i)
What is the resistance when the pointer is at x? resistance at x = ..................................
(ii)
What is the change in resistance when the pointer moves from x to y? change in resistance = .................................. [2]
(d) Draw the circuit symbol for a variable resistor.
[1]
0625/6 S00
For Examiner’s Use
7 (e) A student is asked to connect a circuit so that the current through a filament lamp can be changed by using a variable resistor.
For Examiner’s Use
The student makes a mistake when connecting the circuit. Fig. 3.2 represents the student’s wrongly connected circuit. (In this diagram the circuit symbol is not used for the variable resistor.)
lamp
A
5 4
6 7
3
variable resistor 8
2
9
1
0
OHM
10 Ω Fig. 3.2
When the variable resistor is varied from 10 Ω to 5 Ω, the change in the current is very small. What could the student do to obtain a larger change in the current when the variable resistor is changed from 10 Ω to 5 Ω? .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6 S00
[Turn over
8 4
For Examiner’s Use
The apparatus shown in Fig. 4.1 is used in a heat experiment.
topicenergytransformations topicenergy topicapparentdepth topictransformations
boiling water plastic cup
cold water metal block HEATER Fig. 4.1
A piece of metal at the boiling temperature of water is transferred to a mass of cold water. Initially, the cold water is at a temperature of TC. The hot metal raises the temperature of this water to TH. The rise in temperature, θ, is determined from the relation θ = TH – TC. The experiment is repeated so as to obtain five sets of readings for different masses of cold water. (a) Draw up a table, for use in your laboratory notebook, in which you can record m, the mass of cold water used, TC, the temperature of the cold water, TH, the maximum temperature reached by the cold water,
θ, the rise in temperature of the cold water.
[3] (b) Fig. 4.2 on page 9 is a graph showing how θ varies with m, the mass of cold water used. (i)
Why has a smooth line been drawn through the points? ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
0625/6 S00
9
For Examiner’s Use
graph showing how θ varies with m 15 θ °C 14 13 12
A
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 20
30
40
50
60
m g
70
Fig. 4.2 (ii)
(iii)
The graph point that is labelled A does not lie on the graph line. (You can assume that the graph line is correctly drawn.) Complete the following statements about the value of θ and of m at the point A. 1.
If the value of θ were .................... °C smaller, the point A would lie on the line.
2.
If the value of m were .................... g smaller, the point A would lie on the line.
In (ii) above which is the most likely reason, 1 or 2, for the point A not being on the line? Give a reason for your choice. choice: Tick one box. 1. 2. reason: ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[4]
0625/6 S00
[Turn over
10 5 topicresistance
The class is investigating the use of nichrome (resistance) wire instead of thin thread as part of a simple pendulum. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 5.1. clamp
nichrome wire
wire wrapped round a cylindrical mass and twisted back on itself Fig. 5.1 Four tests are carried out. Test A using very thin cotton thread for the suspension, (this thread is considered to have a negligible diameter). Tests B, C and D in which nichrome wires of different diameters, d, are used. In each test the length of the pendulum is 30.0 cm. The period, T, is determined by obtaining the total time, t, of a suitable number of oscillations. The period is given by T = t /N, where N is the number of oscillations. The table gives the measurements taken by the class.
test
suspension
d /mm
N
t /s
A
cotton thread
negligible
50
54.8
B
nichrome wire
0.31
50
53.4
C
nichrome wire
0.56
50
50.3
D
nichrome wire
0.91
50
43.3
(a) For each test, determine the value T and record it in the table.
T /s
[1]
(b) Suggest why 50 oscillations are used. ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) (i)
(ii)
Plot a graph of T /s ( y-axis) against d /mm (x-axis ). Start the T /s axis at T /s = 0.7. Draw a neat thin curved line through the four points. Label each plotted point with the correct test letter A, B, C or D.
0625/6 S00
For Examiner’s Use
11 (iii)
Describe how the values of T change when the values of d, the diameter of the wire, decrease. ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[7]
(d) In the laboratory you have enough time to take another set of measurements for one other value for the diameter of the nichrome wire. Study the shape of your graph line and then suggest an approximate value for the diameter that you think should be used. Give a reason for your choice. choice for the value of d = ...................... mm reason for this choice .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6 S00
For Examiner’s Use
12 BLANK PAGE
0625/6 S00
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
0625/6
PHYSICS PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical 20 NOVEMBER 2000
Monday
Morning
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper. Additional materials: Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may use a calculator.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
1 2 3 4 5 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 12 printed pages. SB (SM/DJ) QK07578/3 © UCLES 2000
[Turn over
2 1 topicspeed
Fig. 1.1 shows a metre rule clamped to a bench top. A mass of 50 g is attached to the free end of the rule. The weight of the rule and of the 50 g mass depresses the free end of the rule by a small distance, x, from the horizontal.
clamp block of wood
weight x depression
metre rule
Fig. 1.1 In the experiment, the depression is found to be about 4 cm. (a) Describe how you would determine the value of x to the nearest mm. Your answer should include the following points. (i)
How you would locate the position of the horizontal line from which the depression is measured.
(ii)
What apparatus you would use to help you measure the depression.
(iii)
What practical steps you would take to improve the accuracy of your measurement.
You may draw diagrams if you wish.
.......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[4] 0625/6 Nov00
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) The free end of the loaded rule is now pushed down so that the depression is greater than x, and then the rule is released. The rule performs vertical oscillations. How would you determine the time, T, for one oscillation?
For Examiner’s Use
Your answer should include the following points. (i)
What measurements you would make and how you would use these measurements to determineT.
(ii)
What equipment you would use to make the measurements.
(iii)
How you would avoid making errors.
(iv)
How you would try to reduce errors. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
[4] 0625/6 Nov00
[Turn over
4 2
The class is using a beaker filled with water to investigate one of the effects produced by a cylindrical water lens. Fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus.
topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy
patch of light
beaker of water
I
sheet of paper
w width of patch of light x distance from the
lamp
centre of the beaker
Fig. 2.1 A large sheet of paper is placed on the bench. A straight line is drawn along the centre of the sheet. A beaker is placed with its centre on the straight line. The beaker of water acts as a cylindrical lens. A small lamp is placed on the line. The lamp acts as a bright object. The light that emerges on the other side of the lens produces a patch of light on the sheet of paper. The broken lines mark the edge of this patch of light. The width of the patch of light decreases and shows a sharp focus at the point I. At different points along the central line the width, w, of the patch of light is determined. The investigation is to discover how w depends upon x, the distance from the centre of the beaker. Fig. 2.2 is a full size copy of the patch of light obtained in one experiment. (a) On Fig. 2.2, at the points denoted by X1, X2, X3 and X4, take measurements of the width, w, of the patch of light and the distance, x, from the centre of the lens. Record the values for w and x in a table. Determine the values of the product wx, and include these values in your table.
[5] (b) Describe how the values of w change as the values of x increase. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] 0625/6 Nov00
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
centre of beaker
X1
X2
X3
X4
5
Fig. 2.2
0625/6 Nov00
[Turn over
6 3
In this experiment, the class is investigating how the thermal energy lost by a 50 g mass of brass, initially at 100 °C, depends upon the time it is cooling. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 3.1.
topicmolecularmodels topicmolecular topicmodels topiclens
boiling water plastic cup
cold water
50 g brass cooling for t seconds HEATER Fig. 3.1 A 50 g mass of brass is heated in boiling water for at least five minutes. The mass is then removed from the boiling water and given a very quick shake to remove any hot water remaining on the mass. A time t, after the brass has been removed from the boiling water, when the temperature of the brass has cooled to θH, the 50 g mass is placed into 50 cm3 of cold water. The initial temperature of the cold water is θC. The temperature of the cold water rises and the maximum temperature θM is determined.
θH is then calculated using the following equation. θH = 11θM – 10θC The experiment is repeated for different values of cooling time t. Fig. 3.2 is a graph of a set of typical results for this experiment.
100
90 H
°C
80 Y X 70
60 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80 t /s
90
Fig. 3.2 0625/6 Nov00
100 110 120 130 140 150
For Examiner’s Use
7 (a) Why is it important to remove any water remaining on the brass as soon as it is lifted from the boiling water?
For Examiner’s Use
.......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1] (b) You do not have a partner helping you with this experiment. How would you measure the cooling time t, using the clock shown in Fig. 3.3? ....................................................................................
re-set
.................................................................................... ....................................................................................
55
60
5 10
50 45
....................................................................................
15 55 60 5 50 10 45 15 40 20 35 30 25
40 35
....................................................................................
start
30
20 25
stop
................................................................................[2] Fig. 3.3 (c) Describe how you would perform the experiment in order to obtain the values that will enable you to plot the point labelled X on the graph. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (d) The point labelled Y does not lie close to the graph line and it is to be repeated. (i)
How would you ensure that the initial temperature of the cold water in the plastic cup is the same as in the previous trial? ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Measuring cylinders are not very accurate for measuring small volumes of water. How would you obtain 50 cm3 of water with more accuracy than that obtained by using a measuring cylinder? ...............................................................................................................................[2]
(e) Why is it a good procedure to stir the cold water after adding the brass mass? ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6 Nov00
[Turn over
8 4
Fig. 4.1 is a series circuit in which a variable resistor is used so as to control the magnitude of the current in the circuit. The circuit is designed so as to obtain any value of current from 0.2 A to 2 A.
topicevaporation
A
V=2V
fixed resistor R = 1Ω
V
Fig. 4.1 (a) (i)
The variable resistor is marked “0 to 10 Ω”. What is meant by the phrase “0 to 10 Ω”? ...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Why is it important that the value of the variable resistance may be changed smoothly? ...............................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i)
A 1 m length of nichrome wire has a resistance of 10.0 Ω. How would you use 1 m of this wire, and a jockey-slide contact, as the variable resistor shown in Fig. 4.1? Your answer should 1.
include a diagram showing the wire in use,
2.
explain how you would achieve smooth changes in the value of the variable resistance,
3.
explain why the wire must be bare and clean.
Diagram
0625/6 Nov00
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
9 ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[3] (ii)
If the current in the nichrome wire becomes 2.0 A, then the wire becomes very hot and has a temperature of about 300 °C. The wire is then dangerous to touch. A safe current to use in the circuit is about 0.6 A. To obtain a current of 0.6 A, the total resistance in the circuit should be about 3.3 Ω. The length of resistance wire in use is then 23 cm. What could you do to the apparatus you have been given in (b)(i) to prevent anyone using a length of resistance wire that is less than 23 cm? You may draw a diagram if you wish.
................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6 Nov00
[Turn over
10 5
A bar magnet A is placed on a waxed cardboard disc which floats on water as shown in Figs. 5.1 and 5.2. At first, magnet A points in the North-South direction. A similar magnet, B, is moved along the EW line as shown. As magnet B approaches magnet A, magnet A is deflected. The deflection, y, is measured. An experiment is performed to find out how y depends upon x, the distance between the centre of A and the centre of B.
topicspeed topicsound topicspeedofsoundandlight
magnetic N waxed cardboard disc floating on water W
E B
N
A N
S
S
cylindrical glass vessel
x S Fig. 5.1
N
disc
A N N S
water 0
scale
wood
B
S
1
2
3
4
5 6
y
x S
Fig. 5.2 The data obtained from the experiment are given in the table.
deflection y / mm separation x / mm
3
8
16
40.5
74.5
600
400
300
200
150
0625/6 Nov00
For Examiner’s Use
11 (a) Plot a graph of y /mm (y-axis) against x /mm (x-axis). Draw a smooth curve through the points. [5]
(b) (i)
For Examiner’s Use
Use the graph to complete the table below. x / mm
y / mm
x1
170
y1
x2
600
y2
x1/x2
y1/y2
0625/6 Nov00
[Turn over
12 (ii)
Given that an increase in y means an increase in the force between the magnets, describe how the force changes as the separation, x, decreases. Your answer should include a comment on the magnitude of the two ratios that you have calculated in part (b) (i). ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[5]
0625/6 Nov00
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS
0625/6
PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical MAY/JUNE SESSION 2001
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper. No additional materials required.
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question. You may use a calculator.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE 1 2 3 4 5 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 12 printed pages. SB (ND/CG) QF10313/2 © UCLES 2001
[Turn over
2 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus used for an experiment to investigate the extension of a steel spring. The laboratory bench to which the pulley and support for the spring are firmly fixed is not shown.
pointer spring 80 90 100 110 70 12 80 7 60 100 0 6 0 13 110 0 0 5 0 120 50 0 13
0 10 20 30 180 170 16 01 50 40 14 0
pulley
protractor
70 180 60 1 01 10 0 15 20 0 30 14 40
1 topicspeed
load
Fig. 1.1 The load is attached to the spring by a length of thread which passes over a pulley. The protractor is fixed in position. It is assumed that the angle through which the pointer moves when the load is increased is proportional to the extension of the spring. A student recorded the angle θ through which the pointer moved for a range of loads, L, as shown in the table.
L /N θ / ° 0 1 2 3 4 5 (i)
0 3 14 27 43 57
Plot the graph of θ / ° (y-axis) against L / N (x-axis). Draw the best fit straight line for loads from 1 N to 5 N.
0625/6/M/J/01
[6]
For Examiner’s Use
3
For Examiner’s Use
(ii) The student expected the graph to show a straight line through the origin. Suggest a reason why the results were not as expected. ................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/M/J/01
[Turn over
4 (b) Another student obtained results using the apparatus set up as shown in Figs. 1.2 and 1.3 which show the spring unloaded and the spring with a load of 1 N. rigid support rigid support
load
Fig. 1.2
Fig. 1.3
(i) On Fig. 1.2, show clearly lo, the length of the unloaded spring. (ii) On Fig. 1.3, show clearly l1, the corresponding length of the spring with a load of 1 N. (iii) Write down the equation you would use to calculate e, the extension produced by adding the 1 N load. e =......................... [2]
0625/6/M/J/01
For Examiner’s Use
5 2
Some students were asked to carry out a simple experiment to compare different heat insulation materials.
topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy
(a) One student measured the temperature of hot water in insulated beakers (all the same size), waited for 5 minutes for the water to cool and then measured the temperatures again. Fig. 2.1 shows how one student recorded the results.
80° C start 73° C after 5 minutes
200cm³ water
85° C start 69° C after 5 minutes
170cm³ water
A
B
79° C start 67° C after 5 minutes
150cm³ water
C
Fig. 2.1 (i) Calculate the temperature fall for each beaker. beaker A .......................................................... beaker B .......................................................... beaker C .......................................................... If you had only these results and no information about the way these results had been obtained, which beaker would appear to be the best insulated? ............................................................. (ii) Suggest a simple, practical way to overcome the problem of heat loss, by evaporation and convection, from the surface of the water in the beaker. ................................................................................................................................. (iii) Look at Fig. 2.1 again. Suggest one further improvement that you would make to improve the reliability of the experiment. ................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. [5]
0625/6/M/J/01
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
6
For Examiner’s Use
(b) Another student carried out a similar experiment, with proper control of the variables, and took temperature readings every 4 minutes. Room temperature during the experiment was 19 °C. He plotted a graph of temperature against time to show the cooling of the water in each beaker. Fig. 2.2 shows the graph obtained. 100 90 80 70 60 Temp/°C
50 A 40 B 30 C 20 10 0 10
20
30
40
50
60
Time/Min
Fig. 2.2 (i) From the graph, which beaker, A, B or C, was best insulated ? ............................. (ii) The student extended graph line B with a dotted line as shown. Explain why this does not show a realistic continuation of the cooling of the water. ................................................................................................................................. (iii) On the graph, extend line A to show a realistic result up to 60 minutes. [3]
0625/6/M/J/01
7 3
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 3.1 shows a circuit in which three resistors are connected to a d.c. power supply.
topicmagnet
power source
A
R1
R2
V1
R3
V2
V3
Fig. 3.1 A 0 - 1 V voltmeter was used to measure the potential differences V1, V2 and V3. Fig. 3.2 represents the face of the voltmeter when reading these values. VOLT 0
0.4
0.2
0.6
VOLT 0.8
1
0
0.2
0.6
0.4
VOLT 0.8
V2
V1
1
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
V3
Fig. 3.2 (a) (i)
Record the reading of each potential difference, shown in Fig. 3.2, in the table below. potential difference
V/V
V1 V2 V3
(ii) Using the values in your table, predict the voltmeter reading when a 0 - 5 V voltmeter is connected across all three resistors together. potential difference = ............................................................................................... [5]
0625/6/M/J/01
[Turn over
8 (iii) The current, I, in the circuit is 0.35 A. Using the values in your table and the equation R = V / I, calculate the resistances R1, R2 and R3 R1 = ................................................. R2 = ................................................. R3 = ................................................. [2] (b) In the space below, draw a circuit diagram showing the same components as in Fig. 3.1 but with •
the three resistors in parallel,
•
a voltmeter connected to record the potential difference across all three resistors
•
the ammeter connected to record the current through R1 only.
[3]
0625/6/M/J/01
For Examiner’s Use
9 4
Fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus used to determine the maximum temperature rise of cold water when a hot glass stopper is transferred to the cold water.
topictensiontopicdispersion topicevaporation topicresistance
string
thermometer
boiling water at 100 °C
cold water at 20 °C
glass stopper
heater
Fig. 4.1 (a) On Fig. 4.2, draw the mercury thread of the thermometer when it shows the temperature of the cold water in the plastic cup shown in Fig. 4.1.
°C
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
Fig. 4.2 [1] (b) The glass stopper was heated for a long time in the boiling water. Suggest a reason for this. .....................................................................................................................................[1] (c) Give one reason why the glass stopper should be transferred quickly from the boiling water to the cold water. .....................................................................................................................................[1] (d) The maximum temperature that the cold water reached after the hot glass stopper was transferred to the cold water was 30.5 °C. Calculate (i) the temperature rise of the cold water, .................................................................................................................................
0625/6/M/J/01
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
10 (ii) the temperature fall of the glass stopper. ................................................................................................................................. [2] (e) When the experiment is repeated with a larger glass stopper, the temperature rise of the cold water was greater than with the smaller glass stopper. Why was this? .....................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/M/J/01
For Examiner’s Use
11 5
Fig. 5.1 shows an illuminated object, a lens and a screen set up for an experiment to investigate the size of the image produced by the lens. The lens is mounted on a rectangular wooden block.
topicthermometer
topicradioactivity topicpressure topicconvection
lens u
stiff card lamp
v
illuminated object
screen
wooden block
Fig. 5.1 Fig. 5.2 shows the shape and height (x cm) of the object. stiff card thin wire x
triangular hole in the card is the illuminated object Fig. 5.2
(a) A student carried out the experiment, keeping the lens in the same position throughout. He set the object at a distance u = 15.0 cm from the centre of the lens, moved the screen until the image was sharply focused and then measured v, the distance from the centre of the lens to the screen. Finally, he measured y, the height of the image on the screen. He repeated the procedure using different values of u. The table below shows the readings he obtained. u / cm
v / cm
x / cm
y / cm
15.0 20.0 25.0
30.0 19.6 16.8
1.5 1.5 1.5
2.9 1.6 1.1
0625/6/M/J/01
y / cm (by calculation)
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
12
For Examiner’s Use
The height of the image can be found by calculation, using the equation below. y=vxx u Calculate the y values in this way and enter them in the table, giving the values to an appropriate number of significant figures for comparison with the measured values. [2] (b) Describe how you would measure as accurately as possible from the centre of the lens to the screen. You may draw a diagram and assume that a metre rule is available and other simple laboratory apparatus (e.g. set square and fine line marker pen).
......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................[2] (c) In Fig. 5.3 below, draw a full-size diagram of the image formed on the screen when u = 15.0 cm. (Use the student’s measured value, not the calculated value.)
[2] Fig. 5.3 (d) State one precaution you would take when setting up the apparatus in order to obtain a clear image on the screen. ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................[1] 0625/6/M/J/01
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
PHYSICS
0625/6
PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2001
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper. No additional materials required.
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
1 2 3 4 5 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. SB (SLC/SLC) S11938/5 © UCLES 2001
[Turn over
2 1 topicspeed
Fig. 1.1 shows a strip of wood approximately 1 m long, clamped at each end to rigid supports so that the strip is horizontal and about 50 cm above the floor. A small loop of string is fixed at the centre of the strip. clamp
wooden strip
clamp
load, L
Fig. 1.1 A student investigates how the bending of the strip of wood depends on the load hung from the loop of string. The depression d of the strip at the centre is measured for each load L. The readings obtained are shown in the table below. L / N d / mm 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 (a) (i) (ii)
0.0 11.5 23.0 34.0 46.0 57.5
Plot a graph of d / mm (y-axis) against L / N (x-axis). Draw the line of best fit.
[6]
From the graph, determine the depression that would be produced by a load of 2.5 N. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information. depression produced by a load of 2.5 N = .......................................................
[2]
(b) Draw a diagram in the space below to show how you would measure the depression produced by a load. You may assume that simple standard laboratory apparatus is available.
[2] 0625/6/O/N/01
For Examiner’s Use
3
0625/6/O/N/01
For Examiner’s Use
[Turn over
4 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a circuit in which lamps are connected to a d.c. power supply.
topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy
d.c. power supply A
V
Fig. 2.1 Three lamps B, C and D are available and are connected in the circuit in turn. Each time the potential difference V across the lamp and the current I through the lamp are measured. A 0 – 0.5 A ammeter is used to measure the current. Fig. 2.2 represents the face of the ammeter when reading the current values.
0
0 .1
AMP 0.2 0.3
0.4
0.5
0
reading with lamp B
0
0 .1
AMP 0.2 0.3
0.4
reading with lamp C
0 .1
AMP . 0 2 0.3
0.4
reading with lamp D Fig. 2.2
0625/6/O/N/01
0.5
0.5
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
5 (a) (i)
(ii)
In the table below, record each ammeter reading shown in Fig. 2.2. lamp
V/V
B
2.0
C
2.1
D
1.9
I/A
[3]
Using the values in the table and the equation R = V / I, calculate the resistance of each lamp. resistance of lamp B = ........................................................... resistance of lamp C = ........................................................... resistance of lamp D = ...........................................................
[2]
(b) In the space below, draw a new circuit diagram showing the power source and switch, the three lamps in parallel, the voltmeter connected to measure the voltage across the lamps, the ammeter connected to measure the current through lamp C.
[3]
0625/6/O/N/01
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
6 3
Fig. 3.1 shows a pile of 15 glass microscope slides, drawn actual size.
topicmolecularmodels topicmolecular
h
Fig. 3.1 (a) (i)
On Fig. 3.1, use your rule to measure h, the height in mm of the pile of slides. h = .............................................................
(ii)
Calculate the thickness t of one slide.
t = .............................................................. [2] (iii)
The surface area A of each slide is 1200 mm2. Calculate the volume V of one slide using the equation V = A x t. V = ..............................................................
(iv)
[2]
The mass of one microscope slide is 3.7 g. Calculate the density d of the glass, in g/mm3, using the equation d = m /V. Give your answer to an appropriate number of significant figures.
d = .............................................................
0625/6/O/N/01
[2]
7 (b) Fig. 3.2 shows the pile of microscope slides being used in a balancing experiment. The metre rule is to be balanced, at the 50.0 cm mark, on the pivot. The pile of slides has a mass of 55.5 g and is placed with its centre of mass on the rule at a distance 20.0 cm from the pivot.
For Examiner’s Use
On Fig. 3.2, show clearly the approximate position of a 100 g mass placed on the rule to make it balance. (You are not expected to carry out a calculation.) microscope slides metre rule
pivot Fig. 3.2 [2]
0625/6/O/N/01
[Turn over
8 4
Fig. 4.1 shows three metal cans A, B and C. The cans are all drawn to one quarter actual size.
topicenergytransformations topictransformations topicenergy topicapparentdepth
A
B
C
Fig. 4.1 Each can contains water at room temperature. The outer surfaces of the cans are as follows: A – painted white B – painted black C – polished metal (no paint). (a) A student carries out an experiment to investigate how the colour of the surface affects the rate of heating of the water when the cans are placed close to a radiant heater. Her readings are shown below. can
initial water final water temperature/°C temperature/°C
heating time/min
A
20
55
20
B
20
43
23
C
20
52
18
temperature change/°C
(i)
Calculate the temperature change for each can and record the values in the table above. [1]
(ii)
The student realises that the variables have not been controlled, so that it is not possible to draw reliable conclusions about the effect of the colour of the surface on the rate of heating. Suggest two changes you would make to obtain a more reliable set of readings. 1. ............................................................................................................................... 2. ...........................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6/O/N/01
For Examiner’s Use
9 (b) Another student carries out a similar experiment, with proper control of the variables, and takes temperature readings every 60 s. All the cans reach a steady temperature within 25 minutes of the start of timing. She plots a graph of temperature against time to show the heating of the water in each can. Fig. 4.2 shows the graph obtained.
For Examiner’s Use
P 30
Q R
temperature / °C
20
10 0
5
10
15
20
25
time/min Fig. 4.2 (i)
From the graph, which can, P, Q or R, reached its final temperature most quickly? ....................
(ii)
[1]
Using the graph, determine the temperature of the water at the start of the experiment. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information. temperature = ....................
[2]
0625/6/O/N/01
[Turn over
10 5 topicresistance
Fig. 5.1 shows the outline of a transparent perspex block used in an experiment to determine the value of a quantity called the refractive index of perspex. The block is placed on a sheet of plain paper that is mounted on a cork mat. Two pins P1 and P2 are viewed through the block and two additional pins P3 and P4 are stuck into the mat so that P3, P4 and the images of P1 and P2 appear to be exactly in line, one behind the other.
P1
N
i P2 E
A
D
B
C
N P3
P4
eye Fig. 5.1 0625/6/O/N/01
For Examiner’s Use
11 (a) (i)
On Fig. 5.1, draw a line through the positions of P3 and P4 and extend the line until it meets CD. Mark this point as F. Show the path of the ray of light through the block by joining point E to point F. [1]
(ii)
Measure the angle i. i = ...........................................................
[1]
(b) Give two precautions that you would take to obtain an accurate path for the ray of light. You should consider the positioning of the pins P3 and P4 and how they are viewed. You may assume that simple laboratory apparatus is available, if required. first precaution .................................................................................................................. .......................................................................................................................................... second precaution ............................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................................................[2] (c) (i)
Measure the distance NF. NF = ..............................
(ii)
Measure the distance EF. EF = ...............................
(iii)
Calculate the refractive index n of perspex using the equation EF n = 0.5 x ––– . NF
n = ......................... [4]
0625/6/O/N/01
For Examiner’s Use
12 BLANK PAGE
0625/6/O/N/01
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
0625/6
PHYSICS PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2002 1 hour Candidates answer on the question paper. No additional materials required.
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE 1 2 3 4 5 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. UNIVERSITY of CAMBRIDGE SP (SC/JB) S25730/5 © CIE 2002
Local Examinations Syndicate
[Turn over
2 1
Fig. 1.1 shows how a student used a rule to measure h, the height of a pile of wooden blocks. The reading was inaccurate because the student’s practical technique was poor. cm 30
20
eye 10
h
0
Fig. 1.1 (a) Complete Fig. 1.2 to show the correct method to read the height h using the metre rule. [2]
h
Fig. 1.2 (b) (i)
Use your rule to measure the height marked h on Fig. 1.2. h = ................................................
(ii)
Fig. 1.2 is drawn to scale. It is a tenth of actual size. Calculate t, the actual thickness of one block of wood.
t = ................................................. [5]
0625/6/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
(a) A student set up a circuit in order to measure the current through a lamp when different potential differences were applied. Fig. 2.1 below shows the diagram that the student drew. The diagram is incomplete. A voltmeter and an ammeter are required. power source
meter Fig. 2.1 (i)
Draw the appropriate symbol in the space labelled ‘meter’.
(ii)
Draw the circuit symbol for the other meter and show it connected correctly to the circuit. [2]
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows the scale of the ammeter.
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.4
0
0.5
A
Fig. 2.2 (i)
On Fig. 2.2, draw the position of the pointer when the ammeter reading is 0.46 A.
(ii)
What is the range of the ammeter shown? ..............................................................................................................................[2]
(c) When the current is 0.46 A, the voltmeter reading is 6.0 V. Calculate the resistance of the lamp filament, using the equation V = IR.
resistance = ..................[3]
0625/6/M/J/02
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
4 3
The IGCSE class was asked to investigate the solubility of sugar under different conditions. They were reminded of the importance of carrying out a ‘fair test’ by controlling the possible variables. One student decided to investigate the effect of temperature on the rate at which the sugar dissolved. For each test the student added water to some sugar in a beaker, stirred the mixture briefly, and recorded , its temperature, and t, the time taken for all the sugar to dissolve. The readings are shown below. temperature, / °C
dissolving time, t/s
20
450
25
240
31
145
36
90
39
72
46
45
50
24
(a) List three possible variables that this student should keep constant throughout the experiment. ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/6/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
5 (b) Plot the graph of t/s (y-axis) against /°C (x-axis). Start both axes at zero. Draw the best-fit curve.
[5]
(c) (i)
When the temperature of the water is increased, what is the effect on the time taken for sugar to dissolve? .................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Calculate the ratios
dissolving time at 20°C , dissolving time at 30°C ratio = ................................
dissolving time at 40°C . dissolving time at 50°C ratio = ................................ (iii)
Use your answers from part (ii) to predict a possible value for the ratio dissolving time at 50°C . dissolving time at 60°C ratio = ............................[4]
0625/6/M/J/02
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
6 4
A student carried out an experiment to find the position of an image in a plane mirror. The object was an optics pin. The arrangement is shown in Fig. 4.1.
sheet of plain paper mirror A cork mat
P
B
Fig. 4.1 The student viewed the image of the object pin P in the mirror. He placed two pins A and B some distance apart so that the image of P and pins A and B were exactly in line, one behind the other. Then, without moving the object pin P, he viewed the image from a different position and repeated the experiment with pins C and D. The student’s ray trace sheet is shown in Fig. 4.2.
mirror
A
C
P
D B
Fig. 4.2
0625/6/M/J/02
For Examiner’s Use
7
For Examiner’s Use
(a) On Fig. 4.2 (i)
draw in the two reflected rays,
(ii)
draw in the two incident rays that produced the reflected rays you have drawn,
(iii)
show clearly, on the incident and reflected rays, the direction in which the light is travelling,
(iv)
find the position of the image of the object pin P by using the directions of the reflected rays. Show clearly on the diagram how you found the image position. Label the image position I. [6]
(b) State whether the image is real or virtual. ......................................................................................................................................... Justify your answer by reference to the lines you have drawn in part (a). ......................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6/M/J/02
[Turn over
8 BLANK PAGE
0625/6/M/J/02
9 5
In an experiment to study the effect of increasing pressure on the volume of air, the IGCSE class used the apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1.
scale air
pressure gauge
oil
to foot pump
Fig. 5.1
air tube
20 cm3 30 cm3
oil
Fig. 5.2 (a) What is the volume reading shown in Fig. 5.2? volume reading = ............................[1]
0625/6/M/J/02
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
10
For Examiner’s Use
220 p / kPa 200
180
160
140
120
100 0
10
20
30
40
50 V / cm3
Fig. 5.3
Fig. 5.3 shows the graph that one student plotted from the readings. She drew a best-fit curve. Theory suggests that the relationship between pressure and volume is given by the equation p x V = constant. The student is required to find the value of the constant. (b) Why is it better to find the value of the constant using the graph than from a single measurement of p and V? ......................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/M/J/02
11 (c) (i)
Use these two examples, taken from the graph, to show that the readings from the experiment support the theory. Example 1:
when p = 200 kPa V = ………cm3 pV = …………
Example 2:
when V = 37 cm3 p = …….. kPa pV = …………
(ii)
Using your answers from (c)(i), predict the pressure required to reduce the volume to 18 cm3.
p = …………………. kPa [4]
0625/6/M/J/02
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Candidate Name
International General Certificate of Secondary Education CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
PHYSICS
0625/6
PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2002 1 hour Candidates answer on the question paper. No additional materials required.
TIME
1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page. Answer all questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper. INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE
1 2 3 4 5 TOTAL
This question paper consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. SP (NF/SLC) S37969/1 © CIE 2002
[Turn over
2 1
In an experiment to determine the volume of glass beads, a student used two different methods. Method 1 The student measured the combined diameters of some beads and then calculated the volume of one bead. The end view of the apparatus used is shown in Fig. 1.1. bead
wooden block
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2 shows the side view of the same apparatus, drawn actual size. x
Fig. 1.2 (a) (i)
On Fig. 1.2, use your rule to measure the distance x, in cm. ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Calculate d, the average diameter in cm of one glass bead. Show your working.
d = ............................................... cm (iii)
Calculate V, the volume of one glass bead using the equation πd 3 V = ___ . 6
V = .................................................[6]
0625/6/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
3 Method 2 The student used a displacement method to determine the volume of a glass bead. Fig. 1.3 and Fig. 1.4 show how this was done.
cm3
100
measuring cylinder
cm3
100
80
80
60
60
water
water
40
40
20
20
Fig. 1.3
Fig. 1.4
(b) (i)
measuring cylinder
225 glass beads
Write down the values of the readings taken. ................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Calculate the volume of 225 glass beads.
volume = ......................................... (iii)
Calculate V, the average volume of one glass bead.
V = ......................................... [3] (c) Suggest which of the two methods will give the more accurate result for the volume of a glass bead. Give a reason for your answer. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/O/N/02
[Turn over
4 2
The IGCSE class is investigating electromagnets. The electromagnets are made by wrapping insulated wire around a soft-iron core. The wire is connected to a power pack. Fig. 2.1 shows the arrangement. power pack
soft-iron core
paper clip Fig. 2.1 Two students studied how the number of paper clips that an electromagnet can hold up depends on the potential difference across the coil. (a) Complete Fig. 2.1 by adding a voltmeter, connected to measure the p.d. across the coil. [2] (b) Student A used the control on the power pack to obtain set values of p.d. and recorded the maximum number of paper clips that the electromagnet could hold at each p.d. The results are shown below. Student A
p.d. / V
number of paper clips
0
0
2
0
4
1
6
2
8
3
10
4
12
5
0625/6/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
5 Student B connected a variable resistor into the circuit and used it to change the p.d. across the coil. She recorded the minimum p.d. required to hold 1 paper clip, then 2 paper clips, etc. The results are shown below.
For Examiner’s Use
Student B p.d. / V
(i)
number of paper clips
0
0
2.2
1
4.5
2
6.6
3
8.7
4
11.0
5
Which set of results gives the more accurate indication of the strength of the electromagnet at different potential differences? Tick the correct box. Student A Student B
(ii)
Justify your answer to part (b)(i). ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Draw the circuit symbol for a variable resistor.
[1] (d) On the diagram below, show the position of the pointer on the voltmeter when the voltmeter reading is 8.7 V.
V
9
10
0
1
5 6 7 3 4 8 2
[1] 0625/6/O/N/02
[Turn over
6 3
A student carried out a ‘principle of moments’ experiment using a metre rule placed on a pivot at the 50.0 cm mark. The aim was to determine an unknown weight. The arrangement of the apparatus is shown in Fig. 3.1. a unknown weight W
b 5.0 N weight
50 cm mark
metre rule
pivot Fig. 3.1
The student placed the unknown weight W at a convenient distance a from the pivot. He found b, the distance from the pivot that the 5.0 N weight must be placed so that the rule balanced horizontally. He then repeated the experiment using different values of a. The readings are shown in the table below.
a/m
b/m
0.100
0.122
0.200
0.238
0.250
0.302
0.300
0.360
0.350
0.435
0.400
0.470
0625/6/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
7 (a) (i) (ii)
Plot the graph of b / m (y-axis) against a / m (x-axis). Draw the best-fit straight line.
[6] (iii)
Determine G, the gradient of the line.
G = .................................... (iv)
Determine W, the unknown weight, using the equation W = XG where X = 5.0 N.
W = ....................................
0625/6/O/N/02
[Turn over
8 (v)
Explain why the student could not choose distance a to have a value of 0.450 m. ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[5]
(b) Another student, who was performing this experiment, found that the unloaded metre rule balanced on the pivot at the 50.3 cm mark, instead of the 50.0 cm mark. Suggest what the student should do to obtain the correct value for W from the experiment. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
4
The IGCSE class was performing a heating experiment. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 4.1. The aim was to determine the rate at which the temperature of 200 cm3 of water increased when heated with an electric immersion heater.
thermometer
cable to power supply
beaker
electric immersion heater
water
Fig. 4.1
0625/6/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
9 The water was heated from room temperature up to 60 °C. The teacher measured the power of the immersion heater and calculated (correctly) the time required to raise the temperature of 200 cm3 of water from 21 °C to 60 °C. The students found that the water must be heated for longer than the calculated time. (a) (i)
For Examiner’s Use
What is the most likely cause of the longer time recorded? Tick the appropriate box. an inaccurate thermometer errors in reading the stopwatch heat loss during the experiment
(ii)
Suggest two precautions that could be taken to obtain more accurate results. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................[3]
(b) What is the reading on the thermometer shown in Fig. 4.2?
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 °C
reading = ........................ [1] Fig. 4.2 (c) The power P of the immersion heater is calculated using the equation P = V I Calculate the power of an immersion heater in which the current is 5.5 A when the p.d. across it is 12.0 V. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6/O/N/02
[Turn over
10 5
A student carried out a lens experiment to investigate the magnification of an image. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 5.1. u
v
illuminated object
lens
screen
Fig. 5.1 The object is a triangular hole in a screen. Fig. 5.2 shows this, actual size.
1.5 cm
2.0 cm Fig. 5.2 The student set the distance u at 35.0 cm and moved the screen to obtain a sharply focused image. The image distance v was 72.3 cm. (a) (i)
Calculate m, the magnification, using the equation m = v /u.
m = .................................................
0625/6/O/N/02
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
11 (ii)
Draw a diagram of the image, actual size, for a magnification m = 2.0.
[5] (b) The image distance v is the distance from the screen to the centre of the lens. Explain briefly how you would position a metre rule to obtain an accurate value for v. You may draw a diagram.
.......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/O/N/02
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/06
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
May/June 2003 1 hour Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page. Stick your personal label here, if provided.
2 3 4 5 Total
This document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages. SP (AT/KS) S47471/3 © UCLES 2003
[Turn over
2 1
A student carried out an experiment to find the spring constant of a steel spring. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 1.1.
l0 l
load W half-metre rule
half-metre rule
Fig. 1.1 The student recorded the unstretched length l0 of the spring. Then she added loads W to the spring, recording the new length l each time. The readings are shown in the table below. W/N
l / mm
0
30
1
32
2
33
3
36
4
39
5
40
6
42
e / mm
l0 = 30 mm
(a) Calculate the extension e of the spring produced by each load, using the equation e = (l – l0). Record the values of e in the table.
0625/06/M/J/03
[2]
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) Plot the graph of e / mm (y-axis) against W / N (x-axis).
[4]
(c) Draw the best-fit straight line for the points you have plotted. Calculate the gradient of the line. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
gradient = ………………………………..[4]
0625/06/M/J/03
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
4 2
An IGCSE student was investigating the passage of red light through a prism. Fig. 2.1 shows the outline of the prism and an incident ray. A normal
i
D
ray box
B
C Fig. 2.1
(a) Measure the angle of incidence i shown in Fig. 2.1. i = …………………………….[1] (b) The angle of refraction as the ray entered side AB of the prism was 22°. (i)
On Fig. 2.1, draw in the refracted ray from point D as accurately as possible.
(ii)
Mark the point E, where the ray meets side AC. Draw the normal at point E. [4]
(c) At point E the ray came out of the prism with an angle of refraction of 75°. On Fig. 2.1, draw as accurately as possible the ray coming out of the prism. [1] (d) Another student used four optics pins to trace the passage of a ray through a prism. Fig. 2.2 shows the prism, the position of the student’s eye and the directions of the ray.
incident ray eye Fig. 2.2 On Fig. 2.2, show positions of the four optics pins, placed to obtain as accurate a result as possible. Mark each position clearly with a cross (X). [2]
0625/06/M/J/03
For Examiner’s Use
5 3
In an electrical experiment, a student set up a circuit to measure current and potential difference. Part of the circuit is shown in Fig. 3.1. power source
A Y
Fig. 3.1 (a) (i) (ii)
Complete the circuit diagram by drawing in a voltmeter connected across the lamp. Name the component labelled Y. ……………………………………….
[2]
(b) The first reading on the voltmeter was 2.2 V. On the voltmeter face shown in Fig. 3.2, show the position of the pointer giving the reading 2.2 V. 3
4
5
6
7 8
2
9
1
10
0 V
[1]
Fig. 3.2 (c) The readings of V and I obtained by the student are given in the table below.
(i)
V/
I/
2.2
0.36
4.1
0.62
6.0
0.86
7.9
0.98
9.8
1.20
R/
Calculate the resistance R of the lamp filament for each set of V and I readings and write the values in the table. Use the equation R=
(ii)
V . I
Complete the column headings in the table. 0625/06/M/J/03
[6] [Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
6 4
An IGCSE class watched a demonstration experiment to show that a metal rod expands when heated. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 4.1.
pointer metal rod pin wooden block
heat bench Fig. 4.1
When the rod expands, it rolls the pin which moves the pointer. So a very small expansion moves the pointer far enough to be seen clearly. (a) One student wanted to find out how much longer the rod became when heated above room temperature with a Bunsen burner. The rod was 0.750 m long at room temperature. To find the circumference of the pin, the student wrapped a piece of string 10 times round the pin, marked the string at the beginning and end of the 10 turns, and then measured the length of the string between the marks. Fig. 4.2 shows the string actual size.
x
Fig. 4.2 (i)
Use your rule to measure the distance x between the marks on the string on Fig. 4.2. x = ………………………………..
(ii)
Calculate the circumference c of the pin.
c = ……………………………….. [3]
0625/06/M/J/03
For Examiner’s Use
7 (b) A second student measured the diameter d of the pin using a micrometer screw gauge. The diameter was 1.20 mm. When the rod was heated, the pointer moved through 90°. (i)
Calculate the circumference c using the equation c = πd.
c = ………………………………..[2] (ii)
Use this value of the circumference to calculate the increase e in the length of the rod when heated.
e = ………………………………..[1] (iii)
Calculate the length l of the heated rod. l = ………………………………..[1]
(c) The micrometer screw gauge is a very accurate instrument. Suggest why the string and rule method of finding the circumference, used by the first student, was inaccurate. ................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/06/M/J/03
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
8 5
A student was asked to carry out an experiment to compare the insulating properties of cotton wool, cardboard and polystyrene. The apparatus provided was hot water, a thermometer, a stopclock and a copper can with a lid, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
thermometer copper can
lid
water insulation
Fig. 5.1 The student wrapped one of the insulators around the can, poured hot water into the can, and then took temperature and time readings as the water cooled. This was then repeated for each insulator. The graph in Fig. 5.2 shows how the student displayed his readings.
80 temperature / °C
polystyrene 60 40 cotton wool
20
cardboard 0
0
5
10
15
time / min Fig. 5.2 (a) (i)
Using the information on the graph, which material appears to be the best insulator? ..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Justify your answer by referring to the information on the graph. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
0625/06/M/J/03
For Examiner’s Use
9 (b) In this experiment, it is important to control the variables. Suggest three variables that the student should keep constant for this experiment. 1. ..................................................................................................................................... 2. ..................................................................................................................................... 3. ..................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/06/M/J/03
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/06
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
October/November 2003 1 hour Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2
If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page.
3 4
Stick your personal label here, if provided.
5 Total
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. MML 4504 11/02 S53410/3 © UCLES 2003
UNIVERSITY of CAMBRIDGE Local Examinations Syndicate
[Turn over
2 1
(a) A student was asked to make some measurements of the test-tube shown in Fig. 1.1. He was given a 1 m length of thin string and a metre rule and instructed to determine as accurately as possible the circumference of the tube. The student used the rule to measure the diameter d of the tube and then calculated the circumference c using the equation c = d. Describe how the student could have obtained a more accurate result with the apparatus given. You may draw on Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1 .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b)
(i) On Fig. 1.2, show where you would place two small rectangular blocks of wood to help you make an accurate measurement of the overall length of the test-tube.
Fig. 1.2 (ii) The test-tube is shown actual size in Fig. 1.2. Use your rule to measure the length l of the test-tube. l = .............................................. [2]
0625/06/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
3 (c) Using another test-tube, the student obtained these readings. l = 14.5 cm c = 5.3 cm Calculate the approximate external volume V of the test-tube using the student’s readings and the equation c 2l V = –– . 4
V = ....................................................
[2]
(d) The equation used in (c) assumes the test-tube to be a cylinder with flat ends. It does not allow for the rounded end of the test-tube. (i) Estimate the volume Vm of the ‘missing’ part of the cylinder shown shaded in Fig. 1.3.
Fig. 1.3 Vm = ........................................... (ii) Using your values for V and Vm , calculate the actual external volume Va of the test-tube.
Va = ...........................................
[2]
0625/06/O/N/03
[Turn over
4 2
Fig. 2.1 shows a ray tracing sheet obtained by a student carrying out a reflection of light experiment using pins and a plane mirror.
mirror
M
M' B
C
E
D
A
F
Fig. 2.1 The student looks into the mirror MM' and views the images of pins A and B. He then places pins C and D so that pins C and D and the images of pins A and B appear to be in line. (a) On Fig. 2.1, (i) draw the incident ray in this experiment, (ii) draw the reflected ray, (iii) draw a normal at the point where the incident ray meets the mirror, (iv) measure the angle of incidence i. i = ............................................... [3] 0625/06/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
5 (b) The student moves pin B and then repeats the experiment, obtaining the reflected ray EF.
For Examiner’s Use
(i) On Fig. 2.1, continue the lines CD and EF behind the mirror to find the point where they meet. Label this point X. (ii) Draw the line AX. Label with the letter Y the point where line AX crosses the mirror MM'. (iii) Use your rule to measure the distances AY and YX. AY = ........................................... YX = ........................................... [2] (c) According to theory, AY = YX. Suggest why, in spite of very careful work, the student’s values may have been slightly different. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/06/O/N/03
[Turn over
6 3
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows the scale of an ammeter. Draw the position of the pointer when the ammeter reading is 0.35 A. [1]
0.4
0.6
0.2
0.8 A
0
1.0
Fig. 3.1 (b) The ammeter was used in the circuit shown in Fig. 3.2 to investigate the current in a lamp.
Y A
V
Fig. 3.2 (i) Name the component labelled Y. ...................................................
0625/06/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
7 (ii) The table shows the current I in the lamp for different values of the p.d. V across the lamp.
1.
V/
I/
1.9
0.31
1.5
0.26
0.8
0.20
For Examiner’s Use
R/
Calculate the values for the resistance R of the lamp, using the equation V R= – .
I
Write your answers in the table. 2.
Complete the column headings in the table.
(iii) Suggest how the value of V could be varied. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [8] (c) Fig. 3.3 shows a power source connected to three resistors labelled X, Y and Z. power source
X
Y
Z
Fig. 3.3 Complete the diagram to show (i) a voltmeter connected to measure the voltage across the resistors, (ii) an ammeter connected to measure the current in resistor X only, (iii) connecting wires to complete the circuit. [3] 0625/06/O/N/03
[Turn over
8 4
The IGCSE class was studying the acceleration a of a toy truck that was pulled along a track by a force F. The arrangement is shown in Fig. 4.1. truck
F
Fig. 4.1 The results obtained are shown in the table. F/N
a / (m / s2 )
0.5
0.35
1.0
0.72
1.5
1.02
2.0
1.44
2.5
1.74
(a) Plot a graph of F / N (y-axis) against a / (m / s2 ) (x-axis). Draw the line of best fit through your points. [6]
0625/06/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
9 (b) Theory suggests that the relationship between force and acceleration is given by the equation
For Examiner’s Use
F = ma, where m is the mass of the truck. The gradient of the graph is equal to the mass of the truck. From the graph, determine the mass m of the truck. Show clearly how you obtained the necessary information.
m = ....................................................
0625/06/O/N/03
[4]
[Turn over
10 5
A student wants to find out which of the three materials is the best thermal insulator. The student’s apparatus at the beginning of each test is as shown in Fig. 5.1. 200 cm3 of water at 80 °C
100 cm3 of water at 80 °C
material 1
100 cm3 of water at 70 °C
material 2
beaker A
material 3
beaker B
beaker C
Fig. 5.1 Each beaker is surrounded by a different insulating material. The water is allowed to cool and the temperatures are recorded at different times. The student is unable to write a correct conclusion because the variables have not been controlled. (a) Study Fig. 5.1 and then state two ways in which you would improve the control of variables. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (b) State the reading shown on the thermometer shown in Fig. 5.2.
°C
110 100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
Fig. 5.2 temperature reading .................................................................................................. [1]
0625/06/O/N/03
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
11 (c) The graph of Fig. 5.3 shows the results obtained by the student. The graph lines A, B and C correspond to the beakers A, B and C. 90 80 temperature / °C
70 60 50 40
A B
30
C
20 10 0 0
20
40
60
80
100 120 140
160 180 200
time / s Fig. 5.3 Which beaker cools the most quickly in the first 60 s? ...........................................................
0625/06/O/N/03
[1]
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/06
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
May/June 2004 1 hour Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2
If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page.
3 4
Stick your personal label here, if provided.
5 Total
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. MML 5677 5/03 S61130/2 © UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2 1
The IGCSE class is investigating the conduction of electric current through copper sulphate solution. The circuit used is shown in Fig. 1.1. power source
A
V
electrode copper sulphate solution Fig. 1.1 During the experimental work, the students measure the volume of water, the mass of copper sulphate that is dissolved in the water, the current in the solution, the potential difference across the electrodes and the gap between the electrodes. One set of readings is shown in Figs. 1.2 – 1.6. (a) Write down the readings shown. Include appropriate units.
1 0.5
1.0
0.5
1.5
V
A
2
0
1.5
0
Fig. 1.2
Fig. 1.3
current = ............................................
potential difference = .....................................
copper sulphate
plastic dish
empty plastic dish
6.58 g
3.26 g
Fig. 1.4 mass of copper sulphate = ............................. © UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
3 cm3 200 180 160 140 120
water
100 80 60 40 20
Fig. 1.5 volume of water = ..........................................
electrode
0 cm 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Fig. 1.6 gap between electrodes = .............................. [6] (b) It is not possible to put the rule inside the beaker to measure the gap between the electrodes. Explain how you would overcome this problem. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) Suggest a variable, which is not measured in Figs. 1.2 – 1.6, that might affect the value of the current. .................................................................................................................................... [1] © UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
[Turn over
4 2
A student is investigating the oscillation of a metre rule that has one end resting on the laboratory bench. The other end is held above the level of the bench by a spring attached at the 90.0 cm mark. The arrangement is shown in Fig. 2.1. clamp spring metre rule
d
bench Fig. 2.1 The period of oscillation is changed by moving a 200 g mass to different positions along the rule. The student records the time t taken for 10 oscillations of the end of the rule for each position of the mass. He measures the distance d from the end of the rule to the mark under the centre of the mass. The readings are shown in the table. d / cm
t/s
20.0
3.4
40.0
4.4
50.0
4.9
60.0
5.3
70.0
6.0
80.0
6.3
T/s
(a) Calculate the period T for each set of readings and enter the values in the table.
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
[2]
For Examiner’s Use
5 (b) Plot a graph of d / cm (x-axis) against T / s (y-axis). The scale on the x-axis has been started for you. [5]
0
20
40
60
For Examiner’s Use
80
(c) Using the graph, determine the period T when the distance d is 55.0 cm. T = ............................................................ [2] (d) The student suggests that T should be proportional to d. State with a reason whether your results support this suggestion. statement ......................................................................................................................... reason .............................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
[Turn over
6 3
Fig. 3.1 shows the circuit that a student uses to find the resistance of a combination of three lamps. power source
Fig. 3.1 The voltmeter and the ammeter have not been drawn in. (a) Complete Fig. 3.1 by drawing in the voltmeter and the ammeter, using conventional symbols. [2] (b) The student obtains these readings. current I = 0.54 A potential difference V = 1.8 V V Calculate the resistance R using the equation R = – .
I
R = ........................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
7 (c) The three lamps are now connected in parallel with one another. Draw a circuit diagram of the three lamps connected to the power supply. Include in your circuit diagram
For Examiner’s Use
(i) an ammeter to record the total current through the lamps, (ii) a variable resistor to vary the brightness of all three lamps, (iii) a voltmeter to record the potential difference across the lamps. [3]
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
[Turn over
8 4
The IGCSE class carries out an experiment using a convex lens, an illuminated object and a screen. Fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus. A sharp image is obtained on the screen. illuminated object
lens
screen
lamp
card Fig. 4.1 (a)
(i) Use your rule to measure, on Fig. 4.1, the distance x from the illuminated object to the centre of the lens. x = .................................................................. (ii) Use your rule to measure, on Fig. 4.1, the distance y from the centre of the lens to the screen. y = .................................................................. (iii) Fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus drawn to 1/5th of actual size. Calculate the actual distance u between the object and the lens, and the actual distance v between the lens and the screen. u = .................................................................. v = .................................................................. v (iv) Calculate the magnification m using the equation m = – . u
m = ................................................................. [5]
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
9 (b) The illuminated object is triangular in shape, as shown in Fig. 4.2.
Fig. 4.2 Draw a diagram of the image as it would appear on the screen.
[1] (c) State two precautions that the IGCSE class should take to obtain experimental readings that are as accurate as possible. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
[Turn over
10 5
In a heating experiment, a student takes the temperature of a beaker B containing water at room temperature. Fig. 5.1 shows the thermometer used.
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 °C
Fig. 5.1 (a) State the temperature reading shown on the thermometer. temperature reading = ............................. [1] (b) The student then transfers a small metal cylinder from beaker A of boiling water to the beaker B of water at room temperature, as shown in Fig. 5.2. string
metal cylinder
boiling water
water at room temperature
beaker A
beaker B Fig. 5.2
The student assumes that the metal is at a temperature of 100 °C when it enters the water in beaker B. The temperature of the water in beaker B rises to 36 °C. (i) Calculate the temperature rise of the water in beaker B.
temperature rise = .......................................... (ii) Calculate the temperature fall of the metal cylinder.
temperature fall = ........................................... [3]
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
11 (c) The student uses these readings and some other information to calculate the specific heat capacity of the metal. Why is it important to transfer the metal between the beakers as quickly as possible? .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/06
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
October/November 2004 1 hour Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page. Stick your personal label here, if provided.
2 3 4 5 Total
This document consists of 12 printed pages. MML 5677 5/03 S67109/2 © UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2 1
The IGCSE class is investigating the rate of cooling of water in a beaker. Some of the apparatus used is shown in Fig. 1.1. thermometer string beaker
hot water
Fig. 1.1 During the experiment, a student measures the temperature of the water, its volume, the length of string wrapped round a beaker and the depth of water in the beaker. (a) Write down the readings shown in Figs. 1.2 and 1.3. Include appropriate units.
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 °C
Fig. 1.2 temperature = ............................
cm3 100 80 60 40 20
Fig. 1.3 volume of water in the measuring cylinder = .....................................
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
[3]
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) The string is wrapped 5 times round the beaker and marked as shown in Fig. 1.4. mark
string
beaker
mark Fig. 1.4
The string is held against a metre rule as shown in Fig. 1.5. string
cm 10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 metre rule
Fig. 1.5 (i) Write down the length of the string between the marks. length = ................................ cm (ii) Calculate the circumference c of the beaker.
c = ........................................ cm (iii) Suggest one source of error in this method of determining the circumference. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. (iv) Suggest one improvement to this method. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
4 (c) A rule is placed beside the beaker, as shown in Fig. 1.6.
5 4 beaker
3 2
water
1 cm Fig. 1.6
(i) Write down the depth d of the water in the beaker. d = ........................................ cm (ii) Calculate the surface area A of the curved surface of the beaker up to the water level using the equation A = dc.
A = .................................. [2] (d) State the other measurements that need to be taken to determine the rate of cooling of the water. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
5 2
A student carries out an experiment to determine the density of plasticine. She records the mass m and the volume V of a range of differently-sized samples. These readings are plotted on a graph as shown in Fig. 2.1.
For Examiner’s Use
40
V / cm3 30
20
10
0 0
20
40
60
80
100
m/g Fig. 2.1 (a)
(i) Determine the gradient G of the line. Show clearly how you obtain the necessary information.
G = ................................... 1. (ii) Determine the density of the plasticine using the equation = — G
= .................................... [5] (b) The student could calculate the density from one set of readings. Suggest why she takes more than one set of readings and plots a graph. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] © UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
[Turn over
6 3
A student carries out an experiment using a simple pendulum. Fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus.
clamp
string
x
pendulum bob
Fig. 3.1 The student records the time t taken for 20 complete oscillations for a range of different lengths x of the string. The readings are shown in the table.
x / cm
l / cm
t/s
90.0
38.5
80.0
36.0
70.0
33.4
60.0
31.4
50.0
28.2
40.0
25.5
T/s
The length l of the pendulum is given by the equation l = x + r, where r is the radius of the pendulum bob. Fig. 3.2 shows the pendulum bob drawn actual size. pendulum bob string
bench Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
7 (a)
(i) Use your rule to measure the diameter d of the pendulum bob. d = .................................... (ii) Calculate the radius r of the pendulum bob. r = .....................................
(b)
[2]
(i) Complete the column for the length l / cm in the table using the equation l = x + r. (ii) The period T is the time taken for one complete oscillation. Complete the column for the period T / s in the table. [3]
(c) Plot the graph of T / s (y-axis) against l / cm (x-axis). Start the T / s axis at T = 1.0 s.
[5] (d) Using the graph, find the length la of the pendulum that would have a period of 1.50 s. la = ............................ cm
© UCLES 2004
[1]
0625/06/O/N/04
[Turn over
8 4
A student is investigating the passage of light through a transparent block, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
incident ray
A transparent block
B
emergent ray
eye Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
9 The student looks through the block. He places pins so that two pins marking the incident ray and two pins marking the emergent ray all appear to be exactly one behind the other.
For Examiner’s Use
(a) On Fig. 4.1, mark suitable positions for the four pins, two on the incident ray and two on the emergent ray. [1] (b)
(i) On Fig. 4.1, draw the normal at point A. (ii) On Fig. 4.1, draw in the line AB. Measure and record the angle of refraction r between the line AB and the normal. r = ..................................... (iii) Measure and record the angle of incidence i between the incident ray and the normal. i = ..................................... [4]
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
[Turn over
10 5
The IGCSE class is carrying out investigations of the resistance of bare resistance wires. Fig. 5.1 shows the circuit used. power source A
l A
B bare resistance wire
V
Fig. 5.1 The students record the current I in the circuit and then record the p.d. V across different lengths l of the bare resistance wire. The length of wire from A to B is 100.0 cm. The readings obtained by one student are shown in the table.
I = 0.84 A V/
(a)
l/
0.39
20.0
0.82
40.0
1.22
60.0
1.58
80.0
1.89
100.0
R/
(i) Calculate the resistance of each length l of wire using the equation R = V —. Write I the resistance values in the table. (ii) Complete the column headings in the table. [3]
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
11 (b) In a second experiment, the students use wires of the same material but with different diameters d. The p.d. is measured across the same length of wire each time. Fig. 5.2 shows the circuit used.
For Examiner’s Use
power source A
A
B bare resistance wire
V
Fig. 5.2 These are the readings correctly obtained by one student. Wire 1
I = 0.1 A
Wire 2
V = 1.8 V
I = 0.4 A V = 1.8 V
d = 0.24 mm
d = 0.48 mm V. (i) Calculate the resistance R of each wire, using the equation R = —
I
wire 1, R = ..........................................
wire 2, R = ..........................................
[1]
(ii) Based on the results for the two wires, which of the following statements is a correct conclusion? Tick one box. A wire with half the diameter has half the resistance. A wire with half the diameter has twice the resistance. A wire with half the diameter has one quarter the resistance. A wire with half the diameter has four times the resistance. [1]
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
[Turn over
12 (iii) Using your answers to (i) and (ii), calculate the expected resistance of a wire AB of the same material if it has a diameter of 0.12 mm.
expected resistance = ..............................................................
[1]
(c) What instrument would you use to measure the diameter of the wires as accurately as possible? .................................................................................................................................... [1]
Copyright Acknowledgements Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been reproduced. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights we have unwittingly infringed. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
For Examiner’s Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/06
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
May/June 2005 1 hour Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2
If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page.
3 4
Stick your personal label here, if provided.
5 Total
This document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. SPA (MML 8431 5/04) S81555/2 © UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2 1
The IGCSE class is investigating the change in temperature of hot water as cold water is added to it. The students are provided with 100 cm3 of hot water and a supply of cold water at room temperature. (a) The thermometer in Fig. 1.1 shows the temperature of the cold water. –10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 C
Fig. 1.1 Record the temperature of the cold water, as shown in Fig. 1.1. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (b) A student records the temperature of the hot water. He then pours 20 cm3 of the cold water into the beaker containing the hot water. He records the temperature of the mixture of hot and cold water and the volume V of cold water added. He then repeats the process four times until he has added a total of 100 cm3 of cold water. The table shows the readings.
V/
/
0
80.0
20
58.0
40
48.0
60
40.5
80
34.0
100
29.0
(i) Complete the column headings in the table.
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
[1]
For Examiner’s Use
3 (ii) Use the data in the table to plot a graph of temperature (y-axis) against volume V (x-axis).
0
20
40
60
80
For Examiner’s Use
100 V
/ cm3 [5]
Question 1 continues on page 4
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
[Turn over
4 (c) A sketch graph of the readings taken by another student carrying out a similar experiment is shown in Fig. 1.2. The theoretical line shows the results expected by the student after calculating the values of . The student assumed that all the heat lost by the hot water was gained by the cold water when the cold water was poured into the beaker. The other line shows the experimental results. 80
/C 70
60 theoretical line 50
experimental line
40
30 0
20
40
60
80
100 V / cm3
Fig. 1.2 The student carried out the experiment with care. Suggest a practical reason why the experimental line differs from the theoretical line. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
For Examiner’s Use
5 2
(a) The table below shows some measurements taken by three IGCSE students. The second column shows the values recorded by the three students. For each quantity, underline the value most likely to be correct. The first one is done for you. quantity measured
recorded values
thickness of a metre rule
0.25 mm
For Examiner’s Use
2.5 mm 25 mm volume of a test-tube
12 mm3 12 cm3 12 m3 0.5 A
current in a 12 V ray box lamp at less than normal brightness
5.0 A 50 A
the surface area of the base of a 250 cm3 beaker
0.3 cm2 3 cm2 30 cm2
the mass of a wooden metre rule
0.112 kg 1.12 kg 11.2 kg
the weight of an IGCSE student
6N 60 N 600 N [5]
(b) A student is to find a value of the resistance of a wire by experiment. Potential difference V and current I can be recorded. The resistance is then calculated using the equation V R = –– .
I
State, with a reason, one example of good experimental practice that the student could use to obtain a reliable result. statement ......................................................................................................................... reason ........................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
[Turn over
6 3
For Examiner’s Use
A student investigates the resistance of wire in different circuit arrangements. The circuit shown in Fig. 3.1 is used. power source
A A
B 10
20
30
40
C
50
60
70
D 80
90
crocodile clip
V
metre rule
Fig. 3.1 The student measures the current I in the wire. She then measures the p.d. V across AB, AC and AD. The student’s readings are shown in the table below.
I/A
V/V
AB
0.375
0.95
AC
0.375
1.50
AD
0.375
1.95
section of wire
l / cm
(a) Using Fig. 3.1, record in the table the length l of each section of wire.
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
R/
[1]
7 (b) On Fig. 3.2, show the positions of the pointers of the ammeter reading 0.375 A, and the voltmeter reading 1.50 V.
0.2
0.3 A
0.1
For Examiner’s Use
0.4
0
0.5
2 1
3 V
4
0
5
Fig. 3.2 [2] (c) Calculate the resistance R of the sections of wire AB, AC and AD using the equation V R = –– .
I
Record these values of R, to a suitable number of significant figures, in the table. (d) Complete the column heading for the R column of the table.
[2] [1]
(e) Use your results to predict the resistance of a 1.50 m length of the same wire. Show your working.
resistance = ...................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
[Turn over
8 4
For Examiner’s Use
A student investigates the period of oscillation of a mass attached between two springs. The apparatus used is shown in Fig. 4.1.
clamp
spring
mass
spring
clamp
Fig. 4.1 A 400 g mass m is attached between two springs, displaced a small distance downwards, and then released so that it oscillates. The time t taken for 10 complete oscillations of the mass is recorded. The experiment is repeated using values for m of 300 g and 200 g. The readings are shown in the table below.
m/g
t/s
400
9.0
300
7.8
200
6.3
T/s
T –– m
/
s –– g
(a) Calculate the period T of the oscillations. T is the time for one complete oscillation. Enter the values in the table. [2] T (b) Calculate and enter in the table the values of — . m
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
[2]
9 (c) The student suggests that T should be directly proportional to m. State with a reason whether the results in the table support this suggestion.
For Examiner’s Use
statement ......................................................................................................................... reason .............................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) In this experiment, the mass oscillates rapidly so that it is difficult to take the times accurately. A technique has been included in this experiment to obtain an accurate value for the period T. State, briefly, what this technique is and any calculation involved to obtain the T value. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (e) Another student carried out the same experiment using a wider range of masses. Suggest why, when the mass was 900 g, it could not oscillate freely. .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
[Turn over
10 5
For Examiner’s Use
A student investigates the refraction of light through a transparent block. He places the transparent block on a sheet of plain paper, largest face down, and draws a line round the block. He draws a line to represent an incident ray and places two pins W and X in the line. Fig. 5.1 shows the outline of the block and the incident ray.
W
A
X
D
B
C
Fig. 5.1 (a) On Fig. 5.1, draw a normal to line AB at the point where the incident ray meets the block. The incident ray is drawn on the diagram. The positions of the two pins W and X that mark the incident ray are shown. [1] (b) Measure the angle of incidence i. i = ........................................................
[1]
(c) Draw in the refracted ray with an angle of refraction of 20°. Continue this line until it meets the line CD. [2] (d) The ray emerges from the block in a direction that is parallel to the incident ray. Draw in this emergent ray. [2] (e) Two pins Y and Z are placed so that the pins W and X, viewed through the block, and the pins Y and Z all appear exactly in line with each other. Mark on the diagram, with the letters Y and Z, where you would place these two pins. [2] © UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
11 BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/05
12 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/06/M/J/05
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/06
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
October/November 2005 1 hour Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2
If you have been given a label, look at the details. If any details are incorrect or missing, please fill in your correct details in the space given at the top of this page.
3 4
Stick your personal label here, if provided.
5 Total
This document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. (SP) MML 8431 5/04 S82205/3 © UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2 1
For Examiner’s Use
The IGCSE class is investigating the effect of a load on a rule attached to a spring. The apparatus used is shown in Fig. 1.1. clamp metre rule spring
zero end of rule taped to bench mass bench Fig. 1.1 The rule has the zero end taped to the bench so that it does not slip. The rule is attached to a spring at the 40.0 cm mark. The students hang masses, starting with a 10 g mass, on the rule at the 90.0 cm mark. For each mass, they measure the angle between the rule and the bench. One student’s readings are shown in the table.
m/
/
0
29
10
28
20
26
30
25
40
22
50
19
(a) Complete the column headings in the table.
[1]
(b) A student suggests that should be directly proportional to m. State, with a reason, whether the readings in the table support this suggestion. statement ......................................................................................................................... reason .............................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
3
For Examiner’s Use
(c) A student carries out this experiment using the 360 ° protractor shown in Fig. 1.2.
50
60
80 70
90 100 1 10 12 0
13 0
40
0 14
10
20
30
70 60 1 0 1 15 40 02 23
0 32
350 0 40 03 33
180 190 20 0 2 10 22 0
260 270 280 290 250 300
31 0
Fig. 1.2 Explain how the student could use this protractor to measure the angle between the metre rule and the bench. You may draw a diagram if you wish.
.......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) The range of angles measured in this experiment may be quite small. Using the same apparatus and with the masses and spring in the same positions, suggest another method of investigating as reliably as possible the extent by which the rule is pulled down by the masses. This method must not use a protractor but an additional rule may be used. You may draw a diagram if you wish.
.......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] © UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
[Turn over
4 2
An IGCSE student investigates the resistance of resistance wire ABCD in three different circuit arrangements. The circuits are shown in Fig. 2.1. power source
A circuit (i)
B
A
D
C V
power source
A circuit (ii)
A
B
C V
power source
circuit (iii)
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
D
For Examiner’s Use
5 (a) Circuit (iii) is the same as circuit (ii) but with an additional connecting lead between A and D.
For Examiner’s Use
On Fig. 2.1, complete the circuit diagram for circuit (iii) using the standard symbol for a resistor to represent each section AB, BC and CD of the resistance wire. [3] (b) The student measures and records the current I and the p.d. V in each circuit. The student’s readings are shown in the table.
circuit
I/
V/
(i)
0.91
1.80
(ii)
0.45
1.80
(iii)
1.37
1.85
R/
(i) Complete the column headings for each of the I, V and R columns of the table. [1] (ii) Calculate the resistance R for each circuit using the equation V R = –– .
I
Record in the table the values of R to an appropriate number of significant figures. [2] (c) Look at the resistance values for circuits (i) and (ii). The sections of resistance wire AB, BC and CD are all of the same length. Suggest a value for the resistance of the whole wire ABCD. Explain briefly how you obtained your value. value ................................................................................................................................ explanation ...................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
[Turn over
6 3
The IGCSE class carries out an experiment to investigate the effect of insulation on the rate of cooling of hot water. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 3.1.
thermometer
thermometer
insulation
water
water
beaker A
bench
beaker B Fig. 3.1
The students each have two glass beakers A and B. Beaker B is insulated. They also have a supply of hot water. A student pours hot water into beaker A until it is approximately two thirds full and then measures the temperature of the hot water. He records this temperature in the table at time t = 0 s. He then starts a stopwatch and records the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals for a total of four minutes. He repeats the experiment using beaker B. All the readings are shown in the tables below. beaker A
/
t/
© UCLES 2005
beaker B
/
t/
0
80
0
80
30
67
30
69
60
59
60
62
90
54
90
57
120
51
120
53
150
48
150
50
180
47
180
48
210
46
210
47
240
45
240
46
0625/06/O/N/05
For Examiner’s Use
7 (a) Complete the column headings in the tables.
[1]
For Examiner’s Use
(b) Use the readings for beaker A to plot a graph of temperature (y-axis) against time t (x-axis). Start the temperature scale at 40 °C. Draw the best-fit curve. [4]
0
20
40
60
80
100 120 140 160 180 200 220
240 260
280 t/s
(c) Use the readings for beaker B to plot another curve on the same graph axes that you used in part (b). [2] (d) The experiment you have just done was designed to investigate the effect of insulation on the rate of cooling. Suggest two improvements that could be made to the design of the experiment. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
[Turn over
8 4
For Examiner’s Use
An IGCSE student is investigating the reflection of light by a plane mirror. M
M'
A
B card Fig. 4.1
On Fig. 4.1, the line MM' shows the position of the mirror that is standing on a sheet of paper. The reflecting surface of the mirror is vertical. AB is a card that is standing vertically and is parallel to the reflecting surface of the mirror. (a) Draw a normal to the mirror such that the edge B of the card lies on the normal.
[1]
(b) Measure the distance x along the normal between the line MM' and the edge B of the card. x = ......................................................... [1] (c) Draw a line from the edge A of the card to the point where the normal meets the line MM'. This represents an incident ray from the edge of the card. [1] (d) Measure the angle i between the incident ray and the normal. i = .......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
9
For Examiner’s Use
x (e) Calculate the ratio –– where y = 5.0 cm, the length of the card. y x –– = ................................................... y (f)
[2]
The angle of reflection is to be determined as accurately as possible. On Fig. 4.1, mark with the letters X, Y and Z the points where the student would place three pins in order to plot the reflected ray. [4]
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
[Turn over
10 5
(a) The IGCSE class carries out an experiment to investigate the rate of cooling from 100 °C of a range of hot liquids. Underline any of the following variables that are likely to have a significant effect on the temperature readings. (You may underline one, two or all three of the suggested variables.) type and size of container volume of liquid temperature of the surroundings
[2]
(b) In an experiment to find the resistance of a wire, the students record the current in the wire and the potential difference across it. They then calculate the resistance. Underline any of the following variables that are likely to have a significant effect on the current and/or potential difference readings. (You may underline one, two or all three of the suggested variables.) atmospheric pressure temperature of the wire length of wire
[2]
(c) In an experiment, a short pendulum oscillates rapidly. A student is asked to find the period of oscillation T of the pendulum using a stopwatch. The student sets the pendulum swinging and records the time for one oscillation. A technique for improving the accuracy of the value obtained for the period T should be used in this experiment. State, briefly, what this technique is and any calculation involved to obtain the value of T. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
For Examiner’s Use
11 BLANK PAGE
0625/06/O/N/05
12 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/06
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
May/June 2006 1 hour Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 Total This document consists of 12 printed pages. MML 10813 4/05 T06423/2 © UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2 1
For Examiner’s Use
The IGCSE class is determining the density of a sample of card. Each student has a stack of ten pieces of card, as shown in Fig. 1.1. w
h
l
Fig. 1.1 (a)
(i) On Fig. 1.1, measure the height h of the stack of card. h = ................................................... [1] (ii) Calculate the average thickness t of one piece of card.
t = .................................................... [2] (b)
(i) On Fig. 1.1, measure the length l and width w of the top piece of card. l = .......................................................... w = ................................................... [1] (ii) Calculate the volume V of one piece of card using the equation V = ltw .
V = ................................................... [2] © UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
3
For Examiner’s Use
(c) Calculate the density d of the card using the equation m d = –– V where the mass m of one piece of card is 1.3 g.
d = ................................................... [2] (d) A sample of corrugated card of the same length and width as the card in Fig. 1.1 consists of two thin sheets of card with an air gap in between. The sheets of card are separated by paper, as shown in the cross-section in Fig. 1.2. The thickness y of the air gap as shown in Fig. 1.2 is between 2 mm and 3 mm. card
y
paper
card Fig. 1.2 Estimate the volume Va of air trapped within the corrugated card shown in Fig. 1.2.
Va = ................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
[Turn over
4 2
The IGCSE class is investigating the resistance of lamps in different circuit arrangements. Fig. 2.1 shows a picture of the circuit.
power source
variable resistor
lamp
0-2 V voltmeter 0-1 A ammeter
Fig. 2.1 (a) Draw a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in Fig. 2.1. Use standard circuit symbols.
[3]
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
For Examiner’s Use
5 (b) The current I through the lamp and the voltage V across the lamp are measured. Then a second lamp is connected in parallel with the first. The total current I in the circuit and the voltage V across the lamps are measured. The table below shows the readings.
I/
V/
0.24
1.39
0.45
1.30
For Examiner’s Use
R/
(i) Complete the column headings for each of the I, V and R columns of the table. [1] (ii) Calculate the resistance R in each case using the equation V R = –– .
I
Enter the results in the table.
© UCLES 2006
[2]
0625/06/M/J/06
[Turn over
6 3
The IGCSE class is determining the refractive index of the material of a transparent block. Fig. 3.1. shows the drawing that a student makes.
E P1
N
P2
F
A
D
B
C
G P3
N
P4
sheet of plain paper eye Fig. 3.1
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
For Examiner’s Use
7 The student places two pins P1 and P2 on line EF to mark an incident ray. Then she places the block on the paper and observes the images of P1 and P2 through side CD of the block so that the images of P1 and P2 appear one behind the other. She places two pins P3 and P4 between her eye and the block so that P3 and P4 and the images of P1 and P2, seen through the block, appear one behind the other. (a)
For Examiner’s Use
(i) Draw a line joining the positions of P3 and P4. Continue the line until it meets CD. Label this point H. (ii) Measure the distance a between G and H. a = ................................................... [1] (iii) Draw the line HF. (iv) Measure the length b of the line HF. b = ................................................... [1] (v) Extend the straight line EF within the outline of the block to a point I. The distance FI must be exactly equal to b. (vi) From I draw a line that meets NN at a right angle. Label this position J. (vii) Measure the length c of the line JI. c = .................................................... [3] (viii) Calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation c n = –– . a
n = ................................................... [2] (b) Suggest two improvements you would make to this experiment to ensure an accurate result for the refractive index n. 1 ....................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2 ....................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
[Turn over
8 4
An IGCSE student is investigating the temperature rise of water in beakers heated by different methods. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 4.1. Beaker A is heated electrically and beaker B is heated with a Bunsen burner. fixed voltage power source
A V
beaker A
beaker B
Bunsen burner
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
For Examiner’s Use
9
For Examiner’s Use
The student first records room temperature. (a) Fig. 4.2 shows the thermometer at room temperature.
—10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100 110
o
C
Fig. 4.2 (i) Write down the value of room temperature. room temperature = ......................... [1] (ii) The two beakers are heated from room temperature for the same length of time. The new water temperature for beaker A is 30 °C and for beaker B is 28 °C. Calculate the temperature rise of the water in each beaker. temperature rise in beaker A = ............................... temperature rise in beaker B = ......................... [1] (b) The electrical heater and the Bunsen burner both have the same power and both beakers were heated from room temperature for the same length of time. Suggest why there is a difference in temperature rise between beaker A and beaker B. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) In order to keep the heating effect of the electrical heater constant throughout the heating period, the student adjusts the current. Name the component in the circuit that the student uses for this purpose. .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
[Turn over
10 5
For Examiner’s Use
The IGCSE class is determining the weight of a metre rule. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 5.1.
N
newton meter
metre rule
pivot
bench Fig. 5.1 A metre rule is supported at one end by a pivot through the 1.0 cm mark. The other end is supported at the 91.0 cm mark by a newton meter hanging from a clamp. (a) Describe how you would check that the metre rule is horizontal. You may draw a diagram if you wish.
.......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
11 (b) The students record the force F shown on the newton meter and the distance d from the pivot to the 91 cm mark. They then repeat the experiment several times using a range of values of the distance d. The readings are shown in the table.
F/N
d/m
0.74
0.900
0.78
0.850
0.81
0.800
0.86
0.750
0.92
0.700
1 –– d
/
1 –– m
1 Calculate and record in the table the values of –– . d (c)
For Examiner’s Use
1 (i) On the graph grid below, plot a graph of F / N (y-axis) against –– d Start the y-axis at 0.7 and the x-axis at 1.0.
(ii) Draw the line of best fit on your graph.
[1]
/
1 –– (x-axis). m [2]
[2]
Question 5 continues on the next page.
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
[Turn over
12
For Examiner’s Use
(iii) Determine the gradient G of the line.
G = ................................................... [3] (d) Calculate the weight of the metre rule using the equation G W = –– k where k = 0.490 m.
W = .................................................. [2]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
0625/06
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
October/November 2006 1 hour Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 Total This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. MML 10815 4/05 T06425/2 © UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2 1
The IGCSE class is determining the density of a type of wood. The students are provided with a bundle of wooden rods, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
l
Fig. 1.1 (a) On Fig. 1.1, measure the length l of a rod. l = ............................................... cm [1] (b) A student winds five turns of string round the bundle and marks the beginning and the end of the five turns. She then uses the metre rule to measure the distance x between the marks. She records that x = 24.5 cm. (i) Determine the circumference c of the bundle of rods. c = .......................................................... (ii) Calculate the volume V of the bundle of rods using the equation 2 V = c––l . 4
V = ................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
For Examiner’s Use
3 (c) The equation used in (b)(ii) assumes that the bundle is a solid cylinder. However, there are air gaps between the rods.
For Examiner’s Use
(i) Estimate the total volume Vr of the rods themselves.
Vr = ........................................................ (ii) Calculate the density d of the wood using the equation m d = –– Vr where the mass m of the bundle = 6.3 g.
d = ................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
[Turn over
4 2
The IGCSE class is investigating the swing of a loaded metre rule. The arrangement of the apparatus is shown in Fig. 2.1.
pivot
metre rule d
load
one complete swing
Fig. 2.1 The load is attached to the metre rule so that its centre is 90.0 cm from the pivot. The rule is displaced a small distance to one side and allowed to swing. The time t taken for 10 complete swings is recorded. This is repeated using different values of the distance d. The readings are shown in the table.
© UCLES 2006
d/
t/
90.0
18.35
85.0
17.87
80.0
17.53
75.0
17.06
70.0
16.72
0625/06/O/N/06
T/
For Examiner’s Use
5 (a) Complete the column headings in the table.
[1]
For Examiner’s Use
(b) Calculate the period T for each value of d. The period is the time taken for one complete swing. Enter the values in the table. [2] (c) On the grid below, plot a graph of T / s (y-axis) against d / cm (x-axis). Start the x-axis at d = 70.0 cm and the y-axis at a suitable value of T / s to make best use of the graph grid. [5]
(d) A student suggests that T is proportional to d. State whether or not the results support this suggestion and give a reason for your answer. statement ......................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... reason .............................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (e) Explain why the student takes the time for ten swings and then calculates the time for one swing (the period), rather than just measuring the time for one swing. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
[Turn over
6 3
The IGCSE class is investigating reflection in a plane mirror. Fig. 3.1 shows a ray diagram that a student is constructing. paper
G E
F mirror
K
J
eye
Fig. 3.1
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
For Examiner’s Use
7 (a)
For Examiner’s Use
(i) Draw a normal GH to line EF. (ii) Mark a point A on line GJ so that the distance AG is 11.5 cm. (iii) Measure the angle of incidence i between line GJ and the normal. i = ..................................................... [3]
(b) The student pushes two pins into the paper on line GJ, one at point A, and the other at a point B nearer to the mirror. He views the images of the pins from the direction indicated in Fig. 3.1. He then pushes in two pins on line GK between his eye and the mirror so that these two pins and the images of the pins on line GJ appear exactly one behind the other. (i) On Fig. 3.1, mark suitable positions for the pins on lines GJ and GK. Label the marks with letters B, C and D. (ii) To obtain an accurate result for this experiment, would you view the tops, bases or central parts of the pins when lining them up? Give a reason for your answer. I would view .............................................................................................................. reason ...................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
[Turn over
8 4
The IGCSE class is investigating conditions affecting the rate of cooling of a beaker of hot water. (a) The students start by measuring room temperature. Record the value of room temperature as shown on the thermometer in Fig. 4.1. —10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100 110
o
C
Fig. 4.1 temperature = .................................. [2] (b) The students are provided with hot water in beakers as shown in Fig. 4.2. Beaker A is insulated and beaker B has a lid. thermometer
thermometer
lid
insulation
water
Beaker A
water
Beaker B Fig. 4.2
The students measure and record the temperature θ of the water in each beaker every 30 s for a total of five minutes. One student’s readings are shown in the tables.
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
For Examiner’s Use
9 beaker A time / s
For Examiner’s Use
beaker B
θ / °C
time / s
θ / °C
0
83.0
0
82.0
30
82.0
30
82.0
60
81.0
60
81.0
90
79.5
90
80.0
120
79.0
120
79.0
150
77.0
150
78.0
180
75.0
180
76.0
210
74.0
210
75.0
240
72.0
240
74.0
270
71.0
270
73.0
300
70.0
300
72.0
(i) Look at the temperature readings in the tables. State whether the insulation round beaker A or the lid on beaker B or neither is most effective in keeping the water hot. By reference to readings in the tables, justify your answer. statement ................................................................................................................. justification ............................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................ [2] (ii) Suggest a suitable material for the insulation around beaker A. ............................................................................................................................ [1] (iii) To obtain reliable results in this experiment, it is important that variables are controlled. State three variables that should be controlled in this experiment. variable 1 .................................................................................................................. variable 2 .................................................................................................................. variable 3 ............................................................................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
[Turn over
10 5
A student is investigating the relationship between potential difference V across a resistor and the current I in it. Fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus that the student is using.
switch
power source
variable resistor
lamp resistor
ammeter voltmeter Fig. 5.1 (a) Draw the circuit diagram of the circuit shown in Fig. 5.1. Use standard circuit symbols.
[3] (b) The student is using a lamp to show when the current is switched on. Why is it unnecessary to use the lamp? .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
For Examiner’s Use
11 (c) State which piece of apparatus in the circuit is used to control the size of the current. .................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) The student removes the lamp from the circuit. He is told that the resistance of a conductor is constant if the temperature of the conductor is constant. He knows that the current in the resistor has a heating effect. Suggest two ways in which the student could minimise the heating effect of the current in the resistor. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ................................................................................................................................ [2] (e) Fig. 5.2 shows a variable resistor with the sliding contact in two different positions. sliding contact in position A
metal bar
coil of resistance wire sliding contact in position B
metal bar
coil of resistance wire
Fig. 5.2 State which position, A or B, shows the higher resistance setting. Explain your answer. statement ............................................ explanation ...................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
For Examiner’s Use
12 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/06/O/N/06
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*4019966178*
0625/06
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
May/June 2007 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE ON ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 Total
This document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. MML 13215 4/06 T25816/4 © UCLES 2007
[Turn over
2 1
The IGCSE class is investigating the temperature changes that occur when hot and cold water are mixed. (a) A student pours 50 cm3 of water into a beaker. He then measures the temperature 1 of the water in the beaker. Write down the value of 1 shown on the thermometer in Fig. 1.1.
110
°C
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
–10
Fig. 1.1
1 = ................................................. [2] (b) The student then measures the temperature 2 of some hot water. He pours 50 cm3 of this hot water into the beaker of water at room temperature. He then records the temperature 3 of the water in the beaker. His readings are
2 = 76 °C, 3 = 42 °C. Calculate (i)
the temperature rise of the cold water, ......................................
(ii)
the temperature fall of the hot water. ......................................... [2]
(c) A theoretical calculation based on the equation thermal energy lost by hot water = thermal energy gained by cold water predicts a higher value for the temperature 3 than the value that is obtained by this experiment. Suggest (i)
a practical explanation for the difference in values, ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
two practical improvements that you could make to the procedure for this experiment to obtain a result that is closer to the theoretical result. 1. .............................................................................................................................. 2. ........................................................................................................................ [3] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
3 2
A student is investigating the position of a sheet of card that is hanging from a pivot. Fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus drawn full size.
stand
metre rule pivot pointer
card
h0
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
mass
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
[Turn over
4 (a) On Fig. 2.1 measure the distance d between the centre of the hole labelled 1 and the edge of the card at A. Record this value in the table. hole
d / mm
h / mm
1
140
2
135
3
132
4
128
5
124
6
120
b / mm
[3] (b) Repeat step (a) for each of the remaining holes 2 – 6. (c) On Fig. 2.1 measure the height h0 of the pointer above the bench. h0 = ..................................................... [1] (d) A student hangs a 10 g mass from the hole 1 in the card. She records the height h of the end of the pointer above the bench. She then repeats this procedure by hanging the mass from each hole in turn. Her results are shown in the table above. (e) Calculate the differences in heights b using the equation b = (h – h0) and record the results in the table above.
© UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
For Examiner’s Use
5 (f)
Plot the graph of b / mm (y-axis) against d / mm (x-axis). 45
b / mm 40
35
30
25
20 [4] (g) The student suggests that b is directly proportional to d. By reference to your graph, state whether or not the results support the student’s suggestion. Give a reason for your answer. Statement ........................................................................................................................ Reason ............................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (h) It is important when recording the heights that the rule is vertical. State briefly how you would check that the rule is vertical. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 11]
© UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
[Turn over
6 3
The IGCSE class is investigating the resistance of a wire. The circuit is as shown in Fig. 3.1. power source
A
A
B
C
D V Fig. 3.1
(a) A student uses the switches to connect the wire AB into the circuit and records the p.d. V across the wire between A and B. He also records the current I in the wire. The student then repeats the measurements using the wire CD in place of wire AB. The readings are shown in the table below. wire
V/
I/
AB
1.9
0.24
CD
1.9
0.96
R/
[3] (i)
Calculate the resistance R of each wire, using the equation R = V / I. Record the values in the table.
(ii)
© UCLES 2007
Complete the column headings in the table.
0625/06/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
7 (b) The two wires AB and CD are made of the same material and are of the same length. The diameter of wire CD is twice the diameter of wire AB. (i)
For Examiner’s Use
Look at the results in the table. Below are four possible relationships between R and the diameter d of the wire. Tick the relationship that best matches the results. R is proportional to d R is proportional to
1 d
R is proportional to d 2 R is proportional to
(ii)
1 d2
Explain briefly how the results support your answer in part (b)(i). .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) Following this experiment, the student wishes to investigate whether two lamps in parallel with each other have a smaller combined resistance than the two lamps in series. Draw one circuit diagram showing (i)
two lamps in parallel with each other connected to a power source,
(ii)
an ammeter to measure the total current in the circuit,
(iii)
a voltmeter to measure the potential difference across the two lamps.
[3] [Total: 8] © UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
8 4
The IGCSE class is investigating the formation of images by a lens. Fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus that is being used. illuminated object
screen lens
x d Fig. 4.1 (a) A student places the screen at a distance d = 0.800 m from the illuminated object. She adjusts the position of the lens until a clearly focused magnified image is formed on the screen. She measures the distance x between the centre of the lens and the screen. Without moving the illuminated object or the screen, she moves the lens towards the screen until a second clearly focused (but diminished) image is formed on the screen. She measures the distance y between the centre of the lens and the screen. She repeats the experiment with the distance d increased to 0.900 m. The readings are shown in the table.
(i)
x/m
y/m
d/m
0.205
0.600
0.800
0.180
0.720
0.900
For each set of readings calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f=
xy . d
Enter the values in the table.
© UCLES 2007
f/m
0625/06/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
9 (ii)
Calculate the average value of the focal length f.
average value of the focal length f = ................................................ [4] (b) Suggest two precautions that can be taken in this experiment in order to obtain an accurate result. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) The illuminated object is triangular in shape, as shown in Fig. 4.2.
Fig. 4.2 In the space below, sketch the appearance of one of the images on the screen.
[1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
[Turn over
10 5
(a) An IGCSE student is investigating the relationship between the extension of a spring of unstretched length l 0 and the load hung on the spring. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 5.1 below. The spring is shown larger than its actual size.
clamp
l0
set of ten 0.1 N weights
Fig. 5.1 Consider the readings that the student should take and write appropriate column headings, with units, in the table below. l 0 = 25 mm
0.0
25
0
0.1
30
5
0.2
36
11
0.3
43
18
0.4
50
25 [4]
(b) The student decides to repeat the experiment using a spring made of a different metal in order to study how the extension may be affected by the metal from which the spring is made. To make a fair comparison, other variables must be kept constant. Suggest three variables that the student should keep constant. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... 3. ................................................................................................................................ [3] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
For Examiner’s Use
11 BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/07
12 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/06/M/J/07
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*6786650342*
0625/06
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
October/November 2007 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 Total
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. SPA (MML 13215 4/06) T25854/5 © UCLES 2007
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
2 1
The IGCSE class is investigating the rate of cooling of hot water. (a) A student measures room temperature. Write down the value of room temperature θ0 shown on the thermometer in Fig. 1.1.
110
°C
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
–10
Fig. 1.1
θ0 = ................................................. [1] (b) He then pours hot water into a beaker until it is about two-thirds full. He measures and records the temperature θ of the hot water and at the same time starts a stopwatch. As the water cools, he records the temperature every 30 s for a total of five minutes. His readings are shown in the table below.
θ/
t/ 0
68.0
30
53.0
60
45.0
90
40.0
120
36.5
150
33.5
180
32.0
210
30.0
240
29.0
270
28.5
300
28.0
(i)
Complete the column headings in the table.
(ii)
Calculate the temperature fall T1 in the first minute of the experiment. T1 = ....................................................
(iii)
Calculate the temperature fall T2 in the final minute of the experiment. T2 = ....................................................
© UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
[3]
3 (c) Theory suggests that the rate of cooling of the hot water at any time depends on the difference between the temperature of the water at that time and room temperature. (i)
For Examiner’s Use
State and explain whether your answers in (b) support this theory. Statement ................................................................................................................. Explanation .............................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Suggest three variables that you would attempt to keep constant if this theory were to be investigated further. 1. ............................................................................................................................... 2. ............................................................................................................................... 3. ......................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) Suggest one addition you could make to the apparatus provided in order to reduce the rate of evaporation of the water in the beaker. .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
4 2
The IGCSE class is investigating a simple balance. The diagram below shows the apparatus. metre rule
stand
pivot pointer
hook
150 mm 140 mm 130 mm
paper clip
120 mm 110 mm 100 mm
card
90 mm 80 mm 70 mm 60 mm 50 mm 40 mm 30 mm 20 mm 10 mm 0 mm
Fig. 2.1 (a) A student records the height h0 of the pointer above the bench. She then hangs a paper clip on the hook and records the new height h of the pointer above the bench. Next she records the heights of the pointer above the bench using different numbers N of paper clips. The readings are shown in the table below. h0 = 100 mm
© UCLES 2007
N
h / mm
1
108
2
114
3
120
4
125
5
134
6
141
0625/06/O/N/07
d / mm
For Examiner’s Use
5 Calculate the height differences d using the equation d = (h – h0) and enter them in the table. (b) (i)
(ii)
[2]
Plot the graph of d / mm (y-axis) against N (x-axis).
Use your graph to predict the value of d if a nail with the same mass as 4.6 paper clips were to be hung from the hook in place of the paper clips. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained your value. d = ................................................. [6] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
[Turn over
6 3
The IGCSE class is investigating the potential difference across lamps and the currents in the lamps. Fig. 3.1 shows the circuit that is being used. power source
A lamp 1 lamp 2 lamp 3
Fig. 3.1 (a) A student uses the ammeter to record the current I in the wire connecting the power source to the rest of the circuit. He then moves the ammeter to new positions in the circuit and measures the current in each lamp in turn. The positions of the pointer on the ammeter scale are shown below. (i)
(ii)
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.1
0.4
0.4 A
A 0
0
0.5
current I = .............................................. (iii)
0.5
current I1 in lamp 1 = ............................. (iv)
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.1 0
0.3
0.1
0.4
0.4 A
A 0
0.5
current I2 in lamp 2 = .............................
0.5
current I3 in lamp 3 = .............................
Write down the ammeter readings I, I1, I2 and I3. © UCLES 2007
0.3
0625/06/O/N/07
[3]
For Examiner’s Use
7 (b) Theory suggests that I = I1 + I2 + I3. State whether or not your readings support this theory. Give a reason for your answer.
For Examiner’s Use
Statement ........................................................................................................................ Reason ............................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) To test the theory further, you would need to vary the value of I. State how you would vary I. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) The student uses a voltmeter to measure the potential difference V across the lamps. His reading is V = 1.6 V. (i)
Calculate the resistance R of the lamps arranged in parallel, using the equation R = V / I, where I is the value of the current in (a)(i).
R = ..................................................... (ii)
On Fig. 3.1, add the symbol for the voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across the lamps. [3] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
[Turn over
8 4
The IGCSE class is investigating the refraction of light through a transparent block. Fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus used. eye
transparent block
h
optics pin
x
sheet of paper
Fig. 4.1 (a) A student looks down through the transparent block at the image of a line drawn on the sheet of paper. She carefully places the point of the optics pin exactly in line with the image. (i)
On Fig. 4.1, measure the vertical distance x between the paper and the pin. x = .....................................................
(ii)
On Fig. 4.1, measure the height h of the transparent block. h = .....................................................
(iii)
Calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation h n = ––––– . h –x
n = ................................................ [5]
© UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
For Examiner’s Use
9 (b) To obtain a reliable value for the vertical distance x between the paper and the pin, it is important that the pin is horizontal. Explain briefly with the aid of a diagram how you would check that the pin is horizontal.
For Examiner’s Use
.......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
[Turn over
10 5
(a) An IGCSE student is investigating the differences in density of small pieces of different rocks. She is using an electronic balance to measure the mass of each sample and using the ‘displacement method’ to determine the volume of each sample. Fig. 5.1 shows the displacement method. cm3
cm3
100
100
80
80
60
60
40
40
20
20
V1
rock sample
V2 Fig. 5.1
(i)
Write down the volume shown in each measuring cylinder. V1 = ..................................................... V2 = .....................................................
(ii)
Calculate the volume V of the rock sample.
V = ..................................................... (iii)
Calculate the density of sample A using the equation density =
m V
––– ,
where the mass m of the sample of rock is 109 g.
density = ..................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
For Examiner’s Use
11 (b) The table shows the readings that the student obtains for samples of rocks B and C. Complete the table by (i)
inserting the appropriate column headings with units,
(ii)
calculating the densities using the equation density =
sample
m/g
B
193
84
50
34
C
130
93
50
43
m V
––– .
V/
density /
[4] (c) Explain briefly how you would determine the density of sand grains. .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
For Examiner’s Use
12 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/06/O/N/07
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*4130189347*
0625/06
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
May/June 2008 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 Total
This document consists of 12 printed pages and 4 blank pages. SP (SLM/CGW) T40877/4 © UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2 1
An IGCSE student is determining the density of a solid metal cylinder using a balancing method. Fig. 1.1. shows the apparatus. metre rule
a
bench
b
cylinder
pivot Fig. 1.1
He places the cylinder on the metre rule so that its centre is directly above the 10.0 cm mark. The rule is placed on the pivot so that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced. He measures and records the distance a from the centre of the rule to the pivot and the distance b from the centre of the cylinder to the pivot. He repeats the experiment with the same cylinder at different positions on the rule. The readings are shown in Table 1.1. Table 1.1 a/
(a) (i) (ii)
b/
12.6
27.4
11.0
24.0
9.5
20.5
M/
Complete the column headings in Table 1.1. For each set of readings, calculate the mass M of the cylinder using the equation M=
ka . b
The value of k is the mass of the rule which is 108 g.
Enter the results in Table 1.1. [3]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) The cylinder completely covers the marks on the metre rule. Describe, with the aid of a diagram, how you would judge that the centre of the cylinder is directly above the 10.0 cm mark.
.......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [1] (c) Use your answers in Table 1.1 to calculate and record the average of the three values for M. Show your working.
average value for M = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
4 (d) Fig. 1.2 shows the cylinder placed flat on the bench and viewed from one side.
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 1.2 (i)
On the diagram, measure the diameter d and the thickness t of the cylinder. d = ...................................................... t = ......................................................
(ii)
Calculate the volume V of the cylinder using the equation 2 V = πd t . 4
V = ...................................................... (iii)
Calculate the density ρ of the cylinder using the equation
ρ = M. V
ρ = .................................................. [3] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
5 BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/08
[Turn over
6 2
The IGCSE class is comparing the combined resistance of resistors in different circuit arrangements. The first circuit is shown in Fig. 2.1. power source
A
V A
B
Circuit 1
Fig. 2.1 (a) The current I in the circuit and the p.d. V across the three resistors are measured and recorded. Three more circuit arrangements are used. For each arrangement, a student disconnects the resistors and then reconnects them between points A and B as shown in Figs. 2.2–2.4. A
B Circuit 2
Fig. 2.2 A
B
A
B
Circuit 3
Circuit 4
Fig. 2.3
Fig. 2.4
The voltage and current readings are shown in the Table 2.1. Table 2.1 Circuit
(i)
I/
V/
R/
1
1.87
1.68
2
1.84
0.84
3
1.87
0.37
4
1.91
0.20
Complete the column headings for each of the V, I and R columns of Table 2.1.
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
For Examiner’s Use
7 (ii)
For each circuit, calculate the combined resistance R of the three resistors using the equation R = V. I
Record these values of R in Table 2.1.
[3]
(b) Theory suggests that, if all three resistors have the same resistance under all conditions, the combined resistance in circuit 1 will be one half of the combined resistance in circuit 2. (i)
State whether, within the limits of experimental accuracy, your results support this theory. Justify your answer by reference to the results. statement .................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................. (ii)
Suggest one precaution you could take to ensure that the readings are as accurate as possible. .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. [3] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
8 3
A student is investigating the effect of surface area exposed to the air on the rate of cooling of hot water.
thermometer
thermometer 100 cm3
beaker
water
100 cm3
measuring cylinder
water A
B Fig. 3.1
The student is provided with two containers. The beaker is labelled A and the measuring cylinder is labelled B. Each container contains 100 cm3 of hot water. He records the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals for a total of four minutes. Table 3.1 shows the readings of time t and temperature θ. Table 3.1 container A (beaker)
container B (measuring cylinder)
θ / °C
θ / °C
0
85
85
30
76
79
60
68
74
90
63
69
120
59
66
150
56
63
180
54
61
210
52
59
240
51
58
t /s
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
For Examiner’s Use
9 (a) (i)
Use the data in Table 3.1 to plot a graph of θ / °C (y-axis) against t /s (x-axis) for the beaker. Draw the best-fit curve.
(ii)
Use the data for the measuring cylinder to plot another curve on the same graph axes that you used for part (a)(i).
0
20
40
60
80
100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 t /s [6]
(b) The experiment is designed to investigate the effect of the surface area exposed to the air on the rate of cooling. State briefly the effect of a larger surface area on the rate of cooling. Justify your answer by reference to your graph. statement .......................................................................................................................... justification ........................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
10 4
A student is determining a quantity called the refractive index of the material of a transparent block. Fig. 4.1 shows the ray-tracing sheet that the student is producing. ABCD is the outline of the transparent block, drawn on the ray-tracing sheet.
A
B
D
C P3
P4
Fig. 4.1 (a) (i)
Draw the normal NN' to side AB, extended to cross side DC, so that the normal is 2.0 cm from A. Label the point F where NN' crosses AB. Label the point G where NN' crosses DC.
(ii)
Draw the line EF at an angle of 30° to the normal and to the left of the normal NN'. E is a point outside the block and above AB on the ray-tracing sheet. [3]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
For Examiner’s Use
11 (b) Read the following passage, taken from the student’s notebook and then answer the questions that follow.
I placed two pins P1 and P2 on line EF. I observed the images of P1 and P2 through side CD of the block so that the images of P1 and P2 appeared one behind the other. I placed two more pins P3 and P4 between my eye and the block so that P3, P4 and the images of P1 and P2, seen through the block, appeared one behind the other. I marked the positions of P1, P2, P3 and P4.
(i)
Draw a line joining the positions of P3 and P4. Continue the line until it meets CD. Label this point H.
(ii)
Measure and record the length a of the line GH. a = ......................................................
(iii)
Draw the line HF.
(iv)
Measure and record the length b of the line HF. b = .................................................. [3]
(c) Extend the straight line EF through the outline of the block to a point J. The point J must be at least 5 cm from the block. The line EJ crosses the line CD. Label this point K. (i)
Measure and record the length c of the line GK. c = ......................................................
(ii)
Measure and record the length d of the line FK. d = ......................................................
(iii)
Calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation n=
cb . ad
n = .................................................. [3] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
12 5
An IGCSE student has carried out a timing experiment using a simple pendulum. She plotted a graph of T 2/s2 against l /m. T is the time for one swing of the pendulum and l is the length of the pendulum. The graph is shown below. 5
4
3 T 2 / s2 2
1
0
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.1
l /m (a) (i)
Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
G = ...................................................... (ii)
Calculate the acceleration g of free fall using the equation 2 g = 4π . G
g = ...............................................m/s2 (iii)
The student could have calculated the acceleration of free fall g from just one set of readings. State the purpose of taking sufficient readings to plot a graph. .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. [5]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
For Examiner’s Use
13 (b) The student next studies the relationship between the mass m of the pendulum and the time for one swing T. The readings are shown in Table 5.1. Table 5.1
(i)
m /g
T /s
50
1.58
100
1.60
150
1.61
200
1.57
250
1.59
Suggest two variables that must be kept constant to make the experiment a fair test. 1. .............................................................................................................................. 2. ..............................................................................................................................
(ii)
Study the readings in the table and complete the following sentence. Within the limits of experimental accuracy, the readings show that the mass m of the pendulum ....................................................................................................... [3] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
For Examiner’s Use
14 BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/08
15 BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/08
16 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/06/M/J/08
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*2092097264*
0625/06
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
October/November 2008 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 Total
This document consists of 12 printed pages. SP (SLM/CGW) T73783/6 R © UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2 1
An IGCSE student is determining the density of the metal from which a load is made. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 1.1. 0
metre rule
spring S0 beaker
water bench Fig. 1.1 (a) The student records the scale reading S0 on the metre rule at the bottom of the spring, as shown in Fig. 1.1. S0 = 37.4 cm Describe briefly how the student can avoid a parallax error when taking the scale reading. .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) He then hangs the load on the spring as shown in Fig. 1. 2. He records the new scale reading S1. metre rule
0
spring S1
load
bench Fig. 1.2 S1 = 40.5 cm (i)
Calculate the extension e1 of the spring using the equation e1 = (S1 – S0).
e1 = ...................................................... The student carefully raises the beaker under the load until it is completely under water. The load does not touch the sides or base of the beaker. He records the new scale reading S2. S2 = 39.8 cm (ii)
Calculate the extension e2 of the spring using the equation e2 = (S2 – S0).
e2 = ...................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
4 (c) Calculate the density ρ of the material of the load using the equation
ρ=
e1 (e1 – e2)
For Examiner’s Use
×k
where k = 1.00 g/cm3.
ρ = ................................................... [3] (d) A second load, made from the same material and with the same mass, is too long to be completely submerged in the water. Suggest whether (i)
the value obtained for e2 would be greater, smaller or the same as that obtained in part (b) (ii), ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
the value obtained for ρ would be greater, smaller or the same as that obtained in part (c). .................................................................................................................................. [2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
5 2
The IGCSE class is investigating the potential difference across, and the current in, wires. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 2.1. power source
A
V
A
S
C
B D
Fig. 2.1 (a) Draw a circuit diagram of the apparatus. Use standard circuit symbols. (The circuit includes two identical resistance wires AB and CD. Use the standard symbol for a resistance to represent each of these wires.) This circuit is called circuit 1.
[3]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
6 For circuit 1, the student places the contact S on the resistance wire AB at a distance of 0.500 m from A. He measures the p.d. V across the wire between A and S and the current I in the circuit. The student then records the measurements for circuits 2 and 3, shown in Fig. 2.2 and Fig. 2.3. power source
A
V
S
A
B
C
D circuit 2 Fig. 2.2 power source
A
V
A
S
C
D circuit 3 Fig. 2.3
© UCLES 2008
B
0625/06/O/N/08
For Examiner’s Use
7 The voltage V and current I for all three circuits are shown in Table 2.1.
For Examiner’s Use
Table 2.1 Circuit
I/
V/
1
0.83
0.53
2
0.75
0.95
3
0.41
0.28
(b) Complete the column headings in the table.
[1]
(c) Theory suggests that, 1.
in circuits 1 and 2, the values of potential difference V will be equal,
2.
the value of potential difference V in circuit 3 will be half that in circuit 1 or circuit 2.
(i)
State whether, within the limits of experimental accuracy, the results support these predictions. Justify your statement by reference to the results. Prediction 1 ............................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. Prediction 2 ............................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii)
Suggest one reason, other than a change in temperature of the wires, why the results may not support the theory. .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. [1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
[Turn over
8 3
The IGCSE class is investigating the change in temperature of hot water as cold water is added to the hot water. A student measures and records the temperature θ of the hot water before adding any of the cold water available. He then pours 20 cm3 of the cold water into the beaker containing the hot water. He measures and records the temperature θ of the mixture of hot and cold water. He repeats this procedure four times until he has added a total of 100 cm3 of cold water. The temperature readings are shown in Table 3.1. V is the volume of cold water added. Table 3.1
θ/
V/ 0
82 68 58 50 45 42
(a) (i) (ii)
Complete the column headings in the table. Enter the values for the volume of cold water added. [2]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
For Examiner’s Use
9 (b) Use the data in the table to plot a graph of temperature (y-axis) against volume (x-axis). Draw the best-fit curve.
[4] (c) During this experiment, some heat is lost from the hot water to the surroundings. Also, each time the cold water is added, it is added in quite large volumes and at random times. Suggest two improvements you could make to the procedure to give a graph that more accurately shows the pattern of temperature change of the hot water, due to addition of cold water alone. 1. ..................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2. ..................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
[Turn over
For Examiner’s Use
10 4
An IGCSE student is determining the focal length of a converging lens. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 4.1. screen x
y lens
illuminated object Fig. 4.1 (a) The student places the lens at a distance x = 25.0 cm from the illuminated object. She places the screen close to the lens and then moves it away from the lens until a sharply focused image is formed on the screen. She measures and records the distance y between the lens and the screen. y = 37.1 cm Calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f=
xy . (x + y)
f = ................................................... [2] (b) She then repeats the procedure with the lens at a distance x = 30.0 cm from the illuminated object. Fig. 4.1 shows this position of the apparatus. It is a scale diagram. (i)
On Fig. 4.1, measure the distance xs between the lens and the illuminated object. Also on Fig. 4.1, measure the distance ys between the lens and the screen.
xs = ...................................................... ys = ......................................................
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
For Examiner’s Use
11 (ii)
Calculate the actual distance y between the lens and the screen.
For Examiner’s Use
y = ...................................................... (iii)
Calculate the focal length f using the new values of x and y.
f = ...................................................... (iv)
Calculate the average value of f. Show your working.
average value of f = ...................................................... [7] (c) The illuminated object has the shape shown below.
Draw a diagram to show the appearance of the focused image in (b) on the screen.
[1] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
[Turn over
12 5
(a) Table 5.1 shows some measurements taken by three IGCSE students. The second column shows the values recorded by the three students. For each quantity, underline the value most likely to be correct.
For Examiner’s Use
The first one is done for you. Table 5.1 Quantity measured
Recorded values
The mass of a wooden metre rule
0.112 kg 1.12 kg 11.2 kg
The weight of an empty 250 cm3 glass beaker
0.7 N 7.0 N 70 N
The volume of one sheet of this examination paper
0.6 cm3 6.0 cm3 60 cm3
The time taken for one swing of a simple pendulum of length 0.5 m
0.14 s 1.4 s 14 s
The pressure exerted on the ground by a student standing on one foot
0.4 N/cm2 4.0 N/cm2 40 N/cm2 [4]
(b) (i)
A student is to find the value of the resistance of a wire by experiment. Potential difference V and current I can be recorded. The resistance is then calculated using the equation R = V/ I. The student knows that an increase in temperature will affect the resistance of the wire. Assuming that variations in room temperature will not have a significant effect, suggest two ways by which the student could minimise temperature increases in the wire during the experiment. 1. .............................................................................................................................. 2. .......................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Name the circuit component that the student could use to control the current. .............................................................................................................................. [1] [Total: 7]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*6752477947*
0625/06
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
May/June 2009 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use
1 2 3 4 5 Total This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. SPA FF/DT T76304/3 © UCLES 2009
[Turn over
2 1
An IGCSE student is making measurements as accurately as possible in order to determine the density of glass. Fig. 1.1 shows a glass test-tube drawn actual size.
x
d Fig. 1.1
(a) (i)
Use your rule to measure, in cm, the external diameter d of the test-tube. d = ....................................... cm
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
For Examiner’s Use
3 (ii)
Use your rule to measure, in cm, the length x of the test-tube. x = ............................................
(iii)
For Examiner’s Use
Draw a labelled diagram to show how you would use two rectangular blocks of wood and your rule to measure the length x of the test-tube as accurately as possible.
[4] (b) The mass m of the test-tube is 31.2 g. (i)
Calculate the external volume Ve of the test-tube using the equation Ve =
πd 2X . 4
Ve = ............................................
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
[Turn over
4 (ii)
The student then fills the test-tube with water and pours the water into a measuring cylinder. Fig. 1.2 shows the measuring cylinder. cm3 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 water 30 20 10
Fig. 1.2 Record the volume reading Vi from the measuring cylinder. This is the internal volume of the test-tube. Vi = ............................................ (iii)
Calculate the density ρ of the glass from which the test-tube is made using the equation
ρ=
m . (Ve − Vi)
ρ = ....................................... [4] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
For Examiner’s Use
5 BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/09
[Turn over
6 2
The IGCSE class is investigating the cooling of thermometer bulbs under different conditions. The students are provided with two thermometers A and B. Thermometer B has cotton wool wrapped around the bulb. Fig. 2.1 shows thermometer A.
thermometer A
stand
water
Fig. 2.1 The students measure the temperature θ of the hot water in the beaker. Fig. 2.2 shows the thermometer reading. -10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
100°C
thermometer A Fig. 2.2 (a) Record in Table 2.1 at time t = 0 s the temperature θ shown in Fig. 2.2. (b) The students remove the thermometer from the water, starting the stopclock at the same time. Table 2.1 shows the temperature of the thermometer bulb at 30 s intervals. The experiment is repeated using thermometer B which has cotton wool wrapped around the thermometer bulb.
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
For Examiner’s Use
7 Complete Table 2.1 by inserting the appropriate unit in the time and in the temperature column headings.
For Examiner’s Use
Table 2.1 Thermometer A
Thermometer B
θ/
θ/
t/ 0
81
30
51
72
60
43
58
90
37
49
120
34
43
150
30
38
180
28
34
210
27
31
[2]
(c) Suggest which thermometer cooled more quickly at first. Justify your answer by reference to the readings. statement ......................................................................................................................... justification ....................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) To make a fair comparison between the rates of cooling of the two thermometer bulbs under different conditions (in this experiment one thermometer bulb is covered with cotton wool), it is important to control other experimental conditions. Suggest two conditions that should be controlled in this experiment. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ................................................................................................................................. [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
[Turn over
8 3
The IGCSE class is investigating the resistance of a wire.
For Examiner’s Use
The circuit is shown in Fig. 3.1. power source
A
x A
B
C
V Fig. 3.1 AB is a resistance wire. The students place the sliding contact C on the resistance wire AB at a distance x = 0.100 m from A. They switch on and measure the p.d. V across the wire between A and C. They also measure the current I in the wire. The value of I is 0.38 A. They repeat the procedure several times using different values of x. The readings are shown in Table 3.1. The current I is 0.38 A for each value of x. Table 3.1 x/m
V /V
0.100
0.21
0.300
0.59
0.500
1.04
0.700
1.42
0.900
1.87
R/Ω
[2]
(a) Calculate the resistance R of the section AC of the wire for each value of x using the equation R = V – . Record the values of R in the table. I
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
9 (b) Use the results in Table 3.1 to plot a graph of R / Ω (y-axis) against x / m (x-axis). Draw the best fit line.
For Examiner’s Use
[5] (c) Within the limits of experimental accuracy, what do you conclude about the variation of resistance with distance along the wire? Justify your conclusion by reference to your graph. statement ......................................................................................................................... justification ....................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) Using your graph, determine the value for R when x = 0.750 m. Show clearly on your graph how you obtained the necessary information. R = ....................................... [2] (e) A variable that may be difficult to control in this experiment is the heating effect of the current, which affects the resistance of the wire. Suggest how you would minimise the heating effect. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 12]
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
[Turn over
10 4
An IGCSE student is determining the focal length of a lens. Fig. 4.1 shows the experimental set-up. The student positions the illuminated object and the lens and then moves the screen away from the lens until a sharply focused image of the object is formed on the screen. illuminated object
u
v
screen
Fig. 4.1 (a) Using your rule, measure on Fig. 4.1 the distance u, in cm, from the centre of the lens to the illuminated object and the distance v from the centre of the lens to the screen. u = ........................................... v =............................................ [2] (b) (i)
Fig. 4.1 is drawn one fifth actual size. Calculate the actual distance x from the illuminated object to the centre of the lens and the actual distance y from the centre of the lens to the screen. Record these values in Table 4.1. The first pair of readings obtained by the student has already been entered in the table. Table 4.1 x / cm
y / cm
57.0
15.0
f / cm
[3]
(ii)
Calculate for both pairs of readings the focal length f of the lens using the equation f=
xy . (x + y )
Record the values of f in Table 4.1.
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
For Examiner’s Use
11 (c) Calculate the average value of the focal length.
For Examiner’s Use
average value for the focal length = ....................................... [2] (d) State two precautions you would take in the laboratory in order to obtain reliable measurements. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ................................................................................................................................. [2] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
[Turn over
12 5
An IGCSE student is investigating moments using a simple balancing experiment.
For Examiner’s Use
He uses a pivot on a bench as shown in Fig. 5.1.
pivot
bench
Fig. 5.1 First, the student balances the metre rule, without loads, on the pivot. He finds that it does not balance at the 50.0 cm mark, as he expects, but it balances at the 49.7 cm mark. Load Q is a metal cylinder with diameter a little larger than the width of the metre rule, so that it covers the markings on the rule. Load Q is placed carefully on the balanced metre rule with its centre at the 84.2 cm mark. The rule does not slip on the pivot. (a) Draw on Fig. 5.1 the metre rule with load Q on it.
[2]
(b) Explain, using a labelled diagram, how the student would ensure that the metre rule reading at the centre of Q is 84.2 cm.
[2] (c) Calculate the distance between the pivot and the centre of load Q.
distance = ....................................... [1] [Total: 5] Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*8413808010*
0625/06
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
October/November 2009 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 Total
This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages. DCA (SHW 00210 3/08) 12805/3 © UCLES 2009
[Turn over
2 1
The IGCSE class is investigating the period of oscillation of a simple pendulum.
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 1.1 shows the set-up.
bob d
floor one complete oscillation
Fig. 1.1 (a) (i)
Fig. 1.2
On Fig. 1.1, measure the vertical distance d from the floor to the bottom of the pendulum bob. d = ......................................................
(ii)
Fig. 1.1 is drawn one twentieth actual size. Calculate the actual distance x from the floor to the bottom of the pendulum bob. Enter this value in the top row of Table 1.1.
The students displace the pendulum bob slightly and release it so that it swings. They measure and record in Table 1.1 the time t for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum (see Fig. 1.2). Table 1.1 x / cm
t/s
T/s
T 2 / s2
20.0 20.0
19.0
30.0
17.9
40.0
16.8
50.0
15.5 [4]
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
3 (b) (i)
(ii)
Calculate the period T of the pendulum for each set of readings. The period is the time for one complete oscillation. Enter the values in Table 1.1.
For Examiner’s Use
Calculate the values of T 2. Enter the T 2 values in Table 1.1.
(c) Use your values from Table 1.1 to plot a graph of T 2 / s2 (y-axis) against x / cm (x-axis). Draw the best-fit line.
[5]
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
[Turn over
4 (d) State whether or not your graph shows that T 2 is directly proportional to x. Justify your statement by reference to the graph. statement ......................................................................................................................... justification ....................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
For Examiner’s Use
5 BLANK PAGE
0625/06/O/N/09
[Turn over
6 2
An IGCSE student is investigating the cooling of thermometer bulbs under different conditions. He places a thermometer in a beaker of hot water and records the temperature h of the hot water.
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 °C
Fig. 2.1 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows the thermometer. Write down the value of h that it shows.
h ................................................ [1] He then moves the thermometer until the thermometer bulb is just above the surface of the water (position A) and immediately starts a stopclock. He records the time t and the temperature reading every 30 s. The readings are shown in Table 2.1. Table 2.1
Position A
Position B
t/
/
/
30
65
56
60
58
47
90
54
40
120
52
35
150
50
32
180
48
30
(b) Complete the column headings in the table.
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
[1]
For Examiner’s Use
7 The student replaces the thermometer in the hot water and then moves the thermometer 15 cm away from the beaker to position B and immediately starts the stopclock. He records the time t and the temperature reading every 30 s. The readings are shown in Table 2.1.
For Examiner’s Use
(c) State in which position the thermometer bulb cooled more quickly. Justify your answer by reference to the readings. statement ......................................................................................................................... justification ....................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) To make a fair comparison between the rates of cooling of the thermometer bulbs in the two positions, it is important to control other experimental conditions. Suggest two conditions that should be controlled in this experiment. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ................................................................................................................................ [2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
[Turn over
8 3
The IGCSE class is comparing the combined resistance of lamps arranged either in series or in parallel. The circuit shown in Fig. 3.1 is used. power source
A
V
Fig. 3.1 A student measures and records the current I in the circuit and the p.d. V across the two lamps. Fig. 3.2 shows the readings on the two meters.
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.4
0
A 2
3
1
4
0
V Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2009
0.5
0625/06/O/N/09
5
For Examiner’s Use
9 (a) (i) (ii)
Write the voltage and current readings in Table 3.1, below.
For Examiner’s Use
Complete the column headings in Table 3.1. [3]
(b) The student then sets up the circuit shown in Fig. 3.3 and records the readings. These readings have already been entered in Table 3.1. power source
A
V
Fig. 3.3 For each set of readings in the table, calculate the combined resistance R of the two lamps using the equation R = V / I. Record the values of R in Table 3.1. [2] Table 3.1 V/
I/
1.8
0.52
R/
Circuit of Fig. 3.1 Circuit of Fig. 3.3
(c) Using the values of resistance you have obtained, calculate the ratio y of the resistances using the equation y=
resistance of lamps in series . resistance of lamps in parallel
y = ...................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
[Turn over
10 (d) Fig. 3.4 shows a circuit including two motors A and B.
For Examiner’s Use
power source
ammeter
motor A
A variable resistor motor B
Fig. 3.4 (i)
Draw a diagram of the circuit using standard circuit symbols. The circuit symbol for a motor is:
M
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
11 (ii)
An engineer wishes to measure the voltage across motor A. 1.
On Fig. 3.4, mark with the letters X and Y where the engineer should connect the voltmeter.
2.
State the purpose of the variable resistor.
For Examiner’s Use
........................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... [3] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
[Turn over
12 4
An IGCSE student is determining the focal length of a lens by two different methods.
For Examiner’s Use
The set-up for Method 1 is shown in Fig. 4.1.
illuminated object
object screen
mirror f lens
Fig. 4.1 The student moves the lens and the mirror slowly towards the object screen until a sharply focused image is obtained on the object screen as shown in Fig. 4.2.
image
Fig. 4.2 (a) On Fig. 4.1, use your rule to measure the distance f between the lens and the object screen. This is the focal length of the lens. f = ................................................ [2] (b) For Method 2, the student takes measurements of the diameter d and maximum thickness t of the lens. Use your rule to take measurements on Fig. 4.3.
Fig. 4.3
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
13 (i)
Determine an average value for the diameter d of the lens. Record your readings in the space below.
For Examiner’s Use
d = ...................................................... (ii)
Measure the maximum thickness t of the lens. t = ......................................................
(iii)
Draw a diagram to show how, in the laboratory you would use two rectangular blocks of wood and a metre rule to measure the thickness of the lens as accurately as possible.
(iv)
Theory shows that, for a perfectly formed lens, the focal length is given by the formula f=
d2 kt
where k = 4.16.
Calculate the focal length f of the lens using this formula.
f = ...................................................... [7]
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
[Turn over
14 (c) Explain whether your results from Methods 1 and 2 support the theory in part (b)(iv). .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
For Examiner’s Use
15 5
An IGCSE student is carrying out an optics experiment. The experiment involves using a lens to focus the image of an illuminated object onto a screen. (a) Complete the diagram below to show the apparatus you would use. Include a metre rule to measure the distances between the object and the lens and between the lens and the screen. The illuminated object is drawn for you.
illuminated object lamp
card
[3] (b) State two precautions that you would take to obtain accurate results in this experiment. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
For Examiner’s Use
16 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/06/O/N/09
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*5429162966*
0625/61
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
May/June 2010 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 Total
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. DC (KN/SW) 17179/5 © UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2 1
An IGCSE student is investigating the stretching of springs. Fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus used for the first part of the experiment. clamp
spring A
l
spring B
l
200 g mass
200 g mass Fig. 1.1
The unstretched length lA of spring A is 15 mm. The unstretched length lB of spring B is 16 mm. (a) The student hangs a 200 g mass on each spring, as shown in Fig. 1.1. (i)
On Fig. 1.1 measure the new length l of spring A.
l = ..................................... mm (ii)
Calculate the extension eA of the spring using the equation eA = (l – lA).
eA = ..................................... mm (iii)
On Fig. 1.1 measure the new length l of spring B.
l = ..................................... mm (iv)
Calculate the extension eB of the spring using the equation eB = (l – lB).
eB = ..................................... mm [2] © UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) The student then sets up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 1.2.
spring A
l
l
For Examiner’s Use
spring B
rod
load Fig. 1.2 (i)
On Fig. 1.2 measure the new length of each of the springs. spring A: l = ..................................... mm spring B: l = ..................................... mm
(ii)
Calculate the extension of each spring using the appropriate equation from part (a). spring A: e = ..................................... mm spring B: e = ..................................... mm
(iii)
Calculate the average of these two extensions eav . Show your working.
eav = ......................................mm [3] (c) It is suggested that (eA + eB)/4 = eav . State whether your results support this theory and justify your answer with reference to the results. Statement ........................................................................................................................ Justification ...................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) Describe briefly one precaution that you would take to obtain accurate length measurements. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] © UCLES 2010 0625/61/M/J/10 [Turn over
4 2
The IGCSE class is investigating the cooling of water.
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 2.1. shows the apparatus used.
thermometer
hot water
Fig. 2.1 Hot water is poured into the beaker and temperature readings are taken as the water cools. Table 2.1 shows the readings taken by one student. Table 2.1
θ / °C
t /s
(a) (i)
0
85
30
78
60
74
90
71
120
69
150
67
300
63
Using the information in the table, calculate the temperature change T1 of the water in the first 150 s.
T1 = ........................................... © UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
5 (ii)
Using the information in the table, calculate the temperature change T2 of the water in the final 150 s.
For Examiner’s Use
T2 = ............................................ [3] (b) Plot a graph of θ / °C (y-axis) against t / s (x-axis) for the first 150 s.
0
20
40
60
80
[5]
100 120 140 160 t /s
(c) During the experiment the rate of temperature change decreases. (i)
Describe briefly how the results that you have calculated in part (a) show this trend. .................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Describe briefly how the graph line shows this trend. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
[Turn over
6 3
The IGCSE class is investigating the effect of the length of resistance wire in a circuit on the potential difference across a lamp. (a) Fig. 3.1 shows the circuit without the voltmeter. Complete the circuit diagram to show the voltmeter connected in the circuit to measure the potential difference across the lamp. power source
l A
sliding contact
B
Fig. 3.1 [2] (b) A student switches on and places the sliding contact on the resistance wire at a distance l = 0.200 m from end A. He records the value of l and the potential difference V across the lamp. He then repeats the procedure using a range of values of l. Table 3.1 shows the readings. Table 3.1
(i)
(ii)
© UCLES 2010
l/m
V /V
0.200
1.67
0.400
1.43
0.600
1.25
0.800
1.11
1.000
1.00
V – l
/
For each pair of readings in the table calculate and record in the table the value of V –. l Complete the table by writing in the unit for V –. l [3]
0625/61/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
7 (c) A student suggests that the potential difference V across the lamp is directly proportional to the length l of resistance wire in the circuit. State whether or not you agree with this suggestion and justify your answer by reference to the results.
For Examiner’s Use
Statement ........................................................................................................................ Justification ...................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] (d) State one precaution that you would take in order to obtain accurate readings of V in this experiment. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
[Turn over
8 4
An IGCSE student is investigating reflection from a plane mirror.
E
G P2
For Examiner’s Use
F P5
P6 P1 J
K
sheet of paper
H
Fig. 4.1 The student is using a sheet of plain paper on a pin board. Fig. 4.1 shows the sheet of paper. The straight line EF shows the position of the reflecting surface of a plane mirror standing vertically on the sheet of paper. Line GH is a normal to line EF. Line JG marks an incident ray and line GK is the corresponding reflected ray. The student marks the position of the incident ray with two pins (P1 and P2) and uses two more pins (P3 and P4) to find the direction of the reflected ray. (a) (i)
(ii)
On Fig. 4.1 mark with two neat crosses, labelled P3 and P4, suitable positions for the pins to find the direction of the reflected ray. On Fig. 4.1 measure the angle of incidence i. i = ............................................
(iii)
On Fig. 4.1 measure the angle of reflection r1. r1 = ............................................ [3]
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
9 (b) (i)
On Fig. 4.1 draw a line E'GF' such that the angle θ between this line and the line EGF is 10°. Start with E' below the line EGF. The straight line E'F' shows a new position of the reflecting surface of the plane mirror standing vertically on the sheet of paper. The points labelled P5 and P6 mark the positions of two pins placed so that P5, P6 and the images of P1 and P2 appear in line with each other. P1 and P2 have not been moved since the original set-up.
(ii)
Using a ruler, draw a line joining the points labelled P5 and P6, and continue this line to meet the line E'F'.
(iii)
Measure the angle of reflection r2 between line GH and the line joining the points labelled P5 and P6.
For Examiner’s Use
r2 = ............................................ (iv)
Calculate the angle α through which the reflected ray has moved.
α = ............................................ (v)
Calculate the difference between 2θ and α. θ is the angle between the two positions of the mirror.
difference between 2θ and α = ............................................ [3] (c) Theory suggests that if the mirror is moved through an angle θ then the reflected ray will move through an angle of 2θ. State whether your result supports the theory and justify your answer by reference to the result. Statement ........................................................................................................................ Justification ...................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
[Turn over
10 5
The IGCSE class is investigating the swing of a loaded metre rule.
For Examiner’s Use
The arrangement of the apparatus is shown in Fig. 5.1. pivot at 10 cm mark
d metre rule
load at 90 cm mark
Fig. 5.1 A student displaces the rule a small distance to one side and allows it to swing. The time t taken for 10 complete swings is recorded. She calculates the time T taken for one swing. She repeats the procedure using different values of the distance d. The readings are shown in the Table 5.1. Table 5.1
0.900
18.4
1.84
0.850
17.9
1.79
0.800
17.5
1.75
0.750
17.1
1.71
0.700
16.7
1.67
(a) Complete the column headings in the table.
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
[3]
11 (b) Explain why the student takes the time for ten swings and then calculates the time for one swing, rather than just measuring the time for one swing. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1] (c) The student tries to find a relationship between T and d. She first suggests that T × d is a constant. (i)
Calculate the values of T × d and enter the values in the final column of the table.
(ii)
State whether or not the results support this suggestion and give a reason for your answer. Statement ................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. Reason ..................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
For Examiner’s Use
12 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*0199664493*
0625/61
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
October/November 2010 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 Total
This document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. DC (LEO/DJ) 25086/5 © UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2 1
A student is determining the position of the centre of mass of an object using a balancing method. Fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus used.
mass m
50.0 cm mark
d
load of mass x
pivot 75.0 cm mark Fig. 1.1 A load of mass x is taped to the metre rule so that one side of the base is exactly on the 75.0 cm mark. The student places a mass m of 30 g on the rule and adjusts its position so that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced with the 50.0 cm mark exactly over the pivot, as shown in Fig. 1.1. The student records the distance d from the centre of the 30 g mass to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule. He then repeats the procedure using different masses. The readings are shown in Table 1.1. Table 1.1
m /g
d / cm
30
45.0
40
34.0
50
27.0
60
22.5
70
19.3
1 1 d cm
(a) For each value of d, calculate 1/d and enter the values in the table.
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
[2]
For Examiner’s Use
3 (b) Plot a graph of m / g (y-axis) against
1 1 (x-axis). d cm
For Examiner’s Use
[4] (c) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
G = .................................................. [2] (d) Determine the horizontal distance z from the 75.0 cm mark on the rule to the centre of mass of the load using the equation z = G – k, x where k = 1250 g cm and x = 50 g.
z = ................................................. [2] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
[Turn over
4 2
The IGCSE class is investigating the rate of heating and cooling of a thermometer bulb. The apparatus used is shown in Fig. 2.1. thermometer
lid
water
Fig. 2.1 (a) Record the room temperature θr shown on the thermometer. –10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 °C
θr = ................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
For Examiner’s Use
5 (b) For the cooling experiment, a student places the thermometer into hot water as shown in Fig. 2.1. When the temperature shown on the thermometer stops rising, she records the temperature θ at time t = 0 s. She removes the thermometer from the water, immediately starts a stopclock, and records the temperature shown on the thermometer at 30 s intervals. The readings are shown in Table 2.1.
For Examiner’s Use
For the heating experiment, the student takes another thermometer and records the temperature θ shown on the thermometer at time t = 0 s. She places the thermometer in the beaker of hot water, immediately starts the stopclock, and records the temperature shown by the thermometer at 10 s intervals. The readings are shown in Table 2.2. Table 2.1
Table 2.2
t/
θ/
t/
θ/
0
74
0
25
30
60
10
69
60
52
20
80
90
45
30
81
120
39
40
81
150
35
50
82
180
33
60
82
(i)
Complete the column headings in both tables.
[1]
(ii)
Estimate the time that would be taken in the cooling experiment for the thermometer to cool from the reading at time t = 0 s to room temperature θr . estimated time = ................................................. [1]
(c) State in which table the initial rate of temperature change is the greater. Justify your answer by reference to your readings. The initial rate of temperature change is greater in Table ................................................. justification ....................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [1] (d) If one of these experiments were to be repeated in order to determine an average temperature for each time, it would be important to control the conditions. Suggest two such conditions that should be controlled. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. .................................................................................................................................. [2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
[Turn over
6 3
The IGCSE class is investigating the current in a circuit when different resistors are connected in the circuit. The circuit is shown in Fig. 3.1. The circuit contains a resistor X, and there is a gap in the circuit between points A and B that is used for adding extra resistors to the circuit.
X
power source A
A
B
Fig. 3.1 (a) A student connects points A and B together, switches on and measures the current I0 in the circuit. The reading is shown on the ammeter in Fig. 3.2. 0.6
0.4
0.8
0.2 0
A
1.0
Fig. 3.2 Write down the ammeter reading. I0 = .................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
For Examiner’s Use
7 (b) The student connects a 3.3 Ω resistor between points A and B, switches on and records the current I. He repeats the procedure with a 4.7 Ω resistor and then a 6.8 Ω resistor.
For Examiner’s Use
Finally he connects the 3.3 Ω resistor and the 6.8 Ω resistor in series between points A and B, and records the current I. (i)
Complete the column headings in the table.
[1]
R/
I/
3.3
0.23
4.7
0.21
6.8
0.18 0.15
(ii)
Write the combined resistance of the 3.3 Ω resistor and the 6.8 Ω resistor in series in the space in the resistance column of the table. [1]
(c) Theory suggests that the current will be 0.5 I0 when the total resistance in the circuit is twice the value of the resistance of resistor X. Use the readings in the table, and the value of I0 from (a), to estimate the resistance of resistor X.
estimate of the resistance of resistor X = .................................................. [2] (d) On Fig. 3.1 draw two resistors in parallel connected between A and B and also a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across resistor X. [3] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
[Turn over
8 4
The IGCSE class is investigating the reflection of light by a mirror as seen through a transparent block. Fig. 4.1 shows a student’s ray-trace sheet.
mirror A
B N
transparent block
E D
C
P3
P4 N' F
eye
sheet of paper Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
For Examiner’s Use
9 (a) A student draws the outline of the transparent block ABCD on the ray-trace sheet. He draws the normal NN' to side CD. He draws the incident ray EF at an angle of incidence i = 20°. He pushes two pins P1 and P2 into line EF and places the block on the sheet of paper. He then observes the images of P1 and P2 through side CD of the block from the direction indicated by the eye in Fig. 4.1 so that the images of P1 and P2 appear one behind the other. He pushes two pins P3 and P4 into the surface, between his eye and the block, so that P3, P4 and the images of P1 and P2, seen through the block, appear in line. (The plane mirror along side AB of the block reflects the light.)
For Examiner’s Use
The positions of P3 and P4 are marked on Fig. 4.1. (i)
On line EF, mark with neat crosses (x) suitable positions for the pins P1 and P2.
(ii)
Continue the line EF so that it crosses CD and extends as far as side AB.
(iii)
Draw a line joining the positions of P4 and P3. Continue the line so that it crosses CD and extends as far as side AB. Label the point G where this line crosses the [4] line from P1 and P2.
(iv)
Measure the acute angle θ between the lines meeting at G.
θ = ...................................................... (v)
Calculate the difference (θ – 2i ).
(θ – 2i ) = ................................................. [2] (b) The student repeats the procedure using an angle of incidence i = 30° and records the value of θ as 62°. (i)
Calculate the difference (θ – 2i).
(θ – 2i ) = ...................................................... (ii)
Theory suggests that θ = 2i . State whether the results support the theory and justify your answer by reference to the results. statement ................................................................................................................. justification ............................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) To place the pins as accurately as possible, the student views the bases of the pins. Explain briefly why viewing the bases of the pins, rather than the tops of the pins, improves the accuracy of the experiment. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 10] © UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
[Turn over
10 5
The IGCSE class is investigating the time taken for ice cubes to melt when placed in water. Each student is able to use glass beakers, a thermometer, a stopclock, a measuring cylinder, an electronic balance, a supply of ice cubes of different sizes, a supply of cold water, a stirrer, a method of heating the water and any other common laboratory apparatus that may be useful. A student decides to investigate the effect of the mass of ice cubes on the time they take to melt in water. (a) Suggest three possible variables that should be kept constant in this investigation. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... 3. .................................................................................................................................. [3] (b) In the table below, write the names of three items of apparatus that are necessary in order to take readings in this investigation. In the second column of the table write the quantity that the item measures. item of apparatus
quantity measured
[3] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
For Examiner’s Use
11 BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
12 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 9 0 9 6 7 1 7 3 6 0 *
0625/61
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
May/June 2011 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 Total
This document consists of 10 printed pages and 2 blank pages. DC (LEO/SW) 28913/4 © UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2 1
An IGCSE student is determining the position of the centre of mass of a triangular card. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 1.1.
pin or nail cork A
stand card
B C
plumbline
Fig. 1.1 (a) The student hangs the card on the nail through hole A. He checks that the card is able to swing freely and then hangs the plumbline from the nail so that it is close to, but not touching, the card. When the card and plumbline are still, he makes a small mark at the edge of the card where the plumbline crosses the edge. He removes the card and draws a line from the mark to hole A. He repeats the procedure using holes B and C. Fig.1.2 is a drawing of the card.
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
For Examiner’s Use
3 For Examiner’s Use
A
C
B Fig.1.2
On Fig.1.2, the position of each of the marks the student makes is shown with a small cross. On Fig. 1.2, draw in the lines between the positions of the holes A, B and C and the corresponding crosses on the card. [2] (b) If the experiment is completely accurate, the centre of mass of the card is at the position where the three lines meet. On Fig. 1.2, judge the best position for the centre of mass, marking it with a small cross. Draw a line from this position to the right-angled corner of the card and measure the distance a between the centre of mass and the right-angled corner of the card. a = ........................................[3] (c) In this experiment, it is important that the card is able to swing freely. For this reason, the plumbline should not touch the card but be a small distance from it. This could cause an inaccuracy in marking the card at the correct position. Describe how you would minimise this possible inaccuracy. You may draw a diagram.
.......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 6] © UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
[Turn over
4 2
The IGCSE class is investigating the rate of cooling of water.
For Examiner’s Use
The apparatus is shown in Fig. 2.1.
thermometer
beaker water
Fig. 2.1 (a) Record room temperature θR as shown on the thermometer in Fig. 2.2.
110
°C
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
–10
Fig. 2.2
θR = ........................................[1] (b) The beaker contains 200 cm3 of hot water. A student takes temperature readings as the water cools, as shown in Table 2.1. Table 2.1
© UCLES 2011
t/
θ/
0
79
30
65
60
58
90
55
120
53
150
52
180
51
0625/61/M/J/11
5 (i)
Complete the column headings in Table 2.1.
(ii)
Calculate the temperature fall T1 during the first 30 s of cooling.
For Examiner’s Use
T1 = ............................................ (iii)
Calculate the temperature fall T2 during the final 30 s of cooling. T2 = ........................................[3]
(c) Plot the graph of temperature (y-axis) against time (x-axis).
[5]
(d) (i)
State how the rate of cooling in the first 30 s differs from that in the final 30 s. .................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain how the graph line shows this difference. .................................................................................................................................. ..............................................................................................................................[2] [Total: 11]
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
[Turn over
6 3
The IGCSE class is measuring the currents in lamps in different circuits.
For Examiner’s Use
The first circuit is shown in Fig. 3.1. V power source
lamp 1 A lamp 2
Fig. 3.1 (a) A student records the potential difference V across the lamps and the current I in lamp 1. She rearranges the circuit so that the ammeter is connected in series with lamp 2 and again records the potential difference V across the lamps and the current I in lamp 2. The readings are shown in Table 3.1. Table 3.1
(i)
(ii)
V/
I/
lamp 1
1.9
0.35
lamp 2
1.9
0.32
R/
V Calculate the resistance R of each lamp, using the equation R = , and enter the I results in the table.
Add together the two values of R to calculate RS, the sum of the resistances of the two lamps. RS = ............................................
(iii)
Complete the column headings in the table. [3]
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
7 (b) The student rearranges the circuit so that the lamps and the ammeter are in series. She does not change the position of the voltmeter.
For Examiner’s Use
She records the readings on the voltmeter and the ammeter. voltmeter reading.......1.9 V ammeter reading.......0.23 A (i)
Draw a circuit diagram of the rearranged circuit using conventional symbols.
(ii)
Use the voltmeter and ammeter readings to calculate RT , the combined resistance of the two lamps in series.
RT = ........................................[3] (c) A student suggests that the values of RS and RT should be equal. State whether the results support this suggestion and justify your statement by reference to the calculated values. statement ......................................................................................................................... justification ....................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................[2] (d) State, without reference to the values of resistance that you have calculated, one piece of evidence that the student can observe during the experiment that shows that the temperature of the lamp filaments changes. .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
[Turn over
8 4
The IGCSE class is investigating reflection of light using a plane mirror. A student has set up a ray trace sheet and this is shown in Fig. 4.1. The line MR shows the position of a plane mirror. mirror N M
R
P3
P4
eye
Fig. 4.1 (a) (i) (ii)
Draw a normal to line MR at N. Draw a line 10 cm long that is parallel to line MR and 12 cm below it. The ends of this line must be at the same distance from the edges of the page as the ends of line MR. Label this line CD with C directly below M. [3]
(b) The student places a pin P1 so that it stands vertically at C. He places another pin P2 as close as possible to the point N. (i)
Draw a line from C to N.
(ii)
Measure and record the angle of incidence i between the line CN and the normal. i = ........................................[2]
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
For Examiner’s Use
9 (c) The student views the image in the mirror of the pin P1 from the direction indicated by the eye in Fig. 4.1. He places two pins P3 and P4 some distance apart so that pins P4, P3, P2 and the image of P1 all appear exactly one behind the other. The positions of P3 and P4 are shown on Fig. 4.1. (i)
Draw in the line joining the positions of P3 and P4. Continue the line until it meets the normal.
(ii)
Measure and record the angle of reflection r between the normal and line P3P4.
For Examiner’s Use
r = ........................................[2] (d) Several students found that, in spite of carrying out this experiment with reasonable care, the measured value of the angle of reflection r was not exactly the same as the value obtained from theory. Suggest two possible causes of this inaccuracy. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................[2] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
[Turn over
10 5
Table 5.1 shows some measurements taken by three IGCSE students. The second column shows the values recorded by the three students. For each quantity, underline the value most likely to be correct. The first one is done for you. Table 5.1 quantity measured
recorded values
the mass of a wooden metre rule
0.112 kg 1.12 kg 11.2 kg
the diameter of a test tube
0.15 cm 1.5 cm 15 cm
the volume of a coffee cup
10 cm3 100 cm3 1000 cm3
the area of a computer keyboard
0.07 m2 0.70 m2 7.0 m2
the current in a 1.5 V torch lamp at normal brightness
0.12 A 12 A 120 A
the circumference of a 250 cm3 beaker
2.3 cm 23 cm 230 cm [5] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
For Examiner’s Use
11 BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
12 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 1 3 1 3 1 3 5 5 9 2 *
0625/61
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
October/November 2011 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 12 printed pages. DC (SJF/CGW) 34182/5 © UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2 1
An IGCSE student is determining the weight of a metre rule. Fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus. d
y
x
50.0 cm mark
metre rule
X pivot Fig. 1.1 X is a 1.0 N load. The student places the load X on the rule so that its centre is at d = 5.0 cm from the zero end of the rule, as shown in Fig.1.1. He adjusts the position of the rule so that it is as near as possible to being balanced, with the 50.0 cm mark to the right of the pivot. He measures and records the distance x from the centre of the load X to the pivot, and the distance y from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule. He repeats the procedure using d values of 10.0 cm, 15.0 cm, 20.0 cm and 25.0 cm. The readings of d, x and y are shown in Table 1.1. Table 1.1
© UCLES 2011
d / cm
x / cm
y / cm
5.0
23.7
21.3
10.0
21.0
19.1
15.0
18.5
16.3
20.0
16.0
14.1
25.0
13.9
12.0
0625/61/O/N/11
3 (a) Plot the graph of y / cm (y-axis) against x / cm (x-axis). You do not need to include the origin (0,0) on your graph.
[4]
(b) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
G = .......................................................... [2] (c) Calculate the weight W of the metre rule using the equation W = L , where L = 1.0 N. G
W = .......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
[Turn over
4 (d) The calculation of W is based on the assumption that the centre of mass of the rule is at the 50.0 cm mark. (i)
Describe briefly how you would determine the position of the centre of mass of the rule. ........................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Describe how you would modify the experiment if the centre of mass was at the 49.7 cm mark. ........................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................[2] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
5 2
The IGCSE class is investigating temperature changes when cold water and hot water are mixed. (a) A student records the temperature θc of 100 cm3 of cold water and the temperature θh of 100 cm3 of hot water. –10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 °C
Fig. 2.1 Write down the temperature θc shown on the thermometer in Fig. 2.1.
θc = .......................................................... [2] (b) The hot water is at a temperature θh = 86 °C. Calculate θav , the average of θc and θh.
average θav = .......................................................... [1] (c) The student adds 100 cm3 of the hot water to the cold water. She records the temperature θm of the mixture of hot and cold water, θm = 48 °C. State two precautions (other than repeating the experiment) that the student could take to ensure the reliability of her value of the temperature θm. 1. ............................................................................................................................................... 2. ............................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) Suggest a practical reason in this experiment for the temperature of the mixture θm being different from the average value θav , even when the student has taken the precautions you suggested in (c). ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (e) Suggest a modification to the experiment which should reduce the difference between θm and θav. ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (f)
The student decides to repeat the experiment to check the readings. Suggest one possible variable that she should keep constant. ...............................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
[Turn over
6 3
The IGCSE class is investigating the current in resistors in a circuit. The circuit is shown in Fig. 3.1. power source
A
A
D B
C
Fig. 3.1 (a) A student measures the current IA at the position A shown by the ammeter, and then at positions B (IB), C (IC) and D (ID). The readings are: IA= 0.28 A
IB = 0.13 A
IC = 0.14 A
ID = 0.27 A
Theory suggests that IA = IB + IC and ID = IB + IC. (i)
Calculate IB + IC. IB + IC = ...............................................................
(ii)
State whether the experimental results support the theory. Justify your statement by reference to the readings. statement .......................................................................................................................... justification ........................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
7 (b) The student suggests repeating the experiment to confirm her conclusion. She connects a variable resistor (rheostat) in series with the switch. State the purpose of the variable resistor. ................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (c) The student connects a voltmeter and records the potential difference V across the combination of the three resistors. (i)
On Fig. 3.1, draw in the voltmeter connected as described, using the standard symbol for a voltmeter. [1]
(ii)
Write down the voltmeter reading shown on Fig. 3.2.
3
4
5
6
1 0
7 8
2
9 V
10
Fig. 3.2 V = ......................................................... [1] (iii)
Calculate the resistance R of the combination of the three resistors using the equation V . R= I
R = .......................................................... [2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
[Turn over
8 4
An IGCSE student is investigating reflection of light in a plane mirror. Fig. 4.1 shows the student’s ray trace sheet. O
ray trace sheet
M
R P2
P3
eye
Fig. 4.1 (a) The line MR shows the position of a mirror. (i)
Draw a normal to this line that passes through its centre. Label the normal NL. Label the point at which NL crosses MR with the letter B. [1]
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
9 (ii)
Draw a line 8 cm long from B at an angle of incidence i = 40 ° to the normal below MR and to the left of the normal. Label the end of this line A. Record the angle of incidence i in the first row of Table 4.1. Table 4.1
i /°
r /°
34
33 [2]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows the mirror which is made of polished metal and has a vertical line drawn on it.
mirror line Fig. 4.2 The student places the mirror, with its reflecting face vertical, on MR. The lower end of the line on the mirror is at point B. He places a pin P1 at A. He views the line on the mirror and the image of pin P1 from the direction indicated by the eye in Fig. 4.1. He places two pins P2 and P3 some distance apart so that pins P3, P2, the image of P1, and the line on the mirror all appear exactly one behind the other. The positions of P2 and P3 are shown. (i)
Draw the line joining the positions of P2 and P3. Continue the line until it meets the normal.
(ii)
Measure, and record in the first row of Table 4.1, the angle of reflection r between the normal and the line passing through P2 and P3. [2]
(c) The student draws a line parallel to MR and 2 cm above it. He places the mirror on this line and repeats the procedure without changing the position of pin P1. His readings for i and r are shown in the table. In spite of carrying out this experiment with reasonable care, it is possible that the values of the angle of reflection r will not be exactly the same as the values obtained from theory. Suggest two possible causes of this inaccuracy. 1. ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... 2. ............................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
[Turn over
10 (d) The student was asked to list precautions that should be taken with this experiment in order to obtain readings that are as accurate as possible. Table 4.2 shows the suggestions. Place a tick (✓) in the second column of the table next to each correctly suggested precaution. Table 4.2 suggested precaution avoid parallax (line of sight) errors when taking readings with the protractor carry out the experiment in a darkened room draw the lines so that they are as thin as possible keep room temperature constant place pins P2 and P3 as far apart as possible use only two or three significant figures for the final answers
[3] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
11 5
The IGCSE class is carrying out an experiment to determine the speed of sound in air. Fig. 5.1 indicates the method used. The experiment is conducted outside the school building. student A
student B drum
stopwatch
d Fig. 5.1 (not to scale) Student A strikes a drum once as loudly as possible. Student B stands some distance away from student A and starts a stopwatch when she sees the drum being hit. She stops the stopwatch when she hears the sound. She records the time interval t in Table 5.1. The experiment is repeated several times. She calculates the speed of sound v and enters the values in the table. Table 5.1 t/s
v / (m / s)
0.87
344.83
0.92
326.09
0.84
357.14
0.83
361.45
0.86
338.84
(a) Suggest a suitable distance d for students to use when carrying out this experiment. d = .......................................................... [1] (b) Suggest a suitable instrument for measuring the distance d. ...............................................................................................................................................[1] (c) Calculate the average value vav for the speed of sound from the results in the table. Show your working.
vav = .......................................................... [2] © UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
[Turn over
12 (d) The student has recorded the values for the speed of sound v to five significant figures. State whether this is a suitable number of significant figures for the speed of sound in air in this experiment. Give a reason for your answer. statement .................................................................................................................................. reason ....................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................[1] [Total: 5]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 4 4 6 8 1 0 1 8 2 6 *
0625/61
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
May/June 2012 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 Total
This document consists of 12 printed pages. DC (NF/CGW) 42235/7 © UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2 1
An IGCSE student is determining the mass of a metre rule using a balancing method. Fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus.
d
x
y
50.0 cm mark
metre rule
M pivot Fig. 1.1 Mass M is placed on the rule. The position of the pivot is adjusted until the rule balances. (a) The student chooses a mass M which is similar to the mass of the metre rule. Suggest a suitable value for the mass.
suitable mass = ................................................. [1] (b) The mass is cylindrical and has a diameter slightly larger than the width of the metre rule. Describe briefly how you would place the mass so that its centre of mass is exactly over the 90.0 cm mark on the metre rule. You should draw a diagram and mark the position of the centre of mass on the cylinder.
.......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [2] (c) From your experience of carrying out balancing experiments of this type, suggest one difficulty that you are likely to come across that could make the final result inaccurate. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
3 (d) The student takes a reading of x and the corresponding reading of y. He then calculates the mass of the metre rule.
For Examiner’s Use
Suggest how you would improve the reliability of the value of the mass of the metre rule, using this method. .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] (e) Another student carries out a similar experiment to determine the mass of a 50 cm metal strip. She calculates the mass and writes down “mass = 234.872 g”. She checks the mass on an accurate balance. The value is 235 g. She thinks she must have made a mistake in her experiment. Write a brief comment on the accuracy of her experimental result. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
[Turn over
4 2
The IGCSE class is investigating the heating of a thermometer bulb.
For Examiner’s Use
The apparatus is shown in Figs. 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3. thermometer card metre rule lamp d
Fig. 2.1 (a) Record the value of room temperature θ R shown on the thermometer.
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
°C
Fig. 2.2
θ R = ................................................. [1] (b) A student switches on the lamp and places the thermometer so that its bulb is a horizontal distance d = 100 mm from the surface of the lamp, as shown in Fig. 2.1. She records the distance d between the thermometer bulb and the surface of the lamp. She also records the temperature θ shown on the thermometer. She repeats the procedure using values of d of 80 mm, 60 mm, 40 mm, 20 mm and 10 mm. The temperature readings are shown in Table 2.1. (i)
Record the d values in the table.
(ii)
Complete the column headings in the table. Table 2.1 d / 00
θ / 00 52 56 61 67 75 86 [2]
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
5 (c) The student moves the thermometer away from the lamp and waits for about a minute for the thermometer to cool. She places the thermometer so that its bulb is a vertical distance d V = 100 mm from the top surface of the lamp, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
For Examiner’s Use
thermometer dv lamp
Fig. 2.3 She records the temperature θ V shown on the thermometer: θ V = 55 °C. Calculate the difference between θ V and the thermometer reading θH at a horizontal distance of 100 mm from the lamp. State whether θ V is higher, lower or the same as θ H.
temperature difference = ......................................................
θ V is ................................................. [1] (d) A student suggests that θ V will be higher than the thermometer reading θH because thermal energy will travel by infra-red radiation and convection to the thermometer bulb above the lamp but by infra-red radiation only when the bulb is to one side of the lamp. If the experiment were to be repeated in order to investigate this suggestion it would be important to control the conditions. Suggest two such conditions, relevant to this investigation, that should be controlled. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... [2] (e) Briefly describe a precaution that you would take in this experiment in order to obtain a reliable result. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
[Turn over
6 3
The IGCSE class is determining the resistance of a fixed resistor in a circuit. The circuit is shown in Fig. 3.1. power source A d
R
resistance wire
A V Fig. 3.1 (a) A student places the sliding contact on the resistance wire at a distance d = 10.0 cm from point A. He measures the current I in the circuit and the p.d. V across the resistor R. He repeats the procedure using d values of 30.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 70.0 cm and 90.0 cm. The readings are shown in Table 3.1. Table 3.1
(i)
© UCLES 2012
V/V
I/A
10.0
1.7
1.13
30.0
1.3
0.87
50.0
1.0
0.67
70.0
0.8
0.53
90.0
0.7
0.47
Complete the column headings in the table.
0625/61/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
7 (ii)
Plot a graph of V / V (y-axis) against I / A (x-axis). You do not need to include the origin (0, 0) on your graph.
For Examiner’s Use
[5]
(iii)
Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
G = ................................................. [3] (b) The gradient G of the graph is numerically equal to the resistance R of the resistor R. Write a value for the resistance R to a suitable number of significant figures for this experiment. R = ................................................. [2] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
[Turn over
8 4
The IGCSE class is determining the focal length of a lens.
For Examiner’s Use
The apparatus is shown in Fig. 4.1. illuminated object
screen lens
x d Fig. 4.1 (a) A student places the lens between the object and the screen and close to the object. She moves the lens towards the screen until a clearly focused, enlarged image is formed on the screen. (i)
On Fig. 4.1, measure and record the distance d between the object and the screen. d = ......................................................
(ii)
On Fig. 4.1, measure and record the distance x between the centre of the lens and the screen.
x = ...................................................... [2] (iii)
Fig. 4.1 is drawn one tenth actual size. 1. Calculate the actual distance D between the object and the screen.
D = ...................................................... 2. Calculate the actual distance X between the centre of the lens and the screen. X = ...................................................... [1] (b) Without moving the illuminated object or the screen, the student moves the lens towards the screen until a clearly focused, diminished image is formed on the screen. She measures the distance Y between the centre of the lens and the screen: Y = 19.0 cm. Calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f =
XY . D
f = ................................................. [2] © UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
9 (c) The student turns the lens through an angle of 180° and repeats the procedure obtaining a value for the focal length f = 14.7 cm.
For Examiner’s Use
Theory suggests that the two values of the focal length f should be the same. State whether the results support this theory and justify your answer by reference to the results. statement ......................................................................................................................... justification ....................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... [2] (d) Briefly describe a precaution that you would take in this experiment in order to obtain a reliable result. .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
[Turn over
10 5
The IGCSE class is determining the internal volume of a test-tube using two displacement methods. The apparatus used is shown in Figs. 5.1, 5.2 and 5.3. cm3
cm3 100
100 90
90
80
80
70
70
60
60
50
water
measuring cylinder
test-tube
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
Fig. 5.1 (a) (i)
50
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.1 shows water in a measuring cylinder. Record the volume V1 of the water. V1 = ................................................. [1]
(ii)
On Fig. 5.1, show clearly the line of sight that you would use to obtain an accurate volume reading. [2]
(b) (i)
A student lowers a test-tube, closed end first, into the water in the measuring cylinder and pushes the tube down until it is filled with water. From Fig. 5.2, record the new water level V2. V2 = ......................................................
(ii)
Calculate the volume VG of the glass of the test-tube using the equation VG = (V2 – V1).
VG = ...................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
For Examiner’s Use
11 (c) The student removes the test-tube from the measuring cylinder and empties the water back into the measuring cylinder. He then puts the test-tube, open end first, into the water in the measuring cylinder and carefully pushes it down with his finger until it is covered with water as shown in Fig. 5.3.
For Examiner’s Use
finger cm3 100 90 80 70 60 test-tube
50 40 30 20 10
Fig. 5.3 (i)
Record the new water level V3. V3 = ......................................................
(ii)
Calculate the increase in water level (V3 – V1).
(V3 – V1) = ...................................................... (iii)
Calculate the volume VA of air in the test-tube using the equation VA = (V3 – V1) – VG. VA = ...................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
[Turn over
12 (d) The student removes the test-tube from the measuring cylinder and fills the test-tube with water from a beaker. He pours the water from the test-tube into an empty measuring cylinder and records the volume VW of water:
For Examiner’s Use
18 cm3 VW = ...................................................... The student has attempted to determine the internal volume of the test-tube by two methods. His two values for the internal volume are VA and VW. Assuming that the experiments have been carried out correctly and carefully and that the measuring cylinder scale is accurate, suggest two reasons why the value VA may be inaccurate and two reasons why the value VW may be inaccurate. VA: reason 1 ........................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... reason 2 ........................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... VW: reason 1 ........................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... reason 2 ........................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... [3] [Total: 9]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w om .c
s er
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 1 1 7 9 4 6 4 0 8 3 *
0625/61
PHYSICS Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
October/November 2012 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper No Additional Materials are required. READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page. Write in dark blue or black pen. You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs. Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. Answer all questions. At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use 1 2 3 4 5 Total
This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page. DC (CW/SW) 50194/4 © UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2 1
The IGCSE class is investigating the stretching of a spring.
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 1.1 shows the experimental set up. clamp spring
d0
bench Fig. 1.1 (a) On Fig. 1.1, measure the vertical distance d0, in mm, between the bottom of the spring and the surface of the bench. d0 = .......................................... mm [1] (b) The diagram is drawn 1/10th actual size. Calculate the actual distance D0, in mm, between the bottom of the spring and the surface of the bench. D0 = .......................................... mm [1] (c) A student hangs a 1.0 N load on the spring. He measures and records the distance D between the bottom of the spring and the surface of the bench, and the value of the load L. He repeats the procedure using loads of 2.0 N, 3.0 N, 4.0 N and 5.0 N. The distance readings are shown in Table 1.1. Calculate the extension e of the spring, for each set of readings, using the equation e = (D0 – D). Record the values of L and e in Table 1.1. Table 1.1 L/N
D / mm
e / mm
199 191 179 171 160 [2] © UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
3 (d) Plot a graph of e / mm (y-axis) against L / N (x-axis).
For Examiner’s Use
[4]
(e) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
G = .................................................. [2] (f)
When making measurements, the student is careful to avoid a line-of-sight error. Suggest one other precaution that the student should take when measuring the distance D between the bottom of the spring and the surface of the bench. .......................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... [1] [Total: 11]
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
[Turn over
4 2
The IGCSE class is investigating the rate of cooling of water under different conditions.
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 °C
The apparatus is shown in Fig. 2.1.
–10
0
10
20
30
40
thermometer
water
Fig. 2.1
Fig. 2.2
(a) Record the value of room temperature θR shown on the thermometer in Fig. 2.2. θR = .................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
For Examiner’s Use
5 (b) A student pours 150 cm3 of hot water into a beaker. She measures the temperature θ of the water at time t = 0 and records it in a table.
For Examiner’s Use
She starts a stopclock and records the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals until she has a total of six values up to time t = 150 s. The readings are shown in Table 2.1. She repeats the procedure, using 250 cm3 of hot water. Table 2.1 volume of water 150 cm3
250 cm3
θ/
θ/
0
84
85
30
79
79
60
74
75
90
70
72
120
68
70
150
66
68
t/
(i)
Complete the column headings in the table.
[1]
(ii)
State whether the rate of cooling is significantly faster, slower, or about the same when using the larger volume of hot water. Justify your answer by reference to the readings. statement ................................................................................................................. justification ............................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) If this experiment were to be repeated in order to check the results, it would be important to control the conditions. Suggest two such conditions that should be controlled. 1. ...................................................................................................................................... 2. ...................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 6] © UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
[Turn over
6 3
The IGCSE class is investigating the potential differences across circuit components.
For Examiner’s Use
Fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus used. power pack ammeter lamp N
lamp L
lamp M
voltmeter Fig. 3.1 (a) Draw a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in Fig. 3.1, using standard symbols.
[3] (b) A student records the current IA, the potential difference VL across lamp L and the potential difference VM across lamp M. 0.65 A IA = ...................................................... 0.9 V VL = ...................................................... 1.0 V VM = ...................................................... (i)
Calculate the potential difference VA across lamps L and M using the equation VA = VL + VM. VA = ......................................................
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
7 (ii)
Calculate RA, the combined resistance of lamps L, M and N, using the equation V RA = A . IA
For Examiner’s Use
RA = ...................................................... [2] (iii)
On Fig. 3.2, draw a pointer showing the current IA = 0.65 A. 0.4
0.6
0.2
0.8 1.0
0 A
Fig. 3.2
[1]
(c) The student rearranges the circuit so that the three lamps are in series with each other. He records the potential difference across each lamp in turn. 0.6 V VL = ...................................................... 0.7 V VM = ...................................................... 0.7 V VN = ...................................................... Calculate the potential difference VB across the three lamps using the equation VB = VL + VM + VN.
VB = ...................................................... (d) A student suggests that VA should be equal to VB. State whether the results support this suggestion and justify your answer with reference to the results. statement ......................................................................................................................... justification ....................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... [2] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
[Turn over
8 4
The IGCSE class is investigating the refraction of light passing through a transparent block. The apparatus and ray-trace sheet are shown in Fig. 4.1. O
A
B
D
P3
C
P4
eye
ray-trace sheet Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
For Examiner’s Use
9 (a) A student places the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet. She draws the outline of the block ABCD. (i)
On Fig. 4.1, draw a normal at the centre of side AB. Label the point E where the normal crosses AB.
(ii)
Draw a line FE to the left of the normal and at an angle of incidence i = 30° to the normal. [2]
For Examiner’s Use
(b) The student places two pins P1 and P2 on the line FE, placing one pin close to E. She observes the images of P1 and P2 through side CD of the block so that the images of P1 and P2 appear one behind the other. She places two pins P3 and P4 between her eye and the block so that P3 and P4, and the images of P1 and P2 seen through the block, appear one behind the other. (i)
On Fig. 4.1, mark suitable positions for the pins P1 and P2.
[1]
(ii)
Draw a line joining the positions of P3 and P4. Continue the line until it meets CD and label this point G.
(iii)
Draw the line GE. [1]
(c) (i)
Measure and record the angle of refraction r between the line GE and the normal. r = .................................................. [1]
(ii)
i Calculate the ratio r .
i r = .................................................. [1] (d) The student repeats the procedure but with the angle of incidence i = 40°. The angle of refraction r = 26°. (i)
i Calculate the ratio r .
i r = .................................................. [1] (ii)
i A student suggests that the ratio r should be a constant. State and explain briefly whether your results support this suggestion. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
[Turn over
10 5
(a) The IGCSE class has a range of apparatus available. Here is a list of some of the apparatus. ammeter barometer beaker electronic balance manometer measuring cylinder metre rule newtonmeter (spring balance) stopwatch tape measure thermometer voltmeter Complete Table 5.1 by inserting the name of one piece of apparatus from the list that is the most suitable for measuring each quantity described. Table 5.1 quantity to be measured
most suitable apparatus
volume of water a distance of about 50 m the force required to lift a laboratory stool the mass of a coin the pressure of the laboratory gas supply [5]
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
For Examiner’s Use
11 (b) The IGCSE class is carrying out a lens experiment. This involves using an illuminated object, a screen and a lens. Firstly, the distance between the illuminated object and the lens is measured with a metre rule. Next, a clearly focused image is obtained on the screen. (i)
Explain briefly how you would avoid a parallax (line-of-sight) error when using the metre rule. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
State a precaution that you would take to ensure that the image is well focused. .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. [1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
For Examiner’s Use
12 BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) – Multiple Choice May 1999 Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Correct Answer D C B D D C B B C D C C C A B B C C C A
Item 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Correct Answer B A D A C A C B C A B D A A A B A A C D
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) – Multiple Choice November 1999 Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Correct Answer A C C D C B C B C B B C B A A B B B A D
Item 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Correct Answer D D C D D B C A A B A D C A D D C C B A
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) – Multiple Choice May/June 2000 Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Correct Answer B A C B D B C A D B D C D D A B C D A A
Item 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Correct Answer C B B A C D A B D D A B A A C B D C B A
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) – Multiple Choice November 2000 Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Correct Answer D B D C C B B D A D B B D D C A B D C B
Item 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Correct Answer D B B B B C D A C B C D A D A D D C A B
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) – Multiple Choice May/June 2001 Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Correct Answer B B D B D B B A C C D B A C D D C B A C
Item 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Correct Answer B A D A A B C C D C B A A C A C B D B C
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) – Multiple Choice October/November 2001 Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Correct Answer A A B A B B C D C D D D A D A A B B A C
Item 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Correct Answer A B A B C D D C B C A C C A A C B B D C
Back to questions
Page 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2 3 4 5
A B B C D
21 22 23 24 25
D D B B B
6 7 8 9 10
C A D B B
26 27 28 29 30
D A A B D
11 12 13 14 15
A C B D B
31 32 33 34 35
C D A A C
16 17 18 19 20
A A A B D
36 37 38 39 40
B D A D B
Paper 1
TOTAL 40
Back to questions
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
Page 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – NOVEMBER 2003
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2
D C
21 22
A D
3 4 5
A C C
23 24 25
C B A
6 7
B C
26 27
B B
8 9 10
A C D
28 29 30
B B D
11 12
D B
31 32
C C
13 14 15
D D D
33 34 35
B B B
16 17
A D
36 37
C A
18 19 20
A B B
38 39 40
A C A
Paper 1
TOTAL 40
Back to questions
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
Page 1
Mark Scheme PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2
D A
21 22
C B
3 4 5
D A D
23 24 25
D C C
6 7
D C
26 27
C B
8 9 10
A B C
28 29 30
B A B
11 12
A A
31 32
C A
13 14 15
A C C
33 34 35
A A D
16 17
D D
36 37
A D
18 19 20
A C D
38 39 40
D B C
Paper 1
TOTAL 40
Back to questions
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2004
Page 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – November 2004
Syllabus 0625
Paper 1
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2 3
B B D
21 22 23
C C B
4 5
C D
24 25
B A
6 7 8
D D C
26 27 28
D C C
9 10
D A
29 30
D C
11 12 13
D A C
31 32 33
A C A
14 15
B C
34 35
B C
16 17 18
B C B
36 37 38
C A D
19 20
B A
39 40
C C
Back to questions
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – JUNE 2005
Syllabus 0625
Paper 1
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2 3 4 5
B D C D B
21 22 23 24 25
A A B B B
6 7 8 9 10
B A C C D
26 27 28 29 30
C A C D C
11 12 13 14 15
B B D C D
31 32 33 34 35
D B B D B
16 17 18 19 20
D C A D C
36 37 38 39 40
A B A C C
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – NOVEMBER 2005
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2 3 4 5
B B A D D
21 22 23 24 25
A B D B C
6 7 8 9 10
B B D B D
26 27 28 29 30
C D C B A
11 12 13 14 15
A B A D B
31 32 33 34 35
A C A A B
16 17 18 19 20
B A C C D
36 37 38 39 40
A A B B A
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Paper 1
Page 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2006
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2 3 4 5
A C C B B
21 22 23 24 25
B C C B B
6 7 8 9 10
D A A B A
26 27 28 29 30
C B B D A
11 12 13 14 15
B D B D C
31 32 33 34 35
C C D C A
16 17 18 19 20
A B A D D
36 37 38 39 40
A C D C D
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2006
Paper 01
Page 2
Mark Scheme GCE A/AS LEVEL - OCT/NOV 2006
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2
B B
21 22
D B
3 4 5
D D B
23 24 25
A C A
6 7
C C
26 27
C A
8 9 10
A B D
28 29 30
C B A
11 12
A B
31 32
D B
13 14 15
D C D
33 34 35
A A D
16 17
C B
36 37
B A
18 19 20
C D C
38 39 40
B D C
© UCLES 2006
Paper 01
Page 2
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2007
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2 3 4
A B A D
21 22 23 24
B B A B
5
B
25
D
6 7 8 9
C B C B
26 27 28 29
B B C C
10
B
30
B
11 12 13 14
D B D A
31 32 33 34
A D B C
15
B
35
A
16 17 18 19
D D C A
36 37 38 39
C D C D
20
C
40
A
© UCLES 2007
Paper 01
Page 2
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2007
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2 3 4
C A A D
21 22 23 24
B C C C
5
B
25
A
6 7 8 9
B C C A
26 27 28 29
C C B C
10
C
30
C
11 12 13 14
C D D D
31 32 33 34
B B B A
15
A
35
B
16 17 18 19
B B C B
36 37 38 39
D D C A
20
D
40
C
© UCLES 2007
Paper 01
Page 2
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2008
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2
B B
21 22
D C
3 4 5
C C B
23 24 25
A C A
6 7
C B
26 27
D A
8 9 10
D C D
28 29 30
B B A
11 12
C C
31 32
B A
13 14 15
A C B
33 34 35
B A B
16 17
D D
36 37
C C
18 19 20
A B A
38 39 40
A B B
© UCLES 2008
Paper 01
Page 2
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2008
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2
C D
21 22
D C
3 4 5
B B B
23 24 25
A C C
6 7
A A
26 27
B C
8 9 10
C A A
28 29 30
B B C
11 12
D B
31 32
C D
13 14 15
C C C
33 34 35
B B A
16 17
B D
36 37
B C
18 19 20
C B D
38 39 40
B C D
© UCLES 2008
Paper 01
First variant Mark Scheme Page 2
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2009
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2
C C
21 22
D B
3 4 5
B B D
23 24 25
A C C
6 7
A A
26 27
A C
8 9 10
B C C
28 29 30
A B C
11 12
B A
31 32
D A
13 14 15
C A D
33 34 35
B C B
16 17
A A
36 37
B A
18 19 20
C C D
38 39 40
B C C
© UCLES 2009
Paper 11
Page 2
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2009
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2
B A
21 22
B C
3 4 5
C D A
23 24 25
B D D
6 7
B A
26 27
D C
8 9 10
D D C
28 29 30
B D A
11 12
B D
31 32
D C
13 14 15
B D C
33 34 35
A C D
16 17
B A
36 37
A D
18 19 20
B C B
38 39 40
C B B
© UCLES 2009
Paper 11
Page 2
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2010
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2 3 4
C A B B
21 22 23 24
A D C D
5
B
25
A
6 7 8 9
A D C B
26 27 28 29
B D B B
10
A
30
D
11 12 13 14
A A D D
31 32 33 34
C B C A
15
C
35
D
16 17 18 19
C C A D
36 37 38 39
A D B B
20
C
40
B
© UCLES 2010
Paper 11
Page 2
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2010
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2 3 4
A D D D
21 22 23 24
C B C D
5
D
25
A
6 7 8 9
B C B C
26 27 28 29
D C C C
10
C
30
A
11 12 13 14
B D A C
31 32 33 34
C C A C
15
A
35
A
16 17 18 19
D A B B
36 37 38 39
A B D C
20
B
40
D
© UCLES 2010
Paper 11
Page 2
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2011
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2
A B
21 22
D D
3 4 5
A D A
23 24 25
C C A
6 7
A C
26 27
A B
8 9 10
D B D
28 29 30
B D D
11 12
C D
31 32
A B
13 14 15
D C C
33 34 35
C A D
16 17
A A
36 37
B C
18 19 20
B B C
38 39 40
B C C
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Paper 11
Page 2
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2
B D
21 22
B C
3 4 5
D B C
23 24 25
D D C
6 7
A C
26 27
C B
8 9 10
B C C
28 29 30
A B D
11 12
D C
31 32
C B
13 14 15
D C C
33 34 35
D B C
16 17
D A
36 37
B A
18 19 20
A C A
38 39 40
B B A
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Paper 11
Page 2
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2
A C
21 22
D A
3 4 5
B D B
23 24 25
C C C
6 7
D A
26 27
D A
8 9 10
C C B
28 29 30
D C D
11 12
C B
31 32
C D
13 14 15
A A D
33 34 35
B C B
16 17
A D
36 37
D C
18 19 20
A D B
38 39 40
B B B
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Paper 11
Page 2
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
Question Number
Key
Question Number
Key
1 2
C A
21 22
C A
3 4 5
B A C
23 24 25
D B C
6 7
C A
26 27
A B
8 9 10
D D C
28 29 30
A B B
11 12
B B
31 32
B B
13 14 15
D B D
33 34 35
B A C
16 17
D D
36 37
A D
18 19 20
A B B
38 39 40
D C D
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Paper 11
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) – Core Theory May 1999 1
2
(a)(i) (ii) (b)
3
(a) (b)
4
(a) (b) (c)
5
(a) (b)
speed = distance/time in any form 20/50 0.4 (cm/s)
1 1 1 3
W1 towards pivot, or equivalent pivot between W & W1 closer to W
1 1 1 1 4
middle box ticked solid molecules vibrating / moving about a fixed position gas molecules faster, move on one path until collision
1
chemical heat (or equiv.) light (or equiv.) motion OR kinetic position OR potential geothermal
1 1 1 1 1 1 6
straight line through origin calculate gradient OR R = V/I
1 1 1 3
2 3
6
(a) (b) (c) (d)
dispersion OR refraction spectrum red red (ideally, “those colours which are not absorbed by the red filter”)
1 1 1 1 4
7
(a) (b)
coil turns current-carrying coil in magnetic field experiences turning effect (allow l for reference to force on current-carrying conductor/coil) (electric) motor (ignore reference to d.c. or a.c.) OR galvanometer etc
1
idea of avoiding contamination idea of preventing radiation getting out idea of warning of the presence of radioactive material
1 1 1 3
volume = l x w x h 3 volume of paper = 0.3 x 0.2 x 0.05 OR 0.003 (m ) density = mass/volume in any form OR 2.4 or 2.4(stated) 0.3 x 0.2 x 0.05 candidate's volume 800 allow e.c.f. if working shown
1 1 1
(c)
8
9
(a) (b) (c) (a)(i) (ii)
-1-
2 1 4
1 1
3
(b) (c)
(d)(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 10
(a)
(b) (c) (d)(i) (ii) 11
(a)(i)
(ii) (iii) (b)(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) 12
(a)(i) (ii) (iii) (b)(i) (ii) (c)
kg/m 24N 24 OR candidate's weight substituted at top 0.3 x 0.2 OR 0.06 substituted at bottom 400 allow e.c.f. if working shown 2 N / m OR Pa half (NOT “less”) same half (allow ecf from (i)) half (allow ecf from (i))
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15
ruler close to spring measure original length OR note reading of bottom of spring/other reference hang load measure final length OR note new reading of bottom of spring etc subtract straight line sloping up through origin straight line through origin, but smaller slope increases speed OR accelerates same increase same force
1
ON DIAGRAM tube, closed at top reservoir mercury at suitable levels in tube & reservoir appropriate meniscus on mercury (x3) LABELLING any 2 from: tube, reservoir, mercury, vacuum, scale atmospheric pressure h indicating mercury column clear & correct indication of distance 5 (cm) idea of excess pressure less L.H. mercury higher than R.H. mercury LH down, RH up BOTH bigger A and H G and F B and E any waveform reasonably constant “period” (by eye) reasonably constant amplitude (by eye) vertical line different spacing lady’s “waves” closer together than man’s “waves” (allow 1 only for: man’s “waves” more irregular shape)
-2-
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) – Core Theory November 1999 1
(a) (b)
volume = l x b x h = 8 x 5 x 2 3 = 80 (cm ) line shown at 80 mark
1 1 1 1 4
2
(a) (b)
dot at intersection of AX and BY straight line through C and candidate’s centre of mass
1 1 2
3
(a) (b) (c) (d)
attraction repulsion attraction nothing
1 1 1 1 4
4
(a)(i) (ii) (b)(i) (ii)
BC had to lift own weight / overcome gravity greater same ( or greater) work less time / faster / power = work/time
1 1 1 1 1 5
5
(a)
series circuit using recognisable symbols correct symbols for switch and cell / battery correct symbol for battery (b)(i) second bell in parallel with first (ii) more current / amps / charge / energy from battery
1 1 1 1 1
6
(a)
1 1 1 1 1 5
(b) 7
8
9
normal clearly and correctly shown angle i correctly marked angle r correctly marked ray bent upwards parallel to incident ray by eye Any two from reference to convection hot water rises no convection if heated at the top Any three from nucleus at centre electrons in outside nucleus electrons in orbital / shell number of electrons equals the charge on the nucleus
(a)(i) fA shown between slit and lens A clear and correct indication of distance (ii) fB shown between lens B and screen clear and correct indication of distance (b)(i) Any two of the following pairs ray from top of O parallel to axis (by eye) down through F (± _ mm) ray from top of O through P (± _ mm) continuing straight on
-1-
2 2
3 3 1 1 1 1
(ii) (iii)
10
11
Any five relevant points core coil on right hand limb coil on left hand limb iron primary secondary a.c. input output laminations etcetera (b) good conductor / low resistance / reduction of energy loss (c)(i) correct rearrangement of equation correct substitution VS = 30 (V) (ii) zero (d) the same / a little less because of losses
4 1 1 1 1 1 13
(a)
(a) (b) (c)
(d)
12
ray from top of O through F’ (± _ mm), not shown parallel to axis after lens (by eye) (Additional incorrect rays subtract 1 for each) Both rays bending at centre line / refraction at both surfaces image in correct position ecf for own image drawn real inverted larger
(a) (b) (c)
(d)
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 11
any two different properties appropriate means of detecting these properties idea of a reference point idea of a physical event which occurs at one temperature steam / boiling water 100 melting ice / freezing water 0 any reference to standard pressure / pure / steam in above melting point correctly indicated boiling point correctly indicated correct region identified
2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14
air molecules moving (not vibrating) randomly rapidly molecule moving towards the wall molecule bouncing off the wall collision with wall many force / push on wall move faster / gain more energy more / harder collisions (with wall) greater pressure
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 12
-2-
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) – Core Theory May/June 2000 1
(a) (b) (c)
weight mass greater density OR less air gaps between potatoes
2
(a)
Any three from: conduction convection radiation evaporation suitable procedure correct form of heat loss for candidate’s procedure
(b)(i) (ii) 3
(a) (b)
4
(a) (b)(i) (ii) (c) (i) (ii)
5
(a)
(b)(i) (ii) (c)
1 1 1 3
3 1 1 5
wind wire round iron bar both ends of coil connected to battery extra valid point e.g. cut off length of wire, strip ends etc. suitable check e.g. picking up iron(filings) deflects compass needle repels another magnet move into coil connected to galvanometer
1 1 1
refraction (allow slowing down of light/ angle of refraction) normal correct, by eye i “correctly” shown between candidate’s normal and ray refraction away from normal along ST 1. (total internal) reflection 2.angle in water> critical angle
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
idea that light travels faster than sound extra detail e.g. light travels extremely fast / much faster than sound / 8 instantaneously / at 3x 10 m/s
1
echo OR equivalent idea of absorption of sound / dispersion / diffraction / sound has travelled further / lower air density at altitude speed = distance/time in any form (distance = ) approximately 330 x 4 1320(m)
1
1 4
1
1 1 1 1 7
6
(a)(i) (ii) (b)
smoke particles ticked 3rd box ticked 4th box ticked
1 1 2 4
7
(a)(i) (ii) (iii)
potential OR stored OR position OR gravitational (potential) kinetic OR motion OR movement turbine(s) OR coil(s) OR blade(s) OR rotor / fins / wheel electrical / electricity
1 1 1 1
1
(b)
Any two from: waves tides steam geothermal
2 6
8
(a)(i) (ii) (b)(i) (ii) (c) (d) (e) (f)
320 candidate’s value correctly plotted ± _ small square 160 candidate’s value correctly plotted ± _ small square points plotted at (60,80)and (80,40) ± _ small square smooth curve through candidate’s points, by eye either of last two boxes ticked randomness OR idea of background
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8
9
(a)(i) (ii)
D large(st) area least pressure / pressure more spread out increases decreases length AB √ width BC √ thickness CD √ area touching the horizontal surface √ mass of sheet weight of sheet density of metal √ pressure on surface √
1 1 1
(b)
10
(a) (b)(i) (ii) (c) (i) (ii)
11
(a) (b) (c) (d)(i) (ii)
12
(a)(i) (ii) (b)(i)
stays the same 1 √ √
1 1 1 1 1 9
R = V/l in any form 12/1.5 8_ 12(V) 0.75 (A) 16(_) OR 2 x candidate’s (a), correctly evaluated 16 (_/m) OR candidate’s (b)(ii) 64/candidate’s(ci) 4 (m) OR 64/candidate's (ci) correctly evaluated
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9
sound infra-red X-rays no air / vacuum on the moon implied 1. sound needs a medium/air 2. radio waves don’t need a medium/air radio / _ wave
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
B greater force / weight / heavier reference to formula or constancy of length B
1 1 1 1
2
(ii) (c) (d)(i) (ii)
greater weight / force / heavier reference to formula or constancy of height lifted weight (of hammer) OR mass OR force time (to lift) energy of motion OR K.E. Any two from: heat. OR frictional sound K.E. of nail
3
1 1 1 1 1
2 11
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) – Core Theory November 2000 1 2
speeding up steady speed (a) (b)
slowing down at rest
4
YES YES NO increase diameter (accept “size”) of handle (accept “tap”) OR change to type B/C OR “oil it”
3 1 4
3
(a)(i) (ii) (iii) (b)
31 (m/s) 6 OR 11 0R 22 (m/s) 10 (s) distance = area under graph OR distance = average speed x time _ x l0 x 15 75 (m)
1 1 1 1 1 1 6
4
(a) (b)(i) (ii)
A, D, E, H ticked E or H evaporates more rapidly/easily
4 1 1 6
5
(a) (b)(i) (ii)
internal /(random) thermal / kinetic / heat / motion / movement beaker + water / second one / middle one 1. 250 (g) 2. 250 (g) 3. 1050(J) 4. 200(J) idea that sand requires less energy to raise its temp / temp of sand rises more for same energy input / equivalent statement for water / water has bigger SHC
1 1 1 1 1 1
6
(a)(i) (ii) (iii) (b) (c)(i) (ii)
7
(a) (b)(i)
(ii) (c) 8
(a) (b)
normal correct, by eye reflected ray correct, by eye i and r identified by X’s OR angles with mirror identified by X’s dot in correct position ±2mm ear on right identified 60 (cm)
1 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 6
refraction OR deviation different path (could be from 2nd surface) below red path starting at first surface 2 downward refractions, not below normal at first dispersion T somewhere just above emergent ray
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
density = mass/volume in any form 12.6/1.4 3 9 (g/cm )
1 1 1
-1-
9
(c) (d) (e)
no e.c.f. brass OR sensible deduction from candidate’s (b) aluminium
(a)
R=R + R 60 (_) p.d./current OR voltage/current OR volt/amp OR V/I OR 6/I etc correct rearrangement 6/60 or candidate’s answer to (a) 0.1 ecf A OR amp(s) (b)(ii) x 40 4 OR candidate’s correct evaluation V or volt(s) answer to (c) or 4 (V)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11
6 90/6 OR 90/ candidate’s answer to (b)(i) 15cm e.c.f. 1. (arcs of) circles 2. constant depth same speed in all directions (or equiv.) OR same wave spacing indication of vertical motion up and down OR circles transverse longitudinal OR pressure indication of motion along KL backwards and forwards OR back and forth
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 12
(b)(i) (ii)
(c) (d) 10
(a)(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (b)(i) (ii)
11
(a)(i) (ii) (b)(i) (ii)
12
(a)(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (b)
1
2
passes a current / charge / electricity) (NOT conducts electricity”) OR (some) electrons free to move about does not pass a current / does not conduct electricity / all charges/electrons fixed OR bad conductor repel / move away first and third boxes ticked 84 or bottom one 210 or top one 84 OR bottom one 210 - 84 OR 126 OR take bottom from top OR take proton no. from nucleon no. 206 82
-2-
1 1 1 6
1 1 1 2 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 6
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) – Core Theory May/June 2001 1
2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
(a) (b) (i) (ii)
3
(a) (b) (i) (ii)
4
5
(a) (i) (ii) (b) (c)
6
(a) (b) (c)
7
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
8
(a) (b) (i)
3.05 ticked 3.35 ticked 30 (minutes) e.c.f. 30/5 e.c.f. 6 (minutes) e.c.f
1 1 1
some idea of turning/rotating effect (of the force) OR force x (perpendicular) distance same X marked (on branch) at vertical through A ± 1/2 mm
1 1 1 1 4
idea of air molecules moving idea of air molecules striking something idea of air molecules striking balloon move faster OR more energy increases idea of "more collisions" OR "harder collisions" OR "greater momentum change" OR "greater force"
1 1 1 1 1
orientation and size reasonably correct vertical edge correct distance from mirror (by eye) all three corners correct position (by eye)
1 1 1 3
A and G OR B and H OR C and I B and C OR E and F OR H and I number of waves / oscillations / cycles / wavelengths / crests / troughs per second / unit time / divided by time 1/0.2 5 (Hz)
1 1
+ve and no charge circled does not conduct / bad conductor electricity / charge / current / electrons any acceptable recognisable insulator
2 1 1 1 5
0.1 (A) IR 1.2 (V) c.a.o. voltmeter / multimeter set to volts range larger 12+5+3 20 (_)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
alternating / a.c. N P/N s OR IS / Ip iron NOT steel 12Ns = 100/50 in any form
1 1 1 1
2 5
1
1 6
2 1 1 6
(ii) (iii) 9 (a) (b) (c) (d)
6 (V) 6 (V) 0 (V) OR "it won't work"
1 1 1 7
Graph special case: 4 for a perfect line but no visible points 3 for poor line through our points points correctly plotted ± _ small square reasonable line through candidate's points distance = area under graph OR average velocity x time _ x base x height OR _ x 3 x 15 22.5 (m) 25 (m/s) distance = speed x time (in any form) OR area under graph 25 x 3 e.c.f from (c) 75 (m) e.c.f. from (c)
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11
10
(a) (b) (c) (i) (ii) (d) (e)
same greater chemical food potential OR PE OR gravitational OR position PE decreases KE increases energy turned to sound idea of energy losses OR idea of sound becoming heat
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9
11
(a) (i)
0.2 x 0.1 x 0.06 OR 20 x10 x 6 -3 1.2 x 10 OR 0.0012 OR 12000 3 3 m OR cm according to working candidate’s volume x 2400 (kg) 2.88 (kg) 1440 (kg) less OR lighter OR mass in (a)(ii) is greater different from brick greater than brick
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9
electrons / cathode rays (NOT _-particles) something moving across screen / hitting the screen idea of fluorescence / luminous / glows / mention of fluorescent screen idea of greater flow / energy of electrons / more electrons / increased intensity of cathode rays / electrons move faster OR increase anode voltage / increase electron gun voltage (Y) input OR Y-plates 1.Y gain OR volts/(cm) (NOT Y-shift) 2. time-base OR ms/(cm) NOT X-shift 3.vertical line OR dot moving up and down
1 1 1
(ii) (iii) (b) (i) (ii)
12
(a) (i)
(ii) (b) (i) (ii)
2
1 1 1 1 1 8
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) – Core Theory October/November 2001 1
(a) (b)
2
16 (cm) 16/8 e.c.f. 2 (cm) e.c.f.
1 1 1 3
wider base idea of lowering C of M e.g. heavier base, make it shorter
1 1 2
3
(a) (b) (c) (d)
heat it increases any suitable example any suitable example
1 1 1 1 4
4
(a)
ray refracted down parallel to incident ray (by eye) Total Internal Refraction shown Correct angle (by eye) ray strikes surface at more than critical angle straight on at first surface straight on at second surface
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
should be refraction at first surface should be dispersion at first surface thermometer / thermocouple / bolometer / hand / thermopile / thermistor / thermochromic paper / goggles NOT I.R. detector I. R. shown above red
1 1
(b)(i) (ii) (c)
5
(a) (b)(i) (ii) (c)
any two from: radio (or TV), microwave, ultra-violet (or UV), x-rays, y-rays (NOT cosmic)
6
(a) (i) (ii) (iii) (b)(i) (ii) (iii)
bar magnet held at each end of rod, implicit in answer magnet won't attract / repel (either end) magnet attracts both ends magnet repels (one end) OR "the one left after the others are identified" iron (or ferromagnetic) electricity / current (in coil) switch off current OR equiv. NOT switch off electromagnet
7
(a)
any two from: mention of a fault / short-circuit large current NOT increased current overheating of cables fire (electric) shock water conducts / transfers electricity (NOT "water and electricity don't mix") possible short circuit OR possible (electric) shock
(b) (c) 8
(a)
some indication that nucleus changes any particle emitted
1
1 1
2 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
2 1 1 1 5 1 1
(b)(i) (ii) (iii) (c)
9
(a)(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (b)(i) (ii) (c)(i) (ii) (d)(i) (ii)
10
(a)(i) (ii) (iii) (b) (c)(i) (ii)
11
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
12
(i) (ii) (b) (c)
becomes a different atom / nucleus / nuclide / element 5 (min) 4 OR 20/candidate’s half-life correctly evaluated 25 ± 5.... only 022 100 (NOT –1) (milli)ammeter OR multimeter set to amp / current range A e.c.f. voltmeter OR multimeter set to volt / p.d. range V e.c.f. resistor / resistance variable RHEOSTAT (2) NOT potentiometer vary current OR vary p.d. across R NOT vary resistance find gradient OR choose one point and use p.d./current correct figures from graph seen or implied 5 _ OR ohm greater straight line through origin greater slope e.c.f. from (i)
1 1 1 1 2 2 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14
aluminium greatest density OR "because mass increases as density increases aluminium OR candidate’s (a) (i) aluminium OR candidate’s (a) (i) A smallest area small area OR "because pressure increases as area decreases" great pressure (on sand) any sensible suggestion involving larger area in contact with sand (must involve chair and sand)
1
temperature NOT °C mercury OR alcohol OR pentane 100 °C NOT C° or C stays the same OR "nothing" ice pure OR melting any detail of sensible apparatus
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8
bigger temperature difference the glass is thin OR the window is a good conductor OR because it isn't double-glazed sum of figures quoted 4 150 000 (J/hour)
1
Any one of: convection radiation through roof/ceiling through floor
2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9
1 1 1
draughts opening door/ window NOT switching on air conditioning
3
1 5
w
w
ap eP
m
e tr .X
w
om .c
s er
Page 2
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003
QUESTION 1
8
(b)
EITHER greater AND Thickness of rule OR overlap at ends
2
(a)
(b)
3
(a)
(b)
TARGET GRADE F
SCHEME
(a)
Syllabus 0625
OR smaller AND thread stretched when on rule OR worn rule ends
Paper 2
MARK B1
F
B1 2
(i)
10
F
B1
(ii)
stretch OR shape (or suitable sketch)
C
B1
(i)
120
F
B1
(ii)
up(wards) OR vertical (NOT vertically down) Accept arrow on diagram
F
B1
(iii)
increase size/area of blocks/larger blocks OR increase number of blocks OR less soil in pot (NOT put pot on harder ground)
F
B1 5
0.97 – 0.51
F
C1
0.46
F
A1
(i)
15
F
B1
(ii)
515 e.c.f.
C
B1
(iii)
D = M/V in any form, seen or implied (words/letters/mix)
F
C1
EITHER
OR
OR
460 515
0.46 515
0.46 515 ´ 10-6 e.c.f.
C
C1
893.2…No e.c.f. 8.932… ´ 10-4 (any number of significant figures)
C
C1
0.8932…
0.89
8.9 ´ 10-4
890 (e.c.f. for significant figures)
C
A1
g/cm3 (0.89 kg/dm3 is OK)
kg/cm3 (NOT 8.9-04)
kg/m3
F
B1 9
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
Page 3
4
(a)
(b)
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003
(a)
(b)
6
(a)
(b)
Paper 2
idea of air molecules moving (allow vibrating) (N.B. ‘collide’ = ‘moving’)
F
C1
idea of air molecules striking something (condone themselves)
F
C1
idea of air molecules striking walls
C
A1
(i)
moves down
F
B1
(ii)
increases (e.c.f.)
F
M1
C
A1 6
line starting at 0 oC
F
B1
reasonably horizontal line at any temp for > half the time
C
horizontal from zero time as far as dotted line (ignore anything to R. of line)
C
M1 mark alongside graph A1
(i)
C
idea of more collisions (per unit time) (e.c.f.) OR P µ V1
5
Syllabus 0625
must follow from (i)
water boils OR heat loss = heat supplied (NOT evaporates/ turns to gas)
mark (i) and (ii) together
B1
C
(ii)
gives water/molecules energy to escape OR break bonds OR change state OR heat loss from sides/surface/to air
(i)
normal correct, by eye
F
B1
(ii)
reflected ray correct, by eye (ignore normal; ignore any arrow)
F
B1
(iii)
both i and r correctly marked (condone sloppy normal and sloppy refracted ray)
F
B1
C
B1 4
parallel to ray striking mirror 1 (allow incident ray) OR same direction (NOT equal/same as) (N.B. sentence must be completed, i.e. no inference from line on diagram)
B1 5
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
mark alongside diagram
Page 4
7
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003
(a)
680
(b)
5 points plotted ± ignore 0,0 (e.c.f.)
(c)
8
9
1360
B1
small square (-1 e.e.o.o.)
F
B2
reasonable line through his points – drawn with rule/thickness reasonable
F
B1
(i)
flash
F
B1
light travels quickly OR sound travels slowly (accept figure)
F
C1
light travels faster than sound (accept figure)
F
C1
light travels much faster than sound (accept figures)
C
A1
1400 - 1450 OR correct value from his graph ± 12 square
F
B1
clear and correct indication on graph of how obtained (minimum: dot at appropriate point)
F
B1 10
1 2
1700
Paper 2
F
(iii)
1020
Syllabus 0625
(a)
Charge(s) OR energy (NOT electricity (condone as extra), charged particles (condone as extra), current, electrons (condone as extra), voltage)
C
B1
(b)
(i)
0
C
B1
(ii)
mention of 6V
F
B1
mention of rising OR not instantaneous (NOT ‘reads’)
C
B1
(iii)
any realistic example of something turned on/off after a time lapse, e.g. electronic egg timer, turn-off bedside radio
F
B1 6
(i)
wire shown curved between A and B
F
C1
wire displaced all along between A and B, and reasonably smooth
C
A1
idea of force (in any direction)
F
M1
on current/current-carrying conductor
C
A1
when in magnetic field
C
A1
(a)
(ii)
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
mark alongside diagram
Page 5
10
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
(b)
line curved in opposite direction
F
B1 6
(a)
(i)
electrons OR cathode rays (NOT betaparticles)
F
B1
something ‘hitting’ the screen (NOT ‘form a spot’)
F
B1
idea of fluorescence (of the screen, NOT ‘the gas’)
C
B1
(ii)
focus
C
B1
(iii)
time base OR ms/cm
C
B1
(iv)
electrons/cathode rays deflected (e.c.f. from (i); allow ‘attracted’ if intention clear)
F
B1
something deflected horizontally
C
M1
some idea of repeated sweeps/back and forth
C
A1
(i)
(y-)input (allow y-plates)
F
B1
(ii)
1. trace moves horizontally/sideways/left/right
C
B1
2. trace moves vertically/up/down
C
B1 11
Connection to either side of cell, but not shorted out
F
B1
VR in series with lamp, and not shorted out OR correctly connected as a potential divider (condone inclusion of a switch)
F
B1
(i)
R1 + R2
F
C1
12
F
A1
1. Resistance = p.d./current in any form (words/letters/mix)
F
C1
6/12 e.c.f.
C
C1
0.5 or 12 e.c.f.
C
A1
(b)
11
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003
(a)
(b)
(ii)
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
mark alongside diagram
Page 6
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
2. his calculated current his calculated current
all 3
C
B1
A OR amp OR ampere somewhere in (ii)
F
B1
(iii)
C
B1 10
his calculated current
12
voltmeter shown correctly connected (any recognisable symbol; allow re-drawn circuit)
(a)
his weight
F
B1
(b)
distance OR height
F
B1
(c)
(i)
1000N climber OR heavier OR first
F
B1
(ii)
his answer to (i)
F
B1
(i)
chemical (accept fuel)
C
B1
(ii)
food (accept muscles)
C
B1
(iii)
maintaining body function C
B1 7
(d)
heat loss K.E. sounds
any 1
Mark first correct answer, condone extras
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
mark alongside diagram
Page 2
Mark Scheme PHYSICS – NOVEMBER 2003
QUESTION 1
(a)
Syllabus 0625
SCHEME
Paper 2
TARGET GRADE
MARK
(i)
G within block, to left of vertical through midpoint or AB
F
B1
(ii)
Vertical line shown through A
C
B1
A
F
M1
more stable (or equivalent statement) e.g. less likely to topple or “weight within base”
F
A1
so it does not topple over (or equivalent)
F
B1
(b)
(c)
5 2
reference mark on wheel
*“(use stopwatch to) time…” gets only one of these
datum line (could be “top” or “bottom”) *start timing/stopwatch as mark passes datum line time a number of rotations (accept 1 here) time at least 20 rotations
5C
B5
any 5
*stop stopwatch divide time by number of rotations repeat make sure stopwatch at zero 3
5
gravitational OR potential OR PE OR GPE
F
B1
3F
B3
C
B1
motion OR KE OR kinetic heat/internal/thermal
any order (–1 eeoo)
sound heat (accept potential) OR internal/thermal NOT strain potential/NOT chemical potential NOT sound, even as an extra 4
(a)
(b)
(i)
(ii)
5
vehicle 2
F
M1
large(r) area (in contact with ground)
C
A1
low/less pressure
C
A1
less likely to sink/get stuck
F
A1
small area
F
C1
large pressure
F
B1
(weight spread over) large(r) area NOT body area
C
B1
small/less pressure
C
B1
reference to weight somewhere in (b)
C
B1 9
5
(a)
(i)
ray perpendicular to surface at A (by eye)
F
B1
(ii)
normal at B correct (by eye)
F
B1
(iii)
ray refracted down at B, but NOT along surface
C
B1
(iv)
normal at D correct (by eye)
F
B1
(v)
ray refracted up at D, but NOT along surface
C
B1
Page 3
(b)
(a)
Syllabus 0625
converging OR will meet OR *one up, one down ALLOW * “opposite”
C
B1
straight on OR split (depending on thickness of “ray”) OR no change (indirection) OR not refracted
F
B1
(i)
speed
F
B1
(ii)
frequency, ALLOW wavelength
C
B1
(iii)
wavelength
F
B1
gamma OR γ OR cosmic
C
B1
8
4
condone x-rays as an extra (a)
(b)
B1
*only if diagram acceptable
C
(b)
7
Paper 2
same deviation (or equivalent) OR “angles of refraction same” (c)
6
Mark Scheme PHYSICS – NOVEMBER 2003
straight line sloping up to right
F
B1
through origin
F
B1
(i)
voltmeter OR multimeter on volts range (condone spelling)
F
B1
(ii)
potential difference OR p.d. OR volts/voltage (no e.c.f.)
F
B1
(iii)
ammeter OR multimeter on current/amps range (condone spelling)
F
B1
(iv)
current OR intensity OR amps/amperes OR ampage (no e.c.f.) NOT A
F
B1
(v)
evidence of 7.5
F
C1
evidence of 0.3
F
C1
7.5/0.3 OR V/I OR volts/current e.c.f. if written down
C
C1
25 e.c.f. only if V/I used
C
A1
Ω or ohm
C
B1
hisR/50
F
C1
0.5 (Ω/m) e.c.f.
C
A1
(vi)
13 8
(a)
(b)
EITHER
OR
iron filings
(plotting) compass
F
B1
NOT “put” sprinkle/spread/pour/scatter
place near end of magnet 0000
F 0000000
B1 000000
tap card
mark end(s) of compass
C
B1
further detail
further detail
C
B1
F
B1
attraction of compass S pole repulsion of compass N pole attraction of S pole of another magnet repulsion of N pole of another magnet
any 1
attraction of Earth’s N pole repulsion of Earth’s S pole
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
5
Page 4
9
(a)
(i)
(ii)
(iii) (b)
Mark Scheme PHYSICS – NOVEMBER 2003
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
decreases
F
M1
by 2
C
A1
decreases
F
M1
by 2
C
A1
decreases
C
B1
66 (yrs)
F
C1
evidence of 3 half-lives
C
C1
fraction 1/8 seen or implied
C
C1
400
C
A1 9
1 small square (–1 eeoo) ignore 2 0,0 (–1 for very large blobs)
3F
B3
(b)
45 circled OR 2 circles ACCEPT point circled on graph
F
B1
(c)
idea of stretching more than before (for same load increase) OR reference to elastic/proportional limit in some way
C
B1
10 (a)
points plotted correctly ±
(d)
11 (a)
EITHER
OR
measure unloaded length ALLOW “measure spring” NOT extension
idea of fixed end and free end
F
B1
measure loaded length NOT extension
note position of free end, no load
F
B1
subtract
measure movt. free end, loaded
F
B1 8
(i)
100
F
B1
(ii)
0
F
B1
(iii)
indication to the left of 0°C mark
C
B1
C
B1
(b)
expansion of a solid expansion of a gas/pressure of a gas current/pd/e.m.f. of a thermocouple conductivity/resistance of a conductor/wire/thermistor…..
any 1
colour of a hot wire melting of a wax NOT expansion of alcohol ACCEPT density of a liquid N1/N2 = V1/V2
12 (a)
(b)
in any form
4 F
C1
8000/N2 = 240/6 or correct substitution into correct equation
F
C1
200
F
A1
ALLOW B1 for 20 if 800 used instead of 8000 (working must be shown)
(i)
200 e.c.f. i.e. his (a)
F
B1
(ii)
400 e.c.f. i.e. 2 x his (a), evaluated
C
B1 5
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
Page 2
Mark Scheme PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
QUESTION
1
3
Paper 2
TARGET GRADE
MARK
(a)
10
F
B1
(b)
division by 5 OR division by 6
F
C1
2.0 OR 2
C
A1
10 × his(b) OR 11 × his(b)
F
C1
20
C
A1 5
straight vertical arrow upwards to/from rail
F
B1
arrow to R of centre of rail
F
C1
arrow at R.H. end of rail (within 2 × width of resting block)
F
A1
(b)
moment ticked
F
B1
(c)
reduce weight/mass OR shorten rail, lighter rail, thinner rail, open sideways, suitable long handle, suitable 2 pulley system
F
B1 5
(a)
PQ or 0-50s or the horizontal part NOT just P or just Q
F
B1
(b)
changing speed (however indicated) NO e.c.f from (a). ACCEPT “acceleration” but NOT “increasing speed”
F
B1
(c)
distance = area indicated in words or figures anywhere in (c)
F
B1
20 × 50
F
C1
1000
F
A1
½ × 20 × 50 OR ½ × his(i)
C
C1
500
C
A1
(iii)
his(i) + (ii) correctly evaluated
F
B1
(iv)
his(iii)/100 OR total distance/total time stated
F
C1
correct evaluation
F
A1 10
(c)
2
SCHEME
Syllabus 0625
(a)
(i)
(ii)
c.a.o
c.a.o
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2004
Page 3
4
(a)
(b)
(c)
5
6
7
Mark Scheme PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
(horizontal) force allow F
F
B1
distance (travelled from A to B) condone “perpendicular” allow D OR d OR S
F
B1
goes faster OR less time
F
B1
accelerates
C
B1
(i)
2nd person (however expressed)
F
B1
(ii)
more work/energy OR bigger force OR pulls harder
F
B1
smaller time OR greater speed (“more work/second” gets B1, B1)
C
B1 7
(a)
drops OR decreases OR cools down
F
B1
(b)
idea of loss of molecules (from surface) OR molecules evaporate
F
M1
more energetic/faster molecules (SPECIAL CASE remaining molecules slower B1)
C
A1
(c)
any sensible example where cooling is noticeable e.g. (feeling cold) after swimming, sweating, refrigerators
C
B1 4
(a)
(increased) internal energy OR (increased) KE of molecules OR (increased) thermal/heat (energy)
C
B1
(b)
any mention of thermal capacity
C
C1
smaller thermal capacity
C
A1 3
light wave fastest
2F
B1+B1
longitudinal
F
B1
transverse
C
B1
transverse
F
B1
F
B1 6
(a)
water wave slowest (b)
(c)
light wave ticked
) ) )
use + = 0 if extras
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2004
Page 4
8
9
A B C D
Syllabus 0625
magnet OR magnetised magnet OR magnetised iron OR unmagnetised aluminium
Paper 2
F F C C
B1 B1 B1 B1 4
(a)
points plotted correctly ( ± ½ small square)
3F
B3 (-1 eeoo)
(b)
smooth curve through points by eye, not too thick
F
B1
(c)
correct construction lines shown (allow dot on curve at correct place)
C
B1
correct value from his graph, based on 800-400 ( ± ½ square)
F
B1
(i)
smaller
F
B1
(ii)
the same OR no change
C
B1 8
(i)
less turns on secondary ACCEPT “because Np=4800 and Ns=200” ACCEPT “sycoil < pycoil” NOT “secondary < primary”
F
B1
(ii)
V2/V1 = N2/N1
F
C1
correct substitution
F
C1
10
F
A1
1. decreases
F
B1
2. runs slower OR will not work e.c.f. from (iii)1.
F
B1
3C
B3 9
(d)
10
Mark Scheme PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
(a)
(iii)
(b)
in any form
ignore stage 1 from stage 2 onwards…… B E A D
) ) ) )
(3 marks for any 3) (2 marks for any 2) (1 mark for any 1)
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2004
Page 5
11
(a)
(b)
Mark Scheme PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
(a)
thermistor
F
B1
(ii)
variable resistor (accept rheostat)
F
B1
(iii)
light-dependent resistor (ACCEPT LDR)
F
B1
(i)
1. resistance = p.d./current OR R=V/I OR any correct reorganization ACCEPT mixture of words and letters
F
B1
2. 12/0.5 OR correct sub in his 1, if shown
F
C1
24 c.a.o
F
A1
Ω OR ohm
C
B1
1. decreases
F
B1
2. idea of greater resistance
F
B1
3. dimmer OR does not glow/work/shine NOTE: NO e.c.f. in (ii)
C
B1 10
beard tip to dot perpendicular to mirror (by eye)
F
B1
distance beard tip to mirror = dist. mirror to dot (by eye)
F
B1
reflected ray along line from eye to his dot (by eye)
C
M1
incident ray from beard tip to join reflected ray at mirror
C
A1
arrows from beard to eye
C
B1
(iii)
virtual
C
B1
(iv)
angle of incidence = angle of reflection OR i = r OR “they are equal” OR “sini = sinr”
F
B1
(i)
right hand
F
B1
(ii)
mark shown under L.H. eye on Fig. 11.2
F
B1 9
(i)
(ii)
(b)
Paper 2
(i)
(ii)
12
Syllabus 0625
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2004
Page 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – November 2004
Question
Scheme
1
(a)
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
Target Grade
Mark
96
F
B1
(b)
top left eye circled
F
B1
(c)
100 – 96 e.c.f.
F
C1
4 e.c.f.
F
C1
4/80 e.c.f.
F
C1
0.05 e.c.f.
F
A1 6
2
(a)
(b)
(i)
21
F
B1
(ii)
1 increases
F
B1
2 falls ) ) both e.c.f. 3 rises )
F
B1
(i)
same
C
B1
(ii)
greater (accept comparison of directions)
C
B1 5
3
(a)
(i)
0.6 x 0.5 x 0.2
F
C1
0.06
F
A1
3
m
C
B1
mass/volume
F
C1
7.2/his(i)
F
C1
120 e.c.f.
F
A1
kg/m3
C
B1
(i)
“greater than” ticked
C
B1
(ii)
Because of the air in the corrugated cardboard
C
B1
(ii)
(b)
9 4
(a)
(b)
(i)
chemical ) internal OR heat OR thermal ) any 2 but also accept ) nuclear OR kinetic OR potential for one of the marks
2F
B1, B1
(ii)
radiation
F
B1
(i)
K.E. OR kinetic OR motion
C
B1
(ii)
conduction
F
B1
(iii)
1
gravitational OR P.E. OR potential OR position
F
B1
2
chemical/fuel/food
C
B1 7
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 2
5
(a)
(b)
(c)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – November 2004
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
bright specks OR (smoke) particles OR dots NOT molecules, NOT air particles
F
B1
something moving (however expressed)
F
M1
rapidly OR randomly OR zig-zag
F
A1
air molecules OR air particles (NOT just “air”)
C
M1
collisions between smoke particles and air mols/particles
C
A1
invisible fast moving random
2C
B1, B1
F
B1
) ) any 2 )
Idea of faster movement or more jerky movement
8 6
(a)
aluminum
F
B1
copper
F
B1
gold
F
B1
insulator NOT non-conductor
F
B1
(i)
copper OR aluminum OR gold
F
B1
(ii)
any of the insulators
F
B1
(d)
convection
F
B1
(e)
intelligent mention of convection currents
C
B1
(b) (c)
(accept “to make sure always covered by water” NOT “heat rises”) 8 7
(a)
(i)
(ii)
speed = distance/time in any form
F
C1
correct substitution in his equation OR 1600/5
F
C1
320 c.a.o.
F
A1
C
B1
2C
B1, B1
light travels instantaneously/very fast OR reference to reaction time NOT just faster than sound
(b)
explosion heard sooner/less than 5s second sound/echo/reflection (from rock face) louder
) ) any 2 ) )
6
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 3
8
Mark Scheme IGCSE – November 2004
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
repulsion
F
B1
repulsion
F
B1
attraction
F
B1
attraction
C
B1
attraction
C
B1 5
9
(a)
(b)
(i)
3 3
(ii) (i) (ii)
) ) both
F
B1
10 + 10
F
C1
20
F
A1
1
1.5A ticked
F
B1
2
3A OR 3.0A
C
B1
C
B1
5 Ω ticked
6 10
(a)
electrons
F
B1
(b)
neutrons OR atoms
F
B1
(c)
electrons
F
B1
(d)
electrons
F
B1
(e)
protons
C
B1
neutrons
C
B1
protons
C
B1
neutrons
C
B1
(f)
8 11
(a) (b)
(i)
A or E
F
B1
(ii)
CE or AC or 2.5 cm
F
B1
2f, 1C
B1, B1, B1
F
B1
real inverted enlarged
(c)
) ) ) mark in pairs using ✓ + ✗ = 0 ) )
any ray from 0’ to I’ refracting at mid-line of lens or refractions at both surfaces
6
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 4
12
(a) (b) (c)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – November 2004
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
(i)
line from B to intersection
F
B1
(ii)
dot at printed intersection
F
B1
L.H. ornament
C
M1
lower C of M
C
A1
block A
F
M1
narrower/smaller base
F
A1 6
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – JUNE 2005
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
Question
Scheme
Target Grade
1
100 – 20
F
C1
level shown at 80 (ignore meniscus) ± 1mm (need not actually draw surface)
F
A1
(i)
16 (cm)
F
B1
(ii)
sub of (i) into formula
F
C1
sub of 100 into formula
F
C1
6.25
F
A1
C
B1
(a)
(b)
e.c.f. from (i)
2
cm
Accept working from any two correct values 2
(a)
Mark
7
2100 – 900
F
C1
12 OR
F
A1
F
B1
10.06 (i.e. travel time)
(b)
1500
(c)
1
F
B1
(i)
find area of first trapezium (or equivalent) bold area under graph
C
B1
(ii)
find total area
C
M1
divide by total time OR divide by 12 OR divide by travel time
C
A1
(d)
(ignore unit) OR 15.00 OR ‘1500 to 1800’
7 3
(a) (b)
it turns
F
M1
clockwise
C
A1
(i)
stationary OR nothing
F
B1
(ii)
horizontal arrow (intention of from OR to pivot condone gap, if clear)
F
M1
to left
F
A1
10 (N)
C
B1 6
4
(a)
gravitational
F
B1
(b)
kinetic
F
B1
(c)
kinetic
C
B1
(d)
electrical
F
B1
(e)
internal
C
B1
ACCEPT heat
condone valid extras
5
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 2
5
(a)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – JUNE 2005
(i)
increased
(ii)
molecules move faster/have more energy
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
F
B1
C
B1
more frequent collisions (condone with each other)/harder collisions
C
B1
collisions with walls
C
B1
idea of collisions causing a force
C
B1
(i)
evaporation
F
B1
(ii)
energy of molecules increases/molecules move faster
C
B1
molecules escape/break bonds
F
C1
faster/higher energy molecules escape
C
A1
OR collisions more energetic
(b)
9 6
(a)
resistance = voltage/current words, figures, mix
F
C1
2F
A1+A1
candidate’s 4 points correctly plotted ± ½ small square -1 e.e.o.o.
2F
B2
(i)
reasonable curve, smooth, not too thick
F
B1
(ii)
resistance/temperature changes smoothly
C
B1
(i)
1500 - 1700 OR candidates lowest point on graph, quoted correctly
C
B1
(ii)
idea of lowest resistance
C
B1
330 (b) (c) (d)
in any form, letters,
6.3
9 7
(a)
(from L to R) infra red (OR x rays/gamma rays
µwave)/ ultra violet/
sound ticked
4F
B1 x 4
F
B1 5
8
(a)
(b)
one 90° deviation at 1st mirror, by eye
F
C1
two 90° deviations at 1st mirror, by eye
F
A1
emerging rays parallel to incident rays, by eye
F
B1
upside down OR inverted OR same size OR real
C
B1 4
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 3
9
(a)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – JUNE 2005
Syllabus 0625
) ) OR speed = 2 x distance/time )
Paper 2
speed = distance/time
(b)
F
C1
2 x 249/332
F
C1
1.5
F
A1
2C
B1 + B1
0.75 and 2.25 ticked extras
in any form
e.c.f. use + x = 0 for
Mark (b) independent of (a) 10 (a)
(b)
5
(i)
conductor OR metal
F
B1
(ii)
metal (but not if answer to (i)) OR any named metal OR any named liquid conductor
F
B1
(ii)
apply an e.m.f. OR apply a p.d. OR equivalent
C
B1
(i)
insulator extra)
F
B1
(ii)
any suitable example
F
B1
F
B1
(c)
NOT non-conductor (but condone as
insulator OR ‘(b)(i)’ e.c.f. from (b)(i) NOT the name of a type of insulator
just
6 11 (a)
same ticked
F
B1
(b)
2
C
B1
(c)
R1 + R2 in any form, letters or numbers
F
C1
4
C
A1
(d) (e)
e.c.f. from (b)
(i)
1Ω ticked
F
B1
(ii)
more than 0.3A ticked
C
B1
(i)
increases/stretches
F
B1
(ii)
increases c.a.o.
C
B1 8
12 (a)
1 (unit)
/
neutral /
1/1800 (unit) OR tiny / OR outside nucleus 1 OR OR negligible 2000 in shell NOT zero (b)
zero
/
-1 (unit)
in nucleus /
in orbit
NOT just negative OR
4F,2C
B1 x6
(i)
proton and neutron
F
B1
(ii)
1.
4 (units)
C
B1
2.
(+)2 (units) NOT -2
C
B1 9
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – NOVEMBER 2005
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
MARK 1
(a)
8.5 (cm)
B1
(b)
19.0 OR 19 (± 0.1) (cm)
B1
(c)
his (b) – his (a)
C1
his correct subtraction
A1 [4]
2
(a)
distance/time
C1
25/2
C1
12.5
A1
m/s
B1
(b)
less OR decreased OR slowing down
B1
(c)
more than ecf
B1 [6]
3
(a)
(b)
skate
M1
small area (in contact with ice)
A1
large area ) wind causes large force on side of truck ) any 2 vehicle liable to blow over )
B1,B1 [4]
4
(a)
40 or 160
B1
(b)
720
B1
(c)
W=Fxd
C1
720 x 0.2
C1
144
A1
J OR joule
B1
his(c)/1.2
C1
his(c)/1.2 correctly evaluated
C1
0.5 x his(c)/1.2 correctly evaluated i.e. 60 gets C1, C1, A1 and 120 gets C1, C1, A0) W OR watt OR J/s
A1
(d)
B1 [10]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 2
5
Mark Scheme IGCSE – NOVEMBER 2005
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
(a)
level in tube lower, or equivalent
B1
(b)
air has expanded (could be scored in (a), but not twice) OR Kinetic Theory application to pressure
B1
(c)
any sensible comment e.g. limited temp range, air bubbles out of tube, slow acting, large volume of air, change in air pressure, no scale
B1 [3]
6
(a)
(i)
(ii) (b)
current (in coil)
B1
magnetic field (around coil)
B1
magnetised OR attract
B1
current zero at first (even if only at origin)
B1
horizontal first part
B1
vertical rise somewhere
B1
horizontal final part
B1 [7]
7
(a)
three rays parallel and horizontal
B1
(b)
(i)
both principal foci marked
B1
(ii)
refraction at mid-line, then through F (allow 2 surface refractions if lead back to mid-line)
B1
(iii)
ray through F to mid-line, then parallel (allow as (ii))
B1
(iv)
image drawn between axis and intersection, perpendicular to axis C (condone no labelling)
B1
drawing accuracy mark for image 2 squares tall ± 2mm and 4 squares away ± 2mm
B1 [6]
8
(a)
(b)
(i)
iron OR steel OR any ferromagnetic material (B0 if magnetised stated)
B1
(ii)
1. nothing ecf from (i) 2. nothing
B1 B1
L.H. compass pointing to R
B1
top compass pointing to L
B1
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 3
Mark Scheme IGCSE – NOVEMBER 2005
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
bottom compass pointing to L
B1 [6]
9
(a)
(b)
1 correct
C1
2 correct
C1
4 correct
A1
(i)
all 6 components shown in series (any order) ecf from (a) for symbols
B1
(ii)
voltmeter connected across cell, either our diag or his
B1
(iii)
both
B1
(iv)
0.5
B1
(v)
current stops OR ammeters read zero OR other bulb goes out
B1 [8]
10 (a)
(b)
10 x 4 x 6.5
C1
260 (cm3)
A1
D = M/V in any form, words, letters, numbers, mixed
C1
250/his V
ecf if written down
C1
0.961538
any no. of sig figs ecf
C1
0.96 ecf
A1
g/cm3 unless inconsistent with his figures
B1 [7]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 4
11 (a)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – NOVEMBER 2005
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
electrons
B1
(b)
A
B1
(c)
(i)
D
B1
(ii)
idea of detecting electrons/making spot visible
B1
(d)
deflects them
B1
(e)
no air OR no molecules OR no particles OR “nothing”
B1
to stop/slow down/absorb the electrons/cathode rays
B1 [7]
12 (a)
(b)
(i)
time taken for (B0 for half the time)
B1
activity/count-rate/mass etc.
B1
to decrease to half original value
B1
(ii)
radiation due to surroundings
B1
(i)
80 – 25
C1
55 cao
A1
1. 27.5 ecf
B1
2. 52.5 ecf
B1
(iii)
15 ± 1 ecf
B1
(iv)
background remains, even when source has decayed
B1
(v)
curve to the left of existing one
B1
flattening out at 25 count/min
B1
(ii)
[12]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 1
1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2006
Syllabus 0625
TARGET GRADE F F
(a) larger area smaller pressure (b) (i) get larger OR get firmer (ii) molecules move faster ) more collisions (per second) ) pressure increased )
F any 2
(c) (i) increases
3
5
B1 B1 + B1 B1
F C C
B1 B1 B1 9
2F
B2
(b) AB x BC x CD OR l x b x h OR his figures shown multiplied
F
B1
(c) cm3 OR cu.cm OR cubic cm
F
B1 4
(a) P and Q
F
B1
(b) R and S
F
B1
(c) (i) D = M/V in any form, including our figures
F
B1
C C C
C1 A1 B1 6
(a) 6.0 ± 0.1 ) 2.4 ± 0.1 ) 3.1 ± 0.1 )
-1 each error or omission
(ii) 57.5/25 2.3 g/cm3 4
2C
MARK B1 B1
F
(ii) smaller volume more collisions (per second) anywhere in (b)(ii) or (c)(ii), collisions with walls 2
Paper 02
(a) chemical, gravitational, internal, kinetic (if more than 4 ticked, use + = 0 )
2F,2C B1 x 4
(b) kinetic
F
B1
(c) potential
F
B1
(d) chemical
C
B1 7
(a) idea of greater speed idea of molecules further apart
F C
B1 B1
(b) (i) any suitable example involving expansion or contraction e.g. thermometer, thermostat, bimetal strip, rivets, fitting steel tyres
F
B1
C
B1 4
NOT
internal
(ii) any suitable example involving expansion or contraction e.g. expansion gaps in bridges etc, overhead cables, cracking glass
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2006
Page 2
6
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2006
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) wavelength labelled clearly ± 3mm wavelength labelled clearly ± 1mm
F C
C1 A1
F C
M1 A1
F
M1
F
A1 6
(a) ray bent down at first surface not below normal ray bent down at second surface
F F C
M1 A1 B1
(b) (i) dispersion ticked
F
B1
(ii) red
C
B1
(iii) violet (allow B1,B0 if red and violet both written but interchanged)
C
B1 6
(a) end/point on magnet idea of pointing N (when freely suspended)
C F
B1 B1
(b) repulsive
F
B1
(c) (i) S at top and N at bottom
F
B1
F
B1 5
F F
M1 A1
3F
B3
(ii) reasonable curve
F
B1
(iii) 8 (days) ± 0.5 OR his correct value ± 0.5 correct working shown on graph (minimum: dot on line)
C C
B1 B1 8
C
B1
(ii) filament
F
B1
(iii) electrons ticked
F
B1
(iv) line along axis (by eye) OR conical beam along axis
F
B1
(v) light or glow indicated somehow
F
B1
(b) beam deflection shown beam deflected upwards indication of curve (condone curve outside electric field)
F C C
C1 A1 B1
(c) idea of no obstruction for cathode rays/electrons
C
B1 9
(ii) horizontal line anywhere between top & bottom of wave pattern (b) (measure time for) (count number of) (measure time) (a number of ) OR (waves passing ) OR (for 1 wave ) (waves to pass ) ( ) (to pass ) OR in 1 second OR f = 1/T f = no. of waves time 7
8
(ii) disappears 9
Paper 02
(a) strontium-90 decays most slowly OR longest half-life (b) (i) points correctly plotted ± ½ small square
10 (a) (i) A and B (both)
-1 each error or omission
OR A and C (both)
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2006
Page 3
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2006
Syllabus 0625
11 (a) (i) 10 x 2.5 25 (m)
Paper 02
F F
C1 A1
F F F
C1 M1 A1
(b) 75/2.5 30 (m/s)
C C
C1 A1
(c) accelerated
F
B1
(d) total distance = 3000 (m) total time = 150 (s) average speed = total distance/total time 3000/150 20 (m/s)
F F C C C
C1 C1 C1 C1 A1 13
F F F
B1 B1 B1 3
(ii) speed = distance/time in any form 500/10 50 (s)
12 L1 joined to R3 or R1 L2 joined to R4 L4 joined to R1
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2006
Page 3
Mark Scheme IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006
QU. 1
SCHEME
MARK
55 (s)
B1
(b)
55/5 ecf
C1
11 (s) ecf
A1 OR
OR
OR
300/hour
1 takes 11s
5 takes 55s
1hour for 300
B1
= 5/min
300 take 3300s
300 take 60x55s
3600/300s for 1
B1
takes less than 1 min for 5
less than 1hr for 300
less than 1hr for 300
1 takes less time than this
B1
YES/NO ticked according to his working
3
4
Paper 2
(a)
(c) EITHER
2
Syllabus 0625
B1 7
2nd box ticked
B1
3rd box ticked (use + = 0 for extras)
B1 2
(a)
OP
accelerating
B1
PQ
accelerating
B1
QR
constant speed
B1
RS
slowing down (however expressed)
B1
(b)
O and S (both)
B1
(c)
6 (m/s)
B1
(d)
70 (s)
B1
(e)
find area OPQRS (however expressed)
B1 8
(a)
(i)
radiation
B1
(ii)
conduction
B1
(i)
kinetic (however expressed)
B1
potential (however expressed)
B1
idea of energy loss or friction
B1 5
(b)
(ii)
© UCLES 2006
Page 4
5
Mark Scheme IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006 (a)
(b)
6
7
(a)
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
(magnitude of) force
B1
distance (from fulcrum)
B1
(i)
force
B1
moment OR turning effect
B1
(ii)
F1 + F 2 + W
B1
(iii)
F
B1 6
(i)
eye to image line perpendicular to mirror, by eye
B1
object distance = image distance, by eye
B1
(ii)
normal correctly drawn, by eye
B1
(iii)
ray to bottom edge of mirror correct
M1
reflected ray at correct angle to mirror, by eye (condone sloppy normal)
A1
(b)
sensible attempt at explanation
B1
(c)
(i)
2 (m) (NO ecf)
B1
(ii)
distance lady to mirror = 3 (m)
C1
distance moved = 2 (m) (NO ecf)
A1
away from mirror/wall
B1 10
(i)
large, OR accept any large example e.g. cliff
B1
(ii)
speed = distance/time OR speed = 2xdistance/time (in any form)
C1
correct substitution
C1
480 (m) c.a.o.
A1
(a)
(b)
speed = 6/50 OR 3/50
C1
0.12 (m/s) OR 0.06 (m/s)
A1 6
© UCLES 2006
Page 5
8
9
Mark Scheme IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006 (a)
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
(i)
(group) 1
B1
(ii)
(group) 2
B1
(iii)
plastics OR glass OR ebonite
B1
(b)
top – and bottom +
B1
(c)
region/area/space etc.
B1
charge
B1
experiences a force
B1 7
(a)
good straight line through first 5 points, drawn with a rule
B1
(b)
intelligent attempt at a reason
B1
(c)
67 – 40
C1
27 (mm)
A1
2.4 – 2.5 (N)
B1 5
less turns on Sy OR more turns on Py
B1
(b)
voltage OR p.d. OR volts is less
B1
(c)
V1/V2 = N1/N2 in any form
C1
correct substitution
C1
12 (V)
A1
voltage too high OR bell would be damaged
B1 6
92
B1
(b)
orbit OR outside nucleus
B1
(c)
146
B1
(d)
nucleus
B1
(e)
decreases
M1
by 2
A1 6
(d)
10 (a)
(d)
11 (a)
© UCLES 2006
Page 6
Mark Scheme IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006
12 (a)
Syllabus 0625
Paper 2
reverse connections to ammeter or battery
B1
(b)
current OR amps OR amperes
B1
(c)
4 components in series (ignore symbols)
B1
4 recognisably correct symbols (ignore connections)
B1
(i)
voltmeter OR multimeter on volts scale
B1
(ii)
voltmeter shown connected in parallel with resistor
B1
(d)
(e)
I = V/R in any form correct substitution
C1 no ecf from wrong equation
C1
0.4 (A) c.a.o.
A1
(f)
his value of (e)
B1
(g)
(i)
7.5 Ω ticked
B1
(ii)
increases current e.c.f.
B1 12
© UCLES 2006
Page 3
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2007
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02 TARGET MARK GRADE
1
(a) seconds hand at 35 s minutes hand at or just to R of 60 (up to ½ division)
F C
B1 B1
(b) seconds hand at 55 s minutes hand between 4 and 5
F C
B1 B1
(c) 4 minutes 20 s
F
B1 [Total: 5]
2
(a) speed = distance/time in any form OR 4800/12 400 (s)
F F
C1 A1
(b) straight line up to 12 m/s, 20s ± ½ small square horizontal line for 400 s (e.c.f. for start point and from (a)) straight line down to 0 m/s at 500 s
F F F
B1 B1 B1
F C C
C1 A1 A1
C
A1
F F
C1 A1
(c) distance = ½ base x height OR area under graph OR equation of motion accel. distance = 120 m decel. distance = 480 m NOTE: NO MARKS for using (d) and then going back to (c) total distance = 120 + 4800 + 480 stated (d) average speed = total distance/total time OR 5400/500 OR 5400/920 10.8 (m/s) OR 11 (m/s) c.a.o.
[Total: 11] 3
(a) (i) indication of force at A upward vertical force OR upward force at rt. angles to card
F C
M1 A1
F
B1
(b) when C of M lies outside base (idea of) when vertical through C of M lies outside base (idea of)
F C
C1 A1
(c) (i) less than
F
B1
C
B1
(ii) largest distance from hinge
(ii) idea of C of M of box raised OR matchbox less stable NOT matchbox is taller
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
Page 4 4
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2007
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) large (bird)
Paper 02 F
M1
F
A1
(b) greater the same
F F
B1 B1
(c) small (bird)
F
B1
(d) lost/turned into/decreased (accept turned into KE) as heat ignore mention of sound
F C
M1 A1
(ii) greater weight/mass/force of gravity/heavier
[Total: 7] 5
(a) solid: gas:
2, 3 and 6 ticked 1, 4 and 5 ticked
-1 each error ( use + = 0 for extras) -1 each error ( use + = 0 for extras)
(b) molecules breaking free (of surface) NOT turns into a gas mention of higher energy/faster/mols near surface
F, C F, C
B2 B2
F C
M1 A1 [Total: 6]
6
(a) [mark in pairs, use + = 0] temp. decreasing volume increasing
F F
B1 B1
(b) (i) moved out/backwards/to the R
F
M1
C
A1
(ii) idea of raised temp increases pressure, therefore move piston out to decrease pressure
[Total: 4] 7
(a) (i) (good) conductor OR equiv. NOT conductor of electricity
F
B1
(ii) poor conductor OR (good) insulator (allow electrical) OR to stop your hand getting burned/prevent shock
F
B1
F
B1
F, C
B1+B1
C
B1
(b) (i) conduction (ii) any 2 of conduction, convection, radiation ticked (-1 if evaporation ticked) (c) equal to 40W
[Total: 6] © UCLES 2007
Page 5 8
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2007
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02
(a) 50
F
B1
(b) his (a) x 4 200 (Hz) e.c.f.
F F
C1 A1
(c) Yes, because it is between 20 – 20,000 Hz or more than 20 Hz allow e.c.f. from (b) answer must tally with (b)
C
B1 [Total: 4]
9
(a) (i) series OR potential divider
F
B1
(ii) 12 (Ω)
F
B1
(iii) I = V/R in any form 6/his (ii) 0.5 e.c.f. A OR amp(s) OR ampere(s) OR a
F F F F
C1 C1 A1 B1
(iv) his (iii) x 10 5 (V) e.c.f.
F F
C1 A1
(v) his (iv)
C
B1
C C
B1 B1
C
B1
(b) (i) 1. 6 (V) 2. 0 (V) (ii) C or clear mark positioned below A but not lower than bottom of the word contact” allow e.c.f. only if 6 and 0 in (i) are reversed
[Total: 12] 10 (a) connect wire across/to millivoltmeter (any mention of connecting to electricity/battery gets B0 here)
F
B1
F
B1
(b) millivoltmeter deflects
F
B1
(c) generator OR transformer OR induction coil OR coil on a car OR microphone NOT relay/motor/power station etc
F
B1
move wire across magnetic field OR move magnet past wire OR dip magnet into coil made of the wire (condone connect to battery/electricity here)
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2007
Page 6
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2007
Syllabus 0625
11 (a) dot to right of S: horiz. line from end/pole, to right (must not curve) dot to left of N: horiz. line from end/pole, to left (must not curve) dot by top LH corner: smooth curve from end/pole, above magnet, to equivalent point at south end dot below magnet: smooth curve between N and S curve leaving & entering side of magnet, not ends (b) arrow clearly indicating N to S
Paper 02 F F
B1 B1
F F C
B1 M1 A1
F
B1 [Total: 6]
12 (a) (i) 2, 2, 0 (accept blank for 0)
F
B1
(ii) 0, 0, 1 (accept blank for 0)
F
B1
(b) protons: 11 neutrons: 13 electrons: same as his protons
F C F
B1 B1 B1
(c) (i) 0
C
B1
(ii) -1
C
B1
(iii) β OR electron OR e OR B OR beta NOT b
C
B1 [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
Page 3
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2007
QU. 1
Syllabus 0625
SCHEME
Paper 02 MARK
(a) 60 (cm3)
B1
(b) liquid surface lower than in cylinder liquid surface level with 15 cm3 (± 5 cm3)
C1 A1
(c) less
B1 [Total: 4]
2
(a) 200,000 (m3)
B1
(b) D = M/V in any form his (a) x 1.3 260,000 c.a.o. kg
B1 C1 A1 B1
(c) decreases air expands OR density decreases
M1 A1
(d) hot air rises
B1 [Total: 8]
3
(a) 7.5 (cmHg) 75 (cmHg) (give C1, A1 for 1.0006 x 105 Pa or 1 x 105 Pa (N/m2) if unit given)
C1 A1
(b) nothing OR (Torricellian) vacuum OR Hg vapour
B1
(c) tube level lower reservoir level higher (any amount)
B1 B1
(d) pressures on 2 surfaces equal (always) Hg levels equal (always) OR no Hg column no change when pressure changes
) ) )
any two
B1+B1 [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
Page 4
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2007
QU. 4
Syllabus 0625
SCHEME
Paper 02 MARK
(a) (i) arrow labelled W, vertically (by eye) down from somewhere on either boat
B1
(ii) arrow labelled F, down slope, between either boat and slipway
B1
(b) (i) multiply W by (vertical) height raised OR Wh
B1
(ii) multiply F by distance along slope OR Fs
B1
(iii) add (i) and (ii)
B1
(c) time taken
B1 [Total: 6]
5
(a)
o
C
B1
(b) (i) ICE marked at 0
B1
(ii) STEAM marked at 100 (c) expansion/volume/pressure expansion/length resistance bending e.m.f/voltage colour colour change
B1 OF OF OF OF OF OF OF
a gas a solid a resistor/thermistor/wire a bimetal strip a thermocouple a hot surface certain chemicals
) ) ) ) any 2 ) ) )
B1+B1
[Total: 5] 6
(a) (i) uniform acceleration
B1
(ii) 9 (m/s)
B1
(iii) s = vt in any form 90 (m) OR 10 x his (ii), evaluated
C1 A1
(b) average speed is lower
B1 [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2007
Page 5
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2007
QU. 7
Syllabus 0625
SCHEME
Paper 02 MARK
(a) (i) 1.5 (cm)
B1
(ii) circle centred on X, outside printed circle (circle need not be drawn with a compass, but must be carefully drawn) diameter 4.5 cm by eye (b) sound longitudinal, water transverse sound wave faster (than water wave) different frequency/wavelength
) ) )
any 2
M1 A1
B1,B1 [Total: 5]
8
(a) (i) principal focus unambiguously marked focal length approximately indicated focal length precisely indicated, from pole to principal focus (ii) any ray from X to Y, correctly refracted at lens
B1 C1 A1 B1
(b) [mark in pairs, using + = 0] real diminished inverted image distance less
B1 B1 B1 B1
(c) gets smaller gets closer to lens
B1 B1 [Total: 10]
9
(a) points correctly plotted (±½ small square) smooth curve through his points reasonable thickness
–1 e.e.o.o.
B2 B1 B1
(b) (i) 5.3 – 6.1
B1
(ii) 0.9 – 1.7
B1
(c) R = V/I in any form division by 25 or 25 x 10–3 somewhere
C1 C1
(i) answer between 220 and 240
B1
(ii) answer between 40 and 60 Ω shown in either (i) or (ii)
B1 B1
(d) answer compatible with his (c)
B1 [Total: 12]
© UCLES 2007
Page 6
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2007
QU.
SCHEME
10 (a) (i) shape appropriate outside coil (condone incomplete loops) lines mostly parallel within coil pattern roughly symmetrical no lines touching or crossing (ii) iron bar
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02 MARK M1 A1 A1 A1 B1
(b) rods become magnetised same direction repel
M1 A1 B1 [Total: 8]
11 (a) within range 18–20 (mins)
B1
(b) (i) 922 or thereabouts
B1
(ii) his (a)
B1
(c) alpha OR beta
B1 [Total: 4]
12 (a) electrons
B1
(b) move towards P1
M1 A1
(c) idea of making both P3 and/or P4 positive equal potential (earthing of P1 and P2 not required for answer)
B1 B1
(d) fluorescent screen OR any other appropriate method
B1 [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
Page 3 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2008
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) 9.2 ± 0.2 (cm)
Paper 02 [B1]
(ii) Centre of mass at centre of rod anywhere between a line vertically above the ‘i’ and the and a line vertically above the left hand ‘1’ in ‘Fig. 1.1’, anywhere across diameter including the surface but NOT outside the surface [B1] (b) Centre of mass clearly to left of centre, inside the rod
[M1]
anywhere between a line vertically above the ‘t’ in ‘to’ and a line vertically above the ‘t’ in the first ‘the’ AND on axis (by eye) [A1] [Total: 4] 2
(a) (i) suitable scale, probably 5 small squares = 10 s, no awkward ratios (ii) (if no scale written on graph, assume our scale) straight line from origin reaching 25 m/s after 10 s NOT horizontal from (0,25) – (10,25) horizontal from 10 – 50 s straight line down from end of his horizontal line reaching axis at 70 s (b) average speed = total distance/total time 1375/his 70 19.64… e.c.f. any number of sig. figs 20 (m/s) e.c.f.
[B1] [B1] [B1] [B1] [B1] [B1] [C1] [C1] [C1] [A1] [Total: 10]
3
F3
[B1]
anticlockwise: F1 F2
[B1] [B1]
(a) clockwise:
(b) c [M1] clockwise moment (accept moment on RH side) was too big [A1] reduce moment by reducing distance [A1] note: moment must be mentioned in both of the last 2 marks; accept turning effect, torque and leverage as alternatives to moment (c) any value bigger than 29 g and less than 30 g, but NOT 29 g or 30 g
[B1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2008
Page 4 4
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2008
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) P.E. (however expressed) (e.g. GPE, gravitational, gravity, potential, positional) (ii) chemical
Paper 02 [B1] [B1]
(b) electrician AND because he is heavier/greater force/greater weight/greater gravity force/ greater mass [B1] (c) time AND either work done OR energy used OR equivalent OR weight AND velocity/speed
[B1] [Total: 4]
5
(a) nucleus OR nuclei OR α-particle NOT nucleon or nuclide
[B1]
(b) electron(s) OR e allow β-particle
[B1]
(c) neutron(s) OR n proton(s) OR p
[B1] [B1]
(d) alpha OR α NOT a or A
[B1]
(e) electron(s) OR e allow β-particles
[B1] [Total: 6]
6
(condone rays not drawn with a ruler, if reasonably straight) (a) straight ray through centre of lens (±1 mm on axis by eye) (ignore any arrows)
[B1]
(b) (i) ray correct, either through pole or reasonably parallel to axis and then through F1 (±1 mm in either case) NOTE: any refraction must be at centre line or at both surfaces
[B1]
(ii) (condone image not labelled if it is clear where it is; condone image labelled as ‘object’ if image line clearly drawn) image located at his intersection, even if intersection of incorrect rays [C1] image drawn between axis and his intersection, and not beyond either [A1] (c) clear indication of screen at candidate’s image, using vertical line
[B1] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2008
Page 5 7
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2008
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02
(a) gas ) solid ) any 1 correct liquid ) remaining 2 both correct
[B1] [B1]
i.e. gas, solid, liquid: 2 marks gas, liquid, solid: 1 mark liquid, solid, gas: 1 mark liquid, gas, solid: 0 marks solid, liquid, gas: 0 marks solid, gas, liquid: 1 mark (b) (i) liquid
[B1]
(ii) idea that molecules/particles gain energy OR move faster (condone ‘vibrating’) idea of molecules/particles becoming gaseous/breaking free
[B1] [B1]
(iii) boiling, at one temperature only AND evaporation at any temperature boiling throughout liquid AND evaporation at surface only
[B1] [B1]
(c) (i) solid
[B1]
(ii) 660 (°C) allow 659 (°C) NOT –660 (°C)
[B1] [Total: 9]
8
(a) (i) 1 2 3
ice point OR freezing point of water OR melting point of ice NOT just ‘freezing point’ [B1] ice OR freezing water [B1] pure or melting or ice-water mix [B1] [B1] 0 (°C) OR 273 K OR 273 °K
(ii) 1
steam point OR boiling point of water NOT just ‘boiling point’ 2 steam boiling (water) OR standard pressure 3 100 (°C) OR 373 K OR 373 °K °C OR K OR °K used in either of the parts 3
(b) thermal capacity OR heat capacity, allow specific heat capacity
[B1] [B1] [B1] [B1] [B1] [B1] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2008
Page 6 9
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2008
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02
(a) correct symbol (b) D A C B
all 4 in correct order
[B1] (allow B1 for any 2 in correct place)
[B2]
(c) (note: mark 1 and 2 together) (1 mark max from any one line below) too great a current might flow ) fuse might not melt NOT fuse won’t work ) any 2 fuse won’t protect OR appliance might be damaged ) ) wiring might overheat/melt or equivalent fire might be caused ) NOT circuit broken, NOT short circuit, NOT electric shock
[B1,B1]
[Total: 5] 10 (a) R1 + R2 in symbols or figures 60 (Ω)
[C1] [A1]
(b) voltmeter correctly shown between X and Y (or equivalent), must be correct symbol
[B1]
(c) (i) I = V/R 1.5/60 e.c.f from (a) 0.025 A OR a OR amp(s) OR ampere(s) OR mA etc.
[C1] [C1] [A1] [B1]
(ii) 1.5 (V)
[B1]
(d) (i) decreases
[B1]
(ii) decreases
[B1]
(iii) 60 (Ω)
[B1]
e.c.f from (a)
[Total: 11] 11 (a) (i) no current in circuit OR no voltage in circuit e.m.f. induced in AB is cancelled by e.m.f. induced in BC
[B1] [B1]
(ii) idea of straightening out ABC OR rotate ABC (on its axis) OR connect G across AB or CB
[B1]
(b) any valid answer e.g. transformer, induction coil, generator, dynamo, microphone, alternator, computer NOT motor, relay (use right + wrong = 0 for incorrect extras) [B1] [Total: 4]
© UCLES 2008
Page 7
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2008
Syllabus 0625
12 (a) anything less than, or equal to, 30 min between 22 and 27 min, inclusive (b) (i) iodine(-128) OR the second one (ii) radon-220 OR the first one NOTE: NOT radon-222 NOT just radon, unless mention of 55 s in ‘why’ section shortest half-life OR decays most rapidly OR takes least time to decay NOT ‘because it only has a half-life of 55 s’
© UCLES 2008
Paper 02 [C1] [A1] [B1] [M1]
[A1] [Total: 5]
Page 3 1
2
3
(a)
attempt at subtraction 3 hrs 20 mins 200 mins
(b)
200/20 OR 200/10 10 OR 20 e.c.f.
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02 C1 C1 A1
e.c.f. from (a)
C1 A1
(a)
L×B×H 2 × 1.5 × 1 3 (m3)
C1 C1 A1
(b)
M=V×D 3000 (kg) e.c.f. correct units in both (a) and (b)
C1 A1 B1
YZ OR WZ and WY OR XZ and XY
B1
(a)
(b) (i)
4
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2008
4.2 – 4.6 (N)
B1
(ii)
his (i) N
B1 B1
(iii)
increases
B1
(iv)
goes up OR oscillates OR accelerates
B1
(a)
radio OR TV ultra-violet
B1 B1
(b)
long wavelength written at LH end
B1
(c)
any three acceptable uses
(d)
red violet (NOT blue, purple, mauve)
[5]
[6]
[6]
B1,B1,B1 B1 B1
© UCLES 2008
[8]
Page 4 5
(a) (i)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2008
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02
reflected
B1
same frequency
B1
480 (m)
B1
(ii)
distance/time his(i)/1.6 300 (m/s) e.c.f.
C1 C1 A1
(iii)
measured distance incorrect measured time incorrect OR effect of reaction time any reference to temperature any reference to wind any reference to humidity any reference to pressure time interval very small to measure on a stopwatch
(ii) (b) (i)
) ) any 2 ) ) ) ) )
B1,B1
[8] 6
(a)
distance approximately marked (±5 mm) distance accurately marked (±2 mm)
(b) (i) (ii)
C1 A1
falls
B1
air mols bombard surfaces cause pressure on Hg
B1 B1
(c)
Hg at same height as in LH tube (by eye)
(d)
rises falls
rises stays the same
B1 B1 × 4
) )
[10] 7
(a) (i)
(b)
normal correct, by eye
B1
(ii)
reflected ray in correct direction, by eye (condone poor normal)
B1
(iii)
i correctly labelled (condone poor normal)
B1
(iv)
r correctly labelled (condone poor normal)
B1
i=r
(c) (i) (ii)
B1 second mirror correct, by eye
B1
ray parallel to original ray
B1
© UCLES 2008
[7]
Page 5 8
(a)
(i) (ii)
(b) (i) (ii)
9
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2008
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02
N at left and S at right
B1
attract
e.c.f.
B1
N at left and S at right
B1
attract
B1
e.c.f.
(c)
attract
B1
(d)
nothing
B1
(a)
a
B1
(b)
B
B1
(c)
I = V/R 6/4 1.5 A OR amp(s) OR ampere(s)
C1 A1 A1 B1
(d)
connection 2 both receive full voltage OR both run at full brightness if one blows/switched off, other will continue working
B1 B1 B1
contact position shown at centre of potential divider, by eye
B1
10 (a) (b)
current in coil core magnetised armature attracted armature pivots armature pushes contacts closed
) ) ) any 3 ) )
[6]
[9]
B1,B1,B1 [4]
© UCLES 2008
Page 6 11 (a)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2008
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02
core
B1
(b)
a.c.
B1
(c)
VP/VS = NP/NS in any form correct substitution 200
C1 C1 A1
(d)
voltage too high OR lamp will blow
B1
84
B1
218
B1
12 (a) (b)
(c) (i)
2
B1
(ii)
4 allow both marks for interchanged answers for (i) and (ii), if answers to (a) and (b) were interchanged
B1
(iii)
alpha-particle
B1
© UCLES 2008
[6]
[5]
Page 3 1
2
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2009
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02
(a) 35
B1
(b) vehicles/time in any form, letters words or numbers 700/35 e.c.f. (a) 20 e.c.f. (a)
C1 C1 A1
[4]
B1×3
[3]
work
force of gravity on a body how big the body is
mass
power of a given force weight ÷ mass
weight
amount of matter in a body force × distance moved
density
mass ÷ volume the acceleration due to gravity
3
(a) 1500
B1
(b) second box ticked (use + = 0 for extras)
B1
(c) constant speed
B1
(d) award B1 from each of any 2 lines: ) increased wind/air resistance OR headwind OR roof rack rough(er) ground OR flat tyre OR increased road resistance/friction ) brakes applied )
B1 + B1
IGNORE increased speed/changed car shape/increased load IGNORE driver decided to stop 4
[5]
(a) 88 – 92
B1
(b) his (a)
B1
(c) 840 e.c.f. (b)
B1
(d) left level up and right level down L at 80 and R at 150
B1 B1 © UCLES 2009
[5]
Page 4 5
6
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2009
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) rapid/rapid heat transfer/gain OR rapid reading/response NOT sensitivity/temperature transfer
Paper 02 B1
(ii) strength OR reduce chance of breaking OR to magnify the thread ignore any mention of safety
B1
(iii) sensitivity or equiv. (e.g. idea of large movement of thread)
B1
(b) mercury OR alcohol
B1
(c) 0 and 100 °C on at least 1 temperature
B1 B1
(a) (i) decreasing OR getting lower/quieter/softer
M1
(ii) amplitude/length of wave decreased OR waves got smaller NOT wavelength decreased (b) (i) nothing OR constant
[6]
A1 M1
(ii) waves equally spaced OR wavelength/period/T constant (c) (i) 12 – 14
A1 B1
(ii) 1. 300 (waves, oscillations, vibrations) every second 2. 1/300 (s) OR 0.0033 OR 0.003 with indication of recurring 3 3. 1/his300 × his 12 OR his (1/300) 0.04 (s) e.c.f. (d) (i) yes/
) )
(ii) yes/
) )
(iii) no/
)
–1 e.e.o.o.
B1 B1 C1 A1
B2 [11]
© UCLES 2009
Page 5 7
8
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2009
(a) (i) 1. normal correct, by eye 2. i correctly labelled
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02 B1 B1
(ii) i = r in any recognisable form accept incidence = refraction NOT sin i = sin r B0 for refraction, refrection, reflaction
B1
(iii) V
B1
(iv) none
B1
(b) be reasonably generous: correct inversion stem approx. parallel to card edge
M1 A1
(a) (i) iron (rod)
B1
(ii) plastic (rod)
B1
(b) S S N (c) –
[7]
B1
somewhere on or near rod D, near end C condone extra + or – signs unless contradict
(d) one needle pointing N, by eye both needles pointing N, by eye
B1 C1 A1
© UCLES 2009
[6]
Page 6 9
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2009
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02
Apply max 1 un. pen. in (a) and (b) together. Apply at first instance of unit penalty. (a) (i) 6 V
B1
(ii) 50 mA OR 0.05 A
B1
(b) R = V/I in any form, letters, words, numbers OR V/I 6/50 OR 6/0.05 e.c.f. (a) OR 0.12 Ω (0.12 Ω gets 2, 0.12 gets 1) 120 Ω c.a.o. accept V/A instead of Ω (c) (i) increase resistance/ohms double resistance/ohms OR halve e.m.f./voltage/p.d. OR remove one cell/battery (ii) idea of breaking the circuit OR make voltage zero
OR OR OR OR OR
add another resistor decrease e.m.f./voltage/p.d. add another R (in series) use 3 V cell/battery use only 1 cell/battery
OR removing battery OR switch off
(d) (i) infinite OR very large (if figure quoted, must be [25 A) NOT just “higher” (ii) idea of damage but NOT “blows up” ammeter – coil burnt out OR pointer bent battery – overheats OR runs flat quickly circuit – overheat/burn out/insulation melts NOT it trips out
C1 A1 B1
B1 C1
) ) any 1 )
10 (a) XY would move up/anticlockwise/motion reversed/pan moves down (b) (i) 1. sensible choice of F scale
) ) both lost if scales reversed sensible choice of I scale ) 2. 4 points correctly plotted (± ½ small square) –1 e.e.o.o. – B0 if ridiculous scale on either axis (e.g. non-linear, 3, 7, 9 etc.) – can award both marks if scales interchanged but otherwise O.K. – if any blob clearly >1 square diameter, then –1 for each (max 2) 3. reasonable straight line through his points, including 0,0
(ii) 0.036 – 0.038 OR his correct value ± 0.0005 (B0 if ridiculous scale) (c) (electric) motor OR ammeter OR galvanometer OR voltmeter NOT generator/electronic balance
© UCLES 2009
C1 C1 A1
A1 [11] B1 B1 B1 B2
B1 B1
B1
[8]
Page 7
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2009
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02
11 For (a), (b) and (c), mark the names, not the box (a) CATHODE in bottom left box
B1
(b) UP & DOWN in top middle box
B1
(c) GLOWS in bottom right box
B1
(d) battery shown connected across heater filament, any recognisable symbol ignore extra wires if it would work
B1
(e) electrons NOT beta particles NOT positive electron
B1
(f) vacuum ticked (use + = 0 for extras)
B1
electromagnetic radiation/waves/rays NOT just rays etc.
B1 + B1
~ 8000 units OR very large
zero/nothing NOT small/almost nothing NOT – (dash)
B1 + B1
negative allow – (dash)
no charge OR zero/neutral NOT negligible NOT – (dash)
B1 + B1
idea of not very (penetrating) OR stopped (but if a substance is mentioned, it must be appropriate, not air) NOT “not penetrating” NOT slowly penetrating
idea of extremely (penetrating) OR not stopped (but if a substance is mentioned, it must be appropriate)
B1 + B1
12 (1) electron(s) OR e (ignore any prefix or suffix)
NOT very/strongly/highly penetrating NOT very fast penetrating
© UCLES 2009
[6]
[8]
Page 3 1
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2009
(a) (i) 20 (cm3) (ii) 25 (cm3)±0.5
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02
) ) both
B1
[1]
(b) 5 (cm3) e.c.f.
B1
[1]
(c) 5/200 e.c.f. 0.025 (cm3) e.c.f.
C1 A1
[2]
[Total: 4] 2
(a) kinetic or K.E. or motion
B1
[1]
(b) strain or elastic
B1
[1]
(c) gravitational or P.E. or G.P.E. or potential
B1
[1]
(d) weight /mass (of athlete) AND height/distance (of bar)
B1
[1]
[Total: 4] 3
(a) (i) 1. increasing steady or uniform 2. constant (ii) horizontal straight line between A & B (b) (i) line on axis between B & C (ii) horizontal straight line between C & D lower than that for AB (c) zero distance or equiv.
M1 A1 B1
[3]
B1
[1]
B1
[1]
M1 A1
[2]
B1
[1]
[Total: 8] 4
(a) (i) moves to the left accelerates to the left
C1 A1
[2]
(ii) arrow to the right 9N
B1 B1
[2]
(iii) blob on diagram clearly indicated as the C of M
B1
[1]
© UCLES 2009
Page 4
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2009
(b) (i) rises (ii) less stable
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02 B1
[1]
B1
[1]
[Total: 7] 5
(a) (i) 1. cooling OR energy/heat lost seen anywhere in (i) 2. solidifying or temperature constant 3. cooling
B1 B1 B1
[3]
(ii) first and last both ticked middle ticked
B1 B1
[2]
(iii) solid accept ice/frozen
B1
[1]
(b) rising curve of some sort idea of mirror image of Fig. 6.1
C1 A1
[2]
[Total: 8] 6
(a) same greater at B greater at B (b) box 1 ticked box 3 ticked
B1 B1 B1 ) ) use + =0 for extras )
[3]
B1 B1
[2]
[Total: 5] 7
(a) q
B1
[1]
(b) F marked close to point of image/object
B1
[1]
(c) [mark in pairs, use + =0] inverted real
B1 B1
[2]
(d) same
B1
[1]
(e) (i) nothing
C1
[1]
A1
[1]
(ii) image blurs
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2009
Page 5 8
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2009
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02
(a) one sound direct one sound after reflection/echo
B1 B1
[2]
(b) first second one suffers absorption,dispersion
M1 A1
[2]
(c) (i) s = vt in any form (seen somewhere in (c)) time to hear 1st sound = 990/330 or 3 (s)
B1 B1
[2]
(ii) time to hear 2nd sound = (3 × 330)/330 or 9 (s)
B1
[1]
(iii) interval = 6 (s) e.c.f.
B1
[1]
[Total: 8] 9
(a) L.H. circuit – series AND R.H. circuit – parallel
B1
[1]
(b) (i) 280 + 200 480 (Ω)
C1 A1
[2]
(ii) I = V/R in any form 12/his (i) seen or 12/480 need not be seen 0.025 or 25 or 1/40 c.a.o. A or mA as appropriate
C1 C1 A1 B1
[4]
(iii) his (ii) × 200 or proportion or potential divider calculation 5 (V) e.c.f.
C1 A1
[2]
(iv) connect voltmeter ) ) (could be shown on diag) between A and B )
M1 A1
[2]
[Total: 11] 10 (a) (i) core correctly labelled
B1
[1]
(ii) iron
B1
[1]
(iii) idea of magnetic linkage
B1
[1]
C1 C1 A1
[3]
(b) V1/V2 = N1/N2 in any form correct substitution 120 (V)
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009
Page 6
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2009
) ) no worn insulation ) ) no loose wires/connections ) ) no short circuits ) ) any 3 plug correctly wired ) ) any idea about continuity check ) ) no sharp bends in cable )
Syllabus 0625
Paper 02
11 no exposed wires
B1 x 3
[3]
[Total: 3] 12 (a) 5 points correctly plotted (–1 e.e.o.o.) reasonable curve through his points
B2 B1
[3]
(b) (i) between 30 and 35 or his correct value ± 5
B1
[1]
(ii) 2 (minutes) or his correct value ± 0.02
B1
[1]
(c) 2 (minutes) or his (b) (ii)
B1
[1]
(d) (i) half-life too short
B1
[1]
B1+B1
[2]
(ii) mark any correct 2, ignore the rest long half life gamma-emitter good penetration similar particle size similar density
) ) ) ) ) any 2 ) ) ) )
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2009
Page 3 1
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2010
(a) distance
tape measure, trundle wheel, metre wheel OR laser measure NOT (metre) rule
time
stopwatch/clock IGNORE just watch/clock IGNORE just chronometer
(b) speed = distance/time OR just distance/time (c)
2
any arrangement, words or symbols IGNORE magic triangles
Paper 21 B1, B1
B1, B1 B1
(i) idea of acceleration/deceleration OR some distance at lower speed/lorry stops
B1
(ii) distance = speed × time
C1
in this form only, words, letters or numbers
66 × 20 OR 66 × ⅓ OR 66 × 20/60
C1
22 (km) c.a.o. condone 0.33 used to give appropriate answer
A1 [9]
(a) 62.8 – 29.8 33.0 (cm) OR 33 (cm) (b)
(i) 5.5 = constant × 33
C1 A1 e.c.f.
C1
0.166 recurring e.c.f. ignore units accept 1/6 or 0.16 or 0.166 or 0.167 or 0.17 or 0.2 NOT 0.20
A1
(ii) N/cm OR N/m OR n/cm OR n/m seen in (ii) nothing else – mark independently of (i)
3
Syllabus 0625
B1 [5]
(a) I = U + W accept words or mixture of words/symbols
B1
(b)
(i) 850 (N)
B1
(ii) force needed to accelerate load/get it started OR if forces equal, then no movement
B1
(iii) height OR distance (use + = 0 for extras)
B1
(iv) time (use + = 0 for extras)
B1
(c) greater than OR > OR stronger accept “double” etc
© UCLES 2010
B1 [6]
Page 4 4
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2010
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) 1 nothing OR no change 2 quieter/softer OR loudness less/decreases (ii) frequency control: none OR no adjustment amplitude control: increase (amplitude) allow turn clockwise/to right
B1 B1 B1
no e.c.f. no e.c.f.
B1
(b) (i) echo OR reflection (of sound) OR bounced (back)
B1
(ii) idea of sound taking a finite time to travel OR idea of sound doesn’t travel infinitely fast IGNORE sound has to travel to rock face and back
5
6
Paper 21
B1 [6]
(a) X marked anywhere, above or below, on vertical anywhere through rod
B1
(b) Y marked anywhere to right of X, but not beyond R.H. tip of parrot
B1
(c) idea of topples/falls/loses balance topples clockwise/to the right/to the front/forwards
C1 A1 [4]
(a)
(i) radiation evaporation convection
any 2
B1, B1
(ii) cardboard/it is a poor conductor/(good) insulator air is trapped OR air is a poor conductor/(good) insulator reduced surface in contact with fingers (b)
any 2
(i) heat/energy to raise/lower/change temperature of a body OR heat/energy to heat up a body by 1 °C OR by 1K OR unit temp (ii) low thermal capacity less heat needed to raise temperature OR absorbs less heat
© UCLES 2010
B1, B1
B1 B1 M1 A1 [8]
Page 5 7
(a)
(b)
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2010
Syllabus 0625
(i) idea of heat concentrated in a small space OR lots of wire in small space OR to get required resistance in a small place
B1
(ii) radiation
B1
(i) mark 1 and 2 together 240 and 100 in correct order V and W in correct order
B1 B1
(ii) I = V/R OR I = W/V in any form, symbols or numbers 240/576 OR 100/240 0.416 recurring, accept 0.4 or 0.416 or 0.417 or 0.41 or 0.42 NOT 0.40 A OR a OR amp(s) OR ampere(s)
8
Paper 21
C1 C1 C1 A1 [8]
(a) 10 (cm)
B1
(b) gets smaller NOT gets lower gets closer to lens/moves to left/moves closer to F1
B1 B1
(c) (i) principal focus/foci OR focal/focus point(s) NOT focal length NOT focus
B1
(d) (ii) (ignore any arrows) ray drawn from top of object, through F2, to lens must pass through the stroke indicating F2 single refraction clearly at centre line OR two appropriate refractions at surfaces travels parallel to axis after lens, by eye must be drawn with ruler reaches top of image
9
(a) (i) water conducts/water lowers resistance could get a shock (however expressed) (ii) idea of cord insulating you from electricity OR cord not a conductor OR idea of separates you from the electrics/live parts
B1 B1 B1 B1 [8] B1 B1 B1
(b) 10A ticked
B1
(c)
B1
(i) large(r) current NOT more electricity (ii) it/insulation/cable would overheat/melt OR cause fire NOT blow up/damaged NOT fuse blows
© UCLES 2010
B1 [6]
Page 6
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2010
10 (a) V1/V2 or N1/N2 or V1/N1 or V2/N2 in any form substitution correct and seen 25 turns
Syllabus 0625
Allow full credit for use of 25 turns to give 12V, with working seen
Paper 21 C1 M1 A1 B1
Y and Z (either order) (b) 240 (V)
B1
(c) core iron NOT steel
B1 B1
(d) good conductor OR low resistance OR to reduce heating OR for high efficiency IGNORE good/bad conductor of heat
11 (a) refraction OR slows down OR changes speed/wavelength OR bends NOT reflaction or refrection dispersion OR divides/splits into colours/wavelengths/frequencies (b)
(c)
12 (a)
(b)
(i) red
If red and violet interchanged, allow B1 only
B1 [8]
B1 B1 B1
(ii) violet NOT blue NOT purple
B1
(i) X at or above top of visible spectrum middle of X clearly above top of visible spectrum but no more than twice height of the letter A from top of visible spectrum, by eye
M1
(ii) infra-red OR IR OR ir OR heat/thermal (radiation)
B1 [7]
(i) beta, gamma –1 e.e.o.o.
B2
(ii) idea that radiation (from watch) can enter the body
B1
(i) bottom left box ticked
B1
–1 e.e.o.o.
(ii) locked cupboard OR lock (it) OR storage in lead/suitable containers IGNORE protective clothing/tongs etc
© UCLES 2010
A1
B1 [5]
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
•
CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2010 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
om .c
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2010 question paper
s er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
Page 2
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2010
Syllabus 0625
Paper 21
NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME SYMBOLS & OTHER MATTERS B marks
are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks
are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be scored.
C marks
are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks
are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o.
means "correct answer only".
e.c.f.
means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
e.e.o.o.
means "each error or omission".
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in brackets. e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given. underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar. un.pen.
means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one mark deducted if the unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where specifically stated in the mark scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect or missing units are condoned.
OR/or
indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling
Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units
Ignore units, except where a mark is specified for a particular unit.
Fractions
These are only acceptable where specified.
Extras
Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed out. © UCLES 2010
Page 3 1
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2010
Syllabus 0625
Paper 21
(a) (i) 6 (cm) 5 (cm)
B1 B1
(ii) 6 × 5 × 2 ecf 60 (cm3) ecf
C1 A1
(b) D = M/V in any form, letters, words or numbers 53 2.65 OR 2650 g/cm3 OR kg/m3 (unit must be appropriate)
B1 C1 A1 B1 [Total: 8]
2
(a) distance/time in any form 960/8 OR 960/(8 × 60) 120 OR 2 m/min OR m/s must correspond with value
C1 C1 A1 B1
(b) friction or air resistance or force accelerating/decelerating legs
B1 [Total: 5]
3
(a) tidal wave hydroelectric (any order)
B1 B1 B1
accept waterfall
(b) tidal PE of rise and fall flow through turbine turbine drives generator
wave PE of rise and fall rotates/moves floats floats drive generator
hydroelectric water stored at high level flowing water drives turbine turbine drives generator
B1 B1 B1 [Total: 6]
4
(a) focal length OR focal distance
B1
(b) 4 rays all passing through F appropriate refraction at both lens surfaces OR all rays bent at lens mid-line
M1
(c) focused image OR sharp image OR dot
B1
(d) 4 dots OR out-of-focus/blurred/fuzzy image
B1
A1
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
Page 4 5
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2010
(a) alpha and beta both underlined
Syllabus 0625
–1 e.e.o.o.
Paper 21 B2
(b) gamma
B1
(c) radio
B1
(d) alpha
B1 [Total: 5]
6
(a) conduction
B1
(b) (i) convection
B1
(ii) hot water expands OR hot water less dense hot water rises (ignore anything about cold water falling) (c) convection cannot occur water is a poor conductor
B1 B1 B1 B1 [Total: 6]
7
(a) i correctly shown
B1
(b) (i) ray shown in air at angle > 40° angle same as in Fig. 7.1, by eye
C1 A1
(ii) ray reflected (MO if says along surface) critical angle exceeded
M1 A1 [Total: 5]
8
(a) (i) one sound or equivalent (NOT an echo) (ii) distance = speed × time in any form ...... condone factor of 2 330 × 1.5 495 (m) (b) (i) idea of one sound direct OR original sound other sound by echo
B1 C1 C1 A1
B1 B1
(ii) 1.5 (s) 4.5 (s)
B1 B1 [Total: 8] © UCLES 2010
Page 5 9
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2010
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) N at left end and S at right end (inside or outside magnet outline) both N and S within magnet outline
Paper 21 M1 A1
(ii) attracted/moves towards magnet OR it becomes magnetised
B1
(iii) nothing
B1
(b) (i) pass current through coil/wire OR connect a battery across coil (ii) iron NOT steel
B1 B1
(iii) can be very strong can be switched on & off easily can reverse polarity easily adjustable strength
) ) any one ) )
B1
[Total: 7] 10 (a) parallel
B1
(b) I = V/R in any form 100/250 0.4 (A)
C1 C1 A1
(c) 12 (A) OR 30 × his (b), correctly evaluated
B1
(d) parallel
B1
(e) (i) none
e.c.f. from (a)
B1
(ii) none
e.c.f. from (d)
B1 [Total: 8]
11 (a) cell/battery shown complete series circuit, including cell/battery (ignore any switch, open or closed ignore any other component, as long as a current would flow)
M1 A1
(b) (i) S and M on door and frame (either way) so they would be next to each other when door closed B1 S on frame and M on door edge/door face close to edge B1 (ii) any suitable application e.g. shop door, security door, lift door, fridge door, oven door
B1 [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
Page 6
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2010
12 (a) yes yes no
Syllabus 0625
Paper 21 B1 B1 B1
(b) nucleus
B1
(c) (i) 6 points correct ±½ small square –1 e.e.o.o. thin, smooth curve through points
B2 B1
(ii) 8 ± 1 (mins) 108 ± 1 (mins) 100 ± 2 (mins) e.c.f. if working shown
C1 C1 A1
(iii) half his (ii) e.c.f.
B1
(d) his (ii) e.c.f.
B1 [Total: 12]
© UCLES 2010
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2011 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
om .c
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2011 question paper
s er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
Page 2
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2011
Syllabus 0625
Paper 21
NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME SYMBOLS & OTHER MATTERS B marks
are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks
are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be scored.
C marks
are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks
are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o.
means "correct answer only".
e.c.f.
means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
e.e.o.o.
means "each error or omission".
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in brackets. e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given. underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar. OR/or
indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling
Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig.fig. is appropriate.
Units
Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are allocated for specific units.
Fractions
These are only acceptable where specified.
Extras
Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore
Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT
Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty applies. © University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Page 3 1
2
3
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2011
Syllabus 0625
Paper 21
(a) 60.4 – 44.2 16.2 (cm3)
C1 A1
(b) (density =) mass/volume in any form, letters, words, numbers 40.5/16.2 e.c.f. 2.5 e.c.f. g / cm3 (accept correct conversion kg / m3, with unit)
C1 C1 A1 B1
(c) 60.4 and 40.5 both ticked –1 e.e.o.o.
B2
(a) molecules/particles/atoms moving (accept vibrating/oscillating) molecules colliding (accept with each other) molecules colliding with walls
C1 C1 A1
(b) (i) LH graph – temperature/T/θ / °C/K on horizontal axis RH graph – volume/V / m3/cm3 on horizontal axis
M1
(ii) X on LH graph at intersection of line and vertical axis
A1
(a) idea that non-renewable sources are finite / get used up
B1
(b) (i) solar/sun/sunlight (ignore just light) wind/éolienne accept windmill waves (ignore sea) tidal (ignore sea) hydro(electric) (ignore water) geothermal biomass
M1
(ii) high cost/low effectiveness small output environmental impact cannot be relied upon (wind/solar)
any 1
any 1 (ignore efficiency)
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
A1
[8]
[5]
Page 4
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2011
(c) (i) fossil fuel coal oil petrol (natural) gas peat nuclear lignite (ii) plentiful/regular/constant/reliable supply cheap/cost effective high output 4
5
Syllabus 0625
Paper 21
any 1
M1
any 1
A1 [5]
(a) cool air more dense OR cool air falls OR warm air rises so it can be cooled
B1
(b) energy/heat removed from store must be released outside store heat developed by refrigeration unit
B1 B1
(c) reduce/prevent heat coming in from outside NOT cold getting out reduce/prevent conduction NOT convection/radiation
B1 B1
(d) idea that heat gained from outside = heat removed by refrigeration unit allow B1 for idea of thermostatic control
B2
(a) boxes 1 and 4 ticked –1 e.e.o.o.
B2
(b) sound/wave reflected/bounces back (from surface) NOT just “returns”
B1
(c) (i) cliff A
B1
(ii) (s =) vt OR (s =) vt/2 in any form........... allow s = ut +½at2 330 × 1.5 OR 495 OR 330 × 0.75 OR 247.5 OR 330 × 2.5 OR 825 OR 330 × 1.25 OR 412.5 OR 330 × 4 OR 1320 OR 330 × 2 660 (m) (iii) both echoes at the same time OR one echo OR louder time value quoted between 1.5s and 2.5s
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
[7]
C1
C1 A1 B1 B1
[9]
Page 5 6
7
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2011
Syllabus 0625
(a) ray bent down at 1st surface, but not beyond/along normal ray bent down at 2nd surface, but not beyond/along surface MAX 1 mark if any suggestion of a spectrum shown
B1 B1
(b) spot/dot/line AND of one colour
B1
accept a single named colour e.g. red
(c) spectrum/colours/light dispersed ignore rainbow red at top and violet at bottom in words in space provided
C1 A1
(a) spheres closer together
B1
allow touching spheres
(b) (i) charging (of anything) by friction/rubbing plastic/furniture (becomes) charged OR electron/charge transfer plastic/furniture attracts dust/fluff (ii) idea of charge leaking water is a conductor 8
Paper 21
B1 M1 A1 B1 B1
(a) (i) parallel
B1
(ii) 4.2 (V)
B1
(iii) V=IR in any form OR V/R 4.2 / 3 e.c.f. (ii) 1.4 e.c.f. (ii) A OR amp(s) OR ampere(s)
C1 C1 A1 B1
(iv) 1. bigger OR the sum of the two currents OR 2 (A) 2. same/equal
B1 B1
(b) clear series connection of all 3 across battery in one circuit clear parallel connection of all 3 across battery in other circuit, and must not be shorted out allow B1 max in (b) if correct series/parallel circuits both shown, but with more or less than 3 resistors in either/both
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
[5]
[6]
B1 B1 [10]
Page 6 9
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2011
Syllabus 0625
(a) all 3 lamps in parallel across battery + switch (–1 if any lamps in series, –1 if connections across battery only) (b) (i) molecules vibrate over bigger distance OR molecules separate OR bigger space between molecules NOT just “molecules need more space” ignore breaking bonds (ii) 1. bends ignore expands bends/moves to the right/away from contact/outwards/towards invar strip 2. idea that something gets hot idea that bimetallic strip/invar/brass bends/breaks circuit idea that something cools (when no current) idea that bimetallic strip/invar/brass straightens/makes contact
Paper 21 B2
B1 B1 B1 M1 A1 M1 A1
10 (a) (i) Fig. 10.1
B1
(ii) Fig. 10.3
B1
(b) 2 complete cycles, any shape (if full-wave rectified, must be 4 humps) cyclical and equal amplitude above & below axis uniform spacing intention of sinusoidal shape accept sinusoidal full-wave rectification 11 (a) thermionic emission
B1 B1 B1 B1
[9]
[6]
B1
(b) (i) S2 OR 2 any 1 correct B1 (ii) S1 OR 1
ignore mention of S2
B2 all 3 correct B2
(iii) S3 OR 3
ignore mention of S1 and/or S2
(c) reverse polarity of plates (however expressed)/make upper plate positive OR correct description of use of magnet 12 (a) (radio)activity OR count rate OR counts/s OR particles emitted/s OR rate of decay OR number of undecayed atoms/nuclei OR radiation OR original number of atoms/nuclei NOT mass/substance/material, unless clearly specified to decrease to half (original value) NOT half the time
B1
B1 B1
(b) (i) 53 ± 1 (s)
B1
(ii) 84 ± 1 (s)
B1
(iii) candidate’s (ii) + candidate’s (i) correct evaluation of candidate’s (ii) + candidate’s (i)
C1 A1
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
[4]
[6]
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2011 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
om .c
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2011 question paper
s er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
Page 2
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
Paper 21
NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME SYMBOLS & OTHER MATTERS B marks
are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks
are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be scored.
C marks
are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks
are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o.
means "correct answer only".
e.c.f.
means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
e.e.o.o.
means "each error or omission".
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in brackets. e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given. underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar. OR/or
indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling
Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean what we want, give credit.
Significant
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if figures specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units
Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are allocated for specific units.
Fractions
These are only acceptable where specified.
Extras
Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore
Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Page 3 Not/NOT
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
Paper 21
Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty applies.
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Page 4 1
2
3
4
5
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
Paper 21
(a) (i) BC
B1
(ii) AB
B1
(b) area under graph 0.5 × 15 × 5 37.5 (m)
C1 C1 A1
(a) tape measure OR trundle wheel OR laser measure IGNORE metre rule
B1
(b) (i) clock OR watch (any sort)
B1
(ii) set clock/watch to zero OR note start time OR start clock/watch/timing (start clock/watch/timing) when wood seen to fall or equivalent stop clock/watch/note time when wood reaches bridge 2
B1 B1 B1
(iii) speed = distance/ time in any form, letters, words, numbers 50/400 0.125 m/s
C1 C1 A1 B1
(a) (i) plumb-line (name or description) OR try-square and (horiz.) bench OR spirit level
B1
(ii) line joining A and D line joining B and E intersection clearly labelled G (dependent on scoring both M marks)
M1 M1 A1
(b) X clearly on centre line X clearly within semicircular portion, but not on surface
B1 B1
(a) dark specks OR bright specks NOT molecules/particles moving randomly/zigzag OR dancing about
B1 C1 A1
(b) Brownian motion/movement
B1
(c) invisible/too small to see/very small moving fast/high kinetic energy moving randomly/all directions
B1 B1 B1
(a) 150 × 3 450 (Hz)
[5]
[9]
[6]
[7] C1 A1
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Page 5
6
Syllabus 0625
B1
(c) increases/rises
B1
(a) ultrasound
B1
all 4 correct (any 2 correct B1)
B1
(iii) infra-red
B1
(iv) X-rays OR gamma rays
B1
(a) (i) needle inside coil current through coil OR connect battery/power supply direct current OR d.c. OR a.c. and switch off before removing needle/ magnet
[6]
B1 M1 A1 B1
(b) 4+ smooth curves leaving one end and going to the other (ignore any arrows) no lines crossing or meeting, even at ends
B1 B1
(a) battery/ammeter connected wrong way round OR negative of battery should go to negative of ammeter
B1
(b) correct symbols for battery, ammeter and rheostat (allow common variants on battery/cell symbol) all components in series
M1 A1
(c) voltmeter (any recognisable symbol) clearly in parallel with coil
B1
(d) (i) 2.8 (A) and 12 (V) both
B1
(ii) ammeter increases voltmeter increases
B1 B1
(iii) 1.4 (A) OR half candidate’s original reading 6 (V) OR half candidate’s original reading
B1 B1
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
[4]
B2
(ii) radio OR the top/first one
(ii) freely suspend/pivot and see which end points N (or equivalent) OR see which end is repelled by N pole of a magnet
8
Paper 21
(b) any figure between 20 and 50 inclusive AND any figure between 15,000 and 25,000 inclusive
(b) (i) infra-red visible ultra-violet X-rays
7
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
[6]
[9]
Page 6 9
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
Paper 21
(a) transformer (ignore step-up/down)
B1
(b) 132,000/22,000 OR 240/132,000 X: 6 Y: 0.001818 to at least 4 dec. pl. OR 1/550 NOT 550
C1 A1 A1
(c) less heat/energy loss thinner/smaller cables less copper used less cable weight less massive pylons cheaper smaller current
any 2 use + = 0 for incorrect extras
10 (a) (electric) charge OR charged body force
B1+B1 [6] B1 B1
(b) A and B closer together allow touching threads straight and equal angle (by eye) to vertical
M1 A1
(c) E horizontal to left W vertically down T up thread
B2
all 3 marked on his diagram –1 e.e.o.o.
(d) zero or 0 or nothing 11 (a) (i) filament/cathode clearly and correctly labelled (ii) anode clearly and correctly labelled (b) (i) battery shown connected across filament (no e.c.f.)
B1 B1 B1 B1
(ii) power supply connected between filament & anode (no e.c.f.)
B1
(iii) straight path shown along axis (no e.c.f.)
B1
(c) bright spot (or equivalent)
B1
(d) spot moves down
B1
12 (a) points correctly plotted (±½ small square) –1 e.e.o.o. smooth curve through candidate’s points (by eye)
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
[7]
B2 B1
[7]
Page 7
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
(b) (i) 1. in range 2.2–3.0 2. in range 18.0–19.0 (ii) 2 half-lives (candidate’s 2 – candidate’s 1)/2 7.5–8.6 (days) e.c.f.
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Paper 21 B1 B1 C1 C1 A1
[8]
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 21 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2012 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
om .c
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2012 question paper
s er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
Page 2
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 21
NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME B marks
are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks
are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be scored.
C marks
are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it, e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks
are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o.
means “correct answer only”.
e.c.f.
means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
e.e.o.o.
means “each error or omission”.
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given. underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar. OR/or
indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling
Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean what we want, give credit.
Significant figures Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures > 2, except if specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate. Units
Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are allocated for specific units.
Fractions
These are only acceptable where specified.
Extras
Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore
Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT
Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty applies.
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 3 1
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
(a) speed = distance ÷ time in any form OR (distance =) speed × time 80 × ½ OR 80 × 0.5 40 (km)
C1 C1 A1
(b) (i) First section of line: horizontal line starting at zero time, any speed at 80 km/hour from 0 to 0.5 hour, no further
M1 A1 A1
(ii) Second section of line: straight line sloping down line starting at end of previous section and ending at 1 hour (condone not straight) line ending at 30 km/hour Third section of line: vertical/near vertical line down to 0 at 1 hour ignore further sections of graph 2
B1 B1 B1 B1 [Total: 10]
(a) 84 – 53 31 (cm3)
C1 A1
(b) 238 – 205 33 (g)
C1 A1
(c) density = mass ÷ volume, however arranged 33 ÷ 31 e.c.f. (a) and (b) 1.0645161 correct to any no of sf > 2 don’t accept fractions g/cm3 accept kg/m3 if clear attempt to convert to kg and m3
3
Paper 21
B1 C1 A1 B1 [Total: 8]
(a) 70 000 (N) arrow to right accept labelled “thrust” 25 000 (N) arrow to left accept labelled “friction”
B1 B1
(b) (i) to left OR backward OR opposing motion
B1
(ii) 45 000 (N)
B1
(iii) air friction/air resistance/drag NOT wind/wheels/weight NOT if any incorrect extra e.g. weight
B1
(c) (i) accelerates OR speed increases OR moves faster (ii) idea of unbalanced force e.g. forward force > backward force NOT just forward force is bigger
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
M1 A1 [Total: 7]
Page 4 4
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
(a) they/molecules/particles/atoms moving/vibrating/have KE C1 they/molecules/particles/atoms collide (condone with each other) C1 they/molecules/particles/atoms collide with walls A1 extra relevant information e.g. exert force, change of momentum, bounce back/off, lots over an area, random/Brownian motion B1 (b) (i) decreases
B1
(ii) increases
5
B1 [Total: 6]
(a) changed/converted/transferred to other forms
B1
(b) (i) 24 (kJ)
B1
(ii) idea of wasted/lost heat ignore sound
C1 A1
(iii) 696 OR 720 – candidate’s (i), correctly evaluated
B1
(iv) idea of not very good no e.c.f. accept “there is a lot of energy lost”, accept calculation ignore “not 100%”
6
Paper 21
B1 [Total: 6]
(a) EITHER ray from tip of object through optical centre of lens straight on after lens OR ray from tip of object through F2 and on to lens parallel to axis after lens
M1 A1
(b) image drawn between candidate’s intersection and the axis
B1
(c) same size inverted real
B1 B1 B1
no e.c.f. use + = 0 for size and orientation
(d) smaller closer to lens/to the left
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
M1 A1
B1 B1 [Total: 8]
Page 5 7
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
(a) infra-red
B1
(b) infra-red
B1
(c) X-rays
B1
(d) microwaves
8
B1 [Total: 4]
(a) (i) charge(s) OR electron(s) NOT ions
B1
(ii) (an) ammeter
B1
(iii) (a) voltmeter
B1
(b) (R =) V/I in any form 9.6/0.8 12 Ω OR ohm(s) OR volt/amp OR volts per amp
C1 C1 A1 B1
(c) (i) increases
B1
(ii) decreases OR e.c.f. from (i)
9
Paper 21
B1 [Total: 9]
(a) coil clearly and unambiguously indicated
B1
(b) increase strength/power of magnet ignore increase magnetism/ignore add core ignore magnets closer/bigger increase current/voltage/energy from battery accept stronger/more powerful battery
any 2
B1 + B1
increase number of turns (in coil) ignore bigger coil ignore rotations (c) reverse current OR reverse magnet/field however expressed
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
B1 [Total: 4]
Page 6
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
10 (a) any variation of
allow
Syllabus 0625
and
(b) (i) plug switch
Paper 21 B1 M1
(ii) exposed metal or equivalent OR not insulated OR (easy to get) shock (c) (i) pull-cord switch
A1 B1
(ii) idea that water/moisture conducts ignore shock covering/plastic/nylon is an insulator OR no metal is exposed (d) 3 lamps connected in parallel with each other NOT if shorted out by switch or extra wire lamp combination (e.c.f.) in series with switch (e.c.f.) and supply accept any recognisable symbol, accept closed switch
11 (a) any downward deflection and no upward deflection curve, either all up or all down, from A to end of region between plates straight on from end of region between plates, towards BC (b) idea of deflection upwards/it goes upwards/it moves upwards no e.c.f. ignore opposite direction/opposite path
12 (a) thorium OR Th OR 232 OR 90
B1 B1
B1 B1 [Total: 8] B1 M1 A1
B1 [Total: 4] B1
(b) technetium OR Tc OR 99(m) OR 43
B1
(c) barium OR Ba OR 139 OR 56 silver OR Ag OR 110 OR 47 thorium OR Th OR 232 OR 90
B1 any 2 B1
NOTE: technetium + anything scores 1 mark, “all of them” scores 1 mark (d) silver OR Ag OR 110 OR 47 (e) technetium OR Tc OR 99(m) OR 43 OR gamma NOT any extras
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
B1
B1 [Total: 6]
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
0625 PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2012 series for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
om .c
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2012 series
s er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
Page 2
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 21
NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME SYMBOLS & OTHER MATTERS B marks
are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks
are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be scored.
C marks
are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks
are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o.
means "correct answer only".
e.c.f.
means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
e.e.o.o.
means "each error or omission".
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given. underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar. OR/or
indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
o.w.t.t.e.
means “or words to that effect”.
Spelling
Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean what we want, give credit.
Significant figures Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2, except if specified otherwise, or if only 1 significant figure is appropriate. Units
Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are allocated for specific units.
Fractions
These are only acceptable where specified.
Extras
Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 3
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 21
Ignore
Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT
Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty applies.
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed out.
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 4 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
(a) moment/torque ignore turning force
B1
(b) opposite direction condone different direction(s) larger or correct reverse argument (opening force is smaller)
2
B1 B1
(c) (apply) force further from hinge OR oil/reduce friction/new hinge/use an assist mechanism/replace hinge(s)
B1
(a) D = M / V in any form
B1
(b) (i) length × width × height in any form OR 2.5 ( × 104) × 6.0 ( × 103) × 3 ( × 10–6) i.e. ignore powers of 10 4.5 × 10n any power of 10 450 (m3) c.a.o. 4.5 x 102
C1 C1 A1
(ii) 900 × his 450 or correct sub into D = M / V 4.05 × 105 OR 405 000 (kg) e.c.f. 3
Paper 21
C1 A1
(a) speed = distance / time in any form OR distance / speed 80 / 320 0.25 (s)
C1 C1 A1
(b) (i) 0.45 OR his (a) + 0.2(0) correctly evaluated (allow B1 only, 0.05 / his(a) – 0.2(0) OR 0.25 / his (a) alone)
B2
(ii) start timing when he sees flash/smoke (accept any other appropriate visual stimulus e.g. hand dropping as gun fires) (c) 12.5 ± 0.2(s) Condone (1 min) 12.5 s OR 12.05 / 12.5 – 0.45 12.95 OR 12.5 + his (b)(i)
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
[4]
[6]
B1 C1 A1
[8]
Page 5 4
5
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Paper 21
(a) top box ticked
B1
(b) elastic/strain/potential NOT gravitational PE
B1
(c) kinetic ignore heat
B1
(d) gravitational/gravitational potential/GPE/PE maximum kinetic OR thermal/allow heat thermal allow heat
B1 B1 B1 B1
(a) (i) move/vibrate/oscillate faster OR increase/gain KE move (further) apart OR (they) separate
B1 B1
(ii) any 1 increases/enlarges/gets bigger/expands o.w.t.t.e. all three increase
6
Syllabus 0625
C1 A1
(b) nut/hole expands/enlarges ignore particles expand/enlarge bolt doesn’t expand (as much)
B1 B1
(a) (i) r correctly shown
B1
(ii) bent up at first surface bent up at second surface straight line within prism
B1 B1 B1
(iii) P clearly shown as the original point of entry
B1
(b) (i) blue light refracted from same point at first surface blue shown with greater refraction blue light always below red light (ii) dispersion
[6]
B1 B1 B1 B1
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
[7]
[9]
Page 6 7
8
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
(a) arrow pointing to left
B1
(b) rotates/turns/S pole goes away from magnet/repelled/ changes direction N pole points to magnet/S Pole points to N Pole (of Earth)/turns through 180° S Pole/N Pole points in opposite direction
B1 B1
(c) magnetic field/electromagnet(ism)/(ic) caused by current
M1 A1
(a) its voltage/potential difference condone volts its e.m.f./electromotive force
C1
(b) V = IR in any form OR V / R 4.5 / 180 0.025 OR 2.5 × 10–2 OR 1 / 40 A/amps/amp/a
C1 C1 A1 B1
(c) (i) two resistors shown in parallel (accept any symbol here) condone faint lines through resistors (where attempted to rub out wire)
B1
battery in series with resistances (allow any recognisable symbol here) (even if resistances not in parallel) all symbols correct (allow cell symbol for battery) (allow rheostat for resistor condone old symbol)
B1
(ii) 1. 4.5 (V) ignore units 2. 0.025 OR his (b) ignore units 9
Paper 21
A1
B1 B1 B1 [11]
(a) switch correctly identified
B1
(b) (i) moves/flows condone (current) flows OR stays the same ignore nothing (happens)
B1
(ii) increases/higher/greater condone greater than zero any indication of gradual increase (c) remains the same OR decreases/goes back to zero (very) slowly i.e. ignore decreases/getting smaller on their own.
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
[5]
M1 A1 B1
[5]
Page 7
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
10 (a) copper
Paper 21 B1
(b) core
B1
(c) Np / Ns = Vp / Vs in any form 8000/Ns = 240 / 6 OR 240 = 6 OR Ns = 6 8000 Ns 8000 240 200
C1 C1
(d) (i) lamp less bright/less than full brightness/wouldn’t light (up properly)/ has less energy
B1
(ii) lamp blows/bursts OR lamp too bright OR lamp overheats/burns out OR much brighter/has more energy 11 (a) paper stops α sheet of paper makes no difference to count rate
A1
B1
C1 A1
(b) Aluminium absorbs β allow aluminium stops β Aluminium makes count rate decrease
C1 A1
(c) (10mm) lead / Pb stops all β OR only γ gets through (10 mm) lead / Pb still some count rate with lead / Pb
B1 B1
12 (a) (i) (number of) protons + neutrons OR p + n OR mass number/nucleon number (ii) (number of) protons OR atomic number/ proton number Ignore electrons (b) (i) zero nucleons OR mass number is zero (ii) negative charge OR requires a proton to be neutral
(c) (i) (ii)
240 94 Pu
OR Pu OR
250 98 Cf
OR
250 98
B1
B1 B1
B1
NOT just Cf
B1
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
[6]
B1
240 94
_
[7]
[6]
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) – Extended Theory May 1999 1
(a)
Distance moved in one revolution is equal to the circumference = 62.8/63 (in) Time for 1 rev is 5(s) Speed = 62.8/5 = 12.6 (m/s)
1 1 1 1 1 4 (max)
(b)(i)
12.6 (m/s) / same value / same number Direction to the right /east / as marked on diagram Velocity is a vector or has direction / speed is a scalar or has no direction P is moving in a circle/constantly changing direction/not in a straight line If direction changes velocity changes/speed does not or definition of velocity/speed
1 1 1 1
(c)
Rotation is taking place/direction changing Force is the centripetal force/force needed for circular motion Must act through centre otherwise motion not circular
1 1 1 3
(d)(i)
1. Any reference to air resistance 2. The water has hit the ground 1. Velocity on hitting ground = (10 x 0.6) = 6 (m/s) Distance=6/2 x 0.6 = 1.8 (m) 2. Horizontal distance = average velocity x time or area under graph = (9.5 x 0.6) = 5.7 (m)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
(ii)
(ii)
2
1 4 (max)
(e)
Water spreads out 1 Cross-sectional area of water at R much larger than at Q 1 Pressure = force/area 1 Same mass/volume/s spread over larger area = Lower pressure or vice versa2 4 (max)
(a)
Heat = mass x specific heat x temperature change Heat = power x time Heat from heater = heat in water 30 x l000 x l8 000 = 54000 x c x 2 = 5 000 (J/kg K)
1 1 1 2 1 6
(b)(i)
Most energetic molecules leave the water surface (evaporation) Carry away extra/latent heat Water heats air molecules at surface (by conduction) Air molecules carry heat away by convection Molecules in water surface emit radiation into air Energy carried away as wave energy
1 1 1 1 1 1 4 (max)
(ii)
Some of the heat supplied does not end up in the water Takes longer for same temperature rise More heat supplied in longer time
1 1 1 7
1
3
(a)
Scale, full size Line at object height, refracted through lens to pass through focus Ray through focus produced back to pass through “3 cm line” Line through centre to locate object and image Distance of object from lens, 2.5 cm to 2.9 cm Distance of image from lens ,7.5 cm to 8.7 cm
1 1 1 1 1 1 6
(b)(i) (ii)
Light of one colour / wavelength / frequency 8 3 x 10 m/s Formula quoted sin i / sin r = refractive index o o = sin 37 / sin 22 = 1.5 o Beam continued using given angle of refraction (22 )
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
Reasonable curve, either direction Curve to positive plate (upwards) Electrons are negatively charged Unlike charges attract Positive plate attracts electrons Arrow, towards P, anywhere on the lines PQRS
1 1
(iii) (iv) 4
(a)(i) (ii) (iii) (b)(i) (ii)
(c)(i) (ii)
(d)(i) (ii) (iii)
5
(a)(i)
(ii)
13
-19
2 1 5
Total charge/s = 10 x 1.6 x 10 -6 = 1.6 x 10 (C) Charge = current x time -6 Current = charge/1(s) or 1.6 x 10 / 1 Amperes / A
1 1 1 1 1 4 (max)
Equation E = V It or = V q E = 10000 x 2.1 x 600 (J) 7 = 1.3x10 (J) Equation P = E/t 7 P = 1.3 x l0 /600 4 2.1 x 10 (W)
1 1 1 1 1 1 6
Path curved, up or down Curved downwards Fleming’s (left-hand) rule stated Current = 12/100 = 0.12 (A) Bigger deflection in the opposite direction
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
lonisation means creating positively charged and negatively charged ions from the air molecules between the gauze and the wire The wire and the gauze are charged, one positively and the other negatively The ionised air molecules (atoms) move to the opposite charge Create a “surge” of current seen as a spark Alpha, a huge amount, any quoted figures
1 1 1 1 1 1
2
(b)
Beta, a small amount compared to alpha, any quoted figures Gamma, virtually none at all
1 1 6 (max)
Beta:
1 1 1 1 1 1 4 (max)
Gamma :
mass 1/1836 amu/very small/ negligible constitution 1 electron charge -1 unit mass zero constitution waves/ wave energy charge zero
3
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) – Extended Theory November 1999 1 (a)(i) PE (for one fall) is mgh = (200 x 10 x 6) = 12 000 J (ii) PE (lost) = KE (on impact) or v = 2gh or s = 2at 12000(J) or answer to (i) = _ mv or v = 2 x 10 x 6 or t = 1.1 s v = 120 or v = gt v = l0.95 or 11 m/s (b)(i)
(Energy to do) work/mechanical energy to move the pile against resistance/ground forces (Energy to) heat (Energy to) sound (energy chains max 1, first answer only considered.)1 At impact kinetic energy/ momentum large After impact kinetic energy/ momentum soon zero Kinetic energy change/ momentum change large Slows to rest in very short distance/time KE lost/work = force x distance the pile moves / rate of change of momentum = force
1 1 1
(c)
lifting suspension etc/ pile deeper after each hit need more p.e. each time Rising mass gains k.e. All lost at top Power to stop/brake rising mass All lost as heat Efficiency of motor not 100% Lost as heat
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 (max)
(d)
Greater mass Fall greater distance Use motor to drive mass down/thinner or pointed pile
1 1 1 3
(a)
Take temperatures before and after heating/ temperature difference with thermocouple Take the time that the heater is switched on/ time with stopwatch Find in some way the mass of the block and the power of the heater
(ii)
2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
1 1 1 1 2 8 (max)
1 1 2 3 (max)
(b)
Heat input of heater = heat gained by the block Heat input of heater =200 x 1 50(J) Heat gained by metal =1 x s x 50(J) s = 600 (J/kgK)/ 0.6 (J/gE)
1 1 1 1 4
(c)(i)
Outline e.g. 2 metals to suitable meter Essential parts labelled Temperature difference produces an emf/voltage/current emf/current read by meter as a temperature Temperature rapidly changing/small changes in temperature
1 1 1 1 1
(ii) (iii)
measures high/low/wide range of temperatures Not fragile like mercury in glass /can be made recording/remote reading / thermometer not removed
3
o
o
1 6 (max)
(a)
Each reflected angle 85 /10 /170 deviation at each reflection o o Total deviation 20 /160
1 1 2
(b)
(Angle of incidence much) greater than the critical angle So total internal reflection occurs
1 1 2
(c)(i)
1.50 = 1/sin c sin c=0.6667 o o c = 41.8 / 42 (Angle of incidence is) less than the critical angle Refracted (out into the air)/ not totally internally reflected
1 1 1 1 1 4 (max)
Light of one colour/ wavelength Light of one frequency 14 -7 Speed = 4 x l0 x 5 x l0 8 = 2 x l0 (m/s) Speed in air/ speed in glass = refractive index Speed in air / speed in glass x 1.50
1 1 1 1 1 1 5 (max)
(ii)
(d)(i) (ii) (iii)
4
o
1
(a)(i)
Speed of rotation (of the coil/magnet) is faster The number of turns on the coil / number of coils (not transformer) is greater The strength of the magnet / magnetic field is stronger Any other correct factor identified How factor change relates to the emf
(ii)
The induced emf/current produced by a conductor cutting a magnetic field induced emf/current also interacts with the magnetic field interaction produces a force which slows/opposes the moving conductor
(b)(i) (ii) (iii)
(c)(i)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 (max)
1 1 1 7
Power input = power output / 400 x 80 = 30 000 x I I = 1.1(A) Reduce voltage to value suitable for consumers / 240 V / 110 V Current in these cables much reduced (because) voltage increased 2 2 Heat = I Rt or Power = I R or heat in cables less
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 (max)
3.1 (A) at X
1
(ii) (iii) (iv)
(v)
5
(a)
(b)(i) (ii)
(c)
0.8 (A) at Y R = 110/any current value R = (110/0.8) = 138 (ohm) Any attempt at use of I/R formula for parallel resistors 1/R = 1/24 + 1/48 R = 16 (ohm) 2 Use of VI or I R for calculating power 2 = 110 x 4.6/4.6 x 24 = 506/508 (W) 2 Use of energy = I Rt / VIt = 30000 / 31000 (J)
Diagram showing radioactive liquid in pipe, weld and detector in correct places three labels Where weld thin reading rises Radiation passes more easily through / less absorbed by thinner metal
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 (max)
1 1 1 1 3 (max)
Alpha - none passes through steel Beta - some passes through steel Gamma - most/all passes through steel Accept either beta or gamma with some reasoning Beta/gamma with clear reason for the choice
1 1 1 1 1 4 (max)
Any 3 standard precautions which apply to this situation (generally shielding/absorbing, distance, monitoring radiation)
3 3
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) – Extended Theory May/June 2000 1
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii) (iii)
2
3
Any three from: velocity is a vector and speed is a scalar vector or velocity has direction scalar or speed has no direction or only magnitude ref to vertical path as fixed direction
1. 4.5 ± 0.1 s 2. any four from: decelerates uniformly from high velocity at 0 s to zero velocity(at 4.5 s) accelerates (for the last 0.5 s) 2 1. (—)10 m/s 2. 9.0 s or e.c.f. from 1 value stated as 45 m/s ± 1 m/s
3 3 1
4 1 1 1 8
(a)
specific latent heat = heat supplied/mass melted (mass melted =) 0.18 kg (heat supplied =) 60 000 J specific latent heat = 330 000 J/kg
(b)
any 2 from: molecules vibrate pass energy from molecule to molecule process is conduction
(a)(i) (ii)
mass = 0.75 kg weight =0.75 x 10 = 7.5 N
(b)
Any 3 from: (sum of) clockwise moments = (sum of) anticlockwise moments about pivot no net turning effect needs extra moment (one side) to turn
1 1 1 1 4
2 2 1 1 1 3
2
(c)
use of k.e. = _ mv 2 = _ x 0.5x1.2 =0.36 J
(d)
any 2 from; (only) k.e. (before impact) less or some k.e. after impact heat + sound
3 3 1 1 1 3
1
2 2
4
(a)
(b)(i) (ii)
5
6
7
any 2 from: random collides with or bounces off sides hits or bounces off other molecules other relevant points/explanations
2 2
hits / bounces off ABCD at some time hits / bounces off all sides at some time / chance of hitting all sides equal (so equal pressure)
1 1 2
(c)
use of p.v = c 5 5 p = (0.09/0.04 x 10 ) = 2.3 x l0 Pa
(a)
hits at right angles to surface / angle i = 0 along normal
1 1
(b)
velocity/speed/wavelength increases at F,decreases at D
1 1 2
(c)
correct angle marked / value 45
(d)
refractive index = 1/sin 45 = 1.4(1)
1 1 2
(a)(i) (ii)
place of higher pressure / air molecules closer together place of lower pressure / air molecules further apart
(b)
wavelength = 2.5 m frequency = (330/2.5=) 130 Hz
(c)
distance travelled in 1.2 s = (330 x 1.2 =) 396 m distance = 200 m
1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2
(a)
circuit with battery symbol and switch and three from: at least one straight line inside the coil at least one loop at each side at least one complete loop through the coil 2 full field arrows correct
1
use of charge/time = 0.4 A
1 1 2
(b)
1 1 2 o
o
2 2
o
2
3 4
(c)(i)
use of VIt = 19(.2) J resistance = 1.2/0.4 = 3 ohm
1 1 1 1 4
(d)
e.m.f. = joules/coulomb = 24/16 or 1.5 V
1 1 2
(a)
any 3 from: primary (current) creates magnetic field field is (constantly) changing field in core links into secondary changing field in or through secondary coil induces a.c. in secondary coil,
(ii)
8
(b)
9
10
VpIp = VsIs 240 x Ip = 12 x 3.2 Ip (= 3.2/20) = 0.16 A
3 3
(a)
deviation up marked P deviation down marked R /or opposite way, both marked both correct and reasonable curves
(b)
Any three from: in front/behind paper / at right angles to electric field N-pole “in front” of diagram (to give field into paper) magnetic field deflects beam “downwards” by Fleming’s rule etc.
(a)
228 90
(b)(i)
must be _ because _ and _ absorbed by Aluminium / only _ not absorbed _/_/_ one reason e.g. range of any/all greater than 1.5 cm in air
(ii)
(c)(i) (ii)
Th
4 2
He +
3 3
224 88
Ra
atoms of gas gain / lose electron(s) / by or from colliding particles (photons) not particles / no mass / no charge / very penetrating / speed of light etc. energy (of photons) not big enough
3
1 1 1 3
1
2 3 2 2
2 1 1 4 1 1 1 3
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) – Extended Theory November 2000 1 (a) downward force through centre of mass upward force along wire downward force/weight = 5 N upward force/tension = 5 N
2
3
4
1 1 1 1 4
(b)
weight/gravity/pull of earth tension/pull of wire(on mass)
1 1 2
(c)(i) (ii) (iii)
continues straight line XY for any distance line becomes curve of decreasing gradient to Z 1.5kg 12mm
1 1 1 1 4
(a)
change in property/length/volume per degree
(b)(i) (ii)
nitrogen gases expand more/most
1 1 1 1 2
(c)(i) (ii)
copper small increase in length per degree/high melting point etc
1 1 2
(d)
pointer movement not same for all degrees effect different at different parts of the scale
1 1 2
(a)
use of p = hdg = 6 x 1000 x 10 = 60 000 Pa
1 1 1 3
(b)
use of F = pA (= 45 000 x 0.015) = 680 N
1 1 2
(c)
use of work done = Fs (= 550 x 4) = 2200 J
1 1 2
(d)
at pulley (axles) in person’s body at block work/energy used against friction force or work/energy used in moving parts of the body eg. lifting arms
1 1 1 2 1 4 (max)
(a)
use of v = f x wavelength, (= 0.8 x 1.6) = 1.3 m/s
1 1 2
(b(i)
1.6 m or same
1
5
6
7
(ii)
0.8 Hz or same
1 2
(c)
(part) circles centred on middle of gap not complete semicircles
1 1 1 3
(a)
use of specific heat capacity = heat supplied/mass x temperature change = 15 500/0.45 x 8.2 = 4 200 J/kgK
1 2 1 4
(b)(i) (ii)
compress gas/ move piston in use of p x V = c substitution correct 3 v = 0.0034 m
1 1 1 1 4
(a)
ray correct through F ray correct through C or ray through other F rays produced back to form image
1 1 1 3
(b)
sensible position, left of lens
1 1
(c)
image length 4.5 ± 0.2 cm Approximately x 3 [e.c.f. from (a)]
1 1 2
(a)
use of R = V/I 6 ohm
1 1 2
(b)
two in parallel = 3 ohm circuit total = 9 ohm
1 1 2
(c)
use of current = V/R = 1.3 A
1 1 2
(d)
voltage across R less than 12 V / low / 8V or current through R less than 2 A (1.3 (A) or lower voltage means less bright or lower current means less bright current through P and Q equal / voltage across P and Q equal current through P/Q less than through R or p.d. across P/Q less than across R
(e)
all three in parallel
1 1 1 3 1 1
8
(a)
any sine wave amplitude approx 7V 2 correct full waves
1 1 1 3
(b)(i)
any mention of a magnetic field conductor cutting field/lines (so) induces emf (must be linked to cutting lines) change in rate of cutting lines of force coil rotates cuts one way then other change in cutting direction reverses emf
1 1 1 1 1 1 4 (max)
electrons move from duster to rod extra electrons on rod so -vely charged hold rod close to plate touch plate to earth it remove rod leaves plate positively charged
1 1 1 1 1 4 (max)
(b)
alpha particles (strongly) ionise air make air conduct electrons to the plate (or in terms of conduction and neutralisation of charg(e)
1 1 2
(a)
A zX
e + Z+1Y correct mass no. and correct atomic number
1 1 2
(b)(i)
some beta absorbed by paper, some / most pass through thicker paper less pass through / lower reading no gamma would be absorbed by paper gamma are less safe
1 1 1 1 4
smooth curve, either direction curve towards bottom of page
1 1 2
(ii)
9
(a)(i) (ii)
10
(ii)
(c)
o -1
A
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) – Extended Theory May/June 2001 1
2
(a)(i) (ii)
uniform acceleration uniform speed / terminal velocity
1 1 2
(b)
20s
1 1
(c)(i) (ii)
force of gravity / weight downwards force of gravity / weight downwards and resistance / upthrust upwards
2 2 3 (max)
(d)(i) (ii)
yes no
(e)
distance = area under graph / 0.5 x 5 x 48 = 120m
1 1 2
(a)
momentum = mass x velocity / momentum = 800 x 20 = 16 000 kg m/s
1 1 1 2 (max)
(b)(i)
momentum change = 16000 - 4000 force = 12 000/4 = 3000 N deceleration = speed change / time 2 = 15/4 = 3.8m/s
1 2 1 2 6
(a)
diagram showing balance and measuring cylinder suitable labels
1 1 2
(b)
balance reading for mass two volume readings
1 1 2
(c)
volume of stone from start and finish readings density = mass / volume
1 1 2
(a)
suitable random path
1 1
(b)
air molecules hit particles any two of: molecules moving very fast / particles more massive / many hits per particle / hits uneven
1
(c)
any two of: bigger movements / faster movements / air molecules faster
2 2
(a)
heat input = power x time / 50 x 600 temperature change for liquid = 45°C heat gained by liquid = mass x s x temperature change / 200 x s x 45 s = 30 000 / 9 000
1 1 1 1
(ii)
3
4
5
1 1
1
2 2 (max)
= 3.3 J/(g K) (b)(i) (ii)
6
(a)(i)
8
2 1 3 1 1 1 1 4
(b)
i = 32°, and r = 20° R.I. = sin i / sin r = sin 32° / sin 20° = 1.55
1 1 1 1 4
(a)
direction sound (wave) is travelling
1 1
(b)(i) (ii) (iii)
pressure varies along sound wave / some particles closer than others very few particles at P / P is a rarefaction many particles at Q / Q is a compression
1 1 1 2 (max)
(c)
vibrates / oscillates / moves backwards and forwards along the direction of the wave
1 1 2
(d)
40 mm
1 1
(a)(i)
current = power / voltage or = 0.6 / 1.5 = 0.4 A resistance = voltage / current or 1.5 / 0.4 (e.c.f.) = 3.8 ohm charge = current x time or = 0.4 x 20 (e.c.f.) =8C
1 1 1 1 1 1 5 (max)
two lengths in parallel correctly shown on Fig. 8.2 two lengths in series correctly shown on Fig. 8.3
1 1 1 1 3 (max)
(c)
energy = l x l x R x t or V x l x t = 0.6 x 0.6 x 5 x 20 = 36 J
1 1 1 3
(a)(i)
any method of induction any mention of magnetic field changing / alternating core transmits (changing) magnetic field from primary to secondary
1 1 1 1
(ii) (iii)
(b)(i) (ii)
9
any two of: heat lost to atmosphere / temperature rise less / bigger by reference to equation any one of: lagging / lid etc
any attempt shown to mark or measure critical angle critical angle = 40° (not 42°) incident angle at Q greater o >40 (> than candidate’s value i.e. e.c.f.)
(ii)
7
1 1 5 (max)
2
(ii)
no change in magnetic field energy not transferred from primary to secondary
1 1 5 (max)
(b)(i)
voltage ratio = turns ratio 2000 turns on primary primary voltage x primary current = sec voltage x sec current 0.2 A
1 1 1 1 4
each correct entry scores one mark mass of nucleus (much) greater than alpha particle after collision effect on alpha particle greater positive charge repulsion from the positive nucleus most alpha particles pass straight through most of atom space or nucleus much smaller than atom
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 (max)
(ii)
10
(a) (b)(i) (ii) (iii)
3
1
2
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) – Extended Theory October/November 2001 (a)(i) 10 m/s 1 (ii) 14 s 1 (iii) (distance is area under graph ) = 140 m 1 3 (b)
deceleration = change in speed / time or 15 m/s in 8 s 2 = 1.9 m/s
1 1 2
(c)(i) (ii) (iii)
arrow clearly towards centre causes circular motion / prevents it going in a straight line rails push on wheels / train or need force to produce acceleration
1 1 1 3
(a)(i)
momentum = mass x velocity / 90 x 45 = 4050 kg m/s or Ns average force = rate of change of momentum or force = ma or = 4050/1.2 or 90 x 45/1.2 = 3380 N
1 1
(b)
kinetic to heat (+ sound)
1 1
(c)
k.e. = 0.5 x m v 0.5 x 90 x 2025 = 91 kJ
1 1 1 3
(a)
ruler on pivot with one mass hanger on each side of the pivot ruler, pivot and masses labelled
1 1 2
(b)
any indication that masses and lengths from pivot measured any indication of adjustment to achieve balance
1 1 2
(c)
e.g. 100 g at 20 cm balances 50 g at 40 cm, two examples one calculation e.g. 100 x 20 = 50 x 40
2 1 3
(a)
(fast-moving) molecules hit M or each other change of direction as a result of collisions stated or implied
1 1 2
(b)
motion is random movement keeps ‘doubling back’ so forward progress is slow
1 1 2
(a)
energy needed to heat 1 g through 10 degrees = 10500/250 or energy needed to heat 1 g through 100 degrees = 10500/25 = 420 J energy needed to convert 1 g of water = 33900/15 = 2260 J difference = 1840 J
(ii)
3
4
5
(b)
energy needed to separate the liquid molecules because there are forces holding the molecules together
1
1 1 4
2 2 1 5 1 1 2
6
(c)(i) (ii) (iii)
sensitivity, change in length / volume per degree or similar range, lowest (temperature measured) to highest (large) or similar linear scale, same distance between all degree intervals or similar
1 1 1 3
(a)
names, refraction and diffraction wavelength change, (smaller) and same / no change frequency, same and same
2 1 1 4
(b)(i)
(two) correct rays through lens rays produced back to image times bigger = 2 1. Eye position suitable to view virtual image 2. magnifying glass or eyepiece
2 1 1 1 1 6
A and B joined by (straight) line, all above the centre line exterior loop A to B arrow (internal) A to B and arrow (external) B to A or one or more correct arrows on the loop
1 1
circle through C arrow anticlockwise lines can not touch or cross 1. Strength same, direction opposite 2. Stronger field, same direction
1 1 1 1 1 5
any use of W = V x I X = 2.5 A; Y = 1.25 A Z = 3.75 A (e.c.f.)
1
(b)
attempt to use parallel resistance formula or Ohm’s law on full circuit resistance = 64 ohm
1 2 3
(c)(i)
total resistance = 288 ohm current = 0.83 A A, 80 V; B, 160 V
(ii)
7
(a)
(b)(i) (ii) (iii)
8
(a)
(ii) (d)(i) (ii) 9
(a) (b) (c)
10
(a)
1 3
1 2
1 2 3
any point e.g. lamps require 240 V or voltage divided in series one reference to values worked out by candidate parallel circuit / switch in each line affects only 1 lamp etc
1 1 2 4
connections correct 3.5 squares 1.4 V any sensible attempt e.g. takes less current / shows any variations in value
1 1 1
24 and 12 on magnesium 0 and –1 on e
1 1 2
2
1 1
(b)(i) (ii)
curve to positive electron charge negative negative attracted to positive
1 1 1 3
(c)(i)
apparatus shown, beta source, detector / counter, paper in between items above labelled read detector, move paper and read again or use second sheet of paper any change in reading means change in thickness
1 1 1 1 4
(ii)
3
June 2003
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/03 PHYSICS Paper 3 (Extended)
Page 1
1
(a) (b)
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003
force of gravity acts on masses/weight of masses vector has direction/force has direction
B1 B1
(i)
spring 1 (more difficult) any correct relevant pair of values P marked at extension 25 mm to 28 mm explanation in terms of end of proportionality each graph read at 15 N, approx. 25 mm, 19 mm difference correct, 6 mm +/- 1 mm
M1 A1 A1 B1 C1 A1
change in speed is 1.5 m/s deceleration = decrease in speed/time or 1.5/12 a = (-/+) 0.125 m/s
C1 C1 A1
average speed = 1.75 m/s distance = 21 m
C1 A1
attempt to use triangle or parallelogram of forces stated scale used 950 N and 1220 N in correct relative directions correct resultant drawn in weight = 1785 N [limits 1700 N to 1850 N]
M1 A1 C1 C1 A1
work = force x distance or 1500 x 3.0 work = 4500 J power = work/time or 4500/2.5 power = 1800 W
C1 A1 C1 A1
air molecules hit dust particles hits continuously/unevenly/hits cause movement in all directions air molecules fast moving/high energy
M1 A1 B1
3
any attempt to use p x v = constant or correct proportion fraction 2 x 80/25 seen p = 6.4 x 10 (Pa)
C1 C1 A1
3
(iii)
(a)
(b)
3
(a)
(b)
(i) (ii)
4
(a)
(b)
Paper 3
(i) (ii)
(ii)
2
Syllabus 0625
2
6 [8]
3 2 [5]
5
4 [9]
[6] 5
(a) (b)
(c)
Y is a wire of different metal/not copper Z is a galvanometer/millivoltmeter/miIIiammeter
B1 B1
2 junctions at different temperatures, accept one hot, one cold temperature difference causes e.m.f./voltage/current reading of meter changes (with temperature) 1 junction at known temperature/need for calibration
B1
dull or black surface
B1
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
B1 B1 B1
2
max 3 1 [6]
Page 2
6
(a)
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003
(i)
C1 A1 B1 B1
use of sini/sinr correct substitution from candidates values value correct within agreed limits from candidate's values
C1 C1 A1
3 [7]
(a)
value 3 x 10 m/s
A1
1
(b)
speed of light (much) greater than speed of sound or value for sound
A1
1
source and receiver arrangement with detail and labels distance between source and receiver time between flash and bang speed = distance/time
C1 A1 B1 B1 B1
use of charge = It or I = 90/45 current = 2 A resistance = voltage/current or 6/2 resistance is 3 ohm energy = Vit or Vq or 6 x 90 energy is 540 J
C1 A1 C1 A1 C1 A1
idea of energy transfer is (6) J/C
C1 A1
power = VI or 24 X 2 power is 48 W voltage = power/current or 48/0.4 voltage is 120 V
C1 A1 C1 A1
(b)
(c)
(i) (ii) (iii)
8
(a)
(i) (ii) (iii)
(b)
9
Paper 3
incident ray, refracted ray and normal drawn all correct and meeting at a point angle of incidence and refraction correctly identified values correct within agreed limits
(ii) (iii)
7
Syllabus 0625
(a)
(i) (ii)
(b)
(i) (ii)
no/very little energy/power lost or energy/power in = energy/power out any mention of magnetic field changing magnetic field field passes through core or secondary coil induces voltage in secondary coil number of turns on secondary determines voltage output
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
4
max 4 [6]
6 2 [8]
4
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
max 4 [8]
Page 3
10
(a)
(b)
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003
Syllabus 0625
(ii)
circular line of force around wire through P arrow(s) on line anticlockwise - none wrong arrow through Q to left
M1 A1 A1
3
(i) (ii)
none/stays same direction reverses
B1 B1
2
at S - stronger at T - same (strength) at W - same (strength)
B1 B1 B1
source, detector named absorber/air and labels take detector reading with no source (background) detector reading with source, detector and air only detector reading with appropriate named absorber (including distance in air) same reading with absorber(including air) as background so all alpha absorbed by cardboard/paper/air, others would get through
B1 B1 B1 B1
curved path stated or drawn path at right angles to magnetic field into paper
B1 B1 B1
(i)
(c)
11
(a)
(i) (ii)
(iii)
(b)
Paper 3
3 [8]
B1 B1 B1
max 6
3 [9] TOTAL 80
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
November 2003
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/03 PHYSICS Paper 3 (Extended)
Page 1
1 (a) (i) (ii)
(b) (i)
(ii)
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – NOVEMBER 2003
(ii)
Paper 3
7(.0 s)
A1
PQ or 0 – 2s or other correct description
A1
distance = av. speed x time or area under graph
C1
distance 11 x 2 m= 22 m
A1
deceleration (now) uniform (test 2)
B1
slower/lower (average) value/value between that of PQ and QR/takes longer (or values) time to come to rest.
B1
deceleration = change in speed/time or 15/8
C1
value = 1.9 m/s (c) (i)
Syllabus 0625
2
A1
graph shows constant acceleration
B1
force = ma (and m is also constant) so force is constant
B1
towards the centre of the motion/circle
A1
4
4
3 [11]
2 (a)
pressure = depth x g x density of water
C1
pressure = 50 x 10 x 1000
C1
so value is 500 000 Pa or N/m (b)
force = pressure x area
2
in any form
A1
3
C1
force = 500 000 x 0.15 x 0.07
C1
force = 5250 N
A1
3 [6]
3 (a)
(b)
one slightly nearer the centre than the other
C1
20 kg is the nearer one to the pivot
A1
2
Clockwise moments = anticlockwise moments (about point/pivot)
A1
1
(accept opposite directions and equal) (c)
18x2.5=20xB
C1
distance = 2.25(m)
A1
2 [5]
4 (a)
(b)
(c)
Some have extra/more energy than others
B1
most energetic leave surface/ break liquid bonds etc
B2
evaporation occurs strictly at the surface/at all temperature
B1
boiling occurs throughout liquid/ at one temperature (at normal at. pr.)/100°C
B1
energy supplied = Wt /60 x 120
C1
sp.latent heat = energy/mass evaporated or 60 x 120/3.2
C1
value is 2250 J/g
A1
M2
2
3 [7]
5 (a) (i) (ii)
nitrogen
M1
copper-solid-molecules very tightly bonded together so separate little
B1
water – liquid – molecules less tightly bonded/still small separation
B1
nitrogen – gas – molecules “free” and not bonded so separate most
B1
(N.B. accept 2 bonding statements for 2 marks. 1 separation statement for 1 mark)
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
M3
Page 2
(b) (i) (ii)
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – NOVEMBER 2003
Syllabus 0625
Paper 3
size of movement/change in length of liquid column per degree
B1
change in length (of liquid column) same for all degrees
B1
2 [5]
6 (a)
(b)
3 more roughly circular
B1
all drawn clearly circular, stop (well) clear of barrier and centred on slit
B1
wavelength constant throughout, both sides of barrier
B1
wavelength – speed/frequency
C1
in any form
values substituted correctly
C1
answer 6 x 10 m
A1
3
3 [6]
7 (a)
two dots, marked F, each 5.0 cm from the lens
A2
2
(b)
each correct ray one mark
M2
2
(c)
correct image, labeled I
A1
1
(d)
rays pass along the axis undeviated/object distance same for all object/rays meet at same distance on image/image distance same for all image
B1
1
(e)
magnifying glass/eyepiece of telescope or microscope
B1
1 [7]
8 (a) (i) (ii)
(b)
(c)
0-6 (V) positive and negative
A1
all waves roughly 6V amplitude
B1
3 waves approx. one wave every 0.1 s
B1
any mention of magnetic field
B1
coils (forced to) cut magnetic field
B1
includes e.m.f./voltage/current in the coils
B1
as in Fleming’s R.H. rule
B1
mechanical energy/work (in)/kinetic energy
B1
electrical (out) (+ heat) (ignore sound)
B1
3
M3
2 [8]
9 (a) (i)
regular (but)/not normal (sine) wave/several waves added together etc.
B1
(ii)
1.6(V)
A1
(iii)
connect known voltage to Y plates (without any changes to C.R.O.)
B1
read off against screen values
B1
6.1 (cm) (accept 6 or any value in range 6.0 to 6.2)
A1
50 ms for 10 cm or 5 ms per cm e.c.f.
C1
so 6.1 x 5 ms or 31 ms
A1
difference in time of runners finishing race or other timing between two closely separated events.
B1
(b) (i) (ii)
(iii)
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
4
4 [8]
Page 3
10 (a)
(b) (i)
(ii)
(iii)
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – NOVEMBER 2003
Syllabus 0625
Paper 3
current = power/voltage or 150/12
C1
value is 12.5 A
A1
sum of currents at junction = current after junction/12.5 A = 5.0 A + I
C1
value is 7.5 A
A1
power = VI or is 7.5 x 12 e.c.f from (i)
C1
value is 90 W
A1
resistance = voltage/current or 12/7.5 e.c.f. from (i) but not from (a)
C1
value is 1.6Ω
A1
2
6 [8]
11 (a)
(b)
(c) (i)
(ii)
top line correct, need 24 and 0
B1
bottom line correct, need 12 and –1 (accept β or e for electron
B1
particles take curved path (accept from diagram)
B1
move between the poles at right angles to lines of force
B1
move out of paper
B1
use detector to pick up radiation (from isotope at points on/in body etc.)
B1
high count where circulation good or v.v. explained
B1
2
3
alpha particles all absorbed, none detected beta particles may be largely absorbed, not penetrative enough gamma rays reach detector/leave body
any two
B2
4 [9]
TOTAL 80
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
June 2004
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/03 PHYSICS Paper 3 (Extended)
Page 1
1
(a)
Mark Scheme PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
(i)
Paper 3
Acceleration / increase in speed Uniform / constant or in a straight line Uniform speed Velocity changes / motion in a circle / accelerates Similarity: same value / 6m/s or velocity changing Difference: opposite directions / up at E, down at C Average speed x time / area under graph / 3 x 20 60 m 6 x 52 312m
M1 A1 B1 B1 B1 B1 C1 A1 C1 A1
(a)
750 N
A1
1
(b)
p.e. lost / converted = mgh or weight x height 750 x 15 or 75 x10 x15 = 11250 (J) p.e. lost = k.e. gained = 11250 (J)
C1 C1 A1
3
Any 3 of: heat in water / rock (kinetic) energy of (moved) water / to make water move/ make waves some k.e. still in (sinking) rock sound energy on impact / of splash
B3
3
(ii) (b) (c)
(i) (ii)
2
Syllabus 0625
(c)
4 2
4 [10]
(just heat and sound C1) [7] 3
(a)
(b)
(i) (ii) (i) (ii)
4
(a)
(b)
Extension proportional to load however expressed Any relevant arithmetic to show direct proportion (or straight line graph with values) Work done = force x distance / 400 x 0.210 84.0 J (total) work/time or (24 x) 84/60 (apply e.c.f from (i) ) 33.6 W
B1 B1
Water molecules at higher temps. have higher (av) k.e. / energy Higher energy molecules (have greater chance to) escape the surface Higher energy molecules have energy to break liquid “bonds” or separate liquid molecules or more evaporation at 85°C (lowers level)
B1
Heat for evaporation = 34 500 – 600 = (33 900)
C1
Sp. latent heat of evaporation = heat/mass evap. or 33 900 / 15 2260 J/g (method and working correct, but no heat loss used, 2/3) (600 added or 34 500 used can score 2 max)
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2004
C1 A1 C1 A1
2
4 [6]
B1 B1
3
C1 A1 3
Page 2
5
(a)
Mark Scheme PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
(b)
6
(a)
(i) (ii)
Syllabus 0625
Thermopile / thermocouple / (blackened) thermometer / infra red detector or use ammeter / voltmeter in supply circuit One of: same distance of plate to detector or use two identical detectors or same time (after switching on) Dull black better radiator / radiates more than silver / or emits more heat / radiation Infra red (i.r.)
B1 A1
any correct example e.g. heating water or chimney current clear and complete direction shown correctly by arrows
M1 A1 A1
Refraction at Q approx. correct, ray emerge from AB parallel PQ Angle of incidence correctly marked Angle of refraction correctly marked
B1 B1 B1
B1 B1
(can score even if incorrect / no refraction shown) (b) (c)
7
(d)
3 [7]
3
Refractive index = speed in air / speed in glass Refractive index = (3 x 108 /2 x 108) = 1.5
B1 B1
(i)
Wavelength = v/f or 3 x 108/6 x 1014 Wavelength = 5 x 10-7 m
C1 A1
C,R,C,R,C,R marked (or v.v.) along XY
B1
Above normal / high air pressure or particles close together Below normal / low pressure or particles further apart
B1 B1
2
Oscillation / vibration of particles / molecules (or particles / molecules move to and fro) Oscillation is along XY
B1 B1
2
Time = distance / speed or (2x) 50/340 Time = 0.29 s
C1 A1
2
(i) (ii)
(c)
4
(i) (ii)
(a) (b)
Paper 3
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2004
2 2 [7] 1
Page 3
8
Mark Scheme PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
(a) (b)
1.52 kW (i)
1
B2
Current = power/voltage or 200/240 Current = 0.83 A Energy = power x time or 1.2 x 3 Energy = 3.6 kWh or 1.3 x 107 J Current = 60/240 R= V/I or 240/0.25 R =960Ω
C1 A1 C1 A1 C1 C1 A1
Solenoid ends connected to meter, both labelled One magnet in correct position to enter / leave solenoid, labelled
B1 B1
2
(b)
Push magnet into coil / pull out / move near end of coil
B1
1
(c)
(magnet has / produces) magnetic lines of force / magnetic field lines cut (coils of) solenoid / coils / wires
B1 B1
2
Pull magnet out of coil / reverse effect to answer (b) Move magnet faster or effect in (a) faster
B1 B1
Analogue, continuously increasing / decreasing readings Digital, readings increase / decrease by one unit
B1 B1
(c)
(i) (ii) (iii)
(a)
(d)
10
A1
Paper 3
Each appliance is connected across 240 V supply or equivalent Any 2: all work on same voltage or on 240 V or mains OR all have full/stated power OR each can be on or off OR one goes off/breaks others stay on
(ii)
9
Syllabus 0625
(i) (ii)
(a)
(b)
(i) (ii) (iii)
Transistors + other components such as resistors Standard symbol, must have labeled inputs and output Both inputs 0 (off), or either one input 0 (off), output 0 (off) Both inputs 1 (on), output 1 (on) OR correct truth table drawn (C1) Some explanation of what truth table shows (A1)
B1 3
7 [11]
2 [7]
2
B1 B1 B1 B1
4 [6]
11
(a)
(b)
(c)
Particle 1 carries straight on Particle 2 (slightly) deflected (less than 90°) Particle 3 “turns back” / (deflected more than 90°) Nucleus is heavy /dense / all or most of mass in atom in nucleus Most of atom is space or nucleus is (very) small cf. atom (mass) 4
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2004
B1 B1 B1
3
B1 B1
2
B1
1 [6]
Page 4
Mark Scheme PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
Syllabus 0625
Paper 3
PAPER TOTAL = [80]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2004
November 2004
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/03 PHYSICS (Extended Theory)
Page 1
1 (a) (b) (i) (ii) (c)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – November 2004
Syllabus 0625
Paper 3
deceleration/slows down/speed reduces deceleration uniform/comes to rest at 4 s
1 1
40 (m/s)
1
4 (s)
1
speed falls from 0 to 40 m/s in 4 s 1 acceleration = change in speed/time taken or 40(m/s)/4(s) 1 acceleration = 10 m/s2 1
(d)
2 (a) (b) (c)
3 (a)
2
2
3
distance = average speed x time or area of triangle under graph = 20 x 4 or 2 x 40 = 80 m
1
pressure = hdg or 20 x 1000 x 10 = 2 x 105 Pa
1 1
2
force = pressure x area or 2 x 105 x 0.5 e.c.f. = 1 x 105 N
1 1
2
potential energy (at water surface) changed to kinetic energy (at pipe exit)
1 1
one mark for each labelled diagram both diagrams sensible but no labels
max 1
1 1
3 (10)
2 (6)
2
2
(b)
newtons/10 is kg or equivalent
1
1
(c)
volume/level/reading of water then volume etc. water + rock 1
1
(d)
difference in the two readings
1
1
(e)
density = mass/volume
1
1 (6)
4 (a) (i)
1 1
2
(ii) high/low temperatures stated or high/low values quoted or temperature varying rapidly or small site/at point or remote place (from meter) or in control systems any 2 2
2
(b) (i)
put hot junction in beaker (of hot water) read temperature from galvo. in some way (calibration)
raises the water temperature
(ii) provides latent heat or boils/evaporates water
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
1 1
2 (6)
Page 2
5 (a) (i)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – November 2004
Syllabus 0625
any suitable random motion molecules hit walls
Paper 3
1 1
(ii) 1. rebound/bounce back or many hits per unit area or per unit time or collisions create force 1 2. (av) k.e./speed of molecules increases 1 more hits(/sec) or harder hits 1
5
p 1 v 1 = p 2 v 2 quoted or any recognisable substitution 2 x 105 x 0 . 3 5 = 5 x 1 0 5 x v volume = 0.14 (m3)
1 1 1
6 (a)
expect two internal reflections at sensible angles
1
3 (8) 1
(b)
angle of incidence at Y greater than critical angle total internal reflection occurs
1 1
2
frequency = velocity/wavelength or 1.9 x 108/3.2 x 10-7 = 5.9 x 1014Hz
1 1
(b)
(c) (i)
(ii) refractive index = 3/1.9 or 1.9/3 = 1.58 (no e.c.f.) I = V/R or 12/8 = 1.5 A
7 (a)
(b) (i)
10(Ω)
(ii) 2(Ω) power = VI or I2R or V2/R = 72W
(c)
1 1 1 1
1
2
1 1
2
1
(ii) 6(V)
1
8 (a) (b)
(c)
2
1
(d) (i) 12(V)
(resistance) less
1
(ii) (resistance) less
1
(e) (i)
4 (7)
diffraction
1
plane waves in front of gap
1
2
2 (10) 1
curved end effect shown, reasonable curves 1 wavelength constant throughout and approximately same as in Fig. 8.1 1 good quality i.e. end effect starts at correct points 1
4
particles/water oscillate/vibrate/move up and down at right angles to wave direction
2
1 1
(7) © University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 3
9
(a) (i)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – November 2004
Syllabus 0625
two coils on continuous core (not allow coils joined) primary coil to 240 V, secondary coil to 6 V iron core, primary/input and secondary/output labelled
(ii) any values with correct 40:1 ratio, accept here or on diagram (b)
(c)
10 (a) (i)
Paper 3
1 1 1 1
4
power in = power out or 240 x I = 12 current = 0.05 A
1 1
2
must be a changing magnetic field, only from a.c. so that induction can take place
1 1
2 (8)
switch, relay or amplifier
1
(ii) any one of the three versions below, each 2 marks
(b) (i)
1. vary base current transistor switches on for Vbe >0.6 V
1 1
2. small change in base current produces a large change in collector/emitter current
1 1
3. vary potential divider connected to transistor base transistor switches on for Vbe > 0.6 V
1 1
standard symbol with 2 inputs and an output labelled
1
(ii) one or both inputs 1, output 1 (accept on, high for 1) both inputs 0, output 0 (accept off, low for 0) 11 (a) (b) (i)
1 1
correct equation i.e. Ra gives Rn + alpha particle or He all numbers correct on Rn and He
1 1
radiation from surroundings/background radiation
1
(ii) 532 to 552 counts/min
1
(iii) 5/6 cm
1
(iv) beyond 5/6 cm no alpha, only background radiation
1
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
3
3 (6) 2
4 (6)
June 2005
IGCSE
MARK SCHEME MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/03 PHYSICS Extended
Page 1
1 (a)
(b) (c)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – JUNE 2005
Syllabus 0625
acceleration, speed increases acceleration getting less acc. zero/constant speed along RT or terminal velocity
B1 B1 B1
3
air resistance or friction (force) up (accept upthrust) weight/(force of) gravity down
B1 B1
2
air resistance (up) = weight (down) or two forces equal no (net) force, no acceleration
B1 B1
2
(d) (i)
distance = speed x time or 120 x 40 distance = 4800 m (ii) distance = average speed x time or 25 x 6 or area under graph distance = 150 m
2 (a)
Paper 3
time a number of swings (if number stated, >5) time divided by [2 x number of swings]
C1 A1 C1 A1
4 [11]
M1 A1
2
(b) (i) weight of gravity and tension (ii) force towards centre of circular motion or towards support point
B1 B1
2
(c)
p.e. = mgh or 0.2 x 10 x 0.05 = 0.1 J
C1 A1
in a straight line or (vector) has direction
B1
1
f = ma or f = 3.0 x 2.0 = 6(.0) N
C1 A1
2
P = F/a or P = 120/0.05 = 2400 N/m2 (or Pa)
C1 A1
start temp. and final temp. or change in temperature mass of iron time heater on
B1 B1 B1
3
P x t, VIt or in words = m x shc x cit or words
B1 B1
2
3 (a) (b) (c)
4 (a)
(b)
(c) (i) heat lost to surroundings/air (ii) add lagging/insulate
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
B1 B1
2 [6]
2 [5]
2 [7]
Page 2
5 (a)
(b) (i) (ii)
6 (a) (b)
(c) (d)
7 (a) (i) (ii) (b) (c) 8 (a)
(b)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – JUNE 2005
Syllabus 0625
Paper 3
air molecules hit particles or vice versa air molecules have speed/moment/energy hits uneven or from all directions hits (by small molecules) can move a large particle or moves particles small distances
B1 B1 B1
most energetic/fastest molecules need energy to overcome forces/break bonds/separate mols. so work must be done/energy used as work
B1 B1 B1
along normal or angle i = 0 so angle r = 0
B1
1
speed reduced, wavelength reduced, frequency unchanged any two correct scores one mark third correct scores second mark
B1 B1
2
reflected at 30o refracted at > 30o
B1 B1
2
sin 30o/sin r = 0.67 sin r = sin 30o/0.67 r = 48o
C1 C1 A1
x-rays or gamma rays infra red or radio
B1 B1
2
f = v/ λ or 3 x 108/ 1 x 10-12 = 3 x 1020 Hz
C1 A1
2
3 x 108 m/s
1
circuit which would work with supply and resistor voltmeter in parallel and ammeter in series with resistor variable resistor in series or means of changing p.d. across resistor
B1 B1 B1
3
read ammeter and voltmeter adjust rheostat/supply
B1 B1
2
I = V/R or V = IR or R = V/I or 0.5 = 6.0/3.0 + R R = 9(.0) Ω (ii) 60 C (iii) P = VI or = I2R or P = v2/R or (0.5 x 3.0) x 0.5 = 0.75 W
(c) (i)
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
B1
C1 A1 B1 C1 A1
4
3 [7]
3 [8]
1 [5]
5 [10]
Page 3
9
(a) (i) (ii)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – JUNE 2005
Syllabus 0625
Paper 3
to change a.c. to d.c. or rectify (a.c.) full sine wave at least 1.5 full waves half wave rectified at least two d.c. ‘bumps’
B1 B1 B1
correct symbol when input high or 1, output low or 0 or off when input low or 0 or off, output high or 1 or on
B1 B1 B1
8 (mins) for value, no working shown 8 (mins) for value with suitable working or indication on graph
B1 B1
source, aluminium and detector, recognisable shapes quality and all labels correct count background source and detector, no absorber, count taken source, absorber and detector, count taken
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
magnetic field and current at right angles causes force on wire which deflects it or field around wire (B1) interacts with the field of the magnet (B1)
B1 B1
2
normal to/between poles, either way however expressed out of paper
C1 A1
2
(c)
converts electrical energy to work/k.e./movement energy
B1
1
(d) (i)
split rings and brushes or equivalent (e.g. leaning wires)
B1
every half turn current passes from one ring to the other so current flows opposite way around coil or commutates
B1 B1
(b) (i) (ii)
10 (a) (b) (i) (ii)
11 (a)
(b)
(ii)
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
3
3 [6] 2 2 3 [7]
3 [8]
Page 1
1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – November 2005
(a) (b) (i) (iii)
(c) (i) (ii)
2
(a) (b) (c)
3
(a) (b) (c)
4
(a)
(b) (c) (i) (ii)
Syllabus
Paper
0625
3
force of gravity on a mass or mg mass/volume
B1 B1
hang object from spring balance, reading in N taken divide reading in N by 10 or g
B1 B1
volume of water in cylinder or fill overflow can to top add object find increase in volume or measure overflow volume {no credit for mass unless not scored in (i) and no credit for density = mass/ volume unless not scored in a) }
B1 B1
2N left
B1 B1
F = ma or 2 = 0.5 a a = 4.0 m/s2
C1 A1
upwards force = downwards force or no resultant force opposing moments equal or A.C.M. = C. M.
B1 B1
[2]
30 x spring balance reading = 40 x 6.0 or equivalent spring balance reading = 8.0 N
C1 A1
[2]
0.5 N downwards
B1 B1
P = hdg or 2 x 1000 x 10 = 20 000 N/m2 or Pa
C1 A1
[2]
p = f/a or 20 000 = 50/a a = 0.0025 m2
C1 A1
[2]
potential energy of the water converted to kinetic energy of water through outlet (and heat)
B1 B1
turn on heater and wait until water starts dripping in beaker empty beaker & replace, start watch stop watch & remove beaker at same time record time find and record mass of water in beaker
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
[M4]
60 x t = 120 x 340 t = 680 s
C1 A1
[2]
ice gains heat from surroundings/ice falls through funnel
B1
lag or fit lid to funnel/place gauze in funnel bottom
B1
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
[2]
[4]
[4] Total [10]
[2] Total [6]
[2] Total[6]
[2] Total [8]
Page 2
5
Mark Scheme IGCSE – November 2005
(a) (i)
Paper
0625
3
random
B1
hit and rebound
B1
(b) (i)
increase or further apart
B1
(ii)
increase or move faster
B1
random, fast in gas to vibration in solid
B1
long way apart in gas to very close or touching
B1
[2] Total [6]
(a)
Sound reflects off wall
B1
[1]
(b)
400 Hz
B1
[1]
(c)
λ = v/f or = 330/400
C1 A1
[2]
(ii)
(c) (i) (ii) 6
Syllabus
= 0.83 m
7
(d)
vibration/oscillation along line of/direction of wave
B1
(a) (i)
two approximately correct reflections evidence of projecting back to image or use of equal distance from the mirror, object and image
B1
virtual any one of upright, same size, same distance from mirror
B1 B1
ray 1 correct ray 2 correct image correctly located
B1 B1 B1
eye symbol to right of lens
B1
(ii)
[2]
[2]
[1] Total [5]
B1
[4] (b) (i)
(ii)
[4] Total [8] 8
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
force is produced on any charge placed in the field
B1 B1
at least 3 parallel, straight lines plate to plate, ignore end effect at least one correct arrow, none wrong
B1 B1
[2]
q = It or 0.06 = I x 30 I = 0.002 A or 2 mA
C1 A1
[2]
E = Vit = 1500 x 0.008 x 10 = 120 J
C1 C1 A1
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
[2]
[3] Total [9]
Page 3
9
Mark Scheme IGCSE – November 2005
(a)
3 B1 B1
[2]
low, OFF or 0 need both correct
B1
[1]
need 4 boxes correct for 2 marks, -1 for e.e.o.e.
B2
no change
B1
a.c. input causes constantly changing current through coil magnetic field formed in or around coil constantly changing magnetic field
B1 B1 B1
(ii)
(changing) magnetic field transferred to secondary coil
B1
(iii)
(changing) magnetic field cuts secondary coil induces e.m.f.
B1 B1
[3]
(b)
more turns on secondary (than on primary)
B1
[1]
(c)
no transfer of magnetic field from primary to secondary
B1
[1]
(d)
Vp.Ip = Vs. Is or 100 x 0.4 = 200 x Is Is = 0.2 A
C1 A1
β -source and detector suitably arranged deflecting plates suitably arranged additional detail e.g. slit or collimator, vacuum chamber, circuit connected to deflecting plates
B1 B1
at least 3 readings at right angles beyond & perp. to the plates one near +ve, one near –ve and one in centre
M1
(c)
highest reading near +ve plate
B1
[1]
(d)
electrons negatively charged, attracted to +ve
B1
[1] Total [7]
(ii) (c) (i) (ii)
11
Paper
0625
correct symbol correct labels
(b) (i)
10
Syllabus
(a) (i)
(a)
(b)
low, OFF or 0
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
B1
[3] Total [6]
[M2]
[2] Total [9]
[3] [2]
A1
Page 2
1
(a)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2006
Syllabus 0625
point 8,12 identified straight line joining 0,0 and 8,12 straight line joining 8,12 and 20,12
B1 B1 B1
3
(b) acceleration = change in v/change in t or 12/8 etc = 1.5 m/s2
C1 A1
2
(c)
C1 A1
2
C1 A1
2
distance = =
area under graph between t = 20 and t = 25 24 m to 28 m
(d) F = ma or 4000 x 1.2 = 4800 N (e)
2
3
more passengers got on (so mass increased) driver pressed accelerator less (so force decreased) more traffic or going uphill
any two lines
B2
2 [11]
any closed triangle or parallelogram forces in correct directions relative to each other correct resultant indicated resultant 7.7 N to 8.1 N scale stated resultant vertically upwards
C1 C1 C1 A1 B1 B1
(a)
C1 A1
2
A1 A1
2
work = force x distance = force of gravity/weight x (vertical) distance/height
(b) (i)
work = (100 x 8) = 800 J
(ii)
power = (800/5) = 160 W
(iii) increases the k.e. of the water (ignore heat/sound) 4
Paper 03
4 2 [6]
B1
1 [5]
B2
2
(b) energy/work to separate molecules (against) forces of attraction between water molecules (to break bonds C1) The k.e./speed of the molecules does not increase
B1 B1
2
B1
1
(c)
C1 C1 A1
3
(a)
on surface/throughout; no bubbles/bubbles; all temps./b.p.; s.v.p. < at. pressure; svp = at. pressure
any two
Wt = mL or 120 x 1 = 0.05 x L L = 120/0.05 L = 2400 J/g
[8]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2006
Page 3
5
(a)
(ii)
6
(a)
Syllabus 0625
increase surface area of tank blow air over surface/put in windy place
(b) (i)
(c)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2006
B1
capillary tube thinner/finer or liquid with higher expansivity or bigger bulb
B1
2
2
p1v1 = p2v2 or 1 x 105 x 150 = p2 x50 p2 = 3 x 105 (Pa)
C1 A1
red ray refracted away from normal violet ray refracted more than red ray in prism violet ray further refracted from red ray to screen
B1 B1 B1
3
M1 C1 A1
3
2 [6]
(i)
3 x 108 m/s
A1
(ii)
same as (i)
A1
2 [8]
B1
1
(b) a correct C marked a correct R marked
B1 B1
2
(c)
M1 A1
2
(c)
8
B1 B1
capillary tube longer or liquid with lower expansivity
(b) 1.52 = sin 40o/sin r sin r = sin 40o/ 1.52 ( = 0.423) r = 25o
7
Paper 03
(a)
Longitudinal or pressure waves
oscillation/vibration/backwards and forwards along PY (consider pressure waves as alternative)
(d) wavelength = 340/200 PX(= λ /2) = 0.85 m
C1 A1
(a)
C1 A1
I = W/V or 9/6 I = 1.5 A
(b) (i)
8 ohm
A1
(ii)
6V
A1
(i)
brightness decreases/dimmer
B1
(ii)
resistance of circuit greater current through lamp falls
B1 B1
(d) (i)
4 ohm
A1
(ii)
4 ohm
A1
(c)
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2006
2 [7] 2
2
3
2 [9]
Page 4
9
(a)
Paper 03
B1 B1 B1
must be constantly changing magnetic field
B1
magnetic field of primary passes through core to secondary magnetic field of secondary cuts coil, induces output
B1 B1
(i)
18 W
A1
(ii)
540 J
A1
(ii)
10 (a)
Syllabus 0625
primary and secondary coils on iron core labelled 240 V a.c. to primary, 12 V a.c. to secondary turns ratio shown or stated 20:1, stepdown
(b) (i)
(c)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2006
bring rod close but not touching plate touch metal plate with earth lead remove lead and then rod
(b) (i) (ii)
M1 M1 A1
Q = 20 (mA) x 15 (s) = 0.30 C
C1 A1
V = 20 (ma) x 10 (kΩ) = 200 V
C1 A1
11 line1 into paper positive or +2 line 2 out of paper or opposite of line 1 negative or -1 line 3 no deflection no charge
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2006
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
3
3
2 [8]
3
M3 [6]
6 [6]
Page 2
1
(a)
(b)
Mark Scheme IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006
Syllabus 0625
= v/g or 32/10 = 3.2 s
Paper 03
(i)
t
C1 A1
(ii)
straight line starting at zero, inclined line joining 0,0 and 3.2, 32, accept c.f. from time (i)
C1 A1
(iii)
2.4 kg
A1
(i)
take volume of water before use (totally) immerse stone and take new volume (Not clearly measured before and after C1)
B1 B1
(ii)
hang rock from balance and take reading
B1
(iii)
density = mass/volume
B1
(iv)
need to tie "sinker" or cork or press cork down need volume with sinker then volume with sinker and cork or just completely submerge cork
B1 B1
[5]
[6]
[Total: 11] 2
(a)
limit of proportionality (allow elastic limit)
B1
[1]
(b)
force is proportional to extension or in terms of doubling
B1
[1]
(c)
(up to Q extension proportional to force applied) Q to R extension/unit force more however expressed
B1
[1]
k = force/extension or 8/2 or other correct ratio = 4.0 N/mm
C1 A1
[2]
(d)
[Total: 5] 3
(a) (b)
(c)
p.e. lost = mgh or 1 x 10 x 7 = 70 J
C1 A1
[2]
70 = 0.5 x m x v2 or ecf v2 = 140 or 2 x p.e. v = 12 m/s
C1 C1 A1
[3]
some p.e. changed to heat/sound/either one/work done against air resistance air/resistance acts against the motion
B1
[1]
[Total: 6] 4
(a)
(i)
1 is 20°C 2 is 15 ± 1°C, need both correct for a mark
A1
more heat lost at higher temperature
B1
[2]
heat in = 60 x 210 or Wt or 12 600 (J) heat in water = m x s x ∆θ or 75 x s x 40 s = 12600/75 x 40 = 4.2 J/g °C
C1 C1 C1 A1
[4]
outline correct, two wires with clear junction and a meter/datalogger/computer labels, hot and cold junctions or clear, two different metals
M1 A1
[2]
(ii) (b)
(c)
[Total: 8] © UCLES 2006
Page 3 5
(a)
Mark Scheme IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006
Syllabus 0625
Paper 03
(i)
conduction
B1
(ii)
particles/atoms/ions vibrate or electrons move and carry energy pass on energy from one particle to the next
B1 B1 [3]
(b)
four surfaces facing one heat source suitable detector e.g. thermometer behind surface-read all 4 precaution e.g. equal distance/time (Can not score last two marks if experiment is totally wrong)
B1 B1 B1 [3] [Total: 6]
6
(a)
completed path
B1
[1]
(b)
any two correct, -1 each incorrect virtual, inverted, same size as object
B2
[2]
(c)
angle of incidence zero/at right angles/along normal
B1
[1]
(d)
1.5 = Va/Vg = 3x 108/Vg Vg = 2 x 108 m/s
C1 A1
[2]
angle of incidence = 45°, so angle of reflection = 45°, so ray turns through 90° OR angle i> angle c so totally internally reflects
B1 B1
[2]
(e)
[Total: 8] 7
(a)
(b)
(c)
straight not circular or WTTE waves not same wavelength/same distance apart waves should extend into shadow area (more) any 2
B2
[2]
diagram showing large flat piece with circular edges (ignore any wavelength changes) but straight part must be (very) nearly equal to slit width
M1 A1
[2]
speed = 1.2 x 8 = 9.6 cm/s
C1 A1
[2]
[Total: 6] 8
(a)
switch in correct position
B1
(b)
(i)
rheostat/variable resistance symbol drawn
B1
(ii)
dot and R in line to 12 W lamp
B1
[2]
[2]
(c)
Question deleted
(d)
R = V/I or 12/.3 = 4Ω
C1 A1
(i)
parallel circuit/all lamps connected separately across the 12V
B1
(ii)
4A
A1
(e)
[1]
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2006
Page 4
9
(a)
(i)
(c)
Syllabus 0625
Paper 03
connections one to each plate top one to +ve , bottom one to -ve (New PSU drawn C1)
M1 A1
[2]
electrons negatively charged one plate positively charged, one negatively charged electrons attracted to +/repelled by –
B1 B1 B1
[3]
(i)
time base applied to X plates stated or described
B1
(ii)
a.c. or varying voltage applied to Y plates
B1
[2]
B1
[1]
(ii)
(b)
Mark Scheme IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006
2 full waves, (equal about centre line)
[Total: 8] 10
(a)
A – resistor
(b) (c)
B – LDR
C – transistor
D – lamp
(–1 each incorrect)
B2
[2]
C
B1
[1]
resistance of LDR low in light, high in dark increase of resistance/potential in circuit cause transistor to conduct (Vbe > 0.6 V) switches lamp on
B1 B1 B1
[3]
[Total: 6] 11
(a)
(b)
(i)
atoms interact with by particle/photon not radiation electron(s) removed to form ions
B1 B1
(ii)
much greater mass or size/slower speed/more ion pairs/cm/larger charge
B1
(i)
any 2 correct
B2
(ii)
e.g. foil thickness described/outline diagram foil too thick less reading/notes on diagram to show method other examples will occur, must have two clear points: e.g. 1. gamma rays aimed at cancer (not just radiation) focused on tumour e.g. 2. fission of heavy nucleus (accept named nuclide) leads to more fissions/chain reaction
B1 B1
[3]
[4] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2006
Page 3
1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2007
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) straight arrow towards centre, by eye (ii) force larger (b) (i) straight arrow along tangent at P clockwise, by eye (ii) friction between tyres and track provide centripetal force friction too small (to provide required force) (c) (i) constant speed/velocity OR uniform motion OR no acceln. NOT constant motion (ii) (3 × 25)/2 + (7 × 25) OR area under graph
Paper 03 B1
[1]
B1
[1]
B1
[1]
B1 B1
[2]
B1
[1]
C1
212.5 cm any no s.f. ğ 2
A1
(iii) 25/3 or increase in speed/time
C1
8.33 cm/s any no s.f. ğ 2 OR 8⅓ cm/s accept cm/s2
A1
[2]
[2]
[Total: 10] 2
(a)
moment of W down/anticlockwise, moment of steam opposite
C1
when moment of steam > moment of W, steam escapes OR when clockwise moment > anticlockwise moment, steam escapes
A1
(b) (i) 12 = 0.2 F
[2]
C1
F = 60 N c.a.o. allow 60–61 for ans if working for 60 N shown (ii) (P =) F/A or 60/0.0003 e.c.f. 2 × 105 Pa or 200 000 Pa e.c.f. (accept N/m2) OR 20 N/cm2
A1
[2]
C1 A1
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
Page 4
3
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2007
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) work done = force x dist or 600 x 3 or 60 x 3 or fd or mgh work = 1800 J c.a.o. accept j or Nm for unit (ii) power = work/time or 1800/12 e.c.f.
(b)
Paper 03 C1 A1
[2]
C1
power = 150 W e.c.f. accept J/s or NM/s for unit
A1
P.E. decreases/transformed (ignore mention of KE)
C1
all the decrease becomes heat (ignore mention of sound)
A1
[2]
[2]
[Total: 6] 4
(a)
total mass before ice added
B1
total mass after all ice melted
B1
[2]
B1
[1]
B1
[1]
(b) (i) mass × sp ht cap × change in temp or 20 OR mcθ (ii) mass (of melted ice) × sp latent ht OR ml OR (heat gained by ice) = heat lost by water (c)
(d)
heat/mass or 12 800/30
C1
427 J/g OR 426667 J/kg any no s.f. ğ 2
A1
[2]
heat gained from surroundings OR no lagging heat needed to cool beaker/stirrer and thermometer ) any 2 too much ice added or similar point ) allow stirring gives energy, allow evaporation/condensation (ignore “mistakes when taking readings” or similar)
B1 + B1
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
Page 5
5
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2007
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) heat for the same time
Paper 03 B1
take temps on both thermometers
B1
[2]
B1
[1]
B1
[1]
(ii) temperature rise small and/or small difference between them
B1
[1]
(iii) distance between each degree on scale is the same
B1
[1]
(ii) dull black box temp > white box temp OR black is hotter etc. (b) (i) large expansion/change in reading for small change in temp NOT detect/respond to small temp changes
[Total: 6] 6
(a) (i) refracted ray, angle < i, emergent ray approx parallel to incident (ii) reflected ray at equal angle to incident, by eye
B1
[2]
B1
[1]
(ii) 43° c.a.o.
B1
[1]
(iii) n = sin (his90°)/sin (his43°)
C1
(b) (i) 88–90°
(c)
B1
1.466 or 1.47 or 1.5 c.a.o. any no s.f. ğ 2
A1
n or his 1.5 = speed in air/speed in glass e.c.f.
C1
speed in glass = 2(.0) × 108 m/s e.c.f. any no s.f. ğ 2
A1
[2]
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
Page 6
7
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2007
Syllabus 0625
Paper 03
(a)
source of sound (e.g. gun/hooter), tape (100 m), stopwatch NOT clock, metre rule (unless lab method)
B1
[1]
(b)
distance and time between “flash and bang” (must be clear)
B1
[1]
(c)
distance/time OR d/t OR 2d/t
B1
[1]
(d)
further apart/more accurate timer/repeat/any other
B1
[1]
(e)
speed of sound in air, tick 100
B1
speed of sound in water, tick 1000
B1
[2]
[Total: 6] 8
(a)
connections such that all lamps will light
B1
ammeter in correct position
B1
variable resistor in correct position (condone poor symbol)
B1
switch in appropriate position (could be 2 switches)
B1
[4]
B1
[1]
(ii) 4Ω OR 12/his(i) correctly evaluated
B1
[1]
(iii) 2Ω OR ½ × his(ii) correctly evaluated
B1
[1]
(iv) 1080 J e.c.f. from (i) & (ii) if working shown
B1
[1]
(b) (i) 3 A
(c)
lamps in series
M1
less current/less p.d. (across 1 lamp)/voltage shared/higher resistance NOT current shared
A1
[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2007
Page 7
9
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2007
Syllabus 0625
Paper 03
current in spoke in magnetic field
B1
causes force on spoke/wheel
B1
[2]
(b)
arrow to indicate anticlockwise motion
B1
[1]
(c)
outline of coil, pole pieces
B1
d.c. supply connected to brushes
B1
split rings connected to coil
B1
brushes connect to other split ring every half turn/coil vertical
B1
reverses direction of current every half turn/coil vertical
B1
(a)
(d)
[3]
[2]
[Total: 8] 10 (a)
(b)
(c)
when temperature rises resistance falls
(or v.v.)
M1
p.d. across it falls or equivalent
(or v.v.)
A1
idea of causes transistor to switch on lamp (or lamp off)
A1
[3]
change value of R1/use variable res/swap R1 with something
B1
brief explanation in terms of potential divider
B1
[2]
fire alarm/refrigerator fail light/other automatic lighting system
B1
[1]
[Total: 6] 11 (a)
(b)
A doubles back, either side
B1
B carries on, slightly deflected
B1
C carries straight on
B1
only (very) few scattered through large angles
B1
most pass undeviated so most of atom space
B1
scattering/deflection/repulsion due to concentrated mass/charge/charge/nucleus
B1
[3]
[3]
[Total: 6] © UCLES 2007
Page 3 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2007
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) 1.6s to 1.8s ALLOW 4.2 – 6s ALLOW 4.4 – 6s NOT 2s NOT 4.0 – 6s
Paper 03 B1
(ii) 6 – his (i), evaluated ALLOW 0 – 4.2s ALLOW 0 – 4.4s NOT 0 – 4s e.c.f.
B1
(iii) his (i) × 20 32 – 36m or his (i) × 20 evaluated allow B1 only for 40m with no working
C1
(iv) area under whole graph or ½vt + his(iii) 70 – 95m
C1 A1
(b) (i) weight of ball down and (air) resistance up OR friction opposes weight upward/resistance/friction force increases with time/distance/speed/as ball falls net force reduces less force, so less acceleration
A1
) ) any 3 ) )
(ii) up force = down force OR no resultant force OR air res. = weight no net force, no acceleration/constant speed
B1×3
B1 B1 [Total: 11]
2
(a) (i) down to R and up towards Q/S, then reverse OR equivalent OR back towards Q, then reverse continues backward and forward until stops (at R)
B1 B1
(ii) idea of energy loss OR because of friction NOT PE/KE
B1
(b) (PE lost =) 1.2 × 0.5 OR 0.6 (J) OR 0.12 × 10 × 0.5 OR mgh OR wt × dist i.e. evidence of mgh
C1
0.5 × 0.12 × v2 = mgh OR 0.6 etc. e.c.f. i.e. evidence of ½mv2
C1
3.16 OR 3.2 m/s c.a.o.
A1 [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
Page 4 3
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2007
Syllabus 0625
Paper 03
(a) any logical method e.g. extension is 2 cm for 8 N or 1 cm for 4 N final extension is 3 cm need 12 N to extend to 6 cm
C1 C1 A1
(b) (i) shown on diagram: distance from pivot to F OR value of weights OR dist from weights to pivot
B1
(ii) force/weight of load × distance from pivot to force (accept symbols if clear)
B1 [Total: 5]
4
(a) (i) random high speed (between collisions) (ii) hit walls many hits/unit area OR hit hard OR large force OR high energy OR many hits/s OR hit very often
B1 B1 B1 B1
(b) particles vibrate (more) OR electrons gain energy particle to particle transfer OR flow of free electrons
B1 B1
(c) 75 × 3200 OR ml 240 000 J OR 240 kJ OR 2.4 × 105J
C1 A1 [Total: 8]
5
(a) take readings of the detectors fill box with water take readings (again)
B1 B1 B1
(b) dull black best AND shiny white worst
B1
(c) two different metals two junctions (could be at meter) hot and cold need not be indicated any cell, max B1,B0
B1 B1 [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
Page 5 6
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2007
Syllabus 0625
Paper 03
(a) mirror: 2 reflected rays approx correct projected back to approx correct labelled image note: images may be dots or lines lens: ray through F, correct by eye ray through centre OR ray through other F, correct by eye projected back to approx correct (labelled) image
M1 A1 M1 M1 A1
(b) (i) not produced by real rays crossing OR cannot be caught on a screen OR rays appear to come from image
B1
(ii) upright/right way up/erect c.a.o.
B1
(iii) lens image enlarged AND mirror image same size c.a.o. OR (different) size OR (different) distance OR different side
B1 [Total: 8]
7
(a) (i) diagram showing compressions and rarefactions (could be either spaced vertical lines or dots, or coil or sine wave) 2C’s and 2R’s in approx correct place (ii) wavelength correctly marked, by eye (b) (i) all 3 in correct positions
B1 B1 B1 B1
(ii) radio (waves)
B1
(iii) 3 × 108 m/s
B1 [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
Page 6 8
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2007
Syllabus 0625
(a) circuit 1 series AND circuit 2 parallel (b) switch off each one separately one fails, other works both get full current/voltage/same voltage other good point e.g. more heat in parallel lower resistance
Paper 03 B1
) ) ) any 2 ) )
B1+B1
(c) (total R =) 10 (Ω) (V =) 12V
C1 A1
(d) 1/R = 1/4 + 1/6 (= 5/12) OR 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 2.4 (Ω)
C1 A1
(e) (i) 3(A)
B1
(ii) 24W
B1
(iii) 7200J e.c.f. (ii)
B1 [Total: 10]
9
(a) when magnetic field cuts/cut by conductor/wire/coil/solenoid OR change in magnetic field linked with coil etc. current/e.m.f caused
B1 B1
(b) solenoid ends connected to meter/lamp note: any sign of a cell gets B0 magnet indicated in suitable position on axis of solenoid
B1 B1
(c) insert/withdraw/move magnet into/out of solenoid meter gives reading (as magnet moves) OR watch the meter OR lamp glows
B1 B1
(d) move magnet faster increase strength of magnet more turns on solenoid closer to solenoid
) ) any 2 ) )
B1+B1 [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
Page 7
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2007
Syllabus 0625
Paper 03
10 (a) (i) low/0/off/no output
B1
(ii) low/0/off/no output
B1
(b) (i) temp sensor to NOT gate input, correct symbol output of NOT gate (condone incorrect symbol) and humidity sensor to AND inputs (condone labelled box for AND gate) (ii) NOT low in, high out AND both inputs high, high output Note: B0, B0 for states on wrong diagram.
B1 B1 B1 B1 [Total: 6]
11 (a) detector, no source, no aluminium, take count OR take background no aluminium, take count aluminium, take count subtract background/reading 1 from results (b) count decreases as thickness of aluminium increases 6-10 sheets/several sheets/few mm, count reduced to background count/β-particles stopped
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
First variant Mark Scheme Page 3 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2008
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) v/t or (v-u)/t or 28.5/3 or his correct ratio 9.3 to 9.5 m/s2
Paper 31 C1 A1
(ii) area under graph or 0.5 × 3 × 28.5 or ½b×h 42 to 44 m (allow reasonable e.c.f.)
C1 A1
(iii) 15 m/s
B1
(b) (plastic ball larger so) upward force/air resistance/drag more (or vice versa for rubber ball) IGNORE wind resistance B1 rubber ball, this force not big enough to balance weight/gravity (force) B1 plastic ball, upward force/air resistance big enough to balance/equal weight/gravity (force) B1
2
(c) mg or 0.05 × 10 or 50 x 10 accept 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10 0.5 N or 0.49N or 0.4905N nothing else
C1 A1
(a) fusion (of nuclei) CARE: NOT fission or fision condone radiation as an extra
B1
ACCEPT fussion
(b) radiant/heat energy from Sun or radiation from Sun energy from Sun raises temperature of water/heats water/melts ice energy from Sun evaporates water PE in cloud rain stored water has PE (c) (i) 25/100 for gas-fired or 30/90 for hydroelectric or energy out/energy in or power out/power in
) ) ) any 3 ) ) )
B1 × 3
B1
(ii) 30/90 or 1/3 or 33% is more than 25/100 or ¼ or 25% OR lower input into hydroelectric station, but more output than gas-fired station B1 IGNORE hydroelectric losses less than gas-fired losses
© UCLES 2008
[10]
[6]
First variant Mark Scheme Page 4 3
4
5
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2008
Syllabus 0625
Paper 31
(a) mgh or 90 × 10 × 14 accept 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10 12 600 J or 12348 J or 12360.6 J nothing else
C1 A1
(b) PE lost = KE gained or mgh = ½mv2 (v2 =) 280 e.c.f. or 274.4 or 274.68 16.7 m/s e.c.f. or 16.565 m/s or 16.573 m/s NOTE: 16.8 m/s gets A0
C1 C1 A1
(c) energy lost or friction/air resistance/drag/wind resistance
B1
(a) (pushing rubber cover) volume reduced (when volume reduce), pressure goes up
M1 A1
(b) 1 × (105 ) × 60 = 1.5 × (105 ) × V 40 (cm3) reduction in volume = 20 cm3 or 1/3
C1 C1 A1
(c) (ave) speed of mols/particles/atoms greater at high temp NOT energy/KE stronger/more collisions with walls OR greater pressure
B1 B1
(a) SOLID higher temperature means higher energy/greater speed of mols/particles/atoms NOT more vibration NOT vibrate more
B1
GAS
vibrations get bigger or movement greater/take up more space or separation larger (ave) speed/energy of mols/particles/atoms greater (ave) separation of mols/particles/atoms greater or mols/particles/atoms take up more space or increased pressure causes container to get bigger
(b) liquids: slightly more gases: much more
[6]
[7]
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
(c) regular/uniform expansion or appropriate range (be generous if numbers quoted) or expands a lot/large expansivity or (relatively) non-toxic or low freezing point/melting point or measures low temperatures any 1 IGNORE reacts to small temp change IGNORE high boiling point
© UCLES 2008
B1
[7]
First variant Mark Scheme Page 5 6
Syllabus 0625
(a) (for all rays, ignore any arrows, -1 for each incorrect extra ray) ) correct ray through F1 ± 1mm on axis ) ) any 2 correct ray through F2 ± 1mm on axis ) ray through lens centre ± 1mm on axis ) image drawn between his intersection and axis (b) virtual
7
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2008
upright/erect
magnified/enlarged
further (from lens) any 3
B1, B1 B1 B1 × 3 [6]
(a) (condone discontinuities at boundaries) mirror: equally spaced reflected waves, approx. same spacing as incident (by eye) IGNORE reflected waves to left of arrowhead correct angle to surface, by eye block: reduced wavelength in block ACCEPT refracted waves to left of arrowhead at sensible angle of refraction CONDONE reflected waves shown as well as refracted (b) (i) 3 × 108/speed in glass = 1.5 2 × 108 m/s
B1 B1 B1 B1
C1 A1
(ii) sin70°/sinr = 1.5 38.7895° to 2 or more sig figs
8
Paper 31
C1 A1
(a) all 4 lights in parallel with supply and none in series master switch in a place where it will work (cannot score if no supply or if short circuit) one switch for 2 lights in living room AND one for bathroom AND one for bedroom (b) (i) W = V × I or 100 = 200 × I in any form 0.5 A or 0.5 a (ii) I × t or 0.5 × 60 e.c.f. 30 C or 30 c e.c.f.
B1 B1 B1 C1 A1 C1 A1
© UCLES 2008
[8]
First variant Mark Scheme Page 6
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2008
Syllabus 0625
(c) (i) 135 W
B1
(ii) any power × any time (words or symbols or numbers) NOTE: 280 (W) is the total power of lamps in house, so counts as “power” 486 000 J or 486 kJ or 0.135 kWh accept lower case units NOTE: 45 × 3600 = 162000 J gets e.c.f. from (i)
9
Paper 31
C1 A1 [10]
(a) 3 complete circles about thick wire, roughly concentric on wire clockwise or anticlockwise arrows on any 2 correct circles, and no contradictions
B1 B1
(b) (i) reduced
B1
(ii) same OR none
B1
(c) (i) thin wire is a current-carrying conductor in a magnetic field field produced by current in thick wire OR alternative approach: ( both wires produce a magnetic field ( fields interact
B1 B1 B1 ) B1 )
(ii) inwards/towards thick wire/to right/towards T1T2
B1
(iii) smaller force
B1
[8]
10 (a) correct symbol, must show 3 connections, condone rounded “nose”, ignore width of the shape, allow OR gate followed by NOT gate, correctly drawn B1 (b) if truth table is shown, mark the truth table and ignore the rest either input 1, output 0 AND both inputs 1, output 0 both inputs 0, output 1 accept high/low, on/off for both (c) (i) one input is high/1 AND output is low/0 IGNORE any reference to 2nd input (ii) 1. on 2. off
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
© UCLES 2008
[6]
First variant Mark Scheme Page 7
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2008
Syllabus 0625
11 (a) number of protons 17 and 17 number of neutrons 18 and 20 number of electrons 17 and 17 (b) alpha, beta, gamma
Paper 31 B1 B1 B1
words or symbols, any order NOT gamma particles
B1
(c) (mark (i) and (ii) together) (i) any correct use
M1
(ii) simple correct explanation
A1
© UCLES 2008
[6]
First variant Mark Scheme Page 3 1
(a)
(i)
(ii)
Paper 31 C1
) ) any 1 ) )
to overcome/compensate for friction/resistance
A1
B1
2/2.5 or 4/5 etc. or F/a or F = ma 0.8 kg
C1 A1
(c)
0.7/0.8 e.c.f. from (b) 0.875 (m/s2) e.c.f. from (b)
B1 B1
(ii)
could be scored on table (no unit needed)
v = at or 0.5 × 1.2 0.6 m/s
C1 A1
any velocity × time or speed × time (note: 0.72 m gets C1, A0) 0.36 m c.a.o.
C1 A1
(a)
two masses chosen with ratio 2:1 or 3:1 or 3:2 chosen masses in correct holes to balance
M1 A1
(b)
disc does not rotate/is balanced/in equilibrium/no movement NOT spin the disc NOT anything to do with calculating moments NOT when disturbed, returns to original position
B1
(c)
moment of one mass correct (ignore units) accept mass × distance calculated equal answers
B1 B1
correct addition of masses/weights, including 200g any mass correctly converted to N
B1 B1
(d)
3
any mention of force or weight ignore mass Force to left > force to right OR resultant force OR unbalanced force OR weight > friction
Syllabus 0625
(b)
(d) (i)
2
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2008
(a) (i)
(ii)
hdg or 70 × 1050 × 10 735 000 Pa or 7.35 × 105 Pa
2
accept N/m for Pa
8.35 × 105 Pa OR his (a)(i) + 1.0 × 105
accept N/m2 for Pa
[7]
C1 A1 B1
(b)
pressure × area or P = F/A or 6.5 × 105 × 2.5 1.625 × 106 N
C1 A1
(c)
because density is less accept new calculation of pressure OR because salt water is denser
B1
© UCLES 2008
[11]
[6]
First variant Mark Scheme Page 4 4
5
Syllabus 0625
Paper 31
(a)
typical random path drawn, at least 3 abrupt changes of direction
B1
(b)
air molecules hit dust particles in all directions/move it in all directions just as likely to be up as down (allow marks scored on diagram)
B1 B1
(c)
random movements smaller OR slower movement OR less energy OR movement decreases
(a) (i) (ii)
6
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2008
B1
funnel no longer giving heat to ice OR ice at M.P./constant temp OR heater reached max temp inside of large pieces could be well below freezing point OR smaller air gaps if pieces smaller OR better contact between heater and ice OR to ensure heat from heater only goes to the ice OR larger surface area Ignore ice melts faster
) ) any 1 ) ) )
B1 B1
(b)
mass of beaker NOT mass of ice NOT mass of water mass of beaker + water (apply + = 0 for extras other than power & time)
B1 B1
(c)
(mass of ice melted by heater = 16.3 – 2.1) = 14.2 g ml in any form, words, symbols or numbers Wt or Pt in any form, words, symbols or numbers accept VIt 338 J/g OR 338 000 J/kg c.a.o
C1 C1 C1 A1
(a)
light of one colour/frequency/wavelength
B1
(b)
n = sinr/sini OR n = sini/sinr in any form sinr/sin30 = 1.49 OR sinr = 1.49 × sin30 48.0° – 48.2°
C1 C1 A1
(c)
ray at angle >30° and critical angle
B1 B1
(ii) initial reflection + 0 or 1 further reflection only, not at lower surface must be straight and reach within 1cm of end
B1
(b) (i) bends easily/less likely to break (ignore stronger) OR smaller pixels/ more detail/greater resolution/see smaller objects/wider field of view
9
Paper 31
B1
(ii) light travels down/along/through fibres
B1
(iii) light/image returns up/along/through fibres ignore cameras
B1
(a) (i) down down OR anti-clockwise
both
(ii) BC is parallel to the field/doesn’t cut field or vice-versa/not at angle to field ignore BC not perpendicular to field (b) continues moving/turning NOT reverse/other direction idea of moving things continue moving OR reference to Newton’s Laws OR reference to momentum/KE/inertia NOT reference to force still acting
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
B1 B1 M1 A1
[6]
Page 7
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2011
(c) more turns/several coils iron core increase current/voltage stronger magnet smaller air gap curved poles more efficient brushes poles closer use split-ring commutator
Syllabus 0625
Paper 31
any 1
B1
[5]
10 (a) release of electrons due to heating/high temperature/heater
B1
(b) X- and Y-plates labelled anodes either order, labelled, either plates/cylinders with holes closed tube of sensible shape AND cathode AND anode(s) AND X- & Y- plates, all three features in correct order labels not needed for last mark but if given must be correct
B1 B1
B1
(c) change current in filament/cathode/heater IGNORE limit OR change temperature/heat/power/energy of filament/cathode/heater OR change cathode-anode p.d./voltage OR change charge/voltage of grid
B1
(d) (i) (I=)Q/t in any form 0.0019 A OR 1.9 × 10-3 A OR 1.9 mA
C1 A1
(ii) (E=) VIt OR VQ in any form, words, symbols, numbers (accept t=5s) 190 J OR candidate’s I × 100 000 correctly evaluated
C1 A1
11 (a) Pt OR 1.2 × 104 × 9 OR 1.2 × 104 × (11 – 2) (l=) E/m OR E/0.36 OR Pt/m OR Pt/0.36 3 × 105 J/kg
C1 C1 A1
(b) (i) liquid ignore vapour/gas/water (ii) move around more rapidly / faster / more KE ignore start to vibrate etc but accept starts to vibrate faster move further apart / spreads out (NOT molecules expand) break free / evaporate / overcome bonds / overcome forces of attraction /escape / change state (accept boils) convection (current)
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
[9]
A1
any 2
B1 [6]
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 (Extended Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2011 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
om .c
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2011 question paper
s er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
Page 2
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
Paper 31
NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME SYMBOLS & OTHER MATTERS M marks
are method marks upon which further marks depend. For an M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent marks can be scored.
B marks:
are independent marks, which do not depend on other marks. For a B mark to scored, the point to which it refers must be seen specifically in the candidate’s answers.
A marks
In general A marks are awarded for final answers to numerical questions. If a final numerical answer, eligible for A marks, is correct, with the correct unit and an acceptable number of significant figures, all the marks for that question are normally awarded. It is very occasionally possible to arrive at a correct answer by an entirely wrong approach. In these rare circumstances, do not award the A marks, but award C marks on their merits.
C marks
are compensatory marks in general applicable to numerical questions. These can be scored even if the point to which they refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. For example, if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct substitution or working which shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored. A C mark is not awarded if a candidate makes two points which contradict each other. Points which are wrong but irrelevant are ignored.
brackets ( )
around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in brackets. e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining
indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR / or
indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
e.e.o.o.
means "each error or omission".
o.w.t.t.e.
means “or words to that effect”.
Spelling
Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean what we want, give credit.
Not/NOT
Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty applies.
Ignore
Indicates that something which is not correct or irrelevant is to be disregarded and does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Page 3
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
Paper 31
ecf
meaning "error carried forward" is mainly applicable to numerical questions, but may in particular circumstances be applied in non-numerical questions. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried an incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, marks indicated by ecf may be awarded, provided the subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind the earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated ecf.
Sig. figs.
Answers are normally acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2. Any exceptions to this general rule will be specified in the mark scheme. In general, accept numerical answers, which, if reduced to two significant figures, would be right.
Units
Deduct one mark for each incorrect or missing unit from an answer that would otherwise gain all the marks available for that answer: maximum 1 per question. No deduction is incurred if the unit is missing from the final answer but is shown correctly in the working.
Arithmetic errors Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is clearly an arithmetic one. Transcription errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is because given or previously calculated data has clearly been misread but used correctly.
Fractions
These are only acceptable where specified.
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Page 4
1
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
(a) acceleration = v – u OR ∆v (symbols used to be explained) t t OR change of velocity ÷ time OR rate of change of velocity OR change of velocity per second / in 1 sec (allow ‘in a certain time’) accept speed for velocity (b) (i) use of any area under graph 750 m (ii) time = change of speed ÷ acceleration OR 30/0.60 = 50 (s) if working for t = 50 s not shown, allow 2 marks for correct use of 50 s graph: along y-axis to 180 s / rise starts at 180 s from x-axis rises to 30 m/s at 230 s / candidate’s calculated time horizontal from top of slope to 280 s allow ½ square tolerance at 180 s where relevant allow ecf from wrong t
2
(a) two processes from: vapour rising condensation rain falling water falling from lake / through pipes water turns turbine / generator electricity generated. energy changes: PE to KE matched to a process KE to electricity energy for turbine / power station (b) (i) (PE =) mgh OR 2 × 105 × 10 × 120 allow g = 9.8 or 9.81 2.4 × 108 J (ii) (KE of water =) ½mv2 OR ½ × 2 × 105 × 142 1.96 × 107 J OR 2.0 × 107 J
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Paper 31
B1
C1 A1 C1 A1 B1 B1 B1
[8]
max B2 B1 B1 C1 A1 C1 A1
[8]
Page 5 3
(a) 1.
2.
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
Paper 31
no resultant force acts / no net force acts OR total force up / in any direction = total force down / in opposite direction allow sum of forces or resultant force for total force no resultant moment / couple / torque acts OR (sum of) clockwise moments and (sum of) anti-clockwise moments (about any point / axis) balance
(b) (i) (anti-clockwise moment =) F × 2 (total clockwise moment =) (120 × 33) + (20 × 15) = 4260 (N cm) 2130 N
B1 B1
(a) surfaces shown at realistic levels in dish and tube AND vertical height h between levels clearly shown top label: vacuum / mercury vapour bottom label: mercury
B1 B1 B1
(b) (P =) hdg OR 0.73 × 13600 × 10 99280 Pa at least 2 s.f.
C1 B1
(c) one from: abnormal weather / atmospheric conditions o.w.t.t.e. air in space above mercury in tube barometer is in a high altitude location o.w.t.t.e. space above mercury is not a vacuum ignore atmospheric pressure varies ignore temperature 5
B1 C1 C1 A1
(ii) 1990 N OR candidate’s (b)(i) – 140 N force is downwards 4
B1
(a) (i) most: gas least: solid both required (ii) because change of pressure (also) causes volume change (in a gas) NOT ‘gas can be compressed’ (b) (i) two from: expands uniformly (over required range) remains liquid over required range expands more than glass / has high expansivity / expansion has (reasonably) low specific heat capacity. has low freezing point / lower freezing point than mercury (ii) make (capillary) tube narrower (and longer) / thinner / smaller diameter make bulb larger (and tube longer) allow ‘bore’ for tube ignore ‘smaller’ ignore narrow thermometer
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
B1
B1 B1
max B2 B1 B1
[7]
[6]
Page 6
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
(c) allows fast(er) flow of heat to / from alcohol OR allows fast response (to temperature change) OR because glass is a poor conductor / good insulator (so needs to be thin for fast response) OR heat transfer more efficient / faster OR glass takes up less heat ignore reference to sensitivity ignore ‘easier’ 6
(a) (i) 1.
2.
compressions and/or rarefactions closer together OR more compressions and/or rarefactions ignore wavelength shorter
B1
[7]
B1
layers closer together at compressions B1 layers farther apart at rarefactions B1 OR compressions narrower (B1) rarefactions wider (B1) ignore wavelength shorter ignore ‘amplitude greater’ ignore ‘maximum displacement greater’
(ii) distance between 2 compressions or 2 rarefactions shown with reasonable accuracy
7
Paper 31
B1
(b) time taken by sound in air = 200 / 343 = 0.583 s time taken by sound in steel = 0.583 – 0.544 = 0.039 s 5128 m/s
C1 C1 A1
(a) (i) light of a single wavelength / frequency ignore ‘one colour’
B1
(ii) n = sin i/sin r OR 1.52 = sin 50/sin r OR sin r = sin 50/1.52 30.26º at least 2 s.f.
C1 A1
(iii) ray closer to normal in block ray parallel to incident ray emerging from block
B1 B1
(b) (i) n = vA/vG OR n = 1.54/vG OR vG = 3 × 108/1.54 1.948 × 108 m/s
C1 B1
(ii) ray with smaller angle of refraction than red in block i.e. violet ray under red ray emerging ray parallel to incident ray
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
B1 B1
[7]
[9]
Page 7 8
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
(a) any three from: use a strong(er) magnet increase the number of coils in the solenoid / turns of solenoid closer together move the magnet fast(er). place iron core in the solenoid use thick(er) wire / low(er) resistance wire for solenoid max B3 (b) (i) NP/NS = VP/VS OR 200/800 = VP/24 OR VP = NPVS/NS OR VP = 200 x 24/800 6.0 V (ii) IpVp = IsVs OR IpNp = IsNs OR IP = ISVS/VP OR IP = ISNS/NP OR IP = (0.5 x 24)/6 OR IP = (0.5 x 800)/200 2(.0) A allow ecf from (b)(i)
9
Paper 31
(a) (i) 1. 2.
resistance is constant / doesn’t vary resistance increases
(ii) 7 V
C1 A1
C1 A1
[7]
B1 B1 B1
(b) resistance of resistor = 4/2.6 (= 1.54 Ω) resistance of lamp = 4/3.6 (= 1.11 Ω) 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 OR (R =) R1R2/(R1 + R2) OR either eq. with numbers 0.645 or 0.65 Ω OR current through resistor = 2.6 A current through lamp = 3.6 A total current = 2.6 + 3.6 = 6.2 A 0.645 Ω OR 0.65 Ω OR R = 4/sum of candidate’s currents accept R value based on no. of sig. figs. for resistors used by candidate 10 (a) (i) thermistor
C1 C1 C1 A1 (C1) (C1) (C1) (A1)
B1
(ii) lamp is ON at 20 oC / low temperature and OFF at 100 oC / high temperature p.d. across B is high at 20 oC / low temperature p.d. across B is low at 100 oC / high temperature OR as temperature rises, p.d. across B falls transistor acts as a switch for the lamp at a certain temperature OR lamp is ON if there is current in base / collector OR potential of base is high OR lamp is OFF if there is no current in base / collector OR potential of base is too low
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
B1 B1 B1 (B2)
B1
[7]
Page 8
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
(b) to switch on a warning light when temperature (required for a process) becomes too low OR to switch off a warning light when temperature (required for a process) becomes high enough example (e.g. freezer or incubator) not needed, but if given, explanation required 11 (a) (i) to heat the cathode / C
Paper 31
B1
B1
(ii) to emit electrons / to undergo thermionic emission (when heated)
B1
(iii) to attract / accelerate electrons to allow the electrons / beam to pass through to the screen / to focus the beam / to direct the beam / produce a straight beam / to fix the beam current
B1
(b) (i) p.d. / voltage / battery / power supply applied between / across plates upper plate positive and lower plate negative (ii) sketch showing: straight vertical lines from top plate to bottom plate arrows pointing downwards / from + to –
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
[6]
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
[8]
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 (Extended Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2012 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
om .c
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2012 question paper
s er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
Page 2
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 31
NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME M marks
are method marks upon which further marks depend. For an M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent marks can be scored.
B marks
are independent marks, which do not depend on other marks. For a B mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen specifically in the candidate’s answers.
A marks
In general A marks are awarded for final answers to numerical questions. If a final numerical answer, eligible for A marks, is correct, with the correct unit and an acceptable number of significant figures, all the marks for that question are normally awarded. It is very occasionally possible to arrive at a correct answer by an entirely wrong approach. In these rare circumstances, do not award the A marks, but award C marks on their merits. However, correct numerical answers with no working shown gain all the marks available.
C marks
are compensatory marks in general applicable to numerical questions. These can be scored even if the point to which they refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. For example, if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct substitution or working which shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored. A C mark is not awarded if a candidate makes two points which contradict each other. Points which are wrong but irrelevant are ignored.
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given. underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar. OR / or
indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
e.e.o.o.
means "each error or omission".
o.w.t.t.e.
means “or words to that effect”.
Spelling
Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean what we want, give credit. However, beware of and do not allow ambiguities, accidental or deliberate: e.g. spelling which suggests confusion between reflection / refraction / diffraction / thermistor / transistor / transformer.
Not/NOT
Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty applies.
Ignore
Indicates that something which is not correct or irrelevant is to be disregarded and does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 3 ecf
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 31
meaning "error carried forward" is mainly applicable to numerical questions, but may in particular circumstances be applied in non-numerical questions. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried an incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, marks indicated by ecf may be awarded, provided the subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind the earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated ecf.
Significant Figures Answers are normally acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2. Accept answers that round to give the correct answer to 2 s.f. Any exceptions to this general rule will be specified in the mark scheme. Units
Deduct one mark for each incorrect or missing unit from a final answer that would otherwise gain all the marks available for that answer: maximum 1 per question. No deduction is incurred if the unit is missing from the final answer but is shown correctly in the working.
Arithmetic errors Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is clearly an arithmetic one. Transcription errors Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is because given or previously calculated data has clearly been misread but used correctly. Fractions
e.g. ½, ¼ etc are only acceptable where specified.
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 4 1
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
(a) Period: 1.81 s OR 1.8 s as mean value OR 1.8 s as most common reading / the mode (b) Time a minimum of 2 (successive) oscillations Divide result by the number of oscillations OR Count no. of oscillations in at least 20 s Divide the time by the number of oscillations OR Divide no. of oscillations by time and find reciprocal 2 of: Repeat (several times) and find mean Time with reference to fixed / fiducial point or top or bottom of oscillation Check / set zero of stop-watch Show knowledge of what is meant by one oscillation
Paper 31 B1 B1 B1 (B1) (B1)
B2 [Total: 5]
2
(a) (i) Increasing speed / acceleration
B1
(ii) Constant / steady / uniform speed or motion
B1
(iii) Decreasing speed / deceleration / braking / slowing / stopping / negative acceleration
B1
(b) (i) (Total) distance / (total) time OR d / t OR 400 / 60 6.67 m/s at least 2 s.f. (ii) Mention of maximum gradient OR clear that whole or part of B to C is used Use of correct data from graph to +/– ½ square Answer rounds to 9.2 to 9.4 m/s, at least 2 s.f.
C1 A1 C1 C1 A1 [Total: 8]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 5 3
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 31
(a) Example: e.g. battery: (chemical to) electrical engine: (chemical to) kinetic / mechanical fire: (chemical to) thermal / heat (human) body: (chemical to) heat / kinetic
B1
(b) (i) (P =) IV OR in words OR 0.27 × 17 = 4.59 W at least 2 s.f.
C1 A1
(ii) (K.E. =) efficiency × input OR 0.35 × 4.59 = 1.61 J or Nm at least 2 s.f. (iii) 1. 2.
C1 A1
d = m/V OR (m =) V × d OR in words OR 0.00014 × 1000 = 0.14 kg
C1 A1
P.E. gained = K.E. lost OR mgh = ½ mv2 OR 0.14 × 10 × h = 1.61 OR 1.6 h = 1.15 m OR 1.14 m at least 2 s.f.
C1 A1
OR ½ mv2 = 1.61 OR v2 = 2 × 1.61 / 0.14 = 23 OR v2 = 2 × 1.6 / 0.14 = 22.86 (h =) v2/2g = 23/20 = 1.15 m OR (h =) 22.86/20 = 1.14 m
(C1) (A1) [Total: 9]
4
(a) (p =) F/A OR in words OR 90/4.8 OR 90 / 0.00048 = 18.75 N/cm2 OR 1.875 × 105 Pa OR 187500 Pa OR 187.5 kPa OR 0.1875 MPa at least 2 s.f.
C1
(b) Area of Y bigger (than area of X so force greater)
B1
(c) Volume of oil moved at Y = volume of oil moved at X Area of Y × distance moved by Y = Area of X × distance moved by X (so distance move by Y smaller) OR Work done by piston X = work done on piston Y Work = force × distance and F2 is greater than F1 so distance moved by Y smaller (than distance moved by X)
B1
(d) Air bubbles compress when pressure applied More movement of piston X required for same movement of piston Y OR Y moves less (for same movement of X) OR Driver must push the brake pedal further / do more work OR Pressure reduced / force on Y reduced OR System is less efficient
A1
B1 (B1) (B1) M1
A1 [Total: 7]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 6 5
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) e.g. freezing, solidification, condensation OR example e.g. water to ice, steam to water, gas to solid (ii) No change (b) Heat/energy required to change temperature of the body by 1 °C / 1 K / 1 unit / 1 deg OR mass (of body) × specific heat capacity (c) (i) Q = mcθ OR in words OR 250 × 4.2 × 20 = 21000 J
Paper 31 B1 B1 B1 B1 (B2)
C1 A1
(ii) 21000 J OR same as (c)(i)
B1
(iii) Q = mL OR m = Q/L OR either in words OR 21000 = m × 330 OR m = 21000/330 = 63.6 g at least 2 s.f.
C1 A1 [Total: 9]
6
(a) (i) Glass / flask receives heat / rises in temperature Glass / flask expands
B1 B1
(ii) Heat flows through glass to water OR Water receives heat / thermal energy from / conducted by glass OR Water temperature rises OR Water molecules move faster / gain K.E. Water expands / Water molecules move further apart
B1 B1
(iii) Glass / solid expands less OR water / liquid expands more
B1
(b) Use a bigger flask OR a narrower tube OR Use a solid and a liquid that expand more
B1 [Total: 6]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 7 7
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
(a) (Molecule) moves up and down / rises and falls OR oscillates perpendicular to direction of wave OR describes a circle (b) (i) At least 3 circular arcs, angular spread greater than 90° (symmetrically above and below slit Centre of arcs at centre of slit and with same spacing (by eye) as incident waves (ii) Diffraction
Paper 31
B1
B1 B1 B1
(c) v = f × λ OR 12 = f × 1.4 OR f = v / λ OR f = 12 / 1.4 f = 8.57 Hz / per s / waves or vibrations per s at least 2 s.f.
C1 A1 [Total: 6]
8
(a) (i) Electron(s)
B1
(ii) At least 2 + signs on left-hand side of S Same number of – signs on right-hand side of S
B1
(iii) Connect S to earth (with rod in place) Remove connection of S to earth Remove R / rod
M1 M1 A1
(b) (i) Q = It OR I = Q / t OR in words OR I = 30/120 = 0.25 A or C/s
C1 A1
(ii) E = IVt OR in words OR 0.25 × 1.5 × 106 × 120 OR E = QV OR in words OR 30 × 1.5 × 106 E = 45000000 J / 4.5 × 107 J / 45 MJ / 12.5 kWh
C1 (C1) A1 [Total: 9]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 8
9
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) I1 = I2 + I3
Paper 31 B1
(ii) I1 = I4 OR same (b) (i) (V = IR = 0.80 × 3.0 =) 2.4 V (ii) I = V/R in any algebraic form OR 2.4 / 2 OR (b)(i) / 2 OR any voltage divided by 2 (I3 = V/R = 2.4 / 2 =) 1.2 A OR I3/I2 = 3/2 I3 = 3/2 × 0.8 A = 1.2 A (iii) (I2 + I3 OR Current through R = 0.8 + 1.2) = 2.0 (A) OR 6 V / 2 A used Parallel combination formula: 1/r = 1/r1 + 1/r2 OR (r =) r1r2/(r1 + r2) Use of formula: combined resistance = 1.2 (Ω) (R + 1.2 = 6/2 = 3.0 Ω R =) 1.8 Ω OR Current through R = 0.8 + 1.2 = 2.0 (A) P.D. across R = 6.0 – 2.4 = 3.6 (V) R = 3.6 / 2.0 = 1.8 Ω
B1
A1
C1 A1 (C1) (A1)
C1 C1 C1 A1 (C1) (C1) (C1) (A1) [Total: 9]
10 (a) (i) Parallel lines perpendicular to pole faces with arrows N to S (ii) Arrow pointing to the right (b) (i) Geiger (counter) / Geiger (tube) (+ scaler / ratemeter) / photographic plate / scintillation counter / cloud chamber / luminescent or phosphorescent plate
B1 B1
B1
(ii) Out of the plane of the paper
B1
(iii) (Path is) a curve / circular / arc
B1
(iv) (Air molecules are) ionised / lose electrons
B1 [Total: 6]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 9
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
11 (a) Transistor
Paper 31 B1
(b) Resistor / variable resistor / rheostat identified Light-dependent resistor / LDR identified Resistor or alternative in gap A; LDR in gap B
B1 B1 B1
(c) Thermistor / thermal resistor / heat or temperature dependent resistor identified Thermistor (or alternative name) in gap A and resistor in gap B
B1 B1 [Total: 6]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
0625 PHYSICS 0625/31
Paper 3 (Extended Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2012 series for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
om .c
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2012 series
s er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
Page 2
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 31
NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME SYMBOLS & OTHER MATTERS M marks
are method marks upon which further marks depend. For an M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent marks can be scored.
B marks
are independent marks, which do not depend on other marks. For a B mark to scored, the point to which it refers must be seen specifically in the candidate’s answers.
A marks
In general A marks are awarded for final answers to numerical questions. If a final numerical answer, eligible for A marks, is correct, with the correct unit and an acceptable number of significant figures, all the marks for that question are normally awarded. It is very occasionally possible to arrive at a correct answer by an entirely wrong approach. In these rare circumstances, do not award the A marks, but award C marks on their merits. However, correct numerical answers with no working shown gain all the marks available.
C marks
are compensatory marks in general applicable to numerical questions. These can be scored even if the point to which they refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. For example, if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct substitution or working which shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored. A C mark is not awarded if a candidate makes two points which contradict each other. Points which are wrong but irrelevant are ignored.
brackets ( )
around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in brackets. e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining
indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR / or
indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
e.e.o.o.
means "each error or omission".
o.w.t.t.e.
means “or words to that effect”.
c.a.o.
correct answer only
Spelling
Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean what we want, give credit. However, beware of and do not allow ambiguities, accidental or deliberate: e.g. spelling which suggests confusion between reflection / refraction / diffraction / thermistor / transistor / transformer.
Not/NOT
Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty applies.
Ignore
Indicates that something which is not correct or irrelevant is to be disregarded and does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
ecf
meaning "error carried forward" is mainly applicable to numerical questions, but may in particular circumstances be applied in non-numerical questions. © Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 3
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 31
This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried an incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, marks indicated by ecf may be awarded, provided the subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind the earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated ecf. Sig. figs.
Answers are normally acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2. Any exceptions to this general rule will be specified in the mark scheme. In general, accept numerical answers, which, if reduced to two significant figures, would be right.
Units
Deduct one mark for each incorrect or missing unit from an answer that would otherwise gain all the marks available for that answer: maximum 1 per question. No deduction is incurred if the unit is missing from the final answer but is shown correctly in the working.
Arithmetic errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is clearly an arithmetic one.
Transcription Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is because given or errors previously calculated data has clearly been misread but used correctly. Fractions
e.g. ½, ¼, 1/10 etc are only acceptable where specified.
Crossed out work
Work which has been crossed out and not replaced but can easily be read, should be marked as if it had not been crossed out.
Use of NR
(# key on the keyboard) Use this if the answer space for a question is completely blank or contains no readable words, figures or symbols.
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 4 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 31
(a) (i) s = area under graph, stated or clearly used = (½ × 18 × 10) + (120 × 18) + (½ × 18 × 20) Award if at least one term correct = 90 + 2160 +180 = 2430 m / 2.43 km at least 2 significant figures. *Unit penalty applies (ii) v = u + at in any form OR (a=) gradient OR 18/10 = 1.8 m/s2 *Unit penalty applies
C1 C1 C1 A1 C1 A1
(b) (F=) ma OR 1.1 × 105 × 1.8 ecf from (a)(ii) = 1.98 × 105 N at least 2 significant figures. *Unit penalty applies
C1 A1
(c) driving force = friction/air resistance/drag
B1
[9]
*Apply unit penalty once only 2
(a) Size / magnitude (NOT distance) and direction
B1
(b) Vectors towards East and North with arrows correct by eye Complete triangle or rectangle for candidate’s vectors Resultant with correct arrow Resultant 94 to 96 m/s by scale OR 95 m/s by calculation *Unit penalty applies Angle measured 13.5° – 15.5° OR 15° by calculation *Unit penalty applies
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
[6]
*Apply unit penalty once only 3
(a) No resultant/net force OR no resultant force in any direction OR no resultant force in any two perpendicular directions
B1
No resultant/net moment/turning effect/couple/torque OR (total) clockwise moment = (total) anticlockwise moment
B1
Either order (b) (i) F × 120 / F × 0.12 = 20 × 500 OR 20 × 0.5 F = 83.3 N at least 2 significant figures. Allow 831/3 *Unit penalty applies (ii) F/A or in words OR 83.3/0.0036 ecf from (b)(i) = 23100 Pa / N/m2 OR 2.31 N/cm2 OR 23.1 kPa *Unit penalty applies
C1 C1 A1 C1 A1
*Apply unit penalty once only 4
(a) (The point in the body) where (all) the mass / weight / gravity acts / appears to act (owtte) (b) h is the height through which the centre of mass/rises OR centre of mass/rises (much) less than 2.0 m © Cambridge International Examinations 2012
B1
[7]
Page 5
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
OR centre of mass/of athlete is above the ground level OR centre of mass/gravity passes under bar
Paper 31 B1
Allow centre of gravity in place of centre of mass
5
(c) Standing: has chemical energy Run-up: kinetic energy gained Pole bent: has strain / elastic energy Rise: potential energy gained Fall: kinetic energy gained On mat: has thermal / heat / sound / strain / elastic energy
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
(a) (i) (Force exerted when) molecules hit wall / surface / solid (and rebound) Allow (force) due to momentum change in collision
B1
(ii) Molecules/atoms/particles collide with / push against walls more (often) (so) bigger force / push
[8]
B1 B1 B1
NOT collide faster
6
(b) P1V1 = P2V2 OR PV = constant 8.0 × 105 × 5000 = 1 × 105 × V2 V2 = 40 000 cm3 Volume escaped = 40 000 – 5000 = 35 000 cm3
C1 C1 C1 A1
(a) Heat required to change state of / melt 1 kg / 1 g / unit mass of solid (with no change of temperature)
B1
Allow specific example e.g. ice to water NOT liquid to gas
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
[8]
Page 6
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
(b) (i) d = m/V in any form OR (m =) V × d OR (m =) 0.25 × 0.012 × 920 = 2.76 kg at least 2 significant figures. *Unit penalty applies (ii) 60% of 250 = 150 (W/m2) OR 250 × 0.25 = 62.5 (J) Heat absorbed in 1 s = 150 × 0.25 = 37.5 (J) OR 60 % of 62.5 = 37.5 J OR J/s OR W *Unit penalty applies
Paper 31 C1 A1 C1 A1
Allow J/s or W because in one second. (iii) Q = mL OR m = Q/L OR m = 37.5 / 3.3 × 105 ecf from (b)(ii) m = 0.0001136 (kg) (in 1 s) Time taken = 2.76/0.000114 = 24300 s at least 2 significant figures. *Unit penalty applies OR P = Q/t OR t = Q/P OR t = mL/P t = 2.76 × 3.3 × 105 / 37.5 = 24300 s *Unit penalty applies
C1 C1 A1 (C1) (C1) (A1)
[8]
*Apply unit penalty once only 7
(a) Faster / more energetic molecules escape / evaporate (from surface) Molecules left (in liquid) have lower average speed / energy so temperature is lower OR (Latent) heat needed to evaporate / leave the surface comes from remaining liquid (b) (i) Dull surface is better radiator / radiates faster OR Shiny surface is poorer radiator / radiates slower
8
B1 B1 (B1) (B1)
B1
(ii) C hotter (than A) OR A cooler (than C) (so evaporates at a faster rate in C)
B1
(iii) Less liquid in D OR more liquid in A
B1
(iv) E has greater (surface) area / more open to air / is shallower greater rate of loss of heat by evaporation / convection / conduction / radiation
B1
(a) (i) Diagram to show – boundary, normal and ray bending towards normal Angle of incidence labelled i or 51° Angle of refraction labelled r or 29° (ii) n = sin i / sin r OR n = sin 51 / sin 29 n = 1.603 at least 2 s.f. *Unit penalty applies
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
B1 B1 B1 B1 C1 A1
[7]
Page 7
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
(b) Ray is totally internally reflected / undergoes TIR Angle of incidence is more than / equal to the critical angle (of the glass) OR Ray travels along the boundary Angle of incidence = critical angle (of the glass) OR Critical angle calculated as 38.6° ecf from (a)(ii) Angle of incidence greater than critical angle (of the glass) 9
(a) (i) In the opposite direction OR downwards Faster / fast (ii) No voltage/current induced Currents/voltages (induced) in each half of XY are equal and in opposite directions/oppose each other (b) (i) Y-plates
Paper 31 B1 B1 (B1) (B1) (B1) (B1)
[7]
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
(ii) Up and down (repeatedly) owtte
B1
(iii) Off / zero
B1
[7]
10 (a) (i) current (ii) p.d. OR potential difference OR voltage
B1
Both required (b) R = R1 + R2 OR 1.2 + 3.6 OR 4.8 (k Ω) I = 9.0 / 4.8 = 1.875 (mA) OR 9.0/4800 = 1.875 × 10–3 (A) Voltmeter reading = 6.75 V *Unit penalty applies OR Voltmeter reading = [R1 / (R1 + R2)] V = [3.6 / (1.2 + 3.6)] × 9.0 = 6.75 V *Unit penalty applies (c) (In fire) temperature of thermistor rises and its resistance falls Current (through thermistor and relay coil) rises / flows OR voltage / p.d. across / of relay coil rises Magnetic field of relay closes switch (and bell rings) *Apply unit penalty once only
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
C1 C1 A1 (C1) (C1) (A1) B1 B1 B1
[7]
Page 8
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 31
11 (a) (i) alpha or α (ii) beta or β (iii) gamma or γ
B2
Symbols must be clear 3 correct B2 2 correct B1 (b) (i) repulsion α particle and (gold) nucleus / protons of (gold) nucleus have positive charges
B1 B1
(ii) Any two of: Nucleus is very small (compared to size of atom) OR Most of atom is empty space Nucleus is positive / contains protons OR Nucleus has (all) the positive charge of the atom Nucleus is heavy OR Nucleus has most / all of the mass of the atom Ignore neutrons
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
B2
[6]
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) – Alternative to Practical November 1999 1
(a)
(b)
2
(a)
(b)(i) (ii) (c)(i) (ii)
3
(a)(i) (ii)
(iii) (b)
4
(a)(i) (ii) (iii) (b)(i) (ii)
98, 83, 52 mm OR any other checkable value to ± 1 mm corresponding values 68, 53, 21mm OR other checkable value to ± 1(mm) Correct subtraction of candidate’s “Q” from candidate’s “P” (i.e. e.c.f) Clear working throughout, accurate and in range (3/3.1) and good presentation of h written answer / candidate’s diagram / from drawing on Fig 1.1: ANY four points from: Set perpendicular zero on bench close to tube use of fiducial aid position of eye to avoid parallax read bottom of meniscus use of background repeats
1 1 1 1
4 8
Four acceptable symbols (i.e. can be found in text books) and in series Power-supply polarity labelled, correct diode connection Open switch Polarity of ammeter compatible with diode connections Ammeter anywhere in series with other components Yes box ticked plus current is same at every point in circuit 3/100 A, 0.03 A or 30mA (unit required) no other resistance in circuit / 3 volt across 100 _ / max resistance is 100 _
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ratio of masses: 9 or 9:1, not other way round ratio of areas: 8 - 8.1, or 8:1 etc The height was the same for each area “Use” of table, specific use or by just referring to areas, / balls / masses Observation is consistent/true/same for all the masses or balls as the mass decreases h increases Heaviest: each piece absorbs all of the KE / KE is transformed into other forms of energy or into two other named forms / No KE of rebound Lightest: each piece absorbs some KE/ some KE converted into other forms etc / a “smaller” amount of KE of rebound
1 1 1 1 1 1
reduce/prevent conduction of “heat” into (the solution) / insulates the can produce a uniform temperature assists in accurate temperature measurements 0 18.7 or 18.8 C 8.9 or 9 unit with one of the three temperatures Any ONE point from assists accuracy helps avoiding parallax
1 1 1 1 1 1
1
1 8
1 1 8
(c)
5
(a)(i)
(b)(i) (ii) (iii)
more certain when the thread reaches the scale division Take the reading with the line of sight perpendicular to the scale, marked on a diagram
1
Correct axes {y against x) and labelled Axes scaled sensibly occupying at least half the grid with units and using the required origin Five correct plots, to the nearest 1/3 small graph square A fine line and neat plots Five correct subtractions {2.3., 2.1, 2.3, 2.1, 2.1.} Showing y – x on diagram They remain constant / approximately constant (y-x) larger
1
2
1 8
1 2 1 1 1 1 1 8
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) – Alternative to Practical May/June 2000 1
(a)
neat, thin line OA neat, thin line AP1P2 arrow shown, correct direction on either P2P1 extended to LL’ correct and neat I labelled continuation of IA’ shown IR/OC shown value 2.9 - 3.1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8
Move centre of compass along line from magnet Judged parallel to OX in some sensible way (e.g. use lined paper with a line along OX or use ruler and set square, etc) Tap compass to prevent sticking Mark either end of needle as near as possible to compass then mark A between Look directly down on to compass so centre is on line N pole marked (RH end) moves gradually to direction approx.
1
(a) (b) (c)(i) (ii) (d)
0-10 correct position (between 6.2 and 6.4) 3.4 _ 0.2 _ correct symbol
1 1 1 1 1
(e)
connect variable resistor in series
1 6
(a)
suitable table (rows or columns) mass unit shown temperature unit shown way of taking an average or there will be errors in readings, so way of showing expected results without the errors 1: 0.8 2: 3 o tick in box 1 and reason (e.g. difficult to measure temp to 1 C) or heat losses involved or easy to measure mass to better than l g)
1 1 1
(b) (c) (d)
2
(a)
(b)(i) (ii)
3
4
(b)(i) (ii) (iii)
5
(a)
(b) (c)(i)
1.096 (1.10) 1.068 (1.07) 1.006 (1.01) 0.866 ( 0.87) all correct greater accuracy Graph: scales right way round and suitable i.e. cover at least 1/2 grid no unsuitable scales e.g. 10 sq = 0.3
1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8
1 1 1 1 7
1 1 1
(ii) (iii) (d)
scales labelled with quantity or unit all plots correct to nearest square ABCD labelled T increases, increase is greatest for larger values of d 1.l (+) increased range OR largest difference in T value with larger d values
2
1 2 1 1 1 1 1 11
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) – Alternative to Practical November 2000 1
(a)(i)
(ii) (iii)
(b)(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
use metre rule (or other straight edge) held horizontally at height of rule near clamp and measure height from floor (OR measure height from floor near clamp 2) (i.e. appreciation that even without weight, free end of rule is depressed) metre rule and some means to ensure it is vertical (e.g. set-square) means to more easily locate reading on vertical rule (e.g. short rule, set-square) OR fixing vertical rule in clamp & stand OR convincing avoidance of parallax (action AND reason) NOTE: (i), (ii) and (iii) may be scored directly from the diagram(s). Take time (t) for several oscillations (N) Calculate T from t/N stopclock / stopwatch make N as large as possible OR repeat readings use of fiducial mark at centre of oscillation OR explanation of what fiducial mark means OR shown on diagram (mere use of word fiducial is not sufficient)
1 1
1
1
1 1 1
1 8
2
(a)
(b)
w / cm x / cm 2 wx / cm
w,x and wx tabulated w and x with corresponding units wx unit correct wx value (2/3 sf) X3 all wx correct to + 2 mm As x increases, w decreases OR w decreases faster than x increases 4.4 3.30 14.5
2.8 5.90 16.5
1 1 1 1 1 2 1.9 7.75 14.7
0.95 10.65 10.1 7
3
(a)
need to add brass, not water, to cup
1
(b)
(start clock) at stated time remove brass place brass in cup after time t
1 1
(c) (d)(i)
(OR hold thread, start clock at same time as removing brass place brass in cup after time t) cool for 60s record maximum temperature of water use fresh water from tap
1
1 1
(ii)
OR use thermometer to measure temperature and adjust use 50 g – measure on balance
1 1
(e)
ensure temp same throughout liquid
1 8
4
(a)(i) (ii)
r angle of resistance to obtain any value of current
1 1
(b)(i) 1. 1
(ii)
2. move slider along line
1
3. to ensure good electrical contact
1
insulate 23 cm correct end clear OR 23cm
1 1
tape 7 5
(a)
graph:
(b)(i)
scales labelled plots correct to the nearest half square line y1 to the nearest half square y2 to the nearest half square ratios correct to 2/3 s.f. force increases as separation decreases x ratio is < 1; y ratio > 1
(ii)
2
1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 10
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) – Alternative to Practical May/June 2001 1
(a)
(b)
2
a)(i) (ii) (iii) (b)(i) (ii) (iii)
3
(a)(i) (ii) (iii) (b)
Graph: Axes, labelled, y against x Scales suitable plots 6 correct (OR 5 correct = 2, OR 4 correct = 1) line judgement string slipped on pulley / other sensible point lo and l1 clear and from same points e = l1 – lo o
o
o
1 1 3 1 1 1 1 9
7 C, 16 C, 12 C C lid same volume / same initial temperature A would not have gone below room temperature goes down to room temperature
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 8
0.94, 0.35, 0.48 1.77 (or sum of above) unit 2.69, 1.00, 1.37 correct to 2 / 3 s.f. unit at least once diagram: resistors in parallel voltmeter correct ammeter correct
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10
4
(a) (b) (c) (d)(i) (ii) (e)
correct temperature 0 ensure at 100 C heat not lost during transfer 69.5°C 10.5°C contains more heat
1 1 1 1 1 1 6
5
(a)
3.00, 1.47, 1.01 arithmetic all to 2 / 3 s.f. suitable explanation / diagram e.g. mark on block and measure to object with metre rule upside down 2.9 ± 0.1 cm centre of object and lens in line
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
(b) (c) (d)
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) – Alternative to Practical October/November 2001 1
(a)(i)
(ii) (b)
2
(a)(i) (ii) (b)
3
(a)(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (b)
4
(a)(i) (iii)
(b)(i) (ii)
5
(a)(i) (ii) (b)
Graph:, axes, labelled, d/mm against L / N scales suitable plots 6 correct line judgement reading to 1/2 square clearly shown Any two from: horizontal rule at top vertical rule in centre clamped rule in centre rule in centre resting on floor
1 1 3 1 1 1
0.22, 0.23, 0.17(5) correct all correct all to 2/3 s.f. unit (at least once) circuit: lamps in parallel voltmeter correct ammeter correct (for any one lamp)
2 1 1 1
h = 18(mm) t = 1.2mm correct arithmetic unit d correct arithmetic 2/3 s.f. mass on correct side approximately twice as far from pivot (by eye) (between 35 and 40)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
35, 23, 32 correct Any two from: same initial temperature same size cans same distance from heater same time same room temperature R 18 - 19°C clear how obtained
1
lines correct, thin and neat o o 30 ± 1 Any two from: view base of pins ensure vertical pins as far apart as possible (or > 5cm)
1 1
1
2 10
1 1 1 8
1 8
2 1 1 1 6
(c)(i) (ii) (iii)
use a third pin 2.4 ± 0.1 cm 6.8 ± 0.1 cm n = 1.3 - 1.5 (from correct arithmetic) no unit and 2/3 s.f.
2
2 1 1 1 1 8
June 2003
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME MAXIMUM MARK: 40
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/06 PHYSICS Alternative to Practical
Page 1
1
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003
Syllabus 0625
(a)
Seven correct values: 0, 2, 3, 6, 9, 10, 12 (-1 each error)
2
(b)
Graph: Scales, labelled, suitable size Axes, right way round Plots to ½ sq (-1 each error)
1 1 2
Line shape Line thickness
1 1
Triangle greater than ½ line and method used Correct interpolation to ½ sq
1 1
(c)
TOTAL 2
36o (61o)
1
(b)
Refracted ray drawn 22o (61o) normal correct (by eye) neat, thin, correct lines
1 1 1 1
(c)
Correct refracted ray (by eye) with arrow
1
(d)
Separation (LHS) at least 5cm Separation (RHS) at least 5cm
1 1
(a)
8
(i)
Voltmeter across lamp
1
(ii)
Variable resistor/rheostat
1
(b)
Correct position
1
(c)
V A
1 1 1 1 1 1
W
correct R at 9.8V = 8.16666 (any sf) all R to 2/3 sf consistent 2 sf or consistent 3 sf TOTAL 4
10
(a)
TOTAL 3
Paper 6
(a)
(b)
9
(i)
6.8cm (68mm)
1
(ii)
6.8 unit, mm
1 1
(i)
3.8/3.77 or 0.38/0.377 mm or cm as appropriate
1 1
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
Page 2
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – JUNE 2003
Syllabus 0625
(ii)
0.94/0.95 (or evidence of division by 4)
1
(iii)
0.75094/0.75095
1
Thickness of string/thickness of marks on string/stretching of string/metre rule measures to 1mm
1
(c)
TOTAL 5
(a)
(b)
Paper 6
8
(i)
polystyrene
1
(ii)
Least steep curve (or numbers suitably quoted)
1
Three from: Thickness of insulator Room temp. Starting temp. Mass/vol./amount of water Using same can
3 TOTAL
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
5
November 2003
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME MAXIMUM MARK: 40
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/06 PHYSICS Alternative to Practical
Page 1
1
(a)
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – NOVEMBER 2003
Syllabus 0625
Paper 6
wind string round more than once
1
divide measured length by number of turns to find c
1
correct diagram, blocks parallel, one at each end
1
119 mm OR 11.9 cm to 121 mm OR 12.1 cm
1
(c)
V = 32.39 to 32.41 cm3
1 1
(d) (i)
Vm = 0.5 – 2 cm3
1
(b) (i) (ii)
(ii)
correct calculation and 2/3 sf
(ignore unit)
1 TOTAL 8
2
(a) (i)(ii) 2 neat continuous rays
(thickness up to as EF)
1
(iii)
normal where incident ray meets mirror (90° by eye)
1
(iv)
i = 20° ± 1° (allow e.c.f. if mark for normal not scored)
1
(b) (i)(ii) lines complete and neat with AX correctly intersecting (iii) (c)
AY = 5.9 – 6.1 cm AND YX = 5.5 + 0.3 cm
1 1
any one from: thickness of mirror thickness of lines thickness of pins judgement of where lines cross
1 TOTAL 6
3
(a)
pointer at 0.35 A
1
(b) (i)
variable resistor/rheostat/potentiometer
1
V
1
A
1
Ω
1
One R correct
1
(ii)
All R correct
(iii) (c)
(6.129, 5.769, 4, correctly rounded)
1
Consistent sf for R (either all 2 sf or all 3 sf)
1
variable resistor/number of cells
1
Voltmeter in parallel with resistors (or power source)
1
Ammeter next to X
1
Symbols correct and all connections drawn in
1 TOTAL 12
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
Page 2
4
(a)
(b)
Mark Scheme IGCSE EXAMINATIONS – NOVEMBER 2003
Syllabus 0625
Paper 6
Scales: y-axis 1N = 4 cm; x-axis 1m/s2 = 4/5 cm right way round
1
Both axes labelled with quantity and unit
1
Plots to ½ sq (-1 each error or omission, minimum mark zero)
2
Line thickness less than 1 mm and no 'blob' plots
1
Well judged best fit single straight line
1
Large triangle used (> ½ line) clear on graph
1
Interpolation to ½ sq
1
(if large enough triangle present)
Value 1.38 – 1.48
1
kg and 2/3 sf
1 TOTAL 10
5
(a)
Two from: same volume of water same starting temperature of water same size/shape/type beakers same thickness/mass/volume of insulator same room temp
2
(b)
64°C (with unit)
1
(c)
B
1 TOTAL 4
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
June 2004
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME MAXIMUM MARK: 40
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/06 PHYSICS Alternative to Practical
Page 1
1
Mark Scheme PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
Syllabus 0625
(a)
0.63 – 0.65 (A) (strictly) 1.64 – 1.66 (V) (strictly) 3.32 (g) 150 (cm3) 8 (mm) or 0.8 (cm) All units correct
1 1 1 1 1 1
(b)
Remove electrodes from beaker A method to ensure gap remains the same (or other suitable suggestion e.g. measurement arrangement that the beaker sits on)
1 1
(c)
New variable (e.g. temperature, surface area / vol / size of electrodes, power source setting, depth of immersion)
1 TOTAL
2
Paper 6
9
(a)
All T values correct (0.34, 0.44, 0,49, 0.53, 0.60, 0.63) All T values to 2 sf OR all to 3sf
1 1
(b)
Graph: Scales suitable Scales labeled and with units Plots correct to ½ sq (-1 each error) Line judgement Line thickness (and small, neat plots)
1 1 2 1 1
(c)
T = 0.51 (s) correct answer only; NO ecf
1
(d)
Statement: NO Reason: line not through origin (or equivalent)
1 1
(allow mark if candidate describes str. line or constant gradient) TOTAL 3
11
(a)
Correct voltmeter Correct ammeter
1 1
(b)
R = 3.3, 2/3 sf Unit Ω or ohm
1 1
(c)
Circuit with correct parallel connections Ammeter and ONE voltmeter correct Variable resistor correct
1 1 1 TOTAL
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2004
7
Page 2
4
(a)
Mark Scheme PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
(b)
Syllabus 0625
x = 14 – 16mm y = 76.5 – 78.5 mm u = 75mm (ecf) and v = 390mm (ecf) x,y,u and v all correct and with no unit m = 5.2 (ecf) 2/3 sf and with no unit
1 1 1 1 1
Upside down
1
Precaution 1 Precaution 2 (e.g. repeats, use mark on block supporting lens to show centre of lens, place metre rule on bench to take readings or clamp rule in position, use a dark area, explanation of how to avoid parallax error, vertical screen/lens/both, centres of lens and object in line)
1 1
TOTAL 5
(a) (b)
(c)
(i) (ii)
Paper 6
8
22
1
14 (ecf) 64 units all correct
1 1 1
So that heat is not lost (wtte)
1 TOTAL
5
PAPER TOTAL = [40]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2004
November 2004
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME MAXIMUM MARK: 40
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/06 PHYSICS Alternative to Practical
Page 1
1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – November 2004
Syllabus 0625
Paper 6
(a) (i) 84
1
(ii) 50
1
both units correct
o
C and cm3 (or ml)
1
(b) (i) 75
1
(ii) 15 (ecf)
1
(iii) source of error e.g. thickness of string/extension of string/diagonal windings/identified parallax
1
(iv) improvement e.g. thinner string/inextensible string/parallel windings/ no gaps between windings/repeats and averages
1
(c) (i) 2.1 (cm) (ii) 31.5 or 32 cm 2 (2/3 sf and unit required) (d) time
1 1 1
another temperature
1 TOTAL 11
2
(a) (i) triangle seen
1
large triangle (> ½ line)
1
correct readings to ½ sq
1
G = 0.37 – 0.39
1
(ii) ρ = 2.63 (ecf)
1
2/3 sf and g/cm3
1
(b) increased accuracy
1 TOTAL 6
3
(a) (i) 2.15 – 2.25 (ii) 1.1 (+ both with correct unit, cm/mm) ecf (b) (i) all correct 1 values, 91.1, 81.1, 71.1, etc (ii) all correct T values, 1.93, 1.80, 1.67, 1.57, 1.41, 1.28 3/4sf for T
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
1 1 1 1 1
Page 2
Mark Scheme IGCSE – November 2004
Syllabus 0625
Paper 6
(c) Graph: scales suitable T start at 1.0s, T: 10sq : 0.2s 1: 10sq : 20cm; both labelled and correct way round
1
plots correct to ½ sq (-1 each error)
2
line judgement
1
line thickness
1
(d) 58 cm
1 TOTAL 11
4
(a) 4 pins at least one separation, separation > 5 cm
1
normal at 90o (by eye)
1
r = 19 – 21
1
i = 31 – 33
1
unit given for both
1 TOTAL 5
5
(a) (i) all R correct, 0.464, 0.976, 1.45, 1.88, 2.25 2/3 sf for R (ii) V, cm, Ω (b) (i) 18, 4.5 (ignore unit)
1 1 1 1
(ii) answer 4
1
(iii) 72
1
(c) micrometer
1 TOTAL 7
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
June 2005
GCSE
MARK SCHEME MAXIMUM MARK: 40
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/06 PHYSICS Alternative to Practical
Page 1
1
(a)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – June 2005
21oC (ignore unit)
Syllabus 0625
(20.9 acceptable)
Paper 6
[1]
(b) (i) t in oC and V in cm3 (ii) θ axis labelled, with unit scale 10oC to 1 cm or 0 - 100 in 25 sq steps or 20 - 80 in 10 sq steps correct plots to ½ sq (-1 each error) well judged best fit line
[1] [2] [1]
(c)
[1]
heat lost to surroundings or by evaporation
[1] [1]
[total: 8] 2
(a)
12 cm3 0.5 A 30 cm2 0.112 kg 600 N
[1] [1] [1] [1] [1]
(b)
repeats to spot anomalous results/to calculate average or series of different V and I, plot graph or switch on/off, prevent temp rise or low current, minimise temp rise or avoidance of parallax, action and reason or clean wires, resistance caused by dirt or tap meter, prevent sticking or check zero error, accuracy (in each case the reason must support the statement to gain the second mark)
[1] [1]
[total: 7] 3
(a)
l values 50, 75, 100
[1]
(b)
1.50 V shown correctly 0.375 A shown correctly
[1] [1]
(c)
2.5(3); 4.0(0); 5.2(0) all correct all to 2sf or all to 3sf
[1] [1]
(d)
Ω
[1]
(e)
R = 7.50 - 8.00 (or R = 6.60 - 7.49)
[2] [total: 8]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 2
4
Mark Scheme IGCSE – June 2005
Syllabus 0625
Paper 6
(a)
0.90; 0.78; 0.63 (-1 each error, ignore sf)
[2]
(b)
0.00225; 0.00260; 0.00315 all correct (ecf) all to 2sf or all to 3sf
[1] [1]
(c)
NO T/m increases as m decreases (wtte) - if statement (no) correct
[1] [1]
(d)
time n oscillations divide by n (n at least 3)
[1] [1]
(e)
lower spring fully compressed (wtte)
[1] [total: 9]
5
(a)
normal in correct position and at 90o (by eye)
[1]
(b)
i = 29 - 31
[1]
(c)
refracted ray correct side of normal and at angle < i r = 18 - 22
[1] [1]
(d)
ray displaced and parallel to incident ray (by eye) all correct lines drawn neatly, not too thick, and forming continuous path
[1] [1]
two pins on emerging ray, labelled Y and Z pins at least 3 cm apart
[1] [1]
(e)
[total: 8]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
MARK SCHEME for the November 2005 question paper
0625 Physics 0625/06
Paper 6 Maximum mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began. Any substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will be recorded in the published Report on the Examination. All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills demonstrated. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the Examination. The minimum marks in these components needed for various grades were previously published with these mark schemes, but are now instead included in the Report on the Examination for this session. •
CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the November 2005 question papers for most IGCSE and GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 1
1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – NOVEMBER 2005
Syllabus 0625
Paper 6
(a)
m in g and θ in degrees
1
(b)
θ not directly proportional to m as m increases θ decreases
1 1
(c)
clear in words or diagram that 'centre point' of protractor is at point where bottom edge of rule meets protractor and 0 – 180 line is horizontal similarly clear how 'dead space' is dealt with, e.g. protractor stuck to edge of bench with 0 – 180 line at top of bench level OR rule placed on block that is same height as 'dead space'
(d)
words or diagram to show rule at end of metre rule to measure height above bench level clear that rule is vertical (e.g. use set square) OR clamped at constant angle
1 1 1 1 TOTAL 7
2
(a)
correct symbols for resistor, voltmeter and ammeter correct connections between resistors AB and BC in series with CD in parallel with both voltmeter and ammeter correctly positioned
1 1 1
(b)
I in A, V in V, R in Ω 1.98 or 2.0; 4.00 or 4.0; 1.06 or 1.1 all to 2 sf or 3 sf
1 1 1
(c)
5.9Ω – 6.1Ω resistance proportional to length/ doubling length, doubled resistance/ 3 x length will have 3 x resistance/ wtte
1
1 TOTAL 8
3
(a)
θ in oC, t in s
(b) & (c) θ axis labelled scale starts at 40 oC and 2 cm to 10 oC plots correct to ½ sq (–1 each error) well judged best fit curves lines not too thick (d)
Two from: e.g. use a lid insulate the bottom of the beaker use a container that is a good conductor (metal)
1 1 1 2 1 1
2 TOTAL 9
4
(a)
normal in correct position and at 90o (by eye)
1
(b)
9.9 – 10.2 cm
1
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
Page 2
Mark Scheme IGCSE – NOVEMBER 2005
Syllabus 0625
Paper 6
(c)
incident ray drawn in correctly
1
(d)
27o (± 2o)
1
(e)
2.0 (or correct from candidates x value) 2 or 3 sf and no unit
1 1
(f)
X on incident ray close to mirror Y and Z on reflected ray Y – Z distance at least 5 cm i = r (by eye)
1 1 1 1 TOTAL 10
5
(a)
1, 2 and 3 (–1 each error or omission)
2
(b)
2 and 3 (–1 each error or omission)
2
(c)
time a number (n) oscillations divide time by n
1 1 TOTAL 6
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2006 question paper
0625 PHYSICS 0625/06
Paper 6, maximum raw mark 40
These mark schemes are published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of the examination. They show the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks. They do not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began. Any substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will be recorded in the published Report on the Examination. All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills demonstrated. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the Examination. The minimum marks in these components needed for various grades were previously published with these mark schemes, but are now instead included in the Report on the Examination for this session. •
CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2006 question papers for most IGCSE and GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 1
1
(a) (i) (ii) (b) (i) (ii)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2006
Syllabus 0625
Paper 06
1.6 (cm) 16 (mm)
[1]
0.16 (cm) 1.6 (mm) both in cm (or mm)
[1] [1]
1 = 5.8 cm and w = 6.0 cm (58 mm, 60 mm)
[1]
V = 5.568 (or 5.57) V in cm3 (or mm3)
[1] [1]
(c) d = 0.233 (2/3 sf) d in g/cm3 (or g/mm3)
[1] [1]
(d) Va = 7/8/9/10 cm3
[1] TOTAL 9
2
(a) correct ammeter and voltmeter symbols correct power source, variable resistor and lamp symbols correct circuit
[1] [1] [1]
(b) (i)
A; V; Ω
[1]
5.8 or 5.79 or 5.792; 2.9 or 2.89 or 2.889 consistent 2/3 sf
[1] [1]
(ii)
TOTAL 6 3
(a) All lines present and neat, a = 1.5 cm
[1]
(iv)
b = 4.3 cm
[1]
(iv)
FI = 4.3 cm (or cand's a value)
[1]
(v)
IJ meets NN' at right angle (by eye)
[1]
(vi)
c correct to + 1 mm, 2.1 cm
[1]
(vii) n calculation correct 2/3 sf and no unit (1.4) (b) repeats and averages greater pin spacing
[1] [1] [1] [1] TOTAL 9
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2006
Page 2
4
(a) (i) (ii)
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2006
Syllabus 0625
Paper 06
24(oC)
[1]
6(oC); 4(oC) (ecf)
[1]
(b) Heat lost to surroundings round flame/to gauze/tripod
[1] [1]
(c) Variable resistor
[1] TOTAL 5
5
(a) description / diagram showing 2 equal heights from bench
[1]
(b) 1.11(1); 1.18(1.176); 1.25(0); 1.33(3); 1.43(1.428)
[1]
(c) (i)
Axes suitable and labelled, false origin as instructed Plots correct to ½ small sq
[1] [1]
(ii)
Well judged best fit line line suitably thin
[1] [1]
(iii)
triangle method seen More than ½ line used Gradient value correct
[1] [1] [1]
(d) Correct W value using cand's G 2/3 sf and in N
[1] [1] TOTAL 11
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2006
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2006 question paper
0625 PHYSICS 0625/06
Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began. All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills demonstrated. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination. The grade thresholds for various grades are published in the report on the examination for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses.
•
CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2006 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 2
1 (a) (b)
(c)
Mark Scheme IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006
Syllabus 0625
Paper 06
4.1 (cm)
[1]
(i)
4.9 (cm) both in correct unit
[1] [1]
(ii)
7.83(4) cm3
[1] [1]
(i)
7/7.0/7.1/7.2/7.3/7.4/7.5 (ecf: less than V by up to 10% with equivalent sf)
[1]
correct d value (0.84 – 0.90, no ecf) 1/2/3 sf and g/cm3
[1] [1]
(ii)
(ecf)
[Total: 8] 2 (a)
cm; s; s
[1]
(b)
1.835; 1.787; 1.753; 1.706; 1.672 (accept 3 sf) consistent sf (3/4)
[1] [1]
(c)
Axes suitable (plots occupy at least ½ grid) and labelled, false origin as instructed Plots correct to ½ small sq (–1 each error) Well judged best fit line line suitably thin
[1] [2] [1] [1]
(d)
No and not a straight line through the origin
[1]
(e)
greater accuracy (wtte)
[1] [Total: 10]
3 (a)
(b)
(i)
normal correct (by eye) (single, thin line)
[1]
(ii)
AG = 11.5 cm (+ 0.1)
[1]
(iii)
i = 26o/27o/28o (ignore unit)
[1]
(i)
CD pin separation > 5 cm
[1]
(ii)
bases pins may not be vertical
[1] [1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2006
Page 3
Mark Scheme IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006
Syllabus 0625
Paper 06
28oC value unit
[1] [1]
(b)
B smaller temp drop (OR neither, insignificant difference)
[1] [1]
(c)
any suitable insulator
[1]
(d)
Any 3 from initial temp volume of water size/shape of beaker room temp/draughts/simultaneous timings material of beaker beakers on same surface
[3]
4 (a)
[Total: 8] 5 (a)
correct symbols for ammeter and voltmeter correct symbols for variable resistor, lamp and resistor circuit correct
[1] [1] [1]
(b)
ammeter will show current/voltmeter shows reading
[1]
(c)
variable resistor
[1]
(d)
(i) (ii)
(e)
low current/increase R of variable resistor/ lower voltage/add another lamp
[1]
switch off between readings
[1]
A, more resistance in circuit
[1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2006
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2007 question paper
0625 PHYSICS 0625/06
Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began. All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills demonstrated. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
•
CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2007 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 2 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2007
Syllabus 0625
Paper 6
(a) θ1 = 23 unit oC correctly written
[1] [1]
(b) 19 (°C) ecf 34 (°C) ecf
[1] [1]
(c) (i) heat loss (to surroundings)
[1]
(ii) any two from: insulation / mat / foil lid speedier transfer repeats wait to record max temperature stirring include beaker in calculation
[2] [Total: 7]
2
(a) and (b) 6 d values correct values for d 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
[1] [1]
(c) h0 = 100mm (including unit, cm/m allowed)
[1]
(e) correct values for b 40, 35, 32, 28, 24, 20 (ecf)
[1]
(f) Graph: correct d axis labelled with symbol / unit plots to nearest ½ sq (-1 each error or omission) best fit straight line single line, thin and best fit
[1] [2] [1] [1]
(g) no line not through origin OR when b increases, d decreases OR negative gradient
[1]
(h) use of set square / protractor / spirit level / plumbline
[1] [Total: 11]
© UCLES 2007
Page 3 3
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2007
Syllabus 0625
Paper 6
(a) correct arithmetic for R values 7.92, 1.98 both R to 2sf OR both to 3sf all correct units: V, A, Ω
[1] [1] [1]
(b) final box (ecf) second R (or I) about ¼ of first
[1] [1]
(c) lamp symbol correct ammeter and voltmeter symbols correct correct parallel circuit (ONE ammeter and ONE voltmeter, no extra components, but accept switch if present, ignore power source or lack of)
[1] [1] [1] [Total: 8]
4
(a) correct arithmetic for f, 0.154, 0.144 (any sf) correct average f (0.149, ecf) average f to 2/3 sf correct unit for average f (m)
[1] [1] [1] [1]
(b) precautions: any two from: use darkened area (wtte) metre rule on bench or clamped object and lens same height from bench mark on lens holder to show position of lens centre take more readings choosing mid point between acceptable positions parallax, action and reason lens/screen perpendicular to bench
[2]
(c) inverted
[1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
Page 4 5
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2007
(a) weight / load / force / W / L / F length / l extension / e / x / (l – l0) units N, mm, mm
Syllabus 0625
Paper 6 [1] [1] [1] [1]
(b) any three from length of spring / l0 diameter/thickness of spring range of loads length of wire diameter / thickness of wire number of coils coil spacing do NOT allow ‘size’ or room temperature
[3] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2007 question paper
0625 PHYSICS 0625/06
Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began. All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills demonstrated. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
•
CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2007 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 2 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2007
Syllabus 0625
Paper 06
(a) 24
[1]
(b) s, °C 23, 1 (-1 each error)
[1] [2]
(c) (i)
[1]
reason consistent with results
(ii) Three from: room temp/draughts etc volume beaker liquid amount of stirring surface area
[3]
(d) lid
[1] [Total: 9]
2
(a) 8, 14, 20, 25, 34, 41 (-1 each error)
[2]
(b) (i) Graph: suitable scales labelled symbol/unit all plots to nearest ½ sq (-1 each error or omission) line thin and straight
[1] [2] [1]
(ii) correct value (29mm – 31mm)to nearest ½ sq. clear how obtained
[1] [1] [Total: 8]
3
(a) 0.41, 0.13, 0.14, 0.12(-1 each error) I in A at least once
[2] [1]
(b) statement (yes) Reason – correct within limits of experimental accuracy
[1]
(c) variable resistor/extra cell/variable power source/potential divider/potentiometer
[1]
(d) (i) correct arithmetic for R 3.90 (ecf) unit and 2/3 sf
[1] [1]
(ii) voltmeter correct position and symbol
[1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007
Page 3 4
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2007
(a) (i) x = 2.1, 2.2
Syllabus 0625
Paper 06 [1]
(ii) h = 6.5, 6.6 x and h with same unit
[1] [1]
(iii) correct arithmetic for n1.47 – 1.51 (ecf) 2/3 sf and no unit
[1] [1]
(b) two equal heights from bench (or other valid method)
[1] [Total: 6]
5
(a) (i) 50, 75/76
[1]
(ii) 25 (ecf) cm3 (at least once and not contradicted)
[1] [1]
(iii) density 4.36 (ecf)
[1]
(b) V2, V1 cm3(at least once and not contradicted) density g/cm3 5.68, 3.02 both to 2/3 sf
[1] [1] [1] [1]
(c) Same method, lots of grains
[1] [Total: 9]
© UCLES 2007
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2008 question paper
0625 PHYSICS 0625/06
Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began. All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills demonstrated. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
•
CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2008 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 2 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2008
(a) (i) cm, cm, g
Syllabus 0625
Paper 06 [1]
(ii) 49.66 (or 49.7), 49.50 (or 49.5), 50.05 (or 50.0) consistent significant figures (3 or 4)
[1] [1]
(b) clear explanation/diagram
[1]
(c) correct method value 49.7 (ignore a fourth significant figure) and allow ecf from (ii)
[1] [1]
(d) d = 1.8 (cm), t = 1.2 (cm) V = 3.05 (cm3) (ecf) ρ = 16.3 unit g/cm3, 2/3 significant figures (ecf)
[1] [1] [1] [Total: 9]
2
Table: (a) Units V, A, Ω (symbol/word) R values 1.11, 2.19, 5.05, 9.55 Consistent 2 or consistent 3 sig fig for R (b) (i) Yes (if within 10%) No (if not) Circuit 1 and circuit 2 compared (ii) limit current (so temperature not increased) OR switch off between readings OR check for zero error OR Repeats OR Parallax error explained OR Tapping meter
[1] [1] [1] [M1] [A1]
[1] [Total: 6]
3
Graph: Temperature axis labelled θ/°C Suitable scales (plots occupy at least ½ grid) Plots correct to nearest ½ square (–1 each error) Lines well judged curves Lines thin (b) Statement: larger surface area increases rate of cooling Justification: Correct reference to gradients of lines or readings
[1] [1] [2] [1] [1] [1] [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
Page 3 4
Mark Scheme IGCSE – May/June 2008
Syllabus 0625
Paper 06
Trace: (a) all lines present, thin, neat and in correct area normal at 90° (by eye) and EF at 30° to normal (by eye) line KJ to at least beyond P4
[1] [1] [1]
(b) (i) a = 12–13 (mm) no ecf
[1]
(ii) b = 40 (mm) no ecf a and b both with appropriate unit
[1] [1]
(c) (i) & (ii) c recorded and d = 44 (mm)
[1]
(iii) correct calculation of n, value 1.43 (ecf) 2/3 significant figures with no unit
[1] [1] [Total: 9]
5
(a) (i) triangle method used (whether or not shown on graph) Triangle using more than half line and position indicated on graph Expect G = 4.00–4.35 (but allow correct working from points read from beyond 1.0 on x axis) Expect g = 9.07–9.87 (ecf from G) (ii) greater accuracy/average value (b) (i) amplitude length (other possible correct responses shape/size of bob and number of swings) (ii) does not affect time
[1] [1] [1] [1] [1] [1] [1]
[1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2008 question paper
0625 PHYSICS 0625/06
Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began. All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills demonstrated. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
•
CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2008 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 2 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2008
Syllabus 0625
Paper 6
(a) view perpendicular to (or straight in front of rule)/use of set square
[1]
(b) (i) correct e1 value 3.1 and correct e2 value 2.4 e in cm
[1] [1]
(c) density 4.43 (ecf) 2/3 significant figures g/cm3
[1] [1] [1]
(d) e2 greater ρ greater (or identical to e2 answer) (ecf)
[1] [1] [Total: 8]
2
Diagram: correct symbols for ammeter and voltmeter correct symbols for resistor correct circuit arrangement
[1] [1] [1]
Table: units V, A (symbol/word)
[1]
(c) Prediction 1 Yes – close enough (or words to that effect) OR No – not close enough (or words to that effect) Prediction 2 Yes – approximately half (or words to that effect)
[1] [1]
Resistance at connections Internal resistance of source/other sensible suggestion
[1] [Total: 7]
3
Table θ in °C, V in cm3 correct V 0, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100
[1] [1]
Graph: axes labelled with symbol and unit axes suitable (e.g. not ‘3’ scale) and plots occupy more than ½ grid all plots correct (better than ½ sq) well judged, thin best fit line
[1] [1] [1] [1]
(c) 1. sensible comment about heat loss to the surroundings, e.g. use of insulation/lid 2. sensible comment about adding water in a regulated, timed flow (including smaller volumes/set time intervals/shorter intervals
[1] [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2008
Page 3 4
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2008
Syllabus 0625
Paper 6
(a) f = 14.9(4), or 15 correct unit for f
[1] [1]
(b) (i) xs = 5.0(cm) and ys = 5.2(cm)
[1]
(ii) factor of ×6 y = 31.2(cm) (ecf)
[1] [1]
(iii) 15.29, 15.3, 15 (ecf)
[1]
(iv) correct method 2 or 3 significant figures and correct unit average f 15.1 (correct answer only)
[1] [1] [1]
(c) inverted image
[1] [Total: 10]
5
(a) 0.7 N 6 cm3 1.4 s 4.0 N/cm2
[1] [1] [1] [1]
(b) (i) minimum current/turn down power supply/increase resistance switch off between readings/carry out without delay
[1] [1]
(ii) variable resistor/rheostat
[1] [Total: 7]
© UCLES 2008
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2009 question paper for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS 0625/06
Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
•
CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2009 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 2 1
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2009
Syllabus 0625
Paper 06
(a) d 2.5 (cm) x 14.5 (cm) diagram showing blocks correctly placed across the ends rule position (or distance) shown correctly
[1] [1] [1] [1]
(b) (i) Ve 71.1 - 71.2 (cm3) ecf allowed
[1]
(ii) measuring cylinder reading 56 (cm3)
[1]
(iii) ρ 2.05–2.08 (or 2.1) ecf allowed g/cm3 and 2 or 3 significant figures
[1] [1] [Total: 8]
2
(a) 87 (oC)
[1]
(b) s, oC, oC
[1]
(c) A ecf allowed [1] justified by reference to readings (up to 90s) with comparison of drops in temperatures (with numbers) given (ecf allowed) [1] (d) Any two from: starting temperature room temperature carry out at same time same thermometer (words to that effect) same position of thermometers same time intervals
[2] [Total: 6]
3
(a) R values 0.553, 1.55, 2.74, 3.74, 4.92 (2,3,4 or more significant figures) Consistent 3 or consistent 4 significant figures for final four entries
[1] [1]
(b) Graph: Axes labelled and scales suitable (must include origin) Plots correct to ½ square (–1 each error or omission) Well judged str. line taking account of all points and reaching an axis Thin line
[1] [2] [1] [1]
(c) Statement proportional (wtte) or as x increases, R increases Justification straight line through origin
[1] [1]
(d) Clear indication of method on graph Correct value to ½ square
[1] [1]
© UCLES 2009
Page 3
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2009
(e) low current/switch off between readings or add (variable) resistor/lamp or reduce voltage/power
Syllabus 0625
Paper 06
[1] [Total: 12]
4
(a) 4.0 (cm) 6.0 (cm)
[1] [1]
(b) 20, 30 ecf allowed f values 11.88 (11.9), 12.00 (12.0) f consistent 3 or more significant figures
[1] [1] [1]
(c) average f 11.9, 11.94, 11.95, 12.0, 12 (cm) ecf allowed 2/3 significant figures
[1] [1]
(h) Any two from use of darkened room slowly moving lens back and forth to get good image clamp rule or place on bench avoid parallax action given object/lens/screen perpendicular to bench object and lens same height from bench repeats
[2] [Total: 9]
5
(a) Q correct position with suitable number(s) Rule correctly tilted, and on bench (or arrow to indicate)
[1] [1]
(b) Any two from: Readings taken at either side/diameter of cylinder Position of mid point found Mark position of centre
[2]
(c) 34.5 cm
[1] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2009
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2009 question paper for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS 0625/06
Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
•
CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2009 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 2 1
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2009
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) d 0.5 cm or 5mm
Paper 06 [1]
(ii) x 10.0
[1]
(b) (i)–(iii) table: T 1.0, 0.95, 0.895 (0.90, 0.9), 0.84, 0.775 (0.78) T2 1.00, 0.903, 0.801, 0.706, 0.601 (if T correct)
[1] [1]
(c) graph: axes labelled scales suitable, plots occupying at least half grid plots all correct to ½ square well judged line thin line, 5 neat plots
[1] [1] [1] [1] [1]
(d) statement NO and not through origin/ inverse/negative gradient/ x increases, T2 decreases/ wtte
[1] [Total: 10]
2
(a) 91 (oC)
[1]
(b) t in s, both θ in oC
[1]
(c) statement B and justified by reference to readings
[1]
(d) any two from: same starting temperature/temperature of hot water constant room temperature/keep away from draughts/out of direct sunlight same time intervals
[2] [Total: 5]
3
(a)–(c) table: V, A, Ω V 1.8 I 0.25 R values 7.20, 3.46(3.5) consistent significant figures for R (2 or more)
[1] [1] [1] [1] [1]
(d) y 0.48, 0.49, 0.5 (ecf) 2/3 significant figures and no unit
[1] [1]
© UCLES 2009
Page 3
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2009
Syllabus 0625
(e) (i) correct symbols and circuit (ignore power source symbol)
Paper 06 [1]
(ii) voltmeter position correct
[1]
(iii) control current/voltage/resistance/speed of motor
[1] [Total: 10]
4
(a) f 14.95 + 0.05 (cm) unit to match number
[1] [1]
(b) more than one value shown d 6.5 + 0.1
[1] [1]
(c) t 0.85 + 0.05 (cm) d and t both with correct unit
[1] [1]
(d) diagram showing blocks correctly placed rule shown correctly touching both blocks
[1] [1]
(e) f 10.9 – 13.1 (cm) (or 109 – 131 (mm)) no, too far out to be explained by experimental inaccuracy (wtte)
[1] [1] [Total: 10]
5
(a) lens between object and screen (not mirror) lens at least 2 cm from object and screen metre rule on bench or clamped
[1] [1] [1]
(b) any two from: use of darkened room/brighter object slowly moving lens back and forth to obtain good image avoid parallax, action given lining up object and lens object and lens at same height from bench/object on principal axis repeats screen/lens perpendicular to bench mark centre of lens position on block
[2] [Total: 5]
© UCLES 2009
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2010 question paper for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS 0625/61
Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
•
CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2010 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 2
1
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2010
Syllabus 0625
Paper 61
(a)
(i) l = 29 (mm) and l = 31 (mm) (allow 2.9 cm, 3.1 cm) eA = 14 (mm) and eB = 15 (mm) (ecf) (ignore minus signs)
[1] [1]
(b)
(i) both l correct to (21.5 – 22) and 24
[1]
(ii) (6.5 – 7) and 8 (ecf)
[1]
(ignore minus signs)
(iii) eav = 7.5 (c.a.o.)
[1]
(c) statement matches readings (expect YES) justification matches statement and by reference to results (expect within limits of experimental accuracy, wtte) (d) any one of: avoidance of parallax error explained use of horizontal aid measuring to same point each time repeats wait for springs to stop moving
(ecf NO) [1] (too different, wtte) [1]
[1] [Total: 8]
2
(i) T1 correct 18
[1]
(ii) T2 correct 4 unit oC (either position and not contradicted)
[1] [1]
(b) graph: y-axis labelled plots occupying at least half of grid on suitable scale all plots correct to ½ square well judged single, smooth curve line, not ‘point-to-point’ thin line
[1] [1] [1] [1] [1]
(a)
(c)
(i) T2 < T1 (wtte)
[1]
(ii) decreasing gradient (wtte)
[1] [Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010
Page 3 3
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2010
Syllabus 0625
Paper 61
(a) correct symbol correct position
[1] [1]
(b) table: V / l values correct 8.35, 3.58, 2.08, 1.39, 1.00 consistent 2 or 3 significant figures unit V/m
[1] [1] [1]
(c) statement matches readings (expect NO) justification matches statement and by reference to results V / l not constant, as l increases V decreases
[1] [1]
(d) any one of: check for zero error avoidance of parallax error explained switch off between readings repeats
[1] [Total: 8]
4
(a)
(i) pins at least 5 cm apart
[1]
(ii) i = 30
[1]
(iii) r1 = 31
[1]
(b) (i) & (ii) both lines correct area
[1]
(iii)–(v) r2 correct to + 1o with unit difference = 1 or –1 (c.a.o.) (c) statement matches result (expect YES) justification matches statement and by reference to result (expect within limits of experimental accuracy, wtte)
[1] [1] (ecf NO) [1] (too different, wtte) [1] [Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010
Page 4
5
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2010
Syllabus 0625
Paper 61
(a) column 1: d, m (or in words) columns 2 and 3: t, T (or in words) columns 2 and 3: s, s (or in words)
[1] [1] [1]
(b) accuracy/reducing uncertainty/sensible comment on reaction time
[1]
(c)
(i) at least three correct values entered in table 1.66, 1.52, 1.40, 1.28, 1.17 (at least 2 significant figures) c.a.o
[1]
(ii) statement matches result (expect NO) AND justification matches statement and by reference to result (expect decreasing, not equal, not constant, different, changing, wtte) allow ecf from (i)
[1] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS 0625/61
Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
•
CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2010 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
om .c
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2010 question paper
s er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
Page 2 1
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2010
Syllabus 0625
Paper 61
(a) correct 1/d values 0.0222, 0.0294, 0.0370, 0.0444, 0.0518 all to 2 significant figures or all to 3 consistent significant figures
[1] [1]
(b) graph: axes suitable and labelled all plots correct to ½ small square good line judgement (position) thin line, single, no blobs (quality)
[1] [1] [1] [1]
(c) gradient by triangle method using at least ½ candidate’s line clear, on graph, how obtained
[1] [1]
(d) z value 0.9 – 2.5 2 or 3 significant figures and unit cm given
[1] [1] [Total: 10]
2
(a) θr 26 (b)
(i) s and °C
[1] in both tables
[1]
(ii) at least 300s and given to nearest 10s or in mins
[1]
(c) Table 2.2 (heating) justified by two temperature differences compared, must see 14 and 44/56 OR 74 to 60 and 25 to 69/81
[1]
(d) any two from: same starting temperature constant room temperature/avoid draughts/same place same time intervals same thermometer (wtte) same mass/amount/volume of water same beaker lid always used
[2] [Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
Page 3 3
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2010
Syllabus 0625
Paper 61
(a) 0.3 – 0.31
[1]
(b) Ω, A 10.1
[1] [1]
(c) correct calculation of 0.5Io shown (ecf) 10(Ω)
[1] [1]
(d) diagram: resistors in parallel voltmeter symbol voltmeter position
[1] [1] [1] [Total 8]
4
(a) (i) – (iii) EF extended correctly and neat P3P4 line drawn correctly and neat G labelled P1 and P2 at least 5cm apart (iv) and (v) 40 – 42 (θ – 2i) correct (b)
(ecf) (ecf)
[1] [1] [1] [1] [1] [1]
o
(i) 2 and unit ( ) present at least once
[1]
(ii) yes (or No, ecf) reference to ‘within limits of experimental accuracy’ (or close enough or wtte)
[1]
(c) no concern about pins being vertical (or wtte)
[1] [1] [Total: 10]
5
(a) any three from: mass/volume/amount of water room temperature temperature of water amount of stirring size/shape of beaker temperature of ice cube number/mass/size of cubes
[3]
(b) any three from: stopclock: balance: thermometer: measuring cylinder:
[3]
time mass temperature volume (of water)
[Total 6] © UCLES 2010
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS 0625/61
Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2011 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
om .c
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2011 question paper
s er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
Page 2 1.
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2011
Syllabus 0625
Paper 61
(a) Three straight lines in correct positions All lines continuous, straight, neat and thin
[1] [1]
(b) a = 4.2 – 4.4 (cm) no ecf Well-judged position in triangle Line correctly drawn
[1] [1] [1]
(c) Viewing line directly in front of card (owtte)
[1] [Total: 6]
2.
(a) 23 (ºC)
[1]
(b) t in s, θ in ºC
[1]
T1= 14 T2 = 1
[1] [1]
(c) Graph: Axes the right way round, both labelled with quantity, ignore unit Use of the scale temperature 50 – 80 and time 0 – 200 or 0 – 250, using the whole grid All seven plots correct to ½ small square Good line judgement Thin line
[1] [1] [1] [1] [1]
(d) Greater rate of cooling in first 30 s (owtte) ecf possible Decreasing slope of graph (owtte) ecf possible
[1] [1] [Total: 11]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Page 3 3.
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2011
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) 5.4 or 5.43 or 5.429 AND 5.9 or 5.94 or 5.938 R values both to 2 significant figures OR both to 3 significant figures, in table (iii) V, A , Ω
Paper 61 [1] [1] [1]
(b) (i) Correct series circuit Correct symbols for ammeter, voltmeter and lamps (ii) RT = 8.26(Ω)
[1] [1] [1]
(c) Statement: expect No (ecf available for Yes) Outside limits of experimental accuracy (owtte)
[1] [1]
(d) Brightness changes (owtte)
[1] [Total: 9]
4.
(a) Normal in centre at 90o to MR CD drawn correctly Both neat and thin
[1] [1] [1]
(b) (i) CN drawn correctly
[1]
(ii) i = 23(o) ± 1(o) (ecf allowed)
[1]
(c) (i) Line through P3 and P4 correct r = 21(o) ± 1(o)
[1] [1]
(d) Any two: Thickness of lines Thickness of mirror Protractor can only be read to + 1o OR protractors are not that precise (owtte) Thickness of pins
[2] [Total: 9]
5.
1.5 cm 100 cm3 0.07 m2 0.12 A 23 cm
[1] [1] [1] [1] [1] [Total: 5]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Page 4
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2011
Syllabus 0625
Abbreviations in the mark scheme: ecf = error carried forward. owtte = or words to that effect. c.a.o. = correct answer only
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Paper 61
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS 0625/61
Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2011 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
om .c
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2011 question paper
s er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
Page 2 1
(a) graph: axes: scale: plots: line:
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
Paper 61
the right way round, labelled x and y with unit cm both 10 small squares = 2 cm (either or both 20 small squares = 5 cm also acceptable) all correct to ½ small square well-judged, best-fit, straight, thin, continuous line
[1] [1] [1] [1]
(b) correct triangle method using at least ½ candidate’s line, with method clearly indicated on graph G = 0.94 – 1.00, no ecf
[1] [1]
(c) 1.0/(candidate’s G) calculation correct, 2 or 3 significant figures and unit N
[1]
(d) (i) (where rule) balances on pivot o.w.t.t.e.
[1]
(ii) take readings from 49.7 OR adjust rule by adding weight until it balances at 50.0 cm mark
[1] [Total: 9]
2
(a) θc = 24 o C
[1] [1]
(b) θav = 55 (oC) ecf from (a)
[1]
(c) any two from: stirring waiting for temperature (to stabilise) view thermometer at right angles o.w.t.t.e.
[2]
(d) heat loss (to surroundings) o.w.t.t.e.
[1]
(e) one from: lagging beakers o.w.t.t.e. use of lid swifter transfer of water
[1]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Page 3
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
(f) one from: amount of stirring o.w.t.t.e. hot water temperature cold water temperature room temperature o.w.t.t.e. transfer time
Paper 61
[1] [Total: 8]
3
(a) (i) 0.27 (A)
[1]
(ii) expect YES (ecf: no) expect close enough / within limits of experimental accuracy o.w.t.t.e. ecf: beyond limits of experimental accuracy o.w.t.t.e.
[1] [1]
(b) vary/control current/voltage
[1]
(c) (i) voltmeter symbol correct and correctly connected across all three resistors
[1]
(ii) 2.2 (V)
[1]
(iii) R correctly evaluated ecf from (ii) 2 or 3 significant figures and unit Ω
[1] [1] [Total: 8]
4
(a) (i) normal at 90o, at centre of MR and crossing MR (ii) AB is a continuous line from B, 8 cm long AB is at 40o to normal (b) (i) continuous, thin line that reaches normal and at least touches P2 and P3 dots (ii) r = 40 – 43(o) (no ecf) (c) any two from: thickness of lines thickness of protractor o.w.t.t.e. / accuracy of reading protractor thickness of pins / pin holes accept thickness of mirror / glass in front of mirror (d) ticks in boxes 1, 3, 5 (1 mark each) (if more than 3 ticks, –1 for each tick in a wrong box to minimum of 0)
[1] [1] [1] [1] [1]
[2]
[3] [Total: 10]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
Page 4 5
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – October/November 2011
Syllabus 0625
Paper 61
(a) 200 m or more with unit
[1]
(b) tape measure, trundle wheel or gps device
[1]
(c) correct working seen 345.67 (accept 345.66, 345, 346, 350)
[1] [1]
(d) (No), readings (time or distance) too inaccurate
[1] [Total: 5]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS 0625/61
Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2012 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
om .c
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2012 question paper
s er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
Page 2 1
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 61
(a) 50–250 g (or 0.05–0.25 kg) correct unit required
[1]
(b) Centre of mass marked close to centre of cylinder Clear indication of how centre of mass is placed above the 90.0 cm mark
[1] [1]
(c) Rule unlikely to exactly balance/ difficult to balance OR rule could slide on pivot OR mass could slide OR centre of mass of rule not at 50.0 cm mark OR rule not uniform1 Do not accept comments about poor/careless technique (d) Repeat readings (wtte) OR a reference to finding exact position of centre of mass of metre rule OR a reference to dealing with centre of mass of rule not being at 50.0 cm mark (e) Good/ fine/ reasonable/ same to 3 significant figures OR Within limits of experimental accuracy (wtte) OR Too many significant figures in experimental result
[1] [1]
[1] [Total: 6]
2
(a) θR = 22(°C)
[1]
(b) Table: mm, °C Correct d values 100, 80, 60, 40, 20, 10
[1] [1]
(c) Temperature difference = 3(°C), higher
[1]
(d) Draughts Room temperature/humidity
[1] [1]
(e) One from: Relevant avoidance of parallax explained, in using rule or thermometer Waiting time between readings Wait for steady thermometer reading Allow lamp to cool/warm up Repeats and average
[1] [Total: 7]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 3 3
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
(a) (i) (cm, V, A)
Paper 61 [no mark awarded]
(ii) Graph: Axes correctly labelled with quantity and unit and correct way around Suitable scales – plots occupy at least half the grid All plots correct to ½ small square Good line judgement (ecf for curve if d plotted) Single, thin, continuous line
[1] [1] [1] [1] [1]
(iii) Triangle using at least half of candidate’s line clearly indicated on graph Evidence of subtraction seen G value 1.5 when rounded to 2 significant figures
[1] [1] [1]
(b) Same as G, rounded to 2 or 3 significant figures unit Ω/ohms
[1] [1] [Total: 10]
4
(a) d in range 79 to 80 (mm), 7.9 to 8.0 (cm) x = 61 (mm) and consistent correct unit for both (mm or cm) D = 80 (cm), X = 61 (cm) ecf from (i) and (ii)
[1] [1] [1]
(b) f = 14.5(cm) allow ecf from (a) 2 or 3 significant figures and correct unit
[1] [1]
(c) Correct statement for results (expect Yes or wtte) Idea of within (or beyond) experimental accuracy or wtte Can only score if previous mark is scored
[1] [1]
(d) Any one from: Use of darkened room How to avoid parallax when taking readings Movement of lens back and forth to obtain clearest image Mark lens holder to show position of centre of lens Metre rule clamped or on bench Object, lens and screen all perpendicular to bench Object and lens same height above bench
[1] [Total: 8]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 4 5
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version IGCSE – May/June 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 61
(a) V1 = 74 Line of sight perpendicular to scale Perpendicular line continues to measuring cylinder at surface level
[1] [1] [1]
(b) V2 = 81, VG = 7 (ecf allowed) All volumes in cm3, unit given at least once, not contradicted
[1] [1]
(c) (V3 – V1) = 24, VA = 17 (ecf allowed)
[1]
(d) Any three from: VA: Finger increases V3 / tube not pushed in far enough Some water in test-tube/air is compressed VW: Water remaining in tube Water remaining in measuring cylinder Tube overfilled, wtte (surface tension effect) Either VA or VW (accept only once): Measuring cylinder readings not very sensitive Subtraction produces large percentage uncertainty
[3]
[Total: 9]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012
w
w ap eP
m
e tr .X
w
CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
0625 PHYSICS 0625/61
Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers. Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2012 series for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
om .c
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2012 series
s er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
Page 2 1
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 61
(a) d0 = 21 (mm)
[1]
(b) Do = 210 (mm) or 10 × candidate’s (a)
[1]
(c) L values 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0 e values 1.0, 9.0, 21.0, 29.0, 40.0
[1] [1]
(d) Graph: Axes correctly labelled with quantity and unit and correct way around Suitable scales All plots correct to ½ small square Good line judgement and a single, thin, continuous line
[1] [1] [1]
(e) Triangle method used and shown on the graph Using at least half of line
[1] [1]
(f) Any one from: Always measure from same point on spring (top or bottom of ring) Wait for spring/weight to stop bouncing Use of horizontal aid/ensure ruler is vertical Bench surface not uniform
[1] [Total: 11]
2
(a) θR = 24(°C)
[1]
(b) (i) Table: s, °C, °C
[1]
(ii) About the same Justified with reference to numbers in table (c) Any two from: Volumes of water Room temperature/draughts Same beaker Initial water temperature
[1] [1]
[2] [Total: 6]
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 3 3
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 61
(a) Correct symbols for ammeter, voltmeter and lamps Ammeter and voltmeter in correct positions Correct parallel circuit
[1] [1] [1]
(b) (i) and (ii) VA = 1.9(V) RA = 2.9(2) (Ω) Units V and Ω
[1] [1]
(iii) Pointer at correct position (0.65)
[1]
(c) No mark awarded (d) Statement matches readings (expect YES) Justified with idea of experimental inaccuracy (expect ‘close enough’, owtte)
[1] [1] [Total: 8]
4
(a) Trace: Normal at 90° in correct position Angle of incidence = 30° ( ± 2°)
[1] [1]
(b) P1P2 distance [ 5.0 cm P3P4 line and line GE correctly and neatly drawn
[1] [1]
(c) (i) r = 18 or 19 or 20
[1]
(ii) i/r value correct
[1]
(d) (i) i/r value 1.54 and both i/r values with no unit and to 2 or 3 significant figures (ii) Idea of within (or beyond) limits of experimental accuracy
[1] [1] [Total: 8]
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Page 4 5
Mark Scheme IGCSE – October/November 2012
Syllabus 0625
Paper 61
(a) Measuring cylinder Tape measure Newtonmeter (spring balance) Electronic balance Manometer 1 mark each
[5]
(b) (i) Viewing scale perpendicularly (owtte) (ii) Any one from: Moving lens back and forth Dark area (owtte) Object and lens at same height from bench Object lens and screen at right angles to bench
[1]
[1] [Total: 7]
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
View more...
Comments
